PROJECT MANUAL - BidNet

PROJECT MANUAL

GOVERNMENT OF THE VIRGIN ISLANDS

VIRGIN ISLANDS SPORTS PARKS AND RECREATION

Marley Beach Waterfront Renovations Phase 1

ST. CROIX, U.S. VIRGIN ISLANDS

Honorable Commissioner Derek Gabriel

GOVERNMENT OF THE UNITED STATES VIRGIN ISLANDS

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

8244 SUBBASE

ST. THOMAS, VIRGIN ISLANDS 00802

FOR

Honorable Honorable Calvert A. White GOVERNMENT OF THE UNITED STATES VIRGIN ISLANDS

VIRGIN ISLANDS SPORTS PARKS AND RECREATION 8201 SUBBASE SUIT 2

ST. THOMAS, V.I. 00802

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

Section No. Section Title

0 Index

1 Scope of Work

2 Bid Schedule

3 Photographs

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section No. Section Title 01021 General Conditions And Mobilization

01039 Coordination Meetings

01045 Cutting And Patching

01095 Reference Standards And Definitions

01200 Price And Payment Procedures

01300 Submittals

01325 Construction Progress Schedule 01400 Quality Control

01600 Material And Equipment Handling

01620 Transportation And Handling

01630 Storage And Protection

01700 Contract Closeout 01710 Cleanup 01730 Guarantees And Warranties

01780 Closeout Submittals

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS


022820 Termite Control

024115 Structure Demolition

024119 Selective Demolition

028500 Mold Remediation

028510 Lead and Asbestos Materials Mitigation

DIVISION 05 – METALS


05100 Structural Steel

05300 Steel Decking

05300 Cols Formed Metal Framing

05500 Miscellaneous Metal Work

05500 Manhole Frames and Covers

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES


092050 Plaster Trim And Accessories

092116.23 Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies

092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing

092400 Cement Plastering

092900 Gypsum Board

093013 Ceramic Tiling

095113 Acoustical Panel Ceiling

095426 Suspended Wood Ceilings

096513 Resilient Base and Accessories

096519 Resilient Tile Flooring

099113 Exterior Painting

099123 Interior Painting

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL


260500 Basic Electrical Materials And Methods

260510 Common Work Results For Electrical

260519 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables

260526 Grounding And Bonding For Electrical

260529 Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems

260533 Raceway And Boxes For Electrical Systems

260543 Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems

260548 Vibration And Seismic Controls For Electrical Systems

260553 Identification For Electrical Systems

260923 Lighting Control Devices

262416 Panel Boards

262713 Electricity Metering

262726 Wiring Devices

262813 Fuses

262816 Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers

263213 Engine Generators

263600 Transfer Switches

264113 Lightning Protection For Structures

264313 Transient-Voltage Suppression For Low-Voltage Electrical Power

265100 Interior Lighting

265151 Interior Lighting

265600 Exterior Lighting

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK


312110 Clearing and Grubbing

312200 Earthwork

312270 Erosion Control

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

Section No. Section Title 323100 Decorative Metal Fences And Gates

323100 Ornamental Security Fencing And Gates

323113 Chain Link Fence And Gates

323119 Impasse II Security Steel Fence System, Ornamental Pale

323129 Wood Gates

323132 Wood Composite Fences and Gates

328000 Irrigation Systems

32900 Planting

32911 Soil Preparation

329213 Hydromulching

32920 Turf and Grasses

32930 Plants

SCOPE OF WORK

OBJECTIVE The beach known as Marley Beach is located on the west side of the island of St. Croix at West End Bay. The beach and waterfront area sits on Plot 37-AA Two Brothers. The plot consists of approximately 2.7 acres of which approximately 1.16 acres is the beach area. The proposed Marley Waterfront Repair Project will be executed in two (2) phases. Phase 1 consist of miscellaneous repairs to the existing built-up waterfront area on 1.2 acres of land. Phase 2 consist of soil stabilization and minor repairs to the remaining area on 0.34 acres. SCOPE The scope of work for the renovations in Phase 1 of the proposed project is the repair to lighting fixtures, concrete picnic benches, columns and chains along the warfront promenade. New handrails will be installed to the existing elevated concrete surfaces and the damaged concrete steps and retaining walls will be repaired and patched. The existing sidewalk will be demolished and replaced. See the attached Bid Schedule and photographs for more scope of work details. The proposed project has a minimal potential of impacting environmental resources, or ambient water quality during construction. As necessary, sedimentation and erosion control measures must be implemented during construction to ensure that no environmental impacts occur. The proposed project occurs only within previously disturbed areas and excavation of historical or cultural resources is not anticipated. Project activities must stop if historic remains or resources are encountered, and SHPO must be contacted to determine the best course of action. SITE LOCATION

1. Marley Beach Waterfront – St. Croix NOTES

1. All work shall be done in accordance with the Plans, Manufactures Specifications, Bid Schedule, U.S. Virgin Islands Building Code, International Building Code, Federal Projects Manual FP14, Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices 2009 and the direction of the Project Architect/ Engineer in writing.

2. Prior to the commencement of Work by Contractor, contractor will have all applicable bonds, licenses, sureties and permits in place prior to the commencement of work.

3. Contractor shall be exclusively responsible for the safety, security, and condition of all of materials and equipment and personal stored/working on the construction site, and no such stored or loose materials shall be deemed a part of the Project until after the same have been properly installed by the Contractor in the Project, accepted and paid for by the Contractor. Contractor shall exclusively bear the risk of loss of such stored materials prior to proper installation even if the stored material has been paid for by the contractor.

4. Contractor shall be responsible for any damages done to material, equipment or property by its workforce, subcontractors, or vendors.

5. Not later than the time of delivery of materials to the job site, Contractor shall provide all “materials safety data sheets (MSDS)” pertaining to materials being brought onto the site. Contractor further agrees that it shall comply with all local, federal laws, ordinances and regulations in connection with the Contractor's Work including, but -not limited to OSHA Standards, Rules and Regulations.

6. During the term of this Agreement, Contractor shall pay particular attention to the daily clean up and removal of all trash and rubbish generated on the job site by the Contractor or its vendors. Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of all rubbish and trash it has generated, from its work area on a daily basis and place all such rubbish and trash in waste containers located throughout the Project.

7. Upon the completion of the Contractor's Work, and when practical, the Contractor shall furnish the User Agency with a warranty acceptable in all respects to the User Agency to repair and/or -replace at the Contractor's sole expense all defects in materials and labor in the Contractor's Work appearing or occurring within one (1) year after the issuance of the certificate of occupancy of the premises upon which Subcontractor's Work is performed. Additionally, in the event the manufacturer of any material supplied by the Contractor to the Project exceeds the term of the Subcontractor's letter of credit or warranty, The Contractor shall further assign and deliver to the User Agency said manufacturer's warranty. Performance of warranty repair work and replacement of materials for defects occurring within the warranty period shall be the Contractor's sole and exclusive responsibility at the Contractor's sole and exclusive expense.

8. Any Work that is in addition to the work required by this Subcontract shall be construed as extra work ("EXTRA WORK"). Extra Work will be subject to prior written approval by the Department of Public Works and shall be granted or denied prior to the execution of any such Extra Work. Approved Extra Work shall be subject to the execution of a change order signed by an authorized representative of the Contractor and the Owner or Contractor which shall be executed prior to the furnishing of such materials or performance of such labor or both. Any Extra Work not so authorized in advance shall be performed or furnished at the sole expense of the Contractor, and neither the Contractor nor the Owner shall be liable or responsible to the Contractor for the payment of any such Extra Work. Extra work must be approved before it is done.

9. All materials supplied or used by the Contractor in the performance of its Work shall be as specified and approved by the Department of Public Works. Contractor shall submit all such materials to the Department of Public Works for approval prior to the installation thereof on the premises unless otherwise agreed or waived by the Department of Public Works in writing. All work and materials will be per the plans and specifications provided unless authorized in writing prior to starting the work.

10. If job is subject to inclement weather, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to keep track of these days and present to the Department of Public Works on a weekly basis to compare against their daily log. Days that are in agreement, will be placed in a change order format and will be presented with scheduled monthly payment.

11. The Contractor is contracted to provide complete construction, including code requirements, and workmanship of equal or better finishes based on the VI Building Code and to the intent of the contract documents. It is common and known that items of importance are sometimes overlooked in drawings and in specifications. If missing items would normally be included in a particular scope of work, or required for the completion of a particular trades work, then it is included in this contract and not an opportunity for change order work and be completed in all respects for the use intended as a part of this general cope.

12. Contractor agrees to furnish all labor, supervision, fasteners, tools, taxes, equipment, fuel fees, licenses, insurance and all other costs as required to perform all work covered in the construction scope of the applicable division that this Contractor represents itself as having expert knowledge in and regular engagement with Contractor shall call and cause all required inspections for his/her own work and convey all inspection results to the DPW Inspector/Engineer. If unsatisfactory results are discovered, this Contractor will immediately suspend its construction activities until such work is corrected and inspections are passed.

13. Upon reward of this contract, Contractor shall perform due diligence and shall prepare all necessary basic diagrams or layouts outlining his/her concerns. If value engineering or alterations to the plans/specifications is involved, such shall be presented to the Department of Public Works prior to the execution of the contract.

14. Contractor shall commence the work to be performed per the contract documents in accordance to the terms of this agreement commencing on the date specified and provided by the User Agency and shall complete all work by the finish date specified on the Construction Schedule or as adjusted from time to time by the Department of Public Works.

15. Under NO CIRCUMSTANCES will there be additional money granted for extra work without previous written authorization and executed change order from the User Agency.

16. Contractor shall be completely responsible and provide equipment for receiving, unloading, taking inventory, storing, protecting and signing for all materials installed under this agreement.

17. Contractor shall verify all detail and dimensions for fit of work in all regards.

18. Contractor acknowledges that he will provide the necessary manpower, required to maintain the project schedule in all phases of his/her work to include any required overtime.

19. Contractor will keep onsite material stockpiles and building workspace stockpiles to a minimum, organized and out of the way so as not to impede any other trades, and as directed by the Construction Manager.

20. Contractor is responsible for loss, theft and damage of all materials installed or otherwise until such material has been installed, approved and paid for by Contractor.

21. Contractor reserves the right, to supplement work after proper notification of non-performance has been given.

22. Contractor will furnish the names of the Subcontractors it introduces to the project.

23. Contractor will disclose the amounts of money owed to each subcontractor and submit proper lien waivers.

24. Contractor shall make himself/herself available for either weekly or biweekly meetings (as mutually agreed upon with the Department of Public Works) to discuss project progress/concerns. Any problems deemed an emergency shall be IMMEDIATELY made known to the Department of Public Works. The undersigned Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, machinery, material and miscellaneous items for the completion of the Project as outlined in the Contact Drawings, Specifications and Bid Schedule.

Photographs

By Department of Public Works For Department of Sports, Parks, & Recreation

Marley Beach Waterfront Repairs

Location Plan


Page 2

Item B: Concrete Benches

Item A: Concrete Table and 4-seat set and Benches


Page 3

Item C: Demo Replace Existing Columns


Page 4

Item D: Remove and Replace Sidewalks


Page 5

Item E: Remove and replace all 5/8" diameter hot dip galvanized stud link chain

Match Similar Style


Page 6

Item F: Handrails Along Sidewalk near Roadway


Page 7

Item G: Handrails Along Steps leading to lookout


Page 8

Item G: Handrails Along Steps leading to lookout


Page 9

Item H: Install guard rail adjacent to roadway


Page 10

Item I & J:

Remove & Replace with LED Light Fixture


Page 11

Item K: Repair Concrete Steps two-sided


Page 12

Item L: Repair spalled concrete at top of retainer wall.


Page 13

Item M: Repair spalled concrete at face of retainer wall.


Page 14

Item N: Purchase and install standalone hand sanitizing/hand washing stations

POLYJOHN

SKU: C1966729 OR EQUAL

MPN : BRA1-1000 Weight : 70.0 lb

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

SECTION 01039-COORDINATION AND MEETINGS DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS,

Page 1 of 4

PART 1 - GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES

Coordination and project conditions.

Field engineering.

Preconstruction meeting.

Site mobilization meeting.

Progress meeting.

Pre-installation meetings.

Equipment electrical characteristics and components.

Examination.

Preparation.

Cutting and Patching.

Alteration project procedures.

RELATED SECTIONS (NOT USED)

COORDINATION AND PROJECT CONDITIONS

Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various sections of the Specifications to

ensure an efficient and orderly sequence of construction elements.

Verify all existing utility locations.

FIELD ENGINEERING

Contractor shall locate and protect all survey control and reference points, and shall accurately

replace and have verified by the Engineer any such point, which is damaged or moved, at his

own expense.

Control datum for survey is as that shown on Drawings. The survey shall establish certain

reference points and benchmarks in the immediate vicinity of the work areas. The Contractor

shall lay out all additional lines and grades and otherwise do all layout and measurements

necessary for the proper completion of the work.

Verify setbacks and easements; confirm drawings dimensions and elevations.

Provide field engineering services. Establish elevations, lines, and levels, utilizing recognized

engineering survey practices.


Page 2 of 4

The Contractor shall furnish assistance to the Engineer as requested to check the layout or

otherwise control the work. Such assistance shall be understood to include the provision of

suitable manpower to assist the Engineer in taping measurements, holding a survey rod for

checking grades and the like.

The Engineer reserves the right to inspect or check any of this work, and the Contractor shall

not claim added compensation for any delay occasioned by required as a result of the Engineer's

inspections.

PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

Owner will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award.

Attendance Required:

Owner, Owner’s Construction Representative, Designer, and Contractor.

Agenda:

1. Submission of list of testing agency and other parties providing services on the project.

2. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, and substitutions, applications for

payments, pricing request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures.

3. Procedures for layout of the project, establishing controls, limits of right-of-way and

easements.

4. Scheduling.

Owner’s Representative shall record minutes and distribute copies to participants and those affected

by decisions made.

SITE MOBILIZATION MEETING

Owner’s Representative may schedule a meeting at the project site prior to construction start-up.


Owner’s Representative/Engineer, Contractor's Superintendent, and major Subcontractors.

Agenda:

1. Use of the site by Owner and Contractor.

2. Owner's requirements. Features to remain.

3. Construction facilities provided by Contractor.

4. Temporary utilities provided by Contractor.

1. Security and housekeeping procedures.

2. Schedules.

3. Application for payment procedures.


Page 3 of 4

4. Procedures for testing.

5. Procedures for maintaining record documents.

Contractor will record minutes and distribute copies to participants and those affected by decisions

made.

PROGRESS MEETINGS

Schedule and administer meetings throughout the progress of the Work at weekly intervals or

intervals agreed to by Owner’s Representative and Contractor.

Contractor shall arrange bi-weekly meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, and

preside at meetings.


Job superintendent, major Subcontractors suppliers, and Owner’s Representative as

appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.

Agenda:

1. Review minutes of previous meetings.

2. Review of Work progress.

3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.

4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress.

1. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.

2. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules.

3. Maintenance of progress schedule.

4. Corrective measures to regain projected schedule.

5. Planned progress during succeeding work period.

6. Coordination of projected progress.

7. Maintenance of quality and work standards.

8. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.

9. Other business relating to Work.

Contractor will record minutes and distribute copies to participants and those affected by

decisions made.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)


Page 4 of 4

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01045-CUTTING AND PATCHING DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 4

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and other Division- 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY

This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching.

Refer to other Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching

individual parts of the Work.

1. Requirements of this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer to

Division- 23 and Division- 26 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to

cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations.

2. Demolition of selected portions of the building for alterations is included in Section

"Selective Demolition."

SUBMITTALS

Cutting and Patching Proposal:

Where approval of procedures for cutting and patching is required before proceeding,

submit a proposal describing procedures well in advance of the time cutting and patching

will be performed and request approval to proceed. Include the following information,

as applicable, in the proposal:

1. Describe the extent of cutting and patching required and how it is to be performed

indicate why it cannot be avoided.

2. Describe anticipated results in terms of changes to existing construction; include changes

to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in the building's

appearance and other significant visual elements.

1. List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform Work.

2. Indicate dates when cutting and patching is to be performed.

3. List utilities that will be disturbed or affected, including those that will be relocated and

those that will be temporarily out-of-service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted.

4. Where cutting and patching involves addition of reinforcement to structural elements,

submit details and engineering calculations to show how reinforcement is integrated with

the original structure.

5. Approval by the Owner/Owner’s Representative to proceed with cutting and patching does

not waive the Owner/Owner’s Representative's right to later require complete removal and

replacement of a part of the Work found to be unsatisfactory.

QUALITY ASSURANCE


Page 2 of 4

Requirements for Structural Work:

Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would reduce their load-

carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching pricing proposal before cutting and patching

the following structural elements:

a. Foundation construction

b. Bearing and retaining walls

c. Structural concrete

d. Structural steel

e. Lintels

f. Timber and primary wood framing

g. Miscellaneous structural metals

h. Exterior curtain wall construction

Operational and Safety Limitations:

Do not cut and patch operating elements or safety related components in a manner that

would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or result in increased

maintenance, or decreased operational life or safety.

1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching pricing proposal before cutting and patching

the following operating elements or safety related systems:

l. Shoring, bracing, and sheeting.

m. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.

n. Membranes and flashings.

o. Electrical wiring systems.

Visual Requirements:

Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces, in a

manner that would, in the Owner’s Representative's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic

qualities, or result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace Work

cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

MATERIALS

Use materials that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not available or

cannot be used where exposed surfaces are involved, use materials that fully match existing

adjacent surfaces possible with regard to visual effect. Use materials whose installed performance

will equal or surpass that of existing materials.


Page 3 of 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

INSPECTION

Before cutting existing surfaces, examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under

which cutting and patching is to be performed. Take corrective action before proceeding, if

unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered.

1. Before proceeding, meet at the site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including

mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict.

Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.

PREPARATION

Temporary Support:

Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

Protection:

Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide

protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be

exposed during cutting and patching operations.

Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

Take all precautions necessary to avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit or ductwork serving the

building, but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass

them.

PERFORMANCE

General:

Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and

patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay.

1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of

other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore

surfaces to their original condition.

Cutting:

Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements to be retained

or adjoining construction. Where possible review proposed procedures with the original

installer; comply with the original installer's recommendations.

1. In general, where cutting is required use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or

grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to size required with

minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side

into concealed surfaces.

1. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine such as a carborundum saw

or diamond core drill.


Page 4 of 4

2. Comply with requirements of applicable Sections of Division- 2 where cutting and

patching requires excavating and backfilling.

3. By-pass utility services such as pipe or conduit, before cutting, where services are shown

or required to be removed, relocated or abandoned. Cut-off pipe or conduit in walls or

partitions to be removed. Cap, valve or plug and seal the remaining portion of pipe or

conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after by-passing and

cutting.

Patching:

Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified

tolerances.

1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation.

2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained

adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

CLEANING

Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching is performed or used as access.

Remove completely paint, mortar, oils, putty and items of similar nature. Thoroughly clean

piping, conduit and similar features before painting or other finishing is applied. Restore

damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01095 – REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 4

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Provisions or

Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

DEFINITIONS

General:

Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

Indicated:

The term indicated refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on Drawings, or

other Paragraphs of Schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the

Contract Documents. Terms such as shown, noted, scheduled, and specified are used

to help the reader locate the reference. There is no limitation on location.

Directed:

Terms such as directed, requested, authorized, selected, approved, required and

permitted mean directed by the Owner’s Representative, requested by the Owner’s

Representative, and similar phrases.

Approved:

The term approved, when used in conjunction with the Owner’s Representative's action on

the Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the Owner’s

Representative's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

Regulations:

The term regulations includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by

authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the

construction industry that control performance of the Work.

Furnish:

The term furnish means supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading,

unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

Install:

The term describes operations at the Project site including the actual unloading,

unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, and

finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

Provide:

The term provide means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

Installer:

An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an

employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular construction

activity, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. Installers

are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform.


Page 2 of 4

Trades:

Using terms such as carpentry is not intended to imply that certain construction activities

must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic

name, such as carpenter. It also does not imply that requirements specified apply

exclusively to tradespersons of the corresponding generic name.

Project site:

The space available to the Contractor for performing construction activities either

exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the Project.

The extent of the Project site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical

with the description of the land on which the Project is to be built.

Testing Agencies:

A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or

tests, either at the Project site or elsewhere, or to reports on and, if required, to interpret

results of those inspections or tests.

Owner’s Representative:

Agent authorized to act on behalf of the Owner.

SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION

Specification Format:

These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on the Construction

Specification Institute's 50 - Division Format and MASTER FORMAT numbering

system.

Specification Content:

This Specification uses certain conventions regarding the style of language and the

intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations

or circumstances. These conventions are explained as follows:

1. Abbreviated Language:

Language used in Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and

meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words that are implied, but not stated, shall

be interpolated as the sense requires. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and

plural words interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract

Documents indicate.

2. Imperative and streamlined language is used generally in the Specifications. Requirements

expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by the Contractor. At certain locations

in the Text, subject language is used for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be

fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or by other means when so noted.

a. The words "shall be" are implied wherever a colon (:) is used within a sentence or

phrase.

INDUSTRY STANDARDS

Applicability of Standards:


Page 3 of 4

Except where the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable

construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied

directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a

part of the Contract Documents by reference.

Publication Dates:

Comply with the standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents.

Conflicting Requirements:

Where compliance with two or more standard is specified and where the standards may

establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels,

refer requirements that are different but apparently equal and other uncertainties to the

Owner’s Representative for a decision before proceeding.

1 . Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels:

The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or

performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or

quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply

with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as

appropriate, for the context of the requirements. Refer uncertainties to the Owner’s

Representative for a decision before proceeding.

Copies of Standards:

Each entity engaged in construction on the project is required to be familiar with industry

standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not

bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, the

Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source.

Abbreviations and Names:

Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated.

Where such acronyms or abbreviations are used in the Specifications or other Contract

Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards-

generating organization, authority having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the

context of the Text provision. Refer to the "Encyclopedia of Associations," published

by Gale Research Co., available in most libraries.

SUBMITTALS

Permits, Licenses, and Certificates:

For the Owner’s records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection

reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments,

judgments, and similar documents, correspondence, and records established in

conjunction with compliance with standards and regulations bearing upon performance

of the Work.


Page 4 of 4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01200 – PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 4

PART 1 - GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES

Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments.

Documentation of changes in Contract Sum and Contract Time.

Change procedures.

Procedures for preparation and submittal of application for final payment.

RELATED SECTIONS: N/A

SCHEDULE OF VALUES

Submit a printed schedule on AIA Form G703 -Application and Certificate for Payment

Continuation Sheet.

Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement.

Format:

Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number

and title of the specification Section. Identify site mobilization, bonds, and insurance, and

site demobilization.

Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application for Payment.

APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT

Payment Period:

Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement.

Present required information as typewritten/computer-generated form.

Form:

AIA G702 Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA G703 -Continuation Sheet

including continuation sheets when required.

For each item, provide a column for listing each of the following:

1. Item Number

2. Description of Work

3. Scheduled Values

4. Previous Applications

5. Work in Place and Stored Materials under this Application

6. Total Completed and Stored to Date of Application


Page 2 of 4

7. Percentage of Completion

8. Balance to Finish

9. Retainage

Execute certification by signature of authorized officer.

Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item

for portion of work performed and for stored Products.

List each authorized Change Order as a separate line item, listing Change Order number and dollar

amount as for an original time of Work.

Submit two copies of each Application for Payment.

Include the following with the application:

1. Transmittal Letter as specified for Submittals in Section 01300.

2. Construction progress schedule revised and current as specified in Section 01300.

3. Current construction photographs specified in Section 01300.

4. Partial release of liens from major Subcontractors and Vendors.

5. Affidavits attesting to off-site stored products.

When Owner’s Representative requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar

amounts in question. Provide one copy of date with cover letter for each copy of submittal.

Show application number and date, and line item by number and description.

MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

Owner’s Representative will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment

to Contract Sum or Contract Time as authorized by the Conditions of the Contract by issuing

supplemental instructions on AIA Form G710.

Construction Change Directive:

Owner’s Representative may issue a document, signed by Owner, instructing

Construction Manager to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion

in a Change Order.

1. The document will describe changes in the Work and will designate method of determining

any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time.

2. Promptly execute the change in Work.

Pricing Request:


Page 3 of 4

Owner’s Representative may issue a document which includes a detailed description of

a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications, a change

in Contract Time for executing the change with a stipulation of any overtime work

required and the period of time during which the requested price will be considered

valid. Construction Manager shall prepare and submit a fixed price quotation within

15 days.

Computation of Change in Contract Amount:

1. For change requested by Owner’s Representative for work falling under a fixed price contract,

the amount will be based on Construction Manager’s price quotation.

2. For change requested by Construction Manager, the amount will be based on the Construction

Manager's request for a Change Order as approved by Owner.

3. For pre-determined unit prices and quantities, the amount will be based on the fixed unit

prices.

4. For change ordered by Owner’s Representative without a quotation from the Construction

Manager, the amount will be determined by Owner’s Representative based on the

Construction Manager’s substantiation of costs as specified for Time and Material Work.

Substantiation of Costs:

Provide full information required for evaluation.

1. Provide the following data:

a. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment

b. Taxes, insurance, and bonds

c. Overhead and profit

d. Justification for any change in Contract Time

e. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented

2. Support each claim for additional costs with additional information:

a. Origin and date of claim

b. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom

c. Time records and wage rates paid

d. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly

documented

3. For Time and Material Work, submit itemized account and supporting data after

completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract.

Execution of Change Orders:


Page 4 of 4

Owner’s Representatives will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided

in the Conditions of the Contract on AIA G701.

After execution of Change Order, promptly revise Schedules of Values and Application for

Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the

Contract Sum.

Promptly revise Progress Schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub-schedules

to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit.

APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT

Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total

adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due.

Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been

accomplished:

1. All closeout procedures specified in Section 01700

PART 2 - PRODUCTS- NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION- NOT USED

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01300 – SUBMITTALS DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 4

PART 1 - GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES

Project coordination

Preconstruction meeting

Progress meetings

Progress photographs

RELATED SECTIONS

Section 01700- Execution Requirements:

Additional coordination requirements.

Section 01780- Closeout Submittals:

Project record documents.

PROJECT COORDINATION

Contractor:

The Contractor shall be responsible for overall project coordination between

subcontractors and trade contractors.

Cooperate with the Contractor in allocation of mobilization areas of site; for field offices and

storage, for personnel access, traffic, and parking facilities.

During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the Contractor.

Comply with Contractor procedures for intra-project communications; submittals, reports and

records, schedules, coordination drawings, and recommendations; and resolution of ambiguities

and conflicts. Particular attention should be given to the Contractor's subcontractor safety policy.

Comply with instructions of the Contractor for use of temporary utilities and construction

facilities.

Coordinate field engineering and layout work under instructions of the Contractor.

The Contractor to make the following types of submittals to Owner’s Representative:

1. Requests for Interpretation

2. Requests for Substitution

3. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples

4. Test and Inspection Reports

5. Manufacturer's Instructions and Field Reports


Page 2 of 4

6. Applications for Payment and Change Order requests

7. Progress Schedules

8. Coordination of Drawings

9. Closeout Submittals


PART 3 – EXECUTION

PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

Contractor will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award and prior to mobilization.


1. Owner:

Owner’s Representative and invited Consultants

2. Contractor:

Project Manager and Job Superintendent

3. Major Sub-contractors as requested by the Owner and Contractor.

Minimum Agenda:

1. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement.

2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates.

3. Submission of progress schedule.

4. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals and substitutions, applications for

payments, pricing requests, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures.

5. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor.

6. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner.

7. Temporary utilities provided by Owner.

8. Survey and construction layout.

9. Security and housekeeping procedures.

10. Schedules.

11. Application for payment procedures.

12. Procedures for testing.

13. Procedures for maintaining record documents.


Page 3 of 4

14. Scheduling.

15. Scheduling activities of Material Testing.

Contractor shall record minutes and distribute copies within five days after meeting to participants,

with one copy to Owner’s Representative, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions

made.

1.1 PROGRESS MEETINGS

Contractor shall schedule and administer meetings throughout the progress of the Work at maximum

bi-monthly intervals. A representative from each major trade contractor shall be required to attend

these meetings, as requested by the Owner’s Representative.

The Contractor shall make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants,

and preside at meetings.


1. Contractor, Project Manager and Job Superintendent.

2. Owner's Representative.

3. Engineer/Architect.

4. Major Sub-contractors as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.

Minimum Agenda:

1. Review minutes of previous meetings.

2. Review of Work progress.

3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.

4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress.

5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.

6. Maintenance of progress schedule.

7. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.

8. Planned progress during succeeding work period.

9. Maintenance of quality and work standards.

10. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.

11. Other business relating to Work.


Page 4 of 4

Contractor shall record minutes and distribute copies within five days after meeting to participants,

with one copy to Owner’s Representative, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions

made.

1.2 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS

Provide photographs of site and construction throughout progress of Work produced by an

experienced photographer, acceptable to Owner’s Representative.

Take photographs on date for each application for a payment and as follows:

1. Completed demolition and Site clearing.

2. Excavations.

3. Foundations.

4. Utility Installation – depth, alignment, stub-outs

5. Final completion.

Views:

1. Provide non-aerial photographs from three cardinal views at each specified time, until Date of

Substantial Completion.

2. Consult with Owner’s Representative for instructions on views required.

3. Provide factual presentation.

4. Provide correct exposure and focus, high resolution and sharpness, maximum depth of field,

and minimum distortion.

Each Photo: Full color, jpeg format

1. Provide 3 sets on separate USB sticks

Size: 5 MB file

2. Identify each photo on file name. Identify name of Project, contract number, phase, date and

orientation of view.

Deliver USB sticks with Application for Payment and transmittal letter specified in this Section.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01325 – CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 3

PART 1 - GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES

Preliminary schedule.

Construction progress schedule, bar chart type.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS (NOT APPLICABLE)

1.4 SUBMITTALS

Within 10 days after date established in Notice To Proceed, submit preliminary schedule defining

planned operations for the first 30 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work,

in Microsoft Project format on a USB stick.

If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit by email in the Microsoft Project

format a revised schedule within 10 days.

Within 30 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete schedule by

email in the Microsoft Project format for review.

Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule by email in the Microsoft Project

format.

Submit updated paper schedule with each Application for Payment.

Submit the number of opaque reproductions that the Contractor requires, plus four copies which will

be retained by the Owner’s Representative.

Submit under transmittal letter form specified in Section 01300.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Scheduler:

Contractor's personnel specialist Consultant specializing in CPM scheduling with two

years minimum experience in scheduling construction work of a complexities comparable

to this Project, and having use of computer facilities capable of delivering by email a

detailed graphic schedule in Microsoft Project format within 48 hours of request.

1.6 SCHEDULE FORMAT

Listings:

In chronological order according to the start date for each activity. Identify each activity

with the applicable Specification Section number.

Hard Copy Sheet Size: Multiples of 8-l/2 x 11 inches.

Scale and Spacing: To allow for notations and revisions.

Software Format: Microsoft Project


Page 2 of 3


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE

Prepare preliminary schedule in the form of a horizontal bar chart.

3.2 CONTENT

Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of

each element of construction.

Identify each item by Specification Section number.

Identify Work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities.

Provide separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, and dates reviewed

submittals will be required from the Owner’s Representative. Indicate decision dates for selection

of finishes.

Provide legend for symbols and abbreviations used.

3.3 BAR CHARTS

Include a separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation.

3.4 REVIEW AND EVALUATION OF SCHEDULE

Participate in joint review and evaluation of schedule with Owner’s Representative at each submittal.

Evaluate project status to determine work behind schedule and work ahead of schedule.

After review, revise as necessary as result of review, and resubmit within 10 days.

3.5 UPDATING SCHEDULE

Maintain schedules to record actual start and finish dates of completed activities.

Indicate progress of each activity to date of revision, with projected completion date of each activity.

Annotate diagrams to graphically depict current status of Work.

Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in Work, and other identifiable

changes.

Indicate changes required to maintain Date of Substantial Completion.

3.6 DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULE


Page 3 of 3

Distribute copies of updated schedules to Contractor's project site file, to Subcontractors, Suppliers,

Engineer/Architect, Owner's Representative, and other concerned parties.

Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in

schedules.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01400 – QUALITY CONTROL DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 3

PART 1 - GENERAL

SECTION INCLUDES

Quality assurance- control of installation

Tolerances

References and standards

Mock-up

Inspecting and testing laboratory services

Manufacturers' field services

RELATED SECTIONS

Section 01000 General Specifications:

Contractor's Shop and Working Drawings.

QUALITY ASSURANCE - CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, Products, services, site conditions, and

workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.

Should manufacturers’ instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from

Owner’s Representative/Engineer before proceeding.

Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent

tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

Perform Work by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.

Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the

manufacturer.

Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses,

vibration physical distortion, or disfigurement.

TOLERANCES

Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of Products to produce acceptable Work. Do

not permit tolerances to accumulate.

Comply with manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from

Owner’s Representative/Engineer before proceeding.

Adjust Products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing Products in place.


Page 2 of 3

REFERENCES AND STANDARDS

For Products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, complies

with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required

by applicable codes.

Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where

a specific date is established by code.

Obtain copies of standards where required by product Specification Sections.

Neither the contractual relationships, duties, nor responsibilities of the parties in Contract, nor those

of the Owner’s Representative/Engineer shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention

or inference otherwise in any reference document.

MOCK UP (NOT USED)

INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

Owner may appoint, employ, and pay for specified services of an independent firm to perform

construction testing services.

The independent firm will perform testing and other services specified in individual sections and as

required by the Owner.

Testing reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Owner indicating services and

indicating compliance or non-compliance with the Contract Documents.

Cooperate with independent firm; furnish safe access and assistance by incidental labor as requested.

1. Notify Owner’s Representative and/or independent firm 48 hours prior to expected time for

operations requiring services. These operations include, but are not necessarily limited to:

a. Cast-in-place concrete placement.

b. Bituminous pavement construction.

INSPECTION SERVICES

Owner may appoint, employ, and pay for specified services of an independent firm to perform

observation.

The independent firm will perform observations and other services specified in individual

Specification Sections and as required by the Owner.

Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Owner, in duplicate, indicating observations

and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents.

Cooperate with independent firm; furnish safe access and assistance by incidental labor as requested.

1. Notify Owner’s Representative and /or independent firm 48 hours prior to expected time for

operations requiring services.


Page 3 of 3

Observations do not relieve Contractor to perform Work to the contract requirements.

MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES

When specified in individual Specification Sections, require material or Product suppliers or

manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces

and installation, quality of workmanship, as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.

Submit qualifications of observer to Owner 30 days in advance of required observations. Observer

subject to approval of Owner.

Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are

supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work.

Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions.

Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new Work being

applied or attached.

Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual Specification Sections.

Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations.

PREPARATION

Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.

Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.

Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to

applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01600 – MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT HANDLING DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 3

PART 1 - GENERAL

REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

Products

Transportation and Handling

Storage and Protection

Product Options

Products List

Substitutions

RELATED REQUIREMENTS

Section 01400- Quality Control:

Submittal of manufacturer's data

Section 01700- Contract Closeout:

Operation and maintenance data

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

GENERAL

Products include the material, equipment, and systems used on this Project.

Comply with the Specifications and referenced standards as minimum requirements.

Components required to be supplied in quantity within a Specification Section shall be the same, and

shall be interchangeable.

TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

Transport products by methods that will avoid product damage and deliver them in undamaged

condition in the manufacturer's unopened containers or packaging.

Provide equipment and personnel to handle unloading and storage of the products by methods to

prevent soiling or damage.

Promptly inspect the shipments to assure that the products comply with requirements, the quantities

are correct, and the products are undamaged.

STORAGE AND PROTECTION

Store products in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, with intact and legible seals and

labels.


Page 2 of 3

For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. Cover the

products subject to deterioration with an impervious sheet covering; provide ventilation to avoid

condensation.

Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing of the

materials with foreign matter.

Arrange storage to provide access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure that products are

undamaged, and are maintained under required conditions.

PRODUCT OPTIONS

Products specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Furnish any product meeting

those standards.

Products specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions:

Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not specifically named.

Products specified by Naming Several Manufacturers.

Products of named manufacturers meeting Specifications: No options, no substitutions will be

allowed.

PRODUCTS LIST

Within 15 days after the date of Owner-Contractor Agreement, submit a complete list of major

proposed for use, with name of the manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product.

SUBSTITUTIONS

Only within 15 days after date of the Agreement will the Owner’s Representative/Engineer consider

requests from the Contractor for substitutions. Subsequently, substitutions will be considered only

when a product becomes unavailable due to no fault of the Contractor.

Document each request with complete data substantiating the compliance of the proposed

substitution with the Contractor Documents.

The request constitutes a representation that the Contractor:

1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds, in all respects, the

specified product.

2. Will provide the same warranty for substitution as for the specified product.

3. Will coordinate installation and make other changes which may be required for the Work to

be complete in all respects.

4. Waives claims for additional cost which may subsequently become apparent.

5. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or

product data submittals without separate written request, or when acceptance will require

substantial revision of the Contract Documents.


Page 3 of 3

Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product

data submittals without separate written request, or when acceptance will require substantial revision

of the Contract Documents.

The Owner’s Representative/Engineer will determine acceptability of the proposed substitution, and

will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection in writing within a reasonable time.

Only one request for the substitution will be considered for each product. When substitution is not

accepted, provide the specified product.

SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION

Prior to the final inspection, demonstrate operation of the entire system to the Owner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01620 – TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

The Contractor shall provide transportation of all equipment, materials and products furnished under

these Contract Documents to the site of the Work. In addition, the Contractor shall provide

preparation for shipment and storage, unloading, handling and re-handling, short-term storage,

extended storage, storage facilities, maintenance and protection during storage, preparation for

installation, and all other work and incidental items necessary or convenient to the Contractor for the

satisfactory prosecution and completion of the Work.

PART 2 - TRANSPORTATION

All equipment shall be suitably boxed, crafted, or otherwise protected during transportation.

PART 3 - HANDLING

All materials, and products shall be carefully handled to prevent damage or excessive deflections

during unloading or transportation. All equipment, materials, and products damaged during

transportation or handling shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the

Authority prior to being incorporated into the Work.

Lifting and handling drawings and instructions furnished by the manufacturer or supplier shall be

strictly followed. Spreader bars or lifting beams shall be used when the distances between lifting

points exceeds that permitted by standard industry practice. Slings and chains shall be padded as

required to prevent damage to protective coatings and finishes.

Under no circumstances shall equipment or products such as pipe, structural steel, castings,

reinforcement, lumber, piles, poles, etc., be thrown or rolled off of trucks onto the ground. Tossing

of pipes and pipe fittings and accessories is an unacceptable practice. Items tossed shall be inspected

by the Owner’s Representative/Engineer and/or Architect. If the Owner’s Representative determines

that the product has been comprised, Contractor shall replace product at no additional cost to Owner.

Items such as non-metallic pipe, non-metallic conduit, flagpoles, and lighting poles shall be handled

using non-metallic slings or straps. Under no circumstance shall chains or steel cables be used to

transport or handle non-metallic products.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01630 – STORAGE AND PROTECTION

DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

Equipment shall be received, inspected, unloaded, handled, stored, maintained, and protected by the

Contractor in a suitable location on or off site, if necessary, until such time as installation is required.

Storage and protection of Contractor-furnished equipment shall be strict conformance with the

requirements of the Section entitled "General Equipment Stipulations" of these Specifications.

PART 2 - STORAGE

The Contractor shall be responsible for providing satisfactory storage facilities that are acceptable to

the Owner’s Representative/Engineer. In the event that satisfactory facilities cannot be provided on

site, satisfactory warehouse, acceptable to the Owner’s Representative/Engineer, will be provided by

the Contractor for such time until the materials and products can be accommodated at the site.

Materials, and products that are stored in a satisfactory warehouse acceptable to the Owner’s

Representative/Engineer will be eligible for progress payments as though they had been delivered to

the job site.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance and protection of all equipment, materials,

and products placed in storage and shall bear all costs of storage, preparation for transportation,

transportation, re-handling, and preparation for installation.

Equipment and products stored outdoors shall be supported above the ground on suitable wooden

blocks or braces arranged to prevent excessive deflection or bending between supports. Items such

as pipe, structural steel, and sheet construction products shall be stored with one end elevated to

facilitate drainage.

Unless otherwise permitted in writing by the Owner’s Representative/Engineer, building products

such as rough lumber, plywood, concrete block, and structural tile may be stored outdoors under a

properly secured waterproof covering.

Tarpaulins and other coverings shall be supported above the stored equipment or materials on

wooden strips to provide ventilation under the cover and minimize condensation. Tarpaulins and

covers shall be arranged to prevent ponding of water.

PVC pipe, if stored outside, shall be suitably protected from sunlight (UV) by covering with a tarp

or exterior paint. Such covering shall be completed and continual.

PART 3 - EXTENDED STORAGE (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01700 – CONTRACT CLOSEOUT DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 5

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

other Division - 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY

This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project closeout, including but

not limited to:

1. Inspection procedures.

2. Project record document submittal

3. Operating and maintenance manual submittal.

4. Submittal of warranties.

5. Final cleaning.

Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections in

Divisions 2 through 16, including all Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing Specifications.

SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

Preliminary Procedures:

Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, complete the

following. List exceptions in the request.

1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial

Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as

substantially complete. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in

these Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract

Sum.

a. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value

of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete.

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance change-over requirements.

3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final

certifications and similar documents.

4. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to

services and utilities; include permits and similar releases.

5. Deliver tools, extra stock, and similar items.

Inspection Procedures:


Page 2 of 5

On receipt of a request for inspection, the Owner will either proceed with inspection or

advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Owner will prepare the Certificate of

Substantial Completion following inspection, or advise the Contractor of construction that

must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued.

6. The Owner will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work has been

substantially completed.

7. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance.

FINAL ACCEPTANCE

Preliminary Procedures:

Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment,

complete the following. List exceptions in the request.

1. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously

submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed

operations where required.

2. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract

Sum.

1. Submit a certified copy of the Owner's final inspection list of items to be completed or

corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance,

and the list has been endorsed and dated by the Owner’s Representative.

2. Submit consent of surety to final payment.

3. Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement.

4. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance

requirements.

Re-inspection Procedure:

The Owner will re-inspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work, including

inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except items whose

completion has been delayed because of circumstances acceptable to the Owner’s

Representative.

1. Upon completion of re-inspection, the Owner’s Representative will prepare a certificate of

final acceptance or notify the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that

have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance.

2. If necessary, re-inspection will be repeated.

RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS

General:

Do not use record documents for construction purposes; protect from deterioration and

loss in a secure, fire-resistive location; provide access to record documents for the Owner's

reference during normal working hours.


Page 3 of 5

Record Drawings:

Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white prints of Contract Drawings

and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation

varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark whichever drawing is most

capable of showing conditions fully and accurately; where Shop Drawings are used, record

a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give attention

to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date.

1. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil; use other colors to distinguish between variations

in separate categories of the Work.

2. Mark new information that is important to the Owner, but was not shown on Contract

Drawings or Shop Drawings.

1. Note related Change Order numbers where applicable.

2. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover sheets,

and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on the cover of each set.

Record Specifications:

Maintain one complete copy of the Project Manual, including addenda, and one copy of

other written construction documents such as Change Orders and modifications issued in

printed form during construction. Mark these documents to show substantial variations in

actual Work performed in comparison with the text of the Specifications and modifications.

Give particular attention to substitutions, selection of options and similar information on

elements that are concealed or cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct

observation. Note related record drawing information and Product Data.

1. Upon completion of the Work, submit record Specifications to the Owner’s Representative for

the Owner's records.

Record Product Data:

Maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark these documents to show

significant variations in actual Work performed in comparison with information submitted.

Include variations in products delivered to the site, and from the manufacturer's installation

instructions and recommendations. Give attention to concealed products and portions of

the Work which cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. Note

related Change Orders and mark-up of record drawings and Specifications.

3. Upon completion of mark-up, submit complete set of record Product Data to the Owner’s

Representative for the Owner's records.

Record Sample Submitted:

Immediately prior to the date or dates of Substantial Completion, the Contractor will meet

at the site with the Owner’s Representative and the Owner's personnel to determine which

of the submitted Samples that have been maintained during progress of the Work are to be

transmitted to the Owner for record purposes. Comply with delivery to the Owner's Sample

storage area.

Miscellaneous Record Submittals:


Page 4 of 5

Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements of miscellaneous record-keeping and

submittals in connection with actual performance of the Work. Immediately prior to the

date or dates of Substantial Completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good

order, properly identified and bound or filed, ready for continued use and reference.

Submit to the Owner’s Representative for the Owner's records.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each installer of equipment that requires

regular maintenance to meet with the Owner's personnel to provide instruction in proper operation

and maintenance. If installers are not experienced in procedures, provide instruction by

manufacturer’s representatives. Include a detailed review of the following items:

1. Record documents

2. Spare parts and materials

3. Tools

4. Cleaning

5. Warranties and bonds

FINAL CLEANING

General:

General cleaning during construction is required by the General Conditions and included

in Section "Temporary Facilities".

Cleaning:

Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each

surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and

maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for Final

Acceptance.

a. Remove labels that are not permanent labels.

b. Clean exposed exterior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, film

and similar foreign substances.

c. Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter and other foreign

substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills and other foreign

deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted, to a smooth even-textured

surface.

Removal of Protection:


Page 5 of 5

Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work during

construction.

Compliance:

Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for

cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the

Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful or dangerous materials into drainage

systems. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner.

1. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated Work have become

the Owner's property, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01710 – CLEANUP DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 1

PART 1 -GENERAL

During its progress, the Work and the adjacent areas affected thereby shall be kept cleaned up and

all rubbish, surplus materials, and unneeded construction equipment shall be removed and all damage

repaired so that the public and property owners will be inconvenienced as little as possible.

Where material or debris has washed or flowed into or been placed in existing watercourses, ditches,

gutters, drains, pipe structures, as a result of Work done under this contact, or elsewhere during the

course of the Contractor's operations, such material or debris shall be entirely removed and

satisfactorily disposed of during the progress of the Work, and the ditches, channels, drains, pipes,

structures, and work, etc., shall upon completion of the Work, be left in a clean and neat condition.

On or before the completion of the Work, the Contractor shall, unless otherwise especially directed

or permitted in writing, tear down and remove all temporary buildings and structures built by him;

shall remove all temporary works, tools, and machinery or other construction equipment furnished

by him; shall remove, acceptably disinfect, and cover all organic matter and material containing

organic matter in, under, and around privies, houses, and other buildings used by him; shall remove

all rubbish from any grounds which he has occupied; and shall leave the roads and all parts of the

premises and adjacent property affected by his operations in a neat and satisfactory condition.

Upon completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove from the sites of the subsurface

explorations all of his plant, machinery, tools, equipment, temporary work, and surplus materials;

shall, unless otherwise directed or permitted in writing, remove all rubbish from any grounds which

he has occupied; and shall leave the roads and all parts of the premises and adjacent property affected

by his operations in a neat and satisfactory condition.

The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all materials installed by him and his subcontractors, and on

completion of the Work shall deliver it undamaged and in fresh and new-appearing condition.

The Contractor shall restore or replace, when and as directed, any public or private property damaged

by his Work, equipment, or employees, to a condition at least equal to that existing immediately prior

to the beginning of operations. To this end, the Contractor shall do as required all necessary highway

or driveway, walk, and landscaping work. Suitable materials, equipment, and methods shall be used

for such restoration. The restoration of existing property or structures shall be done as promptly as

practicable as work progresses and shall not be left until the end of the contract period.

The Contractor shall submit a Waste Plan and secure a Waste permit from the VI Waste Management

Authority

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01730 – GUARANTEES AND WARRANTEES DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

The Contractor shall warrant all materials, products, and workmanship provided by the Contractor

under the Contract for a period of twelve (12) months after the date of final acceptance of the Work

by the Owner.

If, during the warranty period: (a) Any materials or products furnished and/or installed by the

Contractor are found to be defective in service by reason on the Contractor's faulty process, structural

and/or mechanical design or Specifications; or (b) Any materials, or products furnished by the

Contractor shall, as soon as possible after receipt of such defective materials or products, or replace

such defective materials or products.

PART 2 - START-UP OF OPERABLE COMPONENTS

Because of the need to maintain operation during construction, it will be necessary to accept operable

components of the project at various times prior to the completion and final acceptance of the entire

project.

A component of the project, as used herein, shall include all associated structures, paving, piping,

etc.

When a component of the project has been completed, checked out, and made ready for operation,

the Contractor shall notify the Owner’s Representative/Engineer in writing that the component is

substantially complete and request an inspection for substantial completion. The Owner will

schedule the inspection within ten (I0) days of the Contractor's request. If he concurs in the

Contractor's statement, the Owner’s Representative/Engineer will notify the Contractor in writing

that the component is accepted as substantially complete. At the same time, the Owner’s

Representative/Engineer will submit to the Contractor a list of items that must be completed or

corrected before final acceptance can be given.

If a component of the project is needed in order to maintain operation during construction and if it

has been accepted as substantially complete, the Contractor shall start up the component when

directed by the Owner. Once the component has achieved stable and satisfactory operation

(minimum 95 percent availability over a 7- day period), the Contractor shall request beneficial

occupancy by the Owner. The Department, if they concur in the Contractor's statement, that stable

and satisfactory operation has been achieved, will notify the Contractor in writing within ten (10)

days that he is assuming beneficial occupancy of the component.

On the date that the Department assumes beneficial occupancy, the following shall occur:

1. The one-year warranties for the component specified in Part 1-A of this section will begin

2. The Owner will assume responsibility for operating and maintaining the component

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01780 – CLOSE OUT SUBMITTALS DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 9

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS:

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SECTION INCLUDES:

Project Record Document submittal.

Operation and Maintenance manuals.

Warranties, Bonds, Extra Stock, Permits, and Manuals.

SUBMITTALS:

Project Record Documents:

Submit documents to Owner. The following submittal procedure shall occur prior

to Final Acceptance.

1. Submit original copy of as-built drawings (Drawings & Specifications) to Owner for

review.

2. Compile and organize any drawings or schedules in the Project Manual onto sheets

of the same size as the Contract Drawings and into electronic files to submit with

other record documents.

3. Contractor will be notified within 15 workdays if the submitted documents are

acceptable.

4. Should the submittal be unacceptable for any reason, the Contractor shall make

requested modifications and resubmit to the Owner. Continue to resubmit as

necessary until the submittal is acceptable.

5. Upon acceptance of the submittal, Owners Engineer will, within 30 workdays,

incorporate the Contractor's asbuilt drawings into the Owner's Engineer’s original

Contract Documents.

Warranties, Bonds, Extra Stock, and Permits:

1. Obtain and assemble executed certificates, warranties, bonds, receipts for extra stock,

and permits signed by any authorities having jurisdiction. These may be tabbed in

the front of the General Operation and Maintenance Manual provided they do not

over-fill the binder.

2. Verify that documents are in proper form and contain full information.

3. Include originals of each in operation and maintenance manual, indexed separately

on Table of Contents.

4. Co-execute submittals when required.


Page 2 of 9

5. Submittal of warranties, bonds, extra stock and permit manual to match submittal

requirements.

6. Provide Table of Contents neatly typed, in complete and orderly sequence. Include

complete information for each of the following:

a. Product or work item;

b. Firm, with name of principal, address, and telephone number;

c. Scope;

d. Date of beginning of warranty or service and maintenance contract;

e. Duration of warranty or service maintenance contract;

f. Proper procedure in case of failure;

g. Instances which might affect validity of warranty or bond; and

h. Contractor, name or responsible principal, address, and telephone number.

2. Make submittals within ten days after Date of Substantial Completion.

3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial

Completion, submit within ten days after acceptance, listing the date of

acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS:

Project Record Documents include the following:

1. Marked-up copies of Contract Drawings.

2. Marked-up copies of Project Manuals (Specifications and Detail Book, as

applicable), all volumes.

3. Addenda.

4. Reviewed and marked-up copies of shop drawings and product data.

5. Newly prepared drawings.

6. Change Orders, RFIs and other modifications to the Contract issued in printed form

during construction.

7. Owner’s Representative's Clarifications and Pricing Request with all supporting

documentation.

8. Field Authorizations.


Page 3 of 9

9. Record Samples.

10. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.

11. Record information on Work that is recorded only schematically.

12. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.

13. Other miscellaneous record documents as listed below and applicable.

a. Field records on excavations and foundations.

b. Field records on underground construction and similar work.

c. Survey showing locations and elevations of underground lines.

d. Invert elevations of drainage piping.

e. Surveys establishing building lines and levels.

f. Authorized measurements utilizing unit prices or allowances.

g. Records of plant treatment.

h. Ambient and substrate condition tests.

i. Certifications received in lieu of labels on bulk products.

j. Batch mixing and bulk delivery records.

k. Testing and qualification of tradesmen.

l. Documented qualification of installation firms and/or personnel.

m. Load and performance testing.

n. Inspections and certifications by governing authorities.

o. Leakage and water-penetration tests.

p. Final inspection and correction procedures.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS:

Maintenance of Documents and Samples:

1. Store and maintain in field office apart from the Contract Documents used for

construction, one complete set of record documents and samples which are used to

record as-built conditions.


Page 4 of 9

2. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes; protect from

deterioration and loss in a secure fire-resistant location. Maintain record documents

in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition.

3. Always make record documents and samples available for review by Owner’s

Representative and the Owner.

4. Record actual revisions to the Work concurrent with construction progress.

5. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.

a. Following each month Progress Schedule Meeting, Contractor shall meet with

all major subcontractors whose work is in progress at the site, including, but

not limited to mechanical, plumbing, electrical, security, fire protection, civil,

and as otherwise designated, to review all "as-built" revisions on the day-by-

day working set of "Project Record Copy" and verify installed record

information from the previous moth is properly recorded on the day-by-day

"Project Record Copy," with all revisions and pertinent information clearly

indicated.

Record Drawings and Shop Drawings:

A clean, undamaged set of Contract Drawings including coordination drawings

and shop drawings shall be kept at the job site as "as-built" record documents.

Record "as-built drawings shall be comprised of all sheets contained in the

Contract Drawings, as well as all special equipment or system drawings.

1. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially

from the Work as originally shown. Mark whichever drawings that show conditions

fully and accurately. Where shop drawings, RFIs or other communication record are

used to identify a change, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on

the Contract.

2. Drawings:

Give attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record

at a later date. Items required to be marked include, but are not limited to, the

following:

a. Indicate field changes of dimension and detail.

b. RFIs.

c. Depths of foundations below the First Floor.

d. Horizontal and vertical measurements of underground services and utilities

referenced to the building or other permanent construction.

e. Note changes of directions and locations, by dimensions and Elevations, as

utilities are actually installed.

f. Show measured locations of construction-concealed internal utilities and

appurtenances referenced to visible and accessible features of the structure.


Page 5 of 9

g. Record accurate locations of piping, valves, and the like.

h. Revisions to electrical circuitry.

i. Indicate details not on original Contract Drawings.

j. "X-out" conditions not constructed and appropriately annotate "note

constructed" to convey the actual "as-constructed" condition.

2. Mark record sets in a clear, legible manner, using red ink (no pencils); use other

colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of the work. Use

'whiteout' to erase errors.

3. Mark new information that is important to the Owner, but which was not shown

on the Contract Documents or Shop Drawings.

4. Show Addenda items, Change Orders, RFI, or other means of communication used

in the construction process.

5. Show and date revisions to drawings with a "cloud" drawn around the revision.

6. Organize record drawing sheets in manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover

sheets, and print suitable titles, dates, and other identification on the cover of each

set. Where shop drawings, RFIs, or other communication record is used as a

reference, include a copy of it as part of the Record Drawings.

7. Shop Drawings:

a. Maintain as record documents; legibly annotate to record changes made after

review.

b. Include subcontractor reproducible shop drawings including as a minimum

where applicable to the project, and others as deemed appropriate. Record

Drawing shop drawings shall be easily reproducible; as appropriate and

approved by the Owner.

Project Manual(s):

During the construction period, maintain one complete copy of the Project

Manual(s), including Specifications, Detail Book(s), addenda, and one copy of

other written Construction Documents, such as Change Orders, and RFIs issued

in printed form during construction.

1. Legibly mark these documents in red ink to show substantial variations in actual work

performed in comparison with the text of the Specification and modifications. Give

particular attention to substations, selection of options, and similar information on

elements that are concealed or cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct

observation. Note related Record Drawing information and product data. Record at

each product section description of actual products installed, including the

following:

a. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.


Page 6 of 9

b. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.

2. Mark Detail Book schedules, details, etc., to indicate the actual installation where the

installation varies from the indicated in the Detail Book and modification issued.

Complete information in accordance with paragraph for all detail drawings.

3. Each prime contractor (Subcontractor) is responsible for marking up Sections that

contain its own Work.

4. General Contractor shall be responsible for collecting marked-up Sections that

contain its own work.

5. General Contractor shall be responsible for submitting the complete set of record

Specifications as specified.

Record Product Data:

1. Maintain one copy of each data Submittal, and mark-up variations in actual work in

comparison with submitted information. Include both variations in product as

delivered to the site, and variations from manufacturer's instruction and

recommendations for installation.

2. Give attention to concealed products and portions of the work which cannot

otherwise be readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. Note related

Change Orders and mark up of Record Drawings and Project Manuals.

3. Note related Change Orders and mark-up of record Drawings, where applicable.

4. Upon completion of mark-up, submit complete set to Owner’s Representative for

Owner's records.

5. Where record Product Data is required as part of maintenance manuals, submit

marked-up Product Data as an insert in the manual instead of submittal as record

Product Data.

6. Each prime contractor (Subcontractor) shall be responsible for marking up and

submitting record Product Data for its own Work.

7. Insofar as possible, insert record product data in individual sub-sections of O&M

Manuals. Refer to 3.05 below.

Record Sample Submittal:

Immediately prior to date(s) of substantial completion, Owner’s Engineer will

meet with Contractor at site, and will determine which (if any) of submitted

samples maintained by Contractor during progress of the work are to be

transmitted to Owner for record purposes. Comply with NE's instructions for

packaging, identification marking, and delivery to Owner's sample storage place.

Miscellaneous Record Submittals:


Page 7 of 9

Refer to paragraph above for listing of miscellaneous record documents and to

other Sections of these specifications for requirements of miscellaneous record-

keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of the work.

Immediately prior to date of Substantial Completion, complete miscellaneous

records and place in good order, properly identified and bound or filed, ready for

continued use and reference. Submit to the Owner for their records.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA- GENERAL:

For Each Product:

List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers,

including local source of supplies.

Product Data:

Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and

data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.

Drawings:

Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of systems, to

show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as

maintenance drawings.

Typed Text:

As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions

for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS:

(NOT USED)

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES:

(NOT USED)

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: (NOT USED)

WARRANTIES, BONDS, AND PERMIT MANUAL:

Project Warranty-General:

1. If, within one (l) year after the Date of Substantial Completion of the Work, or

designated portion thereof, or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed

by law or by the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract

Documents, any of the Work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the

Contract Documents, the Contractor, and where applicable, his subcontractor that

portion of the work, shall correct it promptly after receipt of a written notice from

the Owner or Owner’s Representative to do so. This obligation shall survive

Termination of the Contract. The Owner will give such notice promptly after

discovery of the condition.

2. Refer to Section 01 78 36 for administrative and procedural requirements for tracking

project warranty issues subsequent to date of Substantial Completion.

Categories of Specific Warranties:


Page 8 of 9

1. Warranties on the work are in several categories, including those of General

Conditions, and including (but not necessarily limited to) the following specific

categories related to individual units of work specified in the technical sections of

these specifications.

a. Special Project Warranty (Guarantee):

A warranty specifically written and signed by Contractor for a defined portion of

the work; and, where required, countersigned by subcontractor, installer,

manufacturer or other entity engaged by Contractor.

b. Specified Product Warranty:

A warranty which is required by contract documents, to be provided for a

manufactured product incorporated into the work; regardless of whether

manufacturer has published warranty without regard for specific incorporation of

product into the work, or has written and executed warranty as a direct result of

contract document requirements.

c. Coincidental Product Warranty:

A warranty which is not specifically required by contract documents (other than

as specified in this section); but which is available on a product incorporated into

the work, by virtue of the fact that manufacturer of product has published warranty

in connection with purchases and uses of product without regard for specific

applications except as otherwise limited by terms of warrantee.

2. Refer to individual sections for the determination of units of work which are required

to be specifically or individually warranted, and for the specific requirements and

terms of those warranties (or guarantees).

Disclaimer and Limitations:

Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve

the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products.

Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve

suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special

warranties with the Contractor.

General Limitations:

It is recognized the specific warranties are intended primarily to protect the Owner

against failure of the work to perform as required, and against deficient, defective,

and faulty materials and workmanship, regardless of sources.

Related Damages and Losses:

1. General:

In connection with Contractor's correction of warranted work which has failed,

remove and replace other work of project which has been damages as a result of

such failure, or must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of

warranted work.

2. Consequential Damages:


Page 9 of 9

Except as otherwise indicated or required by governing regulations, Special

project warranties and product warranties are not extended to cover damage to

building contents (other than work of Contract), which occurs as a result of failure

of warranted work.

Except for items put into use with Owner’s permission, leave date of beginning of time of

warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined.

Reinstatement of Warranty Period:

Except as otherwise indicated, when work covered by a special project warranty

or product warranty has failed and has been corrected by replacement or

restoration, reinstate warranty by written endorsement for the time period starting

on the date of acceptance of replaced or restored work and ending upon date

original warranty would have expired if there had been no failure, with an

equitable adjustment for depreciation.

Replacement Cost, Obligations:

Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild

the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract

Documents. Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of replacing or restoring

defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the

Work through a portion of anticipated useful service life.

Owner’s Recourse:

Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in condition addition to implied

warranties and shall not limit the duties, obligations, right, and remedies otherwise

available under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as

limitations on the time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties,

obligations, rights, or remedies.

Rejection of Warranties:

Owner reserves the right, at time of final acceptance or thereafter, to reject

coincidental product warranties submitted by the Contractor, which in opinion of

Owner tend to detract from or confuse interpretation of requirements of Contract

Documents.

Contractor's Procurement Obligations:

Do not purchase, subcontract for, or allow others to purchase or sub-contract for

materials or units of work for project where a special project warranty, specified

product warranty, certification or similar commitment is required, until it has

been determined that entities required to countersign such commitments are

willing to do so.

Co-execute warranties when required. Provide originals of each for inclusion in each

operation and maintenance manual.

Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 2- EXISTING CONDITIONS

Page 1 of 1

SECTION 02282 – TERMITE CONTROL

Page 1 of 4

PART 1 - - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide boric acid based wood applied treatment for primary termite control, as

herein specified.

B. Limits of termite treatment are as follows:

1. Boric acid product application will be provided to wood structural

components in contact with foundations and application to bath traps,

plumbing penetration and certain foundation areas.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. General:

1. Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form

a part of this specification section to the extent indicated. Standards listed

are identified by issuing authority, authority abbreviation, designation

number, title or other designation established by issuing authority. Standards

subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing authority

abbreviation and standard designation.

B. American Wood-Preservers’ Association (AWPA); AWPA Standard M4-01:

Standard for the Care of Preservative-Treated Wood Products; 2001.

1. Requires that a preservative be applied to any end cut to protect exposed

wood not protected by pressure treatment (as in sill plates) to meet

international building code requirements.

C. International Residential Code (IRC) sections that mandate AWPA’s Standard M4

for end cut treatment:

1. Section R319: Protection Against Decay

2. Section R319.1.1 Field Treatment [of End Cuts]

3. Section R320: Protection Against Subterranean Termites

4. Section R320.1.2 Field Treatment [of End Cuts]; 2006.

D. U.S. Green Building Council:

1. LEED® for Homes Rating System, SS 5: Nontoxic Pest Control; 2008

a. Green building program assigns a maximum of two program points for the

use of nontoxic pest control methods, including a barrier treatment of all

cellulosic building material with a borate product.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Performance Requirements:


Page 2 of 4

1. Provides structural termite protection when applied according to the

applicable sections of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency registered

label.

1.4 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

B. Product Data:

1. Submit applicable manufacturer's technical data and application.


A. In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with manufacturer’s

instructions and recommendations for work, including preparation of structure and

application.

B. Engage a professional pest control operator, licensed in accordance with regulations

of governing authorities and trained in the application of boric acid wood applied

termiticide treatment solution.

1.7 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Restrictions:

1. Treatment will be performed when access to all structural wood members

and foundations is available. This is normally at the “dried-in” stage of

construction when all structural wood and sheathing is in place and prior to

installation of drywall, insulation, mechanical systems and electrical wiring.

Comply with handling and application instructions of the product.

1.8 SPECIFIC PRODUCT WARRANTY

A. Furnish written warranty certifying that the applied boric acid based treatment will

prevent infestation of subterranean termites and, that if subterranean termite activity

is discovered during warranty period, Contractor will re-treat structure and repair or

replace damage caused by termite infestation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BORIC ACID TERMITICIDE, INSECTICIDE & FUNGICIDE

A. Termiticide requirements:

1. Boric acid based primary termiticide treatment that complies with

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction over such an application.

2. Boric acid based treatment shall be provided in a concentrated formulation

that dilutes with water or foaming agent.


Page 3 of 4

3. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the

maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use according

to the registered label.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Compliance:

1. Comply with product data, including product literature, technical bulletins

and U.S. EPA registered label.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Site Preparation:

1. Remove foreign matter that could decrease thoroughness of treatment, such

as sawdust, away from treatment surfaces. Move building materials that

block or prevent product application to required treatment areas.

B. Application Rates:

1. Apply treatment by label directions to include:

C. The treatment of all structural wood and sill plates within 24 inches of contact with

the foundation. Apply a second application to wood within treated area when only

one or two surfaces are exposed.

D. The treatment of all cellulosic sheathing within 24 inches of the foundation.

E. The treatment of the concrete slab a minimum of 2 inches out from the wooden sill

plate.

F. The treatment of open bath traps at 8-16 ounces of treatment solution per square

foot of bath trap with the additional treatment of a 12-inch-wide band of treatment

solution on the slab area surrounding the bath trap.

G. The treatment of all pipe and plumbing penetrations with the treatment solution to a

height of two feet and extending at least 6 inches out horizontally from the

penetration onto slab surface.

H. The treatment of the inside surface of crawlspace concrete or concrete block walls

extending vertically up two feet from the soil.

I. The treatment of the inside surface of basement concrete or concrete block walls

extending vertically up two feet from the slab.

J. Treat abutting slab areas and expansion joints to cover at least six inches of slab

surface out from each side of joint or abutting slab connection.

K. The treatment of termite trails and nests on interior walls.


Page 4 of 4

END OF SECTION

SECTION 024115 – STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

Page 1 of 3

PART 1 - - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Structure Demolition:

1. Demolition of designated building structures.

2. Demolition of designated site improvements including paving, curbing, site

walls, and utility structures.

3. Demolition of below-grade foundations and site improvements to depth to

avoid conflict with new construction or site work.

4. Removal of hollow items or items which could collapse.

5. Salvage of designated items.

6. Protection of site work and adjacent structures.

7. Disconnection, capping, and removal of utilities.

8. Pollution control during building demolition, including noise control.

9. Removal and legal disposal of materials.

10. Protection of designated site improvements and adjacent construction,

11. Interruption, capping or removal of utilities as applicable.

B. Hazardous Materials:

1. Not present.

2. Removed under separate prior contract.

3. Removed as a part of this contract.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements.

B. Schedule: Submit for approval demolition schedule, including schedule and

methods for capping utilities to be abandoned and maintaining existing utility

service.


A. Codes and Regulations: Comply with governing codes and regulations. Use

experienced workers.

1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Convene minimum two weeks prior to starting work of this section.


Page 2 of 3

1.5 SEQUENCING

A. Immediate areas of work will not be occupied during demolition. The public,

including children, may occupy adjacent areas.

B. No responsibility for buildings and structures to be demolished will be assumed by

the Owner.

C. Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent

interruption of construction progress.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SECTION

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

A. Demolition Operations: Do not damage building elements and improvements

indicated to remain. Items of salvage value, not included on schedule of salvage

items to be returned to Owner, shall be removed from structure. Storage or sale of

items at project site is prohibited.

B. Utilities: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities in buildings to be

demolished.

C. Shoring and Bracing: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring and

bracing.

D. Occupied Spaces: Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, drives or other occupied

or used spaces or facilities without the written permission of the Owner and the

authorities having jurisdiction. Do not interrupt utilities serving occupied or used

facilities without the written permission of the Owner and authorities having

jurisdiction. If necessary, provide temporary utilities.

E. Operations: Cease operations if public safety or remaining structures are

endangered. Perform temporary corrective measures until operations can be

continued properly.

F. Security: Provide adequate protection against accidental trespassing. Secure project

after work hours.

3.2 SCHEDULE

A. Items for Protection During Demolition: (The following are samples only)

1. Designated site improvements, trees, and plantings.

2. Adjacent construction.

B. Items to be Salvaged for Reinstallation:

1. Handrails.


Page 3 of 3

2. Wood trim.

3. Light fixtures.

C. Items to be Salvaged for Delivery to Owner:

1. Doors and hardware.

2. Toilet accessories.

3. Light fixtures.

4. Plumbing fixtures.

5. Decorative elements.

D. Utilities Requiring Interruption, Capping, or Removal:

1. Electric.

2. Water.

3. Sewerage.

4. Cable television.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 024119 – SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

Page 1 of 5

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this

Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them.

1.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified

by a specific edition date.

B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be

applicable to this Project.

C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with all applicable requirements and

standards.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Record Documents:

1. Schedule indicating proposed sequence of operations for selective demolition Work to

Owner's Representative for review prior to start of Work. Include coordination for

shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services as required, together with details

for dust and noise control protection.

a. Provide detailed sequence of demolition and removal Work to ensure uninterrupted

progress of Owner's on-site operations.

b. Coordinate with Owner's continuing occupation of portions of existing building and

with Owner's partial occupancy of completed new addition.

c. Photographs of existing conditions of structure surfaces, equipment, and adjacent

improvements that might be misconstrued as damage related to removal operations.

File with Owner's Representative prior to start of Work.

1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of the building immediately adjacent to areas of selective

demolition. Conduct selective demolition Work in manner that will minimize need for

disruption of Owner's normal operations. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to

Owner of demolition activities that will affect Owner's normal operations.

B. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or structures to be demolished.

1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by

Owner insofar as practicable. However, minor variations within structure may occur

by Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to start of selective demolition Work.


Page 2 of 5

C. Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition Work.

D. Conduct selective demolition operations and debris removal to ensure minimum interference

with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.

1. Do not close, block, or otherwise obstruct streets, walks, or other occupied or used

facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide

alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing

regulations.

E. Do not use cutting torches for removal until Work area is cleared of flammable materials. At

concealed spaces, such as interior of ducts and pipe spaces, verify condition of hidden space

before starting flame cutting operations. Maintain portable fire suppression devices during

flame cutting operations.

F. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage

during demolition operations.

1. Do not interrupt utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when authorized in

writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during

interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to governing authorities.

2. Maintain fire protection services during selective demolition operations.

3. Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other methods to limit dust and dirt

migration. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection.

a. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as

ice, flooding, and pollution.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. GENERAL

1. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and

local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having

jurisdiction.

B. MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

1. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, or otherwise indicated to

remain the Owner's property, demolished materials shall be become the Contractor's

property and shall be removed from the Site with further disposition of the

Construction's option.

2. Historical items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones

and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of

interest or value to the Owner, which may be encountered during demolition, remain

the Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to

prevent damage and deliver promptly to the Owner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


Page 3 of 5

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or

collapse of areas to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain.

B. Cease operations and notify Owner's Representative immediately if safety of structure appears

to be endangered. Take precautions to support structure until determination is made for

continuing operations.

C. Locate, identify, stub off, and disconnect utility services that are not indicated to remain.

1. Provide bypass connections as necessary to maintain continuity of service to occupied

areas of building. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner if shutdown

of service is necessary during changeover.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced

standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published recommendations.

3.3 DEMOLITION

A. Perform selective demolition Work in a systematic manner. Use such methods as required to

complete Work indicated on Drawings in accordance with demolition schedule and governing

regulations.

B. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with

construction to remain using power driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power driven

impact tools.

C. Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and promptly remove debris to avoid

imposing excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

D. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by local authorities

having jurisdiction.

E. Demolish foundation walls to a depth of not less than 12 inches below existing ground surface.

Demolish and remove below grade wood or metal construction. Break up below grade

concrete slabs.

F. For interior slabs on grade, use removal methods that will not crack or structurally disturb

adjacent slabs or partitions. Use power saw where possible.

G. Completely fill below grade areas and voids resulting from demolition Work. Provide fill

consisting of approved earth, gravel, or sand, free of trash and debris, stones over 6 inches in

diameter, roots, or other organic matter.

H. Remove culvert or sewer pipe for reuse by careful excavation of all material on the top and

sides so that the pipe will not be damaged. Removal of sewer appurtenances shall be included

for removal with the pipe. Remove pipe which are unsatisfactory for reuse, and dispose of, off

the Project Site.


Page 4 of 5

I. Concrete parts of structures below the permanent ground-line shall be neatly squared off with

reinforcement cut off close to the concrete.

J. Dismantle steel structures or steel portions of structures in sections determined by the Owner's

Representative.

1. The sections shall be of such weight and dimensions which permit convenient

handling, hauling and storing.

2. Rivet and bolts connecting steel rail members, steel beams or girder spans and steel

stringers of truss spans will be removed by cutting the heads with a cold cut then

punching or drilling by a method that will not injure the member for reuse.

3. The removal of rivets and bolts from connections will not be required unless

specifically indicated.

4. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall have the option of dismantling these

members by flame cutting immediately adjacent to the connection.

5. Flame-cutting will not be permitted when Drawings call for the structural unit to be

salvaged in such a manner as to permit re-erection. In such cases, all members shall be

carefully dismantled without damage, match marked with paint, and all rivets and bolts

removed from the connections.

K. Remove brick and stone structures by sledging the masonry into removal sizes. Portions of

such structures below the permanent ground-line, which will not in any manner interfere with

the proposed construction, may be left in place, but removal shall be carried at least two feet

below the permanent ground-line and neatly squared off.

L. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended

function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the

conflict. Submit report to Owner's Representative in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt

of directive from Owner's Representative, rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary

to continue overall job progress without undue delay.

3.4 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

A. Back-fill to the level of the original ground-line, all excavation made in, and all openings

below, the natural ground-line caused by the removal of old structures or portions thereof.

B. That portion of the back-fill which will support any portion of the roadbed or paving shall be

placed in layers of the same thickness as those required subgrade preparation.

1. Material in each layer shall be wetted uniformly, if required, and shall be compacted to

the density required in the adjoining embankment. In places inaccessible to blading

and rolling equipment, mechanical or hand tampers shall be used to obtain the required

compaction.

2. Place that portion of the back-fill which will not support any portion of the roadbed or

paving in such a manner, and compact, to preclude settling.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS


Page 5 of 5

A. Remove from building Site debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition

operations. Transport and legally dispose off Site.

1. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with

applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling, and

protection against exposure or environmental pollution.

2. Burning of removed materials is not permitted on the Project Site.

3.6 CLEANUP AND REPAIR

A. Upon completion of demolition Work, remove tools, equipment, and demolished materials

from the Project Site. Remove protections and leave interior areas broom clean.

B. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return elements of construction and

surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to start operations. Repair adjacent construction

or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition Work.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 028500- MOLD REMEDIATION

Page 1 of 14

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The Scope of work is as follows:

1. Remove all ceiling tile and grid systems, including all HVAC flex ducting and branch

lines back to main trunk ducting;

2. Remove all drywall wall systems and associated framing and office doors throughout;

3. Remove all electrical conduit back to panel-boxes in mechanical rooms;

4. Treat remaining intact plaster wall and ceiling surfaces with antimicrobial solution

and Mold inhibitor (main hallways and stairwells throughout);

5. Molding, plaster ceilings and walls, decorative columns, and light fixtures are

intended to be salvaged and should be properly cleaned and preserved when possible;

6. Each Work Area/Floor is to be fully contained, placed under negative pressure with

HEPA filtration, with adequate commercial de-humidifiers installed for the duration

of the Mold Remediation;

7. Mold Air Clearance criterion will be inside general and concentrations being like-

kind to outside readings at time of testing; and

8. Contractor is to provide a detailed Work Plan and Sequence regarding their approach

to both the asbestos and Mold scopes of work.

B. The Mold Remediation Contractor shall be aware of all conditions of the Project and is

responsible for verifying quantities and locations of all Work to be performed. Failure to do

so shall not relieve the Mold Remediation Contractor of its obligation to furnish all labor,

Personal Protection Equipment, and materials necessary to perform the Work. All Work

shall be performed in strict accordance with the Project Documents and all governing codes,

rules, regulations and guidelines. Where conflicts occur between the Project Documents and

applicable codes, rules, regulations and guidelines, the more stringent shall apply.

C. Working hours shall be as required and approved by the Owner. Mold removal activities

including, but not limited to, mold remediation area preparation, gross removal activities,

cleaning activities, waste removal, etc. may need to be performed during ‘off-hours’

(including nights and weekends). In addition, multiple mobilizations may be required to

perform the work identified in this project. The Mold Remediation Contractor shall

coordinate all Work with the facility and Owner’s representative regarding scheduling.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Pre-Work Submittals:

1. Within 7 days prior to the pre-construction conference, the Mold Remediation

Contractor shall submit 3 copies of the documentation listed below:


Page 2 of 14

B. Valid Mold Remediation Contractor license.

C. Mold Remediation Work Plan. List of procedures proposed for use in performance of the

work, when required:

1. List all mold remediation areas and containments, including the quantities of

materials to be cleaned or removed in each area or containment,

2. Locations and types of all decontamination enclosures,

3. Entrances and exits to each mold remediation area and/or containments,

4. Type of remediation activity, technique for each mold remediation area and/or

containment,

5. Procedures to be utilized for any cleaning and disinfecting solutions, and the

proposed list of EPA registered biocides, disinfectants and microbial coatings to be

utilized on the project,

6. Mold remediation project notification signs to be displayed at all accessible entrances

to mold remediation areas,

7. Number and location of High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) filters and exhaust

locations to the outside, with calculations for determining the number of HEPA

filters, based on a minimum of 4 air changes per hour,

8. Procedures for temporary dehumidification of mold remediation area in accordance

with contract documents, including section 2.10 of this Part

9. Location of water and electric connections for each mold remediation area,

D. Waste removal procedures and transport routes from the mold remediation area to the waste

storage container.

1. Note: Proposed work plan shall include marked-up drawing(s) of the project mold

remediation area(s) indicating proposed locations for decontamination units, negative

air exhaust, dehumidification units (inside mold remediation area), waste dumpster,

contractor parking, equipment storage, remediation area entrance/exit points, and

water and electrical supply.

E. Safety Data Sheets (SDS)

1. Provide an SDS on the EPA registered products selected for use on this project.

Substitution of alternative products is not permitted without authorization.

F. Progress Schedule:

1. Provide an estimate of manpower to be utilized and the time required for completion

of each major mold remediation area. Include estimated size, number of crews and

work shifts.

G. Project Close-out Submittals:


Page 3 of 14

1. Within 30 days of the completion of each remediation phase, the Contractor shall

submit one hard copy of the documents listed below and one copy to the

environmental consultant for review and approval and one set to be distributed to the

facility prior to Contractor’s final payment.

H. Daily Project Logs.

I. Provide the Contractor’s Acknowledgement Statement (Appendix A) that lists all Workers

used in the performance of the Project.

1.3 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. Prior to start of preparatory Work under the Contract, the Mold Remediation Contractor shall

attend a pre-construction conference attended by the Owner, Facility Personnel, and

Environmental Consultant.

B. Agenda for this conference shall include but not limited to:

1. Mold Remediation Contractor’s scope of Work,

2. Review of pre-work submittals and on-site documentation,

3. Review of Work procedures including:

a. Job site preparation,

b. Pre-cleaning of surfaces,

c. Handling of moveable objects,

d. Mold remediation area containment, including non-moveable objects

e. Removal methods and decontamination,

f. Final inspection and clearance preparation,

4. Building occupant notifications,

5. Environmental Consultant’s duties, functions, and authority,

6. Temporary utilities,

7. Waste handling procedures and storage for disposal.

C. In conjunction with the conference the Mold Remediation Contractor shall accompany the

Owner and Environmental Consultant on a pre-construction walk-through documenting

existing conditions of finishes and furnishings, review overall Work Procedures, location of

fire exits, fire protection equipment, water supply and temporary electric tie-in.

1.4 APPLICABLE GUIDANCE DOCUMENTS, REGULATIONS AND COMPLIANCE


Page 4 of 14

A. The Mold Remediation Contractor shall comply with the following guidance documents and

regulations, pertaining to Work practices, protection of Workers, authorized visitors to the

site and property adjacent to the Work, except where more stringent requirements are

specified.

B. Guidance Documents:

1. United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Mold Remediation in Schools

and Commercial Buildings, EPA 402-K-01-001.

C. Federal Regulations:

1. 29 CFR 1910.134, Respiratory Protection Standard (OSHA)

2. 29 CFR 1926, Construction Industry (OSHA)

3. 29 CFR 1926.417 and 1926.702, Lockout Tag-out (OSHA)

4. 29 CFR 1926.451 to 1926.1060, Fall Protection (OSHA)

5. 29 CFR 1910.1200, Hazard Communication Standard (OSHA)

1.5 NOTICES

A. The Mold Remediation Contractor shall provide and coordinate with the Environmental

Consultant and the Owner, regarding notification to the occupants and other Contractors in

the affected area(s) of the mold presence, description of the remedial measures to be taken

and a timetable for completion. Notification signage shall be posted at all accessible

entrances to the remediation areas.

1.6 RECORD KEEPING

A. The Mold Remediation Contractor shall maintain a Daily Project Log consisting of a three

ring binder. Prior to Mold Remediation Contractor demobilization, a copy of the completed

daily project log shall be provided to the owner’s on-site representative. During the active

remediation, a copy shall be provided daily to the Environmental Consultant. The Daily

Project Log shall be utilized each day to document the following information:

1. Date and time of the project,

2. Name of Project Manager/Project Supervisor,

3. List of mold abatement workers,

4. Brief description of daily work activities,

5. Each remediation area shall have a daily sign in and sign out sheet, and the completed

daily sign in/out sheets shall be maintained in the daily progress log,

1.7 PROJECT SUPERVISOR:


Page 5 of 14

A. The Mold Remediation Contractor shall designate a full-time Project Supervisor who is

qualified Mold Abatement Worker Supervisor to enter the mold remediation areas. The

Project Supervisor must be able to read and write English fluently, as well as communicate

in the primary language of the Workers.

B. The Project Supervisor shall maintain a Daily Project Log and transmit a copy daily to the

Environmental Consultant.

C. The Project Supervisor shall be responsible for the performance of the Work and shall

represent the Mold Remediation Contractor in all respects at the Project site. The Supervisor

shall be the primary point of contact for the Environmental Consultant.

1.8 PROJECT MONITORING & ASSESSOR INSPECTIONS

A. The Owner shall engage the services of an Environmental Consultant who shall serve as the

Owner’s Representative in regard to the performance of the mold remediation Project and

provide direction as required throughout the remediation.

B. The Mold Remediation Contractor is required to ensure cooperation of its personnel with the

Environmental Consultant for the inspection, monitoring, and clearance requirements. The

Mold Remediation Contractor shall comply with all direction given by the Environmental

Consultant during the course of the Project.

C. The Environmental Consultant shall review and approve or disapprove all submittals (pre-

work, on-site, closeout), shop drawings and schedules.

D. The Environmental Consultant shall provide visual inspections prior to the start of work and

final clearance inspection of the mold remediation areas.

E. The Environmental Consultant shall provide bulk and air sampling services when required

for the Project.

1.9 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION

A. Select respirators based upon the anticipated exposure with a minimum acceptable half-face

negative pressure respirator for all mold remediation areas, and choose from those approved

by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH).

B. Respirators shall be individually fit-tested to personnel. Fit-tested respirators shall be

permanently marked to identify the individual fitted, and use shall be limited to that

individual.

C. No respirators shall be issued to personnel without such personnel participating in a

respirator training program.

D. High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) respirator filters shall be approved by NIOSH and

shall conform to the OSHA requirements in 29 CFR 1910.134.

E. A storage area for respirators shall be provided by the Mold Remediation Contractor in a

clean area of the personnel decontamination enclosure where they will be kept in a clean

environment.


Page 6 of 14

F. The Mold Remediation Contractor shall provide and make available a sufficient quantity of

respirator filters so that filter changes can be made as necessary during the work day.

G. Filters used with negative pressure air purifying respirators shall not be used any longer than

one eight (8) hour work day. Any loose respirator filters found within the mold remediation

area, must be disposed of appropriately.

H. Any authorized visitor, Worker, or supervisor found in the Mold Remediation Area not

wearing the required respiratory protection shall be removed from the Project site and not be

permitted to return.

I. The Contractor shall have at least two (2) Powered Air Purifying Respirators stored on site

designated for authorized visitors use. Appropriate respirator filters for authorized visitors

shall be made available by the Contractor.

1.10 TRAINING

A. As required by applicable federal and state laws/regulations, prior to assignment to mold

remediation work, provide yearly fit test and instruct each employee with regard to use of

respirators, and protective clothing,

B. Instruct each worker regarding site-specific safety measures and emergency egress

procedures,

C. Provide hazard communication (HAZCOM) training regarding the potential for exposure to

microbials (e.g., mold, bacteria, and fungi), cleaning agents, anti-fungal coatings, and any

other hazard(s) expected to be encountered during the mold remediation work. The training

shall include how to recognize materials contaminated with mold, bacteria, and fungi; signs

and symptoms of and hazards associated with exposure to mold, fungal, and bacterial

contamination; how to prevent contamination outside the mold remediation area; and how

employees can protect themselves from the expected exposures. Other identified hazard(s)

shall be similarly addressed.

1.11 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

A. Shut down and lock out all electrical power to the Mold Remediation Areas.

B. Where available, obtain power from the Owner’s existing system or provide temporary 120-

240 volt, single phase, three wire, 100 amp electric service with Ground Fault Circuit

Interrupters (GFCI) for all electric requirements within the Mold Remediation Area.

1. Where available, obtain from Owner's existing system. Otherwise provide power

from other sources (i.e. generator).

2. Provide temporary wiring and "weatherproof" receptacles in sufficient quantity and

location to serve all HEPA equipment and tools.

3. Provide wiring and receptacles as required by the Environmental Consultant for

project monitoring and air sampling equipment (pumps, fans, leaf blowers, etc.), if

necessary for intended tasks.


Page 7 of 14

4. All power to the Mold Remediation Area shall be brought in from outside the area

through GFCI's at the source.

C. Provide temporary lighting with "weatherproof" fixtures for all mold remediation areas

including decontamination areas.

1. The entire Mold Remediation Area shall be kept illuminated at all times.

2. Provide lighting as required by the Environmental Consultant for the purposes of

performing required inspections.

D. All temporary devices and wiring used in the Mole Remediation Area shall be capable of

decontamination procedures including HEPA vacuuming and wet-wiping.

E. Utilize domestic water service, if available, from Owner's existing system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING

A. Provide personnel utilized during the Project with disposable protective whole body clothing,

head coverings, gloves and foot coverings. Provide disposable plastic or rubber gloves to

protect hands. Cloth gloves may be worn inside the plastic or rubber for comfort, but shall

not be used alone. Make sleeves secure at the wrists and make foot coverings secure at the

ankles by the use of tape, or provide disposable coverings with elastic wrists or tops.

B. The Mold Remediation Contractor shall not under any circumstances permit any person to

enter the mold remediation areas without the appropriate protective clothing and equipment.

The Mold Remediation Contractor shall provide protective clothing for use by the

Environmental Consultant. The Mold Remediation Contractor shall furnish as many sets as

required for full-time monitoring.

C. Eye protection and hard hats shall be provided and made available for all personnel entering

any Mold Remediation Area.

D. Authorized visitors shall be provided with suitable protective clothing, headgear, eye

protection, and footwear whenever they enter the Mold Remediation Area.

2.2 HEPA FILTER EQUIPMENT

A. All negative air filtrations units and vacuum units shall be equipped with a High Efficiency

Particulate Air filters.

2.3 CLEANING & DISINFECTING AGENTS

A. Provide standard detergents to be used for cleaning and that shall be diluted in water and

used in a manner as directed by manufacturer labeling.

B. If approved for use by the Owner and Environmental Consultant in writing, any disinfecting

agents shall be utilized as directed by manufacturer labeling.

2.4 ANTI-FUNGAL COATING


Page 8 of 14

A. Provide anti-fungal coating approved for use by the Owner and Environmental Consultant in

writing.

2.5 POLYETHYLENE SHEETING

A. A. Provide fire-retardant polyethylene sheeting film in the largest sheet size possible to

minimize seams, 6-mil thick.

2.6 DUCT TAPE

A. A. Provide duct tape with an adhesive that is formulated to stick aggressively to sheet

polyethylene and other surfaces where it will be used to create a seal.

2.7 DISPOSAL BAGS

A. Provide unlabeled, 6-mil thick, leak-tight polyethylene bags.

2.8 BARRIER TAPE

A. Provide yellow or red plastic caution tape 3 inches wide. “Asbestos” or “Lead” wording on

the tape is not permitted.

2.9 DECONTAMINATION AREA

A. The Contractor shall provide a decontamination space for the purpose of separating each

mold remediation area from the non-remediation areas of the building. This space/area

provides for entering the remediation area, returning to the clean environment, cleaning of

persons and equipment, and movement of properly contained waste material.

2.10 WARNING SIGNAGE

A. Provide signage with a minimum size of 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches with a white background

on which is printed in large type with wording in the format shown below:

MOLD REMEDIATION

DO NOT ENTER

AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY

RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING


Page 9 of 14

ARE REQUIRED IN THIS AREA


Page 10 of 14

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The scope of work includes removal of visual fungal growth on contaminated materials. The

Mold Remediation Contractor shall generate a Mold Remediation Work Plan based upon the

contract documents. The Work Plan shall be submitted and approved prior to its

implementation. The remediation procedures shall be identified in the Work Plan for each

remediation mold remediation area based on the size, complexity and remediation methods

required.

B. The following submittals, documentation, and postings shall be maintained on-site by the

Mold Remediation Contractor during remediation activities at a location approved by the

Environmental Consultant:

1. Project documents (specifications and drawings.)

2. Approved Mold Remediation Work Plan

3. Building Occupant Notification.

4. Applicable laws and regulations.

5. Safety Data Sheets of supplies/chemicals used on the Project.

6. Disposal Site/Landfill Permit from applicable regulatory agency.

7. List of emergency telephone numbers.

8. Daily Project Log.

9. Entry/Exit Logs.

C. The following documentation shall be maintained on-site by the Environmental Consultant

during abatement activities:

1. Project Monitor Daily Log

2. Assessor’s Written Report

3. Completed Assessor Post-Remediation Visual Clearance Inspection Summaries

3.2 CONTAINMENT BARRIERS

A. When containment of the mold remediation areas is not necessary, dust suppression methods

shall be utilized.


Page 11 of 14

B. When containment of the mold remediation area is required, the Mold Remediation

Contractor must be careful not to disturb fungal contaminated building materials while

isolating mold remediation areas to prevent the release of fungal spores. Pre-cleaning of

interior surfaces shall be completed prior to the erection of the containment. Moveable

objects within the mold remediation area shall be discarded or HEPA vacuumed, wet-wiped

and removed from the area or isolated from the work. Workers shall wear respirators when

required, while installing isolation barriers if fungal contaminated surfaces (walls or surfaces

with visible settled dusts) are likely to be disturbed. The Mold Remediation Contractor shall

completely isolate the mold remediation areas for the duration of the work by sealing off all

walls, floors, openings, and fixtures in the mold remediation areas including, but not limited

to, heating and ventilation supply air ducts and diffusers and return air ducts and grilles

(HVAC system totally de-energized - no HVAC system airflow into or out of mold

remediation area), return air grilles, common return air plenums, doorways, corridors,

windows, skylights, and lighting with polyethylene sheeting held securely in place as

described in this section. The containment must be constructed to prevent the spread of mold

to areas outside the containment. Warning signage shall be posted at all accessible

containment barrier locations.

C. Containment Entry and Exit Procedures shall be established as required for the work.

D. Personnel, equipment and waste decontamination procedures shall be established as required

for the work.

3.3 NEGATIVE PRESSURE

A. The Mold Remediation Contractor shall establish a negative air pressure differential inside

the indoor enclosed mold remediation areas. Negative Pressure Systems shall be exhausted

to the exterior of the building. The Mold Remediation Contractor shall ensure that negative

air pressure differential is maintained the Environmental Consultant has determined that the

mold remediation area has passed the final inspection. If the length of the exhaust will

exceed 25ft, include adequate measures in the Mold Remediation Work Plan to maintain the

required air changes (e.g. booster fans, increased exhaust tube diameter, interior exhaust to

unoccupied area, etc.). See current federal asbestos regulations for accepted practices

regarding extending length of negative air ventilation exhaust.

3.4 WORK PROCEDURES

A. All waste shall be decontaminated and/or removed under containment. As waste is removed,

it shall be placed into a disposal container promptly. Disposal procedures, at a minimum,

shall consist of single bagging using 6-mil polyethylene bags or single wrapped with 6-mil

polyethylene sheeting. Bags shall be taped to form an airtight seal. Waste from HEPA-

filtered vacuums shall be single bagged in 6-mil polyethylene bags.

B. The Mold Remediation Contractor at all times shall keep the site and mold remediation area

free from accumulations of bagged material or rubbish caused by its operations and free from

any flammable materials or other source of fire hazard.

C. All visually contaminated materials and adjacent visually uncontaminated material shall be

cleaned and/or removed under full containment unless specified otherwise.


Page 12 of 14

D. Cleaning and disinfecting agents shall be utilized to clean all remaining surfaces within the

mold remediation area(s).

E. In the event that areas adjoining the enclosed project area become or are suspected of

becoming contaminated with spores as a result of the Mold Remediation Contractor's work,

the Mold Remediation Contractor shall thoroughly clean the affected areas. These areas

shall be subject to detailed visual inspection and potentially post-remediation clearance

sampling by the Environmental Consultant.

3.5 CLEARANCE PREPARATION

A. When containment areas are not utilized, the mold remediation area and areas used by

remedial workers for egress shall be cleaned.

B. When containment is utilized, all mold remediation area surfaces and layers of polyethylene

barrier sheeting shall be cleaned. If negative pressure is utilized, the negative air machines

shall remain in operation until notified by the Environmental Consultant of satisfactory

clearance.

3.6 POST-REMEDIATION CLEARANCE INSPECTIONS

A. After all visible accumulations of material and debris are removed the Mold Remediation

Contractor shall notify the Environmental Consultant Assessor for a post-remediation final

clearance visual inspection/assessment. The Mold Remediation Contractor and

Environmental Consultant shall conduct a thorough visual inspection of the mold

remediation area. The Environmental Consultant shall inspect the remaining building

materials for the presence of moisture, utilizing a moisture meter to test porous materials. If

during this inspection, any visible dust, debris and/or water damage is observed, visible mold

growth is present on any surface, and/or moisture elevated above material-specific levels is

detected for any impacted building material within the mold remediation area, the Mold

Remediation Contractor shall remove, re-clean, and/or dehumidify as required. The Mold

Remediation Contractor shall pay all associated costs for the re-cleaning dehumidification,

and additional post-remediation verification inspection and any sampling services.

B. Post-remediation verification sampling (if requested by the Owner) shall proceed only upon

written notice of successful post-remediation visual clearance issued by the Environmental

Consultant (Mold Assessor).

C. Application of any anti-fungal coating shall proceed only upon receipt written notice of

successful post-remediation verification visual inspection (and post-remediation verification

sampling, if requested by Owner) issued by the Environmental Consultant. The anti-fungal

coating shall not be applied prior to the post-remediation verification process.

D. Breakdown of containment shall proceed only upon receipt of clearance issued by the

Environmental Consultant Assessor and completion of anti-fungal coating application. No

person shall remove or dismantle any containment structures or materials from a project site

prior to receipt by the mold remediation contractor of satisfactory clearance as determined by

the licensed mold assessment firm and described in the NYS DOL mold law.


Page 13 of 14

E. The post-remediation Assessor inspection/assessment shall also include verification that the

underlying cause of the mold has been remediated so that it is reasonably certain that the

mold will not return to the remediated area.

3.7 POST-REMEDIATION VERIFICATION SAMPLING(IF REQUESTED BY OWNER

A. The Environmental Consultant may conduct post-remediation air or dust sampling, at

discretion of owner. Samples shall be analyzed by an AIHA accredited microbiological

laboratory.

3.8 RESTORATION OF UTILITIES, FIRESTOPPING AND FINISHES

A. After final clearance, remove locks and restore electrical and HVAC systems. All temporary

power shall be disconnected, power lockouts removed and power restored. All temporary

plumbing shall be removed.

B. Finishes damaged by the Mold Remediation Contractor including, but not limited to,

plaster/paint damage due to duct tape and spray adhesives, and floor tile lifted due to wet or

humid conditions, shall be restored and/or replaced prior to final payment. All foam and

expandable foam products and materials used to seal mold remediation area openings shall

be completely removed upon completion of remediation activities.

C. All penetrations through fire rated construction shall be fire stopped using materials and

systems tested in accordance with ASTM E814 on Projects where re-insulation is part of the

required work.

END OF SECTION


Page 14 of 14

APPENDIX A

CONTRACTOR’S ACKNOWLEDGEMENT STATEMENT

Re: Mold Remediation

_______________________________________________________________

(Project Title)

_______________________________________________________________

(Project Location)

_______________________________

(Project Number)

In consideration of the following individuals’ employment in connection with the remediation, handling,

and disposal of mold impacted materials at the referenced project, I hereby certify that the employees:

a) have received the medical examinations required by OSHA 29 CFR 1926.134;

b) have been fit tested specifically for respirators used on the Project; and

c) have received training as required

Employee Name

____________________________________

____________________________________

____________________________________

____________________________________

____________________________________

____________________________________

____________________________________

____________________________________

____________________________________

____________________________________

____________________________________

Supervisor Signature

____________________________________

SECTION 028510- LEAD AND ASBESTOS MATERIALS MITIGATION

Page 1 of 2

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This work includes demolition of surface coverings, lead abatement and asbestos abatement

services.

B. Prepare an OM Plan establishing methods to either:

1. Encapsulate the Lead and Asbestos within the building in order to allow for

occupancy of the building.

2. An interior demolition approach (i.e., an interior scrape) on all floors of the building.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The Scope of work is as follows:

1. Remove all ceiling tile and grid systems, including all HVAC flex ducting and branch

lines back to main trunk ducting;

2. Remove all drywall wall systems and associated framing and office doors throughout;

3. Remove/abate all carpet and asbestos-containing floor tile and mastic throughout;

4. Remove all raised metal platform flooring throughout

5. Remove all destroyed furniture/abandoned office equipment/cubicles throughout;

6. Remove bathroom fixtures and flooring;

7. Scrape all loose paint and plaster from deteriorating surfaces observed in stairwells

and hallways/corridors (original plaster wall finishes) back to feathered-out intact

finishes (paint ready or plaster repair ready);

8. Remove all electrical conduit back to panel-boxes in mechanical rooms;

9. Molding, plaster ceilings and walls, decorative columns, and light fixtures are

intended to be salvaged and should be properly cleaned and preserved when possible;

10. Each Work Area/Floor is to be fully contained, placed under negative pressure with

HEPA filtration, with adequate commercial de-humidifiers installed for the duration

of the Mold Remediation;

11. Contractor is to provide generator(s) to power their electrical equipment, and water

adequate for wetting asbestos for proper removal and disposal;

12. Contractor is to provide on-site Porta-Potties for duration of project;

13. Asbestos Air Clearance criterion will be the T.E.M. Standard per each work

area/floor;

SECTION 028510- LEAD AND ASBESTOS MATERIALS MITIGATION

Page 2 of 2

14. Contractor is to provide a detailed Work Plan and Sequence regarding their

approach to the asbestos and lead abatement scopes of work.

1.3 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS:

A. All workers are required to be certified asbestos workers.

B. All workers are required to don proper PPE.

C. All workers are required to separate asbestos waste for proper disposal and provide

documentation.

D. The Owner will label any furniture, fixtures, craftsman’s finish, etc., to be

saved/moved/salvaged/ restored, etc.

E. The progress of the entire job must be documented from start to finish with

before/during/after photos.

F. Contractor must obtain all necessary permits to complete the work.

G. All bidders must be licensed, qualified, and understand how to identify the most effective

and efficient methods to complete this project.

1.4 HEALTH & SAFETY

A. Contractor must submit a Health & Safety Plan upon contract award. Removal methods and

all related work must be in conformance with U.S. Occupational Safety and Health

Administration (OSHA) regulations and all applicable state and local regulatory

requirements.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 5- METALS Government of the Virgin Islands, Department of Public Works

SECTION 05100 – STRUCTURAL STEEL Government of the Virgin Islands, Department of Public Works

Page 1 of 11

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Work Included in This Section:

1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services, etc. required for the fabrication,

shipping, and erection of all structural steel as indicated on the Drawings, Specified herein,

or otherwise required for a complete and proper job.

2. In general, structural steel is that work defined in American Institute of Steel Construction

(AISC) "Code of Standard Practice" and may include, but shall not necessarily be limited to,

all columns, beams, base plates, leveling plates, relieving angles, angles, channels, braces,

stiffeners, separator plates, clips, connections, welding filler metal and electrodes, anchor

bolts, connection bolts, erection bolts, and all related materials as required.

3. Rigid masonry anchors welded to steel structure shall be provided as a part of the Work of

this Section.

B. Materials Furnished but Installed Elsewhere:

1. Anchor bolts, loose bearing plates, embedded angles, embedded connection plates with

studs, etc. shall be furnished under the Work of this Section and placed under the Work of

SECTION 03300: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE if set in concrete, or the Work of

SECTION 04810: UNIT MASONRY AND MORTAR if set in masonry.

C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. SECTION 03300: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2. SECTION 05400: COLD FORMED METAL

FRAMING

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

Submit product data, test reports and installation instructions, steel mill report for each type;

structural steel primer paint, high-strength bolts, nuts and washers for each type.

B. Shop Drawings:

Submit shop drawings of all Work specified herein:

1. Shop drawings shall indicate all details and schedules for shop fabrication and assembly and

erection, including, but not limited to, cuts, copes, camber, connections, and holes. All

welds, both shop and field, shall be indicated by AWS "Welding Symbols" and show size,

length, and type of each weld. Provide setting drawings, templates, and direction for

installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed as a part of this Work and

the Work of other Sections.

2. Note that it shall be the responsibility of the fabricator's detailer to indicate all details

required for the proper execution of the Work, regardless of the extent to which details are

represented on the Contract Documents.


Page 2 of 11

3. All exposed (exposed to view following project completion), connections shall be clearly

identified and detailed on the shop drawings.

4. For structural steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include structural

analysis data prepared by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their

preparation.

5. The review of shop drawings will be for size and arrangement of principal and auxiliary

members only. Any errors in quantities and/or dimensions shown on shop drawings shall be

the responsibility of the Contractor.

C. Certifications:

Submit the following certifications:

1. Steel fabricator’s in-plant special inspections program including: registration of special

inspections program, written procedural and quality control manuals, and evidence of

periodic auditing of fabrication practices by an approved inspection agency.

2. Manufacturer's certificate of compliance for structural steel, bolts, nuts, and washers

including mechanical properties and chemical analysis, direct-tension indicators, tension-

control high strength bolt-nut-washer assemblies and shear stud connectors.

3. Manufacturer's certificate of compliance for weld filler materials.

4. Manufacture's certificate of compliance for shop primers and grout.

5. Welder's certifications.

6. Fabricator's post-fabrication certificate of compliance with the approved construction

documents.

D. Qualification Data:

Submit qualification data for the fabricator's professional engineer.


A. All design, fabrication, and erection of structural steel shall be in accordance with the latest

editions of the following American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) documents:

1. AISC "Specifications for Structural Steel for Buildings" including "Commentary" and

Supplements thereto as issued.

2. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Bridges and Buildings". NOTE: Delete the

following sentence from paragraph 4.2.1 of this Code: "This approval constitutes the

Owner's acceptance of all responsibility for the design adequacy of any connections

designed by the fabricator as a part of his preparation of these shop drawings."

3. AISC "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings" and Supplements thereto.

4. AISC "Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections".

5. AISC "Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single-Angle Members".


Page 3 of 11

6. RCSC-85 "Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts".

7. American Welding Society (AWS) D 1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel" and "Code for

Welding in Building Construction."

8. ASTM listed Standards by the American Society for Testing and Materials.

B. Fabricator shall be a certified member of AISC who participates in a recognized quality

assurance program. Only fabricators that maintain an agreement with an approved independent

inspection or quality control agency to conduct periodic in-plant inspections at the fabricator's

plant, at a frequency that will assure the fabricator's conformance to the requirements of the

inspection agency's approved quality control program will be approved for this project. Shop

painting applicator shall be qualified according to AISC Sophisticated Paint Endorsement or

SSPC-QP3, “Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators."

C. Installer shall be a certified member of AISC, who participates in the AISC Quality Certification

Program and is designated an AISC Certified Erector, Category CSE.

D. Welders and welding procedures shall be certified in accordance with AWS qualification

requirements. Welders shall have been certified or re-certified within the last five (5) years.

E. Exposed steel in finished spaces shall be free from scratches, dents, warps, scaling, and paint

runs, etc.

F. All exposed welds shall be ground smooth and prime coated to match original coating.

Additional filling and grinding shall be provided as required by the Project Manager and

Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner.

G. Connections:

Provide details of connections required by the D/B Documents to be selected or completed by the

structural steel fabricator to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and

restrictions indicated.

1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC "Manual of

Steel Construction, Load and Resistance Factor Design", Volume 2, Part 9 and AISC

"Manual of Steel Construction, Allowable Stress Design", Part 4.

2. Engineering Responsibility:

Fabricator's responsibilities s include using a qualified professional engineer, licensed in the

United States Virgin Islands to prepare structural analysis data for structural steel connections.

H. Pre-installation Conference:

A meeting shall be held to review the proposed materials, installation coordination and safety.

The following personnel shall be present at the meeting:

1. Design/Contractor (Project Manager, Superintendent)

2. Structural Steel Erector / Fabricator (Project Manager, Foreman)

3. Owner's Representative

4. Project Manager


Page 4 of 11

1.4 TESTING AND INSPECTIONS

A. General:

Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and tests in mill, shop, and field,

conducted by a qualified testing agency. Such inspections and tests shall not relieve the

Contractor of responsibility for providing his own inspections, quality control and materials and

fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements. Any non-compliant materials

or fabricated components shall be removed and replaced.

B. The fabricator shall submit evidence of in plant inspections in conformance with ffiC

"Structural Tests and Inspections - Inspection of Fabricators (Section 1700).

C. Testing and inspection shall be performed as required by the building code, the Contract

Documents or as otherwise directed by the Project Manager and Engineer. The cost of field

testing and inspection shall be paid for by the Contractor. If Work is found not to conform to the

Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of all further testing.

D. The Contractor and testing agency shall examine the Contract Documents and become

thoroughly familiar with the Work and related testing and inspection requirements.

E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and facilitate testing and inspection by the testing agency.

The Contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish the testing agency, upon request, with the

following:

1. Complete set of reviewed erection drawings, shop drawings, schedules, and corrective work

procedures at the fabricating shop or in the field.

2. Cutting list, order lists, material bills, and shipping lists.

3. Information as to time and place of all rollings and shipment of material to shops.

4. Representative sample pieces requested for testing.

5. Assistance for testing materials and proper facilities for inspection of the Work, in the mill,

shop, and field.

6. Access to the fabrication plant for testing agency inspection and testing.

F. The testing agency shall conduct and interpret tests and inspections, state in each report whether

tests and items inspected comply with requirements, and specifically state any deviations.

1. The testing agency may inspect structural steel at the plant prior to shipment.

2. The testing agency shall perform an inspection of the steel frame to verify compliance with

the details indicated on the Drawings and approved shop drawings, such as bracing,

stiffening, member locations, and proper application of joint details at each connection.

3. Shop and field bolted connection inspection and testing shall be in accordance with Research

Council on Structural Connections RCSC-85 "Specification for Structural Joints Using A325

or A490 Bolts", AISC specifications and building code requirements.


Page 5 of 11

4. Shop and field welding inspection and testing shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1

"Structural Welding Code Steel" and AISC specifications and building code requirements.

Weld inspectors shall be certified in accordance with AWS D1.1.

a. Welds in the structural seismic resisting system for buildings in Seismic Performance

Category C, D or E shall be inspected by ultrasonic testing or other approved methods in

accordance with building code requirements.

b. Column splice welds shall be tested by ultrasonic testing or other approved methods in

accordance with the building code requirements.

c. Base metal having a thickness more than 1.5 inches and subject to through-thickness weld

shrinkage strains shall be ultrasonically tested in accordance with building code

requirements.

G. The testing agency shall inspect and test (as required) all welded and bolted work. Weldments

and bolted connections that the testing agency determines to be unsatisfactory shall be corrected

without delay at the Contractor's expense and to the satisfaction of the testing agency. The

testing agency may require drawings showing proposed corrective work to be submitted for

approval.

H. The Contractor shall notify the testing agency five (5) days prior to the shipment of any

structural steel so that a paint inspection may be made. At these inspections, the dry mill

thickness of the paint film may be checked, and steel containing mill scale that can easily be

removed with the blade of a pocketknife will be subject to cleaning and repainting at the

expense of the Contractor.

I. Any material or workmanship that is rejected either in the mill, shop, or field shall be replaced

promptly by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Project Manager and Engineer or testing

agency.

J. The fact that steel work has been accepted at the shop shall not prevent its final rejection at the

job site, or even after it has been erected, if it is found to be defective in any way.

K. At the completion of fabrication, the fabricator shall submit a certificate of compliance to the

Project Manager, Engineer, Owner and building official stating that the Work was performed in

accordance with the approved construction documents.

1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Delivery of Materials to be Installed Under Other Sections:

1. Anchor bolts, embedment plates, and other anchorage devices that are embedded in concrete

or masonry construction shall be delivered to the project site in time to be installed before

the start of cast-in-place concrete, or masonry work.

2. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for the installation of the anchor bolts and

other devices.

B. Storage of Materials:

1. Structural steel members that are stored at the project site shall be above ground on

platforms, skids, or other supports.


Page 6 of 11

2. Steel shall be protected from corrosion.

3. Other materials shall be stored in a weathertight and dry place until ready for use in the

Work.

4. Packaged materials shall be stored in their original unbroken packages or containers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel Wide Flange Shapes:

Shall conform to ASTM A992 Grade 50 unless otherwise indicated on the Structural Drawings.

B. Structural Steel Plates, Bars and Other Shapes:

Shall conform to ASTM A 36, Grade 36.

C. Structural Tubes:

Shall conform to ASTM A500, Grade B, "Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel

Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes," or ASTM A50l, “Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless

Carbon Steel Structural Tubing" as indicated on the Structural Drawings.

D. Anchor Bolts:

Shall conform to ASTM A307 or A325 as indicated on the Structural Drawings.

E. Threaded Fasteners:

(Heavy hexagon structural bots, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened washers) shall be quenched

and tempered medium-carbon steel bolts, nuts and washers conforming to ASTM A 325. Size

shall be 3/4" unless otherwise indicated. Where indicated as galvanized, provide units that are

hot-dip zinc coated complying with ASTMA153.

F. Direct Tension Indicators:

Shall comply with ASTM F959, type as required. TC Bolts may be used in lieu of load indicator

washers.

G. Electrodes For Welding:

Shall comply with AWS Code.


Page 7 of 11

H. Non-Shrink Grout:

See SECTION 03300: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

2.2 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATING

A. Structural Steel Shop Primer:

Shall be Tnemec 10-1009 Grey at 2.0 - 3.0 mils DFT. Exposed steel shall be coated with

Tnemec 37H Chern Prime Universal Phenolic Primer.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint:

Shall be high zinc-dust content paint for re-galvanizing welds in galvanized steel, with dry film

containing not less than 94% zinc dust by weight and complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

C. All ferrous metal herein Specified shall be properly cleaned and shop primed, except at the

following locations:

1. Where hot-dip galvanized steel is specified or shown, it shall not be shop primed.

2. Where sprayed-on fireproofing is specified or shown, steel shall not be shop primed.

3. Slip critical connections, surfaces to receive shear connectors (including top flanges of

beams and girders) and contact surfaces to be field welded, shall not be shop primed.

D. Surface preparation for exterior steel shall meet requirements of the Steel Structures Painting

Council SS PC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning Standard. Surface preparation for interior steel

and steel to be fireproofed shall meet requirements of SS PC-SP3 Power Tool Cleaning

Standard.

E. Galvanizing:

Shall be "hot-dipped" process and shall conform to ASTM Al23. Assembled steel products shall

be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A386, latest edition. The weight of coating

shall be as designated in Table 1 "Comparison of Coating Weight Requirements for Hot-Dip

Galvanized Products" in accordance with the class and thickness of material.

F. All hot-dip galvanizing shall be done after fabrication. Field cutting of galvanized materials

shall be approved by the Project Manager and Engineer and shall be touched-up with liquid

galvanizing as recommended by the fabricator.

G. All hot-dip galvanized materials shall be stamped to indicate ASTM designation and ounces per

square foot of zinc coating required by the specifications.

H. A notarized affidavit of compliance to the galvanizing specified shall be submitted from the

galvanizer upon request.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel:

1. Steel shall be fabricated 'in strict accordance with the shop drawings and the AISC Standard

Specifications. All steel shall be shop fabricated. Field modifications shall not be permitted.


Page 8 of 11

2. Field verify existing conditions and all dimensions prior to fabrication.

3. Provide openings in structural members required for other building components. Reinforce

openings with steel plates appropriately sized to restore cut members to original strength.

Notify the engineer prior to proceeding with proposed cuts or modifications.

4. Punch and drill steel for attachment of other materials indicated in the Drawings or

Specifications to be attached to the steel.

B. Connections:

1. Connections, unless otherwise indicated, shall be framed beam connections and shall be in

accordance with the Standard Specifications for both bolted and welded connections.

a. All vertical holes shall be 3" on center.

b. One sided or other types of eccentric connections shall not be permitted unless indicated

on the Structural Drawings.

c. The design of members and connections for any portions of the structure not indicated on

the Drawings shall be completed by the fabricator. Connections shall be capable of

supporting the maximum uniform load of the member for the span shown and the

materials specified. Connections for girders which support other beams shall be designed

for at least 1.5 times the AISC uniform load reaction. All connection design shall be

subject to approval of the Structural Engineer.

2. Welded connections shall be used on all shop connections:

a. All welded construction shall comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance, quality

of welds and methods used to correct welding work. All welds shall develop the full

strength of the materials to be welded, unless otherwise indicated.

b. Welding shall not be done when surfaces are wet or exposed to rain, or high wind; or

when welders are exposed to inclement conditions.

c. All connections to be exposed in the finished structure shall be welded in such a manner as

to make the finished connection neat and smooth in appearance. Comply with AISC

requirements for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel.

3. Bolted connections shall be used on all field connections, using load indicator washers, or

TC Bolts, which shall be installed in accordance with Paragraph 5(e) of the Specifications

for Structural Joints.

C. Bearing Plates:

Shall be provided under ends of beams and steel joists resting on masonry and concrete.

D. Sloped Joist Seats:

Steel fabricator shall coordinate requirements for sloped joist seats with steel joist supplier.

Provide all necessary bearing angles and supports.

E. Embedded Steel Plates and Surface Mounted Plates:


Page 9 of 11

Shall be provided for beam framing connections to new and existing foundation walls, as

indicated on the Drawings.

F. Rigid Masonry Anchors:

Provide channel anchors of form and length as indicated. All columns and beams embedded

in CMU walls shall have masonry anchors welded at each side in the direction of the

wall unless otherwise indicated.

G. Anchor Bolts:

Column base plates shall have a minimum of four (4) three-quarter (3/4") inch diameter anchor

bolts. Anchor bolt length shall provide eight (8") inch minimum embedment plus three

(3") inch minimum hook and sufficient projection above concrete to provide one and one-half

(1-1/2'') inch minimum extension above top of base plate.

3.2 SHOP PAINTING

A. Steel for General Building:

1. Thoroughly clean all steel of loose mill scale, rust, dirt, weld spatter, and other foreign matter

by power tool cleaning, meeting the requirements of Steel Structures Painting Council

SSPC-SP-3. Grind smooth all sharp projections. Oil and grease deposits shall be removed

by solvent wiping, meeting the requirements of SSPC SP-1.

2. After steel has been properly prepared, apply primer paint to the steel surfaces by spray

method, assuring no running or sagging in accordance with manufacturer's directions, so

that coverage is not more than 400 square feet per gallon to provide a minimum dry film

of 2.0 mils. Apply two coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or

erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.

B. No painting shall be done in damp weather or when the steel is wet.

C. Upon delivery to the job site, steel shall be carefully unloaded and stacked away from extended

moisture conditions such as mud.

D. After erection, the erector shall retouch all portions of the shop coat chipped or damaged during

erection, and all field welds and connections, with the same paint as used for the shop coat.

E. Parts inaccessible after assembly shall be given two coats of shop primer, preferably of different

colors.

F. All steel to receive Sprayed-on Fireproofing shall be clean, free of dirt, loose scale, and oil, but

shall not receive primer.

G. Surfaces to be field welded or high strength bolted with slip-critical connections shall not be

shop primed.

3.3 GALVANIZING

A. All exterior structural steel, including lintels, relieving angles, and other steel that has any

portion exposed to the weather, and all other steel so indicated shall be galvanized.


Page 10 of 11

B. Products fabricated from rolled, pressed, and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strips, shall be

hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123, latest edition. All hot-dipped galvanized

material shall be stamped to indicate ASTM designation and ounces per square foot of zinc

coating required by the specifications. Stamp shall be the Duncan stamp as per the Duncan

Galvanizing Corp., or equivalent. Such stamps shall not be placed on portions of steel intended

to remain exposed to view.

C. The weight of coating shall be as designated in Table 1, "Comparison of Coating Weight

Requirements of Hot-Dip Galvanized Products" (ASTM Specifications) in accordance with the

class and thickness of material.

D. Only members of the American Hot-Dip Galvanizing Association, Inc. shall perform hot-dip

galvanizing.

3.4 ERECTION

A. Structural Steel:

Shall be erected in strict accordance with the Standard Specifications and Code of Standard

Practice.

3.5 ERECTION BRACING

A. Temporary erection bracing, shoring, and guying shall be provided to hold the structural

steel securely and accurately in position in a horizontal/vertical plane. Provide temporary

planking and working platforms as necessary to effectively complete the Work.

B. Bracing, shoring, and guying systems shall be designed to resist all construction and wind loads.

The systems shall be left in place until all bolting or welding is completed and all building

elements that provide lateral support for the structural frame are completed and provide a stable

structure.

C. The Contractor shall assume total responsibility for designing, installing, maintaining, and

removing all bracing, shoring, and guying required.

3.6 SETTING BASES AND BEARING PLATES

A. Clean concrete bearing surfaces to be free from bond-reducing materials. Roughen to provide

suitable bonding surfaces. Clean the bottom surface of base and bearing plates.

B. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members in wedges or other

adjusting devices.

C. Tighten anchor bolts after the supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not

remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the base or bearing

plate prior to packing with grout.

D. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no voids remain.

Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure in strict compliance with

the manufacturer's recommendations.

3.7 FIELD ASSEMBLY


Page 11 of 11

A. Structural steel frames shall be accurately assembled to the lines and elevations indicated, and

within the erection tolerances specified in the Standard Specifications.

B. Members forming parts of a complete frame or structure shall be aligned and adjusted accurately

before being fastened.

C. Structural steel members shall not be field cut or modified. Splice members only where

indicated and accepted on the shop drawings.

3.8 ERECTION BOLTS

A. On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds, and grind

smooth at exposed surfaces. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of

temporary connections, alignment and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. Do

not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins, except in secondary

bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

3.9 FIELD CUTTING

A. Do not use gas cutting torches in the field for correcting fabrication errors in primary structural

framing. Cutting shall be permitted only on secondary members that are not under stress, if

approved by the Engineer.

3.10 TOUCH-UP PAINTING

A. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop

paint by SSPC-SP2 hand tool cleaning or SSPC-SP3 power tool cleaning. Apply paint to

exposed areas using the same materials as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to

1.5 mils dry film thickness. For hot-dip galvanized surfaces, clean damaged surfaces, abrade,

and apply galvanizing repair paint in accordance with ASTM A780.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 05300 – STEEL DECKING Government of the Virgin Islands, Department of Public Works

Page 1 of 6

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Work Included in This Section:

1. Provide all labor, material, equipment and services, etc. required to furnish and install all

steel decking as indicated on the Drawings, Specified herein, or otherwise required for a

complete and proper job.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. SECTION 03300: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

2. SECTION 05100: STRUCTURAL STEEL

3. SECTION 06100: ROUGH CARPENTRY

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

Submit manufacturer's specifications, deck section properties, and installation instructions for

each type of decking and accessories. Submit test data for acoustic decking and mechanical

fasteners used in lieu of welding for fastening deck to supporting structures.

B. Shop Drawings:

Submit shop drawings indicating layout and types of decking, and all details of materials, gages,

accessories, openings, anchorage, edges, finishes, welds, and other pertinent conditions.

1. The review of shop drawings will be only for conformance with the design concept of the

project and compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. The

Contractor is responsible for quantities and dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the

job site; for information that pertains to the fabrication processes or to techniques of

construction, and for coordination of the Work of all trades.

C. Certifications:

1. Submit deck manufacturer's certification that all products conform to the requirements of the

Contract Documents. The letter of certification shall accompany design computations when

submitting placement drawings for review.

2. Submit certificates for welding procedures and personnel.


A. Installer qualifications:

Installer shall be experienced, completed steel deck similar in materials, and have a record of

successful in-service performance.

B. Codes and Standards:

Metal floor and roof deck shall be fabricated and erected in accordance with the following codes


Page 2 of 6

and standards:

1. Steel Deck Institute (SDI) 'Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and Roof

Decks".

2. AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members".

3. AWS Dl.3 "Structural Welding Code- Sheet Steel".

C. Section properties shall be computed in strict accordance with the AISI Specifications. Roof

deck manufacturer's load tables shall have the approval of the Steel Deck Institute.

D. Fire-resistive Label:

Where applicable, deck shall bear Underwriters Laboratories certification for use in fire rated

assemblies as indicated elsewhere in the Drawings and Specifications.

E. Qualification of Field Welding:

All welding work shall conform AWS Structural Welding Code, most current edition. All

welders shall be qualified in accordance with AWS approved Qualification Procedures.

F. Deck Fastening Requirements:

Manufacturer shall provide deck fastening requirements to resist gross required uplift loading.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Compute the properties of metal deck sections on the basis of the effective design width as

limited by the provisions of the AISI Specifications. Provide not less than the deck section

gauge indicated.

B. Allowable Deflection:

Design and fabricate deck for a maximum deflection of L/240 of the clear span under the total

uniform dead and live load.


A. General:

In-place welded and/or fastened decking shall be inspected and tested by a qualified testing

agency. Such inspections and tests shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for

providing his own inspections, quality control and materials and fabrication procedures in

compliance with specified requirements. Any non-compliant materials or fabricated components

shall be removed and replaced.

B. Testing and inspection:

Shall be performed as required by the building code, the Contract Documents or as otherwise

directed by the Project Manager. The cost of testing and inspection shall be paid for by the

Contractor. If Work is found not to conform to the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be

responsible for the cost of all further testing.


Page 3 of 6

C. Welds and/or fasteners that the testing agency determines to be unsatisfactory shall be corrected

without delay at the Contractor's expense and to the satisfaction of the testing agency.


A. Protect steel deck form corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and

handling. Store deck off the ground with one end elevated for drainage. Protect decking with a

ventilated waterproof covering.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers:

Subject to compliance requirements, provide products from United Steel Deck, Inc., Wheeling

Corrugating Co. BHP Steel Building Products USA Inc,. Consolidated Systems, Inc., Epic

Metals Corp., Marlyn Steel Products, and Nucor Corp.

B. Steel for Painted Metal Roof Deck:

Fabricate panels, without top flange stiffening grooves, in compliance with SDI Specifications

and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck, ASTM A611, Grade C, D, or E minimum, 33 Ksi yield

minimum, shop primed gray or white, complying with FS TT-P-664.

C. Steel for Galvanized Metal Deck:

Fabricate panels, without top flange stiffening grooves, in compliance with SDI Specifications

and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck, in compliance with ASTM A653 and the following:

1. Roof Deck: Grade 33.

D. Sheet Metal Accessories:

Shall comply with ASTM A526, commercial quality, galvanized. Pour stops and girder filers

shall be of same materials and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI

Publication 29 for overhang and slab depth.

E. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes:

Shall comply with ASTM A36.

F. Galvanizing:

Shall comply with ASTM A525, G60 unless noted otherwise.

G. Galvanizing Repair:

Where galvanized surfaces are damaged, prepare surfaces and repair in accordance with

procedures specified in ASTM A780 using a high zinc-dust content paint with dry film

containing not less than 94% zinc dust by weight, and complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

H. Primer Paint:

Shall be manufacturer's baked-on rust-inhibitive, lead-free primer paint.


Page 4 of 6

I. Flexible Closure Strips:

Shall be manufacturer's standard vulcanized, closed-cell synthetic rubber.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. General:

Form decking in lengths to span three or more supports, with flush, telescoped, or nested end

laps at ends and interlocking or nested side laps, as indicated. Painted deck shall not be used

where sprayed-on fireproofing is required.

B. Roof Decking:

Shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Metal Closure Strips:

Provide 18-gauge sheet steel shapes as required for all pour stops, closure strips screed angles,

flute closures, etc. Finish (painted or galvanized) shall match decking. Form to provide tight-

fitting closures at open ends of cells or flutes and side of decking.

D. Flexible Closure Strips:

Provide closure strips to seal bottom side of deck flutes as indicated on the Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. The installer shall examine all areas and conditions under which metal decking items are to be

installed and promptly notify the Contractor, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper

and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until all unsatisfactory

conditions have been fully corrected.

B. Decking intended to remain exposed to view shall be free from scratches, dents, warps, scaling

and paint runs.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations for types of materials,

project conditions, and intended use.


Page 5 of 6

B. Place decking on supporting steel with corrugations perpendicular to supports and adjust to final

position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting members before being

permanently fastened. End laps shall be a minimum of 2", deck bearing shall be as

recommended by the manufacturer, but not less than 2". Do not stretch or contract side lap

interlocks. End laps shall always be over supporting members.

C. Fastening Roof Deck:

1. Permanently fasten metal deck units to steel supporting members by not less than 5/8"

diameter fusion welds, or elongated welds of equal strength. Metal deck shall be welded to

all steel members contacting it.

a. Fasten to the supporting structure (minimum requirements) by welding panel ends and end

laps at a maximum spacing of six (6) inches to metal roof deck units.

2. Weld intermediate supports at a maximum spacing of twelve (12) inches.

3. Weld longitudinal edges at marginal supports at a maximum spacing of twelve (12") inches.

4. Weld or mechanically fasten side laps of adjacent units between supports at intervals not

exceeding 2'-0".

5. Fasten accessories to deck by welding.

D. Roof Openings:

Reinforce roof deck for openings as follows (unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings):

1. For openings between 8" and 15" place an angle 2" x 2" x l/4" below the deck perpendicular

to the ribs and extending 2 ribs beyond the opening. Fasten all ribs to angle with screws.

2. For openings over 15" provide a frame of angles 4" x 4" x l/4" all around, supported on bar

joists.

E. Cutting and Fitting:

Cut and neatly fit deck units and accessories around other work projecting through or adjacent to

the decking.

F. Joint Covers:

Provide metal joint covers at abutting ends and changes in direction of floor deck units, except

where taped joints are required.

G. Roof Sump Pans:

Place over openings provided in roof decking and screw/weld to top of decking surface. Space

fasteners not more than 12 inches apart and secure each corner.

H. Closure Strips:

Provide metal closure strips at open ends and edges of roof decking and in voids between

decking and duct penetrations and other construction. Weld into position to provide a complete

decking installation. Provide flexible closure strips instead of metal closure strips wherever

their use will ensure complete closure. Install with adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's


Page 6 of 6

instructions.

I. Touch-up Painting:

Wire brush, clean and touch-up damaged areas of paint or galvanizing. Protect deck from traffic

or construction damage. Touch up shop galvanized surfaces as recommended by the deck

manufacturer.

3.3 ATTACHMENTS

A. No wires, ducts, pipes, ceilings, or other suspended items may be hung from metal roof deck.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 05300 – COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING Government of the Virgin Islands, Department of Public Works

Page 1 of 12

PART 1 GENERAL



Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Exterior non-load-bearing curtain-wall framing.

2. Ceiling joist framing.

3. Gypsum sheathing and air-infiltration barriers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Uncoated Steel Thickness:

Minimum uncoated thickness of cold-formed framing delivered to the Project site shall be not

less than 95 percent of the thickness used in the cold-formed framing design. Lesser thicknesses

shall be permitted at bends due to cold forming.

B. Producer:

Entity that produces steel sheet coil fabricated into cold-formed members.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

Show layout, spacing, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing; fabrication;

and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Show reinforcing channels,

opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories,

connection details, and attachment to adjoining Work.

1. For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural

analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their

preparation.

C. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer or test reports from a qualified independent

testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements.

D. Welding Certificates:

Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.

E. Qualification Data:

For firms and persons specified in “Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities

and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names


Page 2 of 12

and addresses of Project Managers and owners, and other information specified.

F. Product Test Reports:

From a qualified testing agency indicating that each of the following complies with requirements,

based on comprehensive testing of current products:

1. Expansion anchors.

2. Power-actuated anchors.

3. Mechanical fasteners.

4. Vertical deflection clips.

5. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.

G. Research/Evaluation Reports:

Evidence of cold-formed metal framing's compliance with building code in effect for Project,

from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Installer Qualifications:

An experienced installer who has completed cold formed metal framing similar in material,

design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction

with a record of successful in service performance.

B. Engineering Responsibility:

Engage a qualified professional engineer to prepare design calculations, Shop Drawings, and

other structural data.

C. Professional Engineer Qualifications:

A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in the Virgin Islands and who is

experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are

defined as those performed for installations of cold-formed metal framing that are similar to

those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.


Page 3 of 12

D. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer or test reports from a qualified independent

testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including uncoated steel

thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, ductility, and

galvanized-coating thickness.

E. Testing Agency Qualifications:

An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according

to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

F. Welding:

Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D 1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel,"

and AWS Dl.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

G. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:

Where metal framing is part of a fire resistance rated assembly, provide framing identical to that

of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings:

Indicated by GA File Numbers in GA-600, “Fire Resistance Design Manual," or by design

designations from UL’s "Fire Resistance Directory” or from the listings of another testing and

inspecting agency.

H. AISI Specifications:

Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members" or

"Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Cold Formed Steel Structural Members"

and the following for calculating structural characteristics of cold formed metal framing:

1. CCFSS Technical Bulletin:

"AISI Specification Provisions for Screw Connections."

I. Pre-installation Conference:

Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project

Meetings."

J. Engineering Criteria:

The maximum allowable deflection (due to wind load) of framing supporting masonry veneer

walls shall be L/720. The maximum allowable lateral deflection of general interior partition

framing shall be L/240. Engineering of interior metal stud systems shall accommodate a lateral

load of 5 psf.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during

delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Store cold-formed metal framing protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid

condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


Page 4 of 12

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers:

Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering cold-formed metal framing that

may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers:

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cold-formed metal framing by one of the

following:

1. Clark Steel Framing Industries.

2. Consolidated Systems, Inc.

3. Dale Industries, Inc.

4. Dietrich Industries, Inc.

5. MarinoWare; Div. of Ware Industries, Inc.

6. Steel Construction Systems.

7. Super Stud Building Products, Inc.

8. Unimast, Inc.

9. Hexaport International Ltd.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet:

ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows:

1. Grade:

50 (340), Class 1 or 2 50 (340), Class 3.

2. Coating:

G60 (ZI80) G90 (Z275).

2.3 NON-LOAD-BEARING CURTAIN-WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs:

Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened

flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows:

1. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness:

0.0538 inch (1.37 mm).

2. Flange Width:

1-5/8 inches (41 mm).


Page 5 of 12

B. Steel Track:

Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, not punched, with

unstiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows:

1. Minimum Uncoated Steel Thickness:

0.0538-inch (1.37 mm) Matching steel studs.

2. Flange Width:

1 -1/4 inches (32 mm).

C. Single Deflection Track:

Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; not punched, with unstiffened flanges, of

web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to

support horizontal and lateral loads, and as follows:

1. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness:

0.0538 inch (1.37 mm).

2. Flange Width:

2 1/2 (65 mm)1/2 inch.

D. Double Deflection Tracks:

Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested inner and outer

tracks; not punched, with unstiffened flanges.

1. Outer Track:

Of web depth to allow free vertical movement of inner track, with flanges designed to support

horizontal and lateral loads, and as follows:

a. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0538 inch (1 .37 mm).

b. Flange Width: 2 inches (50 mm)

2. Inner Track:

Of web depth indicated, and as follows:

a. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0538 inch ( 1.37 mm).

b. Flange Width: 3-1/2 inches is typical.

E. Vertical Deflection Clips:

Manufacturer's standard bypass clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical

displacement of primary structure.

2.4 CEILING JOIST FRAMING

A. Steel Ceiling Joists:

Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, not punched, with

stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows:


Page 6 of 12

1. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm).

2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm), minimum.

2.5 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories of the same material and finish used for framing members,

with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa).

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer’s standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise

indicated, as follows:

1. Supplementary framing.

2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.

3. Web stiffeners.

4. End clips.

5. Foundation clips.

6. Gusset plates.

7. Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts.

8. Joist hangers and end closures.

9. Hole reinforcing plates.

10. Backer plates.

2.6 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips:

ASTM A 240/A 666, Stainless Steel Type 316

B. Anchor Bolts:

ASTM A 240/A 666, Stainless Steel Type 316, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and

carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers.

C. Expansion Anchors:

Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load

equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified

independent testing agency.

D. Power-Actuated Anchors:

Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion resistant

materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as

determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.


Page 7 of 12

E. Mechanical Fasteners:

Corrosion resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-threading steel drill screws.

1. Head Type:

Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer’s standard elsewhere.

F. Welding Electrodes:

Comply with AWS standards.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint:

SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035 ASTM A 780.

B. Nonmetallic, Non-shrink Grout:

Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, non-staining grout containing selected silica sands,

Portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents,

complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time.

C. Thermal Insulation:

ASTM C 665, Type I, un-faced mineral-fiber blankets produced by combining glass or slag

fibers with thermosetting resins.

2.8 GYPSUM SHEATHING

A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board:

ASTM C 1177/C 1177M.

1. Type and Thickness:

Type X, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) thick.

2. Size:

48 by 96 inches (1219 mm by 2438 mm).

3. Available Product:

Subject to compliance with requirements, a product that may be incorporated into the Work

includes, but is not limited to, "Dens-Glass Gold" by Georgia-Pacific Corp.

2.9 SHEATHING ACCESSORIES

A. Air-Infiltration Barrier:

Asphalt-saturated organic felt, ASTM D 226, Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt felt), unperforated for use

where cavity wall rigid insulation not installed with brick veneer or where EIFS systems not

employed.

B. Fasteners:

Steel drill screws, ASTM C 954, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness

of sheathing board to be attached, with organic polymer or other corrosion-protective coating

having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.


Page 8 of 12

2.10 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with

connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and

requirements in this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.

2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.

3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with

fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS Dl.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality

of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw

penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.

4. Fasten other materials to cold -formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening,

according to Shop Drawings.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection

stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.

C. Fabrication Tolerances:

Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of

1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:


Page 9 of 12

1. Spacing:

Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan

location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or

other finishing materials.

2. Squareness:

Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8

inch (3 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed

with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Grout bearing surfaces uniform and level to ensure full contact of bearing flanges or track webs

on supporting concrete or masonry construction.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field

assembled.

B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to ASTM C 1007, unless more stringent

requirements are indicated.

C. Install shop or field fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting

structure.

1. Bolt or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-

line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not

exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

D. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with

connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and

requirements in this Section.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.

2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with

fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality

of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw

penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.


Page 10 of 12

E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated for track

or tension members.

F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in

intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place,

undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent

connections to framing are secured.

G. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing.

Independently frame both sides of joints.

H. Install insulation in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and

multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard

punched openings.

J. Erection Tolerances:

Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable

tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan

location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or

other finishing materials.

3.4 NON-LOAD-BEARING CURTAIN-WALL INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to

supporting structure as indicated.

B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as

follows:

1. Stud Spacing:

16 inches (406 mm).

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for not plumb walls or

warped surfaces and similar requirements.

D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical

loads while providing lateral support.

1. Install single deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure.

2. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure.

3. Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing infill studs and anchor to primary building

structure.

E. Install horizontal bridging in curtain-wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but

not more than 54 inches (1370 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.

1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track:


Page 11 of 12

Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches (300 mm) of single deflection track. Install a

combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud or stud-track

solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and

secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

a. Install solid blocking at centers indicated.

2. Bridging:

Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs.

3. Bridging:

Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid

blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure

solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip

angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable

curtain wall framing system.

3.5 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION

A. General:

Install gypsum sheathing to comply with GA-253 and manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Cut boards at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of the work; fit tightly against abutting

construction, except provide a 3/8-inch (9-mm) setback where non-load-bearing construction

abuts structural elements.

C. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint sealant installation so these materials

are installed in the sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through

completed exterior wall assembly.

D. Apply fasteners so screw heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into

facing.

E. Do not bridge building expansion joints with sheathing; cut and space edges to match spacing of

structural support elements.

F. Vertical Installation:

Install 48-inch (1219-mm) 1200-mm wide gypsum sheathing boards vertically with vertical

edges centered over flanges of steel studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of

adjacent boards. Screw-attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud at

approximately 8 inches (200 mm) O.C. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch (9 mm) from edges

and ends of boards.

G. Air-Infiltration Barrier Application:

Cover sheathing with air-infiltration barrier as follows:


Page 12 of 12

1. Cut back air-infiltration barrier l/2 inch (13 mm) on each side of break in supporting

members at expansion- or control-joint locations.

2. Apply asphalt-saturated organic felt horizontally with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap and 6-inch

(150-mm) end lap; fasten to sheathing with corrosion-resistant staples.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing:

Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality-control

testing.

B. Field and shop welds will be subject to inspection and testing.

C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Project

Manager.

D. Remove and replace Work that does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements

3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs:

Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal

framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer’s written

instructions.

B. Touchup Painting:

Wire brush, clean, and paint scarred areas, welds, and rust spots on fabricated and installed

prime-painted, cold-formed metal framing. Paint framing surfaces with same type of shop paint

used on adjacent surfaces.

C. Protect paper-surfaced gypsum sheathing that will be exposed to weather for more than 30 days

by covering exposed exterior surface of sheathing with a securely fastened air-infiltration

barrier. Apply covering immediately after sheathing is installed.

D. Protect cutouts, corners, and joints in sheathing by filling with a flexible sealant or by applying

tape recommended by sheathing manufacturer at time sheathing is applied.

E. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and

Installer that ensure cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of


END OF SECTION

SECTION 05500 – MISCELLANEOUS METAL WORK Government of the Virgin Islands, Department of Public Works

Page 1 of 14

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Work included in this Section:

1. Provide all engineering, labor, materials, equipment, and services, etc., required to engineer,

furnish, and install all miscellaneous metal work and related accessories as indicated on the

Drawings, specified herein, or otherwise required for a complete and proper job.

2. The Work shall include, but shall not necessarily be limited to:

a. Miscellaneous structural steel.

b. Miscellaneous steel plates and angles.

c. Miscellaneous steel brake metal, pans, closures, trim, and other configurations.

d. Miscellaneous carpenter's iron as required.

e. Miscellaneous frames, brackets, and supports for hardware, window systems, and

equipment including all mechanical, electrical, medical, athletic, and theatrical

equipment. Including seismic bracing for all miscellaneous metal frames, stands, and

supports.

f. Miscellaneous frames and supports for special doors, operable walls, mesh partitions,

overhead supported toilet partitions.

g. Loose lintels and relieving angles not furnished under SECTION 05100: STRUCTURAL

STEEL.

h. Steel handrails and guardrails.

i. Ladders.

j. Bollards.

k. Pit covers and frames.

l. Expansion joint covers.

m. Steel corner guards.

n. Trench drains.

o. Expanded steel treads and landings.

p. Abrasive nosing for concrete stairs.

q. Support frames for benches and counters.

r. Roof blocking fastening requirements.

s. Masonry wall top clips.


Page 2 of 14

3. It shall be a requirement of the Work of this Section to thoroughly review all of the Contract

Documents and provide any and all miscellaneous metal work required for a complete and

proper job.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. SECTION 03300: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

2. SECTION 04810: UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES

3. SECTION 05100: STRUCTURAL STEEL

4. DIVISION 23: MECHANICAL

5. DIVISION 26: ELECTRICAL

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

Submit product data for manufactured products specified herein.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit shop drawings for each item or assembly. Shop drawings shall accurately and clearly

show in detail the construction, sizes, gauges, dimensions, methods of assembly, supports,

finishes, and all other pertinent data and information.

a. Submit stair, ladder, and railing shop drawings drawn at not less than 1A" scale with

components shown in related positions. Provide larger scale custom details, control

details and dimensions not governed by job conditions. Show all required field

measurements.

b. Submit lintel fabrication schedule including location, type, size, length, and finish (primed

or galvanized coating class).

C. Certifications:

1. Submit manufacturer's certification that the stairs, platforms, railings, and ladders provided

are in full compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are totally

suitable for the proposed installations when installed in accordance with the shop drawings.

2. Submit certificates indicating that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification

tests for welding processes involved and if pertinent, has undergone re-certification.

3. Steel fabricator's in-plant special inspections program including: registration of special

inspections program, written procedural and quality control manuals and evidence of

periodic auditing of fabrication practices by an approved inspection agency.


A. Delivery of Materials:

Deliver, store and handle components in such a manner as to prevent damage to finished

surfaces.


Page 3 of 14

B. Storage of Materials:

Store components in a dry, clean location, away from uncured masonry and concrete. Cover with

tarpaulin or polyethylene sheeting.


A. Welding Standards:

Comply with applicable provisions of ASW D1.1 "Structural Welding Code- Steel" and ASW

D1.3 "Structural Welding Code Sheet Steel."

B. Stair and railing fabricator shall be a certified member of AISC who participates in a recognized

quality assurance program and who is regularly inspected by an independent testing/inspection

agency.

1. In the absence of the above requirements, the fabricator shall be required to hire and pay for

an independent testing/inspection agency approved by the Owner, to monitor fabrication and

perform random testing of all stairs and railing fabrication procedures.

2. The fabricator shall submit evidence to the Owner indicating satisfactory completion of

projects of similar scope and that fabrication facilities are adequate to meet production

requirements.

C. Fabricator's Qualifications:

Only fabricators that maintain an agreement with an approved independent inspection or quality

control agency to conduct periodic in-plant inspections at the fabricator's plant, at a frequency

that will assure the fabricator's conformance to the requirements of the inspection agency's

approved quality control program will be approved for this project.


A. General:

Stair and railing materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and tests in mill,

shop, and field, conducted by a qualified testing agency. Such inspections and tests shall not

relieve the Contractor of responsibility for providing his own inspections, quality control and

materials and fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements. Any non-

compliant materials or fabricated components shall be removed and replaced.


Page 4 of 14

B. The fabricator shall submit evidence of in-plant inspections in conformance with IBC

"Structural Tests and Inspections- Inspection of Fabricators (1700).

C. Testing and inspection shall be formed as required by the building code, the Contract

Documents or as otherwise directed by the Project Manager. The cost of field-testing and

inspection shall be paid for by the Owner. If Work is found not to conform to the Contract

Documents, the Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of all further testing.

D. The Contractor shall cooperate with and facilitate testing and inspection by the testing agency.

The Contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish the testing agency stair and railing shop

drawings.

E. Shop and field bolted connections and shop and field welded connections shall be inspected.

1.6 STRUCTURAL PERFORMANCE

A. Handrails and Guardrails:

Engineer, fabricate, and install handrails and guardrails to comply with requirements of ASTM

E985. ASTM E894 and to withstand the following structural loads without exceeding the

allowable design working stress of the materials involved including anchors and connections.

Apply each load to produce the maximum stress in each of component.

1. Handrails shall be rigid, free of vibration and able to withstand a concentrated force of 200

pounds applied at any point in any direction and, but not simultaneously, a uniform load of

50 pounds per foot applied in any direction.

2. Top Guardrails Member shall be rigid and able to withstand a concentrated force of 200

pounds applied at any point and in any direction and, but not simultaneously, a uniform load

of 50 pounds per foot applied in any direction, and a simultaneous uniform load of 100

pounds per foot applied vertically downward to the top of the guard.

a. Infill areas of guardrails shall be rigid and able to withstand a horizontal concentrated

force of 200 pounds applied on one square foot at any point in the system including

panels, intermediate rails, balusters, or other elements. This loading condition shall not

be applied simultaneously with the other loading conditions for guardrails.

b. Guardrail System shall withstand stresses resulting from railing system loads specified

above.

B. Ladders:

Engineer, manufacture and install ladders to support in excess of 300 pounds force concentrated

live load.

1.7 WARRANTIES

A. Ladders:

Provide manufacturer's standard product warranty for ladders against material and manufacturing

defects for five (5) years.

B. Color Galvanizing:


Page 5 of 14

Provide manufacturer's standard product warrant against excessive corrosion, peeling, chipping,

or other failure for a period of twenty (20) years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS ("GREEN")

2.1 GENERAL

A. Note:

It is the Owner's intent to use energy conserving, environmentally friendly materials to the

greatest extent practical. The Contractor is therefore encouraged to use recycled steel products.

B. Miscellaneous metal items shall be standard approved products, fabricated in accordance with

best shop practices and, wherever possible, shop assembled, ready for erection.

C. Metals shall be free from defects impairing strength, durability, or appearance and shall be best

commercial quality for purposes specified. Metals shall be made with structural properties to

safely sustain and withstand strains, stresses, to which they will be normally subjected.

D. Gauges herein specified are minimums and shall refer to U. S. Standard for sheet steel, plate

iron, and steel.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars:

ASTM A-36.

B. Sheet Steel:

Cold-rolled: ASTM A-366

Hot-rolled: ASTM A-569

C. Steel Tubing:

Cold-formed: ASTM A-500

Hot-formed: ASTM A-501

D. Steel Pipe:

ASTM A-53.

E. Fasteners:

Provide plated fasteners complying with ASTM A 240/A 666, Stainless Steel Type 316, for

exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade, and class

required.

1. Bolts and Nuts:

ASTM A307, Grade A

ASTM A563.


Page 6 of 14

2. Machine Screws:

ANSI B18.6.3.

3. Lag Bolts:

ANSI B18.2.1.

4. Plain Washers:

Round, carbon steel, ANSI B18.22.1.

5. Lock Washers:

Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ANSI B18.21.1.

6. Expansion Anchors:

Carbon steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B633.

F. Note:

The fabricator shall no stamp, stencil, or otherwise place his identification on any portion of

miscellaneous metals intended to remain exposed to view.

2.3 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATING

A. General:

All ferrous metal that is not stainless steel herein specified shall be properly cleaned and shop

primed, except at the following locations:

1. Anchors that are built into masonry shall be coated with bituminous paint, unless specified to

be galvanized.

2. Ferrous metal to be encased in concrete shall be left unpainted, unless specified or noted

otherwise. Aluminum to be encased in concrete shall be coated with bituminous paint.

3. Where hot-dip galvanized metal is specified or shown, it shall not be shop primed.

4. Where spayed-on fireproofing is specified or shown, metal shall not be shop primed.

5. Where metal is scheduled to receive ceramic tile finish it shall not be shop primed.

B. Surface Preparation:

1. Exterior steel shall meet requirements of the Steel Structures Painting Council, SS PC-SP6

Commercial Blast Cleaning Standard.

2. Interior steel and steel to be fireproofed shall meet requirements of SS PC-SP3 Power Tool

Cleaning Standard.

C. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal shall be Tnemec "37 H Chem Prime Universal Phenolic Primer,"

at 2.0- 3.0 mils DFT.

D. For items that are not stainless steel. Galvanizing Repair Paint shall be high zinc content paint

Tnemec 90-97.


Page 7 of 14

E. Bituminous Paint shall be cold-applied mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12 except containing

no asbestos fibers.

2.4 GALVANIZING

A. All exterior steel, including lintels, rails, bollards, grates, frames, and all other steel that has any

portion exposed to the weather, shall be hot-dip galvanized. Interior steel shall be hot-dip

galvanized where so noted or specified. Hot-dip galvanized products shall not be shop primed.

B. Products fabricated from rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strips shall be

hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A-123, latest edition.

C. Iron and steel hardware shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A-153, latest

edition.

D. Assembled steel products shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A-386, latest

edition.

E. The weight of coating shall be as designated in ASTM "Comparison of Coating Weight

Requirements for Hot Dip Galvanized Products" in accordance with the class and thickness of

material.

F. Where hot-dip galvanizing prior to completion of fabrication (cutting or welding operations)

cannot be avoided, joints and cuts shall be finished with four (4) full coats of touch-up

galvanizing repair paint as recommended by the fabricator.

G. Hot-dip galvanizing shall be done by a member of the American Galvanizers Association, Inc.

H. All hot-dipped galvanized material shall be stamped to indicate ASTM designation and ounces

per square foot of zinc coating required by the Specifications.

I. A notarized affidavit of compliance to the galvanizing specified shall be submitted from the

galvanizer upon request.

J. The galvanizing bath shall contain high grade zinc and other early materials. Immediately

before galvanizing the steel shall be immersed in a bath of zinc ammonium chloride. The use of

wet kettle process is prohibited.

2.5 SHOP COATING OF GALVANIZED STEEL

A. The following miscellaneous metal components shall receive factory applied architectural finish

over hot-dip galvanizing:

1. All exterior rails.

2. All exterior bollards.

B. Finish shall be "Primergalv" by Duncan Galvanizing, or approved equal. Colors shall be

selected by the Project Manager from the manufacturer's full range of available colors. Coating

shall maintain a pull-off strength of 500 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D4541.

1. Factory-Applied Universal Primer:


Page 8 of 14

Where galvanized steel is specified to receive a factory primer for field applied topcoat, provide

factory-applied polyamide epoxy primer over specially prepared galvanized steel, 2.0 mils dry

film thickness minimum. Apply primer within 12 hours after galvanizing at the galvanizer's

plant in a controlled environment meeting applicable environmental regulations, and as

recommended by the coating manufacturer.

2. Factory-Applied High-Performance Architectural Finish:

Where galvanized steel is specified to receive a factory applied architectural finish, provide

factory-applied polyurethane color coating, 2.5 mils dry film thickness minimum, over primed

galvanized steel as previously referenced. Apply coating at the galvanizer's plant, immediately

after the application of the prime coat, in a controlled environment meeting applicable

environmental regulations, and as recommended by coating manufacturer.

2.6 ROOF BLOCKING FASTENING REQUIREMENTS

A. Perimeter roof blocking shall be secured to decking, structural steel, spaced steel angles, or

plates, as indicated on the Drawings.

B. The Contractor shall provide additional steel angles and plates to suit specific job conditions.

C. Where joist or beams do not extend out of roof edge, provide single or back-to-back steel angles

or steel plates welded to perimeter steel beams in configurations indicated on the Drawings or

otherwise required for support of blocking at 2'-0" O.C. intervals. Provide pre-drilled holes in

steel for bolting of blocking at 24" O.C. with ½” bolts.

2.7 MASONRY WALL TOP CLIPS

A. Provide steel clip angles at both sides of the tops of masonry walls secured to building structure,

coordinate with the Work of Section 05100: Structural Steel. In general, size, spacing, and

attachment of wall clips shall be determined by whether the wall in non-structural (architectural)

or is a structural element (fire wall, load bearing wall or shear wall for example) and shall be as

indicated on the Drawings. Wall clips specified herein or partition top anchors specified in

Section 04200: Unit Masonry and Mortar shall be provided for all masonry walls unless

specifically indicated otherwise.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide steel framing and supports for applications indicated that are not a part of structural

steel scope as required to complete the Work. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles

indicated and required to receive adjacent construction. Fabricate from steel shapes, plates, and

steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field connections. Cut, drill, and tap

units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. Equip units with integrally welded

anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry.

2.9 LADDERS


Page 9 of 14

A. Ladders shall be standard, 6063-T6 aluminum alloy, fixed ladders as manufactured by O'Keefe's

Inc., or approved equal. Ladders shall have channel rails and 1-1/4" serrated square rungs

spaced no more than twelve (12") inches on centers. Ladder shall be at least eighteen (18")

inches clear between rails. Inclined ladders (ship’s ladders) shall have 4-1/8" deep treads and

handrails. All aluminum shall be mill finish. Provide floor and wall mounting brackets as

required. All ladders shall be in strict compliance with OSHA/ANSI A14.3 standards. Ladders

twenty (20') feet or more in height shall be equipped with platforms. Provide the following

ladder models:

1. Interior pit and roof access: Series 500.

2. Exterior roof access: Series 502.

3. Exterior roof access with parapet: Series 503.

2.10 BOLLARDS

A. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, bollards shall be six (6") inches diameter

galvanized steel pipe (to be filled with concrete). Bollards shall be not Jess than 6'-6" in length

with 3'-6" exposed above finish grade.

2.11 PIT COVERS AND FRAMES

A. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, steel pit covers shall be 1/4" thick galvanized steel

checker plate. Frames shall be appropriately sized galvanized steel angles with suitable stops

and anchoring devices.

2.12 EXPANSION JOINT COVERS

A. Metal expansion joint covers shall be manufactured by Balco Inc., CIS Construction Specialties,

MM Systems Corp., or approved equal.

2.13 TRENCH DRAINS

A. Trench drain grates, covers, pans, and frames shall be heavy-duty, H20 wheel loading, cast iron

grates and frames with an integral galvanized steel-formed pan. Units shall be 12-1/2" wide,

Model No. TCMB-10/TGMB-10, as manufactured by McKinley, or approved equal.

2.14 METAL CHANNEL FRAMING SYSTEMS (UNISTRUT)

A. Various building materials and equipment such as suspended lights and service columns shall

be provided with concealed metal channel framing systems as required to permanently and

safely anchor such items to suitable building primary structural components.

B. Metal channel framing systems shall be Unistrut Metal Framing as manufactured by

UNISTRUT Corporation or approved equal. Framing shall be electrogalvanized steel. Systems

shall be complete and shall be properly engineered, fabricated, and installed by the

manufacturer or its authorized representative/installer. Installer shall have not less than five (5)

years’ experience.

C. The Work of Channel Framing systems shall include, but shall not necessarily be limited to:


Page 10 of 14

1. Field inspection to verify job conditions, dimensions, and suitability of primary structure to

receive channel framing.

2. Engineering of all channel framing, attachments between framing members, attachments

between framing systems and building structure, and anchor points to receive attachments

by the manufacturer of the building material or equivalent to be supported by the channel

framing systems.

3. Coordination of framing load capacity and anchor point types and locations with the

requirements of the related material or equipment manufacturer.

4. Submission of structural calculations including, but not limited to design criteria, stress and

deflection analysis and selected framing, fittings and anchors prepared by a professional

structural engineer licensed in the United States of America or the United States Virgin

Islands.

5. Submission of shop drawings.

2.15 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Loose lintels shall be fabricated from A-36 steel from angles, shapes and masonry anchors of

size and type scheduled for openings in masonry walls, unless otherwise indicated on the

Drawings.

B. All dimensions for locations of rails shall be field measured. Drawing dimensions shall be

considered approximate and actual field conditions shall be ascertained before fabrication of

rails.

C. In general, heights of handrails shall be 2'-10" above step nosing. Heights of guardrails shall be

3'-6" above finish floor, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Handrails shall be mounted to

provide 2-1/4" minimum clear space to walls or other surfaces at stairs and 1-1/2" minimum

clear space at all other locations.

D. Space intermediate balusters as indicated on the Drawings or as otherwise required providing

maximum clear space between all members of less than four (4") inches. Guardrails shall not

have an ornamental pattern that would provide a ladder effect. Space railing posts as indicated

on the Drawings, and in accordance with railing engineering requirements.

E. In general, handrails at stairs shall extend a minimum of 12" beyond the top riser and at least

12" plus the width of one tread beyond the bottom riser. At the top, the handrail extension shall

be parallel to the working surface. At the bottom, the handrail shall continue to slope for a

distance of the width of one tread from the bottom riser, with the remainder parallel to the

walking surface.

F. In general, handrails at ramps shall be parallel to the walking surface at all locations and shall

extend a minimum of 12" beyond the top of the ramp and at least 12" beyond the bottom of the

ramp.

G. Steel Railing Fittings shall be as per Julius Blum and Co., or approved equal. All fittings for

exterior use shall be galvanized. Fittings shall be:

1. Weld on caps:

No. 938


Page 11 of 14

2. Round slip flanges:

No. 611 and No. 1611

3. Wall returns:

No. 665 and No. 1665

4. Brackets:

No. 386 and No. 1386

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VERIFYING CONDITIONS

A. Coordinate all work with the work of other trades. Verify all field dimensions and that the work

fits the work of other trades. Perform all cutting, fitting, and drilling required. Furnish all

necessary templates and patterns required to build items into work of other trades. Provide

holes and connections for the attachment of work of other trades.

3.2 GENERAL FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION

A. Metal surfaces shall be clean and free from mill scale, flake rust, and rust pitting, well-formed

and finished to shape and size, with sharp lines and angles and smooth surfaces. Shearing and

punching shall leave clean true lines and surfaces. Weld or rivet permanent connections. Welds

and flush rivets shall be finished flush and smooth on surfaces that will be exposed after

installation. Welds shall be continuous unless otherwise noted. Welds shall not have voids or

pockets and shall be ground to provide smooth transitions between metal surfaces. Do not use

screws or bolts where they can be avoided; where used, heads shall be countersunk, screwed up

tight and threads nicked to prevent loosening.

B. Fastenings shall be concealed where practicable. Thickness of metal and details of assembly

and supports shall give ample strength and stiffness. Joints exposed to weather shall be formed

to exclude water. Provide holes and connections for the work of other trades.

C. Castings shall be size determined by work type for which they form parts. Each member if

possible, shall be in one piece, make joints at moldings or fillets. Casting thickness shall be

uniform, sufficient to ensure perfect workmanship, required strength for design use. Make

castings clean, smooth, true to pattern, free from defects. Moldings, ornaments shall be rather

more deeply cut than indicated to counteract flattening effects of casting, finishing; exactly

reproduce form, feeling of models. Edges shall be sharp, come from molds clean, smooth,

perfect.

D. Non-slip surfaces shall be made safe for foot traffic with non-slip abrasive embedded uniformly

in wearing surface at casting time.

E. Connections and accessories shall be adequate to safely sustain, withstand stresses, strains, to

which they will be normally subjected.

1. Connections to steel unless otherwise specified shall be steel.

2. Connections to genuine wrought iron work shall be wrought iron or steel.

3. Connections to cast iron, unless otherwise specified shall be steel.


Page 12 of 14

4. Bolts, nuts, screws for exterior work shall be electrogalvanized, unless otherwise noted.

F. Furnish all standard screws, bolts, washers, and other such fastening devices as are necessary

for attaching this work to other materials. Anchors and other connecting devices required in

concrete or masonry shall be built-in as the work progresses. NOTE: Special attention shall be

given to the firm and secure anchoring of overhead mounted materials and equipment.

G. Do cutting, punching, drilling, tapping required for attachment of other work coming in contact

with miscellaneous metal where indicated or where directions for same are given prior to or

with review of shop drawings.

H. Unless otherwise indicated, bolt, and screw heads shall be flat countersunk in exposed faces of

ornamental or finished character; elsewhere as required. Cut off bolts, screws, etc., where

exposed, flush with nuts, or other adjacent metal. Except as otherwise required, weld shop-

assembled connections; welds, bolts, or machine screws may be used for field connections.

Exposed fastenings shall be the same materials, color, and finish as metal to which they apply,

unless otherwise required.

I. Make up threaded connections tightly so that threads will be entirely concealed by fittings.

J. Work to be built in with masonry shall be of form required for anchorage, or be provided with

suitable anchors, expansion shields, toggle bolts, etc. as required for proper anchorage.

Fastening to wood plugs in masonry shall not be permitted.

K. Install all supporting members, fastening, framing, hangers, bracing, brackets, straps, bolts,

angles, and the like required to set, connect work rigidly and properly to structural steel,

masonry, other construction.

L. All items shall be installed plumb, straight, square, level and in proper elevation, plane, location

and alignment with other work.

3.3 STEEL RAILING FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate handrails and railing systems to comply with the requirements indicated for design,

dimensions, details, finish, member sizes and anchorage but not less than that required to

support structural loads.

B. Interconnect railing and handrail members by butt-welding or welding with internal connectors,

unless otherwise indicated. At tee and cross intersections, cope ends of intersecting members to

fit contour of pipe to joined end and weld all around. Form changes in direction of railings by

welding fabricated flush elbow fittings, by radius bends as indicated, or by flush radius bends.

Remove burrs and splatter.

C. Form simple and compound curves by bending pipe in jigs to produce uniform curvature for

each configuration required. Maintain cylindrical cross section of pipe throughout the entire

bend without buckling, twisting, cracking or otherwise deforming.

D. For components exposed to exterior or moist environments, provide weep holes or other means

of evacuating entrapped water. All exterior rails, fittings and brackets shall be hot-dipped

galvanized after fabrication.


Page 13 of 14

E. Provide wall returns at all ends to adjacent surfaces and secure as required. Close exposed ends

by welding 3/16" thick steel plate in place, except where clearance of end of pipe and adjoining

wall surface is less than ¼”, or unless otherwise detailed.

F. Welds shall be continuous and thoroughly fused without undercutting or overlap. Grind

exposed welds smooth to form a uniformly smooth surface.

G. Provide miscellaneous steel for connection of rail supports as detailed on the Drawings. Do not

support railing temporarily by any means that does not satisfy structural performance

requirements.

H. Set rails plumb and aligned. Set rails horizontal or parallel to rake of stairs. Support wall

handrails on brackets, in accordance with railing engineering requirements. Space closer

together if so indicated on the Drawings. Connect railing posts to stair framing to stair framing

by direct welding, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Install handrail brackets away from handrail ends and finish ends with return fittings. Use drill-

in expansion anchors at concrete or masonry walls. Mount handrails only on gypsum board

assemblies that have been reinforced to receive railing anchors.

J. Provide expansion joints in railings at intervals not to exceed forty (40') feet. Provide slip joints

with internal sleeves extending two (2") inches beyond the joint on either side. Fasten the

internal sleeve securely on one side only. Locate expansion joints within six (6") inches of

posts.

K. Where railings are to be set in concrete, railing posts shall be set in 6" matching sleeves as

follows: Clean dust and foreign matter from sleeves. Moisten interior of hole and surrounding

surface with clean water. Mix fast setting cement with water and stir until a smooth, creamy

consistency is produced. Pour mixture into annular space until it overflows the hole. Taper

cement away from rails to promote proper drainage. Wipe off excess, leaving a build-up of

approximately 1/8".

3.4 LADDERS

A. All ladders shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, the

American Standard Safety Code for Fixed Ladders and all applicable OSHA regulations.

B. Completed ladder installations shall be rigid and free from vibration.

C. Ladders in elevator pits shall extend not less than 3'-6" above outside finish floor level as

required by OSHA and shall be located as recommended by the elevator manufacturer.

D. Exterior roof ladders shall extend no less than 3'-6" above parapet walls or upper roof surfaces

as applicable, and shall have looped returns as required by OSHA. Rungs shall be held off a

minimum of 9" off adjacent wall.

E. Interior roof hatch ladders shall extend from the floor to the roof surface. Rails shall extend to

just below the underside of the roof hatch.

F. Ladders twenty (20') feet or more in height shall be provided with cage closures as required by

OSHA.

3.5 EXPANSION JOINT COVERS


Page 14 of 14

A. Covers shall extend full width of openings.

B. Covers shall be installed level, plumb, and flush with finish surfaces, and shall be fastened with

anchor shields and bolts in strict confidence with the manufacturer's instructions and

recommendations.

C. Provide all corners, tees, transitions, etc., as required for a complete and proper job.

D. Provide fire rated expansion joint covers with all required safing insulation and fire stopping at

fire rated locations. Entire assembly shall be installed in strict accordance with the

manufacturer's instructions and tested assemblies.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 05600 – MANHOLE FRAMES AND COVERS Government of the Virgin Islands, Department of Public Works

Page 1 of 2

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. Furnish and install cast iron manhole frames and covers on all manholes unless otherwise

shown on the Drawings.

1.2 REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03346:

Cast-in-Place Concrete.


A. All castings shall be at least Class 30 conforming to the ASTM Standard Specifications for

Gray Casting, Designation A48.

B. All essential details of design shall conform to the Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Provide manhole frames and covers with 30-inch diameter clear opening.

B. The cover shall have the words "Sanitary Sewer" or “Storm Sewer” in a 3-inch letter cast into

the top surface.

C. Grates shall be of the type and opening size specified.

D. The castings shall be of good quality, strong, touch, even-grained cast iron, smooth, free from

scale, lumps, blisters, sand holes, and defects of every nature which would render them unfit for

the service for which they are intended.

E. Contact surfaces of covers and frame seats shall be machined at the foundry before shipment to

prevent rocking of covers in any orientation.

F. All castings shall be thoroughly cleaned and subject to a careful hammer inspection.

G. Prior to being shipped from the foundry, castings shall be sandblasted and given two coats of

coal-tar-pitch varnish, applied in a satisfactory manner so as to make a smooth coating, tough,

tenacious, and not brittle with any tendency to scale off.

H. Coatings that have been damaged in transit of handling shall be repaired by the Contractor to

the satisfaction of the Engineer.

I. Waterproof manhole frames and covers (when applicable) shall have bearing surfaces of cover

and frames machined, sealed with rubber gasket, drilled, tapped and counter sunk for cap screws

to fasten lid to frame.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.2 INSTALLATION

SECTION 05600 – MANHOLE FRAMES AND COVERS Government of the Virgin Islands, Department of Public Works

Page 2 of 2

A. Set manhole frames with the tops conforming accurately to the grade of the pavement or

finished ground surface or as shown on the Drawings.

B. Set frames concentric with the top of the masonry in a full bed of mortar, so that the space

between the top of the manhole masonry and the bottom flange at the frame shall be completely

filled and made watertight.

C. Place a thick ring of mortar extending to the outer edge of the masonry all around and on the top

of the bottom flange.

D. Finish the mortar so that it will be smooth and have a slight slope to shed water away from the

frame.

E. When the work on each manhole is complete, clean the frame seat and set the cover in place.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 05730- ALUMINUM HANDRAILS & RAILINGS

GOVERNMENT OF THE VIRGIN ISLANDS, DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 7

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Aluminum handrails and guardrails of the following types:

1. Picket railing systems.

2. Lateral railing systems.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 03346 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions in ASTM E 985 for railing-related terms apply to this section


A. General: Engineer handrail and railing systems to withstand structural loads indicated.

Determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:

1. For Aluminum: The Aluminum Association's specification for Aluminum Structures.

B. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems: Engineer, fabricate, and install

handrails and railing systems as per ASTM E 985 to withstand the following structural loads

without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials for handrails, railing

systems, anchors, and connections. Apply each load to produce the maximum stress in each of

the respective components comprising handrails and railing systems.

1. Top Rail of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as

indicated:

a. Concentrated load of 200 pounds (90.6 kg) applied at any point and in any direction.

b. Uniform load of 50 pounds per linear foot (74.3 kg/m) applied horizontally and

concurrently with uniform load of 100 pounds per linear foot (148.6 kg/m) applied

vertically downward.

c. Concentrated load need not be assumed to act concurrently with uniform loads.

2. Handrails Not Serving as Top Rails: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as

indicated:

a. Concentrated load of 200 pounds (90.6 kg) applied at any point and in any direction.

b. Uniform load of 50 pounds per linear foot (74.3 kg/m) applied in any direction.

c. Concentrated and uniform loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.



Page 2 of 7

3. Infill Area of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding a horizontal concentrated load of

200 pounds (90.6 kg) applied to 1 ft2 (0.1 m2) at any point in the system.

a. Above load need not be assumed to act concurrently with loads on top rails of railing

systems in determining stress on guard.

C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals

and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum

change (range) in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of handrails

and railings to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, overstressing of components, connections

and other detrimental effects. Base design calculation on actual surface temperatures of

materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 degrees F ambient; 180 degrees F material surfaces.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

C. Shop drawings showing Welding, Fabrication and Installation of handrails including plans,

typical elevations, sections, details of components, and attachment to other units work.

1. Where installed products are indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include

structural computations, material properties and other information needed for structural

analysis review by the design architect and/or engineer of record.

2. Submit 3 prints of all shop drawing product data. Also submit calculations if specifically

requested by architect.

D. Samples for initial selection purposes in the form of manufacturers color chart showing full

range of colors available from factories standards: For custom color request minimum 2 inches

x 2 inches (51 mm by 51 mm) color chip from customer for color matching purposes.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum 5 year experience manufacturing similar products.

B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 2 year experience installing similar products.

C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain handrails and railing systems from a single

fabricator/manufacturer.

D. Engineering Responsibility: Engineer hand railing and railing systems by the

fabricator/manufacturer unless sizes and configurations are specifically called out on the

drawings.



Page 3 of 7




A. Deliver and store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging bearing the brand and

manufacturer's identification until ready for installation.

B. Store handrails and railing systems in clean, dry location, away from uncured concrete and

masonry, protected against damage.

C. Handling: Handle materials to avoid damage.


A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits

recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under

environmental conditions outside manufacturer's recommended limits.

1.10 SEQUENCING

A. Field Measurements: Where handrails and railings are indicated to fit to other construction,

check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before

fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication

schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.

1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, obtain guaranteed

dimensions in writing and proceed with fabrication of products without field measurements

if specifically requested to do so by architect, owner or contractor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

handrails and railing systems that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited

to the following:

1. AMF Building Products,

2. Poma & Sons,

3. Alumaguard

4. Aluminum Tube Railings, Inc.

5. or approved equal

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use

and finish indicated, with not less than the strength and durability properties of the alloy and

temper designated below for each aluminum form required:



Page 4 of 7

1. Extruded Bare & Tube- ASTM B221, alloy 6063T5/T52.

2. Extruded Structural Pipe & Tube- ASTM B 429 6063-T5/T52

3. Drawn Seamless Pipe – ASTM B 210 6083-TB32

4. Plate and Sheet – ASTM B 209 6061-T6

5. Castings: ASTM B 29, A356-T6.

2.3 WELDING MATERIALS, FASTENERS, AND ANCHORS

A. Welding Electrodes and Filler/Metal: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as

recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and

compatibility in fabricated items.

B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of the type, grade, and

class required to produce connections that are suitable for anchoring railing to other types of

construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loadings.

1. For aluminum railings in coastal environments provide fasteners fabricated from stainless

steel or aluminum only.

C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: Use concealed fasteners of same basic metal

as the fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or

incompatible with materials joined.

2.4 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT

A. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by

manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

B. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-prepackaged, non-shrink, non-staining, high

strength cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring,

patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water

exposure or provide a sealer or waterproof coating recommended for exterior use.

2.5 FABRICATI0N

A. General: Fabricate handrails and railing systems to comply with requirements indicated for

design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of hollow

members, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than those required to support structural

loads.

B. Preassemble railing systems in shop to greatest extent possible assembly. Disassemble units

only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for field assembly

and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

C. Form changes in directions of members as follows;

1. by mitering at elbow bends

2. by insertion of prefabricated flush elbow fittings



Page 5 of 7

3. by any method indicated above, applicable to change of direction involved

D. Form simple and compound curves by bending pipe in jigs to produce uniform curvature for

each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section of pipe throughout.

E. Welded connections; Fabricate handrails and railing systems for connection of members by

welding. For connections made during fabrication, weld corners and seams continuously to

comply with the following;

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base materials.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately

4. At tee and cross intersections, cope ends of intersecting members to fit contour of pipe or

tube to which end is joined and weld all around.

F. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings and Anchors; Provide manufactures standard wall brackets, brackets,

miscellaneous fitting, and anchors to interconnect handrail and railing system members to other

construction. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads

imposed on handrails and railing system. Coordinated anchorage devices with supporting

structure.

G. For railings posts set in concrete, provide preset sleeves of steel, not less than 6” long with

inside dimensions not less than ½” greater than outside diameter of the post.

H. Provide weep holes, or other means to evacuate trapped water, in hollow sections of railing

members that are exposed to exterior or to moisture from condensation or other sources.

I. Provide wall returns at ends of wall mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 FINISHES: KYNAR FINISH

A. General

1. 70% PVDF coatings which meet or exceed AAMA 2605, applied in three coats (barium &

strontium chromate primer, 70% PVDF pigment coat and 70% PVDF clear coat) with a dry

film thickness of 1.6 to 2.2 mils. Aluminum must have a chrome phosphate pretreatment

conversion prior to being coated.

2. Acceptable products are PPG Duranar XL, or equivalent.

B. Chemical Pretreatment:

1. Strong Acid cleaner.

2. Acid cleaner.

3. D.I. water rinse.

4. Chrome phosphate conversion 40-90 mg/sf



Page 6 of 7

a. Any coating application system that does not contain a Chrome phosphate conversion

coating is a strictly prohibited.

5. D. I. water rinse.

6. D.I. halo and dry in place.

C. Color: PPG Duranar Standard Bone White; UC43350XL

1. Note: application of metallic finishes will result in distinct color variations when viewed

from various angles that may be undesirable. These variations are due to the metallic flakes,

application processes as well as manufacturer lot production, and may not be suitable for

uniform color presentation.

D. Application: The applicator shall be an approved or certified applicator of the paint

manufacturer and shall apply the paint in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s

requirements. Applicator shall have a minimum experience of at least 7 years with similar

coating and pretreatment processes and shall demonstrate successful long-term coating history.

Names and address of project locations may be required for physical site inspections.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of

unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of

anchorages, such as sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having

integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete as masonry construction. Coordinate

delivery of such items to project site.

3.3 INSTALLATION GENERAL

A. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints, except as required for

expansion.

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of

handrails and railings. Set handrails and railings accurately in location, alignment, and

elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free from rack.

1. Do not weld, cut or abrade surfaces of handrails and railing components that have been

coated or finished after fabrication and are intended for field connection by mechanical or

other means.

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch to 36 inches .

3. Align rails so that variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake

of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/16 inch in 36 inches



Page 7 of 7

C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with

grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of paint or epoxy.

D. Adjust handrails and railing systems prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting

joints. Space posts at intervals indicated but not less than that required by design loadings.

E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary

for securing handrails and railings to in-place construction.

3.4 ANCHORING POSTS

A. Anchor post in concrete by means of preset sleeves into concrete. After posts have been inserted

into sleeves, fill space between post and sleeve solid with the following anchoring material,

mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's directions and fill space

between post and concrete with the following anchoring material, mixed and placed to comply

with anchoring material manufacturer's directions.

1. Non-shrink, nonmetallic grout.

2. Non-shrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement.

B. Leave anchoring material down approximately 1/2 inch (13 mm) to allow for final topping with

a waterproof material matching the surrounding areas by others. Whenever possible fill hole

with waterproof topping slightly higher than the adjacent surfaces and and taper away from the

post.

3.5 ANCHORING HANDRAILS TO WALLS

A. Anchor rail ends into concrete and masonry with round flanges connected to the with installed

anchors and bolts.

1. Provide bracket with 1 ½” clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface.

2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural

loads.

3.6 CLEANING, PROTECTION AND TOUCH-UP PAINTING

A. On delivery all railing will have protective cover over cap only. Immediately upon completion

of installation of railing installer shall remove cap cover and clean all work inspection and

approval.

B. After installation the General Contractor or Owner shall be responsible for protecting railings

during the balance of construction.

C. Painted aluminum surfaces shall be cleaned with plain water containing a mild soap or

detergent. No abrasive agents or harsh chemicals are to be used.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES GOVERNMENT OF THE U. S. VIRGIN ISLANDS, DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

SECTION 09200 - LATH AND PLASTER GOVERNMENT OF THE U. S. VIRGIN ISLANDS, DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 11

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel stud systems.

2. Metal lath and furring.

3. Portland cement plastering.

B. Related Sections:

The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. None.

C. Wood framing and furring are specified in Division 6.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product data consisting of manufacturer’s product specifications and installation instructions for each

product, including data showing compliance with the requirements.

C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer’s color charts consisting of actual

units or sections of units at least 12 inches square showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns

available for each type of finish indicated.

1. Where finish involves normal color and texture variations, include sample sets composed of

two or more units showing full range of variations expected.

2. Include similar samples of material for joints and accessories involving color selection.

D. Samples for verification purposes in units at least 12 inches square of each type of finish indicated,

in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing full range of variations expected in

these characteristics.


A. Fire-Resistance Ratings:


Page 2 of 11

1. Where plaster systems with fire-resistance ratings are indicated, provide materials and

installations identical to those of applicable assemblies tested per ASTM E 119 by fire

testing laboratories acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide plaster for fire-resistance rated systems that has same aggregate as specified for

similar nonrated work, unless specified aggregate has not been tested by accepted fire testing

laboratories.

B. Coordination of Work:

Coordinate layout and installation of suspension system components for suspended ceilings with

other work supported by or penetrating through ceiling.


A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification

of manufacturer.

B. Store materials inside, under cover, and in manner to keep them dry, protected from weather, direct

sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, and damage from construction traffic and other

causes.


A. Environmental Requirements, General:

Comply with requirements of referenced plaster application standards and recommendations of

plaster manufacturer for environmental conditions before, during, and after application of plaster.

B. Ventilation:

Ventilate building spaces as required to remove water in excess of that required for hydration of

plaster. Begin ventilation immediately after plaster is applied and continue until it sets.

C. Protect contiguous work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration and other harmful effects

that might result from plastering.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be

incorporated in the Work include but are not limited to the following:

1. Metal Supports:

a. Allied Structural Industries, Inc.

b. American Studco, Inc.

c. Chapman Industries, Inc.


Page 3 of 11

d. Chicago Metallic Corp.

e. Dale Industries, Inc.

f. Dietrich Industries, Inc.

g. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.

h. Marino Industries.

i. United States Gypsum Co.

j. Expanded Metal Lath:

k. Alabama Metal Industries Corp. (AMICO)

l. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.

m. United States Gypsum Co.

n. Western Metal Lath Co.

2. Accessories:

a. Fry Reglet Corp.

b. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.

c. Keene Corp.

d. MM Systems Corp.

e. Plastic Components, Inc.

f. United States Gypsum Co.

g. Western Metal Lath Co.

2.2 METAL SUPPORTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS (09200.A)

A. General:

Size metal ceiling supports to comply with the following, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Portland Cement Plaster Installation:

ASTM C 1063.

C. Wire for Hangers and Ties:

ASTM A 641, Class I zinc coating, soft temper.

D. Rod Hangers:

Mild steel, zinc or cadmium coated.


Page 4 of 11

E. Flat Hangers:

Mild steel, zinc or cadmium coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

F. Channels:

Cold-rolled steel, 0.05980-inch minimum thickness of base metal (uncoated), allowable bending

stress of 18,000 psi, protected with rust-inhibitive paint or galvanizing complying with ASTM A

525 for G60 coating designation, and as follows:

G. Carrying Channels:

1-1/2-inch-deep by 7/16-inch-wide flanges, 475 lbs. per 1000 feet painted, 508 lbs. per 1000 feet

galvanized.

H. Furring Channels:

3/4-inch-deep by 7/16-inch-wide flanges, 300 lbs. per 1000 feet painted, 316 lbs. per 1000 feet

galvanized.

I. Provide galvanized channels for exterior installations.

J. Hanger Anchorage Devices:

Screws, cast-in-place concrete inserts, or other devices appropriate for anchorage to the form of

structural framing indicated and whose suitability for use intended has been proven through

standard construction practices or certified test data.

K. Size devices to develop full strength of hanger but not less than 3 times calculated hanger loading,

except size direct pullout concrete inserts for 5 times calculated hanger loading.

2.3 STEEL STUDS AND RUNNERS (TRACKS) (09200.B)

A. Non-Load (Axial) - Bearing Studs and Runners (09200.Bl):

ASTM C 645 and complying with following requirements for minimum thickness of base metal

(uncoated) and other characteristics:

B. Stud Thickness:

0.034I inch, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Stud Depth:

6 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Studs and Runners (09200.B2):

ASTM C 955 and complying with the following requirements for quality, grade, and finish of

steel sheet, design thickness of base metal (uncoated), and other dimensional characteristics:

E. Metal Quality:

Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A 446, Coating Designation G 90,

for grades indicated below:

1. Grade D (50,000 psi yield point) for design thicknesses of 0.0598 inch or more.

F. Stud Thickness: 0.0598 inch, unless otherwise indicated.


Page 5 of 11

G. Stud Lip Depth: 1/4 inch.

H. Stud Depth: 6 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 VERTICAL METAL FURRING (09200.C)

A. Channel Furring and Braces:

Cold-rolled steel, 0.0598-inch min. thickness of base (uncoated) metal, allowable bending stress

of 18,000 psi, protected with rust-inhibitive paint finish or galvanizing, 3/4-inch-deep by 7/16-

inch-wide flanges, 300 lbs. per 1000 feet with painted finish, 316 lbs. per 1000 feet with

galvanized finish.

B. Hat-Channels:

Hat shaped screwable furring channels, 7/8-inch deep formed from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel

sheet minimum 0.0 I79-inch thick complying with ASTM A 446, Coating Designation G 60,

grade A (33,000 psi yield point).

C. Z-Furring Members:

Manufacturer's standard screw-type zee-shaped furring members formed from zinc-coated

(galvanized) steel sheet, 0.0179-inch min. base (uncoated) metal thickness, complying with

ASTM A 525, Coating Designation G 60, designed for mechanical attachment of insulation

boards or blankets to monolithic concrete and masonry walls.

D. Furring Brackets:

Serrated-arm type, 0.0329-inch min. thickness of base (uncoated) metal, adjustable from l/4-inch

to 2-1/4-inch wall clearance for channel furring.

2.5 LATH (09200.D)

A. Expanded Metal Lath:

Fabricate expanded metal lath from uncoated or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet to produce

lath complying with ASTM C 847 for type, configuration, and other characteristics indicated

below, with uncoated steel sheet painted after fabrication into lath.

B. Diamond Mesh Lath: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Configuration: Self-furring.

2. Weight: 3.4 lbs. per sq. yd.

3. Paper Backing:

Where paper-backed diamond mesh lath is indicated, provide asphalt-impregnated paper factory-

bonded to back and complying with FS UU-B-790, for Type I, Grade D (vapor permeable), Style

C. Rib Lath:

Comply with the following requirements:

1. Configuration: Rib depth of 3/8 inch.

2. Weight: 4.0 lbs. per sq. yd.


Page 6 of 11

D. Lath Attachment Devices:

Devices of material and type required by referenced standards and recommended by lath

manufacturer for secure attachment of lath to framing members and of lath to lath.

2.6 PLASTER ACCESSORIES FOR PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER (09200.E)

A. General:

Comply with material provisions of ASTM C I 063; coordinate depth of accessories with

thicknesses and number of coats required.

B. Metal Corner Reinforcement:

Expanded large-mesh diamond mesh lath fabricated from zinc-alloy or welded wire mesh

fabricated from 0.0475-inch-diameter zinc-coated (galvanized) wire and specially formed to

reinforce external corners of Portland cement plaster on exterior exposures while allowing full

plaster encasement.

C. Metal Corner Beads:

Small nose corner beads fabricated from zinc alloy, with expanded flanges of large-mesh

diamond lath to allow full encasement by plaster.

D. Casing Beads:

Square-edged style, with expanded flanges and removable protective tape.

E. Control Joints:

Prefabricated, of material and type indicated below:

F. Material: Zinc coated (galvanized) steel.

G. One Piece Type: Folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration, with expanded

flanges.

2.7 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER MATERIALS (09200.F)

A. Base Coat Cements:

Type as indicated below:

1. Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I or II.

2. Masonry cement, ASTM C 91, Type N.

B. Finish Coat Cement:

Type as indicated below:

1. Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I, white.

2. Masonry cement, ASTM C 91, Type N, white.

C. Lime:

Special hydrated lime for finishing purposes, ASTM C 206, Type S, or special hydrated lime for

masonry purposes, ASTM C 207, Type S.


Page 7 of 11

D. Sand Aggregate for Base Coats:

ASTM C 897.

E. Fiber for Base Coat:

Alkaline-resistant (AR) glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch long, free of contaminates,

manufactured for use in Portland cement plaster.


A. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster:

Drinkable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or

accessories

B. Bonding Agent for Portland cement Plaster:

ASTM C 932

C. Acoustical Sealant:

ASTM C 919, non-oxidizing, skinning paintable types for exposed applications; nondrying, non-

hardening, non-staining, non-bleeding, gun applied sealant complying with requirement

specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers" for concealed applications.

2.9 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER MIXES AND COMPOSITIONS

A. General:

Comply with ASTM C 926 for Portland cement plaster base and finish coat mixes as applicable

to plaster bases, materials, and other requirements indicated.

B. Portland Cement Plaster Base Coat Mixes and Compositions:

Proportion materials for respective base coats in parts by volume for cementitious materials and

in parts by volume per sum of cementitious materials for aggregates to comply with the following

requirements for each method of application and plaster base indicated. Adjust mix proportions

below within limits specified to attain workability.

C. Fiber Content:

Add fiber to following mixes after ingredients have mixed at least 2 minutes. Comply with fiber

manufacturer's directions but do not to exceed 2 lbs. per cu. ft. of cementitious materials. Reduce

aggregate quantities accordingly to maintain workability.

D. Three-Coat Work Over Metal Lath:

Base coats as indicated below:

1. Scratch Coat: l part Portland cement, 0 to 3/4 parts lime, 2-1/2 to 4 parts sand

2. Brown Coat: 1 part Portland cement, 0 to 3/4 parts lime, 3 to 5 parts sand

E. Job-Mixed Portland Cement Plaster Finish Coats:

Proportion materials for finish coats in parts by volume for cementitious materials and parts by

volume per sum of cementitious materials for aggregates to comply with the following

requirements:


Page 8 of 11

1. 1 part Portland cement, 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime, 3 parts sand.

2. 1 part Portland cement, 1 part masonry cement, 3 part sand.

3. 1 part Portland cement, 1-1/2 to 2 parts lime, 3 parts sand.

4. 1 part masonry cement, 1-1/2 parts sand.

2.10 MIXING

A. Mechanically mix cementitious and aggregate materials for plasters to comply with applicable

referenced application standard and with recommendations of plaster manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF LATHING AND FURRING, GENERAL

A. Portland Cement Plaster Lathing and Furring Installation Standard:

Install lathing and furring materials indicated for Portland cement plaster to comply with ASTM

C 1063.

B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in the work and for support of

equipment services, heavy trim, and similar work to comply with details indicated or, if not otherwise

indicated, to comply with applicable published recommendations of gypsum plaster manufacturer

or, if not available, of "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by United States Gypsum Co.

C. Isolation:

Where lathing and metal support system abuts building structure horizontally and where

partition/wall work abuts overhead structure, isolate the work from structural movement

sufficiently to prevent transfer of loading into the work from the building structure. Install slip

or cushion type joints to absorb deflections but maintain lateral support.

D. Frame both sides of control and expansion joints independently, and do not bridge joints with furring

and lathing or accessories.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF STEEL STUD WALL/PARTITION SUPPORT SYSTEMS

A. General:

Install components for steel stud wall/partition support systems to comply with directions of steel

stud manufacturer for applications indicated and with the following:

1. For non-load (axial)-bearing stud systems, comply with ASTM C 754.

2. For load-bearing (axial and transverse) stud systems, comply with ASTM C 1007 and as

indicated.

B. Steel Stud Systems to Receive Metal Lath:

Comply with requirements of ML/SFA "Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring" applicable

to each installation condition and type of metal stud system indicated.


Page 9 of 11

C. Extend and attach partition support systems to structure above suspended ceilings, unless otherwise

indicated.

D. Extend partition support systems to finish ceilings and attach to ceiling suspension members, unless

otherwise indicated.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF VERTICAL METAL FURRING

A. Metal Furring to Receive Metal Lath:

Comply with requirements of ML/SFA "Specification for Metal Lathing and Furring" applicable

to each installation condition indicated.

3.4 METAL LATHING

A. Install expanded metal lath for the following applications where plaster base coats are required.

Provide appropriate type, configuration, and weight of metal lath selected from materials indicated

that comply with referenced lathing installation standards.

B. Vertical metal framing and furring.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF PLASTERING ACCESSORIES

A. General:

Comply with referenced lathing and furring installation standards for provision and location of

plaster accessories of type indicated. Miter or cope accessories at corners; install with tight joints

and in alignment. Attach accessories securely to plaster bases to hold accessories in place and

alignment during plastering.

B. Accessories for Portland Cement Plaster:

Provide the following types to comply with requirements indicated for location:

1. Corner Reinforcement: Install at external corners.

2. Corner Bead: Install at external corners.

3. Casing Beads: Install at terminations of plaster work unless otherwise indicated.

4. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated or, if not indicated, at locations

complying with the following criteria and approved by Owner’s Representative.

a. Where an expansion or control joint occurs in surface of construction directly behind plaster

membrane.

b. Where plaster panel sizes or dimensions change, extend joints full width or height of plaster

membrane.

c. For Portland cement Plaster: Where, in surfaces of ceilings and walls, distances between and

areas within control joints exceed, respectively, the following measurements:

1) 18 feet in either direction and 144 sq. ft.


Page 10 of 11

3.6 INSTALLATION OF SOUND-RATED PLASTER WORK

A. Where sound-rated plaster work is indicated by STC ratings or other notation, seal work at

perimeters, control joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant.

Comply with ASTM C 919 and plastering manufacturer's recommendations for location of sealant

beads.

3.7 PLASTER APPLICATION, GENERAL

A. Prepare monolithic surfaces for bonded base coats and use bonding compound or agent to comply

with requirements of referenced plaster application standards for conditioning of monolithic

surfaces.

B. Tolerances:

Do not deviate more than 1/8 inch in 10'-0" from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as

measured by a 10'-0" straightedge placed at any location on surface.

C. Grout hollow metal frames, bases, and similar work occurring in gypsum plastered areas, with base

coat plaster material, and prior to lathing where necessary. Except where full grouting is indicated

or required for fire-resistance rating, grout at least 6 inches at each jamb anchor clip.

D. Sequence plaster application with the installation and protection of other work so that neither will be

damaged by the installation of the other.

E. Plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster

ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where plaster is not terminated at metal by casing beads, cut

base coat free from metal before plaster sets and groove finish coat at the junctures with metal.

F. Apply thicknesses and number of coats of plaster as indicated or as required by referenced standards.

G. Concealed Plaster:

Where plaster application will be concealed by wood paneling, above suspended ceilings and

similar locations, finish coat may be omitted; where concealed behind cabinets and similar

furnishings and equipment, apply finish coat; where used as a base for adhesive application of

tile and similar finishes, omit finish coat and coordinate thickness with overall dimension as

shown and comply with tolerances specified.

3.8 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER APPLICATION

A. Portland Cement Plaster Application Standard:

Apply Portland cement plaster materials, compositions, and mixes to comply with ASTM C 926.

B. Number of Coats:

Apply Portland cement plaster, of composition indicated, to comply with the following

requirements:

1. Use three-coat work over the following plaster bases:

a. Metal lath.


Page 11 of 11

b. Concrete unit masonry.

c. Concrete, cast-in-place or precast when surface complies with ASTM C 926 for plaster

bonded direct to solid base.

d. Finish Coat: Floated finish unless otherwise indicated; match Owner’s Representative's

sample for texture and color.

C. Moist-cure Portland cement plaster base and finish coats to comply with ASTM C 926, including

recommendations for time between coats and curing in "Annex A2 Design Considerations."

3.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cut, patch, point up, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore cracks,

dents, and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, excessive crazing

and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to the

substrate has failed.

B. Sand smooth-troweled finishes lightly to remove trowel marks and arises.

3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from door

frames, windows, and other surfaces that are not to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other

surfaces that have been stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during the plastering work. When

plastering work is completed, remove unused materials, containers, and equipment and clean floors

of plaster debris.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer that ensure plaster

work's being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 09253 – SALT RETAINING WATER REPELLENT RENOVATION

STUCCO GOVERNMENT OF THE U. S. VIRGIN ISLANDS, DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 6

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

Application of salt-retaining water repellent stucco for masonry substrates. Specification

includes surface preparation.


Related sections include the following:

1. Section 09772- Silicate Coatings.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. General:

The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The

publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

B. Deutsches Institut fur Normung (DIN), European Standard (EN), and International Organization for

Standardization (ISO):

1. DIN EN 998-1, Specification for mortar for masonry- Part I: Rendering and plastering

mortar.

2. DIN V 18550, strength standard for render and rendering systems.

C. WTA, acronym for International Association for Science and Technology of Building Maintenance

and Monuments Preservation, www.wta.de/en.

1. Technical Bulletin 2-9-04/D, Renovation Mortar Systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gentle Cleaner: A detergent used to remove soiling from mineral surfaces.

B. Renovation Stucco: A dry sacked specification grade stucco mix.+

C. Base Coat: First coat of renovation stucco.

D. Finish Coat: Second coat of renovation stucco.


A. Gentle Cleaner: A neutral biodegradable cleaning concentrate for gentle cleaning of mineral surfaces.

B. Renovation Stucco:

A WTA certified materials-compatible highly vapor permeable water repellent

restoration/renovation render based on trass binders and hydraulic cement with elevated salt

retention capacity. Install over mineral surfaces.

http://www.wta.de/en



Page 2 of 6

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

Submit product data showing material proposed. Submit sufficient information to determine

compliance with the Drawings and Specifications. Provide published documentation describing

materials, characteristics, and limitations.

B. Samples:

Submit samples for verification purposes, fabrication techniques and workmanship.

C. Manufacturer’s Instructions:

Submit manufacturer's instructions including technical data sheets, material safety data sheets,

mixing instructions, application requirements, special procedures, and conditions requiring

special attention.

D. LEED Submittals:

Submittals that are required to comply with requirements for LEED certification include the

following:

1. Low Emitting Materials:

Submit certification by the manufacturer confirming that products (i.e., adhesives, sealants,

paints, coatings, etc.) meet or exceed the volatile organic compound (VOC) limits set by specific

agencies or other requirements. Clearly state VOC limits in the submittal.


A. Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer Qualifications:

Provide evidence that Manufacturer is a firm engaged in the manufacture of silicate coatings of

types required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for a minimum

of ten years.

2. Applicator Qualifications:

Provide evidence Applicator is a firm having a minimum of three years of successful application

experience with projects similar in type and scope to that required for this Project, and approved

by the manufacturer.

B. Mock ups:

1. Prior to application of the work, fabricate and erect mock ups for each type of finish and

application to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic

effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mock ups to comply with the

following requirements using materials indicated for final unit of work. Locate mock ups as

directed by the Owner’s Representative. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects

and workmanship to be expected in the completed work. Obtain the Owner’s

Representative's acceptance of mock ups before start of final unit of work.

2. Retain and maintain mock ups during construction in undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging completed unit of work.



Page 3 of 6


A. Deliver materials to the Project site in suppliers or manufacturer's original wrappings and containers,

labeled with manufacturer's name, material and product brand name, and lot number, if any.

B. Store materials in their original undamaged packages and containers inside a well-ventilated area

protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.


A. Environmental Requirements:

1. Substrate and ambient air temperature must be above 41°F (5°C).

2. Do not apply when rain is expected, in high winds, or onto hot substrates.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Product warranty from date of Substantial Completion is 1 (one) year.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design:

Items specified are to establish a standard of quality for design, function, materials, compatibility,

performance, warranty, and appearance. Equivalent products by listed manufacturers are

acceptable. The Owner’s Representative is the sole judge of the basis of what is equivalent.

B. KEIM Mineral Coatings of America, Inc., 10615 Texland Blvd. #600, Charlotte, North Carolina

28273. Telephone 704-588-4811. Email [email protected].

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Gentle Cleaner: Provide detergent having these qualities:

1. Neutral pH concentrate diluted with clean water.

2. Removes well-adhering dust, fats, oil, and carbon-based pollutants from mineral surfaces.

3. Environmentally harmless and biodegradable.

4. NoVOC.

5. Basis of Design: "KEIM Stone Cleaner N", KEIM Mineral Coatings of America, Inc.

B. Renovation Stucco:

Provide dry bagged salt-retaining water repellent renovation stucco having these qualities:

1. Trass binders and hydraulic cement basis.

2. Strength corresponding to DIN V 18550, mortar category CS II and P II.

mailto:[email protected]



Page 4 of 6

3. Compliant to DIN EN 998-1 as a rendering and plastering mortar.

4. Certified by WTA to Technical Bulletin 2-9-04/D as a renovation mortar system for salt-

loaded substrates, high vapor permeability, and water repellency.

5. NoVOC.

6. Basis of Design: "KEIM Porosan Top Coat", KEIM Mineral Coatings of America, Inc.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Tools:

1. Gentle Cleaner: Apply by brush or injected through steam cleaner or pressure washer. Clean

up with water.

2. Renovation Stucco:

Mix with continuous automatic mixing pump or paddle on drill motor. Apply using ordinary

stucco tools. Clean up with water.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Renovation Stucco base coat:

Scarify surfaces of stucco base coat to provide a key for subsequent finish stucco coat application.

B. Renovation Stucco finish coat:

Reproduce texture of surrounding surfaces or finish as directed by Owner’s Representative.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions:

Confirm by examination the areas and conditions under which the work is to be applied for

compliance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory

conditions have been corrected.

1. Verify substrate is secure, sound, dry, absorbent, and free of dirt, grease, salts, oil-based

paints, release agents, curing agents, and other bond breakers.

2. Verify substrate has no pretreatments or priming materials applied.

3. Beginning of the work shall indicate acceptance of the areas and conditions as satisfactory

by the Applicator.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protection:

Lay ground cloths and take measures as necessary to protect surfaces subject to contact by

products specified by this Section.

B. Prepare stucco surfaces:



Page 5 of 6

1. Remove biological growth.

2. Sound existing stucco. Remove loose or delaminated layers to sound substrate.

3. Remove salt-laden debris from project site. Prevent debris from contacting unprotected

ground.

4. Remove crumbly stucco to sound substrate by high pressure water spray or by mechanical

means.

5. Do not allow salt contaminated rinse water to contact project site.

C. Remove soiling and pollutants with Gentle Cleaner: Brush Cleaning Method

1. Mechanically remove thick soil deposits.

2. Dilute 1:10 with clean water (1 part gentle cleaner to 10 parts clean water.)

3. Clean contaminated surfaces with diluted gentle cleaner. Allow to rest minimum 1 hour.

4. Reapply diluted gentle cleaner to contaminated surfaces. Rinse from bottom of facade to top

and then back down with clean water to prevent loosened soil from re-depositing onto the

cleaned surface.

D. Remove soiling and pollutants with Gentle Cleaner: Steam Cleaner or Pressure Washer Method

1. Dilute 1:10 with clean water (1 part gentle cleaner to 10 parts clean water.)

2. Add diluted gentle cleaner to additive reservoir of cleaning equipment. Adjust product

delivery for best effect.

3. Clean contaminated surfaces from bottom to top. Rinse cleaned surfaces from bottom of

facade to top and then back down with clean water to prevent loosened soil from re-

depositing onto the cleaned surface.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Conform to reviewed product data, manufacturer's written instructions, and provisions of the

Contract Documents.

B. Plan the work properly.

C. Work ahead of the sun on shaded facades.

D. Do not apply on sun heated substrate.

E. Work to logical stopping points (corners, seams, architectural features, etc.)

F. Observe recommended minimum curing periods.

G. Unless otherwise stated below, protect from wind and rain prior to, during, and for a minimum 24

hours after application.



Page 6 of 6

H. Renovation Stucco, base coat:

I. Ensure surfaces and substrates are completely dry.

J. Brush salt formations from surfaces. Blow surfaces clean with filtered compressed air. Do not use

water.

K. Pre-wet surfaces to ensure all contact areas are dampened. Sponge off standing water.

L. Prepare renovation stucco according to product technical data sheet.

M. Place stucco into voids left from delaminated or crumbly stucco removal in one coat to plane of

existing stucco. Maximum lift 3/4 inch (20 mm). Scarify fresh stucco surface after 4 hours to key for

next lift.

N. Cure minimum 28 days.

O. Renovation Stucco, finish coat:

P. Ensure all contact areas are dry. Do not pre-wet surfaces.

Q. Prepare renovation stucco according to product technical data sheet.

R. Apply renovation stucco finish coat in one lift minimum 3/8 inch (10 mm) over all stucco surfaces

where indicated in construction documents.

S. Finish as directed in 2.4 FINISHES.

T. Protect freshly applied stucco from drying too quickly. Moist cure if necessary.

U. Cure minimum 10 days before applying silicate coating system.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean tools, spills, and accidental drips immediately with plenty of water.

B. Leave applications clean and premises free from residue and debris from work of this Section.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 09255 – GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES GOVERNMENT OF THE U. S. VIRGIN ISLANDS, DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 16

PART 1 GENERAL


Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary


1.2 SUMMARY


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies.

2. Gypsum board assemblies attached to steel framing.

3. Cementitious backer units installed with gypsum board assemblies.


The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for the following: Wood blocking and grounds.

2. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation” for thermal insulation.

3. Division 7 Section "Fire stopping" for fire stopping systems and fire-resistive-rated joint

sealants.

4. Division 9 Section "Tile" for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for ceramic

tile.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology:

Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA-505 for definitions of terms related to gypsum board assemblies

not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.

1.4 ASSEMBLY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Sound Transmission Characteristics:

For gypsum board assemblies indicated to have STC ratings, provide materials and construction

identical to those of assemblies whose STC ratings were determined per ASTM E 90 and

classified per ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General:

Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification

Sections.

B. Product data for each type of product specified.

C. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of gypsum board assembly components certifying that

their products comply with specified requirements.


Page 2 of 16


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:

Where fire-rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, provide materials and construction

identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E II9 by an independent

testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Fire Resistance

Ratings: As indicated by reference to GA File Numbers in GA-600 "Fire Resistance Design

Manual" or to design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listing of another

testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Single-Source Responsibility for Steel Framing:

Obtain steel framing members for Gypsum board assemblies from a single manufacturer.

C. Single-Source Responsibility for Panel Products:

Obtain each type of Gypsum board and other panel products from a single manufacturer.

D. Single-Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials:

Obtain finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and

other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer.


A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification

of manufacturer or supplier.

B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather,

direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack

Gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.

C. Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise

damage metal corner beads and trim.


A. Environmental Conditions, General:

Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board to

comply with ASTM C 840 and with Gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Room Temperatures:

For non-adhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, do not exceed 95 deg F (35 deg C).

C. Ventilation:

Ventilate building spaces, as required, for drying joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during

hot dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


Page 3 of 16

B. Steel Framing and Furring:

1. Alabama Metal Industries Corp.

2. Consolidated Systems, Inc.

3. Dale Industries, Inc.

4. Dietrich Industries, Inc.

5. Marino Industries Corp.

6. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.

7. Unimast Inc.

C. Grid Suspension Assemblies:

1. Chicago Metallic Corp.

2. National Rolling Mills Co.

3. USG Interiors, Inc.

D. Gypsum Board and Related Products:

1. Domtar Gypsum.

2. Georgia-Pacific Corp.

3. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.

2.2 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS

A. General:

Provide components complying with ASTM C 754 for materials and sizes unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

C. Hanger Rods: Mild steel and zinc-coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

D. Flat Hangers: Mild steel and zinc-coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

E. Angle-Type Hangers:

Angles with legs not less than 7/8-inch-wide, formed from 0.0635-inch-thick galvanized steel

sheet complying with ASTM A 446 Coating Designation G90, with bolted connections and 5/16-

inch-diameter bolts.

F. Channels:

Cold-rolled steel, 0.05980-inch-minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and 7/16-inchwide

flanges, and as follows:

G. Carrying Channels: 2 inches deep, 590 lb per 1000 feet, unless otherwise indicated


Page 4 of 16

H. Carrying Channels: 1-1/2 inch deep, 4751b per 1000 feet, unless otherwise indicated

I. Furring Channels: 3/4 inch deep, 300 lb per 1000 feet, unless otherwise indicated

J. Finish: Rust-inhibitive paint, unless otherwise indicated

K. Finish: G-60 hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM A 525 for framing for exterior soffits and where

indicated

L. Steel Studs for Furring Channels:

ASTM C 645, with flange edges bent back 90 deg and doubled over to form 3/16-inch minimum

lip (return), minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and minimum depth as follows:

1. Thickness: 0.0329 inch, unless otherwise indicated

2. Depth: As indicated

3. Protective Coating: G40 hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM A 525

M. Steel Rigid Furring Channels:

ASTM C 645, hat-shaped, depth of 7/8 inch, and minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal

as follows:

1. Thickness: 0.0329 inch, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: G90 hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM A 525.

N. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings:

ASTM C 645, manufacturer's standard direct-hung grid suspension system composed of main

beams and cross furring members that interlock to form a modular supporting network.

2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS

A. General:

Provide steel framing members complying with the following requirements:

B. Component Sizes and Spacing:

As indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C 754 under the following

maximum deflection and lateral loading conditions: Maximum Deflection: L/240 at 5 lbf per sq.

ft.

C. Protective Coating: G40 hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM A 525.

D. Steel Studs and Runners:

ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 deg and doubled over to form 3/16-inch-

wide minimum lip (return) and complying with the following requirements for minimum

thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth:

1. Thickness: 0.0270 inch unless otherwise indicated

2. Thickness: 0.0329 inch where indicated

3. Depth: 3-5/8 inches, unless otherwise indicated


Page 5 of 16

4. Depth: 6 inches where indicated

5. Depth: 2-1/2 inches where indicated

6. Depth: 1-5/8 inch where indicated

7. Depth: 4 inches where indicated

E. Steel Rigid Furring Channels:

ASTM C 645, hat-shaped, depth and minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows:

1. Depth: 7/8 inch.

2. Thickness: 0.0329 inch, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Fasteners for Metal Framing:

Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties

required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved; complying

with the recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated.

2.4 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS

A. General:

Provide Gypsum Board of types indicated in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end

butt joints. Thickness: Provide Gypsum Board in thicknesses indicated or, if not otherwise

indicated, in 5/8 inch thicknesses to comply with ASTM C 840 for application system and support

spacing indicated.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 and as follows:

1. Type: Type X required for all assemblies

2. Type: Sag-resistant type for ceiling surfaces

C. Edges: Tapered

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch unless otherwise indicated

D. Available Products:

Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work where

proprietary gypsum wallboard is indicated include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Gyprock Fireguard C Gypsum Board, Domtar Gypsum.

2. Firestop Type C, Georgia-Pacific Corp.

3. Fire-Shield G, Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.

4. SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Panels, FIRECODE C Core, United States Gypsum Co.

5. SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Panels, ULTRACODE Core, United States Gypsum Co.

E. Gypsum Backing Board for Multilayer Applications:


Page 6 of 16

ASTM C 442 or, where backing board is not available from manufacturer, gypsum wallboard,

ASTM C 36 and as follows:

1. Type: Type X required for all assemblies

2. Edges: Square, not tapered; or V-tongue and groove

3. Thickness: 5/8 inch unless otherwise indicated

F. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630 and as follows:

1. Type: Regular, unless otherwise indicated

2. Type: Type X where required for fire-resistive-rated assemblies

3. Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated

2.5 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS

A. Provide cementitious backer units complying with ANSI A118.9, of thickness and width indicated

below, and in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints. Width: Manufacturer’s

standard width but not less than 32 inches.

B. Available Products:

Subject to compliance with requirements, cementitious backer units that may be incorporated in

the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

C. DomCrete Cementitious Tile-Backer Board, Domtar Gypsum.

D. Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board, FinPan, Inc.

E. Glas-crete Cementitious Backer Board, Glascrete, Inc.

F. Wonder-Board, Glascrete, Inc.

G. DUROCK Interior Cement Board, United States Gypsum Co.

2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Accessories for Interior Installation:

Corner beads, edge trim, and control joints complying with ASTM C 1047 and requirements

indicated below:

B. Material:

Formed metal, plastic, or metal combined with paper, with metal complying with the following

requirement:

1. Sheet steel zinc-coated by hot-dip process.

2. Sheet steel coated with zinc by hot-dip or electrolytic processes, or with aluminum or rolled

zinc.

C. Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C 1047:


Page 7 of 16

1. Cornerbead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated

2. LC-bead with both face and back flanges; face flange formed to receive joint compound.

Use LC-beads for edge trim unless otherwise indicated.

3. L-bead with face flange only; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use Lbead

where indicated.

4. U-bead with face and back flanges; face flange formed to be left without application of joint

compound. Use U-bead where indicated.

5. One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot, with removable strip covering slot

opening

2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General:

Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the recommendations of both

the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials for each application

indicated.

B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board:

Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated. Use pressure-sensitive or staple-attached

open-weave glass-fiber reinforcing tape with compatible joint compound where recommended

by manufacturer of Gypsum Board and joint treatment materials for application indicated.

C. Joint Tape for Cementitious Backer Units:

Polymer-coated, open glass-fiber mesh.

D. Setting-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board:

Factory-packaged, job-mixed, chemical-hardening powder products formulated for uses

indicated.

E. Where setting-type joint compounds are indicated as a taping compound only or for taping and filling

only, use formulation that is compatible with other joint compounds applied over it.

F. For prefilling gypsum board joints, use formulation recommended by Gypsum Board manufacturer

for this purpose.

G. For filling joints and treating fasteners of water-resistant Gypsum backing board behind base for

ceramic tile, use formulation recommended by the Gypsum Board manufacturer for this purpose.

H. For topping compound, use sandable formulation.

I. Drying-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board:

Factory-packaged vinyl-based products complying with the following requirements for

formulation and intended use.

J. Ready-Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product

K. Job-Mixed Formulation: Powder product for mixing with water at Project site


Page 8 of 16

L. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and face flanges

of trim accessories.

M. Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats

N. All-purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds.

O. Joint Compound for Cementitious Backer Unit:

Material recommended by cementitious backer unit manufacturer.

2.8 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Latex Acoustical Sealant:

Manufacturer's standard non-sag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant complying with ASTM C

834 and the following requirements:

B. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings

in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies per ASTM E 90.

C. Product has flame-spread and smoke-developed ratings of less than 25 per ASTM E 84.

D. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:

Manufacturer’s standard nondrying, non-hardening, non-skinning, non-staining, gun applied,

synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission

of airborne sound.

E. Available Products:

Subject to compliance with requirements, acoustical sealants that may be incorporated in the

Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

F. Acoustical Sealant:

1. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant, Pecora Corp.

2. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant, United States Gypsum Co.

G. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:

1. BA-98, Pecora Corp.

2. Tremco Acoustical Sealant, Tremco, Inc.


A. General:

Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with referenced standards

and recommendations of Gypsum Board manufacturer.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound recommended for laminating Gypsum

panels.

C. Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting-type joint compound recommended for spot grouting hollow

metal door frames.


Page 9 of 16

D. Fastening Adhesive for Wood: ASTM C 557.

E. Fastening Adhesive for Metal: Special adhesive recommended for laminating Gypsum panels to

steel framing.

F. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for the following applications:

G. Fastening Gypsum Board to steel members less than 0.03 inch thick.

H. Fastening Gypsum Board to wood members.

I. Fastening Gypsum Board to gypsum board.

J. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening gypsum board to steel members from

0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

K. Corrosion-resistant-coated steel drill screws of size and type recommended by board manufacturer

for fastening cementitious backer units.

L. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), unperforated.

M. Sound Attenuation Blankets:

Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket insulation produced by combining mineral fibers of type described

below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I (blankets without

membrane facing):

N. Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass.

O. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder:

1. ASTM D 4397, thickness and maximum permeance rating as follows:

2. 4.0 mils, 0.19 perms.

3. 6.0 mils, 0.13 perms.

P. Vapor Retarder Tape:

Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer for sealing joints

and penetrations in vapor retarder.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed hollow metal

frames, cast-in-anchors, and structural framing with Installer present for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies

specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have

been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ceiling Anchorages:


Page 10 of 16

Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead structural

assemblies to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have

been installed to receive ceiling hangers that will develop their full strength and at spacing

required to support ceilings. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades

for installation well in advance of time needed for coordination with other construction.

3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with

ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in Gypsum Board assemblies

to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or

similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board

manufacturer or, if none available, with "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by United

States Gypsum Co.

C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading

imposed by structural movement. Comply with details shown on Drawings.

D. Where building structure abuts ceiling perimeter or penetrates ceiling.

E. Where partition framing and wall furring abut structure except at floor.

F. Provide slip- or cushioned-type joints as detailed to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading.

G. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with steel framing or furring members.

Independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members as indicated.

3.4 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS

A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows:

B. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum

that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where

required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counter-splaying, or

other equally effective means.

C. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that

interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members,

install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size

supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits

established by referenced standards.

D. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye-screws,

or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will

not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

E. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members,

by attaching to inserts, eye-screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for

structure as well as for type of hanger involved, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate

or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.


Page 11 of 16

F. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts

that extend through forms.

G. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.

H. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.

I. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes or conduit.

J. Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support.

K. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacing indicated but not less than that

required by the referenced steel framing installation standard.

L. Wire Hangers: 0.1620-inch (8-gage) diameter, 4 feet O.C.

M. Carrying Channels (Main Runners)): 1-1/2 inch, 4 feet O.C.

N. Rigid Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches O.C.

O. Installation Tolerances:

Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so that cross-furring members or grid

suspension members are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet as measured both lengthwise on each

member and transversely between parallel members.

P. Wire-tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as indicated.

Q. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets

vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-

cut to fit into wall track.

R. For exterior soffits, install cross-bracing and additional framing to resist wind uplift according to

details on Drawings.

3.5 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS

A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where Gypsum Board

stud assemblies abut other construction. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls,

install asphalt felt strips between studs and wall.

B. Installation Tolerances:

Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surfaces do not vary more than

l/8 inch from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing.

C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings,

except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Cut studs 1/2 inch short of

full height. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating

partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. For STC-rated and fire-resistive-rated

partitions requiring partitions to extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs and decks or other

continuous solid structural surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other

members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed, to support gypsum board closures

needed to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.


Page 12 of 16

D. Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated.

E. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacing indicated but not less than that required by the

referenced steel framing installation standard to comply with maximum deflection and minimum

loading requirements specified.

F. Single Layer Construction: Space studs at 24 inches O.C.

G. Single and Double-Layer Construction: Space studs at 24 inches O.C.

H. Install steel studs so that flanges point in the same direction and so that leading edges or ends of each

gypsum board can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. Frame door openings to comply with details indicated, with GA-219, and with applicable published

recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws either

directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple

studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. Extend vertical jamb studs through suspended ceilings and

attach to underside of floor or roof structure above.

J. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated or, if not indicated, in

same manner as required for door openings. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing

required above door heads.

K. Install thermal insulation as follows:

L. Erect insulation vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches O.C.

M. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete

stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches

O.C.

N. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending

beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw attach short flange of furring channel to web of

attached channel. Start from this furring channel with standard width insulation panel and continue

in regular manner. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner

and cut insulation to fit.

O. Until gypsum board is installed, hold insulation in place with 10-inch staples fabricated from 0.0625-

inch (16-gage)-diameter tie wire and inserted through slot in web of member.

P. Install polyethylene vapor retarder where indicated to comply with the following requirements:

Q. Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place

with mechanical fasteners or adhesives. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in

insulated substrates, including those filled with loose mineral-fiber insulation.

R. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten

vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges, at perimeter of wall openings, and at lap

joints; space fasteners 16 inches O.C.

S. Seal joints in vapor retarders caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes and similar items penetrating

vapor retarders with vapor retarder tape.


Page 13 of 16

T. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarder immediately before concealing it with the installation

of gypsum board or other construction.

3.6 APPLYING AND FINISIDNG GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards:

Install and finish Gypsum panels to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216.

B. Install sound attenuation blankets where indicated prior to installing gypsum panels unless blankets

are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and avoid

abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels

not Jess than one framing member.

D. Install wall/partition board panels to minimize the number of abutting end joints or avoid them

entirely. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board.

At high walls, install panels horizontally with end abutting joints over studs and staggered.

E. Install Gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels. Butt

panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space

between panels. Do not force into place.

F. Locate both edge or end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate

supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Position adjoining panels so

that tapered edges abut tapered edges, and field-cut edges abut field-cut edges and ends. Do not place

tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides

of partitions. Avoid joints at corners of framed openings where possible.

G. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so that the leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open

(unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

H. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.

I. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for solid core wood doors, hollow metal doors, and doors over

32 inches wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip and immediately insert Gypsum panels

into frames.

J. Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated and as detailed, with space between

edges of adjoining Gypsum panels, as well as supporting framing behind Gypsum panels.

K. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with Gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above

ceilings, etc.), except in chase walls that are braced internally.

L. Except where concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings,

coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

M. Fit Gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.

N. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of roof decks, cut gypsum

panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to-1/2-inch-

wide joints to install sealant.


Page 14 of 16

O. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments as detailed and

required. Provide 1/4-inch wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with U-bead edge trim

where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural

surfaces with acoustical sealant.

P. Where STC-rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind

control and expansion joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant

including a bead at both faces of the partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer’s

recommendations for location of edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through

Gypsum Board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

Q. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing

standard and manufacturer's recommendations.

3.7 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS

A. Single-Layer Application:

Install Gypsum wallboard panels as follows:

B. On ceilings, apply Gypsum panels prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent

possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.

C. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated,

and provide panel lengths that will minimize end joints.

D. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless parallel

application is required for fire-resistive-rated assemblies. Use maximum-length panels to minimize

end joints.

E. Wall Tile Substrates:

For substrates indicated to receive thin-set ceramic tile and similar rigid applied wall finishes,

comply with the following:

F. Install cementitious backer units at showers and where indicated to comply with ANSI A108.11.

G. Install Gypsum wallboard panels with tapered edges taped and finished to produce a flat surface

except at showers and other locations indicated to receive water-resistant panels.

H. Double-Layer Application:

Install gypsum backing board for base layers and Gypsum Wallboard for face layers. On

partitions/walls, apply base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of

base layers located over stud or furring member and face layer joints offset at least one stud or

furring member with base layer joints. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

I. Single-Layer Fastening Methods:

Apply gypsum panels to supports as follows: Fasten with screws.

J. Double-Layer Fastening Methods:

Apply base layer of gypsum panels and face layer to base layer as follows:

K. Fasten base layers with screws and face layer with adhesive and supplementary fasteners.

3.8 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES


Page 15 of 16

A. General:

For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same Fasteners used to fasten

gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory manufacturer's

directions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners.

B. Install corner beads at external corners.

C. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed.

Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound except where other types

are indicated.

D. Install LC-bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can

be attached to framing or supporting substrate.

E. Install L-bead where edge trims can only be installed after gypsum panels are installed.

F. Install U-bead where indicated.

3.9 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. General:

Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions); flanges of corner bead, edge trim,

and control joints; penetrations; fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to

prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration and levels of gypsum board finish indicated.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting type joint compound.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints except those with trim accessories having concealed face

flanges not requiring taping to prevent cracks from developing in joint treatment at flange edges.

D. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints and to trim accessories with concealed face flanges as

recommended by trim accessory manufacturer and as required to prevent cracks from developing in

joint compound at flange edges.

E. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish:

Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish per GA-214:

F. Level 1 for ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish

is required for fire-resistive-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies.

G. Level 2 where water-resistant gypsum backing board panels form substrates for tile, and where

indicated.

H. Level 3 for gypsum board surfaces indicated to receive medium- or heavy-textured finishes before

painting.

I. Level 4 for gypsum board surfaces indicated to receive light-textured finishes, wallcoverings, and

flat paints over light textures.

J. For level 4 gypsum board finish, embed tape in finishing compound plus two separate coats applied

over joints, angles, fastener heads, and trim accessories using one of the following combinations of

joint compounds (not including prefill), and sand between coats and after last coat.


Page 16 of 16

K. Where level 3 gypsum board finish is indicated, apply joint compounds specified for first and second

coat in addition to embedding coat.

L. Where level 2 gypsum board finish is indicated, apply joint specified for first coat in addition to

embedding coat.

M. Where level 1 gypsum board finish is indicated, apply joint compound specified for embedding coat.

N. Finish cementitious backer units to comply with unit manufacturer's directions.


A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer that ensures

gypsum board assemblies remain without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 09300 – TILES GOVERNMENT OF THE U. S. VIRGIN ISLANDS, DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 3

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Interior Tile:

B. Wall tile over tile backer board at wet areas.

C. Wall tile over concrete and concrete masonry units.

D. Floor tile over concrete slab.

E. Floor tile over plywood and wood decking.

F. Remodeling of existing tile work.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit for approval samples, product data, and mock-ups.


A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which

have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver,

handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Tile Materials: ANSI 118 series standard specifications.

C. Tile Installation:

ANSI 108 series standard specifications and Tile Council of America, Handbook for Ceramic

Tile Installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers of Tile:

American Olean, Dal-Tile, Summitville Tiles, United States Ceramic Tile Co. or approved equal.

B. Manufacturers of Setting Materials:

American Olean, Bostic Construction Products, Laticrete, Mapei Corp or approved equal.

C. Glazed Wall Tile:

1. Type: Interior type body, flat tile

2. Face: [4 by 8 inches]

3. Thickness: 5/16 inch nominal thickness

4. Face: Plain face with modified square edge.

D. Unglazed Paver Tile:


Page 2 of 3

1. Type: Porcelain flat tile

2. Size: As indicated

3. Thickness: 1/2 inch nominal

4. Face: Plain face with square edges.

E. Glazed Paver Tile:

1. Type: Porcelain flat tile

2. Size: As indicated

3. Thickness: 1/2-inch nominal

4. Face: Plain face with square edges.

F. Tile Accessories:

1. Matching trim units.

2. Marble thresholds.

3. Stone thresholds.

4. Ceramic toilet accessories.

G. Setting Materials:

1. Latex-Portland cement mortar, ANSI A118.

2. Chemical-resistant epoxy adhesive, ANSI A118.

H. Grout:

1. Latex-Portland cement grout, ANSI A118.6.

2. Chemical-resistant epoxy grout, ANSI A118.

I. Setting Accessories:

1. Membrane waterproofing under tile.

2. Cementitious tile backer board.

J. Elastomeric Sealants:

1. One-part mildew-resistant silicone sealant for non-traffic areas.

2. Multi-part pourable urethane sealant for traffic areas.

3. Chemical-resistant sealant at chemical-resistant flooring.


Page 3 of 3

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with Tile Council of America and ANSI Standard Specifications for Installation for

substrate and installation required. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.

B. Lay tile in grid pattern with alignment grids. Layout to provide uniform joint widths and to minimize

cutting; do not use less than 1/2 tile units.

C. Provide sealant joints where recommended by TCA and approved by Owner’s Representative.

D. Grout and cure, clean and protect.

3.2 SCHEDULE

A. Tile Schedule:

1. Toilet Room Walls:

Glazed wall tile over masonry or cementitious backer unit with thin-set latex modified cement

mortar and latex-Portland cement grout.

2. Toilet Room Floors:

Unglazed paver tile over concrete slab or wood decking with chemical resistant adhesive, latex

Portland cement mortar and chemical resistant grout.

3. Other Areas:

Glazed paver tile over concrete slab or wood decking with chemical resistant adhesive, latex

Portland cement mortar and chemical resistant grout.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 093000 – TILE SETTING MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES GOVERNMENT OF THE U. S. VIRGIN ISLANDS, DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 53

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Ceramic tile materials and applications including the following:

1. Ceramic wall tile and trim units (glazed).

2. Ceramic floor tile/mosaics and trim units (glazed or unglazed).

3. Ceramic tile pavers and trim units (glazed or unglazed).

4. Quarry tile pavers and trim units (glazed or unglazed).

5. Porcelain tile.

6. Glass tile (including mosaics).

7. Special purpose tile.

8. Decorative thin wall tile.

9. Installation adhesives, mortars, grouts and sealants.

10. Waterproofing membranes for Ceramic tile work.

11. Anti-fracture membranes for ceramic tile work.

12. Uncoupling membranes for ceramic tile work.

13. Sound control underlayment.

14. Thresholds, trim, cementitious backer units and other accessories specified herein.


A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete Cast-in-Place Concrete

B. Section 03 39 00 - Concrete Curing Concrete Curing

C. Section 03 41 10 - Plant-Precast Structural Concrete* Precast Structural Concrete

D. Section 03 53 00 - Concrete Topping Concrete Topping

E. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry Unit Masonry (CMU wall substrates)

F. Section 04 40 00 - Stone Assemblies Stone Masonry

G. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry Rough Carpentry (plywood sub-floors)

H. Section 07 13 00 - HDPE Membrane Waterproofing Sheet Waterproofing


Page 2 of 53

I. Section 07 14 00 - Fluid-Applied Waterproofing Fluid Applied Waterproofing

J. Section 07 50 00 - Membrane Roofing Membrane Roofing

K. Section 07 91 26 - Joint Fillers Joint Sealants

L. Section 09 01 20.91 - Plaster Restoration Backing Boards and Underlayments

M. Section - 09255 Gypsum Board

N. Section - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel

Structural Members.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI A137.1 American National Standard Specifications For Ceramic Tile.

2. ANSI A137.2 American National Standard Specifications For Glass Tile.

3. ANSI A108.01 - A108.17 American National Standard Specifications For The Installation

Of Ceramic Tile.

4. ANSI A118.1 - A118.15 American National Standard Specifications For The Installation Of

Ceramic Tile.

5. ANSI A136.1 American National Standard Specifications For The Installation Of Ceramic

Tile.

C. American Plywood Association (APA) Y510T Plywood Design Specifications.

D. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. ASTM A82 Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.

2. ASTM A185 Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete

Reinforcement.

3. ASTM C33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregate.

4. ASTM C36 Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard.

5. ASTM C109 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars

(Using 2-in. or 50-mm Cube Specimens).

6. ASTM C144 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.

7. ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement.

8. ASTM C171 Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.


Page 3 of 53

9. ASTM C241 Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Stone Subjected to Foot

Traffic.

10. ASTM C267 Standard Test Method for Chemical Resistance of Mortars, Grouts, and

Monolithic Surfacings.

11. ASTM C482 Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to Portland Cement.

12. ASTM C503 Standard Specification for Marble Dimension Stone (Exterior).

13. ASTM C531 Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal

Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer

Concretes.

14. ASTM C627 Standard Test Method for Evaluating Ceramic Floor Tile Installation Systems

Using the Robinson-Type Floor Tester.

15. ASTM C794 Standard Test Method for Adhesion-in-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants.

16. ASTM C847 Standard Specification for Metal Lath.

17. ASTM C905 Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Chemical-Resistant Mortars,

Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings.

18. ASTM C920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.

19. ASTM C955 Standard Specification for Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs,

Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Board and

Metal Plaster Bases.

20. ASTM D226 Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing

And Waterproofing.

21. ASTM D227 Standard Specification for Coal-Tar Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing

and Waterproofing.

22. ASTM D751 Standard Test Method for Coated Fabrics.

23. ASTM D751 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness.

24. ASTM D1248 Standard Test Method for Staining of Porous Substances by Joint Sealants.

25. ASTM D2240 Standard Test Method for Coated Fabrics.

26. ASTM D4263 Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by The Plastic

Sheet Method.

27. ASTM D4397 Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction,

Industrial and Agricultural Applications.

28. ASTM D4716 Standard Test Method for Determining the (In Plane) Flow Rate Per Unit

Width and Hydraulic Transmissivity of a Geo-synthetic Using a Constant Head.


Page 4 of 53

29. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.

30. ASTM E90 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound

Transmission Loss of Building Partitions.

31. ASTM E96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

32. ASTM E413 Standard Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.

33. ASTM E492 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Impact Sound

Transmission Through Floor-Ceiling Assemblies Using the Tapping Machine.

34. ASTM E989 Standard Classification for Determination of Impact Insulation Class (IIC).

35. ASTM E1155 Standard Test Method for Determining FF Floor Flatness and FL Floor

Levelness.

36. ASTM F1869 Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of

Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride.

37. ASTM 2170 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor

Slabs using in situ Probes.

38. ASTM 2420 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity on the Surface of

Concrete Floors Slabs using Relative Humidity Probe Measurement and Insulated Hood.

E. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) - ASME A112.6.3 Floor and Trench Drains.

F. Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute (CSSBI) Lightweight Steel Framing Binder Publication

52M.

G. Federal Housing Administration (FHA) Bulletin No. 750 Impact Noise Control in Multifamily

Dwellings.

H. Housing and Urban Development (HUD) TS 28 A Guide to Airborne, Impact and Structure-borne

Noise-Control in Multifamily Dwellings.

I. International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 13007 Standards for Grouts and Adhesives.

J. Materials And Methods Standards Association (MMSA) Bulletins 1-16.

K. Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association (ML/SFA) 540 Lightweight Steel Framing Systems Manual.

L. Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA) Product Technical Information and ICBO Evaluation

Service, Inc. Report ER-4943P.

M. Terrazzo, Tile And Marble Association Of Canada (TTMAC) Specification Guide 09300 Tile

Installation Manual.

N. Tile Council Of North America (TCNA) Handbook For Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation.


Page 5 of 53

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information for each product specified.

C. Submittal Requirements: Submit the following "Required LEED Criteria" certification items as

listed below. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements:

1. A completed LEED Environmental Building Materials Certification Form. Information to

be supplied generally includes:

a. Manufacturing plant locations for tile installation products.

b. LEED Credits as listed in "LEED Credit Submittals"

c. Recycled content; pre-consumer or post-consumer; or;

2. UL GREENGUARD Certification Program For Chemical Emissions For Building

Materials, Finishes And Furnishings, UL 2818 or UL GREENGUARD Gold certificates

provided by the tile installation materials manufacturer on UL GREENGUARD letterhead

stating "This product has been UL GREENGUARD Gold Product Certified For Low

Chemical Emissions by the UL Environment under the UL GREENGUARD Certification

Program For Chemical Emissions For Building Materials, Finishes And Furnishings" for

each tile installation product used to verify Low VOC product information.

3. Contractor's certification of LEED Compliance: Submit Contractor's certification verifying

the installation of specified LEED Compliant products.

4. Product Cut Sheets for all materials that meet the LEED performance criteria. Submit

Product Cut Sheets with Contractor or Sub-contractor's stamp, as confirmation that

submitted products were installed on Project.

5. Material Safety Data Sheets for all applicable products.

D. LEED Credit Submittals for the following;

1. LEED Reference Guide for Green Building Design and Construction, LEED v4 MR Credit

Building Product Disclosure and Optimization - Material Ingredients: Manufacturer's

product data for tile installation materials, including Health Product Declaration (HPD) on

HPD Collaborative letterhead.

2. LEED Reference Guide for Green Building Design and Construction, LEED v4 MR Credit

Building Product Disclosure and Optimization - Sourcing of Raw Materials Option 2

(Recycled Content): Manufacturer's product data for tile installation materials.

3. LEED Reference Guide for Green Building Design and Construction, LEED v4 MR Credit:

Building Product Disclosure and Optimization - Sourcing of Raw Materials Option 2

(Regional Materials): Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for

regionally manufactured Materials (within 100 miles (161km) of project site).


Page 6 of 53

4. LEED Reference Guide for Green Building Design and Construction, LEED v4 Edition MR

Credit Construction and Demolition Waste Management: Path 1 (Divert 50% and Three

Material Streams) Manufacturer's packaging showing recycle symbol for appropriate

disposition in construction waste management.

5. LEED Reference Guide for Green Building Design and Construction, LEED v4 Edition MR

Credit Construction and Demolition Waste Management: Path 1 (Divert 75% and Four

Material Streams) Manufacturer's packaging showing recycle symbol for appropriate

disposition in construction waste management.

6. LEED Reference Guide for Green Building Design and Construction, LEED v4 EQ Credit

Low-Emitting Materials: Manufacturer's product data for tile installation materials,

including UL GREENGUARD Gold Certificate on UL GREENGUARD letterhead stating

product VOC emissions.

7. LEED Schools Reference Guide (Educational Projects Only), 2007 Edition Credit EQ 9

(Enhanced Acoustical Performance): Impact noise reduction test reports and product data

on sound control product(s).

8. LEED Schools Reference Guide (Educational Projects Only), 2007 Edition Credit EQ 10

(Mold Prevention): Manufacturer's packaging and/or data showing anti-microbial

protection in product(s).

E. Submit shop drawings and manufacturers' product data.

F. Submit samples of each type/style/finish/size/color of ceramic tile, mosaic, paver, trim unit or

threshold.

G. Submit manufacturers' installation instructions.

H. Submit manufacturer's certification that the materials supplied conform to ANSI A137.1 for ceramic

tile or ANSI A137.2 for glass tile.

I. Submit proof of warranty.

J. Submit Health Product Declarations (HPD) for each tile installation material.

K. Submit sample of installation system demonstrating compatibility/functional relationships between

adhesives, mortars, grouts and other components. Submit proof from ceramic tile manufacturer or

supplier verifying suitability of ceramic tile for specific application and use; including dimensional

stability, water absorption, freeze/thaw resistance (if applicable), resistance to thermal cycling, and

other characteristics that the shall project shall require. These characteristics shall be reviewed and

approved by the project design professional(s).

L. Submit list from manufacturer of installation system/adhesive/mortar/grout identifying a minimum

of three similar projects, each with a minimum of ten years service.

M. For alternate materials, at least thirty days before bid date submit independent laboratory test results

confirming compliance with specifications listed in Part 2 - Products.



Page 7 of 53

A. Tile Manufacturer (Single Source Responsibility): Company specializing in ceramic tile, thin brick,

masonry veneer, mosaics, pavers, trim units and/or thresholds with three years minimum experience.

Obtain tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in

appearance and physical properties.

B. Installation System Manufacturer (Single Source Responsibility): Company specializing in

adhesives, mortars, grouts and other installation materials with ten years minimum experience and

ISO 9001 certification. Obtain installation materials from single source manufacturer to ensure

consistent quality and full compatibility.

C. Environmental Performance Criteria: The following criteria are required for products included in this

section. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements:

1. Adhesive products shall meet or exceed the VOC limits of South Coast Air Quality

Management District Rule (SCAQMD) #1168 and Bay Area Air Quality Management

District (BAAQMD) Reg. 8, Rule 51.

D. Submit laboratory confirmation of adhesives, mortars, grouts and other installation materials:

1. Identify proper usage of specified materials using positive analytical method.

2. Identify compatibility of specified materials using positive analytical method.

3. Identify proper color matching of specified materials using a positive analytical method.

E. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installation of ceramic tile, thin brick, masonry

veneer, mosaics, pavers, trim units and/or thresholds with five years documented experience with

installations of similar scope, materials and design.

F. Provide mock-up of each type/style/finish/size/color of ceramic tile, thin brick, masonry veneer,

mosaics, pavers, trim units and/or thresholds along with respective installation adhesives, mortars,

grouts and other installation materials.

G. Pre-Installation Meeting: At least three weeks prior to commencing tile work conduct a meeting at

the project site to discuss contract requirements and job conditions; require the attendance of tile

installers, representative of installation materials manufacturer, and installers of related materials;

notify Architect in advance of meeting.


A. Acceptance at Site: deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken

and labels, including grade seal, intact until time of use, in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.

B. Store ceramic tile, stone, and installation system materials in a dry location; handle in a manner to

prevent chipping, breakage, and contamination.

C. Protect latex additives, organic adhesives, epoxy adhesives and sealants from freezing or overheating

in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, store at room temperature when possible.

D. Store Portland cement mortars and grouts in a dry location.


Page 8 of 53


A. Provide ventilation and protection of environment as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Prevent carbon dioxide damage to ceramic tile, thin brick, masonry veneer, mosaics, pavers, trim

units and/or thresholds as well as adhesives, mortars, grouts and other installation materials, by

venting temporary heaters to the exterior.

C. Maintain ambient temperatures not more than 100 degrees F (38 degrees C) during installation and

for a minimum of seven days after completion. Protect work for extended period and from damage

by other trades. Protect Portland cement-based mortars and grouts from direct sunlight, radiant heat,

forced ventilation (heat & cold) and drafts until cured to prevent premature evaporation of moisture.

Epoxy mortars and grouts require surface temperatures between 60 degrees F (16 degrees C) and 90

degrees F (32 degrees C) at time of installation. It is the General Contractor's responsibility to

maintain temperature control.

D. Do not install epoxy-based materials when surface temperature is over 90 degrees F (32 degrees C).

1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate installation of tile work with related work.

B. Proceed with tile work only after curbs, vents, drains, piping, and other projections through substrate

have been installed and when substrate construction and framing of openings have been completed.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. The Contractor warrants the work of this Section to be in accordance with the Contract Documents

and free from faults and defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 25 years. The

manufacturer of adhesives, mortars, grouts and other installation materials shall provide a written

twenty-five-year warranty, which covers materials and labor - reference LATICRETE Warranty

Data Sheet 025.0 for complete details and requirements.

B. For exterior facades over steel or wood framing, the manufacturer of adhesives, mortars, grouts and

other installation materials shall provide a written fifteen-year warranty, which covers materials and

labor - reference LATICRETE Warranty Data Sheet 230.15 for complete details and requirements.

1.10 MAINTENANCE

A. Submit maintenance data under provisions of Section(s) (01 74 13) and (01 74 16) and (01 74 23).

Include cleaning methods, cleaning solutions recommended, stain removal methods, as well as

polishes and waxes recommended.

1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS STOCK

A. Upon completion of the work of this Section, deliver to the Owner 2% minimum additional tile and

trim shape of each type, color, pattern and size used in the Work, as well as extra stock of adhesives,

mortars, grouts and other installation materials for the Owner's use in replacement and maintenance.

Extra stock is to be from same production run or batch as original tile and installation materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Page 9 of 53

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: LATICRETE International, Inc., which is located at: 1 LATICRETE Park

N.; Bethany, CT 06524-3423; Toll Free Tel: 800-243-4788; Tel: 203-393-0010; Fax: 203-393-1684;

Email:request info ([email protected]); Web:http://www.laticrete.com/Mvis

B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00 -

Product Requirements.

C. Obtain products from a single manufacturer.

2.2 TILE MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with product requirements and performance requirements, provide products

by one of the following manufacturers:

B. WALL TILE MATERlALS

1. Ceramic Tile: ______.

2. Grade: ______.

3. Size: ______.

4. Edge: ______.

5. Finish: ______.

6. Color: ______.

7. Special shapes: ______.

8. Location: ______.

C. FLOOR TILE MATERlALS

1. Ceramic Tile:

2. Grade:

3. Size:

4. Edge:

5. Finish:

6. Color:

7. Special shapes:

8. Location:

2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES - CERAMIC TILE

http://admin.arcat.com/users.pl?action=UserEmail&company=LATICRETE+International,+Inc.&coid=33748&rep=&fax=203-393-1684&message=RE:%20Spec%20Question%20(09305lat):%20%20&mf=

http://http/www.laticrete.com/Mvis


Page 10 of 53

A. Waterproofing and Crack Isolation Membrane to be thin, cold applied, single component liquid and

load bearing and UL GREENGUARD Gold compliant. Reinforcing fabric to be non-woven rot-

proof specifically intended for waterproofing membrane. Waterproofing Membrane to be non-toxic,

non-flammable, and non-hazardous during storage, mixing, application and when cured. It shall be

certified by IAPMO and ICC approved as a shower pan liner and shall also meet the following

physical requirements:

1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE HYDRO BAN®*.

2. Hydrostatic Test (ASTM D4068): Pass.

3. Elongation @ break (ASTM D751): 20-30%.

4. System Crack Resistance (ANSI A118.12): Pass (High).

5. 7-day Tensile Strength (ANSI A118.10): 265 psi (1.8 MPa).

6. 7-day Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.10): 200 psi (1.4 MPa).

7. 28 Day Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.4): 214 psi (1.48 - 2.4 MPa).

8. Service Rating (TCNA/ASTM C627): Extra Heavy.

9. Total VOC Content: =0.22 mg/m3.

B. Epoxy Waterproofing Membrane to be 3 component epoxy, trowel applied specifically designed to

be used under Ceramic tile, stone or brick and requires only 24 hours prior to flood testing:

1. Basis of Design: LATAPOXY Waterproof Flashing Mortar.

2. Breaking Strength (ANSI A118.10): 450-530 psi (3.1-3.6 MPa).

3. Waterproofness (ANSI A118.10): No Water penetration.

4. 7-day Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.10): 110-150 psi (0.8-1 MPa).

5. 28 Day Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.10): 90-120 psi (0.6- 0.83 MPa).

6. 12 Week Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.10): 110-130 psi (0.8-0.9 MPa).

7. Total VOC Content: < 3.4 g/L.

C. Waterproofing Sheet Membrane to be thin, durable polyethylene core with a fused non-woven

polypropylene exterior surface, IAPMO approved as shower pan liner, and allow for use of either

polymer modified or un-modified tile mortars, depending upon substrate and type of tile used.

1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Sheet Membrane.

2. Waterproofness (ASTM D4068): Pass.

3. 7-day Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.10): = 170 psi.

4. 7-Day Water Immersion Shear Strength (ASTM C482-09): = 100 psi.


Page 11 of 53

5. Service Rating (TCNA ASTM C627): Extra Heavy.

D. Lightweight, Waterproof Tile Backer Board to comprised of high-density polystyrene core and

reinforced, waterproof cementitious coating on both sides. Available in thicknesses from 1/4 inch to

2 inches (6 millimeters to 50 millimeters) and specifically designed for use in bonded tile and stone

installations.

1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE HYDRO BAN® Board.

2. Compressive Strength (ASTM D1621): 30 psi (0.2 MPa).

3. Compressive Modulus (ASTM D1621): = 1200 psi (8.3 MPa).

4. Tensile Strength (ASTM C297): 50 psi (0.3 MPa).

5. Elongation (ASTM C297): 3.1%.

6. Shear Strength (ASTM C273): 30 foot pounds (0.04 kN-meter).

7. Waterproofness (ANSI A118.10): Pass.

8. R-Value (ASTM C578): R=4.8/inch.

9. Flexural Strength (ASTM C947): = 1900 psi (13.1 MPa).

10. Temperature Limits: 160 - 220 degrees F (71 - 104 degrees C).

11. Flash Point: = 600 degrees F (316 degrees C).

E. Low Profile Linear Floor Drain to be comprised of heavy duty 304 stainless steel, specially designed

for bonded waterproofing installations, allow for large format tile use in showers with single slope

to drain, available with standard, vertical waste line and horizontal side outlet, and with flow rate of

>= eight (8) gallons per minute (30 liters per minute).

1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Linear Drain.

F. Low Profile Bonding Flange Floor Drain to be comprised of heavy duty 304 stainless steel, specially

designed for bonded waterproofing installations, allow for elimination of pre-slope layer and primary

shower pan liner, per TCNA B422, and with flow rate of >= eight (8) gallons per minute (30 liters

per minute).

1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Bonding Flange Drain.

G. Floor Sealer: Colorless, stain- and slip-resistant sealer, not affecting color and physical properties of

ceramic tile and stone surfaces as recommended by sealer manufacturer for application indicated.

1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE STONETECH BULLETPROOF® Sealer.

H. Wire Reinforcing: 2 inches x 2 inches (50 x 50 mm) x 16 ASW gauge or 0.0625 inch (1.6 mm)

diameter galvanized steel welded wire mesh complying with ANSI A108.02 3.7, ASTM A185 and

ASTM A82.


Page 12 of 53

I. Cleavage membrane: 15 pound asphalt saturated, non-perforated roofing felt complying with ASTM

D226, 15 pound coal tar saturated, non-perforated roofing felt complying with ASTM D227 or 4.0

mils (0.1 mm) thick polyethylene plastic film complying with ASTM D4397.

J. Cementitious backer board units: size and thickness as specified, complying with ANSI A118.9.

K. Thresholds: Provide marble saddles complying with ASTM C241 for abrasion resistance and ASTM

C503 for exterior use, in color, size, shape and thickness as indicated on drawings.

2.4 INSTALLATION ACCESSORLES - EXTERIOR ADHERED VENEER

A. Waterproofing / Crack Suppression / Air & Water Barrier Membrane to be thin, cold applied, single

component liquid and load bearing. Reinforcing fabric to be non-woven rot-proof specifically

intended for waterproofing membrane. Waterproofing Membrane to be non-toxic, non-flammable,

and non-hazardous during storage, mixing, application and when cured. It shall be certified by

IAPMO and ICC approved as a shower pan liner and shall also meet the following physical

requirements:

1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE MVIS Air & Water Barrier.

2. Hydrostatic Test (ASTM D4068): Pass.

3. Elongation @ Break (ASTM D751): 20-30%.

4. System Crack Resistance (ANSI A118.12): Pass (High).

5. 7-day Tensile Strength (ANSI A118.10): > 265 psi (1.8 MPa).

6. 7-day Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.10) > 200 psi (1.4 MPa).

7. 28 Day Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.4): > 214 psi (1.48 - 2.4 MPa).

8. Service Rating (TCA/ASTM C627): Extra Heavy.

9. Total VOC Content: < 0.05 mg/m3.

B. Epoxy Waterproofing Membrane/Flashing Mortar to be 3 component epoxy, trowel applied

specifically designed to be used under masonry veneer, stone or thin brick and requires only 24 hours

prior to flood testing:

1. Basis of Design: LATAPOXY Waterproof Flashing Mortar.

2. Breaking Strength (ANSI A118.10): 450-530 psi (3.1-3.6 MPa).

3. Waterproofness (ANSI A118.10): No Water penetration.

4. 7-day Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.10): 110-150 psi (0.8-1 MPa).

5. 28 Day Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.10): 90-120 psi (0.6- 0.83 MPa).

6. 12 Week Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.10): 110-130 psi (0.8-0.9 MPa).



Page 13 of 53

C. Sealer (Exterior Masonry Veneers): Water-based formula specifically designed for topical

application on porous stones in exterior applications.

1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE STONETECH® Heavy Duty Exterior Sealer.

D. Galvanized, diamond metal lath: flat expanded type, weighing not less than 3.2 lb. per yd2 (1.4

kg/m2). Metal lath shall comply with ASTM C847.

E. Cleavage membrane: 15-pound asphalt saturated, non-perforated roofing felt complying with ASTM

D226, 15-pound coal tar saturated, non-perforated roofing felt complying with ASTM D227 or 4.0

mils (0.1 mm) thick polyethylene plastic film complying with ASTM D4397.

F. Cementitious backer board units: size and thickness as specified, complying with ANSI A118.9.

2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS - CERAMIC TILE

A. Sound Abatement & Crack Isolation Mat shall be load bearing, shock and vibration resistant. It shall

be certified by independent laboratory testing to meet the specified acoustical performance when

installed in a Floor Assembly with a 6 inches (150mm) concrete slab, as well as meet the following


1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE 170 Sound & Crack Isolation Mat.

2. Service Rating (ASTM C627): Light.

3. Point Load (ANSI A118.12 5.2): > 1,250 psi (8.6 MPa).

4. Installed Weight (ASTM C905 Modified): 2.6 lbs./ft2 (12.8 kg/m2).

5. Delta Impact Insulation Class (AIIC; ASTM E2179): 20.

B. Sound Abatement & Crack Suppression Adhesive shall comply with ANSI A118.12, provide an

Extra Heavy rating, be UL GREENGUARD Gold compliant, and provide a minimum AIIC of 15:

1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE 125 Sound & Crack Adhesive.

2. UL GREENGUARD Certified For Low Chemical Emissions (ULCOM/GG 2818) and UL

GREENGUARD Gold Certified For Low Chemical Emissions (ULCOM/GG UL 2818).

3. Service Rating (ASTM C627): Extra Heavy.

4. Delta Impact Insulation Class (AIIC; ASTM E2179): 15.

5. Point Load (ANSI A118.12 5.2): > 1,000 psi (6.9 MPa).

6. Minimum Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.12): 100psi (0.7 MPa).

C. Uncoupling Membrane shall comply with ANSI A118.12, provide an Extra Heavy rating and allow

for use with ANSI A118.4 thin-bed mortars:

1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE STRATA_MAT.


Page 14 of 53




4. ANSI A118.12 (High Performance): Pass.

D. Moisture Vapor Reduction to be epoxy based and UL GREENGUARD Gold compliant as well as

meet the following physical requirements:

1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE NXT™ Vapor Reduction Coating.



3. Shear Bond to Concrete (ANSI A118.12-5.1.5): > 285 psi (2.0 MPa).

4. Alkalinity Resistance (ASTM C267): Pass.

5. Permeability (ASTM F1869): 9.7 lbs/1,000ft2/24 hours down to 0.2 lbs/1,000 ft2/24hours

(248µg/sm2 down to 11 µg/sm2).


E. Electric Radiant Heat Mat to be comprised of intertwining heat element and mesh construction and

comply with UL 1693 - Electric Radiant Heating Panels and Heating Panel Sets and UL 1673 -

Electric Space Heating Cables.

1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE Floor HEAT Mat.

F. Electric Radiant Heat Cable System to be comprised of intertwining heat element and mesh

construction and comply with UL 1693 - Electric Radiant Heating Panels and Heating Panel Sets

and UL 1673 - Electric Space Heating Cables.

1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE Floor HEAT Wire.

G. Prefabricated & pre-sloped shower pan with curb constructed of lightweight high density expanded

polystyrene. Approved by IAPMO PS 106-2012 for US & shall as a prefabricated tile-able shower

receptor and exceeds ANSI A118.10. Use only manufacturer approved adhesives and sealants for

installation.

1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Pre-Sloped Shower pan and LATICRETE

HYDRO BAN Preformed Curb / HYDRO BAN Linear Pre-Sloped Shower Pan.

H. Latex Portland Cement Mortar for thick beds, screeds, leveling beds and scratch/plaster coats to be

weather, frost, shock resistant, UL GREENGUARD Gold compliant, and meet the following


1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE 3701 Fortified Mortar.




Page 15 of 53

3. Compressive Strength (ANSI A118.4 Modified): > 4,000 psi (27.6 MPa).

4. Water Absorption (ANSI A118.6): = 5%.

5. Service Rating (TCA/ASTM C627): Extra Heavy.

6. Smoke & Flame Contribution (ASTM E84 Modified): 0.


I. Self-Leveling Underlayment shall be mixed with water to produce a pumpable, fast setting, free

flowing cementitious underlayment which shall be poured from 1/8 in. to 1-1/4 in. (3 to 32mm) thick

in one pour and GREENGUARD Gold compliant.

1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE NXT Level Plus and NXT Primer.

2. 28 Day Compressive Strength (ASTM C1708.): > 4000 psi (27.6 MPa).

3. Tensile Bond Strength (ASTM C1583): > 500 psi (3.5 MPa).

4. Time to Foot Traffic: 1 - 4 Hours.


J. Epoxy Adhesive to be chemical resistant 100% solids epoxy with high temperature resistance,

GREENGUARD Gold compliant, conform to ISO R2, and meet the following minimum physical

requirements:

1. Basis of Design: LATAPOXY 300 Adhesive.



3. Compressive strength (ANSI A118.3): > 5000 psi (34.4 MPa).

4. Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.3): > 1250 psi (8.6 MPa).

5. Thermal Shock Resistance (ANSI A118.3): > 600 psi (4.1 MPa).

6. Tensile Strength (ANSI A118.3): > 1400 psi (9.6 MPa).

7. Shrinkage (ANSI A118.3): 0 - 0.1%.


9. ISO 13007 Classification: R2.

10. Cured Epoxy Adhesive to be chemically and stain resistant to ketchup, mustard, tea, coffee,

milk, soda, beer, wine, bleach (5% solution), ammonia, juices, vegetable oil, detergents,

brine, sugar, cosmetics and blood, as well as chemically resistant to dilute food acids, dilute

alkalis, gasoline, turpentine and mineral spirits.


Page 16 of 53

K. Modified Dry-Set Cement Thin Bed Mortar for thin set and slurry bond coats to be weather, frost,

shock resistant, non-flammable, GREENGUARD Gold compliant, conform to ISO C2TES2, and


1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE 254 Platinum.




4. Bond strength (ANSI A118.4): > 450 psi (3.1 MPa).



L. Improved Modified Dry-Set Cement Thin Bed Mortar for thin set and slurry bond coats to be

weather, frost, shock resistant, non-flammable, GREENGUARD Gold compliant, conform to ISO

C2TES2,and meet the following physical requirements:

1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE 254 Platinum.



3. 28 Day Porcelain Tile Shear Strength (ANSI A118.15): > 450 psi (3.1 MPa).

4. 28 Day Dry Cure / 20 Cycle Freeze-Thaw Porcelain Tile.

5. Shear Strength (ANSI A118.15): = 250 psi (1.7 MPa).

6. 7 Day Cure / 7 Day Water Immersion (ANSI A118.15): > 280 psi (1.9 MPa).

7. Extended Open Time (ANSI A118.15): > 100 psi (0.7 MPa).



M. Rapid-Setting Modified Dry-Set Cement Thin Bed Mortar to be weather, frost, shock resistant, non-

flammable, conform to EN12004:2007 + A1:2012 for Class C2FTS2 adhesive, and meet the

following physical requirements:

1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE 254R Platinum Rapid.

2. 28 Day Porcelain Tile Shear Strength (ANSI A118.4): > 400 psi (2.8MPa).

3. 7 Day Cure / 7 Day Water Immersion (ANSI A118.4): > 200 psi (1.4 MPa).

4. Shear Bond / Quarry Tile to Plywood (ANSI A118.11): > 190 psi (1.3 MPa).

5. Open Time (ANSI A118.4): >= 30 minutes.


Page 17 of 53

N. Modified Dry-Set Cement Thin Bed Glass Tile Adhesive to be weather, frost, shock resistant, non-

flammable, GreenGuard compliant, conform to ISO C2TS1, and meet the following physical

requirements:

1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE Glass Tile Adhesive.

2. Bond strength (ANSI A118.4 5.2.4): > 370 psi (2.55 MPa).

3. Bond strength (ANSI A118.4 5.2.3): 199 psi (1.37 MPa).

4. Total VOC Content: <=0.22 mg/m3.

O. Modified Dry-Set Cement Medium Bed Mortar to be weather, frost, shock resistant, non-flammable,

UL GREENGUARD Gold compliant, conform to EN12004:2007 + A1 :2012 for Class C2T

adhesive, and meet the following physical requirements:

1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE 255 MULTIMAX.




4. 28 Day bond strength (ANSI A118.4): =300 psi (2.1 MPa).

5. 7 day water soak bond strength (ANSI A118.4): >=190 psi (1.3 MPa).

6. Sag Resistance (EN 1308): 0 mm.


P. Organic Adhesive shall be a non-flammable, water resistant, latex adhesive and shall meet the


1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE 15 Premium Mastic.

2. Open Time (ANSI A136.1): 70 minutes @ 75 degrees F (24 degrees C).

3. Color: White

4. Density (ANSI A136.1): 13.2 lbs/gal (1.6 kg/l).


Q. Epoxy Grout (Industrial) to be non-flammable, chemical resistant 100% solids epoxy with high

temperature resistance, UL GREENGUARD Gold compliant, and meeting the following physical

requirements:

1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE SPECTRALOCK 2000 IG.

R. UL GREENGUARD Certified For Low Chemical Emissions (ULCOM/GG 2818) and UL



Page 18 of 53

S. Initial Set Time (ANSI A118.5): Pass (4 hours).

T. Service Set Time (ANSI A118.5): Pass (< 7 days).

U. Shrinkage (ANSI A118.3): 0.07%.

V. Sag (ANSI A118.3): Pass (No sag).

W. Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.3; quarry tile): 2,200 psi (15.2 MPa).

X. Compressive Strength (ANSI A118.3): 8,300 psi (57.2 MPa).

Y. Tensile Strength (ANSI A118.5): 3,000 psi (20.7 MPa).

Z. Thermal Shock Resistance (ANSI A118.3): 2,100 psi (14.5 MPa).

AA. Total VOC Content: =0.22 mg/m3.

BB. Cured Epoxy Grout to be chemically and stain resistant to ketchup, mustard, tea, coffee, milk, soda,

beer, wine, bleach (3% solution), ammonia, juices, vegetable oil, detergents, brine, sugar, cosmetics,

and blood, as well as being chemically resistant to dilute food/mineral acids, gasoline and mineral

spirits.

CC. Epoxy Grout (Commercial/Residential) shall be non-toxic, non-flammable, non-hazardous during

storage, mixing, application and when cured, UL GREENGUARD Gold compliant, and shall meet

the following physical requirements:

1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE SPECTRALOCK PRO Premium Grout.



3. Compressive Strength (ANSI A118.3): 3,800 psi (26.2 MPa).

4. Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.3): 1,100 psi (7.6 MPa).

5. Tensile Strength (ANSI A118.3): 1,100 psi (7.6 MPa).

6. Thermal Shock (ANSI A118.3): > 800 psi (5.5 MPa).

7. Water Absorption (ANSI A118.3): < 0.05%.

8. Vertical Joint Sag (ANSI A118.3): Pass.


10. Cured Epoxy Grout to be chemically and stain resistant to ketchup, mustard, tea, coffee,

milk, soda, beer, wine, bleach (5% solution), ammonia, juices, vegetable oil, brine, sugar,

cosmetics, and blood, as well as chemically resistant to dilute acids and dilute alkalis.

DD. Latex Portland Cement Grout to be weather, frost and shock resistant, UL GREENGUARD Gold

compliant, as well as meet the following physical requirements:


Page 19 of 53

1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE PERMACOLOR Select Grout.



3. Compressive Strength (ANSI A118.7): 3,500 psi (24.1 MPa).

4. Tensile Strength (ANSI A118.7): 510 psi (3.5 MPa).

5. Flexural Strength (ANSI A118.7): 1,250 psi (8.62 MPa).

6. Water Absorption (ANSI A118.7): < 2.8%.

7. Linear Shrinkage (ANSI A118.7): < 0.1 %.



EE. Expansion and Control Joint Sealant to be a one component, neutral cure, exterior grade silicone

sealant and meet the following requirements:

1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE LATASIL and LATICRETE LATASIL 9118 Primer.


3. Hardness (ASTM D751; Shore A): 25 (colored sealant) /15 (clear sealant).

4. Weather Resistance (QUV Weather-ometer): 10,000 hours (no change).

FF. Roof Decks (and other exterior paving applications over occupied/storage spaces) shall consist of a

Primary Roofing/Waterproofing Membrane, as specified in Section 0700 (q.v.), and a lightweight,

frost/weather resistant installation system for tile, pavers, brick and Ceramic tile that provides integral

subsurface drainage and meets the following physical requirements:

1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE Plaza and Deck System.

2. Compressive Strength (ASTM C109 Modified): 3,000 psi (20.7 MPa).

3. Hydraulic Transmissivity (ASTM D4716): 1.6 gal/minute (6.1 L/minute).


GG. Spot Bonding Epoxy Adhesive for installing tile, brick, masonry veneer, and Ceramic tile over

vertical and overhead surfaces shall be high strength, high temperature resistant, non-sag and shall


1. Basis of Design: LATAPOXY 310 Stone Adhesive / LATAPOXY 310 Rapid Stone

Adhesive.

2. Thermal Shock Resistance (ANSI A118.3): > 1,000 psi (6.9 MPa).

3. Water Absorption (ANSI A118.3): 0.1 %.


Page 20 of 53

4. Compressive Strength (ANSI A118.3): > 8,300 psi (57.2 MPa).

5. Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.3 Modified): > 730 psi (5 MPa).

2.6 INSTALLATION MATERLALS - EXTERIOR ADHERED VENEER

A. Waterproofing / Crack Suppression / Air & Water Barrier Membrane to be thin, cold applied, single

component liquid and load bearing. Reinforcing fabric to be non-woven rot-proof specifically

intended for waterproofing membrane. Waterproofing Membrane to be non-toxic, non-flammable,

and non-hazardous during storage, mixing, application and when cured and meet the following


1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE MVIS(tm) Air & Water Barrier.

2. 7-day Tensile Strength (ANSI A118.10): > 265 psi (1.8 MPa).

3. 7-day Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.10) > 200 psi (1.4 MPa).

4. 28 Day Shear Bond Strength (ANSI A118.4): > 214 psi (1.48 - 2.4 MPa).


B. Latex Portland Cement Mortar for thick beds, and scratch/plaster coats to be weather, frost, shock

resistant and meet the following physical requirements:

1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE MVIS Premium Mortar Bed.

2. Compressive Strength (ANSI A118.7 Modified): > 4000 psi (27.6 MPa).


C. Latex Portland Cement Thin Bed Mortar for thin set to be weather, frost, shock resistant, non-

flammable and meet the following physical requirements:

1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE MVIS Hi-Bond Veneer Mortar.

2. Compressive strength (ASTM C270): =2900 psi (20 MPa).

3. Shear bond strength (ANSI A118.4 5.2.4): =300 psi (2.1 MPa).

4. Sag on Wall (EN 1308): 0.0mm.


D. Latex Portland Cement Pointing Mortar to be weather, frost and shock resistant, as well as meet the


1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE MVIS Premium Pointing Mortar.

2. Compressive Strength (ASTM C91): =4100 psi (28.3 MPa).



Page 21 of 53

E. Expansion and Control Joint Sealant to be a one component, neutral cure, exterior grade silicone

sealant and meet the following requirements:

1. Basis of Design: LATICRETE MVIS Silicone Sealant.


3. Hardness (ASTM D751; Shore A): 25 (colored sealant) /15 (clear sealant).

4. Weather Resistance (QUV Weather meter): 10000 hours (no change).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SUBSTRATE EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces to be covered with ceramic tile, mosaics, pavers, brick, masonry veneer, stone,

trim or waterproofing are:

1. Sound, rigid and conform to good design/engineering practices.

2. Systems, including the framing system and panels, over which ceramic tile will be installed

shall be in conformance with the International Residential Code (IRC) for residential

applications, the International Building Code (IBC) for commercial applications, or

applicable building codes.

3. Clean and free of dust, dirt, oil, grease, sealers, curing compounds, laitance, efflorescence,

form oil, loose plaster, paint, and scale.

4. For thin-bed Ceramic tile installations when a cementitious bonding material will be used,

including medium bed mortar: maximum allowable variation in the tile substrate - for tiles

with edges shorter than 15 inches (375mm), maximum allowable variation is 1/4 inch in 10

feet (6mm in 3m) from the required plane, with no more than 1/16 inch variation in 12 inches

(1.5mm variation in 300mm) when measured from the high points in the surface. For tiles

with at least one edge 15 inches (375mm) in length, maximum allowable variation is 1/8

inch in 10 feet (3mm in 3m) from the required plane, with no more than 1/16 inch variation

in 24 inches (1.5mm variation in 600mm) when measured from the high points in the

surface. For modular substrate units, such as exterior glue plywood panels or adjacent

concrete masonry units, adjacent edges cannot exceed 1/32-inch (0.8mm) difference in

height. For thick bed (mortar bed) Ceramic tile and stone installations, and self-leveling

methods; maximum allowable variation in the installation substrate to be (1/4 inch in 10 feet

(6mm in 3m).


Page 22 of 53

5. To fully evacuate water, shower pan membranes and bonded waterproofing membranes in

wet areas shall slope to and connect with a drain. Plumbing code typically requires

membranes to be sloped a minimum of 1/4 inch per ft. (6mm per 300mm) and extend at

least 3 inches (75mm) above the height of the curb or threshold. Account for the perimeter

floor height required to form adequate slopes. Membranes shall be installed over the other

horizontal surfaces in wet areas subject to deterioration, like shower seats. They shall be

sloped and configured so as to direct water to the membrane connected to the drain. The

weep holes of clamping ring drains enable water to pass from the membrane into the

plumbing system. Crushed Ceramic tile or stone, or other positive weep protectors, placed

around/over weep holes help prevent their blockage. To form a watertight seal, membranes

shall have adequate contact with the clamping ring of the drain or with the bonding area of

an integrated bonding flange.

6. Do not level with gypsum or asphalt-based compounds.

7. For substrates scheduled to receive a waterproofing and/or crack isolation membrane,

maximum amount of moisture in the concrete/mortar bed substrate shall not exceed 5

lbs./1,000 ft2 / 24 hours (283 µg/sm2) per ASTM F1869 or 75% relative humidity as

measured with moisture probes per ASTM F2170. Consult with finish materials

manufacturer to determine the maximum allowable moisture content for substrates under

their finished material. Please refer to LATICRETE TDS 183 "Drying of Concrete" and

TDS 166 "LATICRETE and Moisture Vapor Emission Rate, Relative Humidity and

Moisture Testing of Concrete", available at www.laticrete.com, for more information.

8. Dry as per American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D4263 "Standard Test for

Determining Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method."

B. Concrete surfaces shall also be:

1. Cured a minimum of 28 days at 70 degrees F (21 degrees C), including an initial seven-day

period of wet curing.

2. Wood float finished, or better, if the installation is to be done by the thin bed method.

C. Advise General Contractor and Architect of any surface or substrate conditions requiring correction

before tile work commences. Beginning of work constitutes acceptance of substrate or surface

conditions.

2.7 SURFACE PREPARATION - CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNIT OVER STEEL FRAMED

WALLS

A. CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNIT (CBU) OVER STEEL FRAMING

1. Prior to commencing work, installer shall submit to Architect/Structural Engineer for

approval, shop drawings showing wall/facade construction and attachment details. All

attachments shall be designed to prevent transfer of building or structural movement to the

wall/facade.


Page 23 of 53

2. Lay out the CBU installation so all board edges are supported by metal framing (studs

vertically and purlins horizontally). Cut/fit CBU and add additional framing elements as

required to support board edges. Stagger boards in courses to prevent continuous vertical

joints and allow 1/8 inch -3/16 inch (3-5mm) between sheets.

3. Fasten the CBU with 7/8 inch (22mm) minimum length, non-rusting, self-imbedding screws

for metal studs (BUILDEXSYMBOL 226 "Symbol" 10 Catalog item 10-24 17/16 Wafer

T3Z or equivalent). Fasten the boards every 6 inches (150mm) at the edges and every 8

inches (200mm) in the field. Stagger placement of screws at seams. Place screws no less

than 3/8 inch (9mm), and no more than 1 inch (25mm), from board edges.

4. Tape all the board joints with the alkali resistant 2 inches (50mm) wide reinforcing mesh

provided by the CBU manufacturer imbedded in the same mortar used to install the ceramic

tile, mosaic, pavers, brick or stone.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION - EXTERIOR RATED SHEATHING OVER STEEL FRAMED

WALLS

A. SHEATHING (e.g. EXTERIOR OSB, EXTERIOR GRADE PLYWOOD, & OTHER EXTERIOR

RATED SHEATHING) OVER FRAMING

1. Prior to commencing work, installer shall submit to Architect/Structural Engineer for

approval, shop drawings showing wall/facade construction and attachment details. All

attachments shall be designed to prevent transfer of building or structural movement to the

wall/facade.

2. Provide adequate support of framing elements during erection to prevent racking, twisting

or bowing. Lay out the exterior rated sheathing installation so all board edges are supported

by metal framing (studs vertically and purlins horizontally). Cut/fit the exterior rated

sheathing and add additional framing elements as required to support board edges. Stagger

boards in courses to prevent continuous vertical joints and allow 1/8 inch to 3/16 inch (3 to

5mm) between sheets.

3. Fasten the exterior rated sheathing with 7/8 inch (22mm) minimum length, non-rusting, self-

imbedding screws for metal studs (BUILDEX Catalog item 10-24 17/16 Wafer T3Z or

equivalent). Fasten the boards every 6 inches (150mm) at the edges and every 8 inches

(200mm) in the field. Stagger placement of screws at seams. Place screws no less than 3/8

inch (9mm), and no more than 1 inch (25mm), from board edges.

4. Follow board manufacturer's installation instructions.

5. Compliance with design criteria and state and local building codes shall approved and

certified by a qualified structural engineer. Use more stringent design criteria when

necessary to comply with state and local building code stiffness requirements for thin

veneers.

3.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES - CERAMIC TILE

A. Waterproofing and Crack Isolation Membrane (Liquid-Applied):


Page 24 of 53

1. Install waterproofing and crack isolation membrane in compliance with current revisions of

ANSI A108.1 (2.7 Waterproofing), ANSI A108.13, and ANSI A108.17. Review the

installation and plan the application sequence. Pre-cut LATICRETE Waterproofing/Anti-

Fracture Fabric (if required), allowing 2 inches (50mm) for overlap at ends and sides to fit

the areas as required. Roll up the pieces for easy handling and placement. Shake or stir

LATICRETE HYDRO BAN® before using.

2. Pre-Treat Cracks and Joints - Fill all substrate cracks, cold joints and control joints to a

smooth finish using a LATICRETE latex-fortified thin-set. Alternatively, a liberal coat* of

LATICRETE HYDRO BAN® applied with a paint brush or trowel shall be used to fill in

non-structural joints and cracks. Apply a liberal coat* of LATICRETE HYDRO BAN

approximately 8 inches (200mm) wide over substrate cracks, cold joints, and control joints

using a paint brush or heavy napped paint roller.

3. Pre-Treat Coves and Floor/Wall Intersections - Fill all substrate coves and floor/wall

transitions to a smooth finish and changes in plane using a LATICRETE latex-fortified thin-

set. Alternatively, a liberal coat* of LATICRETE HYDRO BAN applied with a paint brush

or trowel shall be used to fill in cove joints and floor/wall transitions < 1/8 inch (3mm) in

width. Apply a liberal coat* of LATICRETE HYDRO BAN approximately 8 inches

(200mm) wide over substrate cracks, cold joints, and control joints using a paint brush or

heavy napped paint roller.

4. Pre-Treat Drains - Drains shall be of the clamping ring type, with weepers as per ASME

A112.6.3. Apply a liberal coat* of LATICRETE HYDRO BAN around and over the bottom

half of drain clamping ring. Cover with a second liberal coat of LATICRETE HYDRO

BAN. When the LATICRETE HYDRO BAN dries, apply a bead of LATICRETE

LATASIL where the LATICRETE HYDRO BAN meets the drain throat. Install the top

half of drain clamping ring.

5. Pre-Treat Penetrations - Allow for a minimum 1/8-inch (3mm) space between drains, pipes,

lights, or other penetrations and surrounding Ceramic tile, stone or brick. Pack any gaps

around pipes, lights or other penetrations with a LATICRETE latex-fortified thin-set. Apply

a liberal coat* of LATICRETE HYDRO BAN around penetration opening. Cover the first

coat with a second liberal coat* of LATICRETE HYDRO BAN. Bring LATICRETE

HYDRO BAN up to level of tile or stone. When LATICRETE HYDRO BAN has dried to

the touch seal with LATICRETE LATASIL.

6. Main Application - Allow any pre-treated areas to dry to the touch. Apply a liberal coat* of

LATICRETE HYDRO BAN with a paint brush or heavy napped roller over substrate

including pre-treated areas and allow to dry to the touch. Install another liberal coat* of

LATICRETE HYDRO BAN over the first coat. Let the topcoat of LATICRETE HYDRO

BAN dry to the touch approximately 1 - 2 hours at 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) and 50%

RH. When the topcoat has dried to the touch inspect the surface for pinholes, voids, thin

spots or other defects. LATICRETE HYDRO BAN will dry to an olive-green color when

fully cured. Use additional LATICRETE HYDRO BAN to seal any defects.

7. Movement Joints - Apply a liberal coat* of LATICRETE HYDRO BAN, approximately 8

inches (200mm) wide over the areas. Then embed and loop the 6 inches (150mm) wide

LATICRETE Waterproofing/Anti-Fracture Fabric and allow the LATICRETE HYDRO

BAN liquid to bleed through. Immediately apply a second coat of LATICRETE HYDRO

BAN.


Page 25 of 53

8. * Dry coat thickness is 20 - 30 mil (0.02 - 0.03 inch or 0.5 - 0.8mm); consumption per coat

is approximately 0.01 gal/ft2 (approx. 0.4 L/m2); coverage is approximately 100 ft2 /gal

(approx. 2.5 m2/ L). LATICRETE Waterproofing/Anti-Fracture Fabric shall be used to pre-

treat cracks, joints, curves, corners, drains, and penetrations with LATICRETE HYDRO

BAN®.

9. Protection - Provide protection for newly installed membrane, even if covered with a thin-

bed ceramic tile, stone or brick installation against exposure to rain or other water for a

minimum of 2 hours at 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) and 50% RH. For temperatures between

45 degrees F and 69 degrees F (7 degrees C to 21 degrees C) allow a minimum 24-hour cure

period.

10. Flood Testing - Allow membrane to cure fully before flood testing, typically a minimum 2

hours at 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) and 50% RH. Cold conditions will require a longer

curing time. For temperatures between 50 degrees F and 69 degrees F (10 degrees C to 21

degrees C) allow a minimum 24-hour cure period prior to flood testing.

11. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE HYDRO BAN

B. Waterproofing and Crack Isolation Membrane (Sheet Membrane):

1. Measure and cut all of the LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Sheet Membrane sections and

Sealing Tape strips to the proper size before mixing the substrate appropriate LATICRETE

thin set.

2. Mix the LATICRETE thin set to a fairly wet consistency but still able to hold a notch.

Dampen excessively dry porous surfaces in order to prevent premature drying and skinning

of the thin set. If skinning does occur remove thin-set and reapply using fresh mortar.

3. Pre-Treating (Corners and Coves): To create the watertight system, the installation process

will rely on the layering of components; start with the corners: Apply thin-set mortar with a

1/4-inch x 3/16 inch (6 mm x 5 mm) V-notched trowel. Press the LATICRETE HYDRO

BAN pre-formed corner firmly into the thin set. Remove any trapped air and guarantee full

adhesion to the material by spreading the thin set from the inside of the corner out using a

trowel or straightedge with rounded corners. Continue with thin-set along the floor-to-wall

transition from the corner outward for the first strip of LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Sealing

Tape. Overlap the corners by 2 inches (50 mm). Lay the tape and remove all air pockets and

excess material as with the corner piece. For any sections where two strips of LATICRETE

HYDRO BAN Sealing Tape will be joined, be certain to overlap the material by 2 inches

(50 mm). Continue with these steps around the perimeter of the installation. Treat the

vertical corners with the LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Sealing Tape next in the same

manner as the floor-to-wall transitions were installed. Overlap the corners by 2 inches (50

mm).

4. Pre-Treating (Penetrations): Treat pipe penetrations and mixing valves by applying thin-set

mortar with a 1/4-inch x 3/16-inch (6 mm x 5 mm) V-notched trowel. Slide the appropriate

collar over the pipe or mixing valve and press firmly into the thin set. The urethane rubber

will seal around the pipe or mixing valve. Remove any trapped air and guarantee full

adhesion to the material by spreading the thin set from the inside out using a trowel or

straightedge with rounded corners.


Page 26 of 53

5. Main Application: Important, there shall not be excessive overlapping. For example, at the

corner, the LATICRETE HYDRO BAN® Sealing Tape shall overlap the LATICRETE

HYDRO BAN Preformed Corner but not the adjacent HYDRO BAN Sealing Tape.

Continue the same method to install the first LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Sheet Membrane

section on the wall. Start in the completed corner and work your way out from the corner to

the edge of the installation. Apply the thin-set to the surface of the wall with the 1/4-inch x

3/16-inch (6 mm x 5 mm) V-notched trowel. If the surface is uneven, use a square-notched

trowel with a wider tooth up to 3/8 inch (9 mm). Be sure to comb all of the thin set in the

same direction. Install the first length of sheet membrane. It shall be easiest to unroll it up

the wall or in the direction that you combed the thin set. Remember to overlap the membrane

by a minimum of 2 inches (5 cm). Be certain to leave at least 1/4 inch (6mm) of space from

the floor. Smooth the section of LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Sheet Membrane with a flat

trowel or roller from the middle towards the outside edges to assure that no air is trapped

underneath. Follow the direction that the thin set was combed onto the substrate. Use short,

firm strokes to press out all the excess thin-set and trapped air. Carefully remove or spread

the excess thin set over the seams. Apply the thin set for the next length of LATICRETE

HYDRO BAN Sheet Membrane section. Roll the next length upwards; smoothing it as it is

pressed into the thin set. If a bulge or crease appears during the unrolling, it is OK. Simply

peel the section carefully away from the wall and reapply it so that it is flat. The sections are

to be well-pressed; the use of a roller is recommended but this shall also be accomplished

with a flat trowel. Squeeze out any extra thin set at the seams; remove the excess or spread

it uniformly down the seam. The remaining lengths shall now be installed in this same

manner. Best practice: sections of LATICRETE® HYDRO BAN® Sheet Membrane shall

be butt- jointed and the seam between the HYDRO BAN Sheet Membrane sections shall be

covered with LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Sealing Tape installed with the appropriate thin-

set. Make sure that the LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Sealing Tape overlaps each

LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Sheet Membrane section by a minimum of 2 inches (5 cm).

The floor shall be the last section installed. NOTE: Sections of LATICRETE HYDRO BAN

Sheet Membrane shall also be shingled (overlapped) during installation without the need for

LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Sealing Tape. The top section shall overlap a minimum of 2

inches (5cm) onto the bottom section of LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Sheet Membrane. If

the LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Sheet Membrane is damaged after installation apply a

patch of LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Sheet Membrane installed with the appropriate thin

set. The patch shall overlap the damaged area by a minimum of 2 inches (5 cm). Tiling shall

begin immediately after installation when a flood test is not required.

6. Clamping Ring Drains: When installing LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Sheet Membrane

with a clamping ring type drains with weepers as per ASME A112.6.3, lay the LATICRETE

HYDRO BAN Sheet Membrane over the top of the drain and cut an x where each bolt will

penetrate the membrane. Cut a hole in the membrane to allow the drain grate to be threaded

into the clamping ring. (Use of a fabric circle cutter is recommended). Install the

LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Sheet Membrane, making sure to align the previously cut

holes for the bolts and drain throat. Ensure that the weep holes are not blocked. Apply bead

of LATICRETE LATASIL to the clamping body just outside of the bolts, place clamping

ring into position and tighten bolts. Check to make sure that weep holes are not plugged by

any material.


Page 27 of 53

7. HYDRO BAN Bonding Flange Drains: Follow the instructions in DS 035.0 for the

installation of the LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Bonding Flange Drain in either a bonded or

unbonded mortar bed. When the mortar is cured enough to walk on, prime the top of the

LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Bonding Flange Drain, to the first 90-degree radius, and the

adjusting ring with one coat of LATICRETE HYDRO BAN. Once the LATICRETE

HYDRO BAN is dried to the touch the LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Sheet Membrane shall

be installed over it using a LATICRETE polymer fortified thin set. Ensure that the

LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Sheet Membrane extends to the first 90-degree radius of the

LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Bonding Flange Drain. Apply thin-set mortar with a 1/4-inch

x 3/16-inch (6mm x 5mm) V-notched trowel. Press the LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Sheet

Membrane firmly into the adhesive. Remove any trapped air and guarantee full adhesion to

the material by spreading the adhesive from the inside out using a trowel or straightedge

with rounded corners. The adjusting ring is installed with a polymer fortified thin set when

installing the title in order to line up the grate with the tile.

8. HYDRO BAN Linear Drains: Follow the instructions in DS 034.0 for the installation of the

HYDRO BAN Linear Drain in either a bonded or unbonded mortar bed. When the mortar

is cured enough to walk on, prime the top of the LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Linear Drain

flange, to the first 90-degree radius. Once the LATICRETE HYDRO BAN® is dried to the

touch the LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Sheet Membrane shall be installed over it using a

LATICRETE polymer fortified thin set. Apply thin-set mortar with a 1/4-inch x 3/16-inch

(6 mm x 5 mm) V-notched trowel. Press the LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Sheet Membrane

firmly into the adhesive. Remove any trapped air and guarantee full adhesion to the material

by spreading the adhesive from the inside out using a trowel or straightedge with rounded

corners.

9. Flood Testing: Allow adhesive to cure fully before flood testing, a minimum of 24 hours

after final cure at 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) and 50% RH. Cold and/or wet conditions will

require a longer curing time.

10. Control Joints: Ceramic tile, stone and brick installations shall include sealant filled joints

between the ceramic tile, stone or brick which is over any control joints in the substrate.

However, the sealant filled joints shall be offset horizontally by as much as one tile width

from the substrate control joint location to coincide with the grout joint pattern.

11. Movement Joints: Ceramic tile, stone and thin brick installations shall include expansion

joints at coves, corners, other changes in substrate plane and over any expansion joints in

the substrate. Expansion joints in ceramic tile, stone or brickwork are also required at

perimeters, at restraining surfaces, at penetrations and at the intervals described in the Tile

Council of North America, Inc. (TCNA) Handbook Installation Method EJ171. Use

LATICRETE LATASIL and backer rod.

12. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE HYDRO BAN® Sheet

Membrane

C. LATICRETE HYDRO BAN BOARD: WALLS:


Page 28 of 53

1. Fastening (Wood Studs) - Nominal Dimensions - 2-inch x 4-inch (5 x 10 centimeters)

minimum with maximum span of 16 inches on-center. Use a minimum of 1/2 inch (12

millimeter) LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Board, for 19.2 inch on-center stud spacing use a

minimum of 5/8 inch (16millimeter) board. Fasten boards directly to studs using either

LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Board 1 1/4-inch (32 millimeter) tab washer and the

appropriate length LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Board screw for the thickness of the

LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Board. Fasteners shall be spaced 8 inches on-center. (20

centimeters). All fastener heads to be countersunk flush with surface of the board. Where

two boards meet, the LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Board tab washer and LATICRETE

HYDRO BAN Board screw are to span the interface.

2. Fastening (Steel Studs) - Minimum thickness - 25 gauge with maximum span of 16 inches

on-center (41 centimeters). Use a minimum of 1/2 inches (12 millimeters) LATICRETE

HYDRO BAN Board, for 19.2 inch on-center stud spacing use a minimum of 5/8 inch (16

millimeter) board. Fasten boards directly to studs using the LATICRETE HYDRO BAN

Board 1-1/4-inch tab washer and 1 5/8-inch LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Board screw.

Fasteners shall be spaced 8 inches on-center (20 centimeters). All washers are to be

countersunk flush with surface of the board. Where two boards meet, the LATICRETE

HYDRO BAN Board tab washer and LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Board screw are to span

the interface.

3. Installation (Option 1): The following steps shall be followed to maintain the waterproof

integrity of LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Board. Beginning at the bottom of the wall, install

LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Board to the wall studs by using the appropriate fastener and

spacing outlined in the fastening section above. For tub walls and installations with

LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Pre-Sloped Shower Pans first apply a bead of LATICRETE

HYDRO BAN Adhesive & Sealant along the top edge of the tub or in the rabbet joint for

the LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Pre-Sloped Shower Pans and then install the LATICRETE

HYDRO BAN Board. For a waterproof system using LATICRETE HYDRO BAN embed

2-inch (50 millimeter) fiberglass mesh with LATICRETE HYDRO BAN liquid

waterproofing membrane in all panel joints. All fasteners shall be completely covered with

LATICRETE HYDRO BAN® liquid waterproofing membrane to form a seal. Allow 1st

coat to dry and apply 2nd coat over all joints, corners and fasteners.


Page 29 of 53

4. Installation (Option 2): Fasten boards in same manner as outlined in OPTION 1. For tub

walls and installations with LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Pre-Sloped Shower Pans first

apply a bead of LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Adhesive & Sealant along the top edge of the

tub or in the rabbet joint for the LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Pre-Sloped Shower Pans and

then install the LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Board. To create a watertight system using

LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Sealing Tape, Inside or Outside Corners and Collars start with

the corners. Apply a suitable LATICRETE polymer fortified thin-set mortar with a 1/4-inch

x 3/16-inch (6-millimeter x 5 millimeter) V-notched trowel. Press the pre-formed corner

firmly into the adhesive. Remove trapped air and guarantee full adhesion to the material by

spreading the adhesive from the inside out using a trowel or straightedge with rounded

corners. Continue with thin-set along the floor-to-wall transition from the corner outward

for the first strip of LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Sealing Tape. Overlap the corners by a

minimum of 2 inches (50 millimeters). Lay the LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Sealing Tape

and remove all air pockets and excess material as with the corner piece. For any sections

where two strips of LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Sealing Tape will be joined, be certain to

overlap the material by 2 inches (50 millimeters). Continue with these steps around the

perimeter of the installation. Treat the vertical corners for the LATICRETE HYDRO BAN

Sealing Tape next in the same manner as the floor-to-wall transitions were installed. Overlap

the corners by a minimum of 2 inches (50 millimeters). Treat pipe penetrations and mixing

valves by applying thin-set mortar with a 1/4-inch x 3/16-inch (6 millimeter x 5 millimeter)

V-notched trowel. Slide the appropriate LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Collar over the pipe

or mixing valve and press firmly into the adhesive. The urethane rubber will seal around the

pipe or mixing valve. Remove any trapped air and guarantee full adhesion to the material

by spreading the adhesive from the inside out using a trowel or straightedge with rounded

corners. Fastener penetrations shall be covered with LATICRETE® HYDRO BAN®

Sealing Tape using a LATICRETE polymer fortified thin-set. Important, there shall not be

excessive overlapping. For example, at the corner, the LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Sealing

Tape that leaves the corner and protects the floor-to-wall transitions shall overlap with the

pre-formed corner piece, but not the pre-formed corner piece and the adjacent LATICRETE

HYDRO BAN Sealing Tape.

D. LATICRETE HYDRO BAN BOARD: CEILINGS:

1. Framing members do not exceed 16 inches on-center (41 centimeters). Use a minimum of

1/2 inch (12millimeter) thick LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Board. Ensure that edges of

LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Board are continuously supported. Fasten boards as outlined

in FASTENING section for WALL applications.

2. GENERAL (Floors): Surfaces shall be structurally sound, stable and rigid enough to support

ceramic/stone tile and similar finishes. Substrate deflection under all live, dead and impact

loads, including concentrated loads, shall not exceed L/360 for thin bed ceramic tile

installations or L/480 for thin bed stone installations. The tile size shall be at least 8 inches

x 8 inches (200 millimeters x 200 millimeters). Architect, builder or design professional

shall specify location of control joints. Also see TCNA Handbook, Installation Method

EJ171-Movement Joint Design Essentials, for industry guidelines.

3. Fastening (Wood Floor): Framing: Maximum 16 inches (41 centimeters) on-center joist

spacing.


Page 30 of 53

4. Subfloor: Minimum thickness 5/8 inch (16 millimeter) exterior grade plywood or OSB

fastened and glued firmly to joists as per TCNA Handbook, Installation Method F175-13-

Cementitious Coated Foam Backer Board. Fasten boards directly to subfloor using the

HYDRO BAN Board 1-1/4 inches (32 millimeter) tab washer and 1-5/8-inch (41

millimeter) LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Board screw. Fasteners shall be spaced a

maximum of 8 inches (203 millimeter) on-center. All fastener heads shall be countersunk

flush with surface of the board. Where two boards meet the LATICRETE HYDRO BAN

Board tab washer and LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Board screw are to span the interface.

5. Installation: Apply a setting bed of LATICRETE polymer fortified mortar over subfloor with

a 1/4 inch (6 millimeter) square notched trowel combing mortar into a ribbed bed. All boards

to be laid with staggered joints. Fasten boards as outlined in the FASTENING section above.

Fill all joints with a LATICRETE polymer fortified mortar and embed 2 inch (50 millimeter)

fiberglass mesh cement board tape in dry areas.

6. Note: LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Board is completely waterproof. If the area below the

backer board shall be kept dry, all fastener penetrations and joints shall be sealed with

LATICRETE HYDO BAN liquid waterproof membrane.

E. LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Board: CONCRETE FLOOR:

7. Installation: Concrete shall be fully cured and clean. Apply a setting bed of LATICRETE

polymer fortified mortar over concrete floor with a 1/4 inch (6 millimeter) square notched

trowel combing mortar into a ribbed bed. Depressions to be filled with mortar. Make certain

there are no voids beneath panel and that it is supported solidly. All boards to be laid with

staggered joints. Allow mortar to harden before taping joints. Fill all joints with a

LATICRETE polymer fortified mortar and embed 2 inches (50 millimeter) fiberglass mesh

cement board tape in dry areas. Note: LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Board is completely

waterproof. If the area below the backer board shall be kept dry, all fastener penetrations

and joints shall be sealed with LATICRETE HYDO BAN liquid waterproof membrane or

LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Sealing Tape and a LATICRETE polymer fortified thin set.

F. LATICRETE HYDRO BAN BOARD: COUNTERTOPS:

1. Fastening - Apply a continuous bead of LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Adhesive & Sealant

to the tops of the vertical countertop supports. Adhere the LATICRETE HYDRO BAN

Board to top of the counter. Press in place removing any excess LATICRETE HYDRO

BAN Adhesive & Sealant.


Page 31 of 53

2. Installation - The following steps shall be followed to maintain the waterproof integrity of

LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Board. Cut the LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Board to fit the

countertop. Leave the front end of the counter recessed in order to apply a 1/4 inch (6

millimeter) thick strip of LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Board to the front edge using the

LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Adhesive & Sealant. Fasten to the counter as described above.

Before installing adjacent boards, apply a bead of LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Adhesive

& Sealant to the edges of the first board. Install next board as outlined above. All boards

shall be fitted tightly together allowing sealant to ooze from joint. All excess sealant to be

spread thin ensuring a continuous seal at the joint. Fastener penetrations shall be covered

with LATICRETE HYDRO BAN® Sealing Tape and a LATICRETE polymer fortified

thin set. Wrap the front edge with HYDRO BAN Sealing Tape using a LATICRETE

polymer fortified thin set. Using a reciprocating saw cut out the hole for the sink. Apply

LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Adhesive & Sealant around the cut out and insert the sink.

When dry the counter shall be fully tiled.

G. LATICRETE HYDRO BAN BOARD: CURBS, SEATS AND BENCHES:

1. Installation - Measure, cut and dry fit all pieces from 2-inch (50 millimeter) LATICRETE

HYDRO BAN Board before installing. All seat or bench perimeters shall be supported by

2-inch (50 millimeter) LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Board installed vertically. Use 254

Platinum when assembling the CURBS, seats and benches. Spacing between vertical

supports shall not exceed 16 inches (40 centimeter). When installing corner seats, the

appropriate board edges to be mitered for a tighter fit. Bench and seat support shall be cut

on an angle to create a slope for the seat top. All boards shall be fitted tightly together

allowing the 254 Platinum to ooze from joint. All excess adhesive to be spread thin ensuring

a continuous seal at the joint. Exposed edges shall be wrapped with alkaline resistant tape

and 254 Platinum thin set. When the thin set is dry, waterproof using LATICRETE HYDRO

BAN, allowing the first coat to dry completely before the second coat is added. All coves

and corners shall be treated with alkaline resistant tape and a 254 Platinum thin set. When

the thin set is dry waterproof using LATICRETE HYDRO BAN allowing the first coat to

dry completely before the second coat is applied.

H. TUB SURROUNDS AND PLATFORMS:

1. Installation - When installing LATICRETE HYDRO BAN Board to tub surrounds and

platforms choose the appropriate thickness required for the application. LATICRETE

HYDRO BAN Board shall be attached to the frame, which is load bearing and fully

supported, and be installed over the lip of the tub. Follow fastening and installation

instructions above for Walls.

2. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE HYDRO BAN BOARD

3.4 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES - EXTERIOR ADHERED VENEERS

A. Weather Resistant Barrier (WRB) or equivalent - 2 layers or as detailed and specified by project

architect

1. Install as per WRB manufacturer's written installation instructions

I. Air and Water Barrier (exterior adhered veneers):


Page 32 of 53

1. Install the vapor permeable air and water barrier in compliance with current revisions of

manufacturer's written installation instructions. Review the installation and plan the

application sequence. Pre-cut LATICRETE Waterproofing/Anti-Fracture Fabric (if

required), allowing 2 inches (50mm) for overlap at ends and sides to fit the areas as required.

Roll up the pieces for easy handling and placement. Shake or stir LATICRETE MVIS Air

& Water Barrier before using.

2. Pre-Treat Cracks and Joints - Install sheathing panels and treat joints in accord with the

respective sheathing panel manufacturer's installation instructions, including installation of

board joint treatment. Pack any gaps around pipes, lights or other penetrations with

LATAPOXY Waterproof Flashing Mortar and allow to harden. Treat substrate joints and

seams up to 1/8 inch (3 mm) by applying a liberal coat of LATICRETE MVIS Air & Water

Barrier approximately 8 inches (200 mm) wide over seam using a paint roller (heavy

napped), brush or trowel. While LATICRETE® MVIS™ Air & Water Barrier is still wet

embed 6 inches (150 mm) wide LATICRETE Waterproofing/Anti-Fracture Fabric pressing

the fabric in firmly so that the LATICRETE MVIS Air & Water Barrier liquid bleeds

through the fabric, then immediately apply another liberal coat of LATICRETE MVIS Air

& Water Barrier liquid over the fabric using a paint roller, brush or trowel. For substrate

joints and seams greater than 1/8 inch (3 mm); fill seams to a smooth finish with a

LATICRETE Polymer Fortified Veneer Mortar. Allow mortar to set 24 hours, then treat

seams by applying a liberal coat of LATICRETE MVIS Air & Water Barrier approximately

8 inches (200 mm) wide over seam. While LATICRETE MVIS Air & Water Barrier is still

wet embed 6 inches (150mm) wide LATICRETE Waterproofing/Anti-Fracture Fabric

pressing the fabric in firmly so that the LATICRETE MVIS Air & Water Barrier liquid

bleeds through the fabric, then immediately apply another liberal coat of LATICRETE

MVIS Air & Water Barrier liquid over the fabric. LATICRETE MVIS Air & Water Barrier

will dry to a uniform olive-green color when it's dry to touch.

3. Pre-Treat Coves and Floor/Wall Intersections - Fill all substrate coves and floor/wall

transitions to a smooth finish and changes in plane using a LATICRETE latex-fortified thin-

set. Alternatively, a liberal coat of LATICRETE MVIS Air & Water Barrier applied with a

paint brush or trowel shall be used to fill in cove joints and floor/wall transitions < 1/8 inch

(3mm) in width. Apply a liberal coat* of LATICRETE MVIS Air & Water Barrier

approximately 8 inches (200mm) wide over substrate cracks, cold joints, and control joints

using a paint brush or heavy napped paint roller.

4. Movement Joint Loop (Slip Joint) Treatment - Apply a liberal coat of LATICRETE MVIS

Air & Water Barrier, approximately 8 inches (200 mm) wide over the areas. Then

immediately embed and loop the 6 inches (152 mm) wide LATICRETE

Waterproofing/Anti-Fracture Fabric into the substrate movement joint and allow to bleed

through. Then top coat with a second liberal coat of LATICRETE MVIS Air & Water

Barrier liquid fully encapsulating the LATICRETE Waterproofing/Anti-Fracture Fabric.

Repeat process to ensure that all movement joints receive two (2) layers of LATICRETE

Waterproofing/Anti-Fracture Fabric.


Page 33 of 53

5. Main Application - Allow any pre-treated areas to dry to the touch. Apply a liberal coat of

LATICRETE MVIS Air & Water Barrier using a paint roller (heavy napped) or paint brush

over substrate including pre-treated areas and allow to dry to the touch approximately 1- 2

hours at 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) and 50% RH. Apply a second liberal coat of

LATICRETE MVIS Air & Water Barrier over the first coat of LATICRETE MVIS Air &

Water Barrier. Let topcoat dry to the touch, approximately 1- 2 hours at 70 degrees F (21

degrees C) and 50% RH. When last coat has dried to the touch, inspect final surface for

pinholes, voids, thin spots or other defects and re-apply as necessary. LATICRETE MVIS

Air & Water Barrier will dry to a uniform olive green color when it's dry to touch. Use

additional LATICRETE MVIS Air & Water Barrier to seal pinholes, voids, thin spots or

other defects and re-apply as necessary. Bring main application of LATICRETE Air and

Water Barrier up to all penetrations through the membrane.

6. Dry coat thickness is 20 - 30 mil (0.02 - 0.03 inch or 0.5 - 0.8mm); consumption per coat is

approximately 0.01 gal/ft2 (approx. 0.4 L/m2); coverage is approximately 100 ft2 /gal

(approx. 2.5 m2/ L). LATICRETE Waterproofing/Anti-Fracture Fabric shall be used to pre-

treat cracks, joints, curves, corners, drains, and penetrations with LATICRETE MVIS Air

& Water Barrier.

7. Spray Application of LATICRETE MVIS Air & Water Barrier - Follow all installation and

surface preparation requirements outlined in this document and TDS 410M "Spraying

LATICRETE MVIS Air & Water Barrier". The sprayer being used for the application of

LATICRETE MVIS Air & Water Barrier shall be capable of producing a maximum of 3300

psi (22.8 MPa) with a flow rate of 0.95 to 1.6 GPM (3.6 to 6.0 LPM) using a 0.521 or a

0.631 reversible tip. Keep the unit filled with LATICRETE MVIS Air & Water Barrier to

ensure continuous application of liquid. The hose length shall not exceed 100' (30 m) in

length and 3/8 inch (10 mm) in diameter.

8. Apply a continuous LATICRETE MVIS™ Air & Water Barrier film with an overlapping

spray. The wet film has a sage green appearance and dries to a darker olive green color.

When the first coat has dried to a uniform olive green color, approximately 45 to 90 minutes

at 70 degrees F (21 degrees C), visually inspect the coating for any voids or pinholes. Fill

any defects with additional material and apply the second coat at right angles to the first.

The wet film thickness shall be checked periodically using a wet film gauge.

9. Check application thickness with a wet film gauge periodically as the LATICRETE MVIS

Air & Water Barrier is being applied to ensure that the appropriate thickness and coverage

is achieved. Bounce back and overspray will consume more product. To achieve the

required film thickness, the coating shall be free from pinholes and air bubbles. Bring main

application of LATICRETE Air and Water Barrier up to all penetrations through the

membrane. Do not back roll the spray applied coating. Allow the LATICRETE MVIS Air

& Water Barrier to cure in accord with the instructions in this document and TDS 410M

prior to the installation of finish materials. It is important to note that areas not scheduled to

receive the LATICRETE MVIS Air & Water Barrier shall be taped off and protected from

any potential overspray.


Page 34 of 53

10. Protection - Provide protection for newly installed membrane, even if covered with a thin-

bed stone, masonry veneer, or thin brick installation against exposure to rain or other water

for a minimum of 2 hours at 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) and 50% RH. For temperatures

between 45 degrees F and 69 degrees F (7 degrees C to 21 degrees C) allow a minimum 24

hour cure period.

11. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE MVIS Air & Water

Barrier

3.5 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR ADHERED VEENERS

A. Pre-float Method (exterior adhered veneers):

1. Over clean, dimensionally stable and sound concrete and masonry substrates, apply latex-

Portland cement thick-bed mortar as scratch/leveling coat in compliance with current

revision of Masonry Veneer Manufacturer's Association (MVMA) "Installation Guide for

Adhered Concrete Masonry Veneer" and/or veneer manufacturer's specific written

installation instructions. Float surface of scratch/leveling coat plumb, true and allow mortar

to set until firm. For installation of thin brick, masonry veneer, and stone, follow appropriate

"Exterior Adhered Veneers Method" for "Stacked Veneer" or "Pointed / Grouted" veneer

installations.

2. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE MVIS™ Premium Mortar

Bed

J. Lath & Plaster Method (exterior adhered veneers):

1. Install cleavage membrane/water resistive barrier complying with current revision of ASTM

D226 (No. 15 Type 1), 2 separate layers of cleavage membrane/water resistive barrier

complying with ICC-ES AC38 or a combination of both using corrosion resistant fasteners

complying with ASTM C1063 Sec. 7.10.2. Install metal lath complying with the local

building code requirements and/or 2.5 lb. (1.1 kg) or 3.4 lb. (1.5 kg) diamond mesh lath

(ASTMC847-10, ASTMC1780). Apply latex-Portland cement mortar as scratch/leveling

coat over wire lath, concrete or masonry in compliance with current revision of Masonry

Veneer Manufacturer's Association (MVMA) "Installation Guide for Adhered Concrete

Masonry Veneer" and/or veneer manufacturer's specific written installation instructions

and/or ASTM C1780 Standard Practice for Installation Methods for Adhered Manufactured

Stone Masonry Veneer. Float surface of scratch/leveling coat plumb, true and allow mortar

to set until firm. For installation of thin brick, masonry veneer, or stone, follow the

appropriate "Exterior Adhered Veneers" installation method for "Stacked Veneer" or

"Pointed / Grouted" veneer installations.

2. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE MVIS Premium Mortar

Bed.

K. Exterior Adhered Veneers (Tile Council of North America / Marble Institute of America

Methodology):


Page 35 of 53

1. Install latex Portland cement mortar in compliance with current revisions of ANSI A108.02

(3.11), A108.1B and ANSI A108.5. Use the appropriate trowel notch size to ensure proper

bedding of the tile, brick or stone selected. Work the latex Portland cement mortar into good

contact with the substrate and comb with notched side of trowel. Spread only as much latex

Portland cement mortar as shall be covered while the mortar surface is still wet and tacky.

When installing large format (> 8 inches x 8 inches/200mm x 200mm) tile/stone,

rib/button/lug back tiles, pavers or sheet mounted ceramics/mosaics, spread latex Portland

cement mortar onto the back of (i.e. ' back-butter') each piece/sheet in addition to troweling

latex Portland cement mortar over the substrate. Beat each piece/sheet into the latex Portland

cement mortar with a beating block or rubber mallet to insure full bedding and flatness.

Allow installation to set until firm. Clean excess latex Portland cement mortar from tile or

stone face and joints between pieces.

2. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE MVIS Hi-Bond Veneer

Mortar.

L. Exterior Adhered Veneers (Pointed/Grouted - Masonry Veneer Manufacturer's Association

Methodology):

1. Moisten the back of each veneer unit and the top of the scratch coat so the surfaces appear

damp but are free of standing water. Install masonry veneer adhesive mortar in compliance

with current revisions of Masonry Veneer Manufacturer's Association (MVMA)

"Installation Guide for Adhered Concrete Masonry Veneer" and/or veneer manufacturer's

specific written installation instructions. Use the appropriate installation tools to ensure

proper bedding of veneer unit. Work the masonry veneer adhesive mortar into good contact

with the back of the veneer unit making sure the entire unit is buttered to a nominal 1/2 inch

(12mm) thickness. DO NOT COVER JUST THE PERIMETER! Buttered masonry veneer

units shall be firmly worked onto the scratch coat and slid slightly back and forth or with a

slight rotating motion. Allow installation to set until firm. Clean excess latex Portland

cement mortar from masonry veneer or stone face and joints between pieces. Installing

masonry veneer from the top down will minimize cleanup requirements.

2. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE MVIS™ Hi-Bond Veneer

Mortar

M. Exterior Adhered Veneers (Stacked Veneer):

1. Moisten the back of each veneer unit and the top of the scratch coat so the surfaces appear

damp but are free of standing water. Install masonry veneer adhesive mortar in compliance

with current revisions of Masonry Veneer Manufacturer's Association (MVMA)

"Installation Guide for Adhered Concrete Masonry Veneer" and/or veneer manufacturer's

specific written installation instructions. Use the appropriate installation tools to ensure

proper bedding of veneer unit. Work the masonry veneer adhesive mortar into good contact

with the back of the veneer unit making sure the entire unit is buttered to a nominal 1/2 inch

(12mm) thickness. DO NOT COVER JUST THE PERIMETER! Buttered masonry veneer

units shall be firmly worked onto the scratch coat and slid slightly back and forth or with a

slight rotating motion. Allow installation to set until firm. Clean excess latex Portland

cement mortar from masonry veneer or stone face and joints between pieces. Tight fitted

masonry veneer shall be applied from the corners toward the middle of the wall, and from

the bottom toward the top of the wall.


Page 36 of 53

2. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE MVIS Hi-Bond Veneer

Mortar.

N. Grouting or Pointing (Exterior Adhered Veneers):

O. Pointing Mortar (for joints up to 1/2 inch (12mm):

1. Allow thin brick, masonry, and stone installations to cure a minimum of 24 hours @ 70

degrees F (21 degrees C). Verify grout joints are free of dirt, debris or tile spacers. Sponge

or wipe dust/dirt off veneer face and remove any water standing in joints. Surface

temperature shall be between 40-90 degrees F (4-32 degrees C). Use 2 quarts (1.9 L) of

clean potable water for 25 lb. (11.4 kg) of LATICRETE MVIS™ Premium Pointing Mortar.

Place water in a clean mixing container and add mortar slowly. Mix with a slow speed mixer

to a smooth stiff consistency. Allow mortar to slake for 5 minutes. Remix mortar. Pointing

mortar/grout shall be installed using a grout bag, filling the joints to the desired depth,

ensuring the mortar is forced into all voids. The curing time will shall vary significantly with

temperature and humidity. Once applied allow to firm to "thumbprint" hardness, trowel,

rake and/or dry, soft bristled brush to the desired finish.

2. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE MVIS™ Premium

Pointing Mortar

P. Waterproofing / Flashing:

1. To be designed and detailed by project architect / engineer. The function of wall flashing, or

through-wall flashing, is to divert moisture which shall penetrate the exterior face of the

facade or divert moisture which shall condense within the wall from water vapor migration

to or from the interior spaces. Flashings are commonly used at changes in configuration of

the facade, and between different components of the wall. Typical locations requiring

flashing are at the intersection of roof and wall assemblies, under roof parapet and wall

copings, over window and door openings, under windowsills, at shelf or relieving angles,

and at bases of hollow or cavity walls. Flashings shall always turn up against the area or

material which is being protected in order to prevent water penetration. Provision shall be

made to divert any trapped water back to the outside and away from the face of the building

facade. This is commonly done by placing weep holes, tubes or absorbent wicks from 24 -

33 inches (600 - 840 millimeters) at the base of the flashing. Flashings shall form a drip edge

and extend a minimum of 3/8 inch (10 millimeters) beyond the face of the facade to prevent

water from dripping down the face of the facade. Check local building code for proper

design, placement and implementation of flashing and weep systems. Copings, which

protect the top of a parapet wall from water penetration, shall be flashed, at a minimum, at

the joints between the coping material (metal, stone, ceramic tile, pre-cast concrete), but

preferably continuous along and beneath the entire length of the coping. Flashings which

cannot be adhered or imbedded in the wall construction are either attached to reglets, which

are prefabricated and pre-cast into the wall assembly, or attached to the wall assembly with

mechanical attachments and sealed with sealants. In selecting a flashing, it is very important

to verify compatibility of metals used in the window frame and the flashing in order to avoid

corrosion from galvanic reactions of dissimilar metals.

Q. Weeps / Pressure Equalization Vents:


Page 37 of 53

1. To be designed and detailed by project architect / engineer. Most building codes permit

weeps no less than 3/16 inch (5 millimeters) in diameter and spaced no more than 33 inches

(840 millimeters) on-center. Wick and tube weep spacing recommended at no more than 16

inches (400 millimeters) on-center. Install weeps and/or vent tubes through movement

joints, conforming to the size, type and composition specified and as per weep/vent

manufacturer's recommendations, on 2 feet (600 millimeters) centers minimum, and at all

locations indicated in shop drawings, plans and details. Ensure that all weeps and/or

equalization tubes are properly placed to reach the waterproofing membrane and/or cavity

they are designed to drain/vent, and are clear of dirt, debris, sealant or other obstructions.

R. Vapor Barrier:

1. Install vapor barrier, conforming to the type and composition specified and as per vapor

barrier manufacturer's recommendations, on the side of wall cavity insulation that will be

"warm in winter." Complete vapor barrier within two weeks after enclosure of the building.

Placement, composition and detail to be provided by project design professional.

S. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide control or expansion joints as located in contract drawings

and in full conformity, especially in width and depth, with architectural details.

1. Substrate joints shall carry through, full width, to surface of tile, brick or stone.

2. Install expansion joints in tile, brick or stonework over construction/cold joints or control

joints in substrates.

3. Install expansion joints where tile, brick or stone abut restraining surfaces (such as perimeter

walls, curbs, columns), changes in plane and corners.

4. Joint width and spacing depends on application - follow TCNA "Handbook for Ceramic,

Glass, and Stone Tile Installation “Detail "EJ-171 Expansion Joints" or consult sealant

manufacturer for recommendation based on project parameters.

5. Joint width: =1/8 inch (3mm) and = 1 inch (25mm).

6. Joint width: depth ~2:1 but joint depth shall be =1/8 inch (3mm) and =1/2 inch (12mm).

7. Layout (field defined by joints):

a. 1:1 length: width is optimum but shall be <= 2:1.

b. Remove all contaminants and foreign material from joint spaces/surfaces, such as dirt,

dust, oil, water, frost, setting/grouting materials, sealers and old sealant/backer. Use

LATICRETE LATASIL 9118 Primer for stainless steel, sandstone, metal, limestone

(and other porous stones), PVC, fiber reinforced cement installations.

c. Install appropriate backing material (e.g. closed cell backer rod) based on expansion joint

design and as specified in section 07 91 26 - Joint Fillers. Apply masking tape to face of

tile, brick or stone veneer. Use caulking gun, or other applicator, to completely fill joints

with sealant. Within 5-10 minutes of filling joint, ' tool' sealant surface to a smooth finish.

Remove masking tape immediately after tooling joint. Wipe excess sealant off all

surfaces immediately.


Page 38 of 53

8. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE MVIS™Silicone Sealant

LATASIL 9118 Primer.

T. Sealer (Exterior Adhered Masonry Veneers):

1. Read entire label before using. Use only as directed. Always test in a small inconspicuous

area with a 24-hour cure time to determine ease of application and desired results. Allow

new grout installations to cure for 72 hours prior to application. Make sure surface is clean

and free of waxes and coatings. Sealer shall be applied to damp surfaces one hour after

standing water has been removed. Surface temperature is to be between 50 degrees

Fahrenheit and 80 degrees Fahrenheit (10 degrees Celsius and 26.7 degrees Celsius). Ensure

that the area is well-ventilated during application and until the surface is dry. Keep children

and pets out of the area until treated surface is dry.

a. Ensure cap is closed and sealed and shake well before use.

b. Mask off surfaces not intended to be treated.

c. Liberally apply an even coat using a paint pad, paint brush, paint roller, or low-pressure

solvent-resistant sprayer. Do not thin before using.

d. Allow sealer to penetrate the surface for 10- 15 minutes; denser materials shall require

more time for the sealer to penetrate. During this time, distribute excess sealer over the

entire area to ensure even penetration.

e. Thoroughly wipe down the entire surface with a clean, dry cloth to completely remove all

excess sealer from the surface. DO NOT ALLOW SEALER TO COMPLETELY DRY

ON THE SURFACE.

f. A second coat shall be needed for porous, absorbent surfaces. If a second coat is required,

it shall be applied one hour after the initial application as directed in steps 2 through 5.

g. If sealer was not completely wiped off and a residue appears, wipe entire surface with a

towel dampened with sealer. Use a white, nylon pad to loosen residue and follow with a

clean, white absorbent towel to remove.

h. Keep newly sealed installations free from contamination for 6 hours at 70 degrees

Fahrenheit / 21 degrees Celsius.

i. A full cure is achieved in 24 to 72 hours at 70 degrees Fahrenheit / 21 degrees Celsius.

Use of the treated surface shall resume in 6- 8 hours. If use of the surface shall resume

sooner, cover the treated surface with red rosin paper to protect it until full cure has been

achieved.

j. Rags and equipment that are wet with sealer shall be flammable. Clean up promptly after

work is completed. Clean equipment with mineral spirits and allow to dry in a well-

ventilated area. Allow rags to dry in a well-ventilated area out of reach. When, dry,

dispose of in accordance with local waste disposal regulations.

2. Recommended Surfaces: Brick; concrete / masonry; homogeneous granite; veined granite;

unpolished, honed and textured limestone; quartzite, bluestone, sandstone, slate, and

travertine


Page 39 of 53

3. Storage and Handling Instructions: Avoid prolonged exposure to vapors. Use in a well-

ventilated area. Do not ingest. Avoid contact with eyes and skin. KEEP OUT OF THE

REACH OF CHILDREN. Do not freeze or store above 100 degrees Fahrenheit /38 degrees

Celsius. Do not mix with other chemicals. Do not release to natural waterways.

4. Use the following LATICRETE Systems Materials:

5. LATICRETE STONETECH® Heavy Duty Exterior Sealer

U. Adjusting: Correction of defective work for a period of one year following substantial completion,

return to job and correct all defective work. Defective work includes, without limitation, tiles broken

in normal abuse due to deficiencies in setting bed, loose tiles or grout, and all other defects which

shall develop as a result of poor workmanship.

3.6 INSTALLATION - CERAMIC TILE

A. General: Install in accordance with current versions of American National Standards Institute, Inc.

(ANSI) "A108 American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" and

TCNA "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation." Cut and fit , neatly around

corners, fittings, and obstructions. Perimeter pieces to be minimum half tile, brick or stone. Chipped,

cracked, split pieces and edges are not acceptable. Make joints even, straight, plumb and of uniform

width to tolerance +/- 1/16 inch over 8' (1.5mm in 2.4m). Install divider strips at junction of flooring

and dissimilar materials.

B. Vapor Reduction Coating:

1. Surface Preparation - Concrete slabs shall be clean, structurally sound, absorptive, and have

an ICRI concrete surface profile (CSP) of 3 - 5. All dirt, oil, paint, laitance, efflorescence,

sealers, curing compounds and any other bond breaking contaminants shall be removed

down to the full depth of contamination by shot blasting or other mechanical means then

swept and vacuumed clean. Use of chemicals to remove contaminants is prohibited. Use of

sweeping compound is not recommended as they shall contain oil which will act as a bond

breaker. Do not use over gypsum or asphalt-based products. Per ASTM F3010, concrete

slab to receive LATICRETE NXT Vapor Reduction Coating shall have a tensile pull-off

strength of 200 psi (1.4 MPa) or greater when tested in accordance with ASTM C1583.

Surface temperature shall be 50- 90 degrees F (10- 32 degrees C) during application and for

24 hours after installation. In all cases, the surface temperature of the prepared concrete slab

shall be warm enough to avoid condensation on the surface of the concrete.

2. Joints, Cracks, Surface Depressions and Other Irregularities - All joints and cracks shall be

evaluated and repaired if necessary, prior to installation of LATICRETE NXT Vapor

Reduction Coating. A good crack repair technique depends on knowing the causes and

selecting appropriate repair procedures that take these causes into account. Repairing a crack

without addressing the cause shall only be a temporary fix. Successful long-term repair

procedures shall address the causes of the cracks as well as the cracks themselves. Refer to

ACI 224.1R-07 for guidance on evaluation and repair of cracks in concrete. LATICRETE

product application over moving cracks and joints is not recommended.


Page 40 of 53

3. Moving joints (e.g. expansion joints, isolation joints, etc.) and dynamic (moving) cracks

shall be honored up through the LATICRETE NXT Vapor Reduction Coating.

LATICRETE is not responsible for vapor emission through untreated joints or for areas

where cracks shall develop later.

4. All non-moving joints and dormant cracks (e.g. saw cuts, surface cracks, grooves, control

joints, etc.) shall be cleaned out and free of all loose debris. Non-structural cracks up to 1/8

inch (3 mm) in width shall be filled with LATICRETE NXT Vapor Reduction Coating

epoxy during main application. Inspect these areas to ensure cracks are completely filled

with no voids.

5. Non-moving joints, dormant cracks greater than 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide, shall be patched with

mixture of 1 part LATICRETE NXT Vapor Reduction Coating and 3 parts clean, washed

play sand. In a suitable container, such as an empty LATICRETE NXT Vapor Reduction

Coating pail, pour 1 part LATICRETE NXT Vapor Reduction Coating pre-blended to 3

parts clean, washed play sand, using a 300 rpm drill with jiffy paddle, mix together for 2-3

minutes until the LATICRETE NXT Vapor Reduction Coating and qualified sand mixture

is consistent. Slowly pour the mixture into the crack, using the flat side of a trowel force the

epoxy/sand mixture into the crack. Surface crazing and hairline cracks do not need filling.

Construction Joints, Expansion Joints and Large moving cracks that have lost aggregate

lock (one side of crack is higher than the other) have structural implications and cannot be

repaired using this method.

6. Moisture Evaluation - Moisture testing shall be conducted in accordance with finish floor

goods and adhesive manufacturers' requirements prior to LATICRETE NXT™ Vapor

Reduction Coating application. When evaluating moisture conditions the HVAC system or

a temporary enclosure shall be operational and in place for the minimum specified time

period recommended in the moisture test standard. The concrete floor slabs and the ambient

air space above the floor shall be at service temperature and relative humidity for at least 48

hours before taking moisture measurements in the concrete slab. These conditions shall

remain throughout the test period to ensure accurate results.

a. MVER/RH less than or equal to 25 pounds (1415 µg/100%, 12 mill thickness, 133

sq.ft/gal (3.2 sq.m/L. Each full unit will yield approximately 865 ft2 (80.1 m2). Each

mini unit will yield approximately 319 ft2 (29.5 m2)

7. Mixing - Before using, store resins at room temperature 65-85 degrees F (18-30 degrees C)

for 24 hours to ensure ease of mixing. Mix Components A and B at a ratio of 1:2.3 by

volume (components are packaged into the pails to the specified ratio). Pour the A

component into the larger B component steel pail. Verify that all of the Part A liquid is

drained from pail. Mix with a slow speed drill (< 300 RPM) with a jiffy blade for 3 minutes,

assuring mixture is fully uniform and that all ribbons of contrasting shade are completely

eliminated. Pour the fully mixed material onto the substrate immediately after mixing.


Page 41 of 53

8. Application - Pour ribbons of LATICRETE NXT Vapor Reduction Coating onto the

prepared concrete and spread using appropriate round or square notch squeegee that is

designed to apply the desired mil thickness in a single coat. Apply an even coat making sure

to cover all areas thoroughly. Immediately following, while epoxy is still wet, use a high

quality 3/8-inch (9 mm) nap non-shedding paint roller to back-roll at 90 degrees from the

squeegee direction to help ensure full coverage and uniform thickness. Replace worn

squeegee blades and paint rollers when necessary to help ensure proper application. Use a

paint brush to apply epoxy around penetrations, columns, and any other obstructions.

Periodically check mil thickness using a LATICRETE NXT Wet Film Thickness Gauge.

Allow to cure for 12 hours at 50-90 degrees F (10-32 degrees C) prior to installation of

underlayment or finish flooring. Always consult flooring and adhesive manufacturer's

installation instructions, restrictions and confirm compatibility with LATICRETE NXT

Vapor Reduction Coating. Always test performance and compatibility of floor systems prior

to application.

9. Coverage - Each full unit will yield approximately 650 - 1040 ft2 (60.4 - 96.3 m2). Each

mini unit will yield approximately 240 - 360 ft2 (22.2 - 33.3 m2).

10. Flooring and Self-Leveling Underlayments Installation - In all cases the LATICRETE

NXT Vapor Reduction Coating surface shall be protected from traffic, dust, debris, rain, and

any other contaminants. LATICRETE NXT self-leveling underlayments shall be installed

over LATICRETE NXT Vapor Reduction Coating as soon as the epoxy is slightly tacky to

the touch with no transfer; typically, 12 hours after application depending on ambient and

substrate conditions. The maximum time to install LATICRETE NXT self-leveling

underlayments over LATICRETE NXT Vapor Reduction Coating is 24 hours. If

LATICRETE NXT Vapor Reduction Coating is left open longer than 24 hours or the

surface becomes contaminated, contact LATICRETE Technical Sales Representative.

LATICRETE NXT self-leveling underlayments require the use of LATICRETE NXT

Primer. Refer to TDS 230N for detailed primer installation instructions. If finish floor goods

are to be installed directly on top of LATICRETE NXT Vapor Reduction Coating, then the

epoxy surface shall be allowed to cure until non-tacky to the touch, typically after a

minimum of 24 hours. Always refer to finished floor manufacturer's recommendations

regarding installation instructions, restrictions, moisture conditions and compatibility.

Always test performance suitability and compatibility of finished floor systems prior to their

application. Sample surfaces shall be installed as a field test so as to be representative of

entire surface and tested for intended use.

11. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE NXT™ Vapor

Reduction Coating

C. Electric Radiant Heat Mat:


Page 42 of 53

1. Install in compliance with latest revisions of UL (US) 1693, UL (CAN/CAS) C22.2 #217;

NEC Article 424 IX by a licensed electrician. All electrical connections shall be made by a

licensed electrician. A qualified tile installer is responsible for the placement and

encapsulation of the LATICRETE Floor Heat Mat. Carefully inspect and clean surface to

receive LATICRETE Floor HEAT mat before the installation. Remove any sharp edges or

pointed objects that might damage the heating elements. Plan and install LATICRETE Floor

Heat following the installation instructions (DS 605.9). Fully test LATICRETE Floor Heat

during the various stages of the installation to verify correct functioning. Do not install over

expansion and control joints. Fully cover and encapsulate LATICRETE Floor Heat

elements with LATICRETE 254 Platinum. Allow mortar to harden prior to the installation

of waterproofing, crack suppression or ceramic tile, mosaics, pavers, brick or stone. Do not

turn the LATICRETE Floor Heat on until the entire tile installation (including grout) has

cured for a minimum of 48 hours at 70 degrees F (21 degrees C); cooler temperatures require

longer cure times.

2. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE Floor Heat Mat,

LATICRETE 254 Platinum.

3. Electric Radiant Heat - Loose Wire: Install in compliance with latest revisions of UL (US)

1693, UL (CAN/CAS) C22.2 #217; NEC Article 424 IX by a licensed electrician. All

electrical connections shall be made by a licensed electrician. A qualified tile installer is

responsible for the placement and encapsulation of the LATICRETE Floor Heat Mat.

Carefully inspect and clean surface to receive LATICRETE Floor Heat mat before the

installation. Remove any sharp edges or pointed objects that might damage the heating

elements. Plan and install LATICRETE Floor Heat following the installation instructions

(DS 601.3). Fully test LATICRETE® Floor Heat during the various stages of the

installation to verify correct functioning. Do not install over expansion and control joints.

Fully cover and encapsulate LATICRETE Floor Heat elements with LATICRETE 254

Platinum. Allow mortar to harden prior to the installation of waterproofing, crack

suppression or ceramic tile, mosaics, pavers, brick or stone. Do not turn the LATICRETE

Floor Heat on until the entire tile installation (including grout) has cured for a minimum of

48 hours at 70 degrees F (21 degrees C); cooler temperatures require longer cure times.

4. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE Floor HEAT Wire,


D. Bonded Thick Bed Method (Floor):


Page 43 of 53

1. Verify 1 inch (25mm) nominal bed thickness has been allowed. Apply LATICRETE 254

Platinum with a flat trowel as a slurry bond coat approximately 1/16 inch (1. 5mm) thick

over clean concrete slab, in compliance with current revision of ANSI A108.1A (2.2 and

5.2). Place LATICRETE 3701 Fortified Mortar Bed over slurry bond coat while

LATICRETE 254 Platinum slurry bond coat is wet and tacky. Omit reinforcing wire fabric

and fully compact bed by tamping. Spread LATICRETE 254 Platinum with flat trowel over

surface of "green"/fresh mortar bed as a slurry bond coat approximately 1/16 inch (1.5mm)

thick. Apply LATICRETE 254 Platinum slurry bond coat to back of Ceramic Tile, stone

mosaic trim unit or threshold and place each piece/sheet while slurry bond coats are wet and

tacky. Beat with a hardwood block or rubber mallet to level/imbed pieces before mortar bed

takes initial set. Clean excess mortar/adhesive from finished surfaces. For installation of tile,

brick or Ceramic tile over cured (pre-floated) latex-Portland cement thick bed mortar, follow

appropriate "Thin Bed Method" or "Medium Bed Method."

2. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE 3701 Fortified Mortar,


E. Thick Bed (Wire Reinforced) Method:

1. Minimum bed thickness of 2 inches (50mm) shall be maintained. Place latex-Portland

cement thick bed mortar to a depth approximately one-half finished bed thickness in

compliance with current revision of ANSI A108.01 (3.2.1.1 & 3.2.4) and A108.1B. Lay 2

inches x 2 inches (50mm x 50mm), 16 gauge (1.5mm), galvanized, welded reinforcing wire

fabric, complying with ANSI A108.02 (3.7) and ASTM A185, over mortar. Place additional

thick bed mortar over wire fabric and compact mortar by tamping with flat trowel. Screed

mortar bed level and provide correct slopes to drains. Spread latex-Portland cement thin bed

mortar with flat trowel over surface of "green"/fresh mortar bed as a slurry bond coat

approximately 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) thick. As per ANSI A108.1A (6.0) apply latex-Portland

cement mortar slurry bond coat to back of Stone, mosaic, paver, brick, Ceramic tile, trim

unit or threshold and place each piece/sheet while slurry bond coats are wet and tacky. Beat

with a hardwood block or rubber mallet to level/imbed pieces before mortar bed takes initial

set. Clean excess mortar/adhesive from finished surfaces. For installation of tile, brick or

stone over cured (pre-floated) latex-Portland cement mortar bed, follow appropriate "Thin

Bed Method" or "Medium Bed Method."


LATICRETE 254 Platinum

F. Self-Leveling Underlayment:

1. Use LATICRETE NXT Level Plus, and related LATICRETE NXT Primer, as a self-

leveling underlayment to attain proper floor flatness.


Page 44 of 53

2. Surface Preparation - Concrete slabs shall have a minimum ICRI concrete surface profile

(CSP) of 3. For more detailed ICRI CSP information refer to ICRI Guideline No. 03732.

Use of chemicals to remove contaminants or to create a surface profile is not recommended.

Use of a sweeping compound is not recommended as they shall contain oil which will act

as a bond breaker. Additionally, concrete slabs shall readily absorb water, be clean, free of

oil, wax, grease, sealers, curing compounds, asphalt, paint, deicing agents, dust, dirt, loose

surface material and any other contaminant that will act as a bond breaker. In addition,

tensile strength testing of the concrete substrate, per ASTM C1583 or ICRI Guideline No.

03739, shall show a minimum of 100 psi (0.7 MPa) tensile strength prior to installation of

LATICRETE self-leveling underlayment. Any areas that do not meet 100 psi (0.7 MPa)

tensile strength shall be removed and repaired.

3. General Priming Information: All surfaces shall be primed prior to the installation of

LATICRETE NXT self-leveling underlayments. LATICRETE NXT Primer is a

concentrate and shall be diluted with clean potable water prior to application. Dilution ratio

and application methods vary depending on substrate. Always stir or shake LATICRETE

NXT Primer concentrate prior to diluting. Mix primer with clean potable water according

to the LATICRETE NXT™ Primer DILUTION / APPROXIMATE COVERAGE chart

below. Water shall always be carefully measured in order to ensure proper dilution is

achieved. Use a mixing paddle to thoroughly combine primer and water. LATICRETE

NXT Primer shall be broom, roller, mop, or spray applied. Substrate temperature shall be a

minimum 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) during primer application and throughout drying time.

Additionally, air temperature shall be maintained between 50- 90 degrees F (10- 32 degrees

C) during primer application and throughout drying time. The primed surface shall also be

protected from weather, water and direct sunlight.

4. Water Drop Test: The water drop test described in this document is a subjective, qualitative

test that shall be conducted in order to help an experienced contractor form an opinion as to

how a slab shall be primed. However, this test shall not be definitive. To help determine the

appropriate primer dilution, properly prepare slab in accordance with this guide then apply

several dime to quarter size drops of water to properly prepared surface and observe.

a. High-Suction = Water completely absorbs into surface within 15 seconds; surface shall

appear dark and wet with no visible water remaining on surface

b. Normal-Suction = Water absorbs or partially absorbs within 30 seconds but not less than

15 seconds; bead of water shall slowly shrink as it absorbs while dark, wet spot on surface

slowly expands

c. Non-Suction = Water beads up and does not absorb at all within 30 seconds; bead of water

does not shrink or absorb, wet spot on surface does not expand

5. Normal Suction Concrete: Dilute LATICRETE NXT Primer 1:3 (1 part primer to 3 parts

water). Apply a single coat of diluted Primer/water mix to the point of refusal so that the

substrate is completely covered and small puddles form in low spots. While LATICRETE

NXT Primer is still wet use a push broom to work primer into the substrate so that puddles

are spread evenly over the surface, absorbed and a uniform film has been applied. Remove

any remaining puddles by brooming and spreading over the surface. Then proceed below to

the All Suitable Substrates and Protect Primer Application sections.


Page 45 of 53

6. High-Suction Concrete: Apply two coats of LATICRETE NXT™ Primer allowing adequate

time to dry between coats. For the first coat, dilute LATICRETE NXT Primer 1:5 (1-part

primer to 5 parts water). Apply first coat of diluted primer/water mix to the point of refusal

so that the substrate is completely covered and small puddles form in low spots. While

primer is still wet use a push broom to work primer into the substrate so that puddles are

spread evenly over the surface, allowed to absorb and a uniform film remains on the surface.

Remove any remaining puddles by brooming and spreading over the surface. Allow the

primer to dry. The first coat is considered dry when a minimum of 3 hours dry time has

elapsed, the primer turns from milky white to clear, is dry to the touch, and there is no release

of primer from the substrate. First coat shall not be opened to trade traffic prior to installation

of second coat. If the primed floor becomes contaminated by trade traffic, construction dust,

debris, or any other bond inhibiting substance, or is exposed to water/excessive moisture

prior to second coat application, the contaminated first coat of Primer shall be completely

removed by shot blasting, scarification or other mechanical means, properly re-primed and

allowed to dry.

7. For the second coat, dilute LATICRETE NXT Primer 1:3 (1 part primer to 3 parts water).

Apply second coat of diluted primer/water mix to the point of refusal so that the substrate is

completely covered and small puddles form in low spots. While second coat of primer is

still wet use a push broom to work primer into the substrate so that puddles are spread evenly

over the surface and a uniform film has been applied. Then follow the All Suitable

Substrates and Protect Primer Application sections.

8. Exterior Glue Plywood: Dilute LATICRETE NXT Primer 5:1 (5 parts primer to 1 part

water). Using a sprayer or broom, apply a single coat of diluted primer/water mix so that the

substrate is completely covered and a uniform film has been applied and follow the All

Suitable Substrates section. Fasten galvanized diamond metal lath over entire exterior glue

plywood substrate using corrosion resistant fasteners every 6 inches (15 cm) overlapping

lath seams by 1 inch (2.5 cm) and follow the Protect Primer Application section.

9. Non-Suction Substrates: Non-Suction substrate primer dilution and application instructions

are intended for Ceramic tile, quarry tile, VCT, VAT, sheet vinyl and moisture mitigation

systems that have been properly prepared in accordance with this guide and moisture

mitigation manufacturer's instructions. Concrete slabs that are considered Non-Suction will

require additional preparation prior to primer application. See Non-Suction Concrete in the

Substrate Types/General Requirements section for more information.

10. Dilute LATICRETE NXT Primer 1:1 (1-part Primer to 1 part water). Apply a single coat

of diluted primer/water mix to the point of refusal so that the substrate is completely and

evenly covered. While primer is still wet and white, immediately lightly scatter

LATICRETE NXT self-leveling dry powder into the wet primer. Using a push broom, work

the dry powder into the wet primer/water mixture forming a slurry. Continue to broom so

that puddles are spread evenly over the surface and a uniform film has been applied. Then

follow All Suitable Substrates and Protect Primer Application. For more information on this

method contact the Technical Service Department.


Page 46 of 53

11. LATICRETE NXT™ Vapor Reduction Coating / Moisture Mitigation Systems: Ensure

that an acceptable system has been installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

If mitigation system manufacturer requires the use of a specific Primer, follow

manufacturer's priming instructions using the required primer. If LATICRETE NXT primer

will be used follow Non-Suction Priming instructions.

12. LATICRETE NXT Underlayments and other Cement Mortar Beds: Follow High-Suction

priming instructions for priming on top of LATICRETE NXT underlayments and other

cement mortar beds.

13. All Suitable Substrates: Remove any remaining puddles by brooming and spreading evenly

over the surface. Allow the LATICRETE NXT Primer to completely dry for a minimum of

3 - 5 hours at 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) and 50% Relative Humidity. LATICRETE NXT

Primer coat is considered dry when a minimum of 3 hours dry time has elapsed, the primer

turns from milky white to clear, is dry to the touch, and there is no release of primer from

the substrate. Surface shall feel slightly tacky. Drying time will vary depending on surface

and ambient air conditions. Substrate temperature shall be a minimum 40 degrees F (4

degrees C) during primer application and throughout drying time. Additionally, air

temperature shall be maintained between 50- 90 degrees F (10- 32 degrees C) during primer

application and throughout drying time. Primer shall also be protected from weather and

direct sunlight. Temperatures below 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) and/or relative humidity

above 50% will increase drying time. Insufficient drying or poor film formation will result

in pinholes and poor bond strength and shall cause LATICRETE NXT™ self-leveling

underlayment to debond. If primer dries within 30 minutes or if a 24 hour period is exceeded

after primer application, the surface shall be primed again.

14. Protect Primer Application: When walking over new primer application prior to installation

of a LATICRETE NXT self-leveling underlayment, shoes shall be protected with clean,

slip-on type booties (i.e. Tyvek). Primed floor shall not be opened to trade traffic prior to

installation of LATICRETE NXT underlayments If the primed floor becomes contaminated

by trade traffic, construction dust, debris, or any other bond inhibiting substance, or is

exposed to water/excessive moisture prior to second coat application, the contaminated first

coat of primer shall be completely removed by shot blasting, scarification or other

mechanical means, properly re-primed and allowed to dry.

15. Mixing - LATICRETE NXT LEVEL PLUS shall be mixed with 5.0 - 5.5 quarts (4.7- 5.2L)

of water per 55 lb (25 kg) bag. Do not over water. For manual application, add product to

water and mix for 2- 3 min with a heavy duty drill (650 rpm) to obtain a lump free mix.

LATICRETE NXT Level Plus shall also be used in most pump equipment. Please consult

with a LATICRETE representative to verify equipment compatibility. A flow test shall

always be performed to ensure that the mix is homogeneous and free from separation. The

ideal flow range for LATICRETE NXT Level Plus is 11- 12 inches (280 - 300 mm) using

a LATICRETE Flow Test Kit. See TDS 235N - Flow Test Method - for more detailed

instructions on performing flow tests.


Page 47 of 53

16. Perimeter Isolation Strip - It is essential that all walls and building elements are isolated

from the self-leveling underlayment pours to ensure proper expansion allowance against all

restraining surfaces. Note: It is recommended to install a perimeter isolation strip before the

installation of LATICRETE NXT Level Plus. Attach the perimeter isolation strip to the

perimeter wall of the entire subfloor, as well as around the perimeter of any protrusions, in

order to isolate the floor and wall/restraining surfaces. Temporarily fasten perimeter

isolation strip in place with staples masking, duct, or carpet tape. The perimeter isolation

strip shall then be removed after the tiles have set firm. The joints shall then be filled with

LATICRETE LATASIL.

17. Main Application - Substrate temperature shall be between 40-90 degrees F (4-32 degrees

C) during application and air temperature maintained between 50- 90 degrees F (10- 32

degrees C). Protect areas from direct sunlight. Do not use damp curing methods or curing

and sealing compounds. If required to meet level tolerances, survey surface using a digital

or electronic leveling device and apply level pegs as required. Adequate ventilation shall be

provided to ensure uniform drying. Pump or pour blended material onto substrate at an

average thickness ranging between 1/8 inch to 1-1/4 inches (6 to 32 mm) for all surfaces.

Immediately following placement lightly smooth the surface and pour lines, when not using

elevation pins the use of a gauge rake will assist in controlling material depth. Do not expose

LATICRETE self-leveling underlayments to rolling dynamic loads, such as forklifts or

scissor lifts, for at least 72 hours after installation. Proper application is the responsibility of

the user. Floor will be ready for foot traffic in 1-4 hours. Finished floor goods shall be

installed as soon as 16 hours after application of LATICRETE NXT™ Level Plus, subject

to thickness, drying conditions and type of flooring materials. Coverage will be dependent

upon relative rough-ness of substrate, but the following is typical: 1/8 inch thickness is

approximately 49 ft2; 1/4 inch thickness is approx. 24 ft2; 1/2 inch thickness is approx. 12

ft2

18. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE NXT Level Plus,

LATICRETE NXT Primer

G. Uncoupling Membrane:

1. Mix LATICRETE 254 Platinum to a wet consistency. Using a 1/4 inch x 1/4 inch (6mm x

6mm) square notched trowel, install LATICRETE 254 Platinum in compliance with current

revisions of ANSI A108.02 (3.11) and ANSI A108.5 1.2. Work the latex Portland cement

mortar into good contact with the substrate and comb with notched side of trowel. Spread

only as much LATICRETE 254 Platinum as shall be covered while the mortar surface is

still wet and tacky. Apply LATICRETE STRATA_MAT to the wet LATICRETE 254

Platinum with the fabric side down. Using a clean grout float, trowel or 40 lb. vinyl roller,

ensure that LATICRETE STRATA_MAT is fully embedded into the mortar. Lift a corner

of the LATICRETE STRATA_MAT to ensure that maximum coverage is achieved. Abut

the ends and sides of adjacent sheets of LATICRETE STRATA_MAT to make sure that

continuity of the uncoupling system is achieved. Allow installation to set until firm. Clean

excess mortar from face of LATICRETE® STRATA_MAT™ . For installation of tile or

stone, follow appropriate "Thin Bed Method" or "Medium Bed Method."

2. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE STRATA_MAT,

LATICRETE 254 Platinum

H. Sound Abatement and Crack Isolation Mat:


Page 48 of 53

1. Perimeter Isolation - It is recommended to install a perimeter isolation strip before placing

and trimming LATICRETE 170 Sound & Crack Isolation Mat. Attach the perimeter

isolation strip to the perimeter wall around the entire subfloor, as well as around the

perimeter of any protrusions, in order to isolate or break the vibration transmission path

between the floor and the wall. Temporarily fasten perimeter isolation strip in place with

masking, duct or carpet tape.

2. Main Application - Use LATICRETE 254 Platinum to adhere the LATICRETE 170 Sound

& Crack Isolation Mat to the substrate. Use a 1/4-inch x 1/4 inch (6 mm x 6 mm) notched

trowel and comb mortar over substrate, apply only enough mortar as shall be covered within

25 minutes. Unroll the LATICRETE 170 Sound & Crack Isolation Mat into place, in the

thin-set adhesive mortar. Once installed, use a 25 - 45 lb. (11.3 - 20 kg) roller to embed the

LATICRETE 170 Sound & Crack Isolation Mat firmly into the adhesive mortar. Allow to

cure for 24 hours at 70 degrees F (21 degrees C). Install LATICRETE 170 Sound & Crack

Isolation Mat over the entire area to be treated. Do not overlap edges but be sure the edges

of each piece butt firmly together. Trim length of mat to desired length and width. Once

fully cured, install Ceramic tile finish as directed in appropriate "Thin Bed Method" or

"Medium Bed Method."

3. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE 170 Sound & Crack

Isolation Mat.

I. Pre-float Method (interior adhered veneers):

1. Over clean, dimensionally stable and sound concrete or masonry substrates, apply thick-bed

mortar as scratch/leveling coat in compliance with current revision of A108.1A (1.0, 1.4 &

5.1). Float surface of scratch/leveling coat plumb, true and allow mortar to set until firm.

For installation of Ceramic tile follow appropriate "Thin Bed Method" or "Medium Bed

Method."



J. Lath & Plaster Method (interior adhered veneers):

1. Install cleavage membrane complying with current revision of ANSI A108.02 (3.8

Membrane or cleavage membrane). Install metal lath complying with the current revision

of ANSI A108.01 (3.3 Requirements for lathing and Portland cement plastering), ANSI

A108.02 (3.6 Metal lath) and A108.1A (1.0 - 1.2, 1.4, & 5.1). Apply latex-Portland cement

mortar as scratch/leveling coat over wire lath, concrete or masonry in compliance with

current revision of ANSI A108.01 (3.3.5.1) and A108.1A (1.4). Float surface of

scratch/leveling coat plumb, true and allow mortar to set until firm. For installation of tile,

brick or stone, follow appropriate "Thin Bed Method" or "Medium Bed Method."



K. Thin Bed Method (interior adhered veneers):


Page 49 of 53








cement mortar onto the back of (i.e. ' back-butter') each piece/sheet in addition to trowelling





2. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE 254 Platinum.

L. Medium Bed Method:








cement mortar onto the back of (i.e. ' back-butter') each piece/sheet in addition to trowelling





2. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE 255 MULTIMAX™ .

M. Epoxy Thin Bed Method:

1. Install epoxy adhesive in compliance with current revisions of ANSI A108.02 (3.14) and

ANSI A108.6. Use the appropriate trowel notch size to ensure proper bedding of the tile or

stone selected. Work the epoxy adhesive into good contact with the substrate and comb with

notched side of trowel. Spread only as much epoxy adhesive as shall be covered while the

adhesive surface is still wet and tacky. When installing large format (> 8 inches x 8

inches/200mm x 200mm) tile/stone, rib/button/lug back tiles, pavers or sheet mounted

ceramics/mosaics, spread epoxy adhesive onto the back of (i.e. ' back-butter') each

piece/sheet in addition to trowelling epoxy adhesive over the substrate. Beat each

piece/sheet into the epoxy adhesive with a beating block or rubber mallet to insure full

bedding and flatness. Allow installation to set until firm. Clean excess epoxy adhesive from

tile or stone face and joints between pieces.

2. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATAPOXY 300 Adhesive.

N. Thin Bed Method (Glass Tiles):


Page 50 of 53

1. Ensure that the backs of the glass tiles have been thoroughly washed, rinsed, and completely

dried prior to installation. Install latex Portland cement thin-set mortar in compliance with

current revisions of ANSI A108.02 (3.11), A108.1B and ANSI A108.5. Remove any excess

setting material from in between tile edges. If voids or water spots in the adhesive are visible

through the tile, remove the tile and correct the installation. Allow the tile installation to cure

a minimum of 48 hours at 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) prior to grouting. Clean excess latex

Portland cement mortar from the face of the glass tiles and joints between pieces.

2. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE Glass Tile Adhesive.

O. Sound Abatement and Crack Suppression Adhesive (Thin Bed Method):

1. Install sound abatement and crack suppression adhesive in compliance with current revisions

of ANSI A108.02 (3.11), A108.1B and ANSI A108.5. Use the appropriate trowel notch size

to ensure proper bedding of the tile, brick or stone selected. Work the sound abatement and

crack suppression adhesive into good contact with the substrate and comb with notched side

of trowel. Spread only as much sound abatement and crack suppression adhesive as shall be

covered while the mortar surface is still wet and tacky. When installing large format (> 8

inches x 8 inches/200mm x 200mm) tile/stone, rib/button/lug back tiles, pavers or sheet

mounted ceramics/mosaics, spread latex Portland cement mortar onto the back of (i.e. '

back-butter') each piece/sheet in addition to trowelling latex Portland cement mortar over

the substrate. Beat each piece/sheet into the sound abatement and crack suppression

adhesive with a beating block or rubber mallet to insure full bedding and flatness. Allow

installation to set until firm. Clean excess sound abatement and crack suppression adhesive

from tile or stone face and joints between pieces. Installations requiring sound control shall

be done with either a 1/4 inch x 3/8 inch (6mm x 9mm) square notch trowel or a 1/2 inch x

1/2 inch (12mm x 12mm) square notch trowel. Installations requiring only anti-fracture shall

be done using a 1/4 inch x 1/4 inch (6mm x 6mm) square notch trowel for maximum

coverage.

2. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials:

3. LATICRETE 125 Sound & Crack Adhesive

P. Epoxy Spot Bond Method:

1. Store resins at room temperature 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) for 24 hours before using. All

substrates shall be clean and dry when application of LATAPOXY 310 Stone Adhesive is

made. Clean and grind back of stone at areas to receive the LATAPOXY 310 Stone

Adhesive spots using a mechanical wheel grinder with a diamond wheel/blade. Remove

dust. Apply LATAPOXY 310 Stone Adhesive. Apply dabs evenly distributed on back of

the stone or tile; 5 dabs minimum, 1 in each corner and 1 in center. Cover at least 10% of

the area of each piece. Finished dab thickness shall be a minimum of 1/8 inch (3mm). After

installation of LATAPOXY 310 Stone Adhesive onto the veneer, install onto substrate and

adjust for plumb and level.

2. Approximate dab diameter required to achieve 10% coverage with 5 dabs:

a. Tile size 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm), dab diameter 2 inches (50 mm).

b. Tile size 24 by 24 inches (600 by 600 mm), dab diameter 4 inches (100 mm).


Page 51 of 53

c. Tile size 36 by 20 inches (900 by 500 mm), dab diameter 5 inches (125 mm).

3. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATAPOXY® 310 Stone Adhesive,

LATAPOXY 310 Rapid Stone Adhesive, LATAPOXY 310 Cordless Mixer.

Q. Grouting or Pointing (Interior Adhered Veneers):

1. Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Grouting Epoxy (ANSI A118.3): Follow

manufacturer' s recommendations for minimum cure time prior to grouting. Store liquid

components of LATICRETE SPECTRALOCK PRO Premium Grout for 24 hours @ 70-

80 degrees F (21-27 degrees C) prior to use to facilitate mixing and application. Substrate

temperature shall be 40-95 degrees F (4-35 degrees C). Verify joints are free of dirt, debris

or grout spacers. Sponge or wipe dust/dirt off tile faces and remove water standing in joints.

Apply grout release to face of absorptive, abrasive, non-slip or rough textured Ceramic tile,

pavers, bricks, stone or trim units that are not hot paraffin coated to facilitate cleaning. Install

LATICRETE SPECTRALOCK PRO Premium Grout in compliance with current revisions

of ANSI A108.02 (3.13) and ANSI A108.6 (3.0 - 4.0). Inspect grout joint for pinholes/voids

and repair them with freshly mixed LATICRETE® SPECTRALOCK® PRO Premium

Grout. Cautions: Do not use undiluted white vinegar on polished marble or limestone unless

a test spot in an inconspicuous area indicates no change in finish appearance; do not use acid

cleaners on epoxy grout less than 7 days old.

a. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE SPECTRALOCK PRO

Premium Grout.

2. Polymer Fortified Cement Grout (ANSI A118.7): Allow ceramic tile installation to cure a

minimum of 24 hours @ 70 degrees F (21 degrees C). Verify grout joints are free of dirt,

debris or tile spacers. Sponge or wipe dust/dirt off veneer face and remove any water

standing in joints. Apply grout release to face of absorptive, abrasive, non-slip or rough

textured Stone, or trim units to facilitate cleaning. Surface temperature shall be between 40-

90 degrees F (4-32 degrees C). Install latex Portland cement grout in compliance with

current revisions of ANSI A108.1A (7.0 Grouting of tile), ANSI A108.02 (4.5 Cleaning

tile) and ANSI A108.10. Inspect joint for pinholes/voids and repair them with freshly mixed

grout. Do not use acid cleaners on latex Portland cement grout less than 10 days old.

a. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE PERMACOLOR

Select Grout.

R. Chemical Resistant Industrial Grouting (ANSI A118.5):

1. Follow manufacturer' s recommendations for minimum cure time prior to grouting. Prior to

use, store liquid components of LATICRETE SPECTRALOCK® 2000 IG for 24 hours @

70 degrees F (21 degrees C) to facilitate mixing and application. Substrate temperature shall

be 45-90 degrees F (7-32 degrees C). Verify joints are free of dirt, debris or grout spacers.

Sponge or wipe dust/dirt off tile faces and remove water standing in joints. Apply grout

release to face of absorptive, abrasive, non-slip or rough textured ceramic tile, pavers, bricks,

stone or trim units that are not hot paraffin coated to facilitate cleaning.

2. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials: LATICRETE SPECTRALOCK 2000

IG.


Page 52 of 53

S. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide control or expansion joints as located in contract drawings

and in full conformity, especially in width and depth, with architectural details.

1. Substrate joints shall carry through, full width, to surface of tile, brick or stone.

2. Install expansion joints in tile, brick or stonework over construction/cold joints or control

joints in substrates.

3. Install expansion joints where tile, brick or stone abut restraining surfaces (such as perimeter

walls, curbs, columns), changes in plane and corners.

4. Joint width and spacing depends on application - follow TCNA "Handbook for Ceramic,

Glass, and Stone Tile Installation “Detail "EJ-171 Expansion Joints" or consult sealant

manufacturer for recommendation based on project parameters.

5. Joint width: >=1/8 inch (3mm) and <= 1 inch (25mm).

6. Joint width: depth ~2:1 but joint depth shall be >=1/8 inch (3mm) and <=1/2 inch (12mm).

7. Layout (field defined by joints): 1:1 length: width is optimum but shall be <= 2:1. Remove

all contaminants and foreign material from joint spaces/surfaces, such as dirt, dust, oil,

water, frost, setting/grouting materials, sealers and old sealant/backer. Use LATICRETE

LATASIL™ 9118 Primer for underwater and permanent wet area applications, or for

porous stone (e.g. limestone, sandstone etc.) installations. Install appropriate backing

material (e.g. closed cell backer rod) based on expansion joint design and as specified in

section 07 92 00. Apply masking tape to face of tile, brick or stone veneer. Use caulking

gun, or other applicator, to completely fill joints with sealant. Within 5-10 minutes of filling

joint, ' tool' sealant surface to a smooth finish. Remove masking tape immediately after

tooling joint. Wipe excess sealant off all surfaces immediately.

8. Use the following LATICRETE System Materials:

9. LATICRETE LATASIL.

10. LATICRETE LATASIL 9118 Primer.

T. Floor Sealer:

1. Read entire label before using. Use only as directed. Always test in a small inconspicuous

area with a 24-hour cure time to determine ease of application and desired results. Allow

new grout installations to cure for a minimum of 72 hours prior to application. Make sure

surface is clean and free of waxes and coatings. Sealer shall be applied to damp surfaces one

hour after standing water has been removed. Surface temperature shall be between 50

degrees Fahrenheit and 80 degrees Fahrenheit (10 degrees Celsius and 26.7 degrees

Celsius). Ensure that the area is well-ventilated during application and until the surface is

dry. Keep children and pets out of the area until treated surface is dry.

2. Use the following LATICRETE Systems Materials: LATICRETE STONETECH®

BULLETPROOF® Sealer.

3.7 CLEANING


Page 53 of 53

A. Clean excess mortar/epoxy from veneer surfaces with water before they harden and as work

progresses. Do not contaminate open grout/caulk joints while cleaning. Sponge and wash veneers

diagonally across joints. Do not use acids for cleaning. Polish with clean dry cloth. Remove surplus

materials and leave premises broom clean.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect finished installation under provisions of section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.

To avoid damage to finished tile work, schedule floor installations to begin only after all structural

work, building enclosure, and overhead finishing work are completed.

B. Keep all traffic off finished tile floors until they have fully cured. Provide up to 3/4 inch (19 mm)

thick plywood or OSB protection over non-staining Kraft paper to protect floors after installation

material shave cured. Covering the floor with polyethylene or plywood in direct contact with the

floor shall adversely affect the curing process of grout and latex/polymer fortified Portland cement

mortars.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 09511 – ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS GOVERNMENT OF THE U. S. VIRGIN ISLANDS, DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 6

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Related Documents:

B. Drawings and general provisions of the Subcontract apply to this Section.

C. Review these documents for coordination with additional requirements and information that apply

to work under this Section.

D. Section Includes:

E. Acoustical surfaces including acoustic lay-in panels, grid systems, and required installation

accessories.

F. Tie-in to existing grid system.

G. Seismic bracing of existing grid system.

H. Seismic safety wires for light fixtures.

I. Related Sections:

J. Division 01 Section "General Requirements."

K. Division 01 Section "Special Procedures."

L. Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management."

M. Division 01 Section "Lateral Force Procedures".

N. Division 07 Section "Blanket Insulation" for acoustical insulation blankets in partitions and ceilings.

O. Division 09 Section "Painting" for field painting of lay-in panels.

P. Division 23 Sections for acoustical duct liners, sound insulated metal plenum walls, vibration

isolating supports for mechanical equipment, fire sprinklers and similar items of mechanical

equipment mounted on or in acoustical surfaces.

Q. Division 26 Sections for:

1. Light fixtures, smoke detectors and similar items of electrical equipment mounted in or on

acoustical surfaces.

2. Furnishing and installation of safety wires for recessed lighting fixtures.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. General:


Page 2 of 6

The following documents form part of the Specifications to the extent stated. Where differences

exist between codes and standards, the one affording the greatest protection shall apply. Unless

otherwise noted, the referenced standard edition is the current one at the time of commencement

of the Work. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Requirements" for the list of applicable

regulatory requirements.

1. ASTM International:

a. ASTM C635 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.

b. ASTM C636- Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems -Acoustical Tile and Lay-in

Panels.

c. California Building Code (CBC) - conform to combustibility requirements for materials.

d. CBC Chapters 16 and 25 and CBC Standard No. 25-2 for the design, details and specifications

for lateral bracing requirements as modified by Division 01 Section "Lateral Force Procedures".

2. Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association:

a. Ceiling Systems Handbook

b. Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct-Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies-Seismic Zones

3 & 4

3. UL- Underwriter's Laboratories System Ratings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Submit under provisions of Division 01 Section "General Requirements."

A. Product Data:

1. Manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions and product data on metal grid system

components, acoustical units, and all other products to be used.

2. Approved ICBO report for fasteners proposed to be used to attach acoustical ceilings to

building superstructure.

B. Shop Drawings:

Show grid layout and dimensioning, panel layouts, lighting fixtures, air diffusers, grilles, and all

other items exposed in acoustical ceilings, locations of seismic braces and hangers, and

suspension, seismic and bracing details. Show details of junctions with other work or ceiling

finishes, and special conditions.

C. Calculations showing that suspension systems will provide full compliance with seismic structural

requirements of Division 0l Section "Lateral Force Procedures". Calculations shall be checked and

sealed by a Civil or Structural Engineer licensed in the State of California.

D. Samples:

1. Acoustic panels of each type- 6 by 6 inches (150 by 150 mm) minimum.


Page 3 of 6

2. Grid system components, including suspension system main runner, cross runner, edge trim,

and all special shapes, in 12 inches (300 mm) lengths.


A. Installer's Qualifications: 5 years minimum experience with and specializing in acoustical ceilings

installations.


A. Deliver materials to project site in original, undamaged, unopened containers bearing manufacturer's

name, style, color and product number of each type of material.

B. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for storage of materials to be used in the work.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Unless otherwise required by the manufacturers of the materials, temperatures are to be maintained

at 60 degrees F. or higher, and humidity at 20 to 40 percent, prior to, during and after installation.


A. Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust-

generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested and approved.

Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is dry.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Upon completion of work, deliver stock of replacement materials of acoustical panels used in the

work to the Project Manager. Furnish at least 3 percent extra panels, of full-size units of each type,

color and pattern of acoustical panel installed. Package extra materials in manufacturer's standard,

sealed, unopened boxes, labeled with manufacturer's name, style, number and color of unit, local

distributor's name, address and telephone number, and locations where installed in Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXISTING MATERIALS

A. Existing suspension system scheduled to remain is [steel] [aluminum], approximately 1 1/2 inch (38

mm) high by 3/4 (18 mm) wide, white exposed face, 2 by 2 feet (600 by 600 mm) grid, except where

light fixtures occur. System is not seismically braced. New grid system shall meet and form positive

structural connection with existing system, using clips and other devices as necessary, which shall

be concealed from view. Final appearance shall appear to be one continuous grid system.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL (AP) MATERIALS

A. Type AP 1 panels are specified for offices and corridors where dusting and ease of cleaning are not

Issues.

B. USG "Millennia", 3/4 inches (19 mm) thick, 24 by 24 inches (600 mm x 600 mm), square edge,

white, mineral fiber, Class A, CAC range 35-39, NRC Range 0.65-0.75.


Page 4 of 6

C. Type AP 2 panel is specified for computer rooms and laboratories where dusting and ease of cleaning

are issues.

D. USG "Clean Room Class 100", Celotex, Capaul or equal, 5/8 inches (16 mm) thick, 24 by 24 inches

(600 mm x 600 mm), vinyl wrapped moisture resistant mineral fiber, square edges, STC 40- 44.

1. Class A material with a flame spread not exceeding 25 and a smoke developed rating not

exceeding 50 when tested in accord with ASTM E84.

2.3 GRID SUSPENSION SYSTEM (GS)

A. Manufacturers:

1. Chicago Metallic Corp.

2. Donn, Eastern

3. National Rolling Mills.

4. Approved Equal

B. System Description:

1. Systems shall be of steel construction as per CBC Standard 25-2 and shall consist of main

and cross runners, perimeter trim, connectors, hangers and all accessories necessary for the

complete installation.

2. All systems shall permit the installation of recessed lighting fixtures upon the flanges of the

systems and any form of splice or other obstruction which would inhibit or render such

installation of fixtures difficult will not be permitted.

3. Each intersection, splice and perimeter joint shall meet all seismic requirements of CBC

Standard 25-2.

C. Finish:

Factory finished white baked enamel over bonderized, electro-zinc-coated steel.

D. Main and Cross Runners:

1. GS 1:

15/16-inch (23 mm) flange suspension system, heavy-duty steel, grid module to suit panel size.

Include 15/16 inch (23 mm) wide perimeter trim members with shadow reveal.

2. GS 2:

9/16-inch (14 mm) flange narrow suspension system, intermediate duty steel, grid module to suit

lay-in panel size. Include 9116 inch (14 mm) wide perimeter trim members.

E. Connectors and Clips:

Manufacturer's standard

F. Hanger and Bracing Wires:

Fed. Spec. QQ-W-461, Class 1, galvanized and annealed, 12 gauge minimum


Page 5 of 6

G. Fasteners:

Fasteners used for attachment of acoustical ceilings to building structure shall have an approved

ICBO report.

H. Edge Sealer:

Latex adhesive designed for the purpose of sealing field-cut edges of acoustic panels, as

manufactured by Kelly-Moore, Inc., or equal

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Surfaces shall be dry and wet work completed prior to commencing installation. Inspect surfaces to

receive acoustical work and report any defects. Starting work implies acceptance of surfaces and

existing conditions.

B. Verify that plenum surfaces are free of dirt, dust and loose construction soil and that construction

work is otherwise complete, equipment installed and that surfaces and openings which might provide

"leaks" are sealed prior to commencing installation of ceiling assembly.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installation with other trades whose work adjoins or combines with acoustical ceilings.

Unless otherwise shown, equipment, fixtures, etc., applied on or within acoustical panels are to be

located symmetrically with respect to both axes. Provide grid members required to accommodate

lay-in air diffusers and similar items of mechanical equipment.

B. Except as otherwise specified to meet structural requirements, make installation of grid systems and

acoustical materials in strict accordance with approved manufacturer’s specifications or

recommendations and Drawing details. Where details and/or these Specifications are in apparent

conflict with manufacturer's recommendations, the more stringent requirement shall apply.

C. Grid Suspension Systems:

D. Structural Requirements:

1. Brace [new and existing] suspension to comply with CBC requirements a governing

resistance to lateral forces and uplift as modified by Division 01 Section "Lateral Force

Procedures".

2. Attachment to Building Superstructure: Install fasteners used to attach grid suspension

system to building superstructure in accordance with the requirements of their approved

ICBO report.

3. Install suspension systems in flat, level plane unless otherwise shown, joints in exposed

members tight and aligned without offsets. Direction of main runners, where not specifically

indicated, shall be determined by fixture layout.

4. Unless closer spacing is required by manufacturer of system, space hanger wires along main

runners at 4 feet (1.2 m) maximum. Provide special hangers as required where items above

ceiling obstruct normal hanger wires.


Page 6 of 6

5. Provide hold-down clips for lay-in panels where required to prevent lifting and flutter caused

by air pressures.

6. Install perimeter trim at wall and abutting vertical surfaces. Flange of trim shall be at the

same level as flanges of main and cross runners.

7. Level suspension systems to a tolerance of l/8 inches (3 mm) in 12 feet (3.6 m).

E. Unless otherwise shown on reflected ceiling plans, align grid members and tile joints parallel to

perimeter walls with pattern centered in room areas both directions.

F. Seal field-cut panel edges of Type AP 2 panels with edge sealer.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect the finished installation from damage during balance of construction period. Remove any

soiled or damaged items and replace with new before acceptance of Project by LBNL.

3.4 WASTE MANAGEMENT

A. Recycle unused acoustic ceiling tile in accordance with the requirements of Division 01

“Construction Waste Management."

END OF SECTION

09651- RESILIENT TILE FLOORING INCLUDING SOLID VINYL FLOOR

TILE

GOVERNMENT OF THE U. S. VIRGIN ISLANDS, DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 6

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Resilient vinyl tile flooring

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Manufacturer Certifications:

C. Provide certification that accurately identifies the Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) of

flooring furnished for this project including manufacturer’s name, address and factory location.

1. Suppliers of Private-Label flooring for this project must identify themselves as such and fully

disclose the OEM information listed above.

2. All “manufacturer” requirements in these specifications must be complied with by the OEM,

including warranties, certifications, qualifications, product data, test results, environmental

requirements, performance data, etc.

D. Provide ISO 9001 certification for the OEM of the specified products.

E. Provide ISO 14001 certification for the OEM of the specified products.

F. Provide OSHAS 18001 certification for the OEM of the specified products.

G. Shop Drawings: Showing installation details and locations of borders, patterns, locations of any floor

inserts and any seams.

H. Samples:

1. Manufacturer's color chart for selection of available floors

I. Color samples:

1. Samples as requested

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data:

B. For a qualified resilient flooring Manufacturer.

C. For a qualified resilient flooring Installer.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Submit three copies of the following:


TILE


Page 2 of 6

1. Manufacturer maintenance instructions.

2. Manufacturer material warranty.

3. Installer installation warranty.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. ISO 9001 Certified.

2. ISO 14001 Certified.

3. OHSAS 18001 Certified.

4. At least ten years active experience in the manufacture and marketing of commercial resilient

flooring.

5. A provider of authorized installer training.

B. Installer Qualifications:

1. At least five years’ experience in the installation of resilient flooring.

2. Experience on at least five projects of similar size, type and complexity as this project.

3. Employer of workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by

manufacturer for resilient flooring installation indicated.

C. Fire Test Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648,

Class 1, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Store flooring and installation materials in protected dry spaces, with ambient temperatures

maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not more than 85 deg F (29 deg C).

B. Store the indoor resilient tiles in an upright position on a smooth flat surface immediately upon

delivery to Project.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Product Installation:

1. Maintain temperatures during installation within range recommended by manufacturer.

2. After installation, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but

not more than 85 deg F (29 deg C).

3. Prohibit traffic during flooring installation and for at least 48 hours after flooring installation.


TILE


Page 3 of 6

4. Install flooring only after other finishing work, including painting and overhead work, has

been completed.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Limited Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace flooring that fails within specified warranty period.

B. Material warranty must be direct from the product manufacturer.

1. Material warranties from separate or third-party insurance providers are not valid.

2. Material warranties from private label distributors are not valid.

C. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Material manufacturing defects.

2. Surface wear and deterioration to the point of wear-through.

3. Failure due to substrate moisture exposure not exceeding 92 percent relative humidity when

tested according to ASTM F2170.

D. Warranty Period: 15 years.

E. Special Limited Warranty: Installer's standard form in which installer agrees to repair or replace

flooring that fails due to poor workmanship or faulty installation within the specified warranty period.

1.9 ENVIRONMENT AND INDOOR AIR QUALITY

A. Indoor Air Quality Certification:

B. Flooring products must be compliant with the volatile organic compound emissions criteria of the

California Section 01350

C. Manufacturer Certification of Environmental Procedures:

D. Original Equipment Manufacturers (OEM) ISO 14001 Certification

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of flooring with other equipment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 COMMERCIAL RESILIENT / VINYL TILE FLOORING

A. Modular tile flooring a 6mm thick modular tile with dovetail connections/ or straight seam for heat

welding. Includes a reinforced 2mm thick wear layer with pressed design, (2) fiberglass grids for

extreme dimensional stability and 100% recycled interlayer and base. Protected by surface treatment

for No Wax maintenance.


TILE


Page 4 of 6

B. Product Description: Resilient / Vinyl Tile flooring as per ASTM F1700.

C. Overall Thickness: Not less than 0.24 inch (6.0 mm)

D. Wear-Layer Thickness: Not less than 0.08 inch (2.0 mm)

E. Adhesive Method: as recommended per manufacturer’s installation instructions to ensure proper

installation and performance.

F. 100% REACH Compliant.

G. Applied Finish: Manufacturer's, factory-applied, permanent UV-cured.

H. Tile Size: GTI Connect 25.6’’ x 25.6’’ (650mm x 650mm)

I. GTI Control 25’’ x 25’’ (635mm x 635mm)

J. Color and Pattern:

1. As selected by Owner from manufacturer's standard colors and patterns.

K. Performance Criteria:

L. Maximum Static Load:

1. ASTM F970: Meets requirements

M. Rolling Loads: ASTM F2753, 500 cycles @ 100lbs: Excellent, no change

N. Indentation Hardness: ASTM D2240, 95

O. Chemical & Stain Resistance: EN 423, OK

P. Coefficient of Friction: ASTM D2047, 0.80 (DRY) / 0.82 (WET)

Q. Fire Performance: ASTM E 648; Class 1

R. Slab Moisture Design Tolerance:

1. Maximum relative humidity of 92 percent when tested according to ASTM F 2170.

2. Maximum moisture vapor emission rate of 10 pounds of water per 1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours

when tested according to ASTM F1869.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify the Following:

B. The area in which the indoor resilient tile flooring will be installed is dry, weather-tight and in

compliance with specified requirements.


TILE


Page 5 of 6

C. Permanent heat, lighting and ventilation systems are installed and operable.

D. Other work, including overhead work, that could cause damage, dirt, dust or otherwise interrupt

installation has been completed or suspended.

E. No foreign materials or objects are present on the substrate and that it is clean and ready for

preparation and installation.

F. Tests to verify that the moisture vapor emission rate or substrate relative humidity is within the

specified ranges.

G. The concrete slab surface deviation is no greater than 3/16 inch within 10 feet (4.5 mm within 3 m)

as described in AC1117R.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure proper adhesion

of resilient flooring system.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

C. Verify that substrates are dry and free of sealers, curing compounds and other additives. Remove

coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives using mechanical methods

recommended by manufacturer.

D. Moisture Testing: Perform ASTM F 2170 relative humidity test and proceed with installation only

after substrates have maximum relative humidity of 92 percent.

E. Use trowelable concrete based leveling and patching compound with the same moisture vapor

tolerance as the adhesive to fill depressions, holes, cracks, grooves or other irregularities in substrate.

F. Place flooring and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours

before installation. Install flooring materials only after they have reached the same temperature as

space where they are to be installed.

G. Sand the surface of the concrete slab.

H. Sweep and then vacuum substrates immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine

substrate for moisture, alkaline salts, grit, dust or other contamination. Proceed with installation only

after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 VINYL TILE FLOORING INSTALLATION

A. General:

Comply with resilient tile flooring manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Take necessary precautions to minimize noise, odors, dust and inconvenience during installation.

C. Fit flooring neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, equipment anchors, floor outlets, and other

interruptions of floor surface.


TILE


Page 6 of 6

D. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings unless otherwise

indicated.

E. Lay out flooring per manufacturer’s recommendations.


A. Perform the following operations after completing resilient flooring installation:

B. Remove marks and blemishes from flooring surfaces.

C. Sweep and then vacuum flooring.

D. Damp-mop flooring to remove soiling.

E. Protect flooring from abrasions, indentations, and other damage from subsequent operations and

placement of equipment, during remainder of construction period.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 09680 – CARPET GOVERNMENT OF THE U. S. VIRGIN ISLANDS, DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 5

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Carpet, directed glued.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 200a.

B. CRI 104 Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floorcovering Materials; Carpet and Rug

Institute; 1996.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 Submittal Procedures.

B. Shop Drawings:

Indicate seaming plan, method of joining seams, direction of carpet pile and pattern, location of

edge moldings and edge bindings.

C. Product Data:

Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes,

patterns, colors available, and method of installation.

D. Samples:

Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each carpet material

specified.


A. Manufacture Qualifications:

Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet with minimum five years of

documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications:

Company specializing in installing carpet with a minimum three years of experience.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation.

B. Ventilate installation area during installation and for 72 hours after installation.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. See Section 01600 Product Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Provide 100 s.f. of carpeting of each type, color, and pattern specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


Page 2 of 5

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Carpet:

Bentley Carpet Mills, Inc.

14641 E. Don Julian Rd. City of Industry, CA 91746

(800) 423-4709 / (818) 333-4585

Collins and Aikman

210 Madison Avenue

New York, NY 10016

(800) 241-4902 / (212) 578-1217

Couristan Inc.

919 Third Avenue

New York, NY 10022

(800) 223-6186 / (212) 371-4200

Healthtex and Design Weave

15305 Valley View

Santa Fe Springs, CA 90670

(800) 366-8839 / (213) 921-7209

Gulistan Carpet, JPS Carpet Corp. P.O. Box A

Aberdeen, NC 28315

(800) 729-2727 / (919) 944-2371

Harbinger

P.O. Box 1209

Calhoun, GA 30703

(800) 241-4216

Heuga USA P.O. Box 1503

LaGrange, GA 30241

(800) 868-4537

Interface Flooring Systems, Inc. P.O. Box 1503

LaGrange, GA 30241

(404) 882-1891

J&J Industries, Inc. P.O. Box 1287

Dalton, GA 30722

(800) 241-4585 / (404) 278-4454

Karastan-Bigelow

P.O. Box 27050

Greensboro, NC 27425-7050

(800) 523-5647 / (919) 665-4000

Lees Commercial Carpet, Division of Burlington Industries

P.O. Box 26027


Page 3 of 5

Greensboro, NC 27420

(800) 523-5647

Mannington Carpet

P.O. Box 12281

Calhoun, GA 30701-7004

(800) 241-4206 / (404)629-730 I

Milliken Contract Carpets

P.O. Box 2956

LaGrange, GA 30241

(800) 241-4826 / (404) 883-5511

Mohawk Carpet

1755 The Exchange

Atlanta, GA 30339

(800) 554-6637 / (404) 951-6000

Mort West Mills, division of Crest Carpet Co.

205 Lexington Avenue

New York, NY 10016

(212) 889-5588

Pacific Crest Mills

31 Columbia St.

Aliso Veijo, CA 92656

(800) 222-3404 / (CA) (800)422-4455

Patrick Carpet Mills

2937 Maria St.

Rancho Dominguez, CA 90221

(800) 421-1846 / (CA) (800) 525-8540

Prince Street Technologies, Ltd.

36 Enterprise Blvd. Atlanta, GA 30336

(800) 221-3684 / (404) 691-0507

Stratton, Division of Shaw Industries

P.O. Drawer 2128

616 East Walnut Ave. Dalton, GA 30703 (404) 278-3812

Suncraft Mills

South Industrial Blvd. P.O. Box 12542

Calhoun, GA 30730+

(800) 241-4667 / (404) 629-7876

United Technical Products, Inc.

960 Turnpike St. Canton, MA 02021

(800) 225-6052 / (617) 821-1752


Page 4 of 5

2.2 CARPET

A. Carpet Type CPT-I see drawings:

(09680.A- CARPET CPT-1)

B. Material:

Nylon

C. Style:

Tufted & Fusion Bonded

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Sub-Floor Filler:

Type recommended by carpet manufacturer

B. Tackless Strip:

Carpet gripper, of type recommended by carpet manufacturer to suit application, with attachment

devices

C. Moldings and Edge Strips:

Embossed aluminum, anodized color

D. Adhesives:

Compatible with materials being adhered

E. Seam Adhesive:

Recommended by manufacturer

F. Contact Adhesive:

Recommended by carpet manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified in Section 06100 and

are ready to receive carpet.

B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances, are dust-free, and are ready to receive

carpet.

C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free of substances which would impair bonding of adhesives

to sub-floor surfaces.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other

defects with sub-floor filler.

3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL


Page 5 of 5

A. Install carpet in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI 104.

B. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots.

C. Lay out carpet and locate seams in accordance with shop drawings:

D. Locate seams in area of least traffic, out of areas of pivoting traffic, and parallel to main traffic.

E. Do not locate seams perpendicular through door openings.

F. Align run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic in same direction on adjacent pieces.

G. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline.

H. Provide monolithic color, pattern, and texture match within any one area.

3.4 DIRECT-GLUED CARPET

A. Double cut carpet seams, with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed. Apply

seam adhesive to cut edges of woven carpet immediately.

B. Apply contact adhesive to floor uniformly at rate recommended by manufacturer. After sufficient

open time, press carpet into adhesive.

C. Apply seam adhesive to the base of the edge glued down. Lay adjoining piece with seam straight,

not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps

D. Roll with appropriate roller for complete contact of adhesive to carpet backing.

E. Trim carpet neatly at walls and around interruptions.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Remove excess adhesive from floor and wall surfaces without damage.

B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 09704 – EPOXY RESINOUS FLOORING GOVERNMENT OF THE U. S. VIRGIN ISLANDS, DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 6

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies a seamless flooring system with integral base.

B. Flooring consists of epoxy resin, aggregate, and finish coats for non-slip finish.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:

B. Description of product to be provided; technical data showing compliance with specifications.

C. Application and installation instructions, including proposed deviations from specifications.

D. Samples:

1. Each color specified in INTERIOR/EXTERIOR FINISHES, MATERIALS, AND FINISH

SCHEDULES.

2. Sample 300 mm (12-inch) square in each finish specified.

3. Sample showing construction from substrate to finish surface in thickness specified.

E. Certification and Approval:

1. Manufacturer's certification of material compliance.

2. Manufacturer's approval of installers.

3. Contractor's certificate of compliance with Quality Assurance requirements.

F. Warranty:

Manufacturer’s warranty of materials and installation.


A. Single Source Responsibility:

B. Obtain primary resinous flooring materials including primers, resins, hardening agents, finish or

sealing coats from a single manufacturer.

C. Provide secondary materials only of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary

materials.

D. Installer trained and approved by manufacturer of primary material and having completed at least

five projects of similar size and complexity.

E. Pre-Installation Conference:

F. Arrange a meeting not less than thirty days prior to starting work.


Page 2 of 6

G. Attendance

1. Contractor

2. Resident Engineer

3. Manufacturer and Installer's Representative

1.4 MATERIAL PACKAGING DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver materials to the site in original sealed packages or containers, clearly marked with the

manufacturer's name or brand, type and color, production run number and date of manufacture.

B. Protect materials from damage and contamination in storage.

C. Maintain temperature of storage area between 15°C and 32°C (60° and 90Dp).

D. Package materials in factorypre-weighed and in single, easy to manage batches sized for ease of

handling and mixing proportions from entire package or packages.

1.5 5 WARRANTY

A. Work subject to the terms of the Article "Warranty of Construction" of Section GENERAL

CONDITIONS.

B. Extend warranty period to three years.

1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

A. The publication listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The

publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

4. B221-05..................... Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes,

and Tubes

5. C267-0l...................... Chemical Resistance of Mortars, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings

6. C413-0l..................... Absorption of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, and Monolithic

Surfacings

7. C580-02.................... Flexural Strength and Modulus of Elasticity of Chemical Resistant

Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes

8. C722-04 ...................Chemical-Resistant Resin Monolithic Surfacing

9. C811-98 (R2003)..... Surface Preparation of Concrete for Application of Chemical-Resistant

Resin Monolithic Surfacings

10. C882-05.................... Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used with Concrete by Slant

Shear


Page 3 of 6

11. 02047-04................... Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Floor Surfaces as

Measured by the James Machine

C. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM):

1. AMP 50l.................... Finishes for Aluminum

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Epoxy resinous flooring includes concrete epoxy primer, colored quartz aggregate epoxy resin

mortar, clear epoxy sealer coat, and finish coat for non-slip finish.

B. System resistant to chemicals and abrasion

2.2 EPOXY FLOORING SYSTEM

A. Conform to ASTM C722, Type A, Epoxy resin, quartz aggregate.

B. Physical Properties of flooring system addition to C722 when tested as follows:


Page 4 of 6

Property Test Value

Hardness ASTM D2240

Shore Durometer

75-80

Bond ASTM C882

Bonding epoxy flooring to hardened

concrete

Min 400 psi

Water Absorption ASTM C413 max 0.1 percent

Abrasion Resistance ASTMD4060

Taber Abrader CS-I7 wheel, 1000 gm

load; 1000 cycle

max 0.10 gms. weight

loss

Flexural Strength ASTMC580 min2200psi

Extent of Burning

extinguishing

Heat Resistant

ASTMD635

For continuous exposure min 140 deg.F

For intermittent spills min 200 deg. F

max 0.25 inch self

No Effect

No Effect

Coefficient of Friction ASTMD2047 0.7

Chemical Resistance ASTMC267 No Effect

of the following:

Acetic acid 5 percent

Ammonium hydroxide 10 percent

Citric Acid 50 percent

Fatty acid Motor Oil, 20W

Hydrochloric acid

Salt water 10 percent

Sodium Hydroxide 10 percent

Sulfuric acid 10 percent

Trisodium phosphate 5 percent

Urine

Feces

Hydrogen peroxide 28 percent

Distilled Water

Sodium Hypochloride 5.28 percent

C. Primer, Coloring, Sealer, and Finish coats as standard with manufacture of flooring system

D. Base cap:

Extruded aluminum, clear anodized finish unless specified otherwise in INTERIOR/EXTERIOR

FINISHES, MATERIALS, AND FINISH SCHEDULES

2.3 BASE CAP STRIP

A. Aluminum, Extruded: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-TS

B. Shape for 5 mm (3/16 inch) depth of base material: "J" configuration

C. Finish:


Page 5 of 6

1. Finish exposed surfaces in accordance with NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual.

D. Aluminum: NAAMM Amp 501

1. Clear anodic coating, AA-C22A41 chemically etched medium matte, with Architectural

Class 1, 0.7 mils or thicker

2. Colored anodic coating, AA-C22A42, chemically etched medium matte with Architectural

Class 1, 0.7 mils or thicker

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Maintain temperature of materials above 21°C (70°F), for 48 hours before installation.

B. Maintain temperature of rooms where work occurs, between 21°C and 32°C (70°F and 90°F) for at

least 48 hours, before, during, and 24 hours after installation. Maintain temperature at least 21°C

(70°F) thereafter.

C. Do not install materials until building is permanently enclosed and wet construction is complete, dry,

and cured.

D. Concrete substrate cured and not less than 30 days old.

E. Area free of other trades during and for a period of 24 hours after installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. The respective manufacturer’s instructions for application and installation will be considered for use

when approved by the Project Manager.

B. Submit proposed installation deviation from this specification to the Project Manager indicating the

differences in the method of installation.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Prepare surface in accordance with ASTM C81l except where specific manufacturer's instructions

supersede.

B. Mechanically remove bond inhibiting materials and loose or laitance materials to ensure bond.

C. Prepare wall and set base cap mold level.

D. Fill voids within the height of the wall where base is applied even with the wall surface.

E. Grind, sand, or cut away protrusions.

3.4 APPLICATION

A. Mix and apply each component of resinous flooring system in compliance with manufacturer's

specifications to produce a uniform monolithic flooring surface of 5 mm (3/ 16 inch) minimum

thickness.


Page 6 of 6

B. Turn flooring up for coved 100 mm (4-inch) high base at vertical wall surfaces and penetrations.

Cove joint with floor; 6 mm (1/4 inch) radius. Round interior and external corners.

C. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's specified rate. Coordinate timing of primer

application with application of troweled mortar to ensure optimum adhesion between resinous

flooring materials and substrate.

D. Uniformly spread mortar over substrate adjusted to manufacturer’s recommended maximum

thickness to plane line of floor.

E. Trowel finish for smooth surface on base and coved surface.

F. Grout mortar surface as specified by manufacturer and broad cast colored quartz aggregate uniformly

distributed for non-slip texture on floors to within one inch of base cove horizontal edge.

G. Apply a clear finish coat.

3.5 CURING, PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Cure resinous flooring materials in compliance with manufacturer's directions, taking care to prevent

contamination during stages of application and prior to completion of curing process.

B. Close area of application for a minimum of 24 hours.

C. Protect resinous flooring materials from damage and wear during construction operation.

D. Cover flooring with kraft paper.

E. Covers paper with 6 mm (1/4 inch) thick hardboard, plywood, or particle board where area is in foot

or vehicle traffic pattern, rolling or fixed scaffolding and overhead work occurs.

F. Remove temporary covering and clean resinous flooring just prior to final inspection. Use cleaning

materials and procedures recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer.

3.6 TOLERANCE

A. From line of plane: Maximum 3 mm (1/8 inch) in total distance of flooring and base.

B. From radius of cove: Maximum of 3 mm (1/8 inch) plus or 1.6 mm (1/16-inch) minus.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 09772 – SILICATE COATINGS GOVERNMENT OF THE U. S. VIRGIN ISLANDS, DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 7

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


Application of lime remover and three coats of silicate coating over water repellency.

Specification includes surface preparation.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 09253 - Salt-Retaining Water Repellent Renovation Stucco

1.2 REFERENCES

A. General:

The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The

publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

B. ASTM (ASTM):

1. ASTM E 96, "Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials."

2. ASTM E 514, "Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through

Masonry."

3. ASTM G 154, "Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent Light Apparatus for UV

Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials."

C. Deutsches lnstitut fur Normung (DIN), European Standard (EN), and International Organization for

Standardization (ISO):

1. DIN 18 363 2.4.1, manufacturing standard for silicate paint.

2. DIN EN 13 300, manufacturing standard for interior silicate paint.

3. DIN EN 1062, manufacturing standard for sol silicate paint.

D. ISO 11998, "Paints and varnishes - Determination of wet-scrub resistance and clean ability of

coatings."

E. ISO 6504-3, "Paints and varnishes- Determination of hiding power- Part 3: Determination of contrast

ratio of light-colored paints at a fixed spreading rate."

F. ISO 2813, "Paints and varnishes - Determination of specular gloss of non-metallic paint films at 20

degrees, 60 degrees and 85 degrees."

G. EN 1062-3, "Paints and varnishes- Coating materials and coating systems for exterior masonry and

concrete- Part 3: Determination of liquid water permeability."

H. DIN EN 1504-2, "Products and systems for the protection and repair of concrete structures

Definitions, requirements, quality control and evaluation of conformity - Part 2: Surface protection

systems for concrete."


Page 2 of 7

I. DIN EN ISO 7783-2, "Coating materials and coating systems for exterior masonry and concrete –

Part 2: Determination and classification of water-vapor transmission rate (permeability)."

J. DIN 4102-A2, "Fire Behavior of Building Materials and Building Components- Part 2: Building

Components; Definitions, Requirements and Tests."

K. DIN 18363, "Construction Contract Procedures (VOB) Part C: General Technical Specifications in

Construction Contracts (ATV) Painting and Varnishing."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Lime remover: A liquid silicic acid.

B. Water repellency:

A water repelling liquid that is applied to mineral surfaces prior to the application of the silicate

base coat.

C. Silicate coating base coat: The first applied coat of the silicate coating.

D. Silicate coating, intermediate coat:

The second applied coat of the silicate coating. E. Silicate coating, top coat: The third applied

coat of the silicate coating.

E. Dilution: A silicate based diluent.


A. A materials-compatible highly vapor permeable decorative coating system offering severe

weathering protection for exterior exposure. Install over mineral surfaces.

B. Lime Remover:

A silicic acid based cleaner used to open sinter layers on rendered plaster surfaces to ensure they

are absorbent. May be used to remove lime efflorescence and calcium carbonate deposits from

mineral surfaces.

C. Water Repellency:

A solvent-free liquid silane that is drawn into the capillaries of the substrate and by chemical

reaction forms a micro-thin silica gel coating within repelling liquid water and salt ions by

reducing surface tensions while maintaining substrate vapor permeability.

D. Silicate Coating:

An incombustible three coat system with UV and alkaline resistant inorganic pigments in the

specified color with biocides. Coatings penetrate the surface and in a chemical reaction with the

substrate results in covalent bonds forming a hard amorphous microporous layer with extremely

high vapor permeability that is unaffected by acids, UV exposure, or air-borne pollutants.

Provides weathering protection without reducing substrate vapor permeability.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

Submit product data showing material proposed. Submit sufficient information to determine

compliance with the Drawings and Specifications. Provide published documentation describing

materials, characteristics, and limitations.


Page 3 of 7

B. Samples:

Submit samples for verification purposes, fabrication techniques and workmanship.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions:

Submit manufacturer's instructions including technical data sheets, material safety data sheets,

mixing instructions, application requirements, special procedures, and conditions requiring

special attention.

D. LEED Submittals:

Submittals that are required to comply with requirements for LEED certification include the

following:

E. Low Emitting Materials:

Submit certification by the manufacturer confirming that products (i.e., adhesives, sealants,

paints, coatings, etc.) meet or exceed the volatile organic compound (VOC) limits set by specific

agencies or other requirements. Clearly state VOC limits in the submittal.


A. Qualifications:

B. Manufacturer Qualifications:

Provide evidence that Manufacturer is a firm engaged in the manufacture of silicate coatings of

types required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for a minimum

of ten years.

C. Applicator Qualifications:

1. Provide evidence Applicator is a firm having a minimum of three years of successful

application experience with projects similar in type and scope to that required for this Project

and approved by the manufacturer.

D. Mockups:

Prior to application of the work, fabricate and erect mockups for each type of finish and

application to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic

effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the

following requirements using materials indicated for final unit of work. Locate mockups as

directed by the Owner’s Representative. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and

workmanship to be expected in the completed work. Obtain the Owner’s Representative's

acceptance of mockups before start of final unit of work.

E. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in undisturbed condition as a standard for judging

completed unit of work.


A. Deliver materials to the Project site in supplier's or manufacturer's original wrappings and containers,

labeled with manufacturer's name, material and product brand name, and lot number, if any.

B. Store materials in their original undamaged packages and containers inside a well-ventilated area

protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.



Page 4 of 7

A. Environmental Requirements:

1. Substrate and ambient air temperature must be under 86º F (30 °C). Maintain temperature

during and after application.

2. Do not apply when rain is expected, in high winds, or onto hot substrates.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Warranty period from date of Substantial Completion is 15 years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design:

Items specified are to establish a standard of quality for design, function, materials, compatibility,

performance, warranty, and appearance. Equivalent products by listed manufacturers are

acceptable. The Owner’s Representative is the sole judge of the basis of what is equivalent.

B. KEIM Mineral Coatings of America, Inc., 10615 Texland Blvd. #600, Charlotte, North Carolina

28273. Telephone 704-588-4811. Email [email protected].

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Lime Remover:

Silicic acid based cleaner that is diluted with water that reacts immediately upon application. No

VOC.

B. Basis of Design:

"KEIM Lime Remover", KEIM Mineral Coatings of America, Inc.

C. Water Repellency:

A solvent-free silane based proprietary water repellent with 100% active ingredient. Produces a

silica gel micro-coating within the capillaries of the substrate by a chemical reaction with the

humidity of the air and of the substrate. The silica gel coating breaks surface tensions preventing

water and salts migration yet maintains water vapor diffusion of substrate. Less than 10 g/l VOC.

D. Basis of Design:

"KEIM Silan 100", K.EIM Mineral Coatings of America, Inc.

E. Silicate Coating, Base Coat, Intermediate Coat, and Top Coat:

Provide silicate based opaque coating meeting or conforming to:

1. DIN 18 363 2.4.1, manufacturing standard for silicate paint.

2. DIN EN 1504-2/2.2, Products and systems for the protection and repair of concrete

structures/Surface protection systems for concrete.

3. DIN 4102-A2, non-flammable standard- will not burn.

4. ASTM E 96 Vapor Permeability- 83 perms.

mailto:[email protected]


Page 5 of 7

5. ASTM G 154 Accelerated Weathering- no fading, cracking, peeling.

6. ASTM E 514 62-MPH Wind-Driven Rain Test - no water penetration.

7. With biocides.

8. Less than gram I per liter VOC (Volatile Organic Content).

F. Basis of Design:

"KEIM Royalan", KEIM Mineral Coatings of America, Inc.

G. Dilution for Silicate Coating:

Provide silicate dilution meeting or conforming to:

H. DIN 4102-A2, non-flammable standard- will not burn.

I. ASTM E 96 Vapor Permeability- 83 perms.

J. Less than l gram per liter VOC (Volatile Organic Content).

K. Basis of Design:

"KEIM Royalan Dilution", KEIM Mineral Coatings of America, Inc.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Tools:

1. Lime Remover: Apply by brush or Hudson style sprayer, rinse off with low pressure spray.

2. Water Repellency: Apply by natural bristle brush, roller, or low pressure Hudson-style

sprayer.

3. Silicate Coating, Base Coat, Intermediate Coat, and Top Coat:

Apply by natural bristle facade brush, professional roller, or professional airless spray equipment

and back-roll as required for even distribution.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Lime Remover:

Leave surface clean from removed particles.

B. Silicate Coating; Base Coat, Intermediate Coat, and Top Coat:

Apply evenly to a smooth mineral matte finish without lap lines, voids, "holidays", or drips.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions:

Confirm by examination the areas and conditions under which the work is to be applied for

compliance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory

conditions have been corrected.


Page 6 of 7

B. Verify substrate is secure, sound, dry, and absorbent, and free of dirt, grease, salts, oil-based paints,

release agents, curing agents, and other bond breakers.

C. Pressure wash surfaces exposed to airborne salts or sea water with plenty of clean water.

D. Verify substrate has no pretreatments or priming materials applied.

E. Verify Renovation Stucco finish coat has cured minimum l 0 days.

F. Verify other materials to be coated are fully cured to manufacturer recommendations.

G. Beginning of the work shall indicate acceptance of the areas and conditions as satisfactory by the

Applicator.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protection:

Lay ground cloths and take measures as necessary to protect surfaces subject to contact by

products specified by this Section.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Conform to reviewed product data, manufacturer’s written instructions, and provisions of the

Contract Documents.

B. Plan the work properly.

C. Work ahead of the sun on shaded facades.

D. Work to logical stopping points (corners, seams, architectural features, etc.).

E. Apply coatings maintaining a wet edge to desired finish as indicated in FINISHES Article.

F. Protect from wind and rain prior to, during, and for a minimum 24 hours after application.

G. Lime Remover:

1. Brush off visible salt formations (efflorescence).

2. Dampen renovation stucco base coat patches and fills with clean water. When dry to touch

yet still visibly damp, proceed with lime remover.

3. Dilute lime remover l:3 with clean water (l part lime remover to 3 parts clean water.)

4. Apply to Renovation Stucco finish coat surfaces from bottom working to the top. Reaction

is immediate.

5. Rinse treated areas with clean water from bottom to top and back down to prevent loosened

particles from depositing into the surface.

6. Allow surfaces to completely dry out and inspect for salt efflorescence. Should efflorescence

reappear remove with clean water rinsing from bottom of facade to top and back down.

Repeat until efflorescence does not reappear.


Page 7 of 7

H. Water Repellency:

1. Apply to saturation by flooding over substrate.

2. Repeat application after 10 minutes. Wipe excess material from substrate.

3. Observe 4 hours for repellency to penetrate and immediately thereafter begin application of

silicate base coat.

I. Silicate Coating:

1. Base Coat:

Dilute silicate coating with maximum 20 percent dilution (25kg with 5 liters dilution). Stir well

by hand or 600-800 RPM mixing equipment.

2. Apply base coat of diluted silicate coating.

3. Observe minimum 12 hours curing time.

J. Intermediate Coat: Do not dilute. Stir well by hand or 600-800 RPM mixing equipment.

1. Apply intermediate coat of undiluted silicate coating.

2. Observe minimum 12 hours curing time.

K. Top Coat:

Do not dilute. Stir well by hand or 600-800 RPM mixing equipment.

1. Apply top coat of undiluted silicate coating.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Lime Remover: Clean tools with clean water.

B. Water Repellency: Clean tools immediately with benzene or similar solvent.

C. Silicate Coating: Clean tools, spills, and accidental drips immediately with plenty of water.

D. Leave applications clean and premises free from residue and debris from work of this Section.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 099300 – STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING


Page 1 of 7

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and application of wood stains and transparent finishes.

B. Exterior Substrates:

1. Exposed framing.

2. Dressed lumber (finish carpentry or woodwork).

3. Wood-based panel products.

4. Wood decks and stairs.

5. Wood shingles and shakes (excluding roofs).

C. Interior Substrates:

1. Exposed glued-laminated beams and columns.

D. Related Requirements: None

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual (MPI)

B. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to

ASTM D 523.

C. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according

to ASTM D 523.

D. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data:

For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with

the proposed product highlighted.



Page 2 of 7

C. Indicate VOC content.

D. Sustainable Design Submittals:

E. Product Data: For paints and coatings, indicating VOC content.

F. Laboratory Test Reports:

G. For paints and coatings, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials.

H. Samples for Initial Selection:

For each type of product.

I. Samples for Verification:

For each type of finish system and in each color and gloss of finish required.

J. Submit Samples on representative samples of actual wood substrates, 8 inches (200 mm) square.

K. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system.

L. Label each coat of each Sample.

M. Label each Sample for location and application area.

N. Product List:

Cross-reference to finish system and locations of application areas. Use same designations

indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering

for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

B. Stains and Transparent Finishes: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color

applied.


A. Mockups:

Apply mockups of each finish system indicated and each color selected to verify preliminary

selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality

standards for materials and execution.

B. Owner’s Representative will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application

of each type of finish system and substrate.

1. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m).

2. Other Items: Owner’s Representative will designate items or areas required.

C. Final approval of stain color selections will be based on mockups.

1. If preliminary stain color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional

stain colors selected by Owner’s Representative at no added cost to Owner.

http://www.arcomnet.com/sustainable_design.aspx?topic=14



Page 3 of 7


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas.

B. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

C. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Apply finishes only when temperature of surfaces to be finished and ambient air temperatures are

under 95 deg F (35 deg C).

B. Do not apply finishes when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures less than 5 deg F

(3 deg C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces.

C. Do not apply exterior finishes in rain, fog, or mist.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product:

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a product by one of the following:

B. Benjamin Moore & Co.

C. Dunn-Edwards Corporation.

D. Frazee Paint; Comex Group.

E. Glidden Professional.

F. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.

G. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards:

Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved

Products List."

B. Material Compatibility:

C. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates

indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on

testing and field experience.

D. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by manufacturers of

topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

E. Low-Emitting Materials:



Page 4 of 7

F. Interior paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic

Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

G. Stain Colors:

As selected by Owner’s Representative from manufacturer's full range

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for

maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Exterior Wood Substrates:

15 percent, when measured with an electronic moisture meter.

C. Maximum Moisture Content of Interior Wood Substrates:

13 percent, when measured with an electronic moisture meter.

D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes

and primers.

E. Proceed with finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

F. Beginning finish application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural

Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable. If removal

is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection

before surface preparation and finishing.

C. After completing finishing operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items

that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

D. Clean and prepare surfaces to be finished according to manufacturer's written instructions for each

substrate condition and as specified.

E. Remove dust, dirt, oil, and grease by washing with a detergent solution; rinse thoroughly with clean

water and allow to dry. Remove grade stamps and pencil marks by sanding lightly. Remove loose

wood fibers by brushing.

F. Remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial wash formulated for mildew removal and as

recommended by stain manufacturer.

G. Exterior Wood Substrates:

H. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.



Page 5 of 7

I. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.

1. For solid hide stained wood, stain edges and ends after priming.

2. For varnish-coated stained wood, stain edges and ends and prime with varnish. Prime

undersides and backsides with varnish.

J. Countersink stainless steel nails, if used, and fill with putty or plastic wood filler tinted to final color.

Sand smooth when dried.

K. Interior Wood Substrates:

L. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.

M. Apply wood filler paste to open-grain woods, as defined in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification

Manual," to produce smooth, glasslike finish.

N. Sand surfaces exposed to view and dust off.

O. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler.

Sand smooth when dry.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply finishes according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI

Architectural Painting Specification Manual."

B. Use applicators and techniques suited for finish and substrate indicated.

C. Finish surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.

D. Do not apply finishes over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification,

performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

E. Apply finishes to produce surface films without cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush marks, runs,

ropiness, or other surface imperfections.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from

Project site.

B. After completing finish application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered materials by

washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage by cleaning,

repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced

finished wood surfaces.

3.5 EXTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Wood Substrates:



Page 6 of 7

Exposed framing.

B. Solid-Color, Water-Based Stain System MPI EXT 6.2B:

1. Prime Coat: Stain, exterior, water based, solid hide, matching topcoat.

2. Topcoat: Stain, exterior, water based, solid hide, MPI #16.

C. Water-Based Semitransparent Stain System MPI EXT 6.2P:

1. Prime Coat: Stain, exterior, water based, semitransparent, matching topcoat.

2. Topcoat: Stain, exterior, water based, semitransparent.

D. Wood Substrates:

Wood trim, architectural woodwork, doors, windows, wood board siding, and wood fences.

E. Solid-Color, Water-Based Stain System MPI EXT 6.3K:



F. Water-Based Semitransparent Stain System MPI EXT 6.3N:



G. Wood Substrates: Wood-based panel products.

H. Solid-Color, Water-Based Stain System MPI EXT 6.4A:



I. Water-Based Semitransparent Stain System MPI EXT 6.4L:


2. Intermediate Coat: Stain, exterior, water based, semitransparent, matching topcoat.


J. Wood Substrates:

Traffic surfaces including lumber decking and stairs.

K. Deck Stain System MPI EXT 6.5F:

1. Prime Coat: Stain, for exterior wood decks, matching topcoat.

2. Top coat: Stain, for exterior wood decks, MPI #33.



Page 7 of 7

L. Wood Substrates:

Wood shingles and shakes (excluding roofs).

M. Solid-Color, Water-Based Stain System MPI EXT 6.6D:



3.6 INTERIOR WOOD -FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Wood Substrates: Glued-laminated construction.

B. Solid-Color Latex Stain System MPI INT 6.1T:



C. Semitransparent Stain System MPI INT 6.1G:

1. Prime Coat: Stain, semitransparent, matching topcoat.

2. Topcoat: Stain, semitransparent, for interior wood, MPI #90.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 09900 – PAINTING GOVERNMENT OF THE U. S. VIRGIN ISLANDS, DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 10

PART 1 ·GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following:

B. Exposed interior items and surfaces.

C. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming

and surface treatment specified in other Sections.

D. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to

be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a

surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not

schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Owner’s Representative

will select from standard colors and finishes available.

E. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color

coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and

electrical equipment.

F. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and

labels.

G. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:

1. Architectural woodwork and casework.

2. Elevator equipment.

3. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.

4. Light fixtures.

5. Distribution cabinets.

H. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces:

1. Ceiling plenums.

I. Finished metal surfaces include the following:

1. Anodized aluminum

2. Stainless steel

3. Chromium plate


Page 2 of 10

4. Copper

5. Bronze and brass

J. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:

1. Valve and damper operators

2. Linkages

3. Sensing devices

4. Motor and fan shafts

K. Labels:

Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code required

labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

L. Related Sections include the following:

M. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop priming structural steel

N. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal

O. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for shop priming interior architectural

woodwork

P. Division 8 Section "Steel Frames" for shop priming steel doors and frames

Q. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation for gypsum board

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. General:

Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.

B. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85- degree

meter.

C. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60-

degree meter.

D. Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60- degree

meter.

E. Semi-gloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at a

60-degree meter.

F. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60- degree

meter.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:


Page 3 of 10

For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers.

B. Material List:

Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference

specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer’s catalog

number and general classification.

C. Manufacturer's Information:

Provide manufacturer’s technical information, including label analysis and instructions for

handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use.

D. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling

use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).

E. Samples for Verification:

Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions.

F. Qualification Data:

For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their

capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,

names and addresses of Owner’s Representative and owners, and other information specified.


A. Applicator Qualifications:

Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in

material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in service

performance.

B. Source Limitations:

Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same

manufacturer as the finish coats.


A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer’s original, unopened packages and containers

bearing manufacturer’s name and label, and the following information:

B. Product name or title of material

C. Product description (generic classification or binder type)

D. Manufacturer’s stock number and date of manufacture

E. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents

F. Thinning instructions

G. Application instructions

H. Color name and number

I. VOC content


Page 4 of 10

J. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area. Maintain containers

used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

K. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to

ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from

handling, mixing, and application.


A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air

temperatures are below 90°F (32°C).

B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding

air temperatures are below 95°F (35°C).

C. Do not apply paint when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5°F

(3°C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

D. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and

within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in the quantities

described below. Package paint materials in unopened, factory-sealed containers for storage and

identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Owner.

B. Quantity:

Furnish the Owner with a 1-gallon can of each type of finish coat of each color, taken from lots

furnished for the work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products:

B. Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include,

but are not limited to, products listed in the paint schedules.

C. Manufacturers Names:

The following manufacturers are referred to in the paint schedules by use of shortened versions

of their names, which are shown in parentheses:

1. Devoe & Raynolds Co. (Devoe).

2. Fuller-O'Brien Paints (Fuller).

3. Glidden Co. (The) (Glidden).

4. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore).

5. PPG Industries, Inc. (PPG).


Page 5 of 10

6. Pratt & Lambert, Inc. (P & L).

7. Sherwin-Williams Co. (S-W).

8. Martin Seymour Co. (MS).

2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one

another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated

by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Material Quality:

Provide manufacturer’s best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint-

material containers not displaying manufacturer’s product identification will not be acceptable.

C. Proprietary Names:

Use of manufacturer’s proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended

to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of

other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer’s material data and certificates of performance for

proposed substitutions.

D. Colors:

Match colors indicated by reference to manufacturer's color designations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be

performed for compliance with paint application requirements.

B. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving

paint are thoroughly dry.

C. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a

particular area.

D. Coordination of Work:

Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system

for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to

ensure use of compatible primers.

E. Notify the Owner’s Representative about anticipated problems using the materials specified over

substrates primed by others.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General:


Page 6 of 10

Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and

similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible

because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface

preparation and painting.

B. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers

skilled in the trades involved.

C. Cleaning:

Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could

impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.

D. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not

fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

E. Surface Preparation:

Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer’s written instructions for

each particular substrate condition and as specified.

F. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re-prime.

G. Ferrous Metals:

Clean un-galvanized ferrous metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease,

dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods

that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations.

1. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to

requirements of SSPC-SP 10.

2. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before

priming.

3. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush,

clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer

as the shop coat.

H. Galvanized Surfaces:

Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface

contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by

mechanical methods.

I. Materials Preparation:

Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

J. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials

and residue.

K. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during

application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain

material before using.

L. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.


Page 7 of 10

M. Tinting:

Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of

the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide

sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General:

Apply paint according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Use applicators and techniques

best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

B. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules.

C. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to

formation of a durable paint film.

D. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.

E. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector

covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings

in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection.

F. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before

the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture

with prime coat only.

G. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

H. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.

I. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.

J. Scheduling Painting:

Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting

as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.

K. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application method.

Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the

manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's

written instructions, sand between applications.

L. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touch up painted.

M. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until

paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners,

crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

N. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until

paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure,

and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.

O. Application Procedures:


Page 8 of 10

Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer’s

written instructions.

P. Brushes:

Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for the

surface or item being painted.

Q. Rollers:

Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer

for the material and texture required.

R. Spray Equipment:

Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the

material and texture required.

S. Minimum Coating Thickness:

Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturers recommended spreading rate. Provide the

total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer.

T. Mechanical and Electrical Work:

Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and

in occupied spaces.

U. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:

V. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports

W. Equipment supports

X. Accessory items

Y. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:

Z. Conduit and fittings

AA. Prime Coats:

Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the

manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime

coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed

areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to

insufficient sealing.

BB. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes:

Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish,

color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags,

ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.

CC. Transparent (Clear) Finishes:

Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of

laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface

imperfections.

DD. Provide satin finish for final coats.


Page 9 of 10

EE. Completed Work:

Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not

complying with requirements.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Cleanup:

At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint

materials from the site.

B. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by

washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct

damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Owner’s Representative.

B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective

wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.

C. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced

painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA Pl.

3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Ferrous Metal:

Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on shop-

primed items.

B. Semi-gloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer.

1. Primer:

Rust-inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to

achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm).

2. First and Second Coats:

Semi-gloss, exterior, acrylic-latex enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the

manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils (0.066 mm).

3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Gypsum Board:

Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces:

B. Flat Acrylic Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer

C. Primer:

Latex-based, mildew inhibiting interior primer, such as Kilz2 or approved equal, applied at

spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less

than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm).

D. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within the recommended limits.


Page 10 of 10

E. First and Second Coats:

Flat, acrylic-latex-based, interior paint applied at spreading rate recommended by the


F. Ferrous Metal:

Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal:

G. Semi-gloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: One finish coat over an enamel undercoat and a primer

1. Primer:

Quick-drying, rust-inhibitive, alkyd-based or epoxy-metal primer, as recommended by the

manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to

achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).

2. Undercoat:

Alkyd, interior enamel undercoat or semi-gloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel, as recommended

by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the


3. Finish Coat:

Semi-gloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the


H. Zinc-Coated Metal:

Provide the following finish systems over zinc-coated metal:

I. Semi-gloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer

1. Primer:

Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve

a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm).

2. First and Second Coats:

Semi-gloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the


J. Tinting:

Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of

the same material are being applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but

provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL GOVERNMENT OF THE U. S. VIRGIN ISLANDS, DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

SECTION 260500 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS GOVERNMENT OF THE U. S. VIRGIN ISLANDS, DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 7

PART 1 GENERAL



Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following electrical materials and methods:

1. Supporting devices for electrical components

2. Electrical Identification

3. Touchup painting

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General:

Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1

Specification Sections.

B. Product Data for each type of product specified.

C. Samples of color, lettering style, and other graphic representation required for each

identification product for Project.


A. Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation.

B. Listing and Labeling:

Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.

1. The Terms "Listed and Labeled":

As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.

2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications A "Nationally Recognized Testing

Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.


A. Coordinate electrical equipment installation with other building components.

B. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of

construction to allow for electrical installations.

C. Coordinate installing required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured in place

concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.


Page 2 of 7

D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for

efficient flow of the Work.

E. Coordinate connecting electrical service to components furnished under other Sections.

Refer to Division 15.

F. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors where electrical items requiring

access are concealed by finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in

Division 8 Section "Access Doors."

G. Coordinate installing electrical identification after completion of finishing where

identification is applied to field finished surfaces.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.6 SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Channel and angle support systems, hangers, anchors, sleeves, brackets, fabricated items,

and fasteners are designed to provide secure support from the building structure for

electrical components.

1. Material: Stainless steel, except as otherwise indicated

2. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Stainless steel, except as

otherwise indicated

B. Steel channel supports have 9/16-inch (14-mm) diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches

(203 mm) O.C., in at least 1 surface.

1. Fittings and accessories mate and match with channels and are from the same

manufacturer.

C. Nonmetallic Channel and Angle Systems:

Structural grade, factory formed, fiberglass resin channels and angles with 9/16-inch (14-

mm) diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches (203 mm) O.C., in at least 1 surface.

1. Fittings and accessories mate and match with channels or angles and are from the same

manufacturer.

2. Fitting and Accessory Material:

Same as channels and angles, except metal items may be stainless steel.

D. Raceway and Cable Supports:

Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling

trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring steel clamps or "click" type hangers.

E. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit:

Factory fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug for

non-armored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs have number and size of conductor

gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body constructed of malleable iron

casting with hot dip galvanized finish.


Page 3 of 7

F. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.

G. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

H. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel.

2.7 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

A. Manufacturer's Standard Products:

Where more than one type is listed for a specified application, selection is Installer's option,

but provide single type for each application category. Use colors prescribed by ANSI

A13.1, NFPA 70, and these Specifications.

B. Raceway and Cable Labels:

Conform to ANSI Al3.1, Table 3, for minimum size of letters for legend and minimum

length of color field for each raceway or cable size.

1. Type:

Preprinted, flexible, self-adhesive, vinyl. Legend is over-laminated with a clear, weather

and chemical resistant coating.

2. Color: Black legend on orange field

3. Legend: Indicates voltage

C. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables:

Self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 inch wide (0.08 mm thick by 25 mm

wide)

D. Engraved, Plastic Laminated Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates:

Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate punched for mechanical fasteners 1/16-inch

(1.6-mm) minimum thick for signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. em), 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for

larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters on white face.

E. Interior Warning and Caution Signs:

Preprinted, aluminum, baked enamel finish signs, punched for fasteners, with colors,

legend, and size appropriate to the application.

F. Fasteners for Plastic Laminated and Metal Signs:

Self-tapping stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless steel machine screws with nuts

and flat and lock washers.

2.8 TOUCHUP PAINT

A. For Equipment: Provided by equipment manufacturer and selected to match equipment

finish.

B. For Non-Equipment Surfaces: Matching type and color of undamaged, existing adjacent

finish.

C. For Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.


Page 4 of 7

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom where

mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated.

B. Install items level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and

components. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement

of components.

C. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.

D. Give right of way to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING METHODS

A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Stainless steel materials or nonmetallic, U-channel

system components.

B. Dry Locations: Steel materials.

C. Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click type clamp system.

D. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selecting supports.

E. Strength of Supports:

Adequate to carry all present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least 4; 200-lb (90-

kg) minimum design load.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install wires in raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions and NECA's

"Standard of Installation."

B. Conductor Splices:

Keep to the minimum and comply with the following:

1. Install splices and taps that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and

insulation ratings than un-spliced conductors.

2. Use splice and tap connectors that are compatible with conductor material.

C. Connect outlets and components to wiring systems and to ground as indicated and

instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts,

according to equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment

connectors. Where manufacturer's torqueing requirements are not indicated, tighten

connectors and terminals according to tightening requirements specified in UL 486A.

D. Install devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components.


Page 5 of 7

E. Raceway Supports:

Comply with NFPA 70 and the following requirements:

1. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selecting and installing supports.

2. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways.

Provide U bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger

assembly and for securing hanger rods and conduits.

3. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type

hangers.

4. Spare Capacity:

Size supports for multiple conduits so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent minimum

in the future.

5. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable iron pipe hangers or

clamps.

6. Hanger Rods: 1/4-inch (6-mm) diameter or larger threaded steel, except as otherwise

indicated.

7. Spring Steel Fasteners:

Specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing. May be used in lieu of

malleable iron hangers for I-I/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving lighting and

receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to channel

and slotted angle supports.

8. In vertical runs, arrange support so the load produced by the weight of the raceway and

the enclosed conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports, with no weight load

on raceway terminals.

F. Vertical Conductor Supports: Install simultaneously with conductors.

G. Miscellaneous Supports:

Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnects, control

enclosures, pull boxes, junction boxes, transformers, and other devices except where

components are mounted directly to structural features of adequate strength.

H. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be separately

supported, except where used for fixture support; support sheet-metal boxes directly from

the building structure or by bar hangers. Where bar hangers are used, attach the bar to

raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved fastener

not more than 24 inches (610 mm) from the box.

I. Fire stopping:

Apply to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Perform

fire stopping as specified in Division 7 Section "Fire stopping" to reestablish the original

fire resistance rating of the assembly at the penetration.

J. Fastening:


Page 6 of 7

Unless otherwise indicated, securely fasten electrical items and their supporting hardware

to the building structure. Perform fastening according to the following:

1. Fasten by means of wood screws or screw-type nails on wood; toggle bolts on hollow

masonry units; concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or solid masonry; and

by machine screws, welded threaded studs," or spring tension clamps on steel.

2. Threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts

may be used instead of expansion bolts, machine screws, or wood screws.

3. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe

straps, or any other items.

4. In partitions of light steel construction use sheet-metal screws.

5. Select fasteners so the load applied to any fastener does not exceed 25 percent of the

proof test load.

K. Install identification devices where required.

1. Install labels where indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing without

interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

2. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical

identification with corresponding designations indicated on the Contract Documents or

required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout the Project.

3. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily

films before applying.

4. Identify raceways and cables of certain systems with color banding as follows:

a. Bands:

Colored adhesive marking tape. Make each color band 2 inches (51 mm) wide, completely

encircling conduit, and place adjacent bands of 2-color markings in contact, side by side.

b. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot

(15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25 feet (8 m) in congested areas.

c. Colors: As follows:

i. Fire-Alarm System: Red.

ii. Security System: Blue and yellow.

iii. Telecommunications System: Green and yellow.

5. Tag or label power circuits for future connection and circuits in raceways and

enclosures with other circuits. Identify source and circuit numbers in each cabinet, pull

box, junction box, and outlet box. Color coding may be used for voltage and phase

indication.


Page 7 of 7

3.4 TOUCHUP PAINTING

A. Thoroughly clean damaged areas and provide primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit

the degree of damage at each location.

B. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and

application of successive coats.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 260510- COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL GOVERNMENT OF THE U. S. VIRGIN ISLANDS, DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 4

PART 1 GENERAL

1.5 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves for raceways and cables

2. Sleeve seals

3. Grout

4. Common electrical installation requirements

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For sleeve seals

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain

ends

B. Cast Iron Pipe Sleeves:

Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and

integral water stop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel

1. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches ( 1270 mm) and no side

more than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch ( 1.3 mm).

b. For sleeve cross section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches (1270 mm)

and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138

inch (3.5 mm).

2.2 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description:

Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and

raceway or cable.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements

2. Basis of Design Product:

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable product by one of the

following:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.


Page 2 of 4

b. Calpico, Inc.

c. Metraflex Co.

d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

3. Sealing Elements:

EPDM, NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and

number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

4. Pressure Plates:

Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.

5. Connecting Bolts and Nuts:

Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for

each sealing element.

2.3 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage Resistant Grout:

ASTM C 1107, factory packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, no staining,

mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.4 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA l.

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of

unit for wall mounting items.

C. Headroom Maintenance:

If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components

and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment:

Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both

electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate

future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way:

Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wire ways, cable trays, or busways

penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls:

Install sleeves for penetrations unless core drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install

sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.


Page 3 of 4

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Fire Rated Assemblies:

Install sleeves for penetrations of fire rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings

compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide l/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway

or cable, unless indicated otherwise.

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry.

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed

surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire Rated Walls and Floors:

Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for

size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint

Sealants."

J. Fire Rated Assembly Penetrations:

Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable

penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop

materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Fire stopping."

K. Roof Penetration Sleeves:

Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot type flashing units

applied in coordination with roofing work.

L. Aboveground, Exterior Wall Penetrations:

Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to

allow for l-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical

sleeve seals.

M. Underground, Exterior Wall Penetrations:

Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for l-inch (25-mm) annular clear space

between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable

material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve

seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against

pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.4 FIRE STOPPING


Page 4 of 4

A. Apply fire stopping to penetrations of fire rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical

installations to restore original fire resistance rating of assembly. Fire stopping materials and

installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Fire Stopping."

END OF SECTION

SECTION 260519- LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS

AND CABLES GOVERNMENT OF THE U. S. VIRGIN ISLANDS, DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 4

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less

2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less

3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

For each type of product indicated.

B. Field quality control test reports.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories:

Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THW and THHN-THWN.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES



incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.

3. 0-ZJGedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC

4. 3M; Electrical Products Division

5. Tyco Electronics Corp.

B. Description:



Page 2 of 4

Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for

application and service indicated.

2.3 SLEEVES FOR CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel,

plain ends.

B. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of fire stopping

specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Fire stopping."

2.4 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Basis of Design Product:

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or a comparable product by one of the

following:

1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

2. Calpico, Inc.

3. Metraflex Co.

4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

5. Hilti, Inc.

B. Description:

Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and

cable.

1. Sealing Elements:

EPDM, NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and

number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.

3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts:

Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for

each sealing element.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and

larger.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND

WIRING METHODS



Page 3 of 4

A. Service Entrance: Type THW, single conductors in raceway

B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN,

single conductors in raceway

C. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single

conductors in raceway.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use manufacturer approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used

must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended

maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave wire/cable grips that will

not damage cables or raceway.

D. Support cables according to Division 26 Sections "Hangers and Supports for Electrical

Systems."

E. Identify and color code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification

for Electrical Systems."

F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL

486A and UL 486B.

G. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent

or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than un-spliced conductors.

H. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.

I. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply fire stopping to electrical penetrations of fire rated floor and wall assemblies to restore

original fire resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Fire

stopping."


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,

test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.



Page 4 of 4

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

3. Infrared Scanning:

After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an

infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and

equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner.

a. Follow up Infrared Scanning:

Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each splice 11 months after date of Substantial

Completion.

b. Instrument:

Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant

deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

c. Record of Infrared Scanning:

Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results.

Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial

action.

C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used

2. Test results that comply with requirements

3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 260526- GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL

SYSTEMS GOVERNMENT OF THE U. S. VIRGIN ISLANDS, DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 6

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Field quality-control test reports.





B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors:

Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or

authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3

2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8

3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33

4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in

diameter

5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor

6. Bonding Jumper:

Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide

and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

7. Tinned Bonding Jumper:

Tinned copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm)

wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

2.2 CONNECTORS



Page 2 of 6

A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and

combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure type,

with at least two bolts

1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

C. Welded Connectors:

Exothermic welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined

and installation conditions.

2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper clad steel; 3/4-inch by10 feet (19 mm by 3 m) in diameter

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors:

Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG

and larger, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors:

Install bare copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm)

below grade.

C. Isolated Grounding Conductors:

Green colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground,

identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of

green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow.

D. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations:

2. Bolted connectors

3. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated.

4. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors

5. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those

required by NFPA 70:



Page 3 of 6

1. Feeders and branch circuits

2. Lighting circuits

3. Receptacle circuits

4. Single phase motor and appliance branch circuits

5. Three phase motor and appliance branch circuits

6. Flexible raceway runs

7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs

8. Busway Supply Circuits:

9. Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from grounding bus in the switchgear,

switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on bus way.

10. Computer and Rack Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits:

Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch circuit runs from equipment area

power panels and power distribution units.

B. Air Duct Equipment Circuits:

Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct mounted electrical devices operating at

120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical

equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.

C. Water Heater and Heat Tracing Cables:

Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and

heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and

components.

D. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits:

Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding

terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals.

Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or

service, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits:

For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure

from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install

fitting where raceway enters enclosure and install a separate insulated equipment grounding

conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals.

Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or

service, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Signal and Communication Equipment:

For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4

AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to

each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location.



Page 4 of 6

1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets:

Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch (6-by-50-by-300-mm) grounding

bus.

2. Terminal Cabinets:

Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.

3. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures:

Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition

to grounding conductor installed with branch circuit conductors.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors:

Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by

Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain,

impact, or damage.

B. Ground Rods:

Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise

indicated.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise

indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if any.

2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length

from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes,

and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

C. Test Wells:

Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of hand hole. Hand holes are specified in

Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems," and shall be at

least 12 inches (300 mm) deep, with cover.

1. Test Wells:

Install at least one test well for each service, unless otherwise indicated. Install at the ground

rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or

floor.

D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers:

Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through

short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate

any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so

vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.



Page 5 of 6

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect type

connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

E. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe:

Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service

equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect

grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by

bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a

dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting.

Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping:

Use braided type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a

bolted connector.

3. Bond each above ground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff

valve.

F. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts:

Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric

heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to

achieve continuity.


A. Testing Agency:

Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following field tests and

inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been

energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground resistance

level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test

wells.

a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and

without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and

without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground

resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall of potential method according to IEEE 81.

C. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and Less: 5 ohms



Page 6 of 6

2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 to 1000 kVA: 3 ohms

3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than I000 kVA: 3 ohms

4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 2 ohm(s)

D. Excessive Ground Resistance:

If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Owner’s Representative promptly and

include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 260529- HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS GOVERNMENT OF THE U. S. VIRGIN ISLANDS, DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 6

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.

2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.


A. Delegated Design:

Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a

qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported

systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported

equipment and connected systems and components.

D. Rated Strength:

Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed

for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For steel slotted support systems

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the

following:

1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.

2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.

3. Equipment supports

C. Welding certificates


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS Dl.l/Dl.IM, "Structural

Welding Code Steel."


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS


Page 2 of 6

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory fabricated components for

field assembly.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit

b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries

c. ERICO International Corporation

d. GS Metals Corp.

e. Thomas & Betts Corporation

f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.

g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-

4.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating

applied according to MFMA-4.

4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4.

5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices:

Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable

to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit:

Factory fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs

for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number,

size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables

supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,

shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or

their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners:

Threaded steel stud, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension,

shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following:


Page 3 of 6

i. Hilti, Inc.

ii. ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

iii. MKT Fastening, LLC

iv. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit

2. Mechanical Expansion Anchors:

Insert wedge type, stainless steel, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete with tension,

shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which

used.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following:

i. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

ii. Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.

iii. Hilti, Inc.

iv. ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

v. MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts:

Steel or malleable iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with

MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for

attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All steel springhead type

7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description:

Welded or bolted, structural steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported

equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel

shapes and plates.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA I and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical

equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.


Page 4 of 6

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway:

Space supports for EMT and IMC, as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4

inch (6 mm) in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables:

Install trapeze type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can

be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

D. Spring steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-

1/2 inch (38 mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems

above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this

Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods:

In addition to methods described in NECA I, EMT and IMC may be supported by openings

through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies:

Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present

and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for

strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface Mounted Equipment and Components:

Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the

following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts

2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts

3. To Masonry: Approved toggle type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units.

4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners

5. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder actuated driven threaded studs provided with

lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard weight concrete, 4 inches (100

mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for

slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

6. 6. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS Dl.l/Dl.IM, with lock washers

and nuts

7. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws

8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces:


Page 5 of 6

Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,

transformers, and other devices on slotted channel racks attached to substrate.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing

bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site

fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and

elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Dl.l/Dl.IM

3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger

in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters

from edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive strength concrete. Concrete materials,

reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place

Concrete."

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting

drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be

embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup:

Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after

erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with

SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05

mm).

B. Touchup:

Comply with requirements in Division 09 Painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting

of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces:

Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to

comply with ASTM A 780.


Page 6 of 6

END OF SECTION

SECTION 260533- RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS GOVERNMENT OF THE U. S. VIRGIN ISLANDS, DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 7

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

B. See Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for

exterior duct banks and manholes, and underground hand holes, boxes, and utility construction.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wire ways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged cover

enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections,

details, and attachments to other work.






PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1

B. IMC: ANSI C80.6

C. EMT: ANSI C80.3

D. FMC: Zinc coated steel.

E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

F. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquid tight), EMT, and Cable:

NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and

environment in which installed.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886.

2. Fittings for EMT: Steel, compression type

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. ENT: NEMA TC 13

B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, unless otherwise indicated.


Page 2 of 7

C. LFNC: UL 1660

D. Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

E. Fittings for LFNC: UL 5l4B

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.

2. Hoffman.

3. Square D; Schneider Electric

B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type l or 3R, unless


C. Fittings and Accessories:

Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold down straps, end caps, and

other fittings to match and mate with wire ways as required for complete system.

D. Wire way Covers: Screw cover type

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish

2.4 NON-METALLIC WIREWAYS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Hoffman

2. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products

B. Description:

PVC plastic extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap-on cover and

mechanically coupled connections with plastic fasteners.

C. Fittings and Accessories:

Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold down straps, end caps, and

other fittings to match and mate with wire ways as required for complete system.

2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Prime coating, ready for

field painting.


following:

a. Thomas & Betts Corporation


Page 3 of 7

b. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company

c. Wiremold Company; Electrical Sales Division

B. Surface Non-metallic Raceways:

Two-piece construction manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Owner’s

Representative from manufacturer's standard colors.


following:

a. Butler Manufacturing Company; Walker Division

b. Enduro Systems, Inc.; Composite Products Division

c. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems Division

d. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products

e. Panduit Corp.

f. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company

g. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division

2.6 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS l.

B. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB l, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed

cover.

C. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2.

D. Metal Floor Boxes: Cast metal, fully adjustable, rectangular

E. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round

F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS I.

G. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, galvanized, cast iron with

gasketed cover.

H. Hinged Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type l, with continuous hinge cover with flush latch,

unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic

I. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and removable

front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.


Page 4 of 7

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.

3. Key latch to match panelboards.

4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.

5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit

2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit, EMT

3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC

5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R

B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT

2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT

3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit. Includes raceways

in the following locations:

a. Loading dock.

b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units.

c. Mechanical rooms.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT

5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor Driven Equipment):

FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit

7. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable: EMT

8. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, nonmetallic

in damp or wet locations

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size


Page 5 of 7

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2

except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-

water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical

Systems."

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for

communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise

indicated.

H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than l-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main

reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

3. Change from ENT to RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising

above the floor.

I. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration:

Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

J. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not

less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each

end of pull wire.

K. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install as follows:

1. 3/4-Inch (19-mm) Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet

(15m).

2. l-Inch (25-mm) Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet

(23m).


Page 6 of 7

3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway

unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes

or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these

requirements.

L. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them

with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box

with a blank cover plate having a finish like that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway

sealing fittings at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated

spaces.

2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

M. Expansion-Joint Fittings for RNC:

Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located where environmental temperature

change may exceed 30°F (17°C), and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet (7.6 m).

1. Install expansion joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and

quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125°F (70°C) temperature change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155°F (86°C) temperature change

c. c. Indoor Spaces Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125°F

(70°C) temperature change

d. Attics: 135°F (75°C) temperature change

2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of

length of straight run per degree Fahrenheit (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run

per degree Celsius) of temperature change.

3. Install each expansion joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected

according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the

time of installation.

N. Flexible Conduit Connections:

Use maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semi recessed

lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for

transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.

2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

O. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls:

Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block and install box flush with surface of

wall.

P. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.


Page 7 of 7

Q. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply fire stopping to electrical penetrations of fire rated floor and wall assemblies to restore

original fire resistance rating of assembly. Fire stopping materials and installation

requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Fire stopping."

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets

are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 260543- UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL


Page 1 of 10

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 - SUMMARY:

A. This Section includes underground conduits and ducts, duct banks, manholes and other

underground utility structures.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for general requirements for excavation, backfill and

related items for ducts, manholes and hand holes.

2. Division 3 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for cast-in-place concrete requirements.

3. Division 7 Section "Sheet Membrane Waterproofing" for waterproofing of manholes and

hand holes.

4. Division 7 Section "Bituminous Damp proofing" for damp proofing of manholes and hand

holes.

1.2 - DEFINITIONS:

A. Duct Bank:2 or more conduits or another raceway installed underground in the same trench or

concrete envelope.

B. Manhole: An underground utility structure, large enough for a person to enter, connecting with

ducts to afford facilities for installing and maintaining cables.

C. Vault: An underground utility structure, large enough for a person to enter, connecting with

ducts to afford facilities for installing, operating, and maintaining equipment and wiring.

1.3 - SUBMITTALS:

A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1


B. Product data for metal accessories for manholes and hand holes, conduit and duct, duct bank

materials, and miscellaneous components.

C. Shop drawings showing details and design calculations for precast manholes and hand holes,

including reinforcing steel. Stamp drawings with seal of registered professional structural

engineer.

D. Certificate for concrete and steel used in underground precast concrete utility structures,

according to ASTM C 858.

E. Inspection report for factory inspections, according to ASTM C 1037.

F. Coordination drawings showing duct profiles and coordination with other utilities and

underground structures. Include plans and sections drawn to accurate scale.



Page 2 of 10

G. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project

names, addresses, names of Owner’s Representative and Owner, and other information

specified.

H. Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance with

performance requirements of "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3 of this Section.

I. Record Documents: Show dimensioned locations of underground ducts, hand holes, and

manholes.

1.4 - QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing underground precast

concrete utility structures of types and sizes required and similar to those indicated for this

Project. Firm must have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" and ANSI C2 "National Electrical Safety

Code" for components and installation.

C. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the "National Electrical Code," Article

100.

2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing


D. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, manholes, and hand holes with final arrangement

of other utilities as determined in the field.

E. Coordinate elevations of duct bank entrances into manholes with final profiles of conduits as

determined by coordination with other utilities and underground obstructions. Revise locations

and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and ensure duct runs

drain to manholes, and as approved by the Owner’s Representative.

1.5 - DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

A. Deliver ducts to site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to prevent

bending, warping and deforming.

B. Store precast concrete units at site as recommended by manufacturer to prevent physical

damage. Arrange so identification markings are visible.

C. Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 - MANUFACTURERS:



Page 3 of 10

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

the specified products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the

following:

1. Precast Division; Carder Concrete Products.

2. Christy Concrete Products, Inc.

3. Elmhurst-Chicago Stone Co.

4. Riverton Concrete Products.

5. A. Rotondo & Sons, Inc.

6. Rotondo/Penn-Cast, Inc.

7. Smith-Midland Corp.

8. Utility Vault Co.

9. Wausau Concrete Co.

B. Frames and Covers:

1. Campbell Foundry Co.

2. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc.

3. McKinley Iron Works, Inc.

4. Neenah Foundry Co.

C. Nonmetallic Ducts:

1. Arnco Corp.

2. Breeze-Illinois, Inc.

3. CANTEX, Inc.

4. Carlon; Lamson & Sessions Company.

5. Pipe and Plastic Group; Certainteed Products Corp.

6. Cole-Flex Corp.

7. Electri-Flex Co.

8. Spiraduct, Inc.

2.2 - CONDUIT AND DUCT:

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1, galvanized.



Page 4 of 10

B. Plastic-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit and Fittings: NEMA RN 1.

C. Rigid Plastic Conduit: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 PVC, rated for use with 90 deg C conductors

under all installation conditions.

D. PVC Conduit and Tubing Fittings: NEMA TC 3.

E. Rigid Plastic Underground Conduit: UL 651A, Type EB PVC.

2.3 - UNDERGROUND PRECAST CONCRETE UTILITY STRUCTURES:

A. Precast Units: Interlocking, mating sections, complete with accessory items, hardware, and

features as indicated. Include concrete knockout panels for conduit entrance and sleeve for

ground rod.

B. Design structure according to ASTM C 858.

C. Structural Design Loading: ASTM C 857, Class A-16.

D. Fabricate according to ASTM C 858.

E. Joint Sealant: Continuous extrusion of asphaltic butyl material with adhesion, cohesion,

flexibility, and durability properties necessary to withstand the maximum hydrostatic pressures

at the installation location with the ground water level at grade.

F. Source Quality Control: Inspect structures according to ASTM C 1037.

2.4 - ACCESSORIES:

A. Duct Supports: Rigid PVC spacers selected to provide minimum duct spacings and concrete

cover depths indicated, while supporting ducts during concreting.

B. Frames and Covers: Cast iron with cast-in legend “ELECTRIC.” Machine cover-to-frame

bearing surfaces.

C. Sump Frame and Grate: Comply with FS RR-F-621, Type VII for frame and Type I for cover.

D. Pulling Eyes in Walls: Eyebolt with reinforcing bar fastening insert. 2-inch (50 mm) diameter

eye, 1-inch (25 mm) by 4-inch (100 mm) bolt. Working load embedded in 6-inch (150 mm),

4000 psi (27.6MPa) concrete: 13,000 pounds minimum tension.

E. Pulling and Lifting Irons in Floor: 7/8 inch-diameter (21 mm), hot-dipped galvanized, bent

steel rod, stress relieved after forming, and fastened to reinforced rod. Exposed triangular

opening. Ultimate yield strength: 40,000 pounds shear and 60,000 pounds tension.

F. Bolting Inserts for Cable Stanchions: Flared, threaded inserts of noncorrosive, chemical

resistant, nonconductive thermoplastic material; 1/2-inch (12 mm) internal diameter by 2-3/4

inches (68 mm) deep, flared to 1-1/4-inch (30 mm) minimum at base. Tested ultimate pull-out

strength: 12,000 pounds minimum.



Page 5 of 10

G. Expansion Anchors for Installation After Concrete is Cast: Zinc-plated carbon steel wedge

type with stainless-steel expander clip 1/2-inch (12 mm) bolt size, 5300-pound rated pull-out

strength, and 6800- pound rated shear strength minimum.

H. Cable Stanchions: Hot-rolled, hot-dipped galvanized "T" section steel, 2-1/4-inch (56 mm)

size, punched with 14 holes on 1-1/2-inch (35 mm) centers for cable arm attachment.

I. Cable Arms: 3/16-inch (5 mm) thick hot-rolled, hot-dipped galvanized sheet steel pressed to

channel shape, approximately two 12 inches (300 mm) wide by 14 inches (350 mm) long and

arranged for secure mounting in horizontal position at any position on cable stanchions.

J. Cable Support Insulators: High glaze, wet-process porcelain arranged for mounting on cable

arms.

K. Ground Rods: Solid copper clad steel, 3/4-inch (18 mm) diameter by 10-feet (3 m) length.

L. Ground Wire: Stranded bare copper, No. 6 AWG minimum.

M. Ladder: UL-listed, non-metallic, specifically designed for electrical manhole use. Minimum

length equal to the distance from the deepest manhole floor to grade. Ladder shall be

permanently installed in manhole.

N. Raceway Sealing Compound: Non-hardening, safe for human skin contact, not deleterious to

cable insulation, workable at temperatures as low as 35 degrees F (1 degrees C), withstands

temperature of 300 degrees F (149 degrees C) without slump, and adheres to clean surfaces of

plastic ducts, metallic conduits, conduit coatings, concrete, masonry, lead, cable sheaths, cable

jackets, insulation materials, and the common metals.

2.5 - CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS:

A. Damp proofing: Conform to Division 7 Section "Bituminous Damp proofing."

B. Waterproofing: Conform to Division 7 Section "Sheet Membrane Waterproofing."

C. Brick: Conform to ASTM C 55, concrete brick Type I, Grade N.

D. Mortar: Conform to ASTM C 270, Type M, except for quantities less than 2.0 cu. foot (60 L),

where packaged mix complying with ASTM C 387, Type M may be used.

E. Concrete: Conform to Division 3 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for concrete and

reinforcing.

1. Strength: 4000 psi (20.7 MPa) minimum 28-day compressive strength.

2. Aggregate For Duct Encasement: 3/8 inch (10 mm) maximum size.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 - APPLICATION:

A. Underground Ducts For Electrical Utility Service: Plastic conduit encased in “RED” colored

concrete.



Page 6 of 10

B. Manholes: Underground precast concrete utility structures.

3.2 - EXAMINATION:

A. Examine site to receive ducts and manholes for compliance with installation tolerances and

other conditions affecting performance of the underground ducts and manholes. Do not

proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 - EARTHWORK:

A. Excavation and Backfill: Conform to Division 31 Section "Earthwork," but do not use heavy-

duty, hydraulic-operated compaction equipment.

B. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades except

as otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod as soon as possible after backfilling is completed.

Restore all areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore

vegetation and include necessary top soiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging,

or mulching. Perform according to Division 32 Section "Exterior Improvements,"

C. Warning Tape: Tape specifically manufactured for marking and locating underground utilities.

Tape shall be polyethylene film, 6 inches wide, 0.004 inches thick and a minimum strength of

1,750 psi. Tape shall carry continuous inscription naming the specific utility. Color shall be:

1. Electric – Red

D. Tape for nonmetallic utility lines shall have foil backing or wires sufficient for detection by

metal detector to a depth of 3 feet. Tape to be run continuously from manhole to manhole and

have 3 feet slack rolled up at each end.

E. Restore disturbed paving. Refer to "Cutting and Patching" in Division 32 Section "Exterior

Improvements".

3.4 - CONDUIT AND DUCT INSTALLATION:

A. Install nonmetallic conduit and duct as indicated according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Slope: Pitch ducts minimum of 4 inches per 100 feet (1:300) to drain toward manholes away

from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between 2 manholes to

drain in both directions.

C. Curves and Bends: Use manufactured elbows for stub-ups at equipment and at building

entrances. Use manufactured long sweep bends. Use only factory fittings for elbows, bends

or offsets. Field bending is not permitted. Risers to grade to be PVC coated steel elbows.

D. Make joints in ducts and fittings watertight according to manufacturer's instructions. Stagger

couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in the same plane.



Page 7 of 10

E. Duct entrances to Manholes and Handholes: Space end bells approximately 12 inches (250

mm) on center for 6-inch ducts and varied proportionately for other duct sizes. Change from

regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet (3 m) from the end bell without reducing duct line

slope and without forming a trap in the line. Grout end bells into manhole walls from both

sides to provide watertight entrances.

F. Building Entrances: Transition from underground duct to conduit 10 feet (3 m) minimum

outside the building wall. Use fittings manufactured for the purpose. Follow appropriate

installation instructions below.

1. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Install reinforcing in duct banks passing through disturbed earth

near buildings and other excavations. Coordinate duct bank with structural design to

support duct bank at wall without reducing structural or watertight integrity of building

wall.

2. Waterproofed Wall and Floor Entrances: Install a watertight entrance-sealing device with

the sealing gland assembly on the inside. Anchor device into masonry construction with 1

or more integral flanges. Secure membrane waterproofing to the device to make

permanently watertight.

G. Concrete-Encased Nonmetallic Ducts: Support on plastic separators coordinated with duct size

and required duct spacing, and install according to the following:

1. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of

ducts, and secure separators to the earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting.

Do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around

ducts or duct groups.

2. Concreting: Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between

conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not use power-driven agitating equipment

unless specifically designed for duct bank application. Pour each run of envelope between

manholes or other terminations in 1 continuous operation. When more than one pour is

necessary, terminate each pour in a vertical plane and install 3/4-inch (18 mm) reinforcing

rod dowels extending 18 inches (450 mm) into the concrete on both sides of joint near the

corners of the envelope.

3. Reinforcing: Reinforce duct banks where they cross disturbed earth and where indicated.

4. Forms: Use the walls of the trench to form the side walls of the duct bank where the soil is

self- supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions, otherwise,

use forms.

5. Minimum Clearances Between Ducts: 3 inches between ducts and exterior envelope wall,

2 inches between ducts for like services, and 4 inches between power and signal ducts.

6. Depth: Except as otherwise indicated, install top of duct bank at least 36 inches below

finished grade.



Page 8 of 10

H. Stub-Ups: Use rigid steel conduit for stub-ups to equipment. For equipment mounted on

outdoor concrete pads, extend steel conduit a minimum of 5 feet (1.5 m) from edge of pad.

Install insulated grounding bushings on the terminations. Couple steel conduits to the ducts

with adapters designed for the purpose and then encase coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of

concrete.

I. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that are wired under this Project.

Seal spare ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15 psi

hydrostatic pressure.

1. Provide nylon pull string with printed footage indicators having not less than 200 pounds

tensile strength. Leave not less than 12 inches of slack at each end of the pull string. Identify

with tags at each end the origin and destination of each empty conduit and indicate same

on all empty or spare conduits on the as-built drawings.

J. Pulling Cord: Install 100-pound-test nylon cord in ducts, including spares.

K. Install raceway sealing fittings in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions.

Locate fittings at suitable, approved, accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing

compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover

plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing

fittings at the following points and elsewhere as indicated:

1. Where conduits enter through a foundation wall or stub-up through a slab on grade floor.

2. Where required by the NEC.

L. Install raceway/duct sealing compound inside of all underground raceways that stub into a

building through a foundation wall or through a slab on grade floor.

3.5 - UNDERGROUND UTILITY STRUCTURE INSTALLATION:

A. Elevation: Install manholes with roof top at least 15 inches below finished grade.

B. Drainage: Install drains in bottom of units where indicated. Arrange to coordinate with

drainage provisions indicated or specified.

C. Access: Install cast-iron frame and cover. For manholes, use 30-inch cover except as indicated.

Install brick chimney to support frame and cover and to connect cover with roof opening.

Provide moisture- tight masonry joints and waterproof grouting for cast-iron frame to chimney.

Set frames in paved areas and traffic ways flush with finished grade.

D. Waterproofing: Apply waterproofing to exterior surfaces of units. Apply according to

Division 7 Section "Sheet Membrane Waterproofing." After ducts have been connected and

grouted, and prior to backfilling, waterproof joints and connections and touch up abrasions and

scars. Waterproof exterior of manhole chimneys after brick mortar has cured at least 3 days.

E. Hardware: Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms,

and insulators, as required for installation and support of cable and conductors and as indicated.



Page 9 of 10

F. Hardware: Furnish removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms,

and insulators, for installation under another Contract. For each manhole furnish 1 stanchion

for each 30 linear inches of interior floor perimeter. In addition, furnish 1 arm for each

stanchion, 3 insulators for each arm, and a total of 3 pulling eyes. Furnish materials complete

with associated fasteners, packaged with protective covering for storage and with identification

labels clearly describing contents.

G. Field-Installed Bolting Anchors: Do not drill deeper than 3-7/8 inches (96 mm) for anchor

bolts installed in the field. Use a minimum of 2 anchors for each cable stanchion.

H. Grounding: Install ground rod through floor in each structure with top protruding 4 inches

above floor. Seal the floor opening against water penetration with waterproof non-shrink

grout. Ground exposed metal components and hardware with bare copper ground conductor.

Train conductors neatly around corners. Install on walls and roof using cable clamps secured

with expansion anchors.

I. Precast Concrete Underground Structure Installation: Install as indicated, according to

manufacturer's written instructions and ASTM C 891.

1. Install units plumb and level and with orientation and depth coordinated with arrangement

of connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

2. Support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from the 1-inch sieve to the

No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

3.6 - FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Testing: Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements upon completion of

installation of underground duct and utility structures.

1. Grounding: Test manhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of bonding and

grounding connections. Measure ground resistance at each ground rod and report results.

Use an instrument specifically designed for ground-resistance measurements.

2. Duct Integrity: Rod ducts with a ball type mandrel 1/4 inch smaller in diameter than internal

diameter of ducts. Where rodding indicates obstructions in ducts, remove the obstructions

and retest. The Contractor shall notify prior to commencing integrity testing to request

observation of procedures.

3. Water Tightness: Make internal inspection of manholes 3 months after completion of

construction for indications of water ingress. Where leakage is noted, remove water and

seal leak sources. Reinspect after 2 months and reseal remaining leak sources. Repeat

process at 2-month intervals until leaks are corrected.

B. Correct installations where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance. Otherwise, remove

and replace defective products and retest.

3.7 - CLEANING:

A. Pull brush through full lengths of ducts. Use round bristle brush with a diameter 1/2 inch

greater than internal diameter of duct.



Page 10 of 10

B. Clean internal surfaces of manholes including sump. Remove foreign material.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 260548- VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS GOVERNMENT OF THE U. S. VIRGIN ISLANDS, DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 9

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Isolation pads

2. Spring isolators

3. Restrained spring isolators

4. Channel support systems

5. Restraint cables

6. Hanger rod stiffeners

7. Anchorage bushings and washers

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for commonly used

electrical supports and installation requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The IBC: International Building Code

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service


A. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: D

2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC:

a. Occupancy Category: IV

b. Seismic Design Category: D

c. Component Importance Factor: 1.5

d. Component Response Modification Factor: 2.5

e. Component Amplification Factor: 1.5 for fixed equipment. 2.5. for flexible components


Page 2 of 9

3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): 1.1%

4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period: 1.8%


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation

device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type

and size of seismic-restraint component used.

a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated

strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with

requirements.

3. Restrained Isolation Devices: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.

B. Delegated Design Submittal:

For vibration isolation and seismic restraint details indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified

professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations:

Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operation, seismic forces

required to select vibration isolators and seismic restraints.

a. Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for equipment

mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other electrical Sections for

equipment mounted outdoors.

2. Indicate materials and dimensions and identify hardware, including attachment and

anchorage devices.

3. Field fabricated supports

4. Seismic Restraint Details:

a. Design Analysis:

To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined

tensile and shear loads.

b. Details:

Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items

and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacing. Identify components,

list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure

during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.


Page 3 of 9

c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation:

By an evaluation service member of ICC-ES acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,

showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).


A. Coordination Drawings:

Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with other systems and

equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency

C. Field quality control test reports


A. Comply with seismic restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are

more stringent.

B. Seismic restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall

bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or

preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing

maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to

ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on

independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads)

to support seismic restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional

engineer.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS




1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc.

2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.

3. California Dynamics Corporation

4. Isolation Technology, Inc.

5. Kinetics Noise Control

6. Mason Industries

7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.

8. Vibration Isolation


Page 4 of 9

9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

B. Pads:

Arrange in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area,

molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that

match requirements of supported equipment.

1. Resilient Material: Oil and water-resistant neoprene.

C. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open spring isolators

1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring

at rated load

2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load

3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness

4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

5. Baseplates:

Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to I/4-inch (6-mm) thick, rubber isolator pad

attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig (3447 kPa).

6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt:

Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment.

D. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open spring isolators with seismic or limit-

stop restraint.

1. Housing:

Steel with resilient vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being

removed; factory drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch (6-mm) thick, neoprene or rubber

isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling

bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

2. Restraint: Seismic or limit-stop as required for equipment and authorities having

jurisdiction.

3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring

at rated load.

4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.

5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.



2.2 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES



Page 5 of 9



1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.

2. California Dynamics Corporation

3. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries

4. Hilti Inc.

5. Loos & Co.; Seismic Earthquake Division

6. Mason Industries

7. TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC.

8. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.

B. General Requirements for Restraint Components:

Rated strengths, features, and application requirements shall be as defined in reports by an

evaluation service member of ICC-ES acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Structural Safety Factor:

Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four

times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

C. Channel Support System:

MFMA-3, shop or field fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with

accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other

end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension,

compression, and torsion forces.

D. Restraint Cables:

ASTM A 492 stainless-steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with

thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with a

minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

E. Hanger Rod Stiffener:

Steel tube or steel slotted support system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger

rod. Do not weld stiffeners to rods.

F. Bushings for Floor Mounted Equipment Anchor:

Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings and matched to type and size of

anchors and studs.

G. Bushing Assemblies for Wall Mounted Equipment Anchorage:

Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings and

matched to type and size of attachment devices.

H. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil and water-resistant

neoprene, with a flat washer face.


Page 6 of 9

I. Mechanical Anchor:

Drilled in and stud wedge or female wedge type in zinc coated steel for interior applications

and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchors with strength required for anchor

and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter.

J. Adhesive Anchor:

Drilled in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane methacrylate-based resin

and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and

hardware with zinc coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior

applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to

ASTM E 488.

2.3 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime coat finish ready for field painting.

B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory assembled and tested equipment

before shipping.

1. Powder coating on springs and housings

2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Stainless steel components for exterior use.

3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.

4. Color code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic control devices to indicate

capacity range.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic control devices for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting

performance.

B. Examine roughing in of reinforcement and cast in place anchors to verify actual locations

before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Raceways or Cables:

Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an

evaluation service member of ICC-ES acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners:

Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and

where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic Restraint Assemblies:


Page 7 of 9

Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present

and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.

3.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Equipment and Hanger Restraints:

1. Install restrained isolators on electrical equipment.

2. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between

anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

3. Install seismic restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member

of ICC-ES acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for

component.

B. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall mounted equipment, arranged to provide

resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

C. Attachment to Structure:

If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper

truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

D. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for

anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling.

Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered

during drilling. Locate and avoid pre-stressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications

conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full

design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors:

Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy duty sleeve anchors shall be

installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors:

Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place

adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in

such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.

6. Install zinc coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior

applications.

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION


Page 8 of 9

A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wire ways, cable trays, and busways

where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different

structural elements, and where they terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored

to a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and

prepare test reports.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Schedule test with Owner, through Owner’s Representative, before connecting anchorage

device to restrained component (unless post connection testing has been approved), and

with at least seven days' advance notice.

3. Obtain Owner’s Representative approval before transmitting test loads to structure.

Provide temporary load spreading members.

4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by

Owner’s Representative.

5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.

6. Measure isolator restraint clearance.

7. Measure isolator deflection.

8. Verify snubber minimum clearances.

9. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory results

are achieved.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after isolated equipment is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating

height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact

during normal operation.

C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.

D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.


Page 9 of 9

END OF SECTION

SECTION 260553- IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS GOVERNMENT OF THE U. S. VIRGIN ISLANDS, DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 7

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways

2. Identification of power and control cables

3. Identification for conductors

4. Underground line warning tape

5. Warning labels and signs

6. Instruction signs

7. Equipment identification labels

8. Miscellaneous identification products

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.


A. Comply with ANSI Al3.1.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks

used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI Al3.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of

color field for each raceway size.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather and chemical resistant coating and

matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C. Snap Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

Slit, pre-tensioned, flexible, preprinted, color coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit

diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.


Page 2 of 7

D. Snap Around, Color Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

Slit, pre-tensioned, flexible, solid colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter

sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

E. Write On Tags:

Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion resistant grommet and cable tie for

attachment to conductor or cable.

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag

manufacturer.

2.2 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of

color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels:


matching wrap around adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C. Write On Tags:

Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion resistant grommet and cable tie for


1. Marker for Tags:

Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.

D. Snap Around Labels:

Slit, pre-tensioned, flexible, preprinted, color coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit

diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

E. Snap Around, Color Coding Bands:

Slit, pre-tensioned, flexible, solid colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter

sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

2.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color Coding Conductor Tape:

Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tapes not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to

50 mm) wide.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels:


matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C. Marker Tapes:

Vinyl or vinyl cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine

printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

D. Write On Tags:

Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for



Page 3 of 7

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag

manufacturer.

2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels:

Factory printed, multicolor, pressure sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front

cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.

C. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Warning Signs:

1. Preprinted Dual Color Routed HDPE signs punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors,

legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.

3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm).

D. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning:

"DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER

SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning:

"WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)."

2.5 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Routed, Dual Color HDPE, minimum 1/2-inch-thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches (129 sq. m)

and 3/4-inch-thick for larger sizes.

1. Routed legend with black letters on white face.

2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.

3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint:

Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and application

requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or

interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs:

Self-tapping, stainless steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock

washers.

PART 3 EXECUTION


Page 4 of 7

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Location:

Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without

interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

B. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

C. Self-Adhesive Identification Products:

Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer

of identification device.

D. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners

appropriate to the location and substrate.

E. System Identification Color Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables:

Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of

two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at

penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at

25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas.

F. Underground Line Warning Tape:

During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground line warning tape directly above

line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of

multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm)

overall.

G. Painted Identification:

Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface preparation and paint

application.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Accessible Raceways and Metal Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch

Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground:

Install labels at 10-foot (3-m) maximum intervals.

B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings:

Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive

vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as

follows:

1. Emergency Power

2. Power

3. UPS

C. Power Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less:

For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and hand holes, use color-coding

conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less:


Page 5 of 7

Use colors listed below for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if

authorities having jurisdiction permit.

b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

i. Phase A: Black

ii. Phase B: Red

iii. Phase C: Blue

c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

i. Phase A: Brown

ii. Phase B: Orange

iii. Phase C: Yellow

D. Install instructional sign including the color code for grounded and ungrounded conductors

using adhesive film type labels.

E. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future:

Attach write on tags or marker tape to conductors and list source.

F. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification:

Identify field installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull

points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by

manufacturer for factory installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the

Operation and Maintenance Manual.

G. Locations of Underground Lines:

Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control

wiring and optical fiber cable.

1. Install underground line warning tape for both direct buried cables and cables in raceway.

H. Workspace Indication:

Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts.

Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CPR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated.

Do not install at flush mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

I. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-

adhesive warning labels

1. Comply with 29 CPR 1910.145.


Page 6 of 7

2. Identify system voltage with black letters and an orange background.

3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.

4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment

including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches

b. Controls with external control power connections

J. Operating Instruction Signs:

Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and

items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions

are needed for system or equipment operation.

K. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs:

Install instruction signs with white legend and a red background with minimum 3/8-inch (10-

mm) high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer.

L. Equipment Identification Labels:

On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring

diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect

switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations,

terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control,

communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its

own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment:

Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated,

provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch (13-mm) high letters on 1-l/2-inch (38-mm) high

label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for

viewing from the floor.

d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate

mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards:

Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panel board manufacturer. Panel

board identification shall be self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets

c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items


Page 7 of 7

d. Switchgear

e. Switchboards

f. Emergency system boxes and enclosures

g. Enclosed switches

h. Enclosed circuit breakers

i. Enclosed controllers

j. Variable-speed controllers

k. Push-button stations

l. Power transfer equipment

m. Contactors

n. Power-generating units

o. Monitoring and control equipment

p. UPS equipment

END OF SECTION

SECTION 260923- LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES


Page 1 of 6

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Occupancy and Vacancy Sensor Control


1. Section 262416 - Panelboards

2. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices: Lighting Controls

3. Section 265100 - Interior Lighting Fixtures, Lamps and Ballasts:

Fluorescent lighting ballasts controlled by central dimming control system.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute/Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

(ANSI/IEEE):

1. C62.41-l991 -Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power

Circuits.

B. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. D4674-02a Standard Test Method for Accelerated Testing for Color Stability of Plastics

Exposed to Indoor Fluorescent Lighting and Window-Filtered Daylight.

C. International Electro-Technical Commission (IEC).

1. IEC 801-2 Electrostatic Discharge Testing Standard.

2. IEC/EN 60669-2-l Switches for household and similar fixed electrical installations-

electronic switches.

D. International Organization for Standardization (ISO):

1. 900l:2000- Quality Management Systems.

E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

1. WD1 (R2005) - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices.

F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. 94 - Flammability Rating

2. 916 - Energy Management Equipment.

3. 508 (2005) - Standard for Industrial Control Equipment.



Page 2 of 6

4. 244A- Appliance Controls

5. 935 (2005) - Fluorescent Ballasts


A. Permanently installed

1. Ceiling mounted occupancy sensors

2. Wall switch occupancy sensors

3. Power packs


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light level sensors.

C. Interconnection diagrams showing field installed wiring.

D. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Field quality control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data:

For each type of lighting control device to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance

manuals.


A. Manufacturer: Minimum 10 years’ experience in manufacture of architectural lighting

controls.

B. Manufacturer's Quality System:

Registered to ISO 9001:2000 Quality Standard, including in-house engineering for product

design activities.


A. Do not install equipment until following conditions can be maintained in spaces to receive

equipment:

1. Ambient temperature: Under 40 degrees C (104 degrees F).

2. Relative humidity: Maximum 90 percent, non-condensing.

3. Lighting control system must be protected from dust during installation.



Page 3 of 6

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer's 1-year parts warranty.

B. Maintenance Material submittals

C. Make ordering of new equipment for expansions, replacements, and spare parts available to

end user.

D. Make new replacement parts available for minimum of ten years from date of manufacture.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


Lutron Occupancy Sensors. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Bryant Electric; a Hubbell company

2. Cooper Industries, Inc.

3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc.

4. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.

5. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.

6. Sensor Switch, Inc.

7. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

8. Watt Stopper.

2.2 GENERAL

A. Provide system software and hardware that is designed, tested, manufactured, and warranted

by a single manufacturer.

B. Architectural Lighting Controls:

Ten-year operational life while operating continually at any temperature in an ambient

temperature range of 0°C (32°F) to 40°C (104°F) and 90 percent non-condensing relative

humidity.

C. Designed and tested to withstand discharges without impairment of performance when

subjected to discharges of 15,000 volts per IEC 801-2.

2.3 SENSOR PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Sensing mechanism:

1. Dual technology:



Page 4 of 6

a. Utilize multiple segmented lens, with internal grooves to eliminate dust and residue

buildup.

b. Utilize an operating frequency of 32k Hz or 40 kHz that shall be crystal controlled to

operate within plus or minus 0.005 percent tolerance.

B. Field adjustable controls for time delay and sensitivity to override any adaptive features.

C. Power failure memory:

1. Controls incorporate non-volatile memory. Should power be interrupted and subsequently

restored, settings and learned parameters saved in protected memory shall not be lost.

D. Designed and tested to withstand discharges without impairment of performance when

subjected to discharges of 15,000 volts per IEC 801-2.

2.4 WIRED CEILING AND WALL MOUNT SENSORS

A. Product: LOS-CDT-500R-WH, LOS-CDT-IOOOR-WH, LOS-CDT-2000R-WH.

B. Provide all necessary mounting hardware and instructions.

C. Sensors shall be Class 2 devices.

D. Indicate viewing directions on mounting bracket for all Ceiling mount sensors.

E. Provide customizable mask to block off unwanted viewing areas for all ceiling mounted

sensors using infrared technology.

F. Provide swivel mount base for all wall mount sensors.

G. Provide an internal additional isolated relay with Normally Open, Normally Closed and

Common outputs for use with HVAC control, Data Logging and other control options.

2.5 IN-WALL OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Digital wall box no-neutral switch with occupancy/vacancy sensor

1. Product: MS-OPS6M-DV

2. Switch shall be rated at 120/277 Volts 6 amps Lighting / 120 Volts 3 amps Fan Loads and

shall not require a neutral connection in wall box.

a. Rated life: Minimum 100,000 cycles.

b. Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when power is

applied to load circuits.

c. Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads.

3. Utilize Infrared as its sensing mechanism coupled with Lutron XCT™ Technology for

sensing fine motions. Signal processing technology detects fine motion, passive infrared

(PIR) signals without the need to change the sensor's sensitivity threshold.



Page 5 of 6

4. Occupancy/vacancy sensor can be programmed to operate as an occupancy sensor

(automatic-on and automatic-off functionality) or a vacancy sensor (manual-on and

automatic-off functionality).

5. Provide adjustable timeout for 15, 30 minutes.

6. Provide ambient light sensor to prevent lights from turning on automatically if ambient light

in room is higher than selected setting. Three settings shall be available to for selection by

the user.

7. Provide ability when switch is manually turned off, to prevent sensor from turning lights

back on automatically while room remains occupied. Once room is vacated, auto-on

feature returns to normal operation after timeout duration has exhausted.

8. Utilize air gap off, activated when user selects "off' at any control to disconnect the load

from line supply eliminating any leakage current.

9. Protect your switch from power surges during a storm or from other equipment from within

the building.

10. Design and test switches to withstand line-side surges without impairment to performance

when subjected to surges of 6,000 volts, 200 amps per ANSI/IEEE C62.41 C.

11. This ensures product design lifetime under all installation conditions. For example,

products which are not de-rated when installed in a multi-gang installation may experience

a reduced design lifetime because of an increased temperature rise.

12. Capable of operating at the rated capacity; this includes modified capacities for ganging

configurations which require the removal of fins. Operation at rated capacity shall be

possible across the full ambient temperature range, without shortening design lifetime.

13. Provide frequency compensation to assure switching capability on 50 or 60Hz lines.

14. Switches to be listed to UL 20, UL 508, ULI472, CSA C22.2 #14, NOM-003-SCFI

2.6 SENSOR POWER PACKS

A. Product: PP-277H

B. Plenum rated.

C. Control wiring between sensors and control units shall be Class 2, 18-24 AWG, stranded U.L.

Classified, TEFLON jacketed cable suitable for use in plenums.

D. Integrated, self-contained unit consisting internally of an isolated load switching control relay

and a power supply to provide low-voltage power (PP-SH does not supply power).

2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform full-function testing on 100 percent of all system components and panel assemblies at

the factory.



Page 6 of 6

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Provide complete installation of system in accordance with Contract Documents.

C. Provide equipment at locations and in quantities indicated on Drawings. Provide any

additional equipment required to provide control intent.

3.2 SERVICE AND SUPPORT

A. Startup and Programming

1. Provide factory-certified field service engineer to a site visit to ensure proper system

installation and operation under following parameters:

a. Qualifications for factory-certified field service engineer:

i. Minimum experience of 2 years training in the electrical/electronic field.

ii. Certified by the equipment manufacturer on the system installed.

b. Make a visit upon completion of installation of lighting control system:

i. Verify connection and location of controls.

ii. Verify system operation control by control, zone by zone.

iii. Verify proper integration of manufacturers interfacing equipment.

iv. Obtain sign-off on system functions.

B. Tech Support

1. Provide factory direct technical support hotline 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.

3.3 MAINTENANCE

A. Capable of providing on-site service support within 24 hours anywhere in continental United

States and within 72 hours worldwide except where special visas are required.

B. Offer renewable service contract on yearly basis, to include parts, factory labor, and annual

training visits. Make service contracts available up to ten years after date of system startup.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS


Page 1 of 7

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch-circuit

panelboards.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed

devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.

3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.

4. Short-circuit current rating of panel boards and overcurrent protective devices.

5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.

6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.

7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective

device included in panelboards.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Panelboard schedules for installation in panelboards.

E. Operation and maintenance data.



Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for

intended location and application.

B. Comply with NEMA PB 1.


1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty:



Page 2 of 7

Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient

voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty

period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Enclosures: Flush-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type I

b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R

c. Kitchen Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X

d. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3

2. Front:

Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box

dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.

3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged

trim cover.

4. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.

B. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom.

C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity

D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity

2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type

3. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Compression type

4. Feed-Through Lugs:

Compression type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from

incoming lugs or main device.

5. Sub-feed (Double) Lugs:

Compression type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as

incoming lugs or main device.

E. Service Equipment Label:

NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with one or more main service

disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.



Page 3 of 7

F. Future Devices:

Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for

future installation of devices.

G. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating:

Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS


Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product by one of the

following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit

2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial- Electrical Distribution

3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

D. Mains: Circuit breaker.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller:

F. Bolt-on circuit breakers.

G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A:

Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device

requires mechanical release for removal.

H. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches

2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable

product by one of the following:


2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution



B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type

C. Mains: Circuit breaker



Page 4 of 7

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without

disturbing adjacent units.

E. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, electrically held, general-purpose controller,

with same short-circuits interrupting rating as panelboard.

1. External Control-Power Source: 24-V control circuit.

F. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike

G. Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box

equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses.

2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable



2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial- Electrical Distribution



B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB):

Comply with UL 489, with 100% rating to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers:

Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element

for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit breaker frame sizes 250 A and

larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-

mounted, field adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with RMS sensing; field replaceable rating plug or field

replicable electronic trip; and the following field adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip.

b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.

c. Long- and short-time adjustments.

d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let through ratings less

than NEMA FU l, RK-5.

5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single and two pole configurations with Class A ground-fault

protection (6-mA trip).



Page 5 of 7

6. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault

protection (30-mA trip).

7. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V,

single pole configuration.

8. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

b. Lugs: Compression Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and

conductor materials.

c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent

lighting loads.

d. Ground-Fault Protection:

Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-

test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

e. Communication Capability:

Circuit-breaker mounted communication module with functions and features compatible with

power monitoring and control system specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power

Monitoring and Control."

f. Shunt Trip: 24-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of

rated voltage.

g. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in on

or off position.

h. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.

C. Fused Switch: NEMA KS l, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle

1. Fuses, and Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section

"Fuses."

2.5 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Portable Test Set:

For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include

relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, store and install panelboards and accessories according to NECA

407.

B. Mount top of trim 72 inches (1829 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.



Page 6 of 7

C. Mount panel board cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed

panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

D. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges

E. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

F. Stub four l-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or

space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four l-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits

into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.

G. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.

H. Comply with NECA I.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning

signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads and incorporating Owner's final room

designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create

directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates:

Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification

specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Device Nameplates:

Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with

requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical

Systems."


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,

and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.




2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;

otherwise, replace with new units and retest.



Page 7 of 7

D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards

included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected,

remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 262713– ELECTRICITY METERING


Page 1 of 3

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes equipment for electricity metering by utility company.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts and wiring diagrams.

C. Field quality control reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data:

In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data,"

include the following:

1. Application and operating software documentation

2. Software licenses

3. Software service agreement

4. Hard copies of manufacturer's operating specifications, design user's guides for software

and hardware, and PDF files on CD-ROM of the hard-copy Submittal.





PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT FOR ELECTRICITY METERING BY UTILITY COMPANY

A. Meters will be furnished by Contractor and approval by utility company.

B. Current-Transformer Cabinets: Comply with requirements of electrical-power utility

company.

C. Meter Sockets: Comply with requirements of electrical-power utility company.

D. Meter Sockets: Steady state and short circuit current ratings shall meet indicated circuit

ratings.

2.2 EQUIPMENT FOR ELECTRICITY METERING BY OWNER

A. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of

the following:

1. National Meter Industries



Page 2 of 3

2. Osaki Meter Sales, Inc.

3. SquareD; a brand of Schneider Electric

4. E-Mon digital metering

5. All meters must be approved by utility company prior to purchase.

B. Kilowatt-hour Meter: Electronic three phase meters, measuring electricity used

1. Voltage and Phase Configuration:

Meter shall be designed for use on circuits with voltage rating and phase configuration

indicated for its application.

2. Display:

LCD with characters not less than 0.25 inch (6 mm) high, indicating accumulative

kilowatthours and current kilowatt load. Retain accumulated kilowatt-hour in a nonvolatile

memory, until reset.

3. Display: Digital electromechanical counter, indicating accumulative kilowatt-hours.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with equipment installation requirements in NECA 1.

B. Install meters, raceways and equipment according to utility company's written requirements.

Provide empty conduits for metering leads and extend grounding connections as required by

utility company.

C. Install modular meter center according to NECA 400 switchboard installation requirements.

D. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification

for Electrical

E. Systems."

1. Series Combination Warning Label: Self-adhesive type, with text as required by NFPA 70




1. Connect a load of known kilowatt rating, 1 .5 kW minimum, to a circuit supplied by metered

feeder.

2. Turn off circuits supplied by metered feeder and secure them in off condition.

3. Run test load continuously for eight hours minimum, or longer, to obtain a measurable

meter indication. Use test-load placement and setting that ensures continuous, safe

operation.



Page 3 of 3

4. Check and record meter reading at end of test period and compare with actual electricity

used, based on test load rating, duration of test, and sample measurements of supply voltage

at test load connection. Record test results.

C. Electricity metering will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 262726 – WIRING DEVICES


Page 1 of 7

PART 1 ·GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.

2. Wall switch and exterior occupancy sensors.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for pre-marking

wall plates.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data:

For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction

manuals that include labeling conditions.






PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names:

Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in

other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper)

2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell)

3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton)

4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour)

2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories:






Page 2 of 7

C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted

under the following conditions:

1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranded building wire.

2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.

D. All 125V and 250V, 20A receptacles shall be listed as weather resistant type per 2008 NEC

406.8, Receptacles in Damp and Wet Locations.

2.3 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:

Comply with NEMA WD I, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL498.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex)

b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex)

c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex)

d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex)

2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description:

Straight blade, non-feed through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498,

and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:

1. Available Products:

Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work

include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Cooper; GF20

b. Pass & Seymour; 2084

2.5 SNAP SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper: 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way)

b. Hubbell: CS122l (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224 (four

way)



Page 3 of 7

c. Leviton: 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four way)

d. Pass & Seymour: 20ACl (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way), 20AC4

(four way)

C. Pilot Light Switches, 20 A:


a. Cooper: 2221PL for 120 V and 277 V

b. Hubbell: HPL1221PL for 120 V and 277 V

c. Leviton: 1221-PLR for 120 V, l22l-7 PLR for 277 V

d. Pass & Seymour; PS20ACl-PLR for 120 V

2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "ON."

D. Key Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper: 2221L

b. Hubbell: HBL 1221L

c. Leviton: 1221-2L

d. Pass & Seymour: PS20AC1-L

2. Description: Single pole, with factory supplied key in lieu of switch handle.

E. Single Pole, Double Throw, Momentary Contact, Center Off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A; for

use with mechanically held lighting contactors.


a. Cooper: 1995

b. Hubbell: HBL1557

c. Leviton: 1257

d. Pass & Seymour: 1251

F. Key-Operated, Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches,

I20/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors, with factory supplied key

in lieu of switch handle.


a. Cooper: 1995L



Page 4 of 7

b. Hubbell: HBL1557L.

c. Leviton: 1257L.

d. Pass & Seymour: 1251L

2.6 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.

2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic.

3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic.

4. Material for Damp Locations: Thermoplastic with spring loaded lift cover, and listed and

labeled for use in "wet locations."

B. Wet Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates:

NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather resistant thermoplastic with lockable cover.

2.7 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Type: Modular, flush type, dual service units suitable for wiring method used

B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling

C. Service Plate: Rectangular, solid brass with satin finish

D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated

E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Blank cover with bushed cable opening

2.8 FINISHES

A. Color: TBD by the Owner’s Representative. Plates and screw heads shall match device color.

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System:

White, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing

2. Wiring Devices Connected UPS Power System: Red

3. TVSS Devices: Blue.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise

noted.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:



Page 5 of 7

1. Take steps to ensure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish

materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by

riding against outside of the boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,

paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint

unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on

devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid

scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,

Article 300, without pigtails.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs

that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect

conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last

possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm)

in length.

5. Use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly

clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer.

7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15 or 20-A circuits, splice No.

12 AWG pigtails for device connections.

8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.

9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device

mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

10. Every room shall have lighting control device whether indicated or not on plans.



Page 6 of 7

11. Install a motor rated service switch at each connection to 120V fan motors whether

indicated or not on plans.

12. Receptacles installed outdoors shall be GFCI type and have rain tight "In-Use" cover.

13. Adjust outlet heights in ceramic tile walls to be entirely in or entirely out of the tile.

Outlets to be horizontal to most space conditions.

14. Coordinate device mounting with Architectural drawings prior to rough-in.

15. Device and Plate Color:

a. White: Devices connected to Normal Power Circuit.

b. Gray: Device connected to UPS Power Circuit.

c. Red: Devices connected to Emergency Power Circuit.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted

receptacles to the right.

F. Device Plates:

Do not use oversized or extra deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when

standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Dimmers:

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing.

2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application.

3. Install unshared neutral conductors online and load side of dimmers according to

manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.

H. Arrangement of Devices:

1. Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding

terminal of receptacles on top.

2. Group adjacent switches under single, multi-gang wall plates.

3. Align vertically receptacles, light switches and fire alarm devices when shown near each

other.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Receptacles:

Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or engraved

machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags

inside outlet boxes.



Page 7 of 7



1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.

2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout

or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132V.

2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable.

3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.

4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943

5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.

6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar

problems. Correct circuit conditions remove malfunctioning units and replace with new,

and retest as specified above.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 262813 – FUSES


Page 1 of 2

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


Cartridge fuses rated 600 VAC and less for use in control circuits enclosed switches, enclosed

controllers and motor-control centers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Operation and maintenance data





B. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers:

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not

limited to, the following:

1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc.

2. Edison Fuse, Inc.

3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.

4. Littelfuse, Inc.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent

with circuit voltages.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay

B. Control Circuits: Class CC, fast acting

SECTION 262813 – FUSES


Page 2 of 2

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without

removing fuse.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section

"Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside

door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block and holder.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 262816 – ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS


Page 1 of 6

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches

2. Non-fusible switches

3. Shunt trip switches

4. Molded case circuit breakers (MCCBs)

5. Enclosures

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component

indicated

B. Shop Drawings:

For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and

attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring

C. Field quality-control reports

D. Operation and maintenance data






PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES



Page 2 of 6

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable





4. SquareD; a brand of Schneider Electric

B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 240-VAC, 800 A and Smaller:

UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with cartridge fuse interiors to accommodate

indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with

cover in closed position.

C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 and 600-VAC, 1200 A and Smaller:

UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated

fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in

closed position.

D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Six Pole, Single Throw, 240 and 600-VAC, 200 A and Smaller:



closed position.

E. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 240 and 600-VAC, 1200 A and Smaller:



closed position.

F. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground

conductors.

2. Neutral Kit:

Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and

aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified

4. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material

5. Service Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.

2.2 SHUNT TRIP SWITCHES


Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or/a

comparable product by one of the following:



Page 3 of 6

1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc.

2. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.

3. Littelfuse, Inc.

B. General Requirements:

Comply with ASME A17.1, UL 50, and UL 98, with 200-kA interrupting and short-circuit

current rating when fitted with Class 1 fuses.

C. Switches:

Three poles, horsepower rated, with integral shunt trip mechanism and Class J fuse block;

lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks; interlocked with cover in closed

position.

D. Control Circuit:

120-VAC; obtained from integral control power transformer, with primary and secondary

fuses, with a control power transformer of enough capacity to operate shunt trip, connected

pilot, and indicating and control devices.

E. Accessories:

1. Oil tight key switch for key-to-test function.

2. Oil tight ON pilot light

3. Isolated neutral lug

4. Mechanically interlocked auxiliary contacts that change state when switch is opened and

closed.

5. Form C alarm contacts that change state when switch is tripped.

6. Three pole, double throw, fire safety and alarm relay; 120-VA or 24-VDC coil voltage.

7. Three pole, double throw, fire alarm voltage monitoring relay complying with NFPA 72.

2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS


Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or/a






B. General Requirements:



Page 4 of 6

Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply

with available fault currents.

C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers:

Inverse time-current element for low level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element

for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and

larger.

D. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers:

Field replaceable rating plug, RMS sensing, with the following field adjustable settings:

1. Instantaneous trip

2. Long- and short-time pickup levels

3. Long- and short-time adjustments

4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response

E. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers:

Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5

F. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

2. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material

3. Application Listing:

Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads

4. Ground-Fault Protection:

Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered type with mechanical ground-fault

indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to test feature, internal

memory, and shunt trip unit; and three phase, zero sequence current transformer/sensor.

5. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact

6. Auxiliary Contacts:

Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit breaker contacts, "b"

contacts operate in reverse of circuit breaker contacts.

7. Alarm Switch: One NC contact that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers:

NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions

at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1

2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R



Page 5 of 6

3. Kitchen Wash Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X

4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3

5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height


B. Temporary Lifting Provisions:

Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts

from enclosures and components.

C. Install fuses in fusible devices.

D. Comply with NECA 1.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.



B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component,

connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.




2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;

otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests

and inspections.



Page 6 of 6

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches

and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies

detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 263213 – ENGINE GENERATORS


Page 1 of 13

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes packaged engine-generator sets for emergency power supply with the

following features:

1. A 200-kW standby power system to supply electrical power at 208 Volts, 60 Hertz, 3 Phase.

The generator shall consist of a liquid cooled diesel engine, a synchronous AC alternator,

and system controls with all necessary accessories for a complete operating system,

including but not limited to the items as specified hereinafter.

2. Unit-mounted and remote-mounted control and monitoring.

3. Aluminum or stainless-steel outdoor enclosure to withstand 175 MPH winds and missile

impact according to Miami-Dade County, Florida USA standards or equivalent.

B. See Division 26 Section "Transfer Switches" for transfer switch including sensors and relays

to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine-generator set.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For a packaged engine generator and accessory indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances,

method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

C. Source quality control test reports.

D. Field quality control test reports.

E. Operation and maintenance data.

F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

G. Submit the generator set's sound level in decibels at 23ft based on the configuration specified.

H. The generator set shall be applied at the listed ambient temperature and elevation. Bidders to

submit the generators rated power output at 95°F ambient and 500 feet elevation.

I. Installation / Layout dimensional drawing

J. NFPA 110 required AHJ documentation:

Prototype test report; Certification of torsional compatibility; NFPA compliance statement; and

Certification of rated load testing.

K. Alternator thermal damage and decrement curves

L. Generator protective device time current curves




Page 2 of 13


Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units

required for this Project.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications:

A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 200 miles of Project site, a service center capable

of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs.

C. Supplier Qualifications:

Supplier of the generator set, and associated items shall have permanent service facilities in this

trade area. These facilities shall comprise a permanent force of factory trained service

personnel on 24-hour call, experienced in servicing this type of equipment, providing warranty

and routine maintenance service to afford the owner maximum protection. Delegation of this

service responsibility for any of the equipment listed herein will not be considered fulfillment

of these specifications. Service contracts shall also be available.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories:



E. Comply with ASME B15.1.

F. Comply with NFPA 37.

G. Comply with NFPA 70.

H. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level l emergency power supply system.

I. Comply with UL 2200.

J. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable federal and territory government

requirements.

K. Noise Emission:

Comply with applicable federal and territory government requirements for maximum noise

level at adjacent property boundaries due to sound emitted by generator set including engine,

engine exhaust, engine cooling-air intake and discharge, and other components of installation.

L. An electric generating system, consisting of a prime mover, generator, governor, coupling and

all controls, must have been tested, as a complete unit, on a representative engineering

prototype model of the equipment to be sold.

M. The generator set must be available with the Underwriters Laboratories listing (UL2200) for a

stationary engine generator assembly.

N. The generator set must meet US EPA federal emission guidelines for stationary standby power

generation.


A. Environmental Conditions:

Engine generator system shall withstand the following environmental conditions without

mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability:



Page 3 of 13

1. Ambient Temperature: 5 to 40 degrees Celsius.

2. Altitude: Sea level to 500 feet.

3. Outdoors installation

4. Tropical Environment

1.5 WARRANTY

A. The standby electric generating system components, complete generator set and

instrumentation panel shall be warranted by the manufacturer against defective materials and

factory workmanship for a period of five (5) years. Such defective parts shall be repaired or

replaced at the manufacturer's option, free of charge for parts, labor and travel.

B. The warranty period shall commence when the standby power system is first placed into

service. Multiple warranties for individual components (engine, alternator, controls, etc.) will

not be acceptable. Satisfactory warranty documents must be provided. Also, in the judgment

of the specifying authority, the manufacturer supplying the warranty for the complete system

must have the necessary financial strength and technical expertise with all components

supplied to provide adequate warranty support.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for package engine generators. Cast anchor-

bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and form work requirements are specified

with concrete.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a


1. Caterpillar; Engine Div.

2. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group.

3. Spectrum Detroit Diesel.

2.2 ENGINE GENERATOR SET

B. Factory-assembled and tested, engine generator set.

C. Mounting Frame:

Maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete foundation; and

have lifting attachments.

D. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Power Output Ratings:



Page 4 of 13

Nominal ratings as indicated, with capacity as required to operate as a unit as evidenced by

records of prototype testing.

2. Output Connections: Three phase, four wires

3. Nameplates:

For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and address, and model and

serial number of the component.

E. Generator Set Performance:

1. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 3 percent of rated output voltage from no

load to full load.

2. Transient Voltage Performance:

Not more than 20 percent variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Voltage shall

recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within three seconds.

3. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated frequency from no

load to full load.

4. Steady-State Frequency Stability:

When system is operating at any constant load within the rated load, there shall be no random

speed variations outside the steady-state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed.

5. Transient Frequency Performance:

Less than 5 percent variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Frequency shall

recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within five seconds.

6. Output Waveform:

At no load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to neutral shall not exceed 5 percent

total and 3 percent for single harmonics. Telephone influence factor, determined according to

NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent.

7. Sustained Short Circuit Current:

For a 3 phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, system shall supply a minimum

of 250 percent of rated full load current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault

automatically, without damage to generator system components.

8. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements.

2.3 ENGINE

A. The prime mover shall be a liquid cooled, diesel fueled, turbocharged after-cooled engine of

4-cycle design. It will have adequate horsepower to achieve rated kW output with at an

operating speed of 1800 RPM.

B. The engine shall support a 100% load step.

C. The system shall be sized and sequenced to allow emergency system loads as defined by NEC

700 to be transferred onto the generator(s) within 10 seconds. Non-emergency system loads

shall be sequenced onto the generator(s) as generator capacity comes on-line.



Page 5 of 13

D. The generator shall accept a load step of 60 kW with a maximum frequency dip of 2 Hz.

2.4 ENGINE OIL SYSTEM

A. Full pressure lubrication shall be supplied by a positive displacement lube oil pump. The

engine shall have a replaceable oil filter(s) with internal bypass and replaceable element(s).

B. The engine shall operate on mineral based oil. Synthetic oils shall not be required. The oil

shall be cooled by an oil cooler which is integrated into the engine system.

2.5 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

A. The engine is to be cooled with a unit mounted radiator, fan, water pump, and closed coolant

recovery system. The coolant system shall include a coolant fill box which will provide visual

means to determine if the system has adequate coolant level.

B. The radiator shall be designed for operation in 122 degrees F, (50 degrees C) ambient

temperature.

C. The engine shall have (a) unit mounted, thermostatically controlled water jacket heater(s) to

aid in quick starting. The wattage shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.

D. Engine coolant and oil drain extensions, equipped with pipe plugs and shut-off valves, must

be provided to the outside of the mounting base for cleaner and more convenient engine

servicing.

E. A radiator fan guard must be installed for personnel safety that meets UL and OSHA safety

requirements.

2.6 ENGINE STARTING SYSTEM

A. Starting shall be by a solenoid shift, DC starting system.

B. The engine's cranking batteries shall be lead acid. The batteries shall be sized per the

manufacturer's recommendations. The batteries shall be the largest available by the

manufacturer for this generator size.

C. The batteries supplied shall meet NFPA 110 cranking requirements of 90 seconds of total crank

time. Battery specifications (type, amp-hour rating, cold cranking amps) to be provided in the

submittal.

D. The generator set shall have an engine driven, battery charging alternator with integrated

voltage regulation.

E. The generator set shall have an automatic dual rate, float equalize, 10 amp battery charger.

The charger must be protected against a reverse polarity connection. The chargers charging

current shall be monitored within the generator controller to support remote monitoring and

diagnostics. The battery charger is to be factory installed on the generator set. Due to line

voltage drop concerns, a battery charger mounted in the transfer switch will be unacceptable.

2.7 ENGINE FUEL SYSTEM



Page 6 of 13

A. The engine fuel system shall be designed for operation on #2 diesel fuel or used and cleaned

vegetable oil.

B. The engine shall include a primary fuel filter, water separator, manual fuel priming pump, and

engine flexible fuel lines must be installed at the point of manufacture. Element shall be

replaceable paper type.

C. The engines suction line shall be fitted with a check valve to secure prime for the engines

injection pump.

D. The generator set shall include a secondary duplex fuel filter assembly capable of switching

filters without shutting down the engine. The filter shall remove contaminants of 10 microns

or larger.

2.8 ENGINE CONTROLS

A. Engines that are equipped with an electronic engine control module (ECM), shall monitor and

control engine functionality and seamlessly integrate with the generator set controller through

digital communications. ECM monitored parameters shall be integrated into the generator set

controllers NFPA 110 alarm and warning requirements. All ECM fault codes shall be

displayed at the generator set controller in standard language. Fault code numbers are not

acceptable.

B. For engines without ECM functionality or for any additional generator set controller

monitoring, sensors are to be conditioned to a 4-20ma signal level to enhance noise immunity

and all sensor connections shall be sealed to prevent corrosion.

C. Engine speed shall be controlled with an integrated isochronous governor function with no

change in alternator frequency from no load to full load. Steady state regulation is to be 0.25%.

2.9 ENGINE EXHAUST & INTAKE

A. The engine exhaust emissions shall meet the EPA emission requirements for standby power

generation.

B. The manufacturer shall supply its recommended stainless steel, flexible connector to couple

the engine exhaust manifold to the exhaust system. A rain cap will terminate the exhaust pipe

after the silencer. All components must be properly sized to assure operation without excessive

back pressure when installed.

C. The manufacturer shall supply a critical grade exhaust silencer as standard. For applications

with site specific sound requirements (reference Section 1.1), the silencer shall be selected to

achieve site sound levels.

D. For generator sets in a weather or sound attenuated enclosure, all exhaust piping from the

turbo-charger discharge to the silencer shall be thermally wrapped to minimize heat dissipation

inside the enclosure.

E. The engine intake air is to be filtered with engine mounted, replaceable, dry element filters.

2.10 ALTERNATOR

A. The alternator shall be the voltage and phase configuration as specified.



Page 7 of 13

B. The alternator shall be a 4 pole, revolving field, stationary armature, synchronous machine.

The excitation system shall utilize a brushless exciter with a three-phase full wave rectifier

assembly protected against abnormal transient conditions by a surge protector. Photo-sensitive

components will not be permitted in the rotating exciter. The alternator shall include a

permanent magnet generator (PMG) for excitation support. The system shall supply a

minimum short circuit support current of 300% of the rating (250% for 50Hz operation) for 10

seconds. The alternator shall support _skVA with a maximum voltage dip of 5%.

C. Three phase alternators shall be 12 lead, broad range capable of supporting voltage

reconnection. Single phase alternators shall be four lead and dedicated voltage designs (600v)

shall be six lead. All leads must be extended into a NEMA 1 connection box for easy

termination. A fully rated, isolated neutral connection must be included by the generator set

manufacturer. The alternator shall use a single, sealed bearing design. The rotor shall be

connected to the engine flywheel using flexible drive disks. The stator shall be direct

connected to the engine to ensure permanent alignment. The alternator shall meet temperature

rise standards of UL2200 (120°C). The insulation system material shall be class "H" capable

of withstanding 150°C temperature rise.

D. An alternator strip heater shall be installed to prevent moisture condensation from forming on

the alternator windings. A tropical coating shall also be applied to the alternator windings to

provide additional protection against the entrance of moisture.

2.11 CONTROLS & OPERATING SEQUENCE

A. Generator Controller

1. The generator control system shall be a fully integrated microprocessor-based control

system for standby emergency engine generator meeting all requirements of NFPA 110

level I.

2. The generator control system shall be a fully integrated control system enabling remote

diagnostics and easy building management integration of all generator functions. The

generator controller shall provide integrated and digital control over all generator functions

including:

a. Engine protection, alternator protection, speed governing, voltage regulation,

synchronizing, load-sharing (real and reactive) and all related generator operations.

b. The generator controller must also provide seamless digital integration with the engine's

electronic engine control module (ECM) if so equipped.

c. Generator controller that utilizes separate voltage regulators and speed governors or do

not provide seamless integration with the engine management system are considered

less desirable.

3. The control system shall provide an environmentally sealed design including encapsulated

circuit boards and sealed automotive style plugs for all sensors and circuit board

connections. The lack of encapsulated boards, encapsulated edge cards, and encapsulated

pc ribbon cable connections are considered unacceptable.



Page 8 of 13

4. Diagnostic capabilities shall include time-stamped event and alarm logs, ability to capture

operational parameters during events, simultaneous monitoring of all input or output

parameters, callout capabilities, support for multi-channel digital strip chart functionality

and .2 msec data logging capabilities.

5. In addition to standard NFPA 110 alarms, the application loads should also be protected

through instantaneous and steady state protective settings on system voltage, frequency,

and power levels.

6. The control system shall provide pre-wired customer use I/0: 4 relay outputs (user definable

functions), 4 contact inputs, 2 analog inputs, communications support via RS232, and

RS485. Additional I/0 must be an available option.

7. Customer I/0 shall be software configurable providing full access to all alarm, event, data

logging, and shutdown functionality. In addition, custom ladder logic functionality inside

the generator controller shall be supported to provide application support flexibility. The

ladder logic function shall have access to all the controller inputs and customer assignable

outputs.

8. Once utility power has returned, the two-wire start signal will be removed. The generator

contactors will open, generator will run in a cool down mode, and then generator shut

down.

9. Transfer switch supplied shall be capable of being inhibited from transferring with a contact

from the system controller. The transfer switch supplied shall also be able to shed load via

trip-to-neutral feature - the load is shed and does not reclose to a utility that may have a

fault present. For applications in which load shedding with the transfer switch is not

feasible, load shedding requirements will be evaluated and accommodated as necessary.

B. Remote emergency stop station.

1. Provide break-glass type remote emergency stop station for manual shutdown of engine.

2. Provide HDPE nameplates on station reading "Generator Emergency Stop".

2.12 ENGINE/ALTERNATOR PACKAGING

A. The engine/alternator shall be isolated from the generator frame with rubber isolators. The

packaging shall not require the addition of external spring isolators.

B. A mainline, thermal magnetic electronic LSI circuit breaker carrying the UL mark shall be

factory installed. The breaker shall be rated between 100 to 125% of the rated ampacity of the

generator set. The line side connections are to feed from the alternator, and the load side of

the breaker shall feed a paralleling switch. The breaker is to have auxiliary contact and shunt

trip. The breaker shall function as a redundant tripping device in the system. If the paralleling

switch fails to open, the generator breaker shall be shunt tripped. Each generator shall include

a cycle rated paralleling switch using proven contactor technology. The mechanism shall have

a minimum cycle life of 20,000 operations. The generator shall include a unit mounted 120-

volt convenience outlet.

2.13 SUB-BASE FUEL TANK

A. Comply with NFPA 30.



Page 9 of 13

B. The packaging shall include a double wall, sub-base mounted, UL142 listed fuel tank. The

tank shall be sized to provide not less than 72 hours of run time.

C. The tank shall include fuel suction and return connections, normal and emergency vents,

secondary containment emergency vent and rupture basin sensor, mechanical fuel level

indication and a stub up area convenient for electrical conduit entry.

D. The fuel tank shall use an electric fuel sensor to provide an analog indication of fuel level. The

controller shall have a warning indication on low fuel level and provide optional shutdown

functionality for low, low fuel level.

E. The fuel tank shall have a sloped top and bottom. The sloped top allows water to run off. The

sloped bottom allows the water and other impurities in the fuel to collect near the back of the

tank away from the fuel suction point.

F. The fuel tank must be supplied by the engine-generator set manufacturer and be installed

before shipment.

G. The fuel tank shall include a fuel spill box with spill sensor, automatic overflow fill valve, and

the normal vent elevated 12 feet above grade.

2.14 OUTDOOR GENERATOR SET ENCLOSURE

A. The generator shall be packaged with a sound attenuating weather protective enclosure.

B. The enclosure shall be completely lined with sound deadening material. This material must

be of a self-extinguishing design.

C. The enclosure shall be made of aluminum or stainless steel with a minimum thickness of 14

gauge and have hinged removable doors (removable by one person) to allow access to the

engine, alternator and control panel. The hinges shall allow for door fit adjustment. Hinges

and all exposed fasteners shall be stainless steel or JS5000. The use of pop-rivets weakens the

paint system and not allowed on external painted surfaces. Each door shall have lockable

hardware with identical keys.

D. The enclosure shall be coated with electrostatic applied powder paint, baked and finished to

manufacturer's specifications. The color will be manufacturer's standard.

E. The enclosure shall utilize an upward discharging radiator hood. Due to concerns relative to

radiator damage, circulating exhaust, and prevailing winds, equipment without a radiator

discharge hood will not be acceptable.

F. The generator set silencer shall be mounted on the discharge hood of the enclosure. Due to

architectural concerns, silencers mounted on the top of the generator enclosure are not

acceptable. Generator set with silencer mounted inside the main generator compartment is

acceptable only if the silencer is thermally wrapped to minimize heat stress on the surrounding

components.

G. Interior Lights with Switch:

Factory wired, vapor proof type fixtures within housing; arranged to illuminate controls and

accessible interior. Arrange for external electrical connection.

1. AC lighting system and connection point for operation when remote source is available.



Page 10 of 13

2. DC lighting system for operation when remote source and generator are both unavailable.

H. Convenience Outlets: Factory wired, GFCI. Arrange for external electrical connection.

I. Include load center electrical panel within the enclosure to feed lighting outlets, and battery

charger.

2.15 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

A. Supplier shall itemize loose parts that require site mounting and installation. Preference will

be shown for a generator set that factory mounts items like mufflers, battery chargers, etc.

B. Spare Parts:

1. Fuses: One spare set

C. Provide an NFPA 110 compliant alarm annunciator panels for remote indication as described

on the drawings. The panel shall have an ALARM switch that when moved to the OFF

position silences the audible alarm. A TEST/RESET switch must be included to verify the

lights are functional and reset any condition after it has cleared. The annunciator shall be

controlled using RS485 communications from the generator controller. Annunciators

requiring individual contacts and wires per indication point are not preferred.

2.16 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES

A. Elastomeric Isolator Pads:

Oil and water resistant elastomer or natural rubber, arranged in single or multiple layers,

molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel base plates of sufficient stiffness for

uniform loading over pad area, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported

equipment.

1. Material: Bridge-bearing neoprene, complying with AASHTO M 251

2. Durometer Rating: 30

3. Number of Layers: Two.

B. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic restraint

C. Housing:

Steel with resilient vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind loads or if

weight is removed; factory drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch (6-mm) thick, elastomeric

isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling

bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of compressed height of the spring at

rated load

2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at rated load

3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness



Page 11 of 13




A. Prototype Testing:

Factory test engine generator set using same engine model, constructed of identical or

equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories.

1. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters and with IEEE 115.

2. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment

instructions and with NFPA 110.

B. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or

accessories, for periodic maintenance.

C. Install packaged engine generator with restrained spring isolators having a minimum

deflection of 1 inch (25 mm) on 4-inch (100-mm) high concrete base. Secure sets to anchor

bolts installed in concrete bases.

D. Electrical Wiring:

Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not specified to be factory

mounted.

E. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate

general arrangement of piping and specialties.

F. Connect fuel, cooling-system, and exhaust-system piping adjacent to packaged engine

generator to allow service and maintenance.

G. Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector.

H. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

I. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables."

J. Identify system components according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping

and Equipment" and Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."



1. Manufacturer's Field Service:



Page 12 of 13

Engage a factory authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and

equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.


1. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each electrical test and visual and

mechanical inspection (except those indicated to be optional) for "AC Generators and for

Emergency Systems" specified in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify

compliance with test parameters.

2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests:

3. Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to those specified here including,

but not limited to, single-step full-load pickup test.

4. Battery Tests:

Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. Record

individual cell voltages.

a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for full-

charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity

under both conditions.

b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a capacity

load test for the battery.

c. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge.

d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.

5. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-

charging conditions.

6. System Integrity Tests:

Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of each element of engine-

generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.

7. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests:

Use recording oscilloscope to measure voltage and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent

step-load increases and decreases and verify that performance is as specified.

8. Harmonic-Content Tests:

Measure harmonic content of output voltage under 25 percent and at 100 percent of rated linear

load. Verify that harmonic content is within specified limits.

9. Noise Level Tests:

Measure A-weighted level of noise emanating from generator set installation, including engine

exhaust and cooling air intake and discharge, at four locations, and compare measured levels

with required values.

C. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.



Page 13 of 13

D. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until

no leaks exist.

E. Operational Test:

After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and

unit operation.

1. The supplier of the electric generating plant and associated items covered herein shall

provide factory trained technicians to check out the completed installation and to perform

an initial startup inspection to include:

a. Ensuring the engine starts (both hot and cold) within the specified time.

b. Verification of engine parameters within specification.

c. Verify no load frequency and voltage, adjusting if required.

d. Test all automatic shutdowns of the engine-generator.

F. Perform a load test for 1.5 hours using building load. In addition to the building load test, load

the generator at 30% for 30 minutes, 50 % for 30 minutes, and 100% for 60 minutes

G. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

H. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest, re-inspect as specified above.

I. Retest:

Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements

are met.

J. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and

measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label

or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. Refer to Division 01 Section

"Demonstration and Training."

END OF SECTION

SECTION 263600 – TRANSFER SWITCHES


Page 1 of 7

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes automatic transfer switches rated 600 V and less.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, weights, operating characteristics, furnished

specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:

Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum clearances, conductor

entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material lists for each switch

specified.

C. Field quality control test reports

D. Operation and maintenance data





B. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.


D. Comply with NFPA 99.

E. Comply with NFPA 110.

F. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers:

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, or

approved equivalent:

1. Contactor Transfer Switches:

a. Caterpillar; Engine Division

b. Emerson; ASCO Power Technologies, LP.

c. GE Zenith Controls

d. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group



Page 2 of 7

e. Katolight

2. Transfer Switches Using Molded-Case Switches or Circuit Breakers:

a. AC Data Systems, Inc.

b. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer

c. GE Zenith Controls

d. Hubbell Industrial Controls, Inc.

e. Lake Shore Electric Corporation

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Indicated Current Ratings:

Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system transfer, including

tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere rating, unless


B. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault

conditions indicated, based on testing according to UL 1008.



Page 3 of 7

1. Where transfer switch includes internal fault-current protection, rating of switch and trip

unit combination shall exceed indicated fault-current value at installation location.

C. Solid State Controls:

Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2 percent or better over an operating

temperature range of up to plus 70°C.

D. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients:

Components shall meet or exceed voltage surge withstand capability requirements when tested

according to IEEE C62.41. Components shall meet or exceed voltage impulse withstand test of

NEMA ICS 1.

E. Electrical Operation:

Accomplish by a non-fused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric motor operated

mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions.

F. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous duty repetitive transfer of full rated current

between active power sources.

1. Limitation:

Switches using molded case switches or circuit breakers, or insulated case circuit breaker

components are not acceptable.

2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions.

3. Contacts:

Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching. Conventional automatic transfer

switch units, rated 225 A and higher, shall have separate arcing contacts.

G. Neutral Switching: Where four-pole switches are indicated, provide neutral pole switched

simultaneously with phase poles.

H. Neutral Terminal: Solid and fully rated, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Oversize Neutral:

Ampacity and switch rating of neutral path through units indicated for oversize neutral shall be

double the nominal rating of circuit in which switch is installed.

1. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 1, complying with NEMA ICS 6 and UL

508, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

A. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.

B. Switching Arrangement:

Double throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops during normal

functioning, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Signal-Before-Transfer Contacts:

A set of normally open/normally closed dry contacts operates in advance of retransfer to

normal source. Interval is adjustable from 1 to 30 seconds.



Page 4 of 7

D. Transfer Switches Based on Molded Case Switch Components: Comply with NEMA AB 1,

UL 489, and UL 869A.

E. In-Phase Monitor:

Factory wired; internal relay controls transfer so it occurs only when the two sources are

synchronized in phase.

F. Motor Disconnect and Timing Relay:

Controls designate starters so they disconnect motors before transfer and reconnect them

selectively at an adjustable time interval after transfer. Time delay for reconnecting individual

motor loads is adjustable between 1 and 60 seconds, and settings are as indicated.

G. Programmed Neutral Switch Position:

Switch operator has a programmed neutral position arranged to provide a midpoint between the

two working switch positions, with an intentional, time-controlled pause at midpoint during

transfer.

H. Automatic Transfer Switch Features:

1. Under Voltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source:

Sense low phase-to-ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85

to 100 percent of nominal, and dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup

value. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent.

2. Adjustable Time Delay:

For override of normal-source voltage sensing to delay transfer and engine start signals.

Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one second.

3. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay:

Prevent premature transfer to generator. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100

percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent. Pickup frequency shall be adjustable

from 90 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 95 percent.

4. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source:

Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, and factory set for 10 minutes to automatically defeat delay

on loss of voltage or sustained under voltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has

been restored.

5. Test Switch: Simulate normal source failure

6. Switch Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected

7. Source Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer switch normal and

emergency source sensing circuits.

a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with routed HDPE nameplate "Normal Source

Available."

b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with routed HDPE nameplate "Emergency

Source Available."

8. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single pole, double throw contacts

for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-VAC.



Page 5 of 7

9. Transfer Override Switch:

Overrides automatic retransfer control so automatic transfer switch will remain connected to

emergency power source regardless of condition of normal source. Pilot light indicates

override status.

10. Engine Starting Contacts:

One isolated and normally closed, and one isolated and normally open; rated 10 A at 32-VDC

minimum.

11. Engine Shutdown Contacts:

a. Instantaneous:

Shall initiate shutdown sequence at remote engine-generator controls after re-transfer of load to

normal source.

b. Time delay:

Adjustable from zero to five minutes, and factory set for five minutes. Contacts shall initiate

shutdown at remote engine generator controls after re-transfer of load to normal source.

12. Engine Generator Exerciser:

Solid state, programmable time switch starts engine generator and transfers load to it from

normal source for a preset time, then retransfers and shuts down engine after a preset cool

down period. Initiates exercise cycle at preset intervals adjustable from 7 to 30 days. Running

periods are adjustable from 10 to 30 minutes. Factory settings are for 7-day exercise cycle, 20-

minute running period, and 5-minute cool-down period. Exerciser features include the

following:

a. Exerciser Transfer Selector Switch: Permits selection of exercise with and without load

transfer.

b. Push button programming control with digital display of settings.

c. Integral battery operation of time switch when normal control power is not available.


A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. Ensure

proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time delay settings for

compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with

NEMA ICS l.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Identify components according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."



Page 6 of 7

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service:

Engage a factory authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components,

assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.



equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in testing.

2. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for




4. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation

resistance tester. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply

with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.

a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.

b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of barriers,

covers, and safety features.

c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.

d. Perform manual transfer operation.

5. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for

each switch at least three times.

a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of

emergency source with normal source available.

b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source.

c. Verify time-delay settings.

d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control settings.

e. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values 500 micro-ohms

and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles.

f. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time

delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and

shutdown.



Page 7 of 7

6. Ground-Fault Tests:

Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power delivery from both

sources.

a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.

C. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.

D. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and

measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each

tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

F. Infrared Scanning:

After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an

infrared scan of each switch. Remove all access panels so joints and connections are accessible

to portable scanner.

1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning:

Perform an additional follow up infrared scan of each switch 11 months after date of


2. Instrument:

Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant

deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

3. Record of Infrared Scanning:

Prepare a certified report that identifies switches checked and that describes scanning results.

Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial

action.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified below.

Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

B. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 264113 – LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES


Page 1 of 4

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes lightning protection for building structures and site components.



B. Shop Drawings: For air terminals and mounting accessories

1. Layout of the lightning protection system, along with details of the components to be used

in the installation.

2. Include indications for use of raceway, data on how concealment requirements will be met,

and calculations required by NFPA 780 for bonding of grounded and isolated metal bodies.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer. Include data on listing or

certification by UL.

B. Certification, signed by Contractor, that roof adhesive is approved by manufacturer of roofing

material.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Comply with recommendations in NFPA 780, Annex D, "Inspection and Maintenance of

Lightning Protection Systems," for maintenance of the lightning protection system.

E. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding

features, including the following:

1. Ground rods

2. Ground loop conductor



Certified by UL or LPI as a Master Installer/Designer, trained and approved for installation of

units required for this Project.

B. System Certificate:

1. UL Master Label



Page 2 of 4

2. LPI System Certificate

3. UL Master Label Recertification

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 780,

"Definitions" Article.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of lightning protection with installation of other building systems and

components, including electrical wiring, supporting structures and building materials, metal

bodies requiring bonding to lightning protection components, and building finishes.

B. Coordinate installation of air terminals attached to roof systems with roofing manufacturer and

Installer.

C. Flashings of through-roof assemblies shall comply with roofing manufacturers' specifications.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with UL 96 and NFPA 780.

B. Roof-Mounted Air Terminals: NFPA 780, copper unless otherwise indicated


following:

a. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc.

b. ERICO International Corporation

c. East Coast Lightning Equipment Inc.

d. Harger

e. Heary Bros. Lightning Protection Co. Inc.

f. Independent Protection Co.

g. Preferred Lightning Protection

h. Robbins Lightning, Inc.

2. Air Terminals More than 24 Inches (600 mm) Long: With brace attached to the terminal

at not less than half the height of the terminal.

C. Main and Bonding Conductors: Copper

D. Ground Loop Conductor: The same size and type as the main conductor except tinned

E. Ground Rods: Copper clad steel 3/4 inch (19 mm) in diameter by 10 feet (3 m) long



Page 3 of 4

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install lightning protection components and systems according to UL 96A and NFPA 780.

B. Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections. Avoid sharp

bends.

C. Conceal the following conductors:

1. System conductors

2. Down conductors

3. Interior conductors

4. Conductors within normal view of exterior locations at grade within 200 feet (60 m) of

building

D. Cable Connections:

Use crimped or bolted connections for all conductor splices and connections between

conductors and other components. Use exothermic welded connections in underground

portions of the system.

E. Cable Connections:

Use exothermic welded connections for all conductor splices and connections between

conductors and other components.

1. Exception: In single ply membrane roofing, exothermic-welded connections may be used

only below the roof level.

F. Air Terminals on Single-Ply Membrane Roofing: Comply with roofing membrane and

adhesive manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Bond extremities of vertical metal bodies exceeding 60 feet (18 m) in length to lightning

protection components.

H. Ground Loop:

Install ground level, potential equalization conductor and extend around the perimeter of

structure or item indicated.

1. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches (600 mm) from building foundation.

2. Bond ground terminals to the ground loop.

3. Bond grounded building systems to the ground loop conductor within 12 feet (3.6 m) of

grade level.

I. Bond lightning protection components with intermediate level interconnection loop

conductors to grounded metal bodies of building at 60-foot (18-m) intervals.



Page 4 of 4

J. Install lightning system for generator enclosures and fuel tank area.

3.2 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply

with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and

Cabling."

3.3 CORROSION PROTECTION

A. Do not combine materials that can form an electrolytic couple that will accelerate corrosion in

the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from junction of such

materials.

B. Use conductors with protective coatings where conditions cause deterioration or corrosion of

conductors.


A. Notify Owner’s Representative at least 48 hours in advance of inspection before concealing

lightning protection components.

B. UL Inspection: Meet requirements to obtain a UL Master Label for system.

C. LPI System Inspection: Meet requirements to obtain an LPI System Certificate.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 264313 – TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW VOLTAGE

ELECTRICAL POWER


Page 1 of 6

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes field-mounted TVSS for low-voltage (120 to 600 V) power distribution and

control equipment.


A. Product Data:

For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating weights, electrical

characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.


A. Field quality control reports

B. Warranties: Sample of special warranties


A. Operation and maintenance data



Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a testing agency, and marked for intended

location and application.

B. Comply with IEEE C62.41.2 and test devices according to IEEE C62.45.

C. Comply with NEMA LS l.

D. Comply with UL 1449 latest edition.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty:

Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of

surge suppressors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSORS




ELECTRICAL POWER


Page 2 of 6

1. ABB USA

2. AC Data Solutions

3. Advanced Protection Technologies Inc. (APT)

4. Atlantic Scientific

5. Current Technology Inc.; Danaher Power Solutions

6. Danaher Power Solutions; United Power Products



9. Intermatic, Inc.

10. LEA International


12. Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson Network Power

13. Northern Technologies, Inc.; a division of Emerson Network Power



16. Surge Suppression Incorporated.

B. Surge Protection Devices:

1. Non-modular

2. LED indicator lights for power and protection status

3. Comply with UL I4491atest edition

4. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity

5. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring

6. Integral disconnect switch

7. Redundant suppression circuits

8. Arrangement with copper bus bars and for bolted connections to phase buses, neutral bus,

and ground bus

9. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus


ELECTRICAL POWER


Page 3 of 6


C. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 320 kA per mode/640 kA per phase.

D. Minimum single impulse current ratings, using 8-by-20-mic.sec waveform described in IEEE

C62.41.2:

1. Line to Neutral: 70,000 A.

2. Line to Ground: 70,000 A.

3. Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A.

E. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 V, 208Y/l20

V, 3 phase, 4 wire circuits shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277 V, 400 V for 208Y/l20 V

2. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 V, 400 V for 208Y/l20 V

3. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 V, 400 V for 208Y/120 V

F. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/l20 V, single phase, 3 wire circuits shall be as

follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 400 V

2. Line to Ground: 400 V

3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V

G. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/l20-V, 3 phase, 4 wire circuits with high leg shall

be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 400 V, 800 V from high leg



H. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240 V, 480 V, or 600 V, 3 phase, 3 wire, delta circuits

shall be as follows:

1. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480 V, 1000 V for 240 V

2. Line to Ground: 2000 V for 480 V, 1000 V for 240 V

2.2 PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS



1. ABB USA


ELECTRICAL POWER


Page 4 of 6

2. AC Data Solutions

3. Advanced Protection Technologies Inc. (APT)

4. Atlantic Scientific

5. Current Technology Inc.; Danaher Power Solutions

6. Danaher Power Solutions; United Power Products



9. Intermatic, Inc.

10. LEA International


12. Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson Network Power

13. Northern Technologies, Inc.; a division of Emerson Network Power



16. Surge Suppression Incorporated.

B. Surge Protection Devices:

1. Non-modular


3. Comply with UL 1449 latest edition

4. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity

5. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring

6. Integral disconnect switch

7. Redundant suppression circuits

8. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus


C. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 160 kA per mode/320 kA per phase


ELECTRICAL POWER


Page 5 of 6

D. Minimum single impulse current ratings, using 8-by-20 micro-sec waveform described in

IEEE C62.41.2:

1. Line to Neutral: 70,000 A

2. Line to Ground: 70,000 A

3. Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A

E. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 V, 208Y/120

V, 3-phase, 4-wire circuits shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277 V, 400 V for 208Y/120 V

2. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 V, 400 V for 208Y/120 V

3. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 V, 400 V for 208Y/120 V

F. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/120 V, single phase, 3-wire circuits shall be as

follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 400 V



G. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 2401120-V, 3 phase, 4 wire circuits with high leg


1. Line to Neutral: 400 V, 800 V from high leg



H. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240 V, 480 V, or 600 V, 3 phase, 3 wire, delta circuits


1. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480 V, 1000 V for 240 V

2. Line to Ground: 2000 V for 480 V, 1000 V for 240 V

2.3 ENCLOSURES

A. Indoor Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 1

B. Outdoor Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 3R

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


ELECTRICAL POWER


Page 6 of 6

A. Install TVSS devices at service entrance on load side, with ground lead bonded to service

entrance ground.

B. Install TVSS devices for panelboards and auxiliary panels with conductors or buses between

suppressor and points of attachment as short and straight as possible. Do not exceed

manufacturer's recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground.

1. Provide multiple, 30 A circuit breakers as a dedicated disconnecting means for TVSS unless






equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.


1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS,

"Surge Arresters, Low-Voltage Surge Protection Devices" Section. Certify compliance

with test parameters.

2. After installing TVSS devices but before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for


3. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. TVSS device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.3 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Do not energize or connect service entrance equipment, panelboards to their sources until

TVSS devices are installed and connected.

B. Do not perform insulation resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment with the TVSS

installed. Disconnect before conducting insulation resistance tests and reconnect immediately

after the testing is over.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION


maintain TVSS devices.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 265100 – INTERIOR LIGHTING


Page 1 of 14

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:

A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of the interior lighting

systems. The terms “lighting fixture,” “fixture,” and “luminaire” are used interchangeably.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 017419, CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT:

B. Disposal of lamps.

C. Section 024100, DEMOLITION:

D. Removal and disposal of lamps and ballasts.

E. Section 130541, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL

COMPONENTS:

F. Requirement for seismic restraint for nonstructural components.

G. Section 260511, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS:

H. Requirements that apply to all sections of Division 26.

I. Section 260519, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND

CABLES:

J. Low-voltage conductors.

K. Section 260526, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS:

L. Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path to ground for possible

ground fault currents.

M. Section 262726, WIRING DEVICES:

N. Wiring devices used for control of the lighting systems.


A. Quality Assurance shall be in accordance with Paragraph, QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS

AND SERVICES) in Section 260511, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL

INSTALLATIONS.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Paragraph, SUBMITTALS in Section 260511, REQUIREMENTS

FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS, and the following requirements:

1. Shop Drawings:



Page 2 of 14

a. Submit the following information for each type of lighting fixture designated on the

LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE, arranged in order of lighting fixture designation.

b. Material and construction details include information on housing and optics system.

c. Physical dimensions and description.

d. Wiring schematic and connection diagram.

e. Installation details.

f. Energy efficiency data.

g. Photometric data based on laboratory tests complying with IES Lighting Measurements

testing and calculation guides.

h. Lamp data including lumen output (initial and mean), color rendition index (CRI), rated

life (hours), and color temperature (degrees Kelvin).

i. Ballast data including ballast type, starting method, ambient temperature, ballast factor,

sound rating, system watts, and total harmonic distortion (THD).

j. For LED lighting fixtures, submit US DOE LED Lighting Facts label, and IES L70 rated

life.

2. Manuals:

a. Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings, complete maintenance and operating

manuals, including technical data sheets, wiring diagrams, and information for ordering

replacement parts.

b. If changes have been made to the maintenance and operating manuals originally

submitted, submit updated maintenance and operating manuals two weeks prior to the

final inspection.

3. Certifications:

4. Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit the following.

a. Certification by the Contractor that the interior lighting systems have been properly

installed and tested.


A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata)

form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text

by designation only.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

C635/C635M REV A-13 Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension

Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings

C. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):



Page 3 of 14

40 CFR 261 Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste

D. Federal Communications Commission (FCC):

CFR Title 47, Part 15 Radio Frequency Devices

E. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA):

LM-79-08 Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products

LM-80-15 Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources

LM-82-12 Characterization of LED Light Engines and LED Lamps for Electrical and

Photometric Properties as a Function of Temperature

F. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):

C62.41-91(R1995) Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits

G. International Code Council (ICC):

IBC-15 International Building Code

H. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA):

C78.376-14 Chromaticity of Fluorescent Lamps

C82.1-04(R2015) Lamp Ballasts – Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts

C82.2-02(R2016) Method of Measurement of Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts

C82.4-17 Lamp Ballasts - Ballasts for High-Intensity Discharge and Low-Pressure

Sodium (LPS) Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type)

C82.11-17 Lamp Ballasts - High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts

LL 9-11 Dimming of T8 Fluorescent Lighting Systems

SSL 1-16 Electronic Drivers for LED Devices, Arrays, or Systems

I. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

70-17 National Electrical Code (NEC)

101-18 Life Safety Code

J. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

496-17 Lampholders

844-12 Luminaires for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations

924-16 Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment

1598-08 Luminaires

1574-04................ Track Lighting Systems

2108-15... Low-Voltage Lighting Systems

8750-15... Light Emitting Diode (LED) Light Sources for Use in Lighting Products

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. Shall be in accordance with NFPA, UL, as shown on drawings, and as specified.

B. Sheet Metal:

1. Shall be formed to prevent warping and sagging. Housing, trim and lens frame shall be true,

straight (unless intentionally curved), and parallel to each other as designed.



Page 4 of 14

2. Wire ways and fittings shall be free of burrs and sharp edges, and shall accommodate

internal and branch circuit wiring without damage to the wiring.

3. When installed, any exposed fixture housing surface, trim frame, door frame, and lens frame

shall be free of light leaks.

4. Hinged door frames shall operate smoothly without binding. Latches shall function easily

by finger action without the use of tools.

C. Ballasts and lamps shall be serviceable while the fixture is in its normally installed position.

Ballasts shall not be mounted to removable reflectors or wire way covers unless so specified.

D. Recessed fixtures mounted in an insulated ceiling shall be listed for use in insulated ceilings.

E. Mechanical Safety:

Lighting fixture closures (lens doors, trim frame, hinged housings, etc.) shall be retained in a

secure manner by captive screws, chains, aircraft cable, captive hinges, or fasteners such that

they cannot be accidentally dislodged during normal operation or routine maintenance.

F. Metal Finishes:

1. The manufacturer shall apply standard finish (unless otherwise specified) over a corrosion-

resistant primer, after cleaning to free the metal surfaces of rust, grease, dirt and other

deposits. Edges of pre-finished sheet metal exposed during forming, stamping or shearing

processes shall be finished in a similar corrosion resistant manner to match the adjacent

surface(s). Fixture finish shall be free of stains or evidence of rusting, blistering, or flaking,

and shall be applied after fabrication.

2. Interior light reflecting finishes shall be white with not less than 85 percent reflectance,

except where otherwise shown on the drawing.

3. Exterior finishes shall be as shown on the drawings.

G. Lighting fixtures shall have a specific means for grounding metallic wire ways and housings

to an equipment grounding conductor.

H. Light Transmitting Components for Fluorescent Fixtures:

1. Shall be 100 percent virgin acrylic.

2. Flat lens panels shall have not less than 3 mm (1/8 inch) of average thickness.

3. Unless otherwise specified, lenses, reflectors, diffusers, and louvers shall be retained firmly

in a metal frame by clips or clamping ring in such a manner as to allow expansion and

contraction without distortion or cracking.

I. Lighting fixtures in hazardous areas shall be suitable for installation in Class and Division

areas as defined in NFPA 70.

J. Compact fluorescent fixtures shall be manufactured specifically for compact fluorescent lamps

with ballast integral to the fixture. Assemblies designed to retrofit incandescent fixtures are

prohibited except when specifically indicated for renovation of existing fixtures.



Page 5 of 14

2.2 BALLASTS

A. Linear Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts:

Multi-voltage (120 – 277V), electronic rapid-start type, designed for type and quantity of lamps

indicated. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is

indicated. Ballasts shall include the following features:

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit (T5 lamps only).

2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.

3. Sound Rating: Class A.

4. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): 10 percent or less.

5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better.

6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.

7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.

8. Ballast Factor: 0.87 or higher unless otherwise indicated.

9. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.

10. EMR/RFI Interference:

Comply with CFR Title 47 Part 18 for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency

interference for non-consumer equipment.

11. To facilitate multi-level lamp switching, lamps within fixture shall be wired with the

outermost lamp at both sides of the fixture on the same ballast, the next inward pair on

another ballast and so on to the innermost lamp (or pair of lamps). Within a given room,

each switch shall uniformly control the same corresponding lamp (or lamp pairs) in all

fixture units that are being controlled.

12. Where three-lamp fixtures are indicated, unless switching arrangements dictate otherwise,

utilize a common two-lamp ballast to operate the center lamp in pairs of adjacent units that

are mounted in a continuous row. The ballast fixture and slave-lamp fixture shall be factory

wired with leads or plug devices to facilitate this circuiting. Individually mounted fixtures

and the odd fixture in a row shall utilize a single-lamp ballast for operation of the center

lamp.

13. Dimming ballasts shall be as per above, except dimmable from 100% to 5% of rated lamp

lumens. Dimming ballasts shall be fully compatible with the dimming controls.

B. Low-Frequency Linear T8 Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts (allowed for Surgery Suites, Critical

Care Units, and Animal Labs):

Multi-voltage (120 – 277V), hybrid electronic-electromagnetic rapid-start type, designed for

type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output. Ballasts

shall include the following features:

1. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.



Page 6 of 14

2. Sound Rating: Class A

3. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): 20 percent or less

4. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better

5. Operating Frequency: 60 Hz

6. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less

7. Ballast Factor: 0.85 or higher unless otherwise indicated

8. Power Factor: 0.90 or higher

9. Interference: Comply with CFR Title 47 Part 18 for limitations on electromagnetic and

radio-frequency interference for non-consumer equipment.

10. To facilitate multi-level lamp switching, lamps within fixture shall be wired with the

outermost lamp at both sides of the fixture on the same ballast, the next inward pair on

another ballast and so on to the innermost lamp (or pair of lamps). Within a given room,

each switch shall uniformly control the same corresponding lamp (or lamp pairs) in all

fixture units that are being controlled.

11. Where three-lamp fixtures are indicated, unless switching arrangements dictate otherwise,

utilize a common two-lamp ballast to operate the center lamp in pairs of adjacent units that

are mounted in a continuous row. The ballast fixture and slave-lamp fixture shall be factory

wired with leads or plug devices to facilitate this circuiting. Individually mounted fixtures

and the odd fixture in a row shall utilize a single-lamp ballast for operation of the center

lamp.

C. Compact Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts:

Multi-voltage (120 – 277V), electronic programmed rapid-start type, designed for type and

quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-

level control is indicated. Ballasts shall include the following features:

1. Lamp end of life detection and shutdown circuit

2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement

3. Sound Rating: Class A

4. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): 10 percent or less

5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better

6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher


8. Ballast Factor: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated




Page 7 of 14

10. Interference: Comply with CFR Title 47 Part 18 for limitations on electromagnetic and

radio-frequency interference for non-consumer equipment.

11. Dimming ballasts shall be as per above, except dimmable from 100% to 5% of rated lamp

lumens. Dimming ballasts shall be fully compatible with the dimming controls.

D. Ballasts for HID fixtures:

Multi-tap voltage (120 – 480V) electromagnetic ballast for high intensity discharge lamps.

Include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high power factor type

2. Minimum Starting Temperature: 32 F (0 C) for single-lamp ballasts

3. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 F (40 C)

4. Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life.

5. Low-Noise Ballasts:

Manufacturers' standard epoxy-encapsulated models designed to minimize audible fixture

noise.

E. Electronic ballast for HID metal-halide lamps shall include the following features unless

otherwise indicated:

1. Minimum Starting Temperature: 32-degree F (0 degree C) for single-lamp ballasts

2. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 130 degree F (54 degree C).

3. Lamp end of life detection and shutdown circuit

4. Sound Rating: Class A.

5. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): 20 percent or less.

6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better.



9. Interference:

Comply with CFR Title 47 Part 18 for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency

interference for non-consumer equipment.

10. Protection: Resettable thermal

2.3 FLUORESCENT EMERGENCY BALLAST

A. Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting fixture housing

and compatible with ballast.

1. Emergency Connection:



Page 8 of 14

Operate one fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an output of 1100 lumens each. Connect un-

switched circuit to battery inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast.

2. Test Push Button and Indicator Light:

a. Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering ceiling space

b. Push Button:

i. Push to test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates

unit operability.

c. Indicator Light:

i. LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow

indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type

4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid state, constant current type with sealed power transfer relay

5. Integral Self-Test:

a. Automatically initiates test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure

is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing LED.

2.4 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNIT

A. Complete, self-contained unit with batteries, battery charger, one or more local or remote lamp

heads with lamps, under-voltage relay, and test switch.

1. Enclosure:

Shall be impact resistant thermoplastic. Enclosure shall be suitable for the environmental

conditions in which installed.

2. Lamp Heads: Horizontally and vertically adjustable, mounted on the face of the unit, except

where otherwise indicated.

3. Lamps: Shall be sealed beam LED, rated not less than 12 watts at the specified DC voltage.

4. Battery: Shall be maintenance free nickel cadmium. Minimum normal life shall be

minimum of 10 years.

5. Battery Charger:

Dry type full-wave rectifier with charging rates to maintain the battery in fully-charged

condition during normal operation, and to automatically recharge the battery within 12 hours

following a 1-1/2 hour continuous discharge.

6. Integral Self-Test:

Automatically initiates test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is

annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing LED.

2.5 LAMPS



Page 9 of 14

A. Linear and U-shaped T5 and T8 Fluorescent Lamps:

1. Except as indicated below, lamps shall be low-mercury energy saving type, have a color

temperature between 3500 and 5000 K, a Color Rendering Index (CRI) equal or greater

than 80, average rated life equal to or greater than 24,000 hours when used with an instant

start ballast and 30,000 hours when used with a programmed or rapid start ballast (based

on 3 hour starts), and be suitable for use with dimming ballasts, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Lamps shall comply with EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leachate Procedure (TCLP)

requirements.

B. Compact Fluorescent Lamps:

1. T4, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, average rated life equal to or greater

than 12,000 hours (based on 3 hour starts), and suitable for use with dimming ballasts,


2. Lamps shall comply with EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leachate Procedure (TCLP)

requirements.

2.6 RADIO-INTERFERENCE-FREE FLUORESCENT FIXTURES

A. Shall be specially designed for suppressing radio-frequency energy produced within the

fixtures and shall comply with Department of Defense MIL-STD-461F and IEC IP65.

B. Lenses shall have metal mesh to prevent or reduce radio-frequency interference. The effective

light transmittance of the lenses shall be a minimum of 75 percent.

C. Fixture finish shall be anti-microbial.

D. Provide RFI line filters integral to the fixtures and wired in series with the supply circuit

conductors.

E. Ballasts shall be as specified in this Section.

2.7 WALL MOUNTED FLUORESCENT BEDLIGHT FIXTURES

A. Fixtures shall be lensed.

B. Fixtures shall be rated for 120 Volt operation and be powered through the patient wall unit per

Section 10 25 13, PATIENT BED SERVICE WALLS.

C. Provide 4 position, pull cord switch to control the upward and downward portion of the light

separately and simultaneously. Include an off position, except in single bedrooms where the

switch shall energize and de-energize the downward light only. In the single bedrooms, provide

a 2-position pull cord switch for "on-off" control of the downward lamps.

D. Provide low-voltage relays and switching integration with patient bed controls.

2.8 X-RAY FILM ILLUMINATORS



Page 10 of 14

A. Shall be the high-intensity type, flush-mounted in the walls. Multiples of the basic unit may be

combined in a common housing.

B. Shall have the following features:

1. Fluorescent lighting designed to provide uniform diffusion of the light.

2. Box dimensions approximately 530 mm (21 inches) high, 355 mm (14 inches) wide and

100 mm (4 inches) deep.

3. Housing shall be steel. Trim shall be stainless steel and shall extend approximately 40 mm

(1-1/2 inches) from the edges of the housing.

4. Viewing panel shall thermoplastic, not less than 3 mm (1/8 inch) thick.

5. Viewing panel shall have adequate dimensions so the films will not overlap the frame and

will be positioned with respect to the light source for even illumination without shadows.

6. An ON-OFF double-pole, double-throw switch.

2.9 LED EXIT LIGHT FIXTURES

A. Exit light fixtures shall meet applicable requirements of NFPA and UL.

B. Housing and door shall be die-cast aluminum.

C. For general purpose exit light fixtures, door frame shall be hinged, with latch. For vandal-

resistant exit light fixtures, door frame shall be secured with tamper-resistant screws.

D. Finish shall be satin or fine-grain brushed aluminum.

E. There shall be no radioactive material used in the fixtures.

F. Fixtures:

1. Inscription panels shall be cast or stamped aluminum a minimum of 2.25 mm (0.090 inch)

thick, stenciled with 150 mm (6 inch) high letters, baked with red color stable plastic or

fiberglass. Lamps shall be luminous Light Emitting Diodes (LED) mounted in center of

letters on red color stable plastic or fiberglass.

2. Double-Faced Fixtures: Provide double-faced fixtures where required or as shown on

drawings.

3. Directional Arrows:

Provide directional arrows as part of the inscription panel where required or as shown on

drawings. Directional arrows shall be the "chevron-type" of similar size and width as the letters

and meet the requirements of NFPA 101.

G. Voltage: Multi-voltage (120 – 277V)

2.10 LED LIGHT FIXTURES

A. General:



Page 11 of 14

1. LED light fixtures shall be in accordance with IES, NFPA, UL, as shown on the drawings,

and as specified.

2. LED light fixtures shall be Reduction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)-compliant.

3. LED drivers shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

a. Minimum efficiency: 85% at full load.

b. Minimum Operating Ambient Temperature: -20˚ C. (-4˚ F.)

c. Input Voltage: 120 - 277V (±10%) at 60 Hz.

d. Integral short circuit, open circuit, and overload protection.

e. Power Factor: ≥ 0.95.

f. Total Harmonic Distortion: ≤ 20%.

g. Comply with FCC 47 CFR Part 15.

4. LED modules shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

a. Comply with IES LM-79 and LM-80 requirements.

b. Minimum CRI 80 and color temperature 3000˚ K unless otherwise specified in

LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE.

c. Minimum Rated Life: 50,000 hours per IES L70.

d. Light output lumens as indicated in the LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE.

B. LED Downlights:

1. Housing, LED driver, and LED module shall be products of the same manufacturer.

C. LED Troffers:

1. LED drivers, modules, and reflector shall be accessible, serviceable, and replaceable from

below the ceiling.

2. Housing, LED driver, and LED module shall be products of the same manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, manufacturer's instructions, and as shown on

the drawings or specified.

B. Align, mount, and level the lighting fixtures uniformly.



Page 12 of 14

C. Wall-mounted fixtures shall be attached to the studs in the walls, or to a 20-gauge metal

backing plate that is attached to the studs in the walls. Lighting fixtures shall not be attached

directly to gypsum board.

D. Lighting Fixture Supports:

1. Shall provide support for all of the fixtures. Supports may be anchored to channels of the

ceiling construction, to the structural slab or to structural members within a partition, or

above a suspended ceiling.

2. Shall maintain the fixture positions after cleaning and re-lamping.

3. Shall support the lighting fixtures without causing the ceiling or partition to deflect.

4. Hardware for recessed lighting fixtures:

a. All fixture mounting devices connecting fixtures to the ceiling system or building

structure shall have a capacity for a horizontal force of 100 percent of the fixture weight

and a vertical force of 400 percent of the fixture weight.

b. Mounting devices shall clamp the fixture to the ceiling system structure (main grid

runners or fixture framing cross runners) at four points in such a manner as to resist

spreading of these supporting members. Each support point device shall utilize a screw

or approved hardware to "lock" the fixture housing to the ceiling system, restraining the

fixture from movement in any direction relative to the ceiling. The screw (size No. 10

minimum) or approved hardware shall pass through the ceiling member (T-bar, channel

or spline), or it may extend over the inside of the flange of the channel (or spline) that

faces away from the fixture, in a manner that prevents any fixture movement.

c. In addition to the above, the following is required for fixtures exceeding 9 kg (20 pounds)

in weight.

i. Where fixtures mounted in ASTM Standard C635 "Intermediate Duty" and "Heavy

Duty" ceilings and weigh between 9 kg and 25 kg (20 pounds and 56 pounds),

provide two 12-gauge safety hangers hung slack between diagonal corners of the

fixture and the building structure.

ii. Where fixtures weigh over 25 kg (56 pounds), they shall be independently supported

from the building structure by approved hangers. Two-way angular bracing of

hangers shall be provided to prevent lateral motion.

d. Where ceiling cross runners are installed for support of lighting fixtures, they must have

a carrying capacity equal to that of the main ceiling runners and be rigidly secured to

the main runners.

5. Surface mounted lighting fixtures:



Page 13 of 14

a. Fixtures shall be bolted against the ceiling independent of the outlet box at four points

spaced near the corners of each unit. The bolts (or stud-clips) shall be minimum 6 mm

(1/4 inch) bolt, secured to main ceiling runners and/or secured to cross runners.

Non-turning studs may be attached to the main ceiling runners and cross runners with

special non-friction clip devices designed for the purpose, provided they bolt through

the runner, or are also secured to the building structure by 12-gauge safety hangers.

Studs or bolts securing fixtures weighing in excess of 25 kg (56 pounds) shall be

supported directly from the building structure.

b. Where ceiling cross runners are installed for support of lighting fixtures, they must have

a carrying capacity equal to that of the main ceiling runners and be rigidly secured to

the main runners.

c. Fixtures less than 6.8 kg (15 pounds) in weight and occupying less than 3715 sq cm (two

square feet) of ceiling area may, when designed for the purpose, be supported directly

from the outlet box when all the following conditions are met.

i. Screws attaching the fixture to the outlet box pass through round holes (not key-hole

slots) in the fixture body.

ii. The outlet box is attached to a main ceiling runner (or cross runner) with approved

hardware.

iii. The outlet box is supported vertically from the building structure.

d. Fixtures mounted in open construction shall be secured directly to the building structure

with approved bolting and clamping devices.

6. Single or double pendant-mounted lighting fixtures:

a. Each stem shall be supported by an approved outlet box mounted swivel joint and canopy

which holds the stem captive and provides spring load (or approved equivalent)

dampening of fixture oscillations. Outlet box shall be supported vertically from the

building structure.

7. Outlet boxes for support of lighting fixtures (where permitted) shall be secured directly to

the building structure with approved devices or supported vertically in a hung ceiling from

the building structure with a nine gauge wire hanger, and be secured by an approved device

to a main ceiling runner or cross runner to prevent any horizontal movement relative to the

ceiling.

E. Furnish and install the new lamps as specified for all lighting fixtures installed under this

project, and for all existing lighting fixtures reused under this project.

F. The electrical and ceiling trades shall coordinate to ascertain that approved lighting fixtures

are furnished in the proper sizes and installed with the proper devices (hangers, clips, trim

frames, flanges, etc.), to match the ceiling system being installed.

G. Bond lighting fixtures to the grounding system as specified in Section 260526, GROUNDING

AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.



Page 14 of 14

H. At completion of project, replace all defective components of the lighting fixtures at no cost to

the Government.

I. Dispose of lamps per requirements of Section 017419, CONSTRUCTION WASTE

MANAGEMENT, and Section 024100, DEMOLITION.

3.2 ACCEPTANCE CHECKS AND TESTS

J. Perform the following:

1. Visual Inspection:

a. Verify proper operation by operating the lighting controls.

b. Visually inspect for damage to fixtures, lenses, reflectors, diffusers, and louvers. Clean

fixtures, lenses, reflectors, diffusers, and louvers that have accumulated dust, dirt, or

fingerprints during construction.

2. Electrical tests:

a. Exercise dimming components of the lighting fixtures over full range of dimming

capability by operating the control devices(s) in the presence of the //Resident Engineer//

//COTR//. Observe for visually detectable flicker over full dimming range and replace

defective components at no cost to the Government.

b. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to

occupancy by Government. Burn-in period to be 40 hours minimum, unless specifically

recommended otherwise by the lamp manufacturer. Burn-in dimmed fluorescent and

compact fluorescent lamps for at least 100 hours at full voltage, unless specifically

recommended otherwise by the lamp manufacturer. Replace any lamps and ballasts

which fail during burn-in.

3.3 FOLLOW-UP VERIFICATION

A. Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests, the Contractor shall show by demonstration

in service that the lighting systems are in good operating condition and properly performing

the intended function.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 265151 INTERIOR LIGHTING GOVERNMENT OF THE U. S. VIRGIN ISLANDS, DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 6

PART 1 GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes interior lighting fixtures, lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting units, and

accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Emergency Lighting Unit:

A fixture with integral emergency battery powered supply and the means for controlling and

charging the battery. It is also known as an emergency light set.

B. Fixture:

A complete lighting unit, exit sign, or emergency lighting unit. Fixtures include lamps and

parts required to distribute light, position and protect lamps, and connect lamps to power

supply. Internal battery powered exit signs and emergency lighting units also include a battery

and the means for controlling and recharging the battery. Emergency lighting units include

ones with and without integral lamp heads.

C. Average Life: The time after which 50 percent fails and 50 percent survives under normal

conditions.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General:

Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1


B. Product Data describing fixtures, lamps, ballasts, and emergency lighting units. Arrange

Product Data for fixtures in order of fixture designation. Include data on features and

accessories and the following:

1. Outline drawings indicating dimensions and principal features of fixtures.

2. Electrical Ratings and Photometric Data: Certified results of independent laboratory tests

for fixtures and lamps.

3. Battery and charger data for emergency lighting units.

C. Maintenance data for fixtures to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in

Division.


A. Electrical Component Standard:

Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and that are listed and labeled by UL where

available.


Page 2 of 6

B. Listing and Labeling:

Provide fixtures, emergency lighting units, and accessory components specified in this Section

that are listed and labeled for their indicated use and installation conditions on Project. The

Terms "Listed" and "Labeled" as defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.

1. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing


C. Coordinate fixtures, mounting hardware, and trim with ceiling system and other items,

including work of other trades, required to be mounted on ceiling or in ceiling space.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty:

The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the

Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to,

and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the

Contract Documents.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with

protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.

1. Lamps: 10 lamps for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of

each type.

2. Ballasts: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products:

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified in each Interior

Lighting Fixture Schedule as indicated on the drawings.

2.2 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE COMPONENTS, GENERAL

A. Metal Parts: Free from burrs, sharp comers, and edges.

B. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, except as indicated. Form and support to prevent warping

and sagging.

C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access:

Smooth operating, free from light leakage under operating conditions, and arranged to permit

re-lamping without use of tools. Arrange doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other pieces to

prevent accidental falling during re-lamping and when secured in operating position.

D. Reflecting Surfaces: Minimum reflectance as follows, except as otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent

2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent


Page 3 of 6

3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent

4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent

E. Lens glasses, Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic or water white,

annealed crystal s, except as otherwise indicated.

1. Lens Thickness: 0.125-inch (3 mm) minimum; except where greater thickness is indicated.

2. Plastic: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and

UV radiation.

F. Fixture Support Components: Comply with Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials

and Methods."

1. Single-Stem Hangers:

1/2-inch (12-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fitting and ceiling canopy. Finish same as

fixture.

2. Twin-Stem Hangers:

Two, 1/2-inch (12-mm) steel tubes with single canopy arranged to mount a single fixture.

Finish same as fixture.

3. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod

4. Hook Hanger:

Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded

attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

G. Fluorescent Fixtures: Conform to UL 1570.

H. Fluorescent Ballasts:

Electronic integrated circuit, solid-state, full-light-output, energy-efficient type compatible with

lamps and lamp combinations to which connected.

1. Certification by Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL).

2. Labeling by Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association (CBM).

3. Type: Class P, high power factor, except as otherwise indicated

4. Sound Rating: "A" rating, except as otherwise indicated

5. Voltage: Match connected circuits

6. Lamp Flicker: Less than 5 percent.

7. Minimum Power Factor: 90 percent

8. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of Ballast Current: Less than 20 percent

9. Conform to FCC Regulations Part 15, Subpart J for electromagnetic interference.

10. Conform to IEEE C62.41, Category A, for resistance to voltage surges for normal and

common modes.


Page 4 of 6

11. Multi-lamp Ballasts: Use 2, 3, or 4 lamp ballasts for multi-lamp fixtures where possible.

12. Lamp-ballast connection method does not reduce normal rated life of lamps.

I. Exit Signs: Conform to UL 924 and the following:

1. Sign Colors: Conform to local code.

2. Minimum Height of Letters: Conform to local code

3. Arrows: Include as indicated

4. Lamps for AC Operation: Light-emitting diodes (LED), 70,000 hours minimum rated life

J. Emergency Lighting Units: Conform to UL 924. Provide self-contained units with the

following features:

1. Battery:

Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-calcium type with minimum 10-year nominal life and special

warranty.

2. Charger: Minimum 2-rate, fully automatic, solid-state type, with sealed transfer relay.

3. Operation:

Relay automatically turns lamp on when supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal

voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches

deep-discharge level. Relay disconnects lamps and battery and automatically recharges and

floats on trickle charger when normal voltage is restored.

2.3 LAMPS

A. Comply with ANSI C78 series that is applicable to each type of lamp.

B. Fluorescent Color Temperature and Minimum Color-Rendering Index (CRI): 4800 K and 85

CRI, except as otherwise indicated.

C. Not Compact Fluorescent Lamp Life: Rated average is 20,000 hours at 3 hours per start when

used on rapid start circuits.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Manufacturer's standard, except as otherwise indicated, applied over corrosion resistant

treatment or primer, free of streaks, runs, holidays, stains, blisters, and similar defects.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Set units plumb, square, and level with ceiling and walls, and secure according to

manufacturer's written instructions and approved Shop Drawings. Support fixtures according

to requirements of Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

B. Support for Recessed and Semi-recessed Grid Type Fluorescent Fixtures:


Page 5 of 6

Units may be supported from suspended ceiling support system. Install ceiling support system

rods or wires at a minimum of 4 rods or wires for each fixture, located not more than 6 inches

(150 mm) from fixture comers.

1. Install support clips for recessed fixtures, securely fastened to ceiling grid members, at or

near each fixture comer.

2. Fixtures Smaller than Ceiling Grid:

3. Install a minimum of 4 rods or wires for each fixture and locate at comer of ceiling grid

where fixture is located. Do not support fixtures by ceiling acoustical panels.

4. Fixtures of Sizes Less than Ceiling Grid:

Center in acoustical panel. Support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch (20-mm)

metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.

C. Support for Suspended Fixtures:

Brace pendants and rods over 48 inches (1200 mm) long to limit swinging. Support stem

mounted, single unit, suspended fluorescent fixtures with twin-stem hangers. For continuous

rows, use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit

length of chassis, including one at each end.

D. Lamping: Where specific lamp designations are not indicated, lamp units according to

manufacturer's instructions.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground lighting unit:

Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, according to

manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not

indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replaced damaged fixtures and components.

B. Give advance notice of dates and times for field tests.

C. Provide instruments to make and record test results.

D. Tests:

Verify normal operation of each fixture after fixtures have been installed and circuits have been

energized with normal power source. Interrupt electrical energy to demonstrate proper

operation of emergency lighting installation. Include the following information in tests of

emergency lighting equipment:

1. Duration of supply.

2. Low battery voltage shutdown.

3. Normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal.

4. Low supply voltage transfer.


Page 6 of 6

E. Replace or repair malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until

all units operate properly.

F. Report results of tests.

G. Replace fixtures that show evidence of corrosion during Project warranty period.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean fixtures after installation. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.

B. Adjust aimed fixtures to provide required light intensities.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 265600- EXTERIOR LIGHTING GOVERNMENT OF THE U. S. VIRGIN ISLANDS, DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS

Page 1 of 7

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of exterior fixtures, poles,

and supports. The terms “lighting fixtures”, “fixture” and “luminaire” are used

interchangeably.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 033000, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

B. Section 090600, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES:

Finishes for exterior light poles and luminaires.

C. Section 260511, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS:

General electrical requirements and items that are common to more than one section of

Division 26.

D. Section 260519, LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

(600 VOLTS AND BELOW):

Low voltage power and lighting wiring.

E. Section 260526, GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS:

Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground

fault currents.

F. Section 260533, RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS:

Conduits, fittings, and boxes for raceway systems.

G. Section 260541, UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION: Underground

handholes and conduits.

H. Section 260923, LIGHTING CONTROLS: Controls for exterior lighting.


A. Quality Assurance shall be in accordance with Paragraph, QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS

AND SERVICES) in Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL

INSTALLATIONS.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Paragraph, SUBMITTALS in Section 260511, REQUIREMENTS

FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS, and the following requirements:

1. Shop Drawings:

a. Submit the following information for each type of lighting fixture designated on the

LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE, arranged in order of lighting fixture designation.

b. Material and construction details include information on housing and optics system.

c. Physical dimensions and description.


Page 2 of 7

d. Wiring schematic and connection diagram.

e. Installation details.

f. Energy efficiency data.

g. Photometric data based on laboratory tests complying with IES Lighting Measurements

testing and calculation guides.

h. Lamp data including lumen output (initial and mean), color rendition index (CRI), rated

life (hours), and color temperature (degrees Kelvin).

i. Ballast data including ballast type, starting method, ambient temperature, ballast factor,

sound rating, system watts, and total harmonic distortion (THD).

j. For LED lighting fixtures, submit US DOE LED Lighting Facts label, and IES L70 rated

life.

k. Submit site plan showing all exterior lighting fixtures with fixture tags consistent with

Lighting Fixture Schedule as shown on drawings. Site plan shall show computer

generated point–by-point illumination calculations. Include lamp lumen and light loss

factors used in calculations.

2. Manuals:

a. Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings, complete maintenance and operating

manuals, including technical data sheets, wiring diagrams, and information for ordering

replacement parts.

b. If changes have been made to the maintenance and operating manuals originally

submitted, submit updated maintenance and operating manuals two weeks prior to the

final inspection.

3. Certifications:

4. Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit the following.

a. Certification by the Contractor that the exterior lighting systems have been properly

installed and tested.


A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata)

form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text

by designation only.

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 318-14 Building Code Requirements for Structural

Concrete

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

H35.1/H35 1M-17 American National Standard Alloy and Temper Designation Systems for

Aluminum

D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):


Page 3 of 7

A123/A123M-17 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

A153/A153M-16 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

B108/B108M-15 Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings

C1089-13 Spun Cast Prestressed Concrete Poles

E. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA):

HB-9-00 Lighting Handbook

RP-8-14 Roadway Lighting

LM-72-97(R2010) Directional Positioning of Photometric Data

LM-79-08 Approved Method for the Electrical and Photometric Measurements of

Solid-State Lighting Products

LM-80-15 Approved Method for Measuring Luminous Flux and Color Maintenance

of LED Packages, Arrays and Modules

TM-15-11 Luminaire Classification System for Outdoor Luminaires

F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

C81.61-17 Electrical Lamp Bases – Specifications for Bases (Caps) for Electric

Lamps

C136.3-14 For Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment – Luminaire Attachments

ICS 2-00(R2005) Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays Rated 600 Volts

ICS 6-93(R2016) Enclosures

G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

70-17 National Electrical Code (NEC)

101-18 Life Safety Code

H. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

496-17 Lamp holders

773-16 Plug-In, Locking Type Photocontrols for Use with Area Lighting

773A-16 Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for Lighting Control

1598-08 Luminaires

8750-15................. Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products


A. Provide manufacturer’s standard provisions for protecting pole finishes during transport,

storage, and installation. Do not store poles on ground. Store poles so they are at least 305

mm (12 inches) above ground level and growing vegetation. Do not remove factory-applied

pole wrappings until just before installing pole.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Luminaires, materials and equipment shall be in accordance with NEC, UL, ANSI, and as

shown on the drawings and specified.

2.2 POLES

A. General:


Page 4 of 7

1. Poles shall be as shown on the drawings, and as specified. Finish shall be as specified on

the drawings.

2. The pole and arm assembly shall be designed for wind loading of 175 mph minimum, as

required by wind loading conditions at project site, with an additional 30% gust factor and

supporting luminaire(s) and accessories such as shields, banner arms, and banners that have

the effective projected areas indicated. The effective projected area of the pole shall be

applied at the height of the pole base, as shown on the drawings.

3. Poles shall be //embedded// //anchor-bolt// type designed for use with underground supply

conductors. Poles shall have hand hole having a minimum clear opening of 65 x 125 mm

(2.5 x 5 inches). Hand hole covers shall be secured by stainless steel captive screws.

4. Provide a steel-grounding stud opposite hand hole openings, designed to prevent

electrolysis when used with copper wire.

5. Provide a base cover that matches the pole in material and color to conceal the mounting

hardware pole-base welds and anchor bolts.

6. Hardware and Accessories:

7. All necessary hardware and specified accessories shall be the product of the pole

manufacturer.

8. Provide manufacturer's standard finish, as scheduled on the drawings. Where indicated on

drawings, provide finishes as indicated in Section 090600, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.

B. Types:

1. Concrete: Provide round or multi-sided concrete poles conforming to ASTM C1089 with

integral cast bases. Poles shall have hollow core suitable as a raceway.

2.3 FOUNDATIONS FOR POLES

A. Foundations shall be cast-in-place concrete, having 3000 psi minimum 28-day compressive

strength.

B. Foundations shall support the effective projected area of the specified pole, arm(s),

luminaire(s), and accessories, such as shields, banner arms, and banners, under wind

conditions previously specified in this section.

C. Place concrete in spirally wrapped treated paper forms for round foundations.

D. Rub-finish and round all above-grade concrete edges to approximately 6 mm (0.25-inch)

radius.

E. Anchor bolt assemblies and reinforcing of concrete foundations shall be as shown on the

drawings. Anchor bolts shall be in a welded cage or properly positioned by the tie wire to

stirrups.

F. Prior to concrete pour, install electrode per Section 260526, GROUNDING AND BONDING

FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

2.4 LUMINAIRES


Page 5 of 7

A. Luminaires shall be weatherproof, heavy duty, outdoor types designed for efficient light

utilization, adequate dissipation of lamp and ballast heat, and safe cleaning and re-lamping.

B. Illumination distribution patterns, BUG ratings and cutoff types as defined by the IESNA shall

be as shown on the drawings.

C. Incorporate ballasts in the luminaire housing, except where otherwise shown on the drawings.

D. Lenses shall be frame-mounted, heat-resistant, borosilicate glass, with prismatic refractors,

unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Attach the frame to the luminaire housing by hinges

or chain. Use heat and aging-resistant, resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and

refractors in luminaire doors.

E. Pre-wire internal components to terminal strips at the factory.

F. Bracket-mounted luminaires shall have leveling provisions and clamp-type adjustable slip-

fitters with locking screws.

G. Materials shall be rustproof. Latches and fittings shall be non-ferrous metal.

H. Provide manufacturer's standard finish, as scheduled on the drawings. Where indicated on

drawings, match finish process and color of pole or support materials. Where indicated on

drawings, provide finishes as indicated in Section 090600, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.

I. Luminaires shall carry factory labels, showing complete, specific lamp and ballast information.

2.5 LAMPS

A. Install the proper lamps in every luminaire installed as shown on the drawings.

B. Lamps shall be general-service, LED outdoor lighting types.

C. LED sources shall meet the following requirements:

1. Operating temperature rating shall be up to 65 degrees C (150 degrees F).

2. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): 5700K

3. Color Rendering Index (CRI): 85.

4. The manufacturer shall have performed reliability tests on the LEDs luminaires complying

with Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) LM79 for photometric performance and

LM80 for lumen maintenance and L70 life.

D. Mercury vapor lamps shall not be used.

2.6 LED DRIVERS

A. LED drivers shall meet the following requirements:

1. Drivers shall have a minimum efficiency of 85%.

2. Input Voltage: 120 to 480 (±10%) volt.

3. Power Supplies: Class I or II output.


Page 6 of 7

4. Surge Protection:

The system must survive 250 repetitive strikes of “C Low” (C Low: 6kV/1.2 x 50 μs, 10kA/8 x

20 μs) waveforms at 1-minute intervals with less than 10% degradation in clamping voltage. “C

Low” waveforms are as defined in IEEE/ASNI C62.41.2-2002, Scenario 1 Location Category

C.

5. Power Factor (PF): ≥ 0.90.

6. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): ≤ 20%.

7. Comply with FCC Title 47 CFR Part 18 Non-consumer RFI/EMI Standards.

8. Drivers shall be reduction of hazardous substances (ROHS)-compliant.

2.7 EXISTING LIGHTING SYSTEMS

A. For modifications or additions to existing lighting systems, the new components shall be

compatible with the existing systems.

B. New poles and luminaires shall have approximately the same configurations, dimensions,

lamping and reflector type as the existing poles and luminaires, except where otherwise shown

on the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install lighting in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the drawings, and in accordance with

manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Pole Foundations:

1. Excavate only as necessary to provide sufficient working clearance for installation of forms

and proper use of tamper to the full depth of the excavation. Prevent surface water from

flowing into the excavation. Thoroughly compact backfill with compacting arranged to

prevent pressure between conductor, jacket, or sheath, and the end of conduit.

2. Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by the pole manufacturer.

3. Install poles as necessary to provide a permanent vertical position with the bracket arm in

proper position for luminaire location.

4. After the poles have been installed, shimmed, and plumbed, grout the spaces between the

pole bases and the concrete base with non-shrink concrete grout material. Provide a plastic

or copper tube, of not less than 9 mm (0.375-inch) inside diameter through the grout, tight

to the top of the concrete base to prevent moisture weeping from the interior of the pole.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.

D. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming.

3.2 GROUNDING


Page 7 of 7

A. Ground noncurrent-carrying parts of equipment, including metal poles, luminaires, mounting

arms, brackets, and metallic enclosures, as specified in Section 260526, GROUNDING AND

BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. Where copper grounding conductor is

connected to a metal other than copper, provide specially treated or lined connectors suitable

and listed for this purpose.

3.3 ACCEPTANCE CHECKS AND TESTS

A. Verify operation after installing luminaires and energizing circuits.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 312110 - CLEARING AND GRUBBING

Government of the Virgin Islands, Department of Public Works PART 1 GENERAL


A. Clearing trees, brush, and other vegetation

B. Removing stumps and root systems

C. Removing surface debris and rubbish

1.2 REFERENCED SECTIONS

A. FHWA FP-14 Standard Specifications for Construction of Roads and Bridges on Federal Highway

Projects, 2014 edition

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Staging Plan if stumps are to be ground for mulch showing proposed staging areas and duration

of activities.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Identify all existing utilities, structures, vegetation, and other features designated to remain.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect existing utilities, structures, vegetation and other features designated to remain.

B. Protect benchmarks, survey stakes and the like from damage and displacement.

C. Paint all cut or damaged surfaces larger than 1-1/2 inches on trees or shrubs selected to remain with an

approved wound dressing. 3.3 TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL

A. Conform to the requirements of USVI, DPNR, FP-14 and the project’s “Earth Change" permit for

temporary erosion control measures.

3.4 CLEARING

A. Clear all trees, vegetation (except grass), down timber, snags, and brush within areas required for access

to and execution of the work except for areas or features designated to remain.

B. Trees, brush, and other vegetation in areas to be cleared shall be cut off flush with or below the ground

surface.

C. Trim dead branches 1-1/2 inches or more in diameter and such other branches as may be shown on the

Plans from trees designated to remain

D. Limbs and branches to be trimmed shall be neatly cut close to the trunk or main branch. Paint all cuts 1-

1/2 inches or more in diameter with an approved wound dressing.

SECTION 312110 - CLEARING AND GRUBBING

Government of the Virgin Islands, Department of Public Works

Page 2 of 2

3.5 GRUBBING

A. Remove all stumps, root systems, matted roots, debris, and rubbish to 18 inches below the bottom of

excavation (or original ground surface, if no excavation is required).

B. Fill and compact all depressions resulting from grubbing operations to conform to adjacent soil

conditions.

C. Perform all operations so as to minimize loss of topsoil.

3.6 DISPOSAL

A. No burning of cleared or grubbed material will be allowed on site.

B. All cleared and grubbed materials shall become the sole property of the CONTRACTOR, and shall

be removed from the site.

C. If grinding stumps for mulch, conform to the approved Staging Plan for grubbing operations.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 312200-EARTHWORK


Page 1 of 8

PART 1- GENERAL

1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. Without limiting the generality thereof, the work under this Section includes the furnishing of all labor,

equipment, supplies and materials and the performing of all operations in connection with but not

necessarily limited to the following items:

1. Rock blasting and removal as required, for excavation to the lines and grades indicated on the

Drawings. Note: Rock blasting will not be allowed for this project.

2. Excavation and disposal of unsuitable or excess materials. Excavation of all traces of loam within the

excavation and fill limits. Removal of all excess materials.

3. Excavation, fill, and compaction as indicated or required for the grading of the new paved drives,

walks and parking areas.

4. Base and sub-base course material under pavements, slabs and footings, including compaction.

5. Dewatering and control of water for all construction operations.

6. Protection of existing buildings, pavements and utilities to remain.

7. Dust and environmental controls.

8. Trench and pit excavation, bedding, and backfill for all utilities, including compaction.

9. Sheeting, shoring and bracing of structural and trench excavations.

B. Subsurface investigations have been executed and the results are included on the Drawings. These results

are furnished for the Contractor's general information only. The Engineer assumes no responsibility for

their completeness, accuracy or correctness. 1.02 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Utilities:

1. The locations of known buried water lines, sewer lines, telephones cables, storm drains, culverts, gas

mains, electric conduits, and other and other utilities are shown on the Drawings. No guarantee is

made as to the correctness of the locations shown and to the completeness of the information given.

The information shown is based upon a boundary survey done by BGM Engineers and Surveyors

dated May 1, 2014. It is also based upon field observation and interviews with the Owner.

2. Discontinue excavation by machinery when the excavation approaches pipes, conduits, or other

underground structures of which the approximate locations are known. Use manual excavation

methods to locate the obstructions.

B. Existing Structures:

1. Perform excavation in such a manner that will prevent any possibility of undermining and disturbing

the foundations of any existing structures and any work previously completed under this Contract.

2. Where existing buildings and other structures are in close proximity to the proposed construction,

exercise extreme caution and utilize sheeting, bracing, and whatever other precautionary measures

that may be required.



Page 2 of 8

C. Repairing Damage:

Repair, or have repaired, all damage to existing utilities, structures, lawns, other public and private

property which results from construction operations, at no additional expense to the Owner, to the

complete satisfaction of the Engineer, the utility company and the property owner.

D. Do not leave any trenches open overnight.

E. Trench Bracing:

Properly support all trenches in strict accordance with all pertinent rules and regulations. Brace, sheet,

and support trench walls in such a manner that they will be safe and that the ground alongside the

excavation will not slide or settle, and that all existing improvements of every kind, whether on public or

private property, will be fully protected from damage. In the event of damage to such improvements,

immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Engineer and at no

additional cost to the Owner. PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.01 FILL MATERIAL

A. Approval Required:

All fill material shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

B. Notification:

For approval of fill material, notify the Engineer at least four working days in advance of intention to

import material, designate the proposed borrow area, and permit the Engineer to sample as necessary

from the borrow area for the purpose of making acceptance tests to prove the quality of the material. 2.02 ONSITE FILL MATERIAL

A. In general all on-site fill material shall be soil or soil-rock mixture that is free from organic matter and

other deleterious substance. It shall contain no rocks or lumps over six inches in greatest dimension, and

not more than 15% of the rocks or lumps shall be larger than 2 1/2 inches in greatest dimension. No on-site

fill shall be placed without the approval of the Engineer.

B. The Contractor shall not have any right of property in any suitable materials taken from any excavation.

Do not remove any such materials form the construction site without the approval of the Engineer. This

provision shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his obligations to remove and dispose of any material

determined by the Engineer to be unsuitable for backfilling.

2.03 BORROW AND BEDDING MATERIAL

A. Work Included:

Provide, place and compact borrow and bedding material in authorized excavation(s) below normal depth

and in other location(s) as shown on the Drawings and/or as requested by the Engineer and/or as specified

herein.

B. Gravel Borrow:

1. Well graded granular material suitable for placement in authorized excavations below the bottom of

the bedding layer to replace deficient excavated material, for service road construction, and other

designated uses.

2. Conform to requirements of ASTM D-1241-68, Type I, Gradation B or C.



Page 3 of 8

C. Screened Gravel or Crushed Stone (Bedding Material):

1. Screened gravel or crushed stone shall be well graded in size from 1/4 inch to 3/4 inch.

2. Clean, hard, and durable particles or fragments.

3. Sieve Analysis:

Sieve Designation

%Passing by

Weight

Square

Opening

1" 100

3/4" 90-100

3/8" 20-55

No.4 0-10

No.8 0-5

D. Sand:

1. Clean, hard and durable particles or fragments.

2. Sieve Analysis:

Sieve Designation

%Passing by

Weight

Square

Opening

3/8" 100

No.4 95-100

No.16 50-85

No.50 10-30

No.100 2-10

E. Common Borrow:

1. Common borrow shall consist of earth suitable for embankment construction. It shall be free from

frozen material, perishable rubbish, peat and other unsuitable material.

2. The moisture content shall be sufficient to provide the required compaction and stable embankment.

In no case shall the moisture content exceed 4 percent above optimum.

3. The optimum moisture content shall be determined in accordance with AASHTO T 180, Method C or

D.

2.04 OTHER MATERIALS

A. All other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, shall

be provided as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Engineer.

B. Embankment Material:

Obtain prior approval and instructions from the Engineer prior to undertaking the excavation for pipe

placement of any fill material that has been in an embankment less than one year.



Page 4 of 8

2.05 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL

A. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the material encountered above the indicated grade shown on the

Drawings for excavation is unsuitable material, remove the material to the widths and depths as directed

by the Engineer. Replace this material as specified in the "Backfilling, Compaction, Control and Testing"

Section of this Division.

B. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the material encountered at or below the indicated grade shown on the

Drawings for excavation is unsuitable material, remove the material to the full width of the trench and to

a minimum depth of 12-inches below the pipe. Replace this material with thoroughly compacted, suitably

screened gravel or crushed stone bedding material.

C. All excavated materials designated by the Engineer as unsuitable shall become the property of the

Contractor and disposed of at locations acceptable to or designated by the Owner, at no additional cost to

the Owner.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.01 EXCAVATION- EARTH

A. General:

1. Unless otherwise specifically directed or permitted by the Engineer, begin excavation at the low end

of sewer lines and proceed upgrade.

2. Perform excavation for sewers in a logical sequence.

B. Amount of Excavation:

1. Trench Width:

As shown on the Drawings or as specified for pipe installation.

2. Trench Depth:

As shown on the Drawings.

3. Open Excavation:

a. The extent of open excavation shall be controlled by prevailing conditions.

b. Open excavation shall, at all times, be confined to the limits prescribed by the Engineer.

4. Unauthorized Excavation:

a. Backfill to the specified grade any excavation beyond the limits stated above and as shown on the

Drawings (unless specifically ordered by the Engineer) with thoroughly compacted crushed stone

or screened gravel.

b. Backfilling unauthorized excavation shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Shoring and Bracing:

As the excavation progresses, install such shoring and bracing necessary to prevent caving and sliding

and to meet the requirements of the State and OSHA safety standards.



Page 5 of 8

3.02 EXCAVATION- LEDGE

A. Work Included:

1. Excavation work in ledge includes the removal of ledge and rock required for the installation of pipes

and/or structures.

2. "Ledge” and "rock” includes any natural compound, natural mixture, and chemical element in excess

of two yards in volume and required to be excavated that, in the opinion of the Engineer, can be

removed from its existing position and state only by blasting, drilling and blasting, wedging, drilling

and wedging, wedging and breaking with power hand tools, or by extending the use of an approved

excavating machine beyond normal and design wear and tear. No boulder, ledge, slab, or other single

piece of excavated material less than one cubic yard in total volume shall be considered to be rock

unless, in the opinion of the Engineer, it must be removed from its existing position by one of the

methods mentioned above.

3. All trench excavation shall be classed as earth or ledge.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere (When Applicable):

l. The use of explosives is not allowed.

2. Traffic regulation, when applicable, is specified in Division l.

3. When applicable, clearing, removal and replacement of paving, trench excavation, earth, backfilling,

dewatering, borrow and bedding material, manholes and catch basins are specified in the appropriate

Sections in this Division.

4. Pipe and pipe fittings, valves, gates and hydrants, when applicable, are specified in Divisions 2 and 15.

C. Existing Structures:

l. Perform excavation in such a manner that will prevent any possibility of undermining and disturbing

the foundations of any existing structures and any work previously completed under this Contract.

2. Where existing buildings and other structures are in close proximity to the proposed construction,

exercise extreme caution and utilize whatever precautionary measure that may be required.

D. Repairing Damage:

Repair, or have repaired, all damage to existing utilities, structures, lawns, and other public and private

property which results from construction operation, at no additional expense to the Owner, to the

complete satisfaction of the Engineer, the utility company, property owner, and the Owner.

E. Use of Explosives:

The use of explosives on this project is prohibited. However, when the use of explosives is necessary for

the prosecution of the Work, exercise the utmost care not to endanger life or property. The Contractor

shall be responsible for any and all damage resulting from the use of explosives. Approval must be

obtained from the Owner and other regulatory agencies prior to considering the use of explosives.

1. Store all explosives in a secure manner, in compliance with all State and local laws and ordinances,

and legally mark all such storage places. Storage shall be limited to such quantity as may be needed

for the work underway.

2. Designate as a BLASTING AREA all sites where electric blasting caps are located and where

explosive charges are being placed. Mark all blasting areas with signs as required by law.



Page 6 of 8

3. Place signs as required by law at each end of the blasting area and leave in place while the above

conditions prevail. Immediately remove signs after blasting operations or the storage of caps is over.

4. Notify each property owner and public utility company having structures in proximity to the site of

the work sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem

necessary to protect their property. Such notice shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his

responsibility for damage resulting from his blasting operation.

5. Warn all persons within the danger zone of blasting operations and do not perform blasting work

until the area is cleared. Provide sufficient flaggers outside the danger zone to stop all approaching

traffic and pedestrians. Provide watch people during the loading period and until charges have been

exploded. Place adequate protective covering over all charges before exploding.

3.04 BACKFILLING, COMPACTION, CONTROL AND TESTING

A. Work Included:

Backfilling work includes backfilling trenches and/or excavation around structures with suitable

material removed in the course of excavating and other suitable material.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere (When applicable):

1. Traffic regulations are specified in Division 1.

2. Clearing, removal and replacement of paving, when applicable, are specified in the appropriate

Sections in this Division.

C. Quality Assurance:

1. Where backfill is required and/or where shown on the Drawings, compact fill to an in-place density

not less than 95 percent of the maximum density of the material in accordance with ASTM D1556

Method "B", unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or herein.

2. Determine in-place density in accordance with ASTM DI556 or by other methods as approved by the

Engineer.

3. Have density testing performed by an independent soils laboratory as approved by the Engineer, at no

additional cost to the Owner.

4. Locations of tests (when applicable):

a. Average of one test between each manhole for interceptor sewers.

b. Average of two tests between each manhole for sewer laterals.

c. Average of one test on each side of each manhole in addition to b. above.

D. Performance:

1. General:

a. Provide and place all necessary backfill material.

b. Do not allow large masses of backfill material to be dropped into the excavation, as from a grab

bucket, in such a manner that may endanger pipes and structures.



Page 7 of 8

c. Place material in a manner that will prevent stones and lumps from becoming nested.

d. Completely fill all voids between stones with fine material.

e. Do not place backfill on or against new concrete until it has attained sufficient strength to support

loads without distortion, cracking, and other damage.

f. Deposit backfill material evenly on all sides of structures to avoid unequal soil pressures.

g. Place screened gravel, crushed rock, crushed stone, gravel borrow or sand in layers of uniform

thickness not greater than 6 inches or as shown on the Drawings.

h. Thoroughly compact each layer by means of a suitable vibrator or mechanical tamper.

i. In excavations below normal depth or where unsuitable materials are excavated, gravel borrow

may be used unless groundwater makes such usage impossible. If such is the case, then screened

gravel or crushed stone shall be used.

j. Do not backfill with, or on, frozen materials. Remove, or otherwise treat as necessary, previously

placed material that has frozen prior to placing backfill.

k. Do not mechanically or hand compact material that is, in the opinion of the Engineer, too wet. Do

not continue backfilling until the previously placed and new materials have dried sufficiently to

permit proper compaction.

l. When original excavated material is unsuitable use only approved gravel borrow for backfilling.

2. Sheeting:

a. Leave sheeting in place when damage is likely to result from its withdrawal.

b. Completely fill with suitable material and thoroughly compact all voids left by the removal of

sheeting.

3. Backfilling in Paved Areas:

a. Backfill trenches in streets and other paved areas by moistening and compacting each layer to a

minimum of 95% of the modified Proctor for the material.

b. Backfill in such a manner as to permit the rolling and compaction of the filled trench with the

adjoining material to provide the required bearing value for paving immediately after backfilling

is completed.

c. Where required, place excavated material that is acceptable to the Engineer for surfacing or

pavement sub-base, at the top of the backfill to the depths as directed by the Engineer. Bring the

surface to the required grade and rake out and remove stones.

4. Backfilling Trenches in Non-paved Areas:

a. Grade the ground to a reasonable uniformity.

b. Leave the mounding of 1” per 1’ of trench depth over the trenches in a uniform and neat condition,

satisfactory to the Engineer.

5. Bedding & Backfilling Pipelines:



Page 8 of 8

a. Install pipe bedding and cushion and primary backfill in accordance with 1 (g) above.

b. Deposit and thoroughly compact the remainder of the backfill in 12 inch layers.

6. Placing and Compacting Backfill:

a. Water Jetting:

(1) Backfill by water jetting shall not be used.

b. Puddling:

(1) Backfill puddling shall not be used.

c. Tamping:

(1) Deposit and spread the backfill material in uniform parallel layers not exceeding 6 inches thick.

(2) Tamp each layer as required to obtain a thoroughly compacted mass.

(3) If necessary, furnish and use in adequate number of power driven tampers, each weighing at

least 20 lbs.

d. Rolling:

(1) Compact material by rolling only when the width and depth of the excavation are sufficient to

accommodate the rollers, dozers, mechanical tampers, or other similar powered equipment, as

may prove to be acceptable, and when it can be performed without causing damage to pipes

installed in the excavation.

(2) Deposit and spread the backfill material in uniform parallel layers not exceeding 8 inches thick.

(3) Roll each layer as required to obtain a thoroughly compacted mass.

e. Other placing and compacting methods may be employed only when approved by the Engineer.

7. Improper Backfill:

a. When excavation and trenches have been improperly backfilled, and when settlement occurs,

reopen the excavation to the depth required, as directed by the Engineer.

b. Refill and compact the excavation or trench with suitable material and restore the surface to the

required grade and condition.

c. Excavation, backfilling, compacting work and testing performed to correct improper backfilling

shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 312270 – EROSION CONTROL


PROJECT NAME

Project Location, U.S. Virgin Islands

Page 1 of 3

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Temporary erosion control measures

B. Coordination of temporary and permanent erosion control measures

1.2 REFERENCES

A. FHWA FP-14 Standard Specifications for Construction of Roads and Bridges, on Federal Highway

Projects, 2014 edition.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Erosion Control Plan:

Submit prior to commencing affected work a schedule based on Project conditions showing proposed

methods, sequencing, and coordination of temporary and permanent erosion control measures. PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Stone Check Dams:

Composed of stone 3/4 - 1 inch in diameter free of organic material, debris, waste and conform to ASTM

C33; stone size No. 67.

B. Sand Bags:

Heavy cloth bags of approximately one cubic foot capacity filled with sand or gravel.

C. Matting:

Composed of straw, twisted craft paper, jute yam, wood excelsior, glass fiber, or plastic film.

D. Mulch:

Mats, netting, straw or hay, bark chips, wood fiber, or other acceptable material. Do not use musty, moldy,

caked, or otherwise low quality material.

E. Temporary Grass:

Suitable quick-growing species providing a temporary cover which will not compete with permanent grass

sown later.

F. Silt Fence:

1. Propex Silt-Stop, Mirafi 1OOX, or approved equal.

2. Supports shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, or as required for adequate

performance.

G. Erosion Control Blankets:

1. Erosion Control Blankets used in swales shall be made of 100% straw with associated netting and/or

thread.



PROJECT NAME


Page 2 of 3

2. Erosion Control Blankets used on level spreaders shall be jute or excelsior matting.

H. Temporary Drains:

1. Flexible drains shall consist of collapsible neoprene pipe, minimum 3 inches in diameter or approved

equal.

2. Drains under traffic areas shall consist of corrugated metal of a gauge consistent with the loading

conditions.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Do not start work until Erosion Control Plan has been approved.

B. Conduct all operations in a manner and sequence that minimizes disturbance of existing protective vegetation.

C. Install permanent erosion control features at the earliest practical time. Use temporary erosion controls:

1. To control erosion when it is not practical to install permanent erosion control features.

2. To control temporary erosion not associated with permanent erosion control.

3. To correct unsatisfactory conditions that develop during construction.

D. Maintain and supplement as necessary all erosion control features and devices required to effectively prevent

migration of sediment from the work area throughout the life of the Contract.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROLS

A. Temporary Grass:

Install in accordance with Section 02930 where shown on the Plans or as required to stabilize disturbed

slopes. Seed all slopes before they reach 30 feet in slope length.

B. Sediment Check Dams:

Install check dams in ditches, swales, along the toe of embankments, and at other locations required to

effectively control erosion.

C. Slope Drains:

Construct temporary slope drains where shown on the Plans or where necessary to control erosion. Protect

outlets with riprap.

D. Silt Fence:

Install where shown on the Plans and at other locations as necessary to control erosion. Support in accordance

with manufacturer's recommendations.

E. Mulch:

Install immediately after each area has been properly prepared. When seed for erosion control is sown prior

to placing the mulch, the mulch shall be placed 48 hours after seeding.

F. Erosion Control Blankets:

Install along the bed of swales or level spreaders when called for on the Plans.



PROJECT NAME


Page 3 of 3

1. Swales shall be prepared and seeded in accordance with Section 02930 prior to installation of erosion

control blankets. Install blankets starting at the upstream end unrolling downstream.

2. Level Spreaders: Place two strips of jute or excelsior matting along the lip of each level spreader.

3. Blankets should not be stretched, but allowed to lay loosely on the soil surface to achieve maximum soil

contact. Overlap and secure the blankets to the ground in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS Government of the Virgin Islands, Department of Public Works

SECTION 321400 – BRICK PAVERS Government of the Virgin Islands, Department of Public Works

Page 1 of 11

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Pedestrian/light vehicular pavers.

1. Heavy vehicular pavers.

2. Relieved edge pavers.

3. Relieved edge and lugged pavers.

4. Danish hand mould pavers.

5. Paver step treads.

6. Permeable pavers.


A. Section 321316.23 - Stamped Concrete Paving.

B. Section 321000 - Bases, Ballasts, and Paving.

C. Section 096340 - Stone Flooring.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International, Inc. (ASTM):

1. ASTM C 902 - Standard Specification for Pedestrian and Light Traffic Paving Brick.

2. ASTM C 1272 - Standard Specification for Heavy Vehicular Paving Brick.

1.4 SUBMITTALS





3. Cleaning methods.

C. Verification Samples: For each product and finish specified, two full-size samples representing

actual products, colors and textures.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: All primary products specified in this section will be supplied by

a single manufacturer with a minimum of ten years experience.


Page 2 of 11

B. Installer Qualifications: All products listed in this section are to be installed by a single installer

with a minimum of five years demonstrated experience in installing products of the same type

and scope as specified.

C. Mock-Up: Provide a completely assembled, typical wall areas installed with related

accessories, in composite configurations designed to fulfill the performance criteria, and

representative of the design as shown on the Drawings.

1. Locate mock-up in location as directed by the Architect.

2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship is approved by Architect.

3. Mock-up area may become part of finished work, if approved by the Architect.


A. Deliver, store and handle materials and products in strict compliance with manufacturer's

instructions and recommendations and industry standards.

B. Store materials in manufacturer's original sealed, labeled packaging until ready for installation

and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Protect from damage.


A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity and ventilation) within limits



1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Standard Material Warranty: At project closeout, provide to Owner or Owners

Representative an executed copy of the manufacturer's standard limited warranty against

manufacturing defect, outlining its terms, conditions, and exclusions from coverage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Endicott Clay Products Co., which is located at: 57120 707th Rd.; Endicott, NE 68350;

Tel: 402-729-3315; Fax: 402-729-5804; Email:request info ([email protected]);

Web:www.endicott.com

2. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section

016000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 PEDESTRIAN/LIGHT VEHICULAR PAVERS

A. Pedestrian/Light Vehicular Pavers: Nominal 4 inch x 8 inch brick pavers with wirecut surface

texture (Choose size, compliance, color and pattern):

1. Actual Product Size: 4 x 8 x 1-1/4 inches (102 x 203 x 32 mm).

http://admin.arcat.com/users.pl?action=UserEmail&company=Endicott+Clay+Products+Co.&coid=32282&rep=&fax=402-729-5804&message=RE:%20Spec%20Question%20(02780end):%20%20&mf=

http://www.endicott.com/


Page 3 of 11


3. Actual Product Size: 3-5/8 x 7-5/8 x 1-1/4 inches (102 x 203 x 32 mm).


5. Compliance: ASTM C 902, Class SX, Type 1.

6. Compliance: ASTM C 1272, Type R, application PS.

7. Compliance: ASTM C 1272, Type R, application PX.

8. Compliance: ASTM C 1272, Type F, application PS.

9. Compliance: ASTM C 1272, Type F, application PX.

10. Color: Rose Blend.

11. Color: Red Blend.

12. Color: Burgundy Blend.

13. Color: Bordeaux Blend.

14. Color: Copper Canyon.

15. Color: Coppertone.

16. Color: Medium Ironspot No. 77.


18. Color: Dark Ironspot.

19. Color: Manganese Ironspot.

20. Pattern: Herringbone 90 degree Pattern 10 ' T' spacers/sf; including perimeter spacers.


22. Pattern: Running Bond Pattern 10 ' T' spacers/sf; including perimeter spacers.

23. Pattern: Basket Weave Pattern 7.5 ' T' spacers/sf and 1.5 ' +' spacers/sf; including

perimeter spacers.

B. Pedestrian/Light Vehicular Pavers: Nominal 8 inch x 8 inch brick pavers with wirecut surface

texture. (Choose size, compliance, color and pattern):





Page 4 of 11

a. Surface Texture: Finished on five sides, one 8 x 8 inch face unfinished.




















perimeter spacers.

C. Pedestrian/Light Vehicular Pavers: Nominal 4 inch x 12 inch brick pavers with wirecut surface

texture. (Choose size, compliance, color and pattern):







Page 5 of 11

















perimeter spacers.

2.3 HEAVY VEHICULAR PAVERS

A. Heavy Vehicular Pavers: Nominal 4 inch x 8 inch brick pavers with wirecut surface texture

(Choose size, compliance, color and pattern):










Page 6 of 11









17. Pattern: Herringbone 90 degree Pattern 10 ' T' spacers/sf.

18. Pattern: Herringbone 45 degree Pattern 10 ' T' spacers/sf.

19. Pattern: Running Bond Pattern 10 ' T' spacers/sf.

20. Pattern: Basket Weave Pattern 7.5 ' T' spacers/sf and 1.5 ' +' spacers/sf.

2.4 RELIEVED EDGE PAVERS

A. Relieved Edge Pavers: Nominal 4 inch x 8 inch brick pavers with wirecut surface texture









8. Relieved Edges: 1/8 inch x 1/8 inch.







Page 7 of 11










perimeter spacers.

2.5 RELIEVED EDGE AND LUGGED PAVERS

A. Relieved Edge/Lugged Pavers: Nominal 4 inch x 8 inch brick pavers with wirecut surface

texture (Choose size, compliance, color and pattern):


a. Lugs: 1/8 inch (3 mm).















Page 8 of 11









2.6 HANDICAP DETECTABLE WARNING PAVERS

A. Handicap Detectable Warning Pavers: Nominal 4 inch x 8 inch brick pavers with wirecut

surface texture (Choose size, compliance, color and pattern):





5. Surface Protrusions: 8 raised protrusions per paver unit; 0.2 inches (5 mm) in height,

tapering from 0.9 inches (23 mm) at the base to 0.75 inches (19 mm).













Page 9 of 11









perimeter spacers.

1.9 DANISH HAND MOULD PAVERS

A. Danish Hand Mould Pavers: Nominal 4 inch x 8 inch brick pavers with wirecut surface texture









8. Pattern: Herringbone 90 degrees.

9. Pattern: Herringbone 45 degrees.

10. Pattern: Running Bond Pattern.

11. Pattern: Basket Weave Pattern.

2.7 PAVER STEP TREADS

A. Paver Step Treads: Brick paver step treads with wirecut surface texture (Choose size,

compliance, color and pattern):



3. Radiused Edges: 1/2 inch (12 mm) radius on two adjacent 3-5/8 inch (92 mm) edges.


Page 10 of 11
















2.8 PERMEABLE PAVERS

A. .

1.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving best

result for the substrates under project conditions.

B. Do not proceed with installation until substrates have been prepared using the methods

recommended by the manufacturer and deviations from manufacturer's recommended

tolerances are corrected. Commencement of installation constitutes acceptance of conditions.

C. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect in writing of deviations

from manufacturer's recommended installation tolerances and conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install pavers accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in proper relationship with

adjacent construction.


Page 11 of 11

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 321413 – PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVING Government of the Virgin Islands, Department of Public Works

Page 1 of 20

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Precast concrete unit paving including the following:

1. Non-permeable concrete pavers.

2. Permeable concrete pavers.

3. Joint sand.

4. Permeable joint opening aggregate.

5. Setting bed sand.

6. Permeable setting bed aggregate.

7. Base aggregate.

8. Permeable base aggregate.

9. Subbase aggregate.

10. Permeable subbase aggregate.

11. Geotextile.

12. Edge restraints.

13. Accessories.


A. Section 312000 - Earth Moving.

B. Section 323213 - Cast-in-Place Concrete Retaining Walls.

C. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. ASTM C29 - Bulk Density and Voids in Aggregate Materials.

2. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.

3. ASTM C67 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural

Clay Tile, Section 8, Freezing and Thawing.

4. ASTM C136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse

Aggregates.


Page 2 of 20

5. ASTM C140 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry

Units and Related Units.

6. ASTM C144 - Standard Specifications for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.

7. ASTM D448 - Standard Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge

Construction.

8. ASTM C936 - Standard Specification for Solid Concrete Interlocking Paving Units.

9. ASTM C979 - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete.

10. ASTM C1645 - Standard Test Method for Freeze-thaw and De-icing Salt Durability

of Solid Concrete Interlocking Paving Units.

11. ASTM D698 - Test Methods for Moisture Density Relations of Soil and Soil

Aggregate Mixtures Using a 5.5 lb (24.4 N) Rammer and 12 in. (305 mm) drop.

12. ASTM D1557 - Test Methods for Moisture Density Relations of Soil and Soil

Aggregate Mixtures Using a 10-lb (44.5 N) Rammer and 18 in. (457 mm) drop.

13. ASTM D1883 - Test Method for California Bearing Ratio of Laboratory-Compacted

Soils.

14. ASTM D2940 - Graded Aggregate Material for Bases or Subbases for Highways or

Airports.

15. ASTM D4254 - Standard Test Methods for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight

of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density.

16. ASTM D4354 - Standard Practice for Sampling of Geosynthetics for Testing.

17. ASTM D4491 - Standard Test Method for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by

Permittivity.

18. ASTM D4533 - Standard Test Method for Index Trapezoidal Tearing Strength of

Geotextiles.

19. ASTM D4632 - Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of

Geotextiles.

20. ASTM D4751 - Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a

Geotextile.

21. ASTM D4759 - Standard Practice for Determining the Specifications Conformance

of Geosynthetics.

22. ASTM D4833 - Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geotextiles,

Geomembranes and Related Products.

23. ASTM D5261 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Mass per Unit Area of

Geotextiles.


Page 3 of 20

B. U.S. Green Building Council, Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED):

1. LEED Building Design and Construction.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements.

B. Product Data:

1. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used.



4. Typical installation methods.

C. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips

representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches

(150 mm) square representing actual product, color, and patterns.

E. Shop Drawings: Include details of materials, construction and finish. Include relationship with

adjacent construction.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in

this section with a minimum ten years documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with

minimum two years documented experience with projects of similar scope and complexity.

C. Source Limitations: Provide each type of product from a single manufacturing source to ensure

uniformity.

D. Mock-Up: Construct a mock-up with actual materials in sufficient time for Architect's review

and to not delay construction progress. Locate mock-up as acceptable to Architect and provide

temporary foundations and support.

1. Intent of mock-up is to demonstrate quality of workmanship and visual appearance.

2. If mock-up is not acceptable, rebuild mock-up until satisfactory results are achieved.

3. Retain mock-up during construction as a standard for comparison with completed

work.

4. Do not alter or remove mock-up until work is completed or removal is authorized.



Page 4 of 20

A. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's written instructions and

recommendations.

B. Protect from damage due to weather, excessive temperature, and construction operations.


A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits



1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

B. Provide 100 square feet of each product and size used to owner for maintenance and repair.

Furnish Pavers from the same production run as installed materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: UNILOCK®, which is located at: 287 Armstrong Ave.;

Georgetown, ON, Canada L7G 4X6; Toll Free Tel: 800-864-5625; Fax: 888-477-1707;

Email:request info ([email protected]); Web:https://unilock.com

1. Unilock Ltd, 287 Armstrong Avenue, Georgetown, ON L7G 4X6. 416-646-9000

2. Unilock New England, 35 Commerce Dr., Uxbridge, MA 01569. 508-278-4536

3. Unilock New York, 51 International Blvd., Brewster NY 10509. 845-278-6700

4. Unilock Inc., 510 Smith Street, Buffalo, NY 14210. 716-826074

5. Unilock Ohio, 12560 Sheets Rd, Rittman, OH 44270. 330-927-4000

6. Unilock Michigan, 12591Emerson Dr., Brighton, MI 48116 248-437-7037

7. Unilock Chicago, 301 E Sullivan Rd, Aurora, IL 60505. 630-892-9191

8. Unilock W4814 County Rd A, Elkhorn, WI 53121. 262-742-3890

9. email: [email protected]

10. Web: www.unilock.com.

B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 016000

- Product Requirements.


A. Standards Compliance:

1. Provide pavers meeting the minimum material and physical properties set forth in

ASTM C936. Efflorescence is not a cause for rejection.

http://admin.arcat.com/users.pl?action=UserEmail&company=UNILOCK26reg&coid=49478&rep=&fax=888-477-1707&message=RE:%20Spec%20Question%20(02780uni):%20%20&mf=

https://unilock.com/


Page 5 of 20

2. Pigments conforming to ASTM C979.

B. Compressive Strength: 8,000 psi (55 MPa) average, with no individual unit under 7,200 psi

(50 MPa).

C. Absorption (ASTM C140): 5 percent average with no unit greater than 7 percent.

D. Resistance to Freeze-Thaw (ASTM C1645): No breakage greater than 1.0 percent loss in dry

weight of individual unit after 50 cycles.

E. Maximum allowable breakage of product is 5 percent.

F. TX Active Cement: Portland Cement complying with ASTM C150 with addition of

proprietary particles of titanium dioxide specifically engineered for use in concrete products.

1. Concrete will resist most organic and inorganic pollutants that gather on the surface

causing discoloration.

2. Concrete will remove significant amounts of environmental pollutants deemed harmful

to human health.

2.3 NON-PERMEABLE PAVERS

A. Basis of Design: Courtstone; as manufactured by Unilock (Choose color and size).

1. Color: Basalt.

2. Color: Belgian Blue.

3. Color: Dawn Mist.

4. Color: Pebble Taupe.

5. Color: Blend of Dawn Mist and Pebble Taupe.

6. Color: Blend of Belgian Blue and Basalt.

7. Color: To be selected by Architect.

8. Finish: Reala Cobblestone, timeworn finish.

9. Thickness: 6 cm (2.375 inches).

10. Sizes:

a. Random Bundle: (the following sizes sold together in one bundle)

b. XL Rectangle: 21.5 x 13 cm (8.5 x 5.125 inches).

c. Large Rectangle: 18.5 x 13 cm (7.25 x 5.125 inches).

d. Rectangle: 16.5 x 13 cm (6.5 x 5.125 inches).

e. Small Rectangle: 14.5 x 13 cm (5.75 x 5.125 inches).


Page 6 of 20

f. Square: 13 x 13 cm (.125 x 5.125 inches).

B. Basis of Design: Copthorne; as manufactured by Unilock (Choose color and size).

1. Color: Basalt.

2. Color: Burgundy Red.

3. Color: Burnt Clay.

4. Color: Old Oak.

5. Color: Steel Blue (grey).



8. Size: 20 x 6.5 x 6 cm (7.875 x 2.5 x 2.375 inches).

C. Basis of Design: Richcliff; as manufactured by Unilock. (Choose color and size).

1. Color: Smoke Shale.

2. Color: Dawn Mist.

3. Color: Pebble Taupe.


5. Finish: Reala Flagstone.

6. Thickness: 6 cm (2.375 inches).

7. Sizes:

a. Large Rectangle: 52.8 x 30.2 cm (20.75 x 11.875 inches).

b. Random Bundle: (the following sizes sold together in one bundle)

c. Rectangle: 30 x 22.6 cm (11.75 x 8.875 inches).

d. Small Rectangle: 22.6 x 15 cm (8.875 x 5.875 inches).

e. Square: 22.6 x 22.6 cm (8.875 x 8.875 inches).

D. Basis of Design: Town Hall; as manufactured by Unilock. (Choose color and size).



3. Color: Old Oak.


Page 7 of 20

4. Color: Basalt.

5. Color: Heritage Red.

6. Color: Heritage Clay.



9. Size: 25 x 10 x 7 cm (9.875 x 3.875 x 2.75 inches).

E. Basis of Design: Umbriano; as manufactured by Unilock. (Choose color and size).

1. Color: Midnight Sky.

2. Color: Winter Marvel.

3. Color: Summer Wheat.

4. Color: French Grey.


6. Edge Detail: Smooth - Zero Bevel.

7. Finish: Umbriano.

8. Sizes:

a. 60 x 60 x 7 cm (23.625 x 23.625 x 2.75 inches).

b. 30 x 60 x 7 cm (11.75 x 23.625 x 2.75 inches).

c. 40 x 40 x 7 cm (15.75 x 15.75 x 2.75 inches).

d. 40 x 20 x 7 cm (15.75 x 7.875 x 2.75 inches).

e. 20 x 20 x 7 cm (7.875 x 7.875 x 2.75 inches).

f. 20 x 40 x 7 cm (7.875 x 15.75 x 2.75 inches).

g. Beacon Hill Platform Random Bundle (the following units are sold together)

i. Large Rectangle: 5 x 35 x 6 cm (20.625 x 13.75 x 2.375 inches).

ii. Small Rectangle: 17.5 x 35 x cm (6.875 x 13.75 x 2.375 inches).

iii. Square: 35 x 35 x 6 cm (13.75 x 13.75 x 2.375 inches).

h. Beacon Hill Platform Random Bundle (the following units are sold together)

i. Large Rectangle: 52.5 x 35 x 8 cm (20.625 x 13.75 x 3.125 inches).


Page 8 of 20

ii. Small Rectangle: 17.5 x 35 x 8 cm (6.875 x 13.75 x 3.125 inches).

iii. Square: 35 x 35 x 8 cm (13.75 x 13.75 x 3.125 inches).

F. Basis of Design: Series; as manufactured by Unilock. (Choose color and size).

1. Color: Black Granite.


3. Finish: Series.

4. Sizes:

a. 20 x 10 x 7 cm (7.875 x 3.875 x 2.75 inches).

G. Basis of Design: Il Campo; as manufactured by Unilock. (Choose color and size).

1. Color: Dark Charcoal


3. Finish: Il Campo.

4. Sizes:

a. 20 x 10 x 7 cm (7.875 x 3.875 x 2.75 inches).

H. Basis of Design: Hollandstone; as manufactured by Unilock. (Choose color and size).

1. Color: Granite.

2. Color: Terra Cotta.

3. Color: Rustic Red.

4. Color: Sierra.


6. Finish: Standard.

7. Sizes:

a. 20 x 10 x 6 cm (7.875 x 3.875 x 2.375 inches).

I. Basis of Design: Beacon Hill Flagstone; as manufactured by Unilock. (Choose color and size).

1. Color: Tuscany.



Page 9 of 20

3. Finish: Flagstone Premier.

4. Sizes:

a. XL Unit: 53 x 72 x 6 cm (20.875 x 28.3 x 2.375 inches). (CDA only)

b. XL Unit: 53 x 88 x 6 cm (20.875 x 34.625 x 2.375 inches). (USA only)

c. Beacon Hill Platform Random Bundle (the following units are sold together)

d. Large Rectangle: 54 x 36 x 6 cm (21.25 x 14.125 x 2.375 inches).

e. Small Rectangle: 18 x 36 x 6 cm (7.125 x 14.125 x 2.375 inches).

f. Square: 36 x 36 x 6 cm (14.125 x 14.125 x 2.375 inches).

J. Basis of Design: Beacon Hill Smooth; as manufactured by Unilock. (Choose color and size).

1. Color: Opal


3. Finish: Smooth Premier.

4. Sizes:

a. Beacon Hill Platform Random Bundle (the following units are sold together)

b. Large Rectangle: 54 x 36 x 6 cm (21.25 x 14.125 x 2.375 inches).

c. Small Rectangle: 18 x 36 x 6 cm (7.125 x 14.125 x 2.375 inches).

d. Square: 36 x 36 x 6 cm (14.125 x 14.125 x 2.375 inches).

K. Basis of Design: Tribeca Cobble; as manufactured by Unilock. (Choose color and size).

1. Color: Crystalline Basalt.

2. Color: Peppered Granite.


4. Finish: Series.

5. Sizes:

a. Tribeca Cobble Platform Random Bundle (the following units are sold together)

b. Large Rectangle: 30.5 x 13 x 7 cm (12 x 5.125 x 2.75 inches).

c. Rectangle: 23 x 13 x 7 cm (14.125 x 5.125 x 2.75 inches).

d. Small Rectangle: 17.5 x 13 x 7 cm (6.875 x 5.125 x 2.75 inches).

2.4 PERMEABLE PAVERS


Page 10 of 20

A. Basis of Design: Eco-Optiloc; (Choose color and size).

1. Color: Natural.



4. Finish: Series.



7. Edge: Chamfer, 3 mm bevel.

8. Size and Shape: L-shape, 26 x 26 x 8 cm (10.25 x 10.25 x 3.125 inches).

B. Basis of Design: Eco-Priora; as manufactured by Unilock. (Choose color and size).





5. Finish: Series.



8. Sizes:

a. 10 X 10: 24 x 24 x 8 cm (9.5 x 9.5 x 3.125 inches).

b. 5 X 10: 24 x 12 x 8 cm (9.5 x 4.75 x 3.125 inches).

c. 5 X 5: 12 x 12 x 8 cm (4.75 x 4.75 x 3.125 inches).

C. Basis of Design: Ecoloc as manufactured by Unilock. (Choose color and size).

1. Color: _______.




5. Finish: Series.


Page 11 of 20



8. Size: 22.86 x 22.86 x 7.94 cm (9 x 9 x 3.125 inches).

D. Basis of Design: Eco-Line; as manufactured by Unilock. (Choose color and size).

1. Color: __________




5. Finish: Series.



8. Sizes: Eco-Line Platform Random Bundle (the following units are sold together)

a. Unit A: 35.7 x 8.40 x 10 cm (14 x 3.25 x 3.875 inches).

b. Unit B: 31.7 x 8.40 x 10 cm (12.5 x 3.25 x 3.875 inches).

c. Unit C: 27.7 x 8.40 x 10 cm (10.875 x 3.25 x 3.875 inches).

d. Unit D: 23.7 x 8.40 x 10 cm (9.375 x 3.25 x 3.875 inches).

e. Unit E: 35.7 x 11.4 x 10 cm (14 x 4.5 x 3.875 inches).

f. Unit F: 31.7 x 11.4 x 10 cm (12.5 x 4.5 x 3.875 inches).

g. Unit G: 27.7 x 11.4 x 10 cm (10.875 x 4.5 x 3.875 inches).

h. Unit H: 23.7 x 11.4 x 10 cm (9.375 x 4.5 x 3.875 inches

E. Basis of Design: Eco-Promenade; as manufactured by Unilock. (Choose color and size).

1. Color: ___________.




5. Finish: Series.



Page 12 of 20


8. Size: 30 x 7.5 x 10 cm (11.75 x 3 x 3.875 inches).

F. Basis of Design: Town Hall; as manufactured by Unilock. (Choose color and size).



3. Color: Old Oak.

4. Color: Basalt.

5. Color: Heritage Red.

6. Color: Heritage Clay.




10. Size: 25 x 10 x 7 cm (9.875 x 3.875 x 2.75 inches).

G. Basis of Design: Tribeca Cobble; as manufactured by Unilock. (Choose color and size).

1. Color: Crystalline Basalt.

2. Color: Peppered Granite.


4. Finish: Washed.


6. Sizes:

a. Tribeca Cobble Platform Random Bundle (the following units are sold together)

b. Large Rectangle: 30.5 x 13 x 7 cm (12 x 5.125 x 2.75 inches).

c. Rectangle: 23 x 13 x 7 cm (14.125 x 5.125 x 2.75 inches).

d. Small Rectangle: 17.5 x 13 x 7 cm (6.875 x 5.125 x 2.75 inches).

e. Curb: 29 x 23 x 10 cm (11.375 x 9 x 3.875 inches).

2.5 JOINT SAND

A. Natural Joint Sand.


Page 13 of 20

1. Washed, clean, non-plastic, free from deleterious or foreign matter, symmetrically

shaped, natural or manufactured from crushed rock.

2. Do not use limestone screenings, stone dust, or sand for the Joint Sand material that

does not conform to conform to the grading requirements of ASTM C33.

3. Utilize sands that are as hard as practically available where concrete pavers are subject

to vehicular traffic.

4. Gradation Requirements per ASTM C144. Percent Passing Sieve Size:

a. No. 4 (4.75 mm): 100 percent.

b. No. 8 (2.36 mm): 95 to 100 percent.

c. No. 16 (1.18 mm): 70 to 100 percent.

d. No. 30 (0.600 mm): 40 to 75 percent.

e. No. 50 (0.300 mm): 10 to 30 percent.

f. No. 100 (0.150 mm): 2 to 15 percent.

g. No. 200 (0.075 mm): 0 to 1 percent.

B. Polymeric Joint Sand: Dry mix, contains polymeric binding agent, activated with water.

1. Products:

a. Techniseal RG+.

b. Unicare HP Polymeric Max Sand.

c. Do not use polymeric joint sand with Belpasso, Umbriano, Series, Il Campo,

Unigranite, or Tribeca Cobble.

2. Color: Grey.

3. Color: Tan.


5. Compression Strength: proven resistance to compression of 550 PSI after drying for 7

days under controlled conditions of 73 degrees F (23 degrees C) at 50 percent

humidity).

6. Test sand sample shape: cylinder (2 inch (5 cm) dia. X 4 inch (10 cm) high).


a. No. 4 (4.75 mm): 100 percent.

b. No. 8 (2.36 mm): 95 to 100 percent.


Page 14 of 20

c. No. 16 (1.18 mm): 70 to 100 percent.

d. No. 30 (0.600 mm): 40 to 75 percent.

e. No. 50 (0.300 mm): 20 to 40 percent.

f. No. 100 (0.150 mm): 10 to 25 percent.

g. No. 200 (0.075 mm): 0 to 10 percent.

2.6 PERMEABLE JOINT OPENING AGGREGATE

A. Permeable Joint Opening Aggregate: Conforming to ASTM C33.

1. Provide washed, clean aggregates having zero plasticity, free from deleterious or

foreign matter, crushed, angular rock and contain no No. 200 sieve size aggregate

materials.

2. Gradation Requirements per ASTM D448 No. 8. Percent Passing Sieve Size:

a. 1/2 inch (12.5 mm): 100 percent.

b. 3/8 inch (9.5 mm): 85 to 100 percent.

c. No. 4 (4.75 mm): 10 to 30 percent.

d. No. 8 (2.36 mm): 0 to 10 percent.

e. No. 16 (1.18 mm): 0 to 5 percent.

B. Permeable Joint Opening Aggregate: Granite chips conforming to ASTM C33.



materials.

2. Supplier:

a. Kafka Granite LLC; 101 S. Weber Ave; Stratford, WI 54484; 800-852-7415.

b. Alliance Aqua-Roc.

c. SEK Perm Chip.

d. Approved equal.

e. Color: _____.

3. Gradation Requirements: Percent Passing Sieve Size:

a. 1/4 inch (6 mm): 97 to 100 percent.

b. No. 4 (4.75 mm): 70 to 83 percent.


Page 15 of 20

c. No. 8 (2.36 mm): 37 to 50 percent.

d. No. 16 (1.18 mm): 0 to 12 percent.

2.7 SETTING BED SAND

A. Setting Bed Sand.

1. Washed, clean, non-plastic, free from deleterious or foreign matter, symmetrically

shaped, natural or manufactured from crushed rock.

2. Do not use limestone screenings, stone dust, or sand for the Joint Sand material that

does not conform to conform to the grading requirements of ASTM C33.

3. Do not use mason sand or sand conforming to ASTM C 144.

4. Utilize sands that are as hard as practically available where concrete pavers are subject

to vehicular traffic.



b. No. 4 (4.75 mm): 95 to 100 percent.

c. No. 8 (2.36 mm): 85 to 100 percent.

d. No. 16 (1.18 mm): 50 to 85 percent.

e. No. 30 (0.600 mm): 25 to 60 percent.

f. No. 50 (0.300 mm): 10 to 30 percent.

g. No. 100 (0.150 mm): 2 to 10 percent.

h. No. 200 (0.075 mm): 0 to 1 percent.

2.8 PERMEABLE SETTING BED AGGREGATE

A. Permeable Setting Bed Aggregate: Conforming to ASTM C33.



materials.



b. 3/8 inch (9.5 mm): 85 to 100 percent.

c. No. 4 (4.75 mm): 10 to 30 percent.

d. No. 8 (2.36 mm): 0 to 10 percent.


Page 16 of 20

e. No. 16 (1.18 mm): 0 to 5 percent.

2.9 BASE AGGREGATE FOR NON-PERMEABLE PAVERS ONLY

A. As specified in Section 312000 - Earth Moving.

B. As specified in Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

C. Provide Base Aggregate conforming to ASTM D2940. Passing Sieve Size:

a. 2 inch (50 mm): 100 percent.

b. 1-1/2 inch (37.5 mm): 95 to 100 percent.

c. 3/4 inch (19 mm): 70 to 92 percent.

d. 3/8 inch (9.5 mm): 50 to 70 percent.

e. No. 4 (4.75 mm): 35 to 55 percent.

f. No. 30 (0.600 mm): 12 to 25 percent.

g. No. 200 (0.075 mm): 0 to 8 percent.

2.10 PERMEABLE BASE AGGREGATE

A. Permeable Base Aggregate: Conforming to ASTM C33.



materials.


a. 1-1/2 inch (37.5 mm): 100 percent.

b. 1 inch (25 mm): 95 to 100 percent.

c. 1/2 inch (12.5 mm): 25 to 60 percent.

d. No. 4 (4.75 mm): 0 to 10 percent.

e. No. 8 (2.36 mm): 0 to 5 percent.

2.11 SUBBASE AGGREGATE FOR PERMEABLE PAVERS

A. Permeable Base Aggregate: Conforming to ASTM C33.



materials.


a. 3 inch (75 mm): 100 percent.


Page 17 of 20

b. 2-1/2 inch (63 mm): 90 to 100 percent.

c. 2 inch (50 mm): 35 to 70 percent.

d. 1-1/2 inch (37.5 mm): 0 to 15 percent.

e. 3/4 inch (19 mm): 0 to 5 percent.

2.12 GEOTEXTILE

A. Performance Requirements:

1. Grab Tensile Strength (ASTM D4632): 115 pounds.

2. Grab Tensile Elongation (ASTM D4632): 50 percent.

3. Trapezoidal Tear (ASTM D4533): 50 pounds.

4. Puncture (ASTM D4833): 65 pounds.

5. Apparent Opening Size (ASTM D4751): 0.212 mm, 70 U.S. Sieve.

6. Permittivity (ASTM D4491): 2.0 sec -1.

7. Flow Rate (ASTM D4491): 140 gal/min/s.f.

B. Geotextile Material: 4 ounce, non-woven, needle punched geotextile composed of 100 percent

polypropylene staple fibers that are inert to biological degradation and resists naturally

encountered chemicals, alkalis, and acids.

C. Products:

1. Carthage Mills FX-40HS.

2. U.S. Fabrics US 115NW.

3. Mirafi 140N.

4. Approved equal.

2.13 EDGE RESTRAINTS

A. Concrete Edge Restraint: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Plastic Edge Restraints:

1. Pave Tech Pave Edge Rigid.

2. Pave Tech Pave Edge Flexible.

3. Pave Tech Pave Edge Industrial.

4. Snap Edge One Piece Edging, 96 inches.


Page 18 of 20

5. Approved equal.

C. Metal Edge Restraints:

1. Permaloc Aluminum, Model No. _____.

2. Approved equal.

2.14 ACCESSORLES

A. Cleaners: _____.

B. Sealers: _____.

C. Joint Sand Stabilizers: _____.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly constructed and prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect in writing of


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best

result for the substrate under the project conditions.

B. Prevent damage to underdrain pipes, overflow pipes, observation wells, or inlets and other

drainage appurtenances during installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, approved submittals and in proper

relationship with adjacent construction.

1. Provide edge restraints as indicated.

2. Provide separation geotextile on bottom and sides of prepared subgrade. Secure in

place to prevent wrinkles and folds. Overlap edges minimum of 18 inches (450 mm)

in direction of drainage.

3. Provide base and subbase indicated. Compact and provide to tolerances as

recommended by paver manufacturer.

4. Provide and spread setting bed as recommended by paver manufacturer.

5. Mix concrete pavers from a minimum of three bundles to produce uniform blend of

colors and textures.

6. Lay concrete pavers to pattern indicated.


Page 19 of 20

7. Provide spacing recommended by paver manufacturer.

8. Cut pavers as recommended by manufacturer.

9. Vibrate pavers to leveling course as recommended by manufacturer.

10. Spread joint material and vibrate until joints are completely filled.

11. Apply sealer in accordance with sealer and paver manufacturer recommendations

after cleaning products.


A. Verify final elevations for conformance to the Drawings.

1. Prevent finished grade elevations from deviating more than 3/8 inch (10 mm) under a

10 foot (3 m) straightedge or indicated slope.

2. No greater than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) difference in height between pavers and adjacent

paved surfaces.


A. Prevent traffic on pavers until joint material is vibrated into joints.

B. Clean products in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.

C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

3.6 MAINTENANCE FOR PERMEABLE PAVERS

A. Remove all debris from joint and provide additional Permeable Joint Aggregate material after

120 days and before 150 days after date of Substantial Completion.

B. Fill Permeable Joint Aggregate material full to the lip of the paver.

C. Annual Maintenance:

1. Annually inspect Permeable Joint Aggregate material for areas clogged with debris.

2. Vacuum or sweep as necessary to restore surface infiltration.

3. Replenish removed Permeable Joint Aggregate material with clean aggregate material

flush to paver lip.

4. Sweep excess material from paver surface.

END OF SECTION


Page 20 of 20

SECTION 322500-PAVING AND SURFACING


Page 1 of 7

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Refer to Division 32 for requirements related to paving and surfacing. Refer to Division 3 for

requirements relating to concrete.

1.2 SCOPE OF SECTION

A. This section contains the requirements relating to various paved or surfaced areas, such as

sidewalks, streets, service drives, bicycle lanes and paths, and parking lots and garages.

Included are the requirements for marking pavement and the repair of pavement disturbed by

construction.

1.3 PAVING AND SURFACING

A. GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

1. Requirement For Design By Professional: Roadway design, including bicycle lanes

(on-road) and paths (off-road), shall be by a Virgin Islands licensed professional

engineer or Virgin Islands registered landscape Project Manager.

2. Applicable Design Standard: Roadway construction shall be designed in accordance

with the latest edition of the American Association of State Highway and

Transportation Officials (AASHTO) Guidelines and the Federal Highway

Administration (FHWA) Standards.

3. Design Guide For Bicycle Facilities: Bicycle lanes and paths shall be designed in

accordance with the latest version of FHWA “Small Town and Rural Multimodal

Networks”.

4. All new paved areas shall have positive drainage to eliminate ponding. Where new

paved areas join existing, measures shall be taken to incorporate positive drainage to

eliminate ponding. All new and existing paved areas shall incorporate storm drainage

infrastructure to prevent run-off into public right-of-ways.

B. ROADWAY CONSTRUCTION

1. Applicable Technical Specifications for Construction:

a. Construction procedures shall follow the usual practices of the FHWA FP-14 for

work of similar character and extent.

2. Minimum Requirements:

a. New pavement sections shall have a minimum 8" base of D gradation stone or

equivalent, compacted to 95% of maximum density. Paving shall be 2" (minimum)

binder asphaltic concrete and 2” (minimum) surface asphaltic concrete. Assume an

ESAL (Equivalent Axel Loadings over its lifetime) of 5 million.

3. Site Conditions:



Page 2 of 7

4. Weather Limitations: Apply prime and tack coats. Do not apply when base is wet or

contains an excess of moisture.

5. Construct hot-mixed asphalt base course and surface course when base is dry.

6. Establish and maintain required lines and grade elevations.

7. Materials:

a. Use locally available materials that exhibit a satisfactory record of previous

installations. Shall meet or exceed the requirements of FHWA FP-14 standard

specifications for roadways and structures.

b. Aggregate Base - Crushed stone or gravel conforming to FHWA FP-14

standard specifications for roadways and structures.

c. Coarse Aggregate - Sound, angular crushed stone or crushed gravel complying with

ASTM D 692-88.

d. Fine Aggregate-Sharp edge natural sand or sand prepared from stone, gravel

complying with ASTM D 1073.

e. Mineral Filler- Rock or other inert material complying with ASTM D 242.

f. Asphalt Cement-ASTM D 3381 for viscosity graded materials. ASTM D 946 for

penetration graded material.

g. Tack Coat-Emulsified asphalt ASTM D 977.

h. Lane Marking Type H-Thermoplastic markings with Type 1 glass beads. Engineer

to verify lane marking color requirements.

8. Testing:

a. Testing of in place hot mixed asphalt courses for compliance with the requirements

for thickness and surface smoothness shall be done by the Contractor’s testing

consultant, with results transmitted to the project engineer. Repair or remove and

replace unacceptable paving at the Contractor's expense as directed by the engineer.

C. PARKING LOTS

1. Minimum Requirements:

a. New pavement sections shall have a minimum 4” subbase of D gradation stone or

equivalent, compacted to 95% of maximum density. Paving shall be 2" (minimum)

binder asphaltic concrete, and 2” surface asphaltic concrete.

D. ROAD CLOSURES AND TRAFFIC MAINTENANCE

1. In no case shall a road be closed in its entirety. At least one lane of traffic shall always

be maintained. Special permission for an off-road detour may be granted in some

cases; permission shall be obtained through the Project Manager.



Page 3 of 7

2. Temporary barricades and flagmen shall be provided in accordance with Manual of

Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) standards.

E. BICYCLE LANES AND PATHS

1. Provision Requirement:

a. All new road construction, or major reconstruction of existing roads, shall

accommodate bicycle traffic through the provision of on-road bicycle lanes or off-

road bicycle paths. On-road bicycle lanes are preferred.

2. Connection Requirement:

3. New bicycle lanes and paths shall connect to existing bicycle lanes and paths.

4. Bicycle Lane Construction:

5. On-road bicycle lane construction shall not differ in construction (i.e. type of materials

used, level of compaction, or cross-sectional thickness of materials) from adjacent

vehicle traffic lanes.

6. Bicycle Path Construction:

7. A typical section for off-road bicycle paths would be a 10' wide path consisting of a

minimum 4" thick B graded stone or equivalent base with a minimum 2" thick

asphaltic concrete surface course.

8. Bicycle Parking and Storage Facilities:

a. Refer to Section 322840 for the requirements relating to bicycle facilities for

parking and on-site storage

F. SIDEWALKS

1. General:

a. Separate sidewalks shall be provided with all new road construction or major

reconstruction.

2. Construction Requirements:

a. Concrete sidewalks are to be a minimum of 5” thick, with welded wire mesh

reinforcement or concrete reinforced with fiber.

b. Rebar reinforcements shall be installed at sidewalk intersections.

c. Sidewalk width shall be a minimum of 5.2' and shall match surrounding sidewalk

patterns and widths if greater than 5.2'.

d. Expansion joints shall be a maximum of 18' apart with kerfs at 5' intervals.

e. Zip strips shall be used during pour at expansion joints. After strip is removed a

self-leveling urethane caulk shall be used to fill the void.



Page 4 of 7

f. Any curb radii poured at entrances shall have ADA compliant handicapped ramp

installed.

1.4 PROTECTION OF THE WORK

A. PROTECTION FROM DAMAGE

The Contractor shall adequately and fully protect all parts of the work against damage until

completed and accepted by the Engineer for maintenance. Damages shall be properly repaired

by the Contractor at no additional expense to the Government.

B. TEMPORARY BARRICADES

Throughout the duration of the Contract, the Contractor shall provide temporary barricades,

conforming to the latest edition of U.S. Department of Transportation's MUTCD, properly

lighted, to keep traffic off the current portion of the work.

C. PROTECTION OF ADJACENT SURFACES

The Contractor shall protect exposed surfaces adjacent to the work from physical damage

resulting from construction activities, and from becoming stained during application of paving

materials. The Contractor shall clean, repair, or replace, as required, surfaces damaged during

the course of the work at no additional expense to the Owner.

D. PROTECTION FROM GRAFFITI

Newly poured concrete roads, streets, curbs, or sidewalks shall be protected AND guarded from

graffiti from passersby until the concrete has sufficiently cured to resist such molestation.

Failure to prevent graffiti, or other such vandalism, shall result in the new concrete having to be

removed and replaced. This requirement shall mandate the Contractor to take the necessary

steps in preventing such incidents including, but not limited, to guarding the project after

normal working hours.

1.5 REPAIR OF PAVEMENT

A. GENERAL

1. All roads, streets, service drives, or sidewalks, whether concrete or asphalt

construction, shall be restored (repaved) within 3 days from the time of backfilling and

compaction.

2. Backfilling of all cuts through pavement shall be properly compacted to 95% of

maximum density in 6" lifts or less.

3. Cuts made through any paved surface shall be repaired in a non-discernible fashion.

4. The cross-sectional thickness of materials used in repairing a section of roadway shall

match or exceed the adjacent roadway.

5. Extensive pavement repairs shall be made in accordance with the minimum

specifications outlined above.



Page 5 of 7

B. CONCRETE PAVEMENT

Cuts through concrete shall be repaired by replacing the section between the nearest two joints

- either construction or expansion. Protect adjacent areas from damage by new work.

C. ASPHALT PAVEMENT

1. Cuts through asphalt shall be repaired so that depressions or humps do not develop. If

they do, they shall be corrected, at the Contractor's expense. Repairs shall match the

adjacent roadway surfaces.

2. Asphalt and base compaction by "normal traffic” is not permitted. Proper compaction

for the depth of the cut is required.

3. All cuts to existing bituminous concrete paving shall be saw cut where new work

adjoins pavement to remain.

D. REPAIR OF PAVEMENT MARKINGS

When cuts are made through any paved surface and the cuts extend through the pavement

markings, the replaced pavement shall be marked to match the existing.

1.6 PAVEMENT MARKING:

A. GENERAL

1. Applicable Design Standards:

All pavement marking shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the U.S. Department of

Transportation MUTCD.

2. Thermoplastic Striping:

All thermoplastic striping shall be placed on an FHWA FP-14 approved mix that minimizes the

slipperiness of the marking surface.

a. Thermoplastic traffic line paint shall be a reflectorized thermoplastic pavement

striping material applied to the road surface in a molten state by mechanical means.

It shall have surface application of glass beads which, upon cooling to normal

pavement temperature, will produce an adherent reflectorized stripe of the specified

thickness and width.

b. The markings must be capable of conforming to pavement contours, breaks and

faults through the action of traffic at normal pavement temperatures. The markings

shall have resealing characteristics, such that it is capable of fusing with itself and

previously applied thermoplastic when heated with a torch.

c. The material shall contain at least 30 percent of graded glass beads by weight. It

must contain enough titanium dioxide pigment to ensure a color like Federal

Highway White, Color No. 17886, as per Federal Standard 595.



Page 6 of 7

d. The surface must have a minimum skid resistance value of 55 BPN when tested

according to ASTM E303.

e. The material, when applied at a temperature range of 400 °F to 425 °F and a

thickness of 125 to 188 mils, shall set to bear traffic in not more than 3 minutes

when the air temperature is 60 °F. Minimum thickness shall be 125 mils.

f. The material must be resistant to deterioration due to exposure to sunlight, water, oil,

gasoline, salt or adverse weather conditions.

g. When applied to Portland concrete surfaces, the application notes above still apply,

except that a compatible surface primer/sealer shall be applied prior to the

application of the Thermoplastic material to assure proper adhesion.

3. Pavement Marking Exceptions:

a. Consult with Plans and Project Manager for pavement marking exceptions such as

directional arrows, traffic control markings, etc.

4. Existing Pavement Markings:

a. Prior to the installation of paint or thermoplastic pavement marking lines and

symbols, existing pavement markings shall be removed by a method which does

not materially damage the existing pavement surfaces.

b. Materials deposited on the pavement and adjacent surfaces as a result of the removal

of pavement markings shall be removed as the work progresses.

c. When a blast removal method is used, care must be taken to protect adjacent surfaces

and structures from flying debris.

d. Painting over, or black out painting, of existing pavement markings with black paint

or bituminous solutions shall not be allowed.

B. ROADS

1. Thermoplastic striping shall be used for traffic markings on all roads, drives, and

service drives. Material and application shall be in accordance with the latest versions

of the FHWA FP-14 "Standard Specifications for Roads and Bridges Construction

Projects".

2. To accommodate the concrete surfaces of the parking layout, pavement markings for

curbs and tire stops shall be made with latex paint.

C. PARKING GARAGES

Thermoplastic striping shall be used for traffic markings and for designating parking spaces in

all parking garages. Material and application shall be in accordance with the latest versions of

the FHWA "Standard Specifications for Roads and Bridges Construction Projects".



Page 7 of 7

D. SURFACE PARKING LOTS

Pavement markings in surface parking lots shall be made with thermoplastic.

E. BIKE PATHS AND LANES

1. Design Guide:

Pavement marking for bicycle lanes and paths shall be designed in accordance with latest

version of the FHWA “Small Town and Rural Multimodal Networks”, with additional input

from the Project Manager.

2. Curb Inlets, Storm Drains, and Other Potential Hazards:

Where hazards to bicyclists cannot be eliminated, pavement marking is required to make the

hazard more visible.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 322510-BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT


Page 1 of 3

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Placing and compacting base courses

B. Temporary pavement patching

C. Permanent roadway paving and patching

1.2 REFERENCED SECTIONS

A. Section 312110 - Clearing and Grubbing

B. Section 312200 - Earthwork

1.3 REFERENCES

A. FHWA FP-14 Standard Specifications for Construction of Roads and Bridges Projects, 2014 Edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit test reports of proposed aggregate sources prior to incorporating such materials into the

Project.

B. Submit Certificates of Compliance for all pavement mixtures furnished under this Section.


A. The CONTRACTOR shall perform tests to qualify each source of materials and at sufficient

intervals to assure conformance of all materials furnished for use under this Section.

B. The "Materials and Research Engineer" or the "Engineer" shall refer to the CONTRACTOR's person

responsible for Quality Control of hot mix pavements.

C. Verification testing of material may be performed by an independent testing laboratory paid for by

the OWNER.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Base Courses:

1. 4” asphaltic concrete Type II Binder Section 322505

B. Bituminous Pavement:

1. 2" asphaltic concrete Type I Surface, with anti-strip additive designed for 5,000,000 ESAL.


A. Test each proposed source of aggregates for gradation and moisture-density relationship.



Page 2 of 3

B. Verification testing of materials at the asphalt plant may be performed by the OWNER to ensure

conformance with the requirements for materials furnished under this Section.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare site in accordance with Section 312110.

B. Backfill excavations in accordance with Section 332200.

C. The subgrade shall be prepared in accordance with Section 312200.

D. RECLAMATION OF PAVEMENT:

Where bituminous pavement is to be reclaimed, process the material and stockpile for reuse.

E. Exercise care in the removal of pavement so that no pavement is unnecessarily disturbed or

destroyed.

F. Mechanically cut pavement shall be removed to a straight line unless otherwise directed by the

ENGINEER.

G. Diamond saws shall be used for sawing bituminous concrete pavement. Cutting-type grader blades

will not be allowed.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Curbs, walks, and walls are to be adequately protected and left in a clean condition.

3.3 BASE COURSES

A. Install subbase and base courses in accordance with Construction drawings.

B. The finished base course surface shall not vary more than 1/4 inch from a 10-foot straightedge

applied parallel or perpendicular to the centerline.

3.4 TEMPORARY PATCHING

A. Temporary pavement repairs shall be made before subjecting excavations to traffic and shall be

maintained until permanent pavement repairs are made.

B. Subbase and base courses and materials shall conform to the requirements for permanent pavement

repairs.

C. Temporary pavement shall consist of a single 2-inch binder course unless otherwise shown on the

Plans.

3.5 PERMANENT PATCHING

A. Cut back existing pavement from the edge of excavations to form a sharp, clean, straight edge on

undisturbed material.



Page 3 of 3

B. Apply tack coat to saw cut edges and other surfaces where bond to new pavement is required.

C. Install permanent pavement as specified below.

D. Any additional paving required by trenches wider than the limits specified in the Plan will be

performed at no additional cost to the OWNER.

3.6 PERMANENT PAVEMENT

A. Install permanent pavement in accordance with construction drawings.

B. Adjust manhole covers, catch basin grates, valve and meter boxes and the like to not less than 1/8

inch and not more than 1/2 inch below final pavement grade.

C. Apply tack coat to saw cut edges and other surfaces where bond to new pavement is required.

D. Full width permanent pavement shall consist of the lift thicknesses and types shown on the Plans.

E. Shim low, uneven, or settled areas with leveling mix before application of wearing course.

3.7 REPAIR OF SETTLED SURFACES

A. Should an area settle that the CONTRACTOR has permanently paved:

1. Saw cut and remove the affected pavement.

2. Remove base materials if necessary to ensure proper compaction of subgrade, subbase, and

base.

3. Repair as specified for permanent patching.


A. Verification testing of installed materials may be performed to ensure conformance with the

requirements for materials, compaction, and surface tolerance of this Section.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 323100 – DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES


Page 1 of 16

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Ornamental welded steel fence system. (Classic Commercial)

B. Ornamental rackable welded steel fence system. (Versai Commercial)

C. Ornamental rackable welded steel fence system. (Versai Assurance Commercial)

D. Ornamental rackable mechanically locked fence system. (Titan Industrial)


A. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B. Section 311000 - Site Clearing.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM).

1. ASTM D523 - Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss.

2. ASTM D1654 - Standard Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens

Subjected to Corrosive Environments.

3. ASTM D2244 - Standard Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Differences

from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates.

4. ASTM D2794 - Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of

Rapid Deformation (Impact).

5. ASTM D3359 - Standard Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test.

6. ASTM F593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs.

B. American Welding Society (AWS): AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Manufacturer's printed product information indicating material compliance and specified options are

to be submitted prior to installation. Submit manufacturer's product data sheets on each product to

be used.

C. Shop drawings shall include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

Drawings must be submitted for approval and be approved prior to installation.

D. Design data which verifies compliance with design loads specified in Performance Requirements

Article. Design data shall be signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for

their preparation.



Page 2 of 16

E. Submit samples for initial color selection. Submit samples of each specified finish.


A. Manufacturing company with engineering and fabrication of custom fencing and gate systems for a

minimum of 15 years.

B. Installation company with experienced in manufacturer's products for a minimum of 5 years. The

Contractor shall provide trained laborers with prior experience in the type of construction involved

as well as experience installing the materials and techniques specified.

C. Obtain each fence system and gates through one source from a single manufacturer.


A. Upon delivery to the jobsite, inspect all materials for damage that might have occurred during

shipment.

B. Handle and store materials in manufacturer's packaging until materials are ready to be installed.

Store materials in such a way as to prevent damage and theft.


A. Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with fencing and gates by field

measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on shop drawings. Provide allowance

for trimming and fitting onsite.

1.8 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for fencing and gates. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with

integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to the Project

Site in time for installation.

B. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support systems

temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard 20 year limited warranty, from the date

of purchase, against defects in materials and workmanship including protection against cracking,

peeling, blistering, and corrosion (rusting).

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Fortress Fence Products, which is located at: 1720 North First Street;

Garland, TX 75040; Toll Free Tel: 844-909-1999; Fax: 972-372-0078; Email:request info

([email protected]); Web:http://www.fortressfence.com

B. Substitutions: Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section

01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

http://admin.arcat.com/users.pl?action=UserEmail&company=Fortress+Fence+Products&coid=49638&rep=&fax=972-372-0078&message=RE:%20Spec%20Question%20(02820for):%20%20&mf=

http://admin.arcat.com/users.pl?action=UserEmail&company=Fortress+Fence+Products&coid=49638&rep=&fax=972-372-0078&message=RE:%20Spec%20Question%20(02820for):%20%20&mf=

http://http/www.fortressfence.com



Page 3 of 16

2.2 SITE FENCING AND GATES

A. Ornamental Welded Steel Fence Systems:

1. Basis of Design: Classic Commercial Fence Systems as manufactured by Fortress Fence

Products, a division of The Fortress Company.

2. Style: As indicated on the Drawings.

3. Style: Extended Picket (EXT).

4. Style: Spear Point Picket (SP).

5. Fence Panels: Fabricated in standard length of 90-1/2 inches (2299 mm).

a. Height: 46 inch (1168 mm).

6. Materials:

a. Rails and pickets shall be cold-rolled steel formed and welded tubing with a Grade A

minimum tensile strength of 45,000 psi (310 MPa) conforming to ASTM A653 and have

a G60 zinc coating, 0.60 oz./ft2 (0.18 kg/m2) in accordance with ASTM A653.

b. Posts shall be cold-rolled steel formed and welded tubing with a Grade A minimum tensile

strength of 45,000 psi (310 MPa) conforming to ASTM A653, have a G60 zinc coating,

0.60 oz./ft2 (0.18 kg/m2) in accordance With ASTM A653, and have a powder-coated

factory finish.

7. Components:

a. Rails: 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) square, 16 gauge.

b. Pickets: 3/4 inch (19 mm) square, 19 gauge.

c. Posts: 2-1/2 inch (63.5 mm) square, 16 gauge.

8. Gates: Provide manufacturer's standard gates and hardware.

9. Fabrication:

a. Fence Panels: Fabricated in standard length of 90-1/2 inches (2299 mm). Comply with

requirements indicated for materials, thickness, design and details of construction.

b. Welded connections shall comply with AWS standards for recommended practice in shop

welding.

c. Components shall be accurately cut and drilled to receive hardware, fasteners, and

accessories.

d. Fence panel shall be capable of meeting structural test load capabilities for a commercial

fence system referenced in table 2 of ASTM 2409.



Page 4 of 16

e. Fence panel shall be capable of meeting coating performance requirements in table 3 of

ASTM 2409.

7. Finish:

a. Materials are coated with the Fortress Guard process including galvanization, zinc

phosphate, and architectural grade powder coat.

b. Metal parts shall be assembled and finished individually prior to shipment.

c. Galvanized steel fence components shall be cleaned with a non-petroleum solvent

followed by the application of a sealing zinc phosphate coating.

d. Immediately after sealing, a powder finish coating is applied by the electrostatic spray

process. This consists of a thermosetting carboxyl polyester resin top

Minimum Post Sizes for V2 Versai Commercial

Line of Fence Posts Panel Heights

2.5" x 16ga Up to & Including 6' height

2.5" x 14ga 7' & 8'

Versai Commercial Post Spacing by Bracket Type

Style Flat Top, Spear Top, Extended Picket and Curved Top 8' Nominal (90.5" Rail)

Bracket Types One Direction Flat Mount (EX-106), for 2-1/2" post size

One Direction Flat Mount (EX-106), for 3" post size, 95.5" post setting

Two Direction Line (EX-206), for 2-1/2" post size, 95" post setting

Three Direction Universal (EX-306), for 2-1/2" post size, 95" post setting

Swivel Flat Mount (EXS-106), for 2-1/2" post size, 95" post setting

Swivel Flat Mount (EXS-106), for 3" post size, 95.5" post setting

Versai Commercial Gate Posts Sizes

Gate Leaf Gate Height

Up to & Including 4' Over 4' Up to & Including

6'

7' & 8'

Up to 4' 2.5" x 14ga 3" x 12ga 3" x 12ga

4'1" to 6' 3" x 12ga 3" x 12ga 4" x 11ga

6'1" to 8' 3" x 12ga 4" x 11ga 4" x 11ga

B. Ornamental Rackable Welded Steel Fence Systems:



Page 5 of 16

1. Basis of Design: Versai Commercial Fence Systems as manufactured by Fortress Fence


a. Style: As indicated on the Drawings.

b. Style: Flat Top, Extended Bottom (FT).

c. Style: Flat Top, Flat Bottom (FT/FB).

d. Style: Flat Top, Flat Bottom (PL) for Swimming Pool installations

e. Style: Extended Top, Extended Bottom (EXT).

f. Style: Extended Top, Flat Bottom (EXT/FB).

g. Style: Spear Point Top, Extended Bottom (SP).

h. Style: Spear Point Top, Flat Bottom (SP/FB).

i. Style: Curve Top, Extended Bottom (CT).

j. Style: Curve Top, Flat Bottom (CT/FB).

k. Rails: 2.

l. Rails: 3.

m. Fence Panels: Fabricated in standard length of 90-1/2 inches (2299 mm).

i. Height: As indicated on the Drawings.

ii. Height: 34 inch (864 mm).

iii. Height: 40 inch (1016 mm).

iv. Height: 46 inch (1168 mm).

v. Height: 54 inch (1372 mm).

vi. Height: 58 inch (1473 mm).

vii. Height: 70 inch (1778 mm).

viii. Height: 82 inch (2083 mm).

ix. Height: 94 inch (2388 mm).

n. Airspace Between Pickets, V2 Commercial: 3-15/16 inch.

o. Materials:



Page 6 of 16

i. Rails shall be cold-rolled steel formed U-channel and pickets shall be cold-rolled steel formed

and welded tubing, both having a Grade A minimum tensile strength of 45,000 psi (310 MPa)

conforming to ASTM A653 and have a G60 zinc coating, 0.60 oz./ft2 (0.18 kg/m2) in

accordance with ASTM A653.

ii. Posts shall be cold-rolled steel formed and welded tubing with a Grade A minimum tensile

strength of 45,000 psi (310 MPa) conforming to ASTM A653, have a G60 zinc coating, 0.60

oz./ft2 (0.18 kg/m2) in accordance with ASTM A653, and have a powder-coated factory

finish.

p. Components:

i. Rails: 1-9/16 inch (40 mm) by 1-3/16 inch (30 mm) (Leg x Web), 14 gauge.

ii. Pickets:

1) 3/4 inch (19 mm) square, 16 gauge.


a. Posts: 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) square, 16 gauge.

b. Posts: 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) square, 14 gauge.

c. Posts: 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) square, 12 gauge.

d. Posts: 3 inch (76 mm) square, 14 gauge.

e. Posts: 3 inch (76 mm) square, 12 gauge.

f. Gates: Provide manufacturer's standard gates and hardware.

g. Fabrication:

i. Fence panels shall be fabricated in standard length of 90-1/2 inches (2299 mm). Comply with

requirements indicated for materials, thickness, design, and details of construction.

ii. Pickets are welded to the rails with a patented pin hinge system which allows the panel to rake

without metal fatigue or damage to the finish.

iii. Welded connections shall comply with AWS standards for recommended practice in shop

welding.

iv. Components shall be accurately cut and drilled to receive hardware, fasteners, and

accessories.

h. Panels shall be rackable to an 18 degree change in grade (30 inch vertical travel per panel).

i. Fence panel shall be capable of meeting structural test load capabilities for a commercial


j. Fence panel shall be capable of meeting coating performance requirements in table 3 of

ASTM 2409.



Page 7 of 16

2. Basis of Design: Versai Assurance Commercial Fence Systems as manufactured by Fortress

Fence Products, a division of The Fortress Company.



c. Style: Flat Top, Flat Bottom (FT/FB).

d. Style: Flat Top, Flat Bottom (PL) for Swimming Pool installations

q. Style: Extended Top, Extended Bottom (EXT).

r. Style: Extended Top, Flat Bottom (EXT/FB).

s. Style: Spear Point Top, Extended Bottom (SP).

t. Style: Spear Point Top, Flat Bottom (SP/FB).

u. Style: Curve Top, Extended Bottom (CT).

v. Style: Curve Top, Flat Bottom (CT/FB).

w. Rails: 2.

x. Rails: 3.

y. Fence Panels: Fabricated in standard length of 90-1/2 inches (2299 mm).










z. Airspace Between Pickets, V2 Assurance Commercial: 3 inch.

aa. Materials:



Page 8 of 16








finish.

bb. Components:


ii. Pickets:



cc. Posts: 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) square, 16 gauge.

dd. Posts: 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) square, 14 gauge.

ee. Posts: 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) square, 12 gauge.

ff. Posts: 3 inch (76 mm) square, 14 gauge.

gg. Posts: 3 inch (76 mm) square, 12 gauge.

hh. Gates: Provide manufacturer's standard gates and hardware.

ii. Fabrication:

i. Fence panels shall be fabricated in standard length of 90-1/2 inches (2299 mm). Comply with


ii. Pickets are welded to the rails with a patented pin hinge system which allows the panel to rake


iii. Welded connections shall comply with AWS standards for recommended practice in shop

welding.

iv. Components shall be accurately cut and drilled to receive hardware, fasteners, and

accessories.

v. Panels shall be rackable to an 18 degree change in grade (30 inch vertical travel per panel).

vi. Fence panel shall be capable of meeting structural test load capabilities for a commercial


vii. Fence panel shall be capable of meeting coating performance requirements in table 3 of

ASTM 2409.



Page 9 of 16

8. Finish:

a. Materials are coated with the Fortress Shield process including galvanization, zinc

phosphate, electrodeposition (E-coat), and architectural grade powder coat.

b. Metal parts shall be assembled and finished individually prior to shipment.

c. Galvanized steel fence components shall be cleaned with a non-petroleum solvent

followed by the application of a sealing zinc phosphate coating.

d. Immediately after sealing, provide a two-step finishing process consisting first of an

electrostatic dipping process in a lead-free high corrosion resistant epoxy resin leaving a

coating of approximately 20 microns followed by a thermosetting carboxyl polyester

resin top coat with a minimum dry film thickness of 60 microns. The second coating shall

be applied by the electrostatic spray process.

Minimum Post Sizes for Titan Industrial

Line of Fence Posts Panel Heights

2.5" x 12ga Up to & Including 6' height

3" x 12ga 7' up to 10'

Titan Industrial Post Spacing by Bracket Type

Style Flat Top, Spear Top, Extended Picket and Curved Top 8' Nominal (90.5"

Rail)

Bracket Types One Direction Flat Mount (EX-107), for 2-1/2" post size, 125"+/- 1/4"

OC post settings

One Direction Flat Mount (EX-107), for 3" post size, 125.5"+/- 1/4" OC

post settings

Two Direction Line (EX-207), for 2-1/2" post size, 125"+/- 1/4" OC post

settings

Two Direction Line (EX-207), for 3" post size, 125.5"+/- 1/4" OC post

settings

Three Direction Universal (EX-307), for 2-1/2" post size, 125"+/- 1/4"

OC post settings

Three Direction Universal (EX-307), for 3" post size, 125.5" +/- 1/4" OC

post settings

Swivel Flat Mount (EXS-107), for 2-1/2" post size, 125"+/- 1/4" OC post

settings

Swivel Flat Mount (EXS-107), for 3" post size, 125.5"+/- 1/4" OC post

settings



Page 10 of 16

Titan Industrial Gate Posts Sizes


Up to & Including 6' Over 6' Up to &

Including 8'

Over 8' up to and

Including 10'

Up to 4' 3" x 12ga 3" x 12ga 4" x 11ga

4'1" to 6' 3" x 12ga 3" x 12ga 4" x 11ga

6'1" to 8' 4" x 11ga 6" x 3/16" wall 6" x 3/16" wall

A. Ornamental Rackable Mechanically Locked Steel Fence Systems:

1. Basis of Design: Titan Industrial Fence Systems as manufactured by Fortress Fence




c. Style: Extended Top, Extended Bottom (EXT).

d. Style: Spear Point Top, Extended Bottom (SP).

e. Style: Curve Top, Extended Bottom (CT).

f. Rails: 2.

g. Rails: 3.

h. Fence Panels: Fabricated in standard length of 92 inches (2337 mm).










Page 11 of 16



i. Fence Panels: Fabricated in standard length of 90-1/2 inches (2299 mm).










j. Airspace Between Pickets: 3-15/16 inch.

k. Materials:








finish.

l. Components:

i. Rails: 1-3/4 inch (44.5 mm) x 1-3/4 inch (44.5 mm), 14 gauge.

ii. Pickets: 1 inch (25 mm) square, 14 gauge.

iii. Pickets: 1 inch (25 mm) square, 16 gauge.

iv. Pickets: 1 inch (25 mm) square, 18 gauge.

v. Slide Lock: 18 gauge patented slide lock system, attaches pickets to each rail.

vi. Post Size: 2-1/2 inches (63.5 mm) tube, 16 gauge.

vii. Post Size: 2-1/2 inches (63.5 mm) tube, 14 gauge.



Page 12 of 16

viii. Post Size: 2-1/2 inches (63.5 mm) tube, 12 gauge.

ix. Post Size: 3 inches (76 mm) tube, 12 gauge.

x. Post Size: 4 inches (102 mm) tube, 11 gauge.

m. Gates: Provide manufacturer's standard gates and hardware.

n. Fabrication:

i. Fence panels shall be fabricated in standard length of 92 inches (2337 mm). Comply with


ii. Fence panels shall be fabricated in standard length of 90-1/2 inches (2299 mm). Comply with


iii. Pickets are inserted into the rails through grommets which are put into the rails pre-punched

holes, and held in place with the patented slide lock system. This allows the panel to rake


iv. Panels shall be rackable to a 14.5 degree change in grade (24 inch vertical travel per panel).

v. Components shall be accurately cut and drilled to receive hardware, fasteners, and accessories.

vi. Fence panel shall be capable of meeting structural test load capabilities for an industrial fence

system referenced in table 2 of ASTM 2409.


ASTM 2409.

2. Basis of Design: Titan Commercial Fence Systems as manufactured by Fortress Fence




c. Style: Extended Top, Extended Bottom (EXT).

d. Style: Spear Point Top, Extended Bottom (SP).

e. Rails: 2.

f. Rails: 3.

g. Fence Panels: Fabricated in standard length of 92 inches (2337 mm).







Page 13 of 16


k. Fence Panels: Fabricated in standard length of 90-1/2 inches (2299 mm).






o. Airspace Between Pickets: 3-15/16 inch.

p. Materials:


and welded tubing, both having Grade A minimum tensile strength of 45,000 psi (310 MPa)






finish.

q. Components:


ii. Pickets: 3/4 inch (19 mm) square, 16 gauge.

iii. Slide Lock: 18 gauge patented slide lock system, attaches pickets to each rail.

r. Post Size: 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) square, 16 gauge.

s. Post Size: 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) square, 14 gauge.

t. Post Size: 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) square, 12 gauge.

u. Post Size: 3 inch (76 mm) square, 12 gauge.

v. Post Size: 4 inch (102 mm) square, 11 gauge.

w. Gates: Provide manufacturer's standard gates and hardware.

x. Fabrication:

i. Fence panels shall be fabricated in standard length of 92 inches (2337 mm). Comply with




Page 14 of 16

ii. Fence panels shall be fabricated in standard length of 90-1/2 inches (2299 mm). Comply with


iii. Pickets are inserted into the rails through grommets which are put into the rails pre-punched

holes, and held in place with the patented slide lock system. This allows the panel to rake


iv. Panels shall be rackable to a 14.5 degree change in grade (24 inch vertical travel per panel).

v. Components shall be accurately cut and drilled to receive hardware, fasteners, and accessories.

vi. Fence panel shall be capable of meeting structural test load capabilities for a commercial



ASTM 2409.

3. Finish:

a. Materials are coated with the Fortress Shield process including galvanization, zinc

phosphate, electrodeposition (E-coat), and architectural grade powder coat.

b. Metal parts are assembled and finished individually prior to shipment.

c. Galvanized steel fence components are cleaned with a non-petroleum solvent followed by

the application of a sealing zinc phosphate coating.

d. Immediately after sealing, a two-step finishing process consisting first of an electrostatic

dipping process in a lead free high corrosion resistant epoxy resin leaving a coating of

approximately 20 microns followed by a thermosetting carboxyl polyester resin top coat

with a minimum dry film thickness of 50 microns. The second coating will be applied by

the electrostatic spray process.

e. Materials are coated with the Fortress Armour process including galvanization, zinc

phosphate, epoxy powder coat, and architectural grade powder coat.

f. Metal parts are finished and assembled individually prior to shipment.

g. Galvanized steel fence components are cleaned with a non-petroleum solvent followed by

the application of a sealing zinc phosphate coating.

h. Immediately after sealing, a two-step finishing process consisting first of an epoxy powder

coat leaving a coating of approximately 20 microns followed by a thermosetting carboxyl

polyester resin top coat with a minimum dry film thickness of 60 microns. The second

coating will be applied by the electrostatic spray process.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



Page 15 of 16

A. Examine areas and conditions under which the work is to be installed, and notify the Contractor in

writing, with a copy to the Owner and the Architect, of any conditions detrimental to the proper and

timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have

been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Stake layout showing locations of gates and posts per submitted shop drawings.

B. Contact applicable authorities and take necessary precautions prior to beginning any excavation

work.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fences in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with

authorities having jurisdiction. Installation shall conform to the specifications referenced elsewhere

in this Section and as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Refer to Division 3 for concrete specification. Recommend minimum 28 day compressive strength

of 3,000 psi (20 MPa). Crown concrete at top to shed water.

C. On-center post spacing per manufacturer's drawings.

D. For non-level installations the on-center post spacing must be measured along the grade. Ensure that

fence sections are parallel to grade within 1/4 inch (6mm) in 12 feet (3658 mm).

E. Install brackets onto fence section and posts as indicated in manufacturer's printed instructions for

specific fence style. Attach fence sections to brackets with approved fasteners and techniques.

F. Install gate in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and approved signoff drawings.

Do not mount gate from wall of a structure. Provide gate post on both sides of a gate. For double

drive gate installation, provide concrete center drop to foundation depth and drop rod retainers at

center. Lubricate to ensure smooth operation and verify proper latch operation.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Remove cutting and drilling chips that are attached to the fencing, post, brackets, or additions to

prevent corrosion.

B. Repair scratches and other installation-incurred damage using manufacturers recommended paint.

Use paint of the appropriate color with a zinc additive to prevent rust from forming.

C. Clean up debris and unused material, and remove from site.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings

approved by manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of

correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to shop; make required alterations

and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.



Page 16 of 16

END OF SECTION

SECTION 323100 – ORNAMENTAL SECURITY FENCING AND GATES


Page 1 of 49

PART 1 GENERAL

A. This section is based on the products of Omega II Fence Systems, which is located at:

1735 St-Elzear West

Laval, QC, Canada H7L 3N6

Toll Free Tel: 800-836-6342

Tel: 450-686-9600

Fax: 450-681-7905

Email:request info ([email protected])

Web:www.omegatwo.com

B. Ornamental Steel Security Fencing and Gates Including the Following:

1. Omega II Architectural Fences.

2. Omega II Elite Fences.

3. Omega II Evolution Fences.

4. Omega II Secur Fences.

5. Omega II Harmony Fences.

6. Omega II Eco Fences.

7. Omega II Vertical Grating 10-20 Fences.

8. Omega II Vertical Grating 80-100 Fences.

9. Omega II Omega Max Fences

10. Swinging Gates.

11. Cantilever Gates.

12. Gate Operators.

13. Remote Controls.


A. Section 31 10 00 - Site Clearing.

B. Section 31 20 00 - Earth Moving.

C. Section 32 90 00 - Planting.

D. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

http://admin.arcat.com/users.pl?action=UserEmail&company=Omega+II+Fence+Systems&coid=34589&rep=&fax=450-681-7905&message=RE:%20Spec%20Question%20(02825ofs):%20%20&mf=

http://www.omegatwo.com/



Page 2 of 49

E. Division 16 - Electrical, electrical service and connections for motor operators,

controls, limit switches, other powered devices and for system disconnect switches.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. ASTM A82: Cold Drawn Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.

2. ASTM A121: Standard Specification for Metallic-Coated Carbon Steel Barbed

Wire.

3. ASTM A185: Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.

4. ASTM A446: Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized)

by the Hot-Dip Process, Structural (physical) Quality.

5. ASTM A500: Standard Specification for Cold formed welded and seamless

carbon steel structural tubing in round shapes.

6. ASTM A513: Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon

and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing.

7. ASTM A641: Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon

Steel Wire.

8. ASTM A653: Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)

or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

9. ASTM A787: Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Metallic-

Coated Carbon Steel Mechanical Tubing.

10. ASTM A1008: Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength

Low-Alloy (HSLA) and HSLA with Improved Formability.

11. ASTM B6: Standard Specification for Zinc.

12. ASTM B117: Standard Test Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testing.

13. ASTM B221: Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-alloy

extruded bars, rods, wire, shapes and tubes.

14. ASTM D2247: Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in

100% Relative Humidity.

15. ASTM D2794: Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to

the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact).

16. ASTM D3359: Standard Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape.



Page 3 of 49

17. ASTM F626: Standard Specification for Fence Fittings.

18. ASTM F900: Standard Specification for industrial and commercial swing

gates.

19. ASTM F934: Standard Specification for Standard Colors for Polymer-Coated

Chain Link Fence Materials.

20. ASTM F1043: Standard Specification for Strength and Protective Coatings on

Steel Industrial Chain Link Fence Framework

21. ASTM F1184: Standard Specification for industrial and commercial horizontal

slide gates.

22. ASTM F1234: Standard Specification for protection coatings on steel

framework for fences.

23. ASTM F2919: Standard Specification for Welded Wire Mesh Fence Fabric

(Metallic-Coated or Polymer Coated) with Variable Mesh Patterns or Meshes

Greater than 6 square inches (3871 mm2) in Panels.

B. Canadian Standards Association (CSA):

1. CAN/CSA-A23.1, Concrete - Constituents et Execution des Travaux.

2. CAN/CSA-G164, Hot Galvanization of Irregular Objects.

3. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB):

4. CAN/CGSB-138.1, Steel Meshes for fence.

5. CAN/CGSB-138.2, Steel mounting galvanized for fence.

6. CAN/CGSB-138.3, Installation of the latticed fences.

7. CAN/CGSB-138.4, Gates for fences.

8. CAN/CGSB-1.181, Rich zinc coating, organic, prepared.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, and finishes for the following:

1. Fence and gate posts, rails, and fittings.

2. Gates and hardware.



Page 4 of 49

3. Gate operators, including operating instructions.

4. Motors: Show nameplate data, ratings, characteristics, and mounting

arrangements.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Show locations of fence, each gate, posts, rails, and details of gate swing, or

other operation, hardware, and accessories.

2. Indicate materials, dimensions, sizes, weights, and finishes of components.

3. Include plans, elevations, sections, gate swing and other required installation

and operational clearances, and details of post anchorage, attachment and

bracing.

4. Installation procedures and instructions describing details for a typical fence

and gates.

5. Gate Operator: Show locations and details for installing operator components,

switches, and controls. Indicate motor size, electrical characteristics, drive

arrangement, mounting, and grounding provisions.

6. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring, communication features, and

access control features. Differentiate between factory-installed and field-

installed wiring and between components provided by fence manufacturer and

those provided by sections.

D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6

inches (150 mm) square or long, representing actual color.

E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with

project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other

information specified.

F. Maintenance Data: Provide a maintenance guide and parts list.


A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 2 years’ experience installing fences and gates

similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose

work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations for Fences and Gates: Obtain each component for fences and gates

from one source with resources to provide fences and gates of consistent quality in

appearance and physical properties.



Page 5 of 49

1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: listed and labeled as defined

in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

2. Provide gate operators that comply with UL 325.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,

and marked for intended use.

D. UL Standard: Provide gate operators that comply with UL 325.

E. System Requirements: Emergency Access Requirements shall comply with

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for automatic gate operators serving as

a required means of access.

1. Coordinate with door hardware and site security requirements.

2. Coordinate direction of entering and exiting traffic with life safety plans.

F. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of overall appearance and application

workmanship.

1. Construct areas designated by Architect.

2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship and material are

approved by Architect.

3. Correct mock-up installation as required to produce acceptable work.


A. Deliver and store products in manufacturer's tagged and unopened packaging until

ready for installation.

B. Handle products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.


A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or

others unless permitted under the following conditions:

1. Notify local utility marking services before beginning work.

2. Unless otherwise indicated in the general provisions of the contract, notify

Architect no less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

3. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.



Page 6 of 49

B. Field Measurements: Verify layout information for fences and gates shown on

drawings in relation to property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by

field measurements.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard ten-year limited warranty

for finish.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Omega II Fence Systems, which is located at: 1735 St-

Elzear West; Laval, QC, Canada H7L 3N6; Toll Free Tel: 800-836-6342; Tel: 450-

686-9600; Fax: 450-681-7905; Email:request info ([email protected]);

Web:www.omegatwo.com

B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section

016000 - Product Requirements.

4. All substitution approval requests shall be accompanied by manufacturing

drawings and specifications, and they shall meet all specifications for design,

size, gauge of metal parts, and fabrication.

2.2 OMEGA II ARCHITECTURAL FENCES

A. Height:

1. 4 feet (1245 mm).

2. 5 feet (1549 mm).

3. 6 feet (1778 mm).

4. 8 feet (2464 mm).

5. Multiple stacked panels as shown on the Drawings.

B. Architectural Self-Supporting Steel Mesh Fence Panels:

1. 92-3/4 inch (2356 mm) wide, welded by resistance using 6 gauge - 0.192 inch

(4.88 mm) pre-galvanized steel wire, welded at each crossing to form rectangles

2 x 6 inch (50 x 150 mm).

2. Cold rolled wire with tensile strength of at least 75,000 psi (515 Mpa) and a

2,172 lbs (985 Kg) breaking strength in accordance with ASTM A185 and

A853.

http://admin.arcat.com/users.pl?action=UserEmail&company=Omega+II+Fence+Systems&coid=34589&rep=&fax=450-681-7905&message=RE:%20Spec%20Question%20(02825ofs):%20%20&mf=

http://www.omegatwo.com/



Page 7 of 49

3. One end of the vertical wires of the panel shall extend 1 inch (25 mm) from the

last or the first horizontal wire to create a spiked top or bottom depending on

installed position. The other end is cut flush.

4. Panels shall have the following number of folds at 92.75 inches (2356 mm) wide

based on the panel height:

a. 4 feet (1245 mm): 2 folds.

b. 5 feet (1549 mm): 2 folds.

c. 6 feet (1778 mm): 3 folds.

d. 8 feet (2464 mm): 4 folds.

5. Panel camber may not exceed 0.094 inch (2.5 mm).

C. Square Posts: Cold rolled 1008 grade steel to meet ASTM 500 and ASTM A787 and

the following maximum horizontal loads, length as required for installation type:

1. Installation: In ground, post length as required for local frost line requirements.

2. Installation: Surface mounted, flanged.

3. Post Size: 2 x 2 inch (50 x 50 mm) for 4’ fence:

a. 16 gauge (1.6 mm), 329 pound (149 kg) maximum horizontal load.

b. 11 gauge (3.0 mm), 578 pound (262 kg) maximum horizontal load.





c. 11 gauge (3.0 mm), 463 pound (210 kg) maximum horizontal load.








Page 8 of 49


9. Post Size: 2 x 2 inch (50 x 50 mm) for 8’:


10. Post Size: 3 x 3 inch (75 x 75 mm):


D. Post Brackets:

1. Universal Post Bracket Kit Includes the following: 13-gauge (2.4mm) steel

collar, nut, washer and carriage bolt 1/4 x 1-1/4 inch (6.4 x 32 mm), all

galvanized steel.

a. For 90 degrees turns, use the same bracket.

b. For different angles, use universal angle brackets.

c. For 4 foot (1245 mm) high panels: Provide 4 brackets per panel.

d. For 5 foot (1549 mm) high panels: Provide 6 brackets per panel.

e. For 6 foot (1778 mm) high panels: Provide 6 brackets per panel.

f. For 8 foot (2464 mm) high panels: Provide 8 brackets per panel.

2. U-Shaped Bracket Kit, Includes the following: Stainless steel U rod 5/16 inch

(8 mm) diameter, rear flange in PVC 1-1/2" x 1-1/8 inches (37.8 x 28.4 mm),

forehead support in PVC 5/8" x 1-1/16 (15.2 x 27.5 mm) cosmetic plastic caps

and nuts (M8).

a. For 4 foot (1245 mm) high panels: Provide 4 brackets per panel.

b. For 4 foot (1230 mm) high panels: Provide 6 brackets per panel.




E. Special Panel Fittings (SPF): Hot dipped galvanized steel enables panels to be fastened

to any vertical or horizontal surface, such as steel or concrete beams or wood posts.

Provide the following model:



Page 9 of 49

1. SPF-W Kit: For mounting on a vertical surface, consisting of an L-shaped

slotted plate, which accommodates a 1-3/4'' (45 mm) vertical adjustment and a

retaining plate that hold two vertical wires when bolted together.

2. SPF-C Kit: for horizontal surfaces, uses the same "L" shaped slotted plate and

2 wire retaining plates.

3. SPF-P Kit: connects two panels together.

F. Post Caps:

1. Aluminum alloy.

2. Galvanized steel.

G. Overhang Extension:

1. Same dimensions as the post, minimum 18 in. (460 mm) long, welded to the

end square posts to form a 45 degrees angle to receive a panel of 16 in. (420

mm).

2. Provide with two fastener kits.

H. Architectural mesh panels and posts shall be zinc-coated steel wire conforming to

specification ASTM A641 (1989) Class 1, and with 4 mils polyester powder coating

as specified below.

2.3 OMEGA II ELITE FENCES

A. Height:

1. 4 feet (1230 mm).

2. 6 feet (1830 mm).

3. 8 feet (2430 mm).


B. Elite Steel Mesh Fence Panels:

1. Fabricated welded wire mesh panels zinc-coated steel wire conforming to

specification ASTM A641, 98-7/8inches (2511mm) wide, formed by one

vertical wire of 0.192 inch (4.88 mm) placed between two horizontal wires of

0.225 inch (5.72 mm), as per ASTM A185 and A853.

2. The wires are welded by resistance weld at each crossing to form rectangles 1-

15/16 x 7-7/8 inches (50 x 200mm).



Page 10 of 49

3. The cold rolled wire shall have a tensile strength of at least 75,000 psi (515

Mpa) and a 3150 lbs (1430 Kg) break strength for an individual wire.

4. One end of the vertical wires of the panel shall exceed 1 inch (25 mm) from the

last or first horizontal wire creating a spiked top or bottom depending on the

position when installed. The other end is cut flush.

5. Panel camber may not exceed 0.094inch (2.5 mm).





3. Post Size: 2 x 2 inch (50 x 50 mm) for 4’ high fences:



















Page 11 of 49


D. Post Brackets:



galvanized steel.


b. For different angles, use universal angle brackets.






(8 mm) diameter, rear flange in PVC 1-1/2" x 1-1/8 inches (37.8 x 28.4 mm),

forehead support in PVC 5/8" x 1-1/16 (15.2 x 27.5 mm) cosmetic plastic caps

and nuts (M8).






E. Special Panel Fittings (SPF): Hot dipped galvanized steel enable panels to be fastened









F. Post Caps:



Page 12 of 49

1. Aluminum alloy.





mm).


H. Elite mesh panels and posts shall be zinc-coated steel wire conforming to specification

ASTM A641 (1989) Class 1, and with 4 mils polyester powder coating as specified

below.

2.4 OMEGA II EVOLUTION FENCES

A. Height:

1. 4 feet (1230 mm).

2. 6 feet (1830 mm).

3. 8 feet (2430 mm).


B. Evolution Steel Mesh Fence Panels:


specification ASTM A641, 98-7/8 inches (2511mm) wide, formed by one




15/16 x 7-7/8 inches (50 x 200mm).


Mpa) and a 3150 lbs (1430 Kg) break strength for an individual wire.




C. Evolution steel mesh panels are welded at each intersection into a solid one-piece mesh

sheet. Mesh panels are hot dipped galvanized in conformity with ASTM A123/A123M

(GAW).



Page 13 of 49

D. End-to-End Connectors: Allow panels to be connected without requiring a post in

accordance with the following:

1. Quantity per 4’ Panels: 3 Eye-U-Brackets and 4 End-to-End Connectors.












F. Chain Link Fence Fittings: to ASTM F 626. All ferrous metal fittings shall be

galvanized.

G. Tie Wire or twist ties may be used or added if required. Minimum 9-gauge, 0.148 inch

(3.76 mm) galvanized steel or aluminum for attachment of panels to posts.

H. Stretcher bands: fabric bands and brace bands shall be galvanized pressed steel.

I. Fasteners: All nuts and bolts to be galvanized.

J. Evolution Round Fence Posts:

1. New line (intermediate), End and Corner Posts: 2-3/8-inch (60.0mm) diameter,

minimum 24 to 36 inches (610 mm to 914mm) longer than the height of the

panel for installation in the ground depending on local frost line requirements.

2. Steel Pipe Posts: Cold formed with minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi (344

MPa) and produced in accordance with ASTM F1043.

3. To upgrade an existing facility, keep the same posts or slide a new oversized

post over the existing posts using the same foundation if acceptable to the

Owner. Affix new posts with tap screws located at the base. No pull post, rail

or braces are required.

a. Evolution Round Fence Posts Brackets:



Page 14 of 49

4. Manufacturer's standard eye-U-bracket kit designed to wrap around 2-3/8'' (60

mm) or 3-1/2 inch (88,9 mm) round posts, including one pre-galvanized 1/4

inch (32mm) wire eye-U-bracket, one 1/8 inch (3mm) thick retaining plate hot

dip galvanized, two nuts, washers and carriage bolts 5/16 x 1 1/4 inch (8 x 32

mm), all galvanized steel.

5. Hardware allows for straight line and turns, each turn requires a post. For 90

degree turns, use the manufacturer's stretcher band.

K. Evolution Post Caps:

1. Aluminum alloy.


L. Evolution Swing Gates:

1. Gate Posts: Cold rolled from 1008 grade steel. Dimension corresponding to

posts including cap and SPF-W kit for adjacent panel mounting

2. Gate Frames: Fabricated in accordance with ASTM F900 using galvanized steel

members 1.90 inch (48.3 mm) outside diameter, weighing 2.28 lb/ft (3.30

kg/m), welded at all corners to create a rigid frame. Welded joints shall be

coated in accordance with ASTM A780, employing a zinc-rich paint.

a. Gates over 8 feet (2440 mm) high or 8 feet (2440 mm) wide shall have

horizontal or vertical members.

3. Gate Mesh: Filler shall match that shown in the fence section. Mesh panel to be

attached to frame with fabric bands at the external vertical members, and with

J-bolts or hook bolts to horizontal and internal vertical members. Bands and J-

bolts, hook bolts maximum of 18 inch (460 mm) centers.

4. Gate Hardware: ASTM F900 for hinges, latch, drop rods, hot-dip galvanized

steel, and sized to assure proper gate operation.

5. Hinge: Structurally designed by manufacturer to support gates without

deformation during opening and closing and capable of swinging 180 degrees

(3.14 rad) in or out.

6. Latch: Clamp-on gravity system, self-latching.

7. Double Gates Hardware: One drop bar to secure in closed position one of the

gate leaves, complete with stop pipe to engage the center drop rod, and gate

keeper mechanical device with gravity-lock system that fasten each gate leaf

when in full open position.

M. Dimensions and Nominal Weights for Gate Leafs in Single Openings:



Page 15 of 49

1. Panel heights less than 6 feet (1830), with gates 4 ft. (1220 mm) or less.

a. Outside Diameter: 2-3/8 inches (60.3 mm). Nominal Weight: 3.12 lb/ft (4.6

kg/m).

2. Panel heights less than 6 feet (1830), with gates 4 ft. (1220 mm) to 10 ft. (3050

mm).


kg/m).

3. Panel heights less than 6 feet (1830), with gates 10 ft. (3050 mm) to 18 ft (5490

mm).

a. Outside Diameter: 4 inches (101.6 mm). Nominal Weight: 6.56 lb/ft (9.8

kg/m).

4. Panel heights less than 6 feet (1830), with gates 18 ft. (5490 mm) to 24 ft (7320

mm).

a. Outside Diameter: 6-1/4 inches (168.3 mm). Nominal Weight: Per

manufacturer.

5. Panel heights over 6 feet (1830), with gates up to 6 ft. (1830 mm) or less.

a. Outside Diameter: 4 inches (101.6 mm). Nominal Weight: 9.11 lb/ft (13.5

kg/m).

6. Panel heights over 6 feet (1830 mm), with gates 6 ft. (1830 mm) to 12 feet (3660

mm).

a. Outside Diameter: 6-5/8 inches (168.3 mm). Nominal Weight: 18.97 lb/ft

(28.2 kg/m).

7. Panel heights over 6 feet (1830 mm), with gates 12 ft. (3660 mm) to 18 feet

(5490 mm).

a. Outside Diameter: 8-1/4 inches (219.1 mm). Nominal Weight: 28.58 lb/ft

(42.5 kg/m).

8. Panel heights over 6 feet (1830 mm), with gates 18 ft. (5490 mm) to 24 feet

(7320 mm).


kg/m).

N. Gate Framing Members for Round Pipe Swing Gates:

1. For gates 6 ft. (1830 mm) or less in height or width.



Page 16 of 49

a. Outside Diameter: 1.660 inches (42.2 mm). Nominal Weight: 1.83 lb/ft (2.7

kg/m).

2. For gates from 6 ft. (1830 mm) to 8 ft. (2440 mm) in height or width.

a. Outside Diameter: 1.9 inches (48.3 mm). Nominal Weight: 2.28 lb/ft (3.3

kg/m).

b. Provide the following for interior bracing, swing or roll gates, when required

or recommended by the manufacturer:

i. Outside Diameter: 1.660 inches (42.2 mm). Nominal Weight: 1.83 lb/ft (2.7

kg/m).



Page 17 of 49

2.5 OMEGA II SECUR FENCES

A. Height:

1. 4 feet (1230 mm).

2. 6 feet (1830 mm).

3. 8 feet (2430 mm).


B. Secur Steel Mesh Fence Panels:


specification ASTM A641, 98-7/8inches (2511mm) wide, formed by one




15/16 x 7-7/8 inches (50 x 200mm).


Mpa) and a 3150 lbs (1430 Kg) break strength for the 0.225-inch (5.72 mm)

wires and of 5600 lbs (2545 Kg) for the 0.303-inch (7.70 mm) wires.









3. Post Size: 2 x 2 inch (50 x 50 mm) for 4-foot-high fences:







Page 18 of 49














D. Post Brackets:



galvanized steel.


b. For different angles, used universal angle brackets.






(8 mm) diameter, rear flange in PVC 3-1/2' x 1-1/2' x 1-1/8 inches (88.7 x 37.8

x 28.4 mm), forehead support in PVC 2-3/8' x 5/8' x 1-1/16 (60.4 x 15.2 x 27.5

mm) cosmetic plastic caps and nuts (M8).



Page 19 of 49















F. Post Caps:

1. Aluminum alloy for posts 2 x 2 inches (50 x 50 mm) to 4 x 4 inches (100 mm x

100 mm).

2. Galvanized steel for larger dimensions.




mm).


H. Secur mesh panels and posts shall be zinc-coated steel wire conforming to specification


below.

2.6 OMEGA II HARMONY FENCES

A. Height:

1. 4 feet (1289 mm).

2. 6 feet (1889 mm).



Page 20 of 49

B. Harmony Self-Supporting Steel Mesh Fence Panels:

1. Wire mesh fence panels measuring 92-3/4-inch (2356 mm) wide are welded by

resistance as per ASTM-A185 using 6 gauge 0.192 inch (4.88 mm) pre-

galvanized steel wire for the vertical wire.

2. Wires are welded at each crossing on 0.225 inch (5.72 mm) pre-galvanized

horizontal steel wire to form a rectangle of 2 x 7.875 inches (50 x 200 mm).

3. Cold rolled wires have a minimum tensile strength of 75,000 psi (515 Mpa) and

a 2,172 lb (985 Kg) breaking strength.

4. The two last horizontal wires at the top edge of the panel are welded with a

curved shape and spaced at 2 inches (50 mm) between wires.

5. The lower curved wire starts at 3.5 inches (90 mm) from the last horizontal wire

each end of the panel.

6. All the vertical wires on the top of the panel are bended thereby creating an

arrow shape and shall exceed 3.5 inches (90 mm) from the last curved

horizontal wire.

7. The vertical wires on the bottom of panel are cut flush.





9. Panel camber may not exceed 0.094 inch (2.5 mm).

C. Harmony Post Performance Requirements:


a. 16 gauge (1.6 mm), 329 pounds (149 kg) maximum horizontal load.



a. 11 gauge (3.0 mm), 1106 pound (502 kg) maximum horizontal load

D. Harmony mesh panels and posts shall be zinc-coated steel wire conforming to

specification ASTM A641 (1989) Class 1, and with 4 mils polyester powder coating

as specified below.



Page 21 of 49

2.7 OMEGA II ECO FENCES

A. Height:

3. 4 feet (1245 mm).

4. 5 feet (1549 mm).

5. 6 feet (1778 mm).

6. 8 feet (2464 mm).

7. Multiple stacked panels.

B. Eco Self-Supporting Steel Mesh Fence Panels:

1. The OMEGA ECO system is in a combination of two panels separated by a 5''

or 6'' (125 mm or 150 mm) gap.

2. Provide with Elite Wire mesh as specified above.

3. Provide with Secur wire mesh as specified above.

4. Wire mesh fence panels are 98-5/8 inches (2505 mm) wide, welded by

resistance using 6-gauge 0.192 inch (4.88 mm) pre-galvanized steel wire,

welded at each crossing to form rectangles of 2 x 6 inches (50 x 150 mm).


Mpa) and 2,172 lbs (985 Kg) break strength.


last or the first horizontal wire creating a spiked top or bottom depending on






c. 6 feet (1778 mm): 3 folds.

d. 8 feet (2464 mm): 4 folds.






Page 22 of 49





















D. Post Brackets:

1. ECO Post Bracket Kit Includes the following: 14-gauge (2.6mm) steel collar

and wire retaining plate 1/4 x 1 inch (6.3 x 25 mm), nut, washer and carriage

bolt 5/16 x 1-1/4 inch (8.0 x 32 mm), all galvanized steel.

a. For 4 foot (1245 mm) high panels: Provide 2 brackets per post.

b. For 5 foot (1549 mm) high panels: Provide 3 brackets per post.



Page 23 of 49

c. For 6 foot (1778 mm) high panels: Provide 3 brackets per post.

d. For 8 foot (2464 mm) high panels: Provide 4 brackets per post.


(8 mm) diameter, rear flange in PVC 3-1/2' x 1-1/2' x 1-1/8 inches (88.7 x 37.8

x 28.4 mm), forehead support in PVC 2-3/8' x 5/8' x 1-1/16 (60.4 x 15.2 x 27.5

mm) cosmetic plastic caps and nuts (M8).










F. Post Caps:

1. Aluminum alloy for posts 2 x 2 inches (50 x 50 mm) to 4 x 4 inches (100 mm x

100 mm).

2. Galvanized steel for larger dimensions.




mm).


H. Eco mesh panels and posts shall be zinc-coated steel wire conforming to specification


below.

2.8 OMEGA II VERTICAL GRATING 10-20 FENCES

A. Height:

1. 47.01 inches (1194 mm).

2. 78.19 inches (1986 mm).



Page 24 of 49

3. 98.98 inches (2514 mm).


B. Louver Panel Width: 64.65 inches (1642 mm).

C. Bar Spacing:

1. OMEGA 10: 5.197 inches (132 mm) horizontal bar spacing

2. OMEGA 20: 2.60 inches (66 mm) horizontal bar spacing.

D. Vertical Grating Self-Supporting Steel Mesh Fence Panels:

1. Fabricated of 6-gauge, 0.192-inch (4.88 mm) diameter steel horizontal bars

welded to steel vertical plates.

2. Steel Wires: 6 gauge, cold-rolled, annealed to AISI 1018 and ASTM A853-04.

3. Plates: Heat-formed 1 inch (25 mm) wide plates to ASTM A505.

4. Plate Thickness: 0.08 inch (2.0 mm).

5. OMEGA 10: Bars and wires are resistance welded to create 2.44 x 5.20-inch

(62 x 132 mm) rectangles.

6. OMEGA 20: Bars and wires are resistance welded to create 2.44 x 2.60-inch

(62 x 66 mm) rectangles.

7. Steel Bars Tensile Strength: 75000 psi (515 MPa)

8. Steel Bars Breaking Load: 2,166 lb (982.4 kg) per bar.

9. Frame: 2 heat-formed horizontal plates 1 inch (25 mm) wide and 0.16 inch (4.0

mm) thick to AISI 1008 and ASTM A505.

10. Frame ends are folded at 90 degrees for securing to posts.

11. Folds are 2.56 inch (65 mm) longer than the vertical plates of the fence panel.

12. 12.Panel longitudinal curvature shall not exceed 1/200 of frame length.

13.Transverse curvature shall be less than or equal to 0.394 inch per 39.37

inches (10 mm per 1 m) of panel.

13. The difference between the panel width at the top and the width at the bottom

shall be less than 0.25 inch (6.4 mm).

14. Panel diagonals shall not present a difference of more than 0.25 inch per 59.05

inches (6.4 mm per 1.5 m) panel length.



Page 25 of 49

E. Square Posts: For installation in the ground or on base plates to meet the following

horizontal loading requirements. Secured to posts with 3/8 x 3-1/2 inch (9.5 x 89 mm)

galvanized carriage bolts and 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) galvanized nuts.

1. 2 x 2 inches (50 x 50 mm) 11-gauge (3.0mm) posts:

a. 50 inches (1290 mm) Posts: 502.8 pounds (2442 N).

b. 82 inches (2082 mm) Posts: 339.3 pounds (1513 N).

c. 102 inches (2610 mm) Posts: 270.7 pounds (1207 N).


a. 50 inches (1290 mm) Posts: 1309.7 pounds (5840 N).

b. 82 inches (2082 mm) Posts: 811.3 pounds (3618 N).

c. 102 inches (2610 mm) Posts: 647.2 pounds (2886 N).

F. Flat Posts: For installation in the ground or on base plates to meet the following

horizontal loading requirements. Secured to the posts at top of frame and bottom of

frame using 3/8 x 1-1/2 inch (9.5 x 38 mm) galvanized carriage bolts and 3/8 inch (9.5

mm) galvanized nuts.

1. 2.36 x 1/4-inch (60 x 6.35 mm) Posts:

a. 50 inches (1274 mm): 241.5 pounds (1077 N).

b. 81 inches (2066 mm): 148.9 pounds (664 N).

c. 102 inches (2594 mm): 118.6 pounds (529 N).

2. 3.15 x 1/4-inch (80 x 6.35 mm) Posts:

a. 50 inches (1274 mm): 429.2 pounds (1077 N).

b. 81 inches (2066 mm): 264.6 pounds (1180 N).

c. 102 inches (2594 mm): 210.8 pounds (940 N).

G. Number of parts required to secure panels on posts:

1. For 47.01 inch (1194 mm) high panel height, provide 4 bolts, 4 nuts, support

brackets

2. For 78.19 inch (1986 mm) high panel height, provide 6 bolts, 6 nuts, and 2

support brackets.



Page 26 of 49

3. For 98.98 inch (2514 mm) high panel height, provide 6 bolts, 6 nuts, and 2

support brackets.

2.9 OMEGA II VERTICAL GRATING 80-100 FENCES

A. Height:

1. 77.28 inches (1963 mm).


B. Width: 78.43 inches (1992 mm).

C. Horizontal Louver Profile:

1. OMEGA 80.

2. OMEGA 100.

D. Vertical Grating Self-Supporting Steel Mesh Fence Panels:

1. Fabricated of 0.08 inch (2 mm) thick horizontal louvers welded to two vertical

plates at the ends. Heat-formed complying with AISI 1008 and ASTM A 505.

2. Vertical Plates: 0.12 inch (3 mm) thick and 2 inches (50 mm) wide. Heat-formed

complying with AISI 1008 and ASTM A 505.

3. Vertical Wires: 0.16-inch (4.06 mm) AISI 1018 steel in accordance with ASTM

A 653 resistance-welded to louvers.

4. Rectangle Size: 5.20 inch by 1.80 inch (132 mm by 45.77 mm).

5. Cold Rolled Steel Bars: Tensile strength 75,000 psi (515 MPa) and breaking

load 1499 lb (680.0 kg) per bar.

6. Panel longitudinal curvature shall not exceed 1/200 of the frame length.

7. Transverse curvature shall be less than or equal to 0.394 in. per 39.37 in. (10

mm per 1 m) of panel length.

8. The difference between the panel width at the top and the width at the bottom

shall be less than 0.25 in. (6.4 mm).

9. Panel diagonals shall not present a difference of more than 0.25 in. (6.4 mm) in

length. Difference between c/c distances of horizontal bars shall not be more

than 0.25 in. per 59.05 in. (6.4 mm per 1.5 m) of panel length.



Page 27 of 49

E. Square Posts: For installation in the ground or on base plates to meet the following

horizontal loading requirements. Fabricated of 16 gauge or 11-gauge pre-galvanized

steel; cold-formed AISI 1008 steel in compliance with ASTM A500 Grade C and

ASTM A787.


a. Model 80 - 79.05 (2008 mm), 351.8 pounds (1569 N).

b. Model 100 - 79.53 (2020 mm), 349.8 pounds (1560 N).


a. Model 80 - 79.05 (2008 mm), 841.4 pounds (3752 N).

b. Model 100 - 79.53 (2020 mm), 836.3 pounds (3729 N).

F. Flat Posts: For installation in the ground or on base plates to meet the following

horizontal loading requirements. Standard Flat Post thickness is 0.25 in. (6.35 mm).

Hot dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 G100.

1. 2.36 x 1/4-inch (60 x 6.35 mm) Posts:

a. Model 80 - 78.42 inch (1992 mm), 154.5 pounds (689 N).

b. Model 100 - 78.90 inch (2004 mm), 153.4 pounds (684 N).

2. 3.15 x 1/4-inch (80 x 6.35 mm) Posts:

a. Model 80 - 78.42 inch (1992 mm), 275.5 pounds (1224 N).

b. Model 100 - 78.90 inch (2004 mm), 272.9 pounds (1217 N).

G. Panels: Secured to the posts with vertical plates. Galvanized 3/8-inch diameter X 1-

1/2-inch (9.5 mm x 38 mm) carriage bolts and galvanized 3/8-inch diameter (9.5 mm)

nuts are required to secure panels to flat posts. For 2-inch square posts, install posts

using galvanized 3/8-inch diameter x 3-1/2-inch (9.5 mm x 89 mm) carriage bolts and

galvanized 3/8-inch diameter (9.5 mm) nuts. Four attachment points are required.

H. Square Post Caps: Aluminum, 2 inches. x 2 inch (50 mm x 50 mm) or 3-inch x 3 inch

(76 mm x 76 mm) depending on chosen post model. Galvanized steel, 4-inch x 4 inch

(102 mm x 102 mm) or larger posts.

I. Extensions: If applicable, 45-degree extensions on 2 inch (50 mm) and on 3 inch (76

mm) square posts, as well as on 2.36 in. x 1/4 inch (60 mm x 6.35 mm) and on 3.15 in.

x 1/4 inch. (80 mm x 6.35 mm) flat posts. The extension length shall be a minimum of

18 inches (460 mm) and shall be welded at the end of the square post at a 45-degree

angle. A minimum fence height of 6 feet (1829 mm) is required to be able to use these

extensions.



Page 28 of 49

J. Straight or V-shaped Caps: 14.5 inch (368 mm) long at a 45 degree angle, with

provisions to attach 3 rows of barbed wire at 4 inch (100 mm) intervals, shall be solidly

secured to the posts with self-tapping screws which can withstand a 250 lb (113 kg)

load.

2.10 SWING GATES

A. Configuration:

1. Single swing.

2. Double swing.

3. Swing as shown on the Drawings.

B. Gate Frames under 7 feet (2134 MM): Two horizontal ASTM F900 galvanized square

steel tubes, 16 gauge, 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 inch (38 mm X 38 mm), and two vertical tubes 2 x

2 inch (50 x 50 mm) welded at intersections to create a rigid frame.

C. Gate Frames (over 7 feet (2134 mm): Two horizontal ASTM F900 galvanized square

steel tubes, 11 gauge, 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 inch (38 mm X 38 mm), two vertical tubes 2 x 2

inch (50 x 50 mm), and 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 inch (38 x 38 mm) supplementary vertical

support, welded at intersections to create a rigid frame.

D. Gate Posts: Cold rolled 1008 grade steel to meet ASTM 500 and ASTM A787, length

as required for installation type:



3. Post Size for fences under 6' (1830 mm) high: 3 x 3 inch (75 x 75 mm).

4. Post Size for fences between 6'-1" (1830 mm) and 13'6" (4115mm) high: 4 x 4

inch (100 x 100 mm).

5. Post Size for fences between 13'6" (4115mm) and 16' (4875mm) high: 6 x 6

inch (150 x 150 mm).

6. Post Size for fences over 16' (4875mm) high: Custom engineering by the

manufacturer.

E. Gate Hardware: Hinges, Latches, Drop Rods: Hot-dipped galvanized steel to ASTM

F900, sized to assure proper gate operation. Non-moving parts shall be powder coated.

1. Hinge: Structurally designed by manufacturer to support gates without

deformation during opening and closing.

2. Latch: Clamp-on, self-latching, gravity system.



Page 29 of 49

3. Optional Keyed Lockbox: LOCINOX with single lever, one side of each gate

as shown.

4. Optional Keyed Lockbox: LOCINOX with double levers, both sides of gates.

5. Additional Hardware for Double Gates:

a. Keeper: Mechanical device with gravity-lock system to fasten each gate leaf

in fully open position.

b. Drop Bar: Secures one gate in closed position using stop pipe to engage the

center drop rod.

c. Self-Locking Device: Integral to latch, and with padlock eyes.

2.11 CANTILEVER GATES

A. Construction: 6063-T6 aluminum to ASTM B221, weighing 0.94 lb/ft (1.39 kg/m),

fabricated in accordance with ASTM F1184, Class 2.

1. Members are welded together to form rigid one-piece frames with integral top

track.

2. Provide 2 track and wheel assemblies for each gate leaf, comply with

manufacturer instructions for gates larger than 30 feet (9144 mm).

3. Vertical Uprights: 2 x 2-inch (50 x 50 mm) aluminum, welded to gate frames

approximately 8 foot (2440 mm) apart, dividing the frame into equal sections.

4. Gates over 27 feet (8230 mm): Shipped in 2 parts and field spliced with special

attachments provided by manufacturer.

B. Gate Leaf in Single Openings:

1. Cantilever Support (Overhang) for gates 6 ft. (1830 mm) to 10 ft. (3040 mm):

6.5 feet (1980 mm).

2. Cantilever Support (Overhang) for gates 11 ft. (3350 mm) to 14 ft. (4270 mm):

7.5 feet (2290 mm).

3. Cantilever Support (Overhang) for gates 15 ft. (4570 mm) to 22 ft (6710 mm):

10 feet (3040 mm).

4. Cantilever Support (Overhang for gates 23 ft. (7010 mm) to 30 ft. (9140 mm):

12 feet (3660 mm) with additional 2 inch (50 mm) square lateral support of

aluminum weighing 1.71 lb/ft. (2.54 kg/m) welded to top horizontal rail, and

with bottom rail 2 x 4 inches (50 x 100 mm).



Page 30 of 49

5. Cantilever Support (Overhang for gates 31 ft. (9450 mm) to 35 ft (10670 mm):

13.5 feet (4120 mm) aluminum member weighing 1.71 lb/ft. (2.54 kg/m), with

2 top tracks welded together to form a dual enclosed track, with 2 truck

assemblies for each track in each gate leaf, for a total of 4 truck assemblies.

Bottom rail 2 x 4 inches (50 x 100 mm).


16 feet (4880 mm) aluminum member weighing 1.71 lb/ft. (2.54 kg/m), with 2

top tracks welded together to form a dual enclosed track, with 2 truck

assemblies for each track in each gate leaf, for a total of 4 truck assemblies.

Bottom rail 2 x 4 inches (50 x 100 mm).


Custom by manufacturer. Typically fabricated of 24 inch (610 mm) wide rigid

box frame truss of dual side frames, separated by square cross members and

diagonal truss rod bridging. Dual side frames each contain top track to provide

support for truss from both sides. Provide 4 trucks for each track, total 8 for

each gate leaf. Weld steel plate between top of support posts to maintain truck

assemblies in alignment with tracks.

8. As Shown on the Drawings.

C. Sliding Components:

1. Bracing: Diagonal adjustable length truss rods of 3/8 inch (9.5mm) galvanized

steel, in each panel of gate frames.

2. Top Track: Enclosed, combination one-piece track and rail of aluminum

extrusion weighing 3.72 lb/ft (5.54 kg/m), able to withstand reaction load of

2000 lb (907 kg). Track does not receive polymer coating.

3. Truck Assembly: Swivel type, zinc die cast, with 4 sealed lubricant ball bearing

rollers, 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter by 9/16 inch (14 mm) in width, and 2 side

rolling wheels to ensure truck alignment in track. Mounted on post brackets

using 7/8-inch (22 mm) diameter ball bolts with 1/2-inch (13 mm) shank.

Design truck assembly to withstand same reaction load as track assembly.

4. Gate Hangers, Latches, Brackets, Guide Assemblies, and Stops: Malleable iron

or steel, galvanized after fabrication. Provide positive latch for padlocking.

Fittings do not receive Polymer coating.

5. Bottom Guide Wheel Assemblies: Two 4-inch (100 mm) diameter rubber

wheels, straddling bottom horizontal gate rail, to allow adjustments to maintain

gate frame plumb and in proper alignment. One assembly attached to each

guidepost. Bottom guide wheel assemblies do not receive polymer coating.



Page 31 of 49

D. Gate Posts: Square sections of 4 inch (100mm) hot-dipped galvanized steel to ASTM

A500, Grade B with a minimum yield strength of 40,000 psi (275 MPa), weighing 7.04

lb/ft (10.8 kg/m), and with minimum 1.8 oz/sq.ft. (549 g/m2) zinc coating to ASTM

F1234. Length of gate posts minimum 36 inches (914mm) more than the actual height

of the fence for installation in the ground to meet local frost line requirements.

1. Single Slide Gate: 1 latch post and 2 support posts.

2. Double Slide Gates: 1 latch post and 4 support posts for double slide gates.

2.12 GATE OPERATORS

A. System Description: Factory-assembled automatic gate operation system comprised of

UL approved components, designed for gate size, type, weight, construction, use,

traffic-flow patterns, and operation frequency. Provide with minimum two keys per

lock and the following:

1. Operator System: of size, capacity, and with features, characteristics, and

accessories suitable for Project conditions, as recommended and provided by

gate manufacturer. Complete with electric motor and factory-prewired motor

controls, remote-control stations, control devices, power disconnect switch,

obstruction detection device, and wiring from motor controls to motor.

2. Coordinate operator wiring requirements and electrical characteristics with

building electrical system.

3. Control Equipment: Comply with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, NEMA ICS 6,

and NFPA 70, Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc.

4. Electrohydraulic Operation: Provide unit designed for mounting as shown on

the drawings; consisting of electric motor, pump, hydraulic actuator to suit gate

type, valves.

5. Enclosure: Lockable weatherproof enclosures to protect controls, operating

parts, and accessories. Include corrosion-resistant factory finish to match gates.

6. Operator shall allow motor to be removed without disturbing limit-switch

adjustment and without affecting auxiliary emergency operator.

7. Units are designed and wired for both right-hand and left-hand opening,

permitting universal installation.

B. Electrohydraulic Operation: Provide unit designed for mounting as shown on the

drawings; consisting of electric motor, pump, hydraulic actuator to suit gate type,

valves.



Page 32 of 49

C. Electromechanical Operation: Provide unit designed for mounting as shown on the

drawings; consisting of electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter,

speed control device, chain-drive assembly, brake, clutch or torque limiter, and as

follows:

1. Enclosed worm gear reducer, roller chain drive.

2. Enclosed worm gear and chain and sprocket reducers, roller chain drive.

3. V-belt and worm gear reducers, roller chain drive.

4. V-belt and chain and sprocket reducers, roller chain drive.

5. Enclosed worm gear reducer, wheel and rail drive.

D. Operation Cycle Requirements: Design gate operator to operate for not less than the

following duty and cycles per hour. One cycle equals one gate opening plus one gate

closing.

1. Medium Duty: 10 cycles per hour.

2. Heavy Duty: 25 cycles per hour.

3. Peak Duty: 20 cycles per hour at peak periods.

4. Custom: ___ cycles per hour.

5. Custom: ___ cycles per day.

E. Gate Operation Speed:

1. Minimum 45 fpm (0.229 m/s).

2. Minimum 60 fpm (0.305 m/s).

3. Minimum ___ fpm (___ m/s).

F. Electric Motors: High-starting torque, continuous-duty, insulated electric motors,

complying with NEMA MG 1, sized to start and operate size and weight of gate

considering Project's service conditions without exceeding nameplate ratings or

considering service factor.

1. Direction: Reversible.

2. Direction: Single direction.

3. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated.



Page 33 of 49

4. Enclosure: Totally enclosed, non-ventilated or fan-cooled motors, fitted with

plugged drain, unless otherwise indicated.

5. Thermal Protection: Internal manual reset.

6. Thermal Protection: Internal automatic reset.

7. Motors Smaller Than 1/2 hp: Single phase, 60 Hz.

8. Motors Smaller Than 1/2 hp: Polyphase, 60 Hz.

9. Motors 1/2 hp and Larger: Polyphase, ___ voltage rating, 60 Hz.

10. Motor horsepower as recommended by operator manufacturer.

11. Motor horsepower as indicated on Drawings.

12. Motor horsepower: ______.

G. Limit Switches: Adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to

automatically stop gate at fully retracted and fully extended positions.

H. Emergency Release Mechanism: Quick disconnect release of operator drive system of

the following type of mechanism, permitting manual operation if operator fails. Design

system so control circuit power is disconnected during manual operation.

1. Integral fail-safe release, allowing gate to be pushed open without mechanical

devices, keys, cranks, or special knowledge.

2. Mechanical device, key, or crank-activated release.

I. Operating Features: Include the following:

1. Digital Microprocessor Control: Electronic programmable means for setting,

changing, and adjusting control features.

a. Provide unit that is isolated from voltage spikes and surges.

b. Provide unit capable of monitoring and auditing gate activity.

2. Fully Systems Compatible: With controlling circuit board capable of accepting

any type of input from external devices.

3. Master/Slave Capability: Control stations designed and wired for gate pair

operation.

4. Automatic Closing Timer: With adjustable time delay before closing.

a. Provide unit with timer cut-off switch.



Page 34 of 49

5. Open Override Circuit: Designed to override closing commands.

6. Reversal Time Delay: Designed to protect gate system from shock load on

reversal in both directions.

7. Maximum Run Timer: Designed to prevent damage to gate system by shutting

down system if normal time to open gate is exceeded.

8. Clock Timer: 24-hour, programmable for regular events.

9. Clock Timer: Seven-day, programmable for regular events.

2.13 REMOTE CONTROLS

A. Electric controls separated from gate and motor and drive mechanism, with NEMA

ICS 6, Type 1, NEMA ICS 6, Type 4, or other type of enclosure approved by the local

jurisdiction, for mounting as shown on the drawings, and with space for additional

optional equipment.:

B. Keyed Control Station:

1. Two-position, switch-operated control station located remotely from gate, with

on and off functions. Minimum two-keys per station.

2. Three-position, switch-operated control station with open and close functions

and spring return to off position. Minimum two-keys per station.

3. Three-position, switch-operated control station with open and close functions

and spring return to off position with stop button. Minimum two-keys per

station.

C. Momentary-Contact Control Station:

1. Single-button-operated control station with open and close functions.

2. Three-button-operated control station with open, close, and stop positions.

3. Three-button-operated control station with open, close, and stop positions, and

with key switch to lock out open and close buttons. Minimum two-keys per

station.

D. Card Readers: Functions only when authorized card is presented. Provide insertion-

reader-type, face-lighted unit fully visible at night and the following:

1. Magnetically coded, single-code system activated by coded card.

2. Magnetically coded, single-code system activated by coded card and permitting

four different access time periods.



Page 35 of 49

3. Programmable, multiple-code capability permitting validating or voiding of

individual cards.

4. Programmable, multiple-code capability permitting validating or voiding of

individual cards and permitting four different access time periods.

5. Reader Type:

a. Touch plate.

b. Swipe.

c. Insertion.

d. Proximity.

6. Timed anti-passback.

7. Limited time usage.

8. Capable of monitoring and auditing gate activity.

E. Digital Keypad Entry Unit: Functions only when authorized code is entered.

1. Multiple-code capability of not less than 5 possible individual codes.



4. Multiple-code capability of not less than 2,500 possible individual codes.

5. Multiple-code capability of not less than 10,000 possible individual codes.

6. Multiple-code capability as indicated.

7. Programmable using 1 to 6 digits.

8. Programmable using 1 to 6 digits and permitting up to four different access time

periods.

9. Face-lighted unit with metal-keyed keypad fully visible at night

10. Face-lighted unit with keyless-membrane keypad fully visible at night.

11. Timed anti-passback.

12. Limited time usage.



Page 36 of 49

13. Capable of monitoring and auditing gate activity.

F. Radio Control: Digital system consisting of code-compatible universal coaxial

receiver, remote antenna with coaxial cable and mounting brackets, including:

1. Provide one radio control per gate.

2. Provide radio controls where indicated on Drawings.

3. Provide one permanently mounted transmitter per receiver.

4. Provide four portable transmitters per receiver.

5. Provide number of transmitters as recommended by the manufacturer for each

condition.

6. Provide programmable transmitter with multiple-code capability permitting

validating or voiding of not less than the following codes per channel:

a. 1000 codes per channel.

b. 10,000 codes per channel.

7. Button Transmitters:

a. Single-button-operated control station with open and close functions.

b. Three-button-operated control station with open, close, and stop positions.

c. Three-button-operated control station with open, close, and stop positions,

and with key switch to lock out open and close buttons. Minimum two-keys

per station.

d. Provide independent channels and settings to control various receiver and

gate combinations as indicated.

G. Telephone Entry System: Hands-free voice-communication system for connection to

building telephone system with digital-entry code activation of gate operator,

including:

1. Auxiliary keypad entry.

2. Residential System: Designed to be wired to same line with telephone.

3. Multiunit System: Designed to be wired to a dedicated telephone line, and the

following:

a. Capacity to access 20 telephones



Page 37 of 49

b. Capacity to access 100 telephones

c. Include electronic directory.

H. Vehicle Loop Detector System: Automatic closing timer with adjustable time delay

before closing, electronic loop detector with detection patterns adjustable sensitivity

and frequency settings, and panel indicator light designed to detect presence or transit

of a vehicle over an embedded loop of wire and to emit a signal activating the gate

operator. Provide number of loops consisting of multiple strands of wire, number of

turns, loop size, and method of placement at location shown on Drawings, as

recommended in writing by detection system manufacturer for function indicated.

Provide with the following:

1. Timer cut-off switch.

2. Operation:

a. Designed to open and close gate.

b. Designed hold gate open until traffic clears.

c. Designed to reverse gate.

3. Loop:

a. Wire in size indicated for field assembly, and sealant.

b. Factory preformed in size indicated.

c. Installation Style:

d. Pave-over.

e. Saw-cut.

I. Vehicle Presence Detector: System with automatic closing timer and adjustable time

delay before closing and presence detector, adjustable detection pattern and sensitivity

zones, designed to detect the presence or transit of a vehicle in gate pathway by

interrupting an infrared beam in zone pattern to emit a signal activating the gate

operator, and the following:

1. Timer cut-off switch.

2. Operation:

a. Designed to open and close gate.

b. Designed hold gate open until traffic clears.



Page 38 of 49

c. Designed to reverse gate.

3. Detector Type:

a. Retroreflective

b. Emitter/receiver.

J. Obstruction Detection Devices: Provide each motorized gate with automatic safety

sensors that cause operator to immediately function as follows:

1. Action: Reverse gate in both opening and closing cycles and hold until clear of

obstruction.

2. Action: Stop gate in opening cycle and reverse gate in closing cycle and hold

until clear of obstruction.

3. Internal Sensor: Built-in torque or current monitor senses gate is obstructed.

4. Sensor Edge: Contact-pressure-sensitive safety edge, profile, and sensitivity

designed for type of gate and component indicated, in locations as follows.

Connected to control circuit using the following:

a. Take-up cable reel.

b. Self-coiling cable.

c. Gate edge transmitter and operator receiver system.

d. Sensor edge location:

i. Along entire gate leaf leading edge.

ii. Along entire gate leaf trailing edge.

iii. Across entire gate leaf bottom edge.

iv. Along entire length of gate posts.

v. Along entire length of gate guideposts.

vi. Where indicated on Drawings.

5. Photoelectric/Infrared Sensor System: Designed to detect an obstruction in

partition's path by interruption of an infrared beam in the zone pattern without

obstruction contacting gate.

2.14 ACCESSORLES



Page 39 of 49

A. Concrete Footing Mixture for In-Ground Installations: Unless otherwise specified in

Division 03 Concrete, provide the following:

1. Normal-weight concrete with not less than 3000 psi (20.7- Mpa) compressive

strength (28 days);

2. 3-inch (75-mm) slump and containing coarse aggregate of minimum diameter

of 0.2 inches (5 mm) to maximum of 3/4 inch (20 mm);

3. 5% to 7% air entrainment.

B. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining,

noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C1107. Provide grout,

recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.

C. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, non-shrink, non-staining,

hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with potable water at

Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide

formulation resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a

sealer or waterproof coating and recommended in writing by manufacturer for exterior

applications.

D. Barbed Wire:

1. Supporting Arms: Pressed steel arms attached to post support 3 rows of barbed

wire. Arms withstand 250 lb. (113 kg) downward pull at outermost end of arm

without failure.

2. Barbed Wire: Zinc or aluminum coated steel wire to ASTM A121, double

strand, 12 gauge, twisted line wire with 4 point barbs, spaced approximately 3

inches (75 mm) on center.

3. Barbed Wire: Zinc or aluminum coated steel wire to ASTM A121, double

strand, 12 gauge, twisted line wire with 4 point barbs, spaced approximately 5

inches (125 mm) on center.

E. Mounting kit including pedestal.

F. Audio Warning Module: ADA-compliant audible alarm sounding three to five seconds

in advance of gate operation and continuing until gate stops moving.

G. Visual Warning Module: ADA-compliant visible alarm sounding three to five seconds

in advance of gate operation and continuing until gate stops moving.

1. Alarm Light Type: Constant.

2. Alarm Light Type: Strobe.



Page 40 of 49

H. Battery Backup System: Battery-powered drive and access control system,

independent of primary drive system, opening gate if power fails.

1. External electric-powered lock with delay timer allowing time for lock to

release before gate operates. Provide with:

2. Solenoid for swing gate.

3. Magnetic for swing gate.

4. Solenoid for slide gate.

5. Magnetic for slide gate.

I. Fire box in accordance with local jurisdiction's requirements.

J. Postal box in accordance with local jurisdiction's requirements.

K. Fire strobe sensor.

L. Fire siren sensor.

M. Intercom system.

N. Instructional, Safety, and Warning Labels and Signs:

1. According to UL 325.

2. Manufacturer's standard for components and features specified.

3. As indicated on Drawings.

2.15 FINISHES

A. Zinc Coating:

1. Wire Mesh Coating: 0.5 oz./sq.ft. (150 g/m2) zinc in conformity with ASTM A

641 (1989) Class 1.

2. Fence Posts and Gate Frames Coating: Zinc coated (galvalume process) with a

minimum of 0.9 oz/sq.ft. (275 g/m2) as per ASTM A653 G90.

B. Polyester Coating: Polyester coating to be minimum 4 mils applied by an electrostatic

method to cover all surfaces of the wire mesh and post sections. Coating shall be

capable of withstanding requirements of the following tests:

1. Mechanical Adhesion: ASTMD 3359 - Method B.

2. Shock Resistance: ASTM D 2794.



Page 41 of 49

3. Salt Spray Testing: Minimum of 1,000 hours without red rust appearance, per

ASTM B 117 (1990).

4. Humidity Resistance: ASTM D 2247, weather meter chamber.

5. Exposure to Ultraviolet Light: ASTM D1499, exposure of 1000 hours using

apparatus Type E and 63 degreesC.

C. Polyester Surface Coating Colors:

1. Standard Coating: Black, RAL 9004.

2. Gloss Coating: Signal white, RAL 9003.

3. Gloss Coating: Silver grey, RAL 7001.

4. Gloss Coating: Basalt grey, RAL 7012.

5. Gloss Coating: Fir green, RAL 6009.

6. Gloss Coating: Chocolate brown, RAL 8017.

7. Gloss Coating: Signal red, RAL 3001.

8. Textured Coating: Signal yellow, RAL 1003.

9. Textured Coating: Taupe brown.

10. Textured Coating: Sapphire blue, RAL 5003.

11. Metallic Coating: Silver.

12. Metallic Coating: Silver vein.

13. Metallic Coating: Copper vein.

14. Custom Coating: [_______] [Match RAL _____].

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements

for site clearing, earthwork, pavement work, and other conditions affecting

performance.

1. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed, unless otherwise

permitted by Architect.



Page 42 of 49

2. Provide a verified survey of property lines and legal boundaries.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 500

feet (152.5 m) or line of sight between stakes.

B. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures,

benchmarks, and property monuments marked by registered surveyor and utility

companies.

3.3 FENCE POST LAYOUT

A. Layout fencing on established boundaries inside property line.

B. Terminal Posts Layout: Locate terminal end, corner, and gate posts at changes in

horizontal or vertical alignment of:

1. 15 degrees or more.

2. 30 degrees or more.

3. As indicated on Drawings.

4. __________________

C. Post spacing for 2-inch (50 mm) posts:

1. Architectural panel 97-3/4-inch (2483 mm) center to center with an adjustment

of plus or minus 1-1/2 in. (38 mm).

2. Elite & Secur panel 103-7/8-inch (2638 mm) center to center with an adjustment


3. ECO Architectural panel 95-9/16-inch (2427 mm) center to center with an

adjustment of plus or minus 1-1/2 in. (38 mm).

4. OMEGA 10-20 panels fence 80-3/4-inch (2051 mm) center to center with a

adjustment of plus or minus 5/16 in. (8 mm).

5. OMEGA 80-100 panels 67-inch (1701 mm) center to center with an adjustment

of plus or minus 5/16 in. (8 mm).

D. Post spacing for 3-inch (75 mm) posts:

1. Architectural panel 98-3/4-inch (2508 mm) center to center with an adjustment




Page 43 of 49

2. Elite & Secur panel 104-7/8-inch (2664 mm) center to center with an adjustment


3. ECO Architectural panel 95-9/16-inch (2427 mm) center to center with an

adjustment of plus or minus 1-1/2 in. (38 mm).

4. OMEGA 10-20 panels fence 81-3/4-inch (2076 mm) center to center with a

adjustment of plus or minus 5/16 in. (8 mm).

5. OMEGA 80-100 panels 68-inch (1726 mm) center to center with an adjustment

of plus or minus 5/16 in. (8 mm).

E. For Evolution 4 and 6-foot-high panel installation; Space line posts equal distant 10

feet (3050 mm) maximum center to center.

F. For Evolution 8-foot-high panel installation; Space line posts equal distance 8 feet

(2430 mm) maximum center to center.

G. Sloped Fences:

1. Step fence sections in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

2. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, align a new post at each step for a

clean line.

3. Slide universal brackets on posts to desired height, always installing flush with

horizontal wire (no gap).

4. For steep slopes, provide longer posts and panels cut in half or panels in special

shapes to keep gaps under panels to a minimum.

3.4 IN-GROUND CONCRETE INSTALLATION

A. Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts to spacing indicated, in firm, undisturbed or

compacted soil.

B. Dig holes with a diameter 4 times the diameter of the post and 6 inches (150 mm)

deeper than the bottom of the post.

1. Minimum 8 inch (200 mm) in diameter and 42 inch (1070 mm) in depth.

C. Concrete forms are not necessary or recommended. Crown concrete at top to shed

water.

D. Measure, batch, and mix project-site-mixed concrete according to ASTM C 94. Pour

concrete and let cure in accordance with ACI 301 and Division 03 Section "Cast-in-

Place Concrete".



Page 44 of 49

E. Exposed Concrete Footings: Extend concrete 2 inches (50 mm) above grade, or as

indicated on Drawings, smooth, and shape to shed water.

F. Concealed Concrete Footings: Stop footings 2 inches (50 mm) below grade or as

indicated on Drawings to allow covering with surface material.

G. Post Setting: Set posts in concrete footing. Protect portion of posts above ground from

concrete splatter. Place concrete around posts and consolidation. Using mechanical

devices to set posts is not permitted. Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at

correct height and spacing, and hold in position during placement and finishing

operations until concrete is sufficiently cured.

H. Posts Set into Concrete in Sleeves: Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into

concrete for installing posts. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular

space between post and sleeve with non-shrink, non-metallic grout, or anchoring

cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written

instructions, and finished sloped to drain water away from post.

I. Posts Set into Concrete in Voids: Form or core drill holes not less than 5 inches (125

mm) deep and 3/4 inch (20 mm) larger than outside diameter of post. Clean holes of

loose material, insert posts, and fill granular space between post and concrete with non-

shrink, non-metallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with

anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions, and finished sloped to drain

water away from post.

3.5 SURFACE MOUNTED FLANGE INSTALLATION

A. Flange Post Installation: Bolt mounting plates attached to each post to slab or structure

as indicated, using expansion bolts in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

3.6 PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Once the post installation is complete, install the mesh sections with the Universal

Bracket kits, flush with horizontal wire of the panel (no gap).

B. Attach the panels to the posts with eye-U-bracket and tie wire or twist tie. Where two

panels meet and no post is set, join them with end-to-end connectors used for panel to

panel linkage. Do not exceed manufacturers recommended spacing. Attach panel to

corner posts with bands spaced maximum of 24 inches (2610 mm) on center.

C. Panel Installation: Installed a minimum of 1-1/4 inch (30 mm) and maximum of 2

inches (50 mm) above the ground surface.

1. Install vertical wire extensions pointing up for security.

2. Install vertical wire extensions pointing down for safety.



Page 45 of 49

D. Upon cutting or trimming, a post or a wire mesh section, apply a zinc rich primer to

the exposed ends and finish with matching touch-up paint supplied by the

manufacturer.

E. Barbed wire: Uniformly space parallel rows of barbed wire on security side of fence.

Pull wire taut and attach to each extension arm. The extension armed is fastened to the

post.

3.7 GATE OPERATOR INSTALLATION

A. General: Install gate operators according to manufacturer's written instructions, aligned

and true to fence line and grade.

B. Excavation for Supports: Hand-excavate holes for bases, in firm, undisturbed or

compacted soil to dimensions and depths and at locations as required by gate operator

component manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated on Drawings.

C. Concrete Bases: Cast-in-place or precast concrete, made of not less than 3000 psi (20.7-

Mpa) compressive strength (28 days), depth not less than 12 inches (300 mm) below

frost line or detail on Drawings, dimensioned and reinforced according to gate operator

component manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated on Drawings.

D. Vehicle Loop Detector System Installation:

1. Cut grooves in pavement to bury and seal wire loop according to manufacturer's

written instructions.

2. Connect to equipment operated by detector.

3. Comply with NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions for grounding

of electric-powered motors, controls, and other devices.

3.8 GATE INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT

A. Install gate posts in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Concrete Set Gate Posts:

1. Drill holes in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil.

2. Holes shall have a diameter 4 times greater than outside dimension of post, and

depths at least 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than frost level.

3. Set post bottom 36 inches (914 mm) below surface when in firm, undisturbed

soil.

4. Excavate and set posts deeper where required for adequate support in soft and

loose soils, and for posts with heavy lateral loads.



Page 46 of 49

5. Place concrete around posts in a continuous pour, tamp for consolidation.

6. Trowel finish around gate posts and slope to direct water away.

7. Check each post for vertical and top alignment and maintain in position during

placement and finishing operations.

C. Install gates perfectly horizontal and levelled (at junction), plumb, and secure for full

opening without interference.

D. Attach hardware with nuts inside the property making the assembly tamper-proof to

prevent unauthorized removal. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage.

E. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary to operate

smoothly, easily, and quietly, free from binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion,

nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational

range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing

or binding.

3.9 GROUNDING AND BONDING

A. Unless otherwise indicated in Division 26 Electrical, or grounding resistance is

unusually high, provide the following.

B. Fence Grounding: Maximum intervals of 1500 feet (450 m).

C. Fences within 100 feet (30 m) of Buildings, Structures, Walkways, and Roadways:

Ground at maximum intervals of 750 feet (225 m).

D. Gates and Other Fence Openings: Ground fence on each side of opening.

1. Bond metal gates to gate posts.

2. Bond across openings, with and without gates, except openings indicated as

intentional fence discontinuities.

3. Use No. 2 AWG wire and bury it at least 18 inches (460 mm) below finished

grade.

E. Conductors: Bare, solid wire for No. 6 AWG and smaller; stranded wire for No. 4

AWG and larger.

F. Material Above Finished Grade: Copper.

G. Material Above Finished Grade: Aluminum.

H. Material On or Below Finished Grade: Copper.



Page 47 of 49

I. 3 Bonding Jumpers: Braided copper tape, 1 inch (25 mm) wide, woven of No. 30 AWG

bare copper wire, terminated with copper ferrules.

J. Connectors and Ground Rods: Listed in UL 467.

K. Connectors for Below-Grade Use: Exothermic welded type.

L. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel, sized 5/8 x 96 inches (16 by 2400 mm).

M. Protection at Crossings of Overhead Electrical Power Lines: Ground fence at location

of crossing and at a maximum distance of 150 feet (45 m) on each side of crossing.

N. Fences Enclosing Electrical Power Distribution Equipment: Ground as required by

IEEE C2, unless otherwise indicated.

O. Grounding Method: At each grounding location, drive a ground rod vertically until the

top is 6 in. (150 mm) below finished grade. Connect rod to fence with No. 6 AWG

conductor. Connect conductor to each fence component at the grounding location.

P. Bonding Method for Gates: Connect bonding jumper between gate post and gate frame.

Q. Connections: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is

minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection

methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity to

make contact points closer in order of galvanic series.

2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.

3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and

mechanical clamps.

4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized-steel connections with tin-plated copper

jumpers and mechanical clamps.

5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to

prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.

R. Bonding to Lightning Protection System: If fence terminates at lightning-protected

building or structure, ground the fence and bond the fence grounding conductor to

lightning protection down conductor or lightning protection grounding conductor

complying with NFPA 780

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL- GROUNDING

A. Ground-Resistance Testing Agency: Contractor shall engage a qualified independent

testing agency to perform field quality-control testing.



Page 48 of 49

B. Ground-Resistance Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing

agency to perform field quality-control testing.

C. Ground-Resistance Tests: Subject completed grounding system to a megger test at each

grounding location. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last

trace of precipitation, without soil having been moistened by any means other than

natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of

reducing natural ground resistance. Perform tests by two-point method according to

IEEE 81.

D. Desired Maximum Grounding Resistance Value: 25 ohms.

E. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds desired value, notify

Architect promptly. Include recommendations to reduce ground resistance and

proposal to accomplish recommended work.

F. Report: Prepare test reports, certified by testing agency, of ground resistance at each

test location. Include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test

results.

3.11 GATE OPERATOR ADJUSTING

A. Gate: Adjust gate to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free from binding, warp,

excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or

malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks

engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.

B. Automatic Gate Operator: Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. Adjust

operators, controls, safety devices, alarms, and limit switches.

1. Electrohydraulic Operator: Purge operating system, adjust pressure and fluid

levels, and check for leaks.

2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to

confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Perform tests to confirm that

operation meets desired function. Remove damaged and malfunctioning units,

replace with new units, and retest.

a. Lubricate moving parts.

3.12 GATE OPERATOR DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's personnel to adjust,

operate, and maintain gates.

1. Test and adjust operators, controls, devices and operating hardware. Replace

damaged or malfunctioning operable components.



Page 49 of 49

2. Train Owner's personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping,

troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and schedules.

3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1. For demonstration

and documentation requirements.

B. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days’ notice.

3.13 PROTECTION



END OF SECTION

SECTION 323113 – CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATES


Page 1 of 8

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Fence framework, fabric, and accessories

1. Pedestrian and vehicle gates

2. Concrete

3. Electrical grounding

1.2 CONTRACTOR PERFORMED WORK

A. Layout fence lines, gates, and terminal posts with suitable stakes (at intervals not exceeding 500

feet or line of sight).

B. Layout USC&G benchmarks, property monuments, and other underground structures with

suitable stakes.

C. Obtain excavation/soil disturbance permit for Subcontractor.

D. Furnish signs for Subcontractor to install on fence. See Part 3.


A. Submit the following:

1. Catalog data on fabric, posts, accessories, fittings, and hardware.

2. Two legible copies of batch tickets for each load of concrete to the Owner’s

Representative.


A. Deliver, store, and handle structural steel without damaging finish.

B. Deliver manufactured materials in original unopened packages, containers, or bundles with

manufacturer's label intact and legible.

C. Store materials off ground, under cover, and away from damp surfaces.

D. Remove damaged unlabeled or unsatisfactory materials that do not meet this specification from

the job site.


A. Comply with the following unless otherwise noted.

Federal Specification RR-F

(http://www.dtic.mil/dtic/search/tr/)

http://www.dtic.mil/dtic/search/tr/



Page 2 of 8

191K General Specification

191/1D Fabric

191/2D Gates

191/3D Posts, Rails and Braces

191/4D Accessories

ASTM International

ASTM F-552 Definition of Terms

ASTM F-567 Installation

ASTM F-626 Fence Fittings

ASTM F-669 Strength Requirements

ASTM F-900

ASTM F-1083

ASTM F-1910

Gate Construction

Steel Pipe for Fence

Long Barbed Tape



Page 3 of 8

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Fabric: ASTM A392, Class 1, zinc coated (1.2 ounces), steel wire/fabric, 2-inch mesh size on a

side, 9 American Wire Gauge (AWG) (0.148 inches) coated wire size, galvanized before

weaving, with twisted barbed selvages top and bottom.

B. Posts, Rails & Braces: ASTM F1083 galvanized steel pipe.

C. Galvanizing: ASTM A123, unless otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped, zinc-coated

accessories of ferrous material with weight of zinc coating not less than 1.2 ounces per square

foot.

D. Barbed Wire: ASTM A121 metallic coated steel, Type Z zinc coating strand wire, 12-1/2 AWG

(0.099 inches) steel wire, 4 barb points, 14 AWG (0.080 inches) spaced on 5-inch centers.

E. Barbed tape: 430 stainless steel, 0.025 inches thick by minimum 1-inch wide prior to forming,

18-inch diameter single helical coil, die stamped to produce a cluster of 4 barbed points at

maximum 4 inches on center, cold rolled around a galvanized steel core wire. Aluminum ties

not acceptable.

F. Fence Fittings: ASTM F626, Standard Specification for Fence Fittings, type and components as

noted.

2.2 BASIC FENCE SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Terminal Posts (angles, corners, ends, and pull posts): 2-1/2-inch Schedule 40 for fence height

up to 8 feet and 3 inch Schedule 40 for fence height over 8 feet and equal to or under 16 feet.

B. Line Posts: 2-inch Schedule 40 for fabric height up to 8 feet, 2-1/2-inch Schedule 40 for fabric

height over 8 feet and equal to or under 16 feet.

C. Braces at Terminal or Gateposts: 1-1/4-inch Schedule 40.

D. Tension Rods: 3/8-inch diameter galvanized steel with turnbuckle end-fitting-type tighteners.

E. Tension Wire: 7- AWG coil spring, hard tempered carbon steel wire.

F. Tension Bars: 3/4 x 3/16-inch-thick galvanized steel. Minimum length shall be 2 inches less

than the full fabric height.

G. Tension Bands: Minimum 3/4 x 0.074 inch () galvanized steel offset bands.

H. Brace Bands: Minimum 3/4 x 0.105 inch () thick galvanized steel.

I. Brace Ends: Cupped fittings of formed steel or cast iron with ears for attaching horizontal braces

to brace bands and for connecting diagonal tension rods.

J. Wire Ties: Galvanized, steel 9 AWG with a diameter of 0.148 inches.

K. Post Caps: Formed steel, malleable cast iron, or aluminum, sized to post diameter, with set screw

retainer.



Page 4 of 8

L. Hog Rings: Minimum 12 AWG galvanized steel

M. Barbed Wire Extension Arms: Galvanized pressed steel, type as specified.

N. Gate Posts:

1. Gate leaf-widths up to 6 feet: 2-1/2-inch Schedule 40.

2. Gate leaf-widths up to 12 feet: 3-1/2-inch Schedule 40.

3. Gate leaf-widths up to 18 feet: 6-inch Schedule 40.

4. Gate leaf-widths up to 23 feet: 8-inch Schedule 40.

O. Gate Frames:

1. Gate leaf-widths less than 10 feet: 1-1/2-inch Schedule 40.

2. Gate leaf-widths 10 feet to 16 feet: 2-inch Schedule 40.

3. Gate leaf-widths greater than 16 feet: 2-inch Schedule 80.

4. Diagonal tension rods for leaf-widths over 6 feet.

5. For gate leaves greater than 8 feet in any direction, provide intermediate braces placed

symmetrically so that frame members, including bracing, are spaced not further than 8

feet. Provide braces same size as those called out for fence.

P. Provide non-lift-off type gate hinges sized for gate of adequate strength with large rearing

surface for clamping in position so that hinges do not easily twist or turn with gate action.

2.3 FENCE GROUNDING

A. Grounding Cable: No. 4/0 AWG bare, stranded, soft temper copper cable conforming to ASTM

B8, Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay stranded Copper Conductors.

B. Flexible Braid: Tinned copper braid with tinned copper ferrules; minimum 250 ampere rating;

12-inch-minimum length. O-Z/Gedney Type FB.

C. Cable to Pipe Clamps: NRTL (National Recognized Testing Laboratory) listed copper alloy

connectors with silicon bronze hardware for making cable to pipe connections. O-Z/Gedney

Type ABG 1-1/2 inch and smaller, Type CG 2 inch and larger pipe diameter.

D. Flexible Braid to Pipe Clamps: NRTL listed copper alloy connectors with silicon bronze

hardware for making braid or copper bar to pipe connections. O-Z/Gedney Type RG.

2.4 CONCRETE

A. Concrete: Furnish concrete for posts and braces in accordance with Section 033046, Cast-In-

Place Concrete.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



Page 5 of 8

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Notify Owner’s Representative 15 working days prior to start of construction to identify known

utilities and stake and flag locations.

B. Before installing chain-line fence, perform site clearing and grading as noted on Drawings.

C. Allow footing to cure minimum 7 days before installing fabric and other materials.


A. Coat damaged galvanized finish with zinc-enriched paint.

B. Leave area of installation neat and free of debris caused by erection of fence.

C. Posts, bracing, and other structural members shall be located on the inside of the security fence.

D. Gate hardware installed in PA or higher security area that if removed would facilitate

unauthorized entry must be installed in a manner to mitigate tampering and/or removal (e.g., by

brazing, peening, or welding). Consult with LANL Physical Security.

3.3 LATCHES

A. Single gates less than 10 feet wide may use forked type latches.

B. Provide single gates, 10 feet, or more, wide, and inactive leaves of double gates with positive

latching devices at top, bottom and center of closing edges such as fork type latches with full

gate height plunger bar or rod.

C. At double gates, provide locking devices that retain both gate leaves in same plane when closed.

D. Arrange plunger bars and rods so that they engage gate stops and cannot be raised when locked.

E. Rigidly weld brackets for plunger bars holders to inactivate leaves.

F. Arrange latching mechanisms at double gates so one padlock can lock both gate leaves at center

latch integral to gate.

G. Install keepers consisting of a mechanical device for securing free end of gate when in full open

position.

3.4 POSTS

A. Space line posts equidistant at intervals not exceeding 10 feet. Measure interval parallel to grade

of proposed fence and in line of fence from center to center of post.

B. Set terminal posts (end, corner, and gate) at beginning and end of each continuous length of

fence and at abrupt changes in vertical and horizontal alignments.

C. Set fence and gate posts in concrete in holes of diameter and depth as follows:

1. Minimum Diameter: Four times outside diameter of post up to four inches and three

times for larger outside diameters.



Page 6 of 8

2. Minimum Depth: 36 inches plus an additional 3 inches for each 1-foot increase in fence

height over 4 feet.

D. Post shall be centered in the concrete base within a +/- one-inch tolerance.

E. Set fence posts in a vertical position, plumb within a one-half inch tolerance over height of fence

in two planes, and in line. Backfill concrete into excavation and extend 2 inches above grade.

An alternative method is to stop footing 4 inches below grade to allow for cover with sod, black

top, or concrete slab. In either case, crown concrete at top to shed water and slope 2 inches

away from post to ground with tolerance of +0 to -1 inch. Crown shall have a troweled finish

and be free from surface contours that trap water.

F. When solid rock or concrete is encountered, without an overburden of soil, set posts in solid

rock or concrete. Depth of hole shall be twelve times the largest cross section of posts. Diameter

of hole shall be 6 inch greater than largest cross section of post.

G. The use of sleeves in order to leave voids in new concrete construction is recommended.

H. Half-fill the void with non-shrinkable hydraulic cement and force post to bottom of hole and

plumb. Thoroughly work additional grout into hole so as to leave no voids. Crown grout to

shed water.

I. Provide tension offset bands fitted around terminal posts at maximum 15-inch intervals to attach

tension bars to posts.

J. Provide brace center band to secure brace ends and tension rods to post.

K. Install post caps on all pipe post terminals: end, corner, and gate and all line posts that do not

have barbed-wire extension arms.

3.5 FABRIC

A. Place chain-link fabric on outside of the area enclosed. Posts, bracing, and other structural

members shall be located on the inside of the fence.

B. Place fabric by securing one end, applying sufficient tension to remove slack before making

attachment elsewhere. Tighten fabric to provide smooth uniform appearance free from sag.

C. Cut fabric by untwisting a picket and attach each span independently at terminal posts. Use

stretcher bars with tension bands at maximum 15-inch intervals.

D. Join rolls of wire fabric by weaving a single picket into ends of rolls to form continuous mesh.

E. Provide continuous length tension bars equal to fence height and located wherever chain link

fabric end attaches to terminal post. Thread bars through fabric ends for full height and attach

to posts by tension bands.

F. Install fence fabric 2 inches maximum above ground level. Ground level shall be defined as

compacted ground or earth material or base course below the fence fabric. Compacted material

shall extend three feet on each side of fence and along same contour as fence within +/-6 inches.



Page 7 of 8

G. Fasten fence fabric with wire ties to top and bottom of line posts and at intervals not exceeding

15 inches. The final process of tightening the tie wire shall draw the fabric tightly to the post

and top rail. Wire ties shall wrap a full 360 degrees around the post and engage a full diamond

of the fence fabric. The two ends of the tie shall be twisted securely with three full twists, power

twisting is subcontractor option. Ends shall be cut off to prevent untwisting by hand. Care shall

be taken to assure ends of ties do not protrude beyond the vertical plane of the fabric.

3.6 BARBED WIRE

A. Fencing: Top fencing with [3] strands of barbed wire on each extension arm. Provide [vertical

extension arm outriggers] [single 45-degree extension arm] [double 45-degree extension arm].

Angle single extension arm away from security area or as directed by LANL Physical Security.

B. Pull taut to remove sag, firmly install barbed wire in slots of extension arms, and secure to post

or terminal arm.

C. Gate: Install barbed wire strands at 6 inches on center between extended gate frame members

above gate fabric.

3.7 BARBED TAPE

A. Top fencing with barbed tape at loop spacing of 9 inches.

B. Fencing: Provide 45-degree double extension arm with 2 strands of barbed wire in each

extension arm. Pull wire taut to remove sag, and firmly install barbed wire in most inner and

outer slot of extension arm. Attach barbed tape to barbed wire with hog rings.

C. Gate: Provide one strand of barbed wire to top of extended gate frame and pull taut to remove

sag. Secure barbed tape to barbed wire and top selvage of gate fabric with hog rings at each

loop. Barbed tape loop spacing same as fence.

3.8 GATES

A. Install gates true to opening and plumb in closed position within a vertical tolerance of one-half

inch.

B. Hang gates so that bottom of gate is as close to ground as practical (2 inches max.) while

allowing sufficient clearance for free operation through at least 90 degree in one direction from

closed position.

C. Fasten gate fabric to vertical (end) gate frame members using tension bars and bands as for fence

fabric. Fasten fabric to top and bottom gate frame members and to intermediate braces with 11

AWG wire ties or clips at minimum spacing of 14 inches on center.

D. Extend end frame members 18 inches vertically above top member of gate frame to support

barbed wire.

E. Provide tension rods as diagonal braces on gates and secure rods at gate corner only.

F. Gates installed in PA or higher security area, gate hardware shall be installed in a manner to

mitigate tampering and/or removal, e.g., by brazing, peening or welding to prevent removal with

hand tools. Hinges shall be tamper proof and installed to prevent the gate from being lifted off.



Page 8 of 8

3.9 TENSION WIRE AND RAIL

A. Provide [top] and] bottom tension wire and stretch wire from end to end of each stretch of fence

at height that will enable it to be fastened to the fabric.

B. Stretch tension wire taut (not to exceed 6 inches sideway deflection) between terminal posts,

securely fasten the tension wire to the terminal posts. Tension wire shall be within 2 inches of

[top and] bottom of the fence fabric and secured to fabric with hog rings at 24 inches on center,

secure with wire ties to every third line post minimum.

C. Provide top rail and support at each post so that a continuous brace from end to end of each

stretch of fence is formed. Fasten fabric to the top rail at intervals not exceeding 24 inches.

Securely fasten top rail to terminal posts and join with sleeves or coupling to allow for expansion

and contraction. The rail sleeve must be fabricated to prevent movement along the rail.

3.10 ELECTRICAL GROUNDING

A. Bond gateposts on both sides of gate openings using direct buried grounding cable and cable to

pipe clamps. Bond gateposts to gates using flexible braid and flexible braid to pipe clamps.

Ground posts on both ends of gates; steel posts set in concrete will be considered as adequately

grounded.

B. Ground permanent metallic fences crossed by overhead power at every third post for a distance

of 50 feet from the crossing; chain link fences with steel post set in concrete will be considered

as adequately grounded.

C. Ground metal fences surrounding substations and switching stations to station ground system in

accordance with the National Electrical Safety Codes and IEEE Std. 80.

3.11 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND COMPACTION

A. Refer to Section 31 2000, Earth Moving.

3.12 SIGN INSTALLATION (GFE)

A. Install government furnished property signs or no trespassing signs in areas as indicated by the

Owners Representative.

B. Signs will generally be 24” x 24” or smaller and shall be attached to the wire fabric by the use

of, as specified, hog rings.

C. General sign locations will be located on all gates, 25 feet each side of gates, and at visible

distances along the fence line, not to exceed 300 feet.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 323119 – IMPASSE II®- HIGH SECURITY STEEL FENCE SYSTEM,

ORNAMENTAL PALE Government of the Virgin Islands, Department of Public Works

Page 1 of 6

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. The contractor shall provide all labor, materials and appurtenances necessary for installation of

the steel corrugated pale security fence system defined herein.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 312200 - Earthwork

B. Section 03346 - Concrete


A. The manufacturer shall supply a total steel ornamental pale high security fence system of the

Ameristar® (specify Impasse II® or Impasse II Anti-Scale) model, (specify Trident™,

Stronghold™ or Gauntlet™) design. The system shall include all components (i.e., pales, rails,

posts, gates and hardware) required.


A. The contractor shall provide laborers and supervisors who are thoroughly familiar with the type

of construction involved and materials and techniques specified.

1.5 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

B. ASTM B117 - Practice for Operating Salt-Spray (Fog) Apparatus.

C. ASTM D523 - Test Method for Specular Gloss.

D. ASTM D714 - Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Blistering in Paint.

E. ASTM D1654 - Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to

Corrosive Environments.

F. ASTM D2244 - Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally

Measured Color Coordinates.

G. ASTM D2794 - Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid

Deformation (Impact).

H. ASTM D3359 - Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test.

I. ASTM F2408 – Ornamental Fences Employing Galvanized Steel Tubular Pickets.

1.6 SUBMITTAL

A. The manufacturer's submittal package shall be provided prior to installation.



Page 2 of 6

1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE

A. Upon receipt at the job site, all materials shall be checked to ensure that no damage occurred

during shipping or handling. Materials shall be stored in such a manner to ensure proper

ventilation and drainage, and to protect against damage, weather, vandalism and theft.

1.8 PRODUCT WARRANTY

A. All structural fence components (i.e. rails, pales, and posts) shall be warranted within specified

limitations, by the manufacturer for a period of 15 years from date of original purchase.

Warranty shall cover any defects in material finish, including cracking, peeling, chipping,

blistering or corroding.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. The steel ornamental pale high security fence system shall conform to Ameristar (specify

Impasse II or Impasse II Anti-Scale) model, (specify Trident, Stronghold or Gauntlet) (specify

2-Rail or 3-Rail) style manufactured by Ameristar Perimeter Security Inc., in Tulsa, Oklahoma.

2.2 MATERIAL

A. Steel material for fence framework (i.e., corrugated pales, rails and posts), when galvanized

prior to forming, shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A924/A924M, with a minimum

yield strength of 45,000 psi (310 MPa). The steel shall be hot-dip galvanized to meet the

requirements of ASTM A653/A653M with a minimum zinc coating weight of 0.90 oz/ft2 (276

g/m2), Coating Designation G-90.

B. Material for corrugated pales shall be a nominal 2.75” x .75” x 14 Ga. The cross-sectional shape

of the rails shall conform to the manufacturer's Impasse II® rail design a nominal 2” x 2” x 11

Ga. Pre-drilled holes in the Impasse II® rail shall be spaced 6” on center, providing a pale

airspace of no greater than 3.25” or Pre-drilled holes in the Impasse II Anti-Scale rail shall be

spaced 4.1875” on center, providing a pale airspace of no greater than 1.5” (38mm).

Tamperproof fasteners shall be used to fasten each pale to rail at every intersection. Fence posts

and gate posts shall meet the minimum size requirements of Table 1.

C. If applicable - Material for steel Impasse II privacy screening shall be 18ga. preformed slats,

providing complete screening coverage between pales and at pale to post connections. Impasse

II privacy screening shall provide screening from top rail to bottom rail, and be capable of

traversing terrain without impeding the raking capabilities of the fencing panel. Privacy

screening not available for Impasse II Anti-Scale model.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Pales, rails and posts shall be pre-cut to specified lengths. Impasse II rails shall be pre-punched

to accept tamperproof security fasteners. Post flange shall be pre-punched to accept rail to post

attachment. Post web shall be punched providing a clear opening for interior of rails to align

throughout the entire system for affixing conduit, video cabling, IDS wiring, and other

components for a complete systems integration. Impasse II rails shall be attached to post flange

providing a bracket-less design at each intermediate post.



Page 3 of 6

B. The manufactured galvanized framework shall be subjected to the PermaCoat® thermal

stratification coating process (high-temperature, in-line, multi-stage, multi-layer) including, as

a minimum, a six-stage pretreatment/wash, an electrostatic spray application of an epoxy base,

and a separate electrostatic spray application of a polyester finish. The base coat shall be a

thermosetting epoxy powder coating (gray in color) with a minimum thickness of 2 mils

(0.0508mm). The topcoat shall be a “no-mar” TGIC polyester powder coat finish with a

minimum thickness of 2 mils (0.0508mm). The color shall be (specify Black, Bronze, White,

or Desert Sand). The stratification-coated framework shall be capable of meeting the

performance requirements for each quality characteristic shown in Table 2.

D. Completed panels shall be capable of supporting a 400 lb. load (applied at midspan) without

permanent deformation. Panels shall be biasable to a 30˚ change in grade.

C. Impasse II fence system shall be designed to minimize the system impedance to comply with

IEEE grounding requirements. No additional grounding material, beyond the structure

grounding lug installation, will be required to create a safe low resistance fence system. By way

of fence construction, the entire fence system is inherently grounded without the need for any

additional work. Grounding location at the post is for taking the fence system to site ground.

D. Swing gates shall be fabricated using 2” sq. x 12ga rail, 2” sq. x 12ga. gate ends, and 2.75” x

.75” x 0.075 pales. Gates that exceed 6’ in width will have a 2” sq. x 11ga. intermediate upright.

All rail and upright intersections shall be joined by welding. All pale and rail intersections shall

also be joined by welding.

E. Sliding cantilever gates shall be TransPort IS design matching style, height, and color of fence

system. The dual enclosed track slide gate shall be an aluminum component design using tracks,

uprights, pales, hardware, fittings, and fasteners. Gate installation shall comply with latest

ASTM F2200 standards for automated gates, regardless if the gate is of manual operation.

F. Pedestrian swing gates shall be self-closing, having a gate leaf no larger than 48”

width. Integrated hinge-closer set (2 qty) shall be ADA compliant that shall include a variable

speed and final snap adjustment with compact design (no greater than 5” x 6” footprint). Hinge-

closer set (2 qty) shall be tested to a minimum of 500,000 cycles and capable of self-closing

gates up to a maximum gate weight of 260 lbs. and maximum weight load capacity of 1,500

lbs. Hinge-closer device shall be externally mounted with tamper-resistant security fasteners,

with full range of adjustability, horizontal (.5” - 1.375”) and vertical (0 - .5”). Maintenance free

hinge-closer set shall be tested to operate in temperatures of negative 20 F to 200 F degrees, and

swings to negative 2 degrees to ensure reliable final lock engagement.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. All new installation shall be laid out by the contractor in accordance with the construction plans.

3.2 FENCE INSTALLATION



Page 4 of 6

A. Fence post shall be spaced according to Table 3, plus or minus ¼”. For installations that must

be raked to follow sloping grades, the post spacing dimension must be measured along the grade.

Fence panels shall be attached to the line and end posts with fasteners supplied by the

manufacturer. Attachment to corner post shall be made using brackets and fasteners supplied

by the manufacturer (See Figure 1). Posts shall be set in concrete footers having a minimum

depth of 36” (Note: In some cases, local restrictions of freezing weather conditions may require

a greater depth). The “Earthwork” and “Concrete” sections of this specification shall govern

material requirements for the concrete footer. Posts setting by other methods such as plated

posts or grouted core-drilled footers are permissible only if shown by engineering analysis to be

sufficient in strength for the intended application.

3.3 FENCE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE

A. When cutting/drilling rails or posts adhere to the following steps to seal the exposed steel

surfaces:

1. Remove all metal shavings from cut area.

2. Apply zinc-rich primer to thoroughly cover cut edge and/or drilled hole; let dry.

3. Apply 2 coats of custom finish paint matching fence color. Failure to seal exposed

surfaces per steps 1-3 above will negate warranty. Ameristar spray cans or paint pens

shall be used to prime and finish exposed surfaces; it is recommended that paint pens be

used to prevent overspray. Use of non-Ameristar parts or components will negate the

manufactures’ warranty.

3.4 GATE INSTALLATION

A. Gate posts shall be spaced according to the manufacturers’ gate drawings, dependent on standard

out-to-out gate leaf dimensions and gate hardware selected. Type and quantity of gate hinges

shall be based on the application; weight, height, and number of gate cycles. The manufacturers’

gate drawings shall identify the necessary gate hardware required for the application. Gate

hardware shall be provided by the manufacture of the gate and shall be installed per

manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.5 CLEANING

A. The contractor shall clean the jobsite of excess materials; post-hole excavations shall be

scattered uniformly away from posts.

Table 1 – Minimum Sizes for Impasse II® Posts

Fence Posts (Nominal) Panel Height

3” x 2.75” x 12 Ga. I-Beam Up to & Including 8’ Height

4” x 2.75” x 11 Ga. I-Beam Over 8’ Height up to & including 10’ Height




Page 5 of 6

Up to & Including 6’ Over 6’ Up to &

Including 8’

Over 8’ Up to &

Including 10’

Over 12’

Up to 4’ 3” x 12Ga. 3” x 12 Ga. 4” x 11 Ga. 4” x 11 Ga.

4’1” to 6’ 3” x 12Ga. 3” x 12 Ga. 4” x 11 Ga. 4” x 11 Ga.

6’1” to 8’ 4” x 11 Ga. 6” x 3/16” 6” x 3/16” 6” x 3/16”

8’1” to 10’ 4” x 11 Ga. 6” x 3/16” 6” x 3/16” 6” x 3/16”

10’1” to 12’ 6” x 3/16” 6” x 3/16” 6” x 3/16” 8” x 1/4"

12’1” to 16’ 6” x 3/16” 6” x 3/16” 8” x 1/4” 8” x 1/4"

Table 2 – Coating Performance Requirements

Quality Characteristics ASTM Test Method Performance Requirements

Adhesion D3359 – Method B Adhesion (Retention of Coating) over 90% of test area (Tape

and knife test).

Corrosion Resistance B117, D714 & D1654 Corrosion Resistance over 3,500 hours (Scribed per D1654;

failure mode is accumulation of 1/8” coating loss from scribe or

medium #8 blisters).

Impact Resistance D2794 Impact Resistance over 60 inch lb. (Forward impact using

0.625” ball).

Weathering Resistance D2244, D523 (60˚ Method) Weathering Resistance over 1,000 hours (Failure mode is 60%

loss of gloss or color variance of more than 3 delta-E color

units).

Table 3 – Impasse II® Post Spacing

Span 8’ Nominal (95” Rail)

Line & End Posts

Post Size 3” x 2.75” x 12 Ga. I-Beam 4” x 2.75” x 11 Ga. I-Beam

Post Settings ± ¼” O.C. 96” 96”

*For Corner Posts see Figure 1

Figure 1



Page 6 of 6

END OF SECTION

SECTION 323129 – WOOD GATES


Page 1 of 37

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Western red cedar wood gates of the following types:

1. Signature series.

2. Rose City series.

3. Sherwood series.

4. Craftsman series.

5. Moderna series.

6. Portland series.

7. Windsor series.

8. Monterey GatePak.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 31 20 00 - Earth Moving.

B. Section 32 10 00 - Bases, Ballasts, and Paving.

C. Section 32 31 13 - Chain Link Fences and Gates.

D. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

E. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry.

1.3 SUBMITTALS





3. Installation methods.

C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other

work.



Page 2 of 37

1. Include coordinated dimensions for adjacent construction specified in other

Sections.

D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, representing

actual product, color, and finish.

E. Closeout Submittals: Provide manufacturer's maintenance instructions that include

recommendations for periodic checking and adjustment, cleaning and maintenance.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Five years or more experience in manufacture of gates

specified.

B. Installer: Experienced with installation of similar products, and acceptable to the

manufacturer.


A. Store products in the manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Protect finished surfaces from soiling or damage during handling and installation.


A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within

limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products

under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's recommended limits.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard 1 year limited warranty for

materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Pacific Gate Works, which is located at: 13780 S.W.

Galbreath Dr. Bldg. A; Sherwood, OR 97140; Toll Free Tel: 855-854-4283; Tel: 503-

688-1216; Fax: 503-925-8910; Email:request info ([email protected]);

Web:pacificgateworks.com

B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section

01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.2 WESTERN RED CEDAR GATES

A. Basis of Design: Signature series as manufactured by Pacific Gate Works.

http://admin.arcat.com/users.pl?action=UserEmail&company=Pacific+Gate+Works+&coid=50552&rep=&fax=503-925-8910&message=RE:%20Spec%20Question%20(02820pac):%20%20&mf=

http://pacificgateworks.com/



Page 3 of 37

1. Single Swing Gate:

a. Top Arch Profile: Flattop.

b. Top Arch Profile: Archtop.

c. Top Arch Profile: Reverse archtop.

d. Width: 36 in (914 mm).

e. Width: 42 in (1067 mm).

f. Width: 48 in (1219 mm).

g. Width: Custom, as indicated on the Drawings.

h. Height at Shoulder of Gate: 48 in (1219 mm).

i. Height at Shoulder of Gate: 58 in (1473 mm).

j. Height at Shoulder of Gate: 70 in (1854 mm).

k. Height at Shoulder of Gate: 82 in (2083 mm).

l. Height at Shoulder of Gate: Custom, as indicated on the Drawings.

m. Frame Thickness: 1-1/2 in (38 mm).

n. Frame Thickness: 2-1/8 in (54 mm).

o. Clavos: One side.

p. Clavos: Both sides.

q. Exterior Protective Finish: None.

r. Exterior Protective Finish: Teak tone transparent stain.

s. Exterior Protective Finish: Chestnut tone, semi-transparent stain.

t. Exterior Protective Finish: Oxford brown tone, semi-transparent stain.

u. Copper Caps: Increased protection from moisture runoff.

i. Copper sheet: 0.020 in (0.51 mm). Custom fit for each gate order.

ii. Attached by copper coated fasteners.

v. Gate Swing: Hinge on left, swing into yard.



Page 4 of 37

w. Gate Swing: Hinge on left, swing into street.

x. Gate Swing: Hinge on right, swing into yard.

y. 3Gate Swing: Hinge on right, swing into street.

z. Hardware Bundle: None.

aa. Hardware Bundle: Modern.

bb. Hardware Bundle: Contemporary.

cc. Hardware Bundle: Conventional.

dd. Construction:

i. Material: Western red cedar; clear-grade, kiln-dried.

1) Tongue and Groove Panels: 5/8 in (16 mm) thick.

ii. Joinery: Mortise and tenon.

iii. Gate Weight: 40 to 70 lbs (18.14 to 31.75 kg) per door.

2. Double Swing Walk through Gate:




d. Top Arch Profile: Compound archtop.

e. Top Arch Profile: Reverse compound archtop.

f. Width: 72 in (1829 mm); two 36 in (914 mm) gates.

g. Width: 84 in (2134 mm); two 42 in (1067 mm) gates.

h. Width: 96 in (2438 mm); two 48 in (1219 mm) gates.

i. Width: Custom, as indicated on the Drawings.



l. Height at Shoulder of Gate: 70 in (1854 mm).



Page 5 of 37

m. Height at Shoulder of Gate: 82 in (2083 mm).

n. Height at Shoulder of Gate: Custom, as indicated on the Drawings.

o. Frame Thickness: 1-1/2 in (38 mm).

p. Frame Thickness: 2-1/8 in (54 mm).

q. Clavos: One side.

r. Clavos: Both sides.

s. Exterior Protective Finish: None.

t. Exterior Protective Finish: Teak tone transparent stain.

u. Exterior Protective Finish: Chestnut tone, semi-transparent stain.

v. Exterior Protective Finish: Oxford brown tone, semi-transparent stain.

w. Copper Caps: Increased protection from moisture runoff.



x. Gate Swing: Into yard.

y. Gate Swing: Into street.




cc. Construction:





Page 6 of 37

i. Joinery: Mortise and tenon.

ii. Gate Weight: 40 to 70 lbs (18.14 to 31.75 kg) per door.

3. Driveway Gate: Manual Double Swing gates, with manufacturer's standard cane

bolt.





e. Top Arch Profile: Reverse Compound archtop.










o. Gate Frame Thickness: 2-1/8 in (54 mm).

p. Clavos: One side.

q. Clavos: Both sides.

r. Exterior Protective Finish: None.

s. Exterior Protective Finish: Teak tone transparent stain.

t. Exterior Protective Finish: Chestnut tone, semi-transparent stain.

u. Exterior Protective Finish: Oxford brown tone, semi-transparent stain.

v. Copper Caps: Increased protection from moisture runoff.



Page 7 of 37



w. Gate Swing: Into yard.

x. Hardware Bundle: None.

y. Hardware Bundle: Modern.

z. Hardware Bundle: Contemporary.

aa. Construction:




iii. Steel support frame, with integrated ball bearing hinges.

iv. Receiver plates: Quantity of 4.

v. Cane Bolts: Quantity of 2, 18 in (457 mm) long, non-lockable.

1) Stainless steel, powder coated black.

bb. Gate Weight: 140 to 200 lbs (63.50 to 90.72 kg) per door.

B. Basis of Design: Rose City series as manufactured by Pacific Gate Works.






e. Width: 42 in (1067 mm).

f. Width: 48 in (1219 mm).





Page 8 of 37



k. Height at Shoulder of Gate: 82 in (2083 mm.




o. Exterior Protective Finish: None.

p. Exterior Protective Finish: Teak tone transparent stain.

q. Exterior Protective Finish: Chestnut tone, semi-transparent stain.

r. Exterior Protective Finish: Oxford brown tone, semi-transparent stain.

s. Copper Caps: Increased protection from moisture runoff.



t. Gate Swing: Hinge on left, swing into yard.

u. Gate Swing: Hinge on left, swing into street.

v. Gate Swing: Hinge on right, swing into yard.

w. Gate Swing: Hinge on right, swing into street.




aa. Hardware Bundle: Conventional.

bb. Construction:






Page 9 of 37

iii. Pickets (WxT): 5/8 x 3-1/2 in (16 x 89 mm)

1) Spacing Between Pickets: 3 in (76 mm).

cc. Gate Weight: 40 to 70 lbs (18.14 to 31.75 kg) per door.

























Page 10 of 37



v. Gate Swing: Into yard.

w. Gate Swing: Into street.




aa. Construction:




iii. Pickets (WxT): 5/8 x 3-1/2 in (16 x 89 mm).


iv. Gate Weight: 40 to 70 lbs (18.14 to 31.75 kg) per door.

3. Driveway Gate: Manual Double Swing gates require cane bolts on both doors.













Page 11 of 37






p. Exterior Protective Finish: None.

q. Exterior Protective Finish: Teak tone transparent stain.

r. Exterior Protective Finish: Chestnut tone, semi-transparent stain.

s. Exterior Protective Finish: Oxford brown tone, semi-transparent stain.

t. Copper Caps: Increased protection from moisture runoff.



u. Gate Swing: Into yard.

v. Hardware Bundle: None.

w. Hardware Bundle: Modern.

x. Hardware Bundle: Contemporary.

y. Construction:





Page 12 of 37






vi. Pickets (WxT): 5/8 x 3-1/2 in (16 x 89 mm)


vii. Gate Weight: 140 to 200 lbs (63.50 to 90.72 kg) per door.

C. Basis of Design: Sherwood series as manufactured by Pacific Gate Works.






e. Width: 42 in (1067 mm).

f. Width: 48 in (1219 mm).









o. Clavos: One side.



Page 13 of 37

p. Clavos: Both sides.








v. Gate Swing: Hinge on left, swing into yard.

w. Gate Swing: Hinge on left, swing into street.

x. Gate Swing: Hinge on right, swing into yard.

y. Gate Swing: Hinge on right, swing into street.




cc. Hardware Bundle: Conventional.

dd. Construction:




iii. Window: 13 x 13 in (330 x 330 mm) with 8 x 8 in (203 x 203 mm) opening.

1) Speakeasy grille with peek door.



Page 14 of 37



















q. Clavos: One side.

r. Clavos: Both sides.

s. Exterior Protective Finish: None.

t. Exterior Protective Finish: Teak tone transparent stain.

u. Exterior Protective Finish: Chestnut tone, semi-transparent stain.

v. Exterior Protective Finish: Oxford brown tone, semi-transparent stain.

w. Copper Caps: Increased protection from moisture runoff.



Page 15 of 37



x. Gate Swing: Into yard.

y. Gate Swing: Into street.




cc. Construction:



i. Joinery: Mortise and tenon.

ii. Window: 13 x 13 in (330 x 330 mm) with 8 x 8 in (203 x 203 mm) opening.


i. Gate Weight: 40 to 70 lbs (18.14 to 31.75 kg) per door.














Page 16 of 37






p. Clavos: One side.

q. Clavos: Both sides.

r. Exterior Protective Finish: None.

s. Exterior Protective Finish: Teak tone transparent stain.

t. Exterior Protective Finish: Chestnut tone, semi-transparent stain.

u. Exterior Protective Finish: Oxford brown tone, semi-transparent stain.

v. Copper Caps: Increased protection from moisture runoff.



w. Gate Swing: Into yard.




aa. Construction:





Page 17 of 37


iii. Window: 13 x 13 in (330 x 330 mm) with 8 x 8 in (203 x 203 mm) opening.


iv. Steel support frame, with integrated ball bearing hinges.

v. Receiver plates: Quantity of 4.

vi. Cane Bolts: Quantity of 2, 18 in (457 mm) long, non-lockable.



D. Basis of Design: Craftsman series as manufactured by Pacific Gate Works.






e. Width: 42 in (1067 mm).

f. Width: 48 in (1219 mm).












Page 18 of 37















bb. Construction:




iii. Window at top of gate: Precision profiled steel.

1) Sand blasted and powder coated, black.








Page 19 of 37




























Page 20 of 37

aa. Construction:






bb. Gate Weight: 40 to 70 lbs (18.14 to 31.75 kg) per door.





















Page 21 of 37










y. Construction:











E. Basis of Design: Moderna series as manufactured by Pacific Gate Works.







Page 22 of 37


e. Width: 42 in (1067 mm).

f. Width: 48 in (1219 mm).

























Page 23 of 37


bb. Construction:


























Page 24 of 37











aa. Construction:

















Page 25 of 37


















y. Construction:










Page 26 of 37

vi. False Mid Rail and Mid Stile: Required for 144 to 168 in (3658 to 4267 mm).


F. Basis of Design: Portland series as manufactured by Pacific Gate Works.






e. Width: 42 in (1067 mm).

f. Width: 48 in (1219 mm).


















Page 27 of 37









bb. Construction:




iii. Lattice: 1.5 in (38 mm) thick.















Page 28 of 37



















aa. Construction:









Page 29 of 37
























v. Construction:




Page 30 of 37




iv. support frame, with integrated ball bearing hinges.




vii. False Mid Rail and Mid Stile: Required for 144 to 168 in (3658 to 4267 mm).

viii. Gate Weight: 140 to 200 lbs (63.50 to 90.72 kg) per door.

G. Basis of Design: Windsor series as manufactured by Pacific Gate Works.






e. Width: 42 in (1067 mm).

f. Width: 48 in (1219 mm).








n. Frame Thickness: 3 in (76 mm).



Page 31 of 37
















bb. Construction:


1) Pickets (WxT): 2 x 1.5 in (51 x 38 mm).



iii. Raised Panels: 1 in (25 mm) thick.







Page 32 of 37














p. Frame Thickness: 3 in (76 mm).











y. Hardware Bundle: Driveway Gate.



Page 33 of 37

z. Construction:























p. Frame Thickness: 3 in (76 mm).




Page 34 of 37








w. Hardware Bundle: None.

x. Hardware Bundle: Modern.

y. Hardware Bundle: Contemporary.

z. Construction:











H. Basis of Design: Monterey GatePak series as manufactured by Pacific Gate Works.



b. Width: 42 in (1067 mm).



Page 35 of 37

c. Height: 70 in (1854 mm).

d. Height: Custom, as indicated on the Drawings.

e. Frame Thickness: 1-1/2 in (38 mm).

f. Exterior Protective Finish: None.

g. Gate Swing: Hinge on left, swing into yard.

h. Gate Swing: Hinge on left, swing into street.

i. Gate Swing: Hinge on right, swing into yard.

j. Gate Swing: Hinge on right, swing into street.

k. Hardware:

i. Latch: Quantity of 1.

1) Handle: 7 in (178 mm) tall. Operable from both sides.

2) Material: Steel with powder coated, rust resistant, black finish.

3) Padlock Eyes: Included.

4) Installation screws.

ii. Jambs: May be used for installation between masonry, block walls, and columns.

Quantity of 2.

1) Material: Premium, clear western red cedar.

2) Jamb Dimensions (DxWxH): 1.5 x 3.5 x 72 in (38 x 89 x 1829 mm).

iii. Hinges: Heavy duty, commercial grade butt style.

1) Self-closing.

2) Installation screws.

l. Construction:


1) Tongue and Groove Panels: 1 in (25 mm) thick.





Page 36 of 37

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and

other conditions affecting performance.

B. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved

submittals. Follow manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Post Installation: Posts are not provided by the gate manufacturer and shall be provided

by the Subcontractor for the Work of this Section.

1. Post Size: 4 x 6 in (102 x 152 mm); actual dimensions, 3.5 x 5.5 in (89 x 140

mm).

a. The face side of post, the 5.5 in (140 mm) side, must be aligned with the gate.

2. Post Size (If the gate is 48 to 60 in (1219 to 1524 mm) wide, use a 6 x 6 in (1829

x 1829 mm) post minimum): 6 x 6 (152 x 152 mm); actual dimension, 5.5 x 5.5

in (140 x 140 mm).

3. Footing Depth: One half of exposed post height, or depth of local frost line plus

2 in (51 mm) whichever is greater. 20 in (508 mm) minimum.

4. Hole Depth: 14 to 16 in (354 to 406 mm).

a. Base Gravel in Footing: 3 in (76 mm).

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Take protective measures to prevent exposure to other construction activity. Protect

installed products until completion of project.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean surfaces to remove soiling, stains, dust, and dirt using materials acceptable to

manufacturer.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products and defective work, as directed by

Architect.



Page 37 of 37

C. Leave installation area clean, free of residue and debris resulting from work of this

Section.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 323132 – WOOD COMPOSIT FENCES AND GATES


Page 1 of 7

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Wood composite fences.

B. Wood composite gates.

C. Excavation for posts.


A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B. Section 06 73 00 - Composite Decking.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C 94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.

B. ASTM C 177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and

Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus.

C. ASTM D 143 - Standard Test Methods for Small Clear Specimens of Timber.

D. ASTM D 198 - Standard Test Methods of Static Tests of Lumber in Structural Sizes.

E. ASTM D 1037 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Properties of Wood-Base Fiber

and Particle Panel Materials.

F. ASTM D 1413 - Standard Test Method for Wood Preservatives by Laboratory Soil-

Block Cultures.

G. ASTM D 1761 - Standard Test Methods for Mechanical Fasteners in Wood.

H. ASTM D1929 - Standard Test Method for Determining Ignition Temperature of

Plastics.

I. ASTM D 2047 - Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-

Coated Flooring Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine.

J. ASTM D 2394 - Standard Methods for Simulated Service Testing of Wood and Wood-

Base Finish Flooring.

K. ASTM D 2395 - Standard Test Methods for Specific Gravity of Wood and Wood-

Based Materials.

L. ASTM D 4761 - Standard Test Methods for Mechanical Properties of Lumber and

Wood-Base Structural Material.



Page 2 of 7

M. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.

N. ASTM F 1679 - Standard Test Method for Using a Variable Incidence Tribometer

(VIT).

O. American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA) E1-06 - Standard Method for

Laboratory Evaluation to Determine Resistance to Subterranean Termites.

1.4 DESIGN / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design Requirements: Design fence system to withstand Miami/Dade County 110

MPH steady wind and 130 MPH gusting wind tests.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used indicating sizes,

profiles, surface finishes, and performance characteristics, and including:




4. Instructions on care and cleaning of composite wood products.

C. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 9

inches (229 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.

D. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

E. Closeout Submittals: Provide manufacturer's maintenance instructions that include

recommendations for cleaning and maintenance.


A. Deliver, store and handle products in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

B. Store level and flat, off ground or floor, with supports at each end and maximum 24

inches on center.

C. Do not stack wood composite over 8 feet (203 mm) high.

D. Cover wood composite with waterproof covering, vented to prevent moisture buildup.

1.7 WARRANTY



Page 3 of 7

A. Provide manufacturer's 25-year residential warranty / 10 year commercial warranty

providing coverage against checking, splitting, splintering, rotting, structural damage

from termites, and fungal decay of wood composite.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Trex Fencing, which is located at: 160 Exeter Dr.;

Winchester, VA 22603; Email:request info (); Web:www.trexfencing.com

1. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of

Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Wood composite: Reclaimed wood and plastic with integral coloring; free from toxic

chemicals and preservatives:

1. Characteristics:

a. Abrasion resistance: 0.01 inch wear per 1000 revolutions, tested to ASTM D

2394.

b. Hardness: 1124 pounds, tested to ASTM D 143.

c. Self ignition temperature: 743 degrees F, tested to ASTM D 1929.

d. Flash ignition temperature: 698 degrees F, tested to ASTM D 1929.

e. Flame spread rating: 80, tested to ASTM E 84.

f. Water absorption, 24 hour immersion, tested to ASTM D 1037:

i. Sanded surface: 4.3 percent.

ii. Unsanded surface: 1.7 percent.

g. Thermal expansion coefficient, 36 inch long samples:

i. Width: 35.2 x 10-6 to 42.7 x 10-6.

http://admin.arcat.com/users.pl?action=UserEmail&company=Trex+Fencing&coid=50087&rep=&fax=&message=RE:%20Spec%20Question%20(02824trx):%20%20&mf=

http://www.trexfencing.com/



Page 4 of 7

ii. Length: 16.1 x 10-6 to 19.2 x 10-6.

h. Fastener withdrawal, tested to ASTM D 1761:

i. Nail: 163 pounds per inch.

ii. Screw: 558 pounds per inch.

i. Static coefficient of friction:

i. Dry: 0.53 to 0.55, tested to ASTM D 2047.

ii. Dry: 0.59 to 0.70, tested to ASTM F 1679.

iii. Wet: 0.70 to 0.75, tested to ASTM F 1679.

j. Fungus resistance, white and brown rot: No decay, tested to ASTM D 1413.

k. Termite resistance: 9.6 rating, tested to AWPA E-1.

l. Specific gravity: 0.91 to 0.95, tested to ASTM D 2395.

m. Compression:

i. Parallel: 1806 PSI ultimate, 550 PSI design, tested to ASTM D 198.

ii. Perpendicular: 1944 PSI ultimate, 625 PSI design, tested to ASTM D 143.

n. Tensile strength: 854 PSI ultimate, 250 PSI design, tested to ASTM D 198.

o. Shear strength: 561 PSI ultimate, 200 PSI design, tested to ASTM D 143.

p. Modulus of rupture: 1423 PSI ultimate, 250 PSI design, tested to ASTM D

4761.

q. Modulus of elasticity: 175,000 PSI ultimate, 100,000 PSI design, tested to

ASTM D 4761.

r. Thermal conductivity: 1.57 BTU per inch per hour per square foot at 85

degrees F, tested to ASTM C 177.

2.3 COMPONENTS

A. Fence System: Seclusions Privacy Fence System.

1. Fence height:

a. 4 feet.



Page 5 of 7

b. 6 feet.

c. 8 feet.

d. 10 feet.

e. 12 feet.

f. Custom height as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Components:

a. Fence posts.

b. Post caps:

i. Pyramid.

ii. Flat.

iii. Crown.

c. Top rail

d. Aluminum bottom rail inserts.

e. Bottom rail covers/Pickets, 67 inch.

f. Bottom rail covers/Pickets, 91 inch.

g. Fence brackets.

3. Surface texture: Smooth.

4. Color:

a. Saddle.

b. Winchester Grey.

c. Woodland Brown.

2.4 ACCESSORLES

A. Fasteners: 1-5/8 inch galvanized or corrosion-resistant coated steel. Provide finish nails

where applicable.

B. Concrete: Provide as Specified in Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete; minimum

4000 PSI compressive strength at 28 days, with a 3 to 5 inch slump.



Page 6 of 7

C. Concrete: Provide concrete conforming to ASTM C 94; minimum 4000 PSI

compressive strength at 28 days, with a 3 to 5 inch slump.

D. Gate Hardware:

1. Provide two Trex hinges per gate leaf minimum, and size to gate weight and

conditions.

2. Provide center gate stop and drop rod for double gates.

3. Provide with latching mechanism.

4. Provide with padlock provisions.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving

the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Cut and drill wood composite using carbide tipped blades.

C. Space posts maximum 8 feet on center.

D. Drill post holes into undisturbed or compacted soil; excavate deeper in soft or loose

soils and for posts with heavy lateral loads.

E. Drill posts to 12 inch diameter. Locate bottom of post 30 inches below grade or below

frost line whichever is greater.

F. Place top of concrete 2 inches below finished grade.

G. Place top of concrete flush with finished grade.

H. Place top of concrete 2 inches above finished grade.



Page 7 of 7

I. Screw fence brackets to posts with four 1-5/8 inch long exterior screws.

J. Cut top rails, pickets, bottom rail covers and aluminum bottom rails to lengths required.

K. Slide bottom rail covers over aluminum bottom rail pieces.

L. Position aluminum bottom rail on fence brackets with deeper side of rail channel facing

downward.

M. Cut end pickets to height to provide clearance under brackets and screw to posts.

N. Insert pickets into bottom rail, interlocking adjacent pieces.

O. Position top rail and screw attach to top brackets with 1-5/8 inch long exterior screws.

P. Use finish nails to secure pickets to rails if the pickets are not tightly interlocked.

Q. Place post caps over post tops and secure with construction adhesive or four finish

nails.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean wood composite to remove stains:

5. Mold, mildew, and berry and leaf stains: Clean surfaces with conventional deck

wash containing detergent or sodium hypochlorite.

6. Rust and ground-in dirt: Clean surfaces with cleaner containing oxalic or

phosphoric acid.

7. Oil and grease: Clean surfaces with detergent containing degreasing agent.

3.5 PROTECTION



END OF SECTION

SECTION 328000 – IRRIGATION SYSTEMS


Page 1 of 18

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to

this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies the requirements for providing the Irrigation System as indicated

on the Drawings and/or electronic files such as .dwg, pdf, etc.

B. Contractor shall provide Irrigation System as a complete system including but not

limited to: heads, valves, valve boxes, control wire splice boxes, control wiring, electric

controller, piping circuits, and all accessories, including electric power source

coordination and installation.


A. Available Manufacturers - Subject to compliance with specified requirements,

manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work are included

in the specifications or denoted on the Drawings, and/or electronic files such as .dwg,

pdf, etc.

B. Installation of Irrigation System shall be performed under the direction and supervision

of a currently licensed State of Texas Irrigator with not less than 5 years of direct design

and installation experience in this type of work.

C. Reference Standards Applicable to this Section:

1. ANSI: American National Standards Institute

a. Z55.1: Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus and Equipment

2. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials

a. B88: Specifications for Seamless Copper water tube.

b. D 1785: Specifications for Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe,

Schedules 40, 80, and 120.

c. D 2241: Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe

(SDR Series)

d. D 2466: Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,

Schedule 80



Page 2 of 18

e. D 2564: Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC)

Plastic Pipe and Fittings

f. F 690: Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pressure

Piping Irrigation Systems

3. AWWA: American Water Works Association

a. C 500: Gate Valves, 3 inches through 48 inches NPS, for Water and Sewage

Systems

b. C 506: Backflow Prevention Devices, Reduced Pressure Principle and

Double Check Valve Types

4. ICC: International Code Council

a. IBC: International Building Code

b. IPC: International Plumbing Code

5. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturer's Assoc.

a. 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)

6. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association

a. NFPA 70 (NEC): National Electric Code

7. NSF: National Sanitation Foundation

a. No. 14 - Plastic Piping System Components and Related Materials

8. Chapter 344 – Texas Water Code-Regulations governing irrigation

9. Chapter 290 – Texas Water Code-Regulations governing backflow installation

and inspections

10. Chapter 37 Texas Water Code- Regulations governing irrigation licensing

11. Chapter 1903 Texas Water Code – Regulations governing irrigation licensing.

D. The contractor shall maintain a Record Drawing as prescribed by Section 01 78 39.

This record or log shall include all changes and modifications to the original plan on a

daily basis. Upon completion of the project, these changes contained in the Record

Drawing shall be incorporated into the design, notes, etc on all of the designs,

documents, etc, and will be provided to the Owner in the form of a completed Record

Drawing.

E. This record or log must be maintained on the job site during normal business hours.



Page 3 of 18

F. The Contractor shall provide a completed “As Built” Drawing to the Owner at the

completion of the project. This Record Drawing shall be in the form of paper copy as

well as a .DWG formatted CD.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. SYSTEM DESIGN

1. The Irrigation System design shall be a complete Irrigation System including

but not limited to: heads, valves, valve boxes, control wire splice boxes, control

wiring, electric controller, piping circuits, and all accessories, including electric

power source coordination and installation. This design shall be scaled to a

1:20 scale. This design shall be provided to the Owner. This design shall be

provided on paper following generally accepted industry standards utilizing a

title block, page numbers, page descriptions, and all other pertinent data relating

to the Irrigation System. The design shall include the following:

2. A hydraulic calculation for the worst-case scenario irrigation head in the worst

case irrigation zone shall be provided. This calculation shall provide the “actual

head pressure” for this identified sprinkler head and shall be representative for

the system.

3. A hydraulic calculation showing the “design pressure” for the worst-case

scenario irrigation head in the worst case irrigation zone shall be provided.

4. The licensed irrigator or Landscape Architect shall affix their seal over these

hydraulic calculations.

5. The manufacturer’s recommended pressure for each product used shall be noted

on the design and hydraulic section.

6. Location of Heads - Represent design location as accurately as possible. Make

minor adjustments on site with approval of the irrigation designer or Landscape

Architect as necessary to ensure consistent and even spacing where applicable.

The goal for the design is 100% coverage, head to head spacing, and matched

precipitation rate (MPR) application. Set all heads minimum 4” from back of

curb and 4" from edge of concrete walls.

7. The design shall utilize a “center fed” valve configuration and progressive pipe

sizing of all irrigation lines. If appropriate, the use of a looped main is

preferred. When a looped main is used, there shall be independent isolation

valves at each leg of the looped main.

8. The Irrigation System design shall comply with a maximum velocity of 5 linear

feet per second through the discharge piping of the Irrigation System.



Page 4 of 18

9. The system shall have the landscape beds and turf on separate zones. Rotors

and spray shall also be on different zones. If drip is used, it shall utilize pressure

compensation, pressure regulation, and pressure filtration.

10. The design shall include a sheet(s) titled “Typical Exploded Views”. This

sheet shall show detail of specific installation applications. All major

component utilized on the project shall have a “Typical Exploded View”

11. A statement on the irrigation designer or Landscape Architect’s letterhead

shall be included that indicates the irrigation design provided to the Owner is

in 100% compliance with all prevailing city codes, ordinances, and the TCEQ

standards, rules, and regulations. In addition, the document will contain the

seal of either the licensed irrigator or the Landscape Architect.

12. Submit an ET (Evapotranspiration) based schedule indicating length of time

each valve is to be open to produce a given amount of precipitation for the ET

value of July. In addition, submit the recommended monthly adjustment rates

in percentages for the ET of the other eleven months. Include any schedules

deemed appropriate for any “watering windows” that may be imposed by the

Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) and/or requested by the Owner.

B. Product Data

1. Submit manufacturer's technical data, specifications, installation instructions

and all shop drawings of the sprinkler heads, automatic valves, controllers,

backflow preventers, connections, details, and related items to the Grounds and

Landscape Department.

2. Submit the manufacturer’s operation instructions for all applicable irrigation

components.

3. Submit maintenance instructions on all items requiring manufacturer's standard

detail submittal.

C. Water Tap Connections

4. All fees, permits, and costs associated with the installation of the landscape

irrigation water meter(s) shall be the responsibility of the Contractor unless

otherwise directed by the Owner. The Owner will be responsible for any

deposits dictated by the AHJ.

D. Water

1. Potable water to be supplied by Owner. Contractor shall make provisions for all

connections required.

E. Permits and Inspections



Page 5 of 18

1. Copies of all required permits and inspections and their associated fees shall be

part of this contract and are the responsibility of the Contractor. A copy of all

inspections shall be forwarded to the University of Texas, MD Anderson

Grounds and Landscape Department.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND HANDLING

A. Materials, where appropriate, shall be delivered in manufacturer's unopened packaging

labeled to indicate manufacturer's name and product identification. Ensure that

packaging and labeling remain intact until installation. Materials shall be stored

protected from the elements, including direct sunlight.

B. Pipes shall be handled to prevent being damaged and to maintain their straightness.

Pipe ends shall be wrapped. Pipes shall be stored on beds the full length of the pipes.

Damaged or dented pipes or fittings shall not be used.

C. At no time will pipe joints other than swing joints; be accepted at lengths that are less

than 20 feet in length.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Refer to Section 01 78 46 for Maintenance Material Requirements.

1.7 DEFINITIONS

A. Irrigation Main - Irrigation main is the piping from the water source(s) to control

valves. Irrigation main is that pipe which is on the pressure side of irrigation control

valves. This definition shall include looped mains and sub-looped mains.

B. Irrigation Lateral Lines - Irrigation lateral line is the piping from the control valves to

the irrigation heads. Lateral line is that pipe which is on the non-pressure side of

irrigation control valves.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES

A. Markings - Thermoplastic pipes shall be marked in accordance with ASTM D 1785

and ASTM D 2241 as applicable and shall bear the NSF mark in accordance with NSF

14.

B. Irrigation Main Pipe - ASTM D 2231, PVC, 1120 or 1220, Schedule 40. or Class 200.

C. Irrigation Lateral Line Pipe

1. Pipes 3/4-inch diameter and larger: ASTM D 2231, PVC, 1120 or 1220, SDR

21.0, 200 PSI



Page 6 of 18

2. Pipes 1/2-inch diameter: ASTM D 2241, PVC, 1120 or 1220, SDR 13.5, 315

PSI

D. Copper Tubing - ASTM B 88, Type K

2.2 FITTINGS FOR SOLVENT WELDED JOINTS

A. Schedule 40: ASTM D 2466

B. Schedule 80: ASTM D 2467

2.3 SOLVENT CEMENT FOR SOLVENT WELDED JOINTS

A. IPS Weld-On PVC Cement: IPS Corporation, 455 West Victoria Street, Compton, Ca

90220; 1-800-421-2677.

1. Weld-On 700 for PVC pipe up to 4” and /or Weld-On 710 for PVC pipe up to

2”.

2. In the event PVC pipe is greater than 4” then a Weld-On 704 series “medium”

body shall be used.

B. IPS Weld-On Primer: IPS Corporation, 455 West Victoria Street, Compton, Ca 90220;

1-800-421-2677.

1. Weld-On P-68 or P-70 primer shall be used for surface preparation for all PVC

pipe and fittings prior to cement applications.

2.4 FITTINGS FOR THREADED JOINTS

A. ASTM D 2466, PVC, Schedule 80.

2.5 SEALANT FOR THREADED JOINTS UNDER CONSTANT PRESSURE

A. No liquid Teflon or “pipe dope” shall be used on any threaded electric irrigation control

valve.

B. A high-quality MIL-SPEC (MIL-T-27730) Teflon tape shall be used for threaded

electric irrigation control valves.

C. All other types of threaded joints under constant pressure may use RECTOR SEAL

LIQUID TEFLON by Rector Seal Corp., 2830 Produce Row, Houston, Texas 77023,

(713) 928-6423, or approved equal.

2.6 SLEEVES UNDER PAVING FOR CONTROL WIRE AND IRRIGATION LINES

A. ASTM D 2466, PVC, Schedule 40, sized as shown on Drawings.



Page 7 of 18

B. In the event the sleeve is not shown on plan or an additional sleeve is to be installed,

the sleeve shall be at a minimum two (2) pipe sizes larger than the pipe that is to be

routed through the sleeve.

C. For sleeves that are to be used specifically for control wires only, the sleeve shall be a

1-1/2” sleeve

D. All sleeves shall extend a minimum of 12” beyond the obstacle that was sleeved.

E. All sleeves shall be marked and located on the Record Drawings by one of the methods

listed below:

1. A minimum of two measurements from two known and fixed positions that

terminate at the end of the sleeve.

2. A GPS (Global Positioning System) fix in degrees, minutes, and seconds for the

longitude and latitude location of the end of the sleeve.

F. All sleeves shall have an identification marker installed in the concrete at the point

where the sleeve is located. These markers shall be Berntsen Survey markers as

provided by Berntsen International Inc., P.O. Box Madison, WI 53708-8670.

Telephone number: 800-356-7388

1. The markers shall be a 3 ½” Aluminum domed concrete marker, part number

C-35-D as per Berntsen International Inc.

2. The markers shall have at the minimum, the following information stamped on

them: MD Anderson. Irrigation Sleeve Sleeve Size in inches

3. Marker layout shall be approved by MD Anderson, and Grounds and Landscape

Department prior to placing final order for the markers.

4. The markers shall be installed as per the manufacturer’s specifications.

2.7 IRRIGATION SPRINKLER HEADS

A. All rotor and spray sprinkler heads and all landscape irrigation drip line shall be

provided by Rain Bird, 6991 E. South point Road, Tucson, As, 85706. Telephone 520-

741-6100 unless specifically authorized by MD Anderson, Grounds and Landscape

Department.

B. Spray Heads

1. Spray heads shall be Rain Bird 1800 series sprinkler heads with the height as

indicated on the design or design legend. Under no conditions will an 1802

series sprinkler head be installed.



Page 8 of 18

2. The nozzles shall be from the “MPR” series unless otherwise indicated on the

design.

3. All 1800 series sprinkler heads shall have filters installed.

4. SAM-PRS (Seal-A-Matic check valve and in-stem pressure regulation)

sprinkler heads shall be installed on all projects where the turf area is adjoined

by a pedestrian walk path. They are not required in areas other than low

drainage or areas that are specifically called for in the design. All other areas

will use the standard 1800’s as specified.

5. If adjustments of radius are required on a specific design that reduces the radius

of a given nozzle by more than 25%, then a Rain Bird PCS (Pressure

Compensating Screen) with the appropriate color shall be installed.

6. All sprinklers shall be connected to irrigation lateral lines by “swing joints”.

These swing joints shall be constructed via flexible PVC with a street elbow on

one end and a coupler on the other end. These constructed swing joints shall

be solvent welded with “hot glue” and shall be constructed at least 24 hours

prior to installation.

7. The nozzles on pop-up spray head body shall be as shown on Drawings and

shall be capable of covering the radius as designated on Drawings.

C. Rotor Heads

1. Rotor heads shall be from the Rain Bird product line. When the site conditions

permit, Rain Bird 5000 series rotor heads with MPR nozzles shall be used.

When site conditions dictate larger diameter rotors, the designer shall utilize

Matched Precipitation Rate design concepts in the nozzle selection.

D. Drip Irrigation

1. Drip irrigation products shall be from the Rain Bird product line.

2. All use of drip irrigation that is incorporated into the design shall utilize the

following items:

a. All drip applications shall utilize “Pressure Compensation” type products and

a uniform regulated pressure.

b. All drip applications shall utilize a pressure regulator incorporated into the

valve configuration.

c. All drip applications shall have air/vacuum relief valves and flush flow

valves installed as per manufactures specifications.



Page 9 of 18

d. All drip applications shall incorporate a Rain Bird Automatic Filter kit with

each section of drip. The drain line from this filter shall be routed to either

a drain approved by the Owner, or to an area where it can be discharged via

an impact type head with a large nozzle. Under no circumstances shall the

drain line be “day lighted”. The stainless-steel mesh screen shall be a 150-

micron mesh. The valve configuration shall be sized according to the

manufacturer’s specifications.

3. When site conditions permit, utilize the Rain Bird Landscape Drip line. The

spacing standards shall be:

a. 12” spacing – sandy soil conditions

b. 18” spacing – loam soil conditions

c. 24” spacing – clay soil conditions

d. Design preference is for use of uniform rows, centers fed zones, and

maximum spacing not exceeding the manufacturer’s specifications.

4. The drip shall be designed and installed as per the manufacturer’s

recommendations.

2.8 ELECTRIC REMOTE-CONTROL VALVES

A. Remote control irrigation zone valves shall be manufactured by Rain Bird, 6991 E.

Southpoint Road, Tucson, Az, 85706. Telephone 520-741-6100. These valves will be

Rain Bird PEB Normally Closed (N.C.) series valves with the size shown on the design.

B. A Normally Open (N.O.) master valve shall be used with the RainMaster DX2

controller. This master valve shall be as per RainMaster specification.

2.9 REMOTE CONTROL VALVE TAGS

A. Remote control valve tags shall be plastic tags with plastic wire to attach numbered tag

to valve.

2.10 VALVE BOX

A. Valve boxes shall be heavy duty plastic 17 inch by 11-3/4 inch by 12-inch depth, black

with black cover. Valve box shall be non-hinged, bolt type by Carson Industries, Inc.,

1925 Street, LaVerne, CA 91750, (213) 732-6265, or approved equal.

2.11 CONTROL WIRE SPLICE BOXES

A. Control wire splice boxes shall be heavy duty plastic 10-inch diameter by 10-1/4-inch-

deep, black with black cover, No. 910-12B, by Carson Industries, Inc. or approved

equal.



Page 10 of 18

2.12 GRAVEL BACKFILL

A. Gravel backfill for valve boxes and control wire splice boxes shall be 3/8-inch diameter

pea gravel.

2.13 ELECTRIC CONTROLLER(S)

A. Controllers shall be RainMaster DX2 Evolution by RainMaster Irrigation Systems,

3910-B Royal Avenue, Simi Valley, California 93063 (805)527-4498

1. The DX2 Evolution controller shall be used on all projects unless otherwise

specified by MD Anderson, Grounds and Landscape Department.

2. The DX2 Controllers shall be housed in wall mounted Stainless Steel cabinets

provided by RainMaster unless otherwise specified.

3. In areas where a wall mount controller is not feasible a Stainless-Steel Pedestal

mount controller will be used.

4. All DX2 controllers shall have the lighting protection kit installed and shall be

grounded and installed as per manufacturer’s specifications.

5. Coordinate with the Owner as to the communication source for the connectivity

to the Central Control system.

a. Once the communications source is determined, the appropriate

communications equipment shall be provided as specified under the

“communications” specifications.

6. The number of zones per each controller shall be determined by the irrigation

designer or Landscape Architect based on site conditions, water sources,

watering windows, and input from the Owner. All controllers specified shall

have a capacity to add an additional two zones of irrigation to the number of

zones needed without exceeding the controller’s capacity.

7. Install the appropriately sized flow sensor as per Rainmaster installation

specifications.

8. A master valve shall be used in conjunction with the DX2 controller. The

master valve shall be a normally open (N.O.) valve as specified by RainMaster.

B. Equipment Associated with RainMaster Central Control

1. Master Valve

a. A master valve shall be installed on all Irrigation Systems that utilize a DX2

Controller unless otherwise specified by the Owner. The master valve shall

be as specified by RainMaster.



Page 11 of 18

2. Flow Sensor

a. The flow sensor shall be a Rainmaster flow sensor sized as per the

RainMaster specifications for the main line pipe size and flow.

b. A DX-Flow sensing circuit board will be required for flow sensors

c. Each flow sensor will require EV-CAB-SEN flow sensing cable. The

maximum allowable distance is 2000’ linear feet.

3. Communications

a. The appropriate type of communications equipment, including cards, wire,

and devices shall be specified to correspond with each controller that is used.

The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner as to the connectivity of

each device and the existing Central Control software.

4. Rain Switch

a. A wireless rain switch by Hunter shall be installed as per manufacturer’s

specifications utilizing the normally open (N.O.) lead. A conventional hard

wire switch will be used when wireless is not compatible. Coordinate with

the RainMaster distributor to obtain the required interface kit- “DXCID-

KIT”.

2.14 IRRIGATION CONTROL WIRE

A. Wire: Solid copper wire, NEC type UF, UL listed for direct burial in ground.

Minimum size: No. 14 AWG. No. 12 UF for runs over 1000 LF.

B. The wires for all irrigation control valves shall be red in color.

C. The common wires for all irrigation control valves shall be white in color.

D. Splicing Material shall be King Wire Connectors, Tan in color, by King Innovation,

3801 Lloyd King Drive, St. Charles, Mo 63304. A new King wire connector shall be

used for every electrical connection

E. An extra “transient” or spare wire shall be installed. This “transient” wire shall be

yellow in color and will be labeled as spare in the controller.

2.15 BACKFLOW PREVENTER

A. Backflow Preventers shall be bronze and copper, pressure vacuum breaker (PVB)

assembly Febco model 765 or reduced pressure device (RPZ) model 825 YA by Febco

Sales, Inc. (CMB Industries), P.O. Box 8070, Fresno, CA 93747, (209) 252-0791, or

approved equal. Size as per Drawings.



Page 12 of 18

B. The backflow devices shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer, TCEQ,

and local codes and standards.

C. The backflow device(s) shall be installed in an enclosure by StrongBox, V.I.T.

Products, Inc., 800.729-1314.

1. The enclosure shall be the “Smooth Touch Vandal Resistant Backflow

Enclosure” model sized as per the backflow device. It shall be powder coated

the standard dark green color.

2. Each enclosure shall include a “PolarBearier” insulated blanket sized to fit the

backflow device.

3. Each enclosure shall be installed on Contractor built enclosure pad. The holes

for the irrigation lines shall be large enough in diameter so as to accommodate

foam insulation wrap around the irrigation pipe so as to protect against freeze

and chafing. There shall be a drainage area so as to alleviate any standing water

inside the enclosure.

a. The pad shall be adequately anchored and shall have the concrete sleeved

where the irrigation lines protrude through the concrete.

b. The pad shall have pea gravel no larger than 3/8” diameter installed in the

Contractor installed drainage hole in the bottom of the pad.

c. The pad shall have a mechanism installed that will allow the enclosure pad

to lock the enclosure to the pad.

d. The Owner will provide padlocks to the Contractor. The Contractor shall

ensure all enclosures are locked.

e. The pad shall be installed in locations as per the manufacturer’s

specifications in a location approved by M D Anderson, Grounds and


2.16 GATE VALVES

A. Gate Valves shall comply with AWWA C-500. Valves up to 3-inch size shall be 125-

pound, bronze body, bronze-mounted, non-rising stem with solid wedge gates. The

size shall correspond to the main line they are attached to.

2.17 QUICK COUPLING VALVES

A. Quick coupling valves shall have heavy duty brass construction, durable thermoplastic

rubber cover, stainless steel internal valve spring, two-piece body design. These valves

shall be sized as 1”.

B. Provide four valve keys with 3/4-inch swivel hose ells.



Page 13 of 18

C. The Quick Coupling valves shall be installed as per the “typical exploded view” found

on the detail sheets. The 1” size shall supersede any sizing that may be shown on an

“exploded view”.

D. Coordinate location of the Quick Coupling valves with M D Anderson, Grounds and


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

A. General - Contractor shall comply with Division 31 of these Specifications. Excavate

straight and true with bottom uniformly sloped to low points. Protect existing lawns

and plantings. Remove and replant as necessary to complete installation. Replace

damaged lawn areas and plants with new products to restore to existing installation's

original condition.

B. Minimum Cover - Provide 18-inch minimum cover over top of installed irrigation main

piping. Provide 12-inch minimum cover over top of installed irrigation lateral line

piping. Provide 2 inches of earth between parallels and wire. Parallels shall be laid

side-by-side, not stacked.

C. Backfill - Backfill with clean material from excavation after obtaining Landscape

Architect's approval. Remove organic material, as well as rocks and debris larger than

1 inch in diameter. Place acceptable backfill in 6-inch lifts and water jet all trenches.

D. Existing Lawns - Where trenching is required across existing lawns, (or in event of

changes or repairs after new lawn has been established), uniformly cut strips of sod 6

inches wider than trench. Remove sod in rolls of suitable size for handling and keep

moistened until replanted.

1. Backfill trench to within 6 inches of finished grade and compact. Continue fill

with acceptable topsoil and compact to bring sod even with existing lawn.

2. Replant sod within 2 days after removal, roll and water generously.

3. Resod and restore to original condition all sod areas not in healthy condition

equal to adjoining lawns 30 days after replanting.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General - Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor shall comply with requirements of

the governing International Plumbing Code and Chapter 344 of the Texas Water Code.

Verify all applicable irrigation codes.

B. Pipes



Page 14 of 18

1. Piping Mains and Laterals - Lay out sprinkler mainlines and perform line

adjustments and site modifications to laterals prior to excavation. Lay pipe on

solid subbase, uniformly sloped without humps or depressions.

2. PVC Pipe Assembly

a. Cut PVC pipe, square and de-burr. Use PVC pipe cutter when possible.

Clean pipe and fittings using primer as recommended by the PVC pipe

manufacturer. Use purple tinted primer to aid in visual inspection.

b. Apply a thin even flow coat of PVC solvent cement to the pipe first, then the

inside of the fitting. Utilize the appropriate size applicator and the correct

temperature range of solvent weld material for the size of the pipe. Cure

joints as recommended by the manufacturer and keep pipe and fitting out of

service during curing period. Construct watertight joints equal or greater in

strength than the pipe. Do not tap pipe at fittings.

3. Install plastic pipe in dry weather, when temperature is above 40 degrees F. and

in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Allow joints to cure at

least 24 hours at temperature above 40 degrees F. before testing.

4. Plastic pipe shall be snaked in the trenches in a manner to provide for expansion

and contraction as recommended by pipe manufacturer.

C. Sleeves Under Paving - The majority of sleeves under paving are existing as shown on

Drawings. Where boring is required for new sleeves (refer to Drawings), it shall be a

"wet bore." Install sleeves 12" beyond edge of pavement. Perform trench and backfill

in accordance with these specifications.

D. Irrigation Heads

1. Flush irrigation lines with full head of water and install heads after hydrostatic

test is completed.

2. Install heads at manufacturer's recommended heights. Activate the zone valve

and flush out the heads.

3. Locate part-circle heads to maintain a minimum distance of 4 inches from walls

and 4 inches from other boundaries, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Check for uniformity of coverage and pattern correctness. Adjust for 100%

coverage where required.

5. Install nozzles as indicated on the design.

6. Adjust arcs and radius at the stated manufacturer’s pressure. Adjust the flow

control valve until this pressure is obtained at the last head on each zone.



Page 15 of 18

E. Electric Remote-Control Valves

1. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate at rated operating pressure

required for each irrigation section.

2. Install valves in valve boxes, arranged for easy adjustment and removal. Locate

valves to ensure ease of access for maintenance such that no physical

interference with other elements of the project exists.

3. Install a 3’ expansion coil at each valve.

F. Remote Control Valve Tags - One Remote Control Valve Tag shall be attached to stem

of each electric remote-control valve. Tags shall be numbered sequentially. Numbers

shall correspond to station numbers and controller numbers. Provide tags and

corresponding numbers for wires pulled for future valves.

G. Valve Boxes - Install valve boxes to cover electric remote-control valves. Top of valve

box shall be flush with finished grade. Bury minimum 4 bricks under base of each box

as support.

H. Control Wire Splice Boxes - Install control wire splice box to cover any splice in

control wire. Top of valve box shall be flush with finished grade. Bury minimum 4

bricks under base of each box as support. Install control wire splice box to cover wires

pulled for future valves.

I. Gravel Backfill - Backfill valve boxes and control wire splice boxes with gravel,

minimum 6-inch depth.

J. Electric Controller

1. Controllers shall be fully grounded as per the manufacturer’s specifications.

2. Connect remote control valves to controller in clockwise sequence to

correspond with stations 1, 2, 3, successively.

3. Provide M D Anderson, Grounds and Landscape Department with a size

reduced copy of the irrigation plan.

4. Provide two keys to Owner. Keys to be matched with existing controller key

locking mechanisms.

5. Power to Controller & Locations: Locations shown on plan for controllers is

approximate. Final location shall be determined on site by Owner. Contractor

shall supply 120 VAC to controller from adjacent existing power sources.

Follow local governing codes in electrical work.



Page 16 of 18

6. Take an ohm reading on all irrigation electric control valves and spare wiring

prior to connection to the controller. Note the ohms readings on the Record

Drawing.

K. Irrigation Control Wires

1. Provide 24-volt system for control of automatic circuit-section valves of

underground Irrigation System. Provide unit capacity to suit number of circuits

indicated.

2. Install control wires with irrigation mains and laterals in common trench where

possible. Lay control wires neatly together to side of pipe. Provide 3’

expansion coils at valves, corners, bores and snake wire in trench to allow for

contraction. Tape wires in bundles at 10-foot intervals. Line splices will be

allowed on runs of 500 Ft. or more. Splices shall be made and placed in control

wire splice boxes.

3. Common ground wire shall be white. No other wires shall be white.

4. Supply one extra wire, for each direction of run, to valve which is located the

greatest distance from the controller. Extra wire shall be yellow and labeled as

spare in the controller.

5. Color of wire from controller to control valve shall be consistent to each valve.

Red shall be used for the zone valves.

6. Provide 12-inch-long expansion loop within 3 feet of each wire connection and

splice on runs of wire 100 feet or longer.

L. Backflow Preventers

1. Make required connection to water supply according to local codes and

manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Install pressure type backflow devices at required grade in accordance with the

local Plumbing Code. Exposed mainline and mainline risers above PVC pipe

main elevation shall be copper. Install a brass union in the riser on the upstream

and downstream of the device.

3. Install the “StrongBox” and insulation blanket as per manufacturer’s

recommendations.

4. Provide an isolation valve (gate valve) prior to the PVB. Install a valve box as

per specifications over the valve. Locate the valve on the as built drawings

utilizing one of the following methods.

a. A minimum of two measurements from two known and fixed positions that

terminate at the end of the sleeve.



Page 17 of 18

b. A GPS (Global Positioning System) fix in degrees, minutes, and seconds for

the longitude and latitude location of device.

5. Have the PVB tested. Provide the Owner a copy of this inspection.

M. The Contractor shall maintain a Record Drawing. This Record Drawing shall include

all changes and modifications to the original plan on a daily basis. Upon completion

of the project, these changes contained in the Record Drawing shall be noted on all of

the designs, documents, etc, and will be provided to the Owner in the form of a

completed Record Drawing.

3.3 TESTING

A. General - Notify Landscape Architect 48 hours in advance when testing will be

conducted. Conduct tests in presence of Landscape Architect and a representative of

M D Anderson, Grounds and Landscape Department.

B. Hydrostatic Test - Test irrigation main line, before backfilling trenches, to a hydrostatic

pressure of not less than 100 psi for 1 hour. Piping may be tested in sections to expedite

work. Remove and repair or replace piping and connections which do not pass

hydrostatic testing. System shall not lose more than 1-1/2 gallons of water in 1 hour.

C. Shut off mainline at backflow preventer during non-working hours until Contractor has

demonstrated the mainline is stable.

D. Operational Testing - Perform operational testing after hydrostatic testing is completed,

backfill is in place, and irrigation heads are adjusted to final position.

1. Demonstrate to Landscape Architect that system meets coverage requirements,

is as specified and indicated, and that automatic controls function properly.

2. Coverage requirements are based on operation of one circuit at a time.

3. After completion of grading, sodding, and rolling of grass areas, carefully adjust

lawn sprinkler heads so they will be flush with or not more than 1/2 inch above

finished grade. Set shrub sprinkler heads not more than 1/2 inch above top of

mulch.

3.4 MAINTENANCE

A. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner on the implementation of the initial ET

based irrigation schedule.

B. Contractor shall correctly maintain the Irrigation System during the installation process

and throughout the landscaping maintenance service period as specified in Section 32

91 20 - Exterior Landscape Maintenance.



Page 18 of 18

C. Contractor shall provide Record Drawings for new work, showing dimensioned

location of valves, meters, vacuum breakers, controllers, and mainline. Contractor

shall request reproducible mylars form the Landscape Architect in preparation of

Record Drawings.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 329000 – PLANTING


Page 1 of 9

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this

Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes planting soils specified by composition of the mixes.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 32930 PLANTS for placing planting soil for plantings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AAPFCO: Association of American Plant Food Control Officials.

B. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.

This can be amended or unamended soil as indicated.

C. CEC: Cation exchange capacity.

D. Compost: The product resulting from the controlled biological decomposition of

organic material that has been sanitized through the generation of heat and

stabilized to the point that it is beneficial to plant growth.

E. Duff Layer: A surface layer of soil, typical of forested areas, that is composed of

mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus.

F. Imported Soil: Soil that is transported to Project site for use.

G. Layered Soil Assembly: A designed series of planting soils, layered on each other,

that together produce an environment for plant growth.

H. Manufactured Soil: Soil produced by blending soils, sand, stabilized organic soil

amendments, and other materials to produce planting soil.

I. NAPT: North American Proficiency Testing Program. An SSSA program to assist

soil-, plant-, and water-testing laboratories through interlaboratory sample

exchanges and statistical evaluation of analytical data.

J. Organic Matter: The total of organic materials in soil exclusive of undecayed plant

and animal tissues, their partial decomposition products, and the soil biomass; also

called "humus" or "soil organic matter."



Page 2 of 9

K. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has

been modified as specified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce

a soil mixture best for plant growth.

L. RCRA Metals: Hazardous metals identified by the EPA under the Resource

Conservation and Recovery Act.

M. SSSA: Soil Science Society of America.

N. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete,

or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

O. Subsoil: Soil beneath the level of subgrade; soil beneath the topsoil layers of a

naturally occurring soil profile, typified by less than 1 percent organic matter and

few soil organisms.

P. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile. In

undisturbed areas, surface soil is typically called "topsoil"; but in disturbed areas

such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

Q. USCC: U.S. Composting Council.



2. Include recommendations for application and use.

3. Include test data substantiating that products comply with requirements.

4. Include sieve analyses for aggregate materials.

5. Material Certificates: For each type of imported soil and soil mix before

delivery to the site, according to the following:

a. Manufacturer's qualified testing agency's certified analysis of standard

products.

b. Analysis of fertilizers, by a qualified testing agency, made according to

AAPFCO methods for testing and labeling and according to AAPFCO's

SUIP #25.

c. Analysis of nonstandard materials, by a qualified testing agency, made

according to SSSA methods, where applicable.

B. Samples: For each bulk-supplied material, 1-quart volume of each in sealed

containers labeled with content, source, and date obtained. Each Sample shall be

typical of the lot of material to be furnished; provide an accurate representation of

composition, color, and texture.



Page 3 of 9


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent, state-operated, or university-

operated laboratory; experienced in soil science, soil testing, and plant nutrition;

with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated; and that

specializes in types of tests to be performed.

1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Soil Analyses: For each unamended soil type, perform testing on

soil samples and furnish soil analysis and a written report containing soil-

amendment and fertilizer recommendations by a qualified testing agency

performing the testing according to "Soil- Sampling Requirements" and "Testing

Requirements" articles.

1. Have testing agency identify and label samples and test reports according to

sample collection and labeling requirements.

1.7 SOIL-SAMPLING REQUIREMENTS

A. Sample Collection and Labeling: Have samples taken and labeled by Contractor

in presence of Owner’s Representative.

1. Number and Location of Samples: Minimum of three representative soil

samples for each soil to be used or amended for landscaping purposes.

2. Procedures and Depth of Samples: As directed by Owner’s Representative.

3. Labeling: Label each sample with the date, location keyed to a site plan or other

location system, visible soil condition, and sampling depth.

1.8 TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Perform tests on soil samples according to requirements in this article.

B. Physical Testing:

1. Soil Texture: Soil-particle, size-distribution analysis by one of the following

methods according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and

Mineralogical Methods":

a. Sieving Method: Report sand-gradation percentages for very coarse, coarse,

medium, fine, and very fine sand; and fragment-gradation (gravel)

percentages for fine, medium, and coarse fragments; according to USDA

sand and fragment sizes.

b. Hydrometer Method: Report percentages of sand, silt, and clay.



Page 4 of 9

2. Total Porosity: Calculate using particle density and bulk density according to

SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical

Methods."

3. Water Retention: According to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-

Physical and Mineralogical Methods."

4. Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity: According to SSSA's "Methods of Soil

Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods"; at 85% compaction,

according to ASTM D 698 (Standard Proctor).

C. Chemical Testing:

1. CEC: Analysis by sodium saturation at pH 7 according to SSSA's "Methods of

Soil Analysis - Part 3- Chemical Methods."

D. Fertility Testing: Soil-fertility analysis, including the following:

1. Percentage of organic matter.

2. CEC, calcium percent of CEC, and magnesium percent of CEC.

3. Soil reaction (acidity/alkalinity pH value).

4. Buffered acidity or alkalinity.

5. Nitrogen ppm.

6. Phosphorous ppm.

7. Potassium ppm.

8. Manganese ppm.

9. Manganese-availability ppm.

10. Zinc ppm.

11. Zinc availability ppm.

12. Copper ppm.

13. Sodium ppm and sodium absorption ratio.

14. Soluble-salts ppm.

15. Presence and quantities of problem materials including salts and metals cited

in the Standard protocol. If such problem materials are present, provide

additional recommendations for corrective action.



Page 5 of 9

16. Other deleterious materials, including their characteristics and content of each.

E. Organic-Matter Content: Analysis using loss-by-ignition method according to

SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 3- Chemical Methods."

F. Recommendations: Based on the test results, state recommendations for soil

treatments and soil amendments to be incorporated to produce satisfactory planting

soil suitable for healthy, viable plants indicated. Include, at a minimum,

recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium fertilization, and for

micronutrients.

1. Fertilizers and Soil Amendment Rates: State recommendations in weight per

1000 sq. ft. for 6-inch depth of soil.

2. Soil Reaction: State the recommended liming rates for raising pH or sulfur for

lowering pH according to the buffered acidity or buffered alkalinity in weight

per 1000 sq. ft. for 6-inch depth of soil.


A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers

showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and

compliance with state and Federal laws if applicable.

B. Bulk Materials:

1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and

pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants.

2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk

materials, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching

adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways.

3. Do not move or handle materials when they are wet or frozen.

4. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers and soil amendments with

appropriate certificates.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.1 PLANTING SOILS SPECIFIED BY COMPOSITION

A. General: Soil amendments, fertilizers, and rates of application specified in this

article are guidelines that may need revision based on testing laboratory's

recommendations after preconstruction soil analyses are performed.



Page 6 of 9

B. Planting-Soil Type for turf and planting beds: Existing, on-site surface soil, with

the duff layer, if any, retained and stockpiled on-site; modified to produce viable

planting soil. Blend existing, on-site surface soil with soil amendments, per

Owner’s standards.

2.2 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80

percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows:

1. Class: T, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through a No. 8 sieve and a

minimum of 75 percent passing through a No. 60 sieve.

2. Class: O, with a minimum of 95 percent passing through a No. 8 sieve and a


3. Form: Provide lime in form of ground dolomitic limestone.

B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, and containing a minimum of 90 percent

elemental sulfur, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through a No. 6 sieve and

a maximum of 10 percent passing through a No. 40 sieve.

C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron

and 10 percent sulfur.

D. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.

E. Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90

percent passing through a No. 50 sieve.

F. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, free of toxic materials, and

according to ASTM C 33/C 33M.

2.3 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter produced by

composting feedstock and bearing USCC's "Seal of Testing Assurance."

B. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than

25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic

substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, debris, and material harmful to plant

growth.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Place planting soil and fertilizers according to requirements in other Specification

Sections and as indicated in the drawings.



Page 7 of 9

B. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout,

concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel

fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited

in planting soil.

C. Proceed with placement only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PLACING AND MIXING PLANTING SOIL OVER EXPOSED SUBGRADE

A. General: Apply and mix unamended soil with amendments on-site to produce

required planting soil. Do not apply materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is

frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

B. Subgrade Preparation: Till subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove

stones larger than 1-1/2 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and

other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

1. Apply, add soil amendments, and mix approximately half the thickness of

unamended soil over prepared, loosened subgrade according to "Mixing"

Paragraph below. Mix thoroughly into top 2 inches of subgrade. Spread

remainder of planting soil.

C. Mixing: Spread unamended soil to total depth of 6 inches or as indicated on

Drawings, but not less than required to meet finish grades after mixing with

amendments and natural settlement. Do not spread if soil or subgrade is frozen,

muddy, or excessively wet.

1. Amendments: Apply soil amendments evenly on surface, and thoroughly blend

them with unamended soil to produce planting soil.

D. Compaction: Compact each blended lift of planting soil to 75 to 82 percent of

maximum Standard Proctor density according to ASTM D 698 and tested in-place.

E. Finish Grading: Grade planting soil to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose,

uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet

finish grades.

3.3 BLENDING PLANTING SOIL IN PLACE

A. General: Mix amendments with in-place, unamended soil to produce required

planting soil. Do not apply materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is frozen,


B. Preparation: Till unamended, existing soil only in planting areas free of existing

tree roots and outside of critical root zones, to a minimum depth of 6 inches.

Remove stones larger than 1-1/2 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish,

and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.



Page 8 of 9

C. Mixing: Apply soil amendments evenly on surface, and thoroughly blend them into

full depth of unamended, in-place soil to produce planting soil.

D. Finish Grading: Grade planting soil to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose,


finish grades.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protection Zone: Identify protection zones according to local standards.

B. Protect areas of in-place soil from additional compaction, disturbance, and

contamination. Prohibit the following practices within these areas except as

required to perform planting operations:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.

2. Parking vehicles or equipment.

3. Vehicle traffic.

4. Foot traffic.

5. Erection of sheds or structures.

6. Impoundment of water.

7. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.

C. If planting soil or subgrade is over compacted, disturbed, or contaminated by

foreign or deleterious materials or liquids, remove the planting soil and

contamination; restore the subgrade as directed by Owner and replace

contaminated planting soil with new planting soil.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Protect areas adjacent to planting-soil preparation and placement areas from

contamination. Keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an

orderly condition.

B. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable

materials, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property unless


1. Dispose of excess subsoil and unsuitable materials on-site where directed by

Owner.



Page 9 of 9

END OF SECTION

SECTION 329113- SOIL PREPARATION Government of the Virgin Islands, Department of Public Works

PROJECT NAME


Page 1 of 9

PART 1 - GENERAL




Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes planting soils specified by composition of the mixes.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 32930 PLANTS for placing planting soil for plantings.

1.1 DEFINITIONS

A. AAPFCO: Association of American Plant Food Control Officials.

B. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.

This can be amended or unamended soil as indicated.

C. CEC: Cation exchange capacity.

D. Compost: The product resulting from the controlled biological decomposition of

organic material that has been sanitized through the generation of heat and

stabilized to the point that it is beneficial to plant growth.

E. Duff Layer: A surface layer of soil, typical of forested areas, that is composed of

mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus.

F. Imported Soil: Soil that is transported to Project site for use.

G. Layered Soil Assembly: A designed series of planting soils, layered on each other,

that together produce an environment for plant growth.

H. Manufactured Soil: Soil produced by blending soils, sand, stabilized organic soil

amendments, and other materials to produce planting soil.

I. NAPT: North American Proficiency Testing Program. An SSSA program to assist

soil-, plant-, and water-testing laboratories through interlaboratory sample

exchanges and statistical evaluation of analytical data.

J. Organic Matter: The total of organic materials in soil exclusive of undecayed plant

and animal tissues, their partial decomposition products, and the soil biomass; also

called "humus" or "soil organic matter."


PROJECT NAME


Page 2 of 9

K. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has

been modified as specified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce

a soil mixture best for plant growth.

L. RCRA Metals: Hazardous metals identified by the EPA under the Resource

Conservation and Recovery Act.

M. SSSA: Soil Science Society of America.

N. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete,

or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

O. Subsoil: Soil beneath the level of subgrade; soil beneath the topsoil layers of a

naturally occurring soil profile, typified by less than 1 percent organic matter and

few soil organisms.

P. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile. In

undisturbed areas, surface soil is typically called "topsoil"; but in disturbed areas

such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

Q. USCC: U.S. Composting Council.



1. Include recommendations for application and use.

2. Include test data substantiating that products comply with requirements.

3. Include sieve analyses for aggregate materials.

4. Material Certificates: For each type of imported soil and soil mix before

delivery to the site, according to the following:

a. Manufacturer's qualified testing agency's certified analysis of standard

products.

b. Analysis of fertilizers, by a qualified testing agency, made according to

AAPFCO methods for testing and labeling and according to AAPFCO's

SUIP #25.

c. Analysis of nonstandard materials, by a qualified testing agency, made

according to SSSA methods, where applicable.


PROJECT NAME


Page 3 of 9

B. Samples: For each bulk-supplied material, 1-quart volume of each in sealed

containers labeled with content, source, and date obtained. Each Sample shall be

typical of the lot of material to be furnished; provide an accurate representation of

composition, color, and texture.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent, state-operated, or university-

operated laboratory; experienced in soil science, soil testing, and plant nutrition;

with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated; and that

specializes in types of tests to be performed.

1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Soil Analyses: For each unamended soil type, perform testing on

soil samples and furnish soil analysis and a written report containing soil-

amendment and fertilizer recommendations by a qualified testing agency

performing the testing according to "Soil- Sampling Requirements" and "Testing

Requirements" articles.

1. Have testing agency identify and label samples and test reports according to

sample collection and labeling requirements.

1.5 SOIL-SAMPLING REQUIREMENTS

B. Sample Collection and Labeling: Have samples taken and labeled by Contractor

in presence of Owner’s Representative.

1. Number and Location of Samples: Minimum of three representative soil

samples for each soil to be used or amended for landscaping purposes.

2. Procedures and Depth of Samples: As directed by Owner’s Representative.

3. Labeling: Label each sample with the date, location keyed to a site plan or other

location system, visible soil condition, and sampling depth.

1.6 TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Perform tests on soil samples according to requirements in this article.

B. Physical Testing:

1. Soil Texture: Soil-particle, size-distribution analysis by one of the following

methods according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and

Mineralogical Methods":


PROJECT NAME


Page 4 of 9

a. Sieving Method: Report sand-gradation percentages for very coarse, coarse,

medium, fine, and very fine sand; and fragment-gradation (gravel)

percentages for fine, medium, and coarse fragments; according to USDA

sand and fragment sizes.

b. Hydrometer Method: Report percentages of sand, silt, and clay.

2. Total Porosity: Calculate using particle density and bulk density according to

SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical

Methods."

3. Water Retention: According to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-

Physical and Mineralogical Methods."

4. Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity: According to SSSA's "Methods of Soil

Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods"; at 85% compaction,

according to ASTM D 698 (Standard Proctor).

C. Chemical Testing:

1. CEC: Analysis by sodium saturation at pH 7 according to SSSA's "Methods of

Soil Analysis - Part 3- Chemical Methods."

D. Fertility Testing: Soil-fertility analysis, including the following:

1. Percentage of organic matter.

2. CEC, calcium percent of CEC, and magnesium percent of CEC.

3. Soil reaction (acidity/alkalinity pH value).

4. Buffered acidity or alkalinity.

5. Nitrogen ppm.

6. Phosphorous ppm.

7. Potassium ppm.

8. Manganese ppm.

9. Manganese-availability ppm.

10. Zinc ppm.

11. Zinc availability ppm.


PROJECT NAME


Page 5 of 9

12. Copper ppm.

13. Sodium ppm and sodium absorption ratio.

14. Soluble-salts ppm.

15. Presence and quantities of problem materials including salts and metals cited

in the Standard protocol. If such problem materials are present, provide

additional recommendations for corrective action.

16. Other deleterious materials, including their characteristics and content of each.

E. Organic-Matter Content: Analysis using loss-by-ignition method according to

SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 3- Chemical Methods."

F. Recommendations: Based on the test results, state recommendations for soil

treatments and soil amendments to be incorporated to produce satisfactory planting

soil suitable for healthy, viable plants indicated. Include, at a minimum,

recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium fertilization, and for

micronutrients.

1. Fertilizers and Soil Amendment Rates: State recommendations in weight per

1000 sq. ft. for 6-inch depth of soil.

2. Soil Reaction: State the recommended liming rates for raising pH or sulfur for

lowering pH according to the buffered acidity or buffered alkalinity in weight

per 1000 sq. ft. for 6-inch depth of soil.


A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers

showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and

compliance with state and Federal laws if applicable.

B. Bulk Materials:

1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and

pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants.

2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk

materials, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching

adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways.

3. Do not move or handle materials when they are wet or frozen.

4. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers and soil amendments with

appropriate certificates.


PROJECT NAME


Page 6 of 9

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.1 PLANTING SOILS SPECIFIED BY COMPOSITION

A. General: Soil amendments, fertilizers, and rates of application specified in this

article are guidelines that may need revision based on testing laboratory's

recommendations after preconstruction soil analyses are performed.

B. Planting-Soil Type for turf and planting beds: Existing, on-site surface soil, with

the duff layer, if any, retained and stockpiled on-site; modified to produce viable

planting soil. Blend existing, on-site surface soil with soil amendments, per

Owner’s standards.

2.2 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80

percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows:

1. Class: T, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through a No. 8 sieve and a


2. Class: O, with a minimum of 95 percent passing through a No. 8 sieve and a


3. Form: Provide lime in form of ground dolomitic limestone.

B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, and containing a minimum of 90 percent

elemental sulfur, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through a No. 6 sieve and

a maximum of 10 percent passing through a No. 40 sieve.

C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron

and 10 percent sulfur.

D. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.

E. Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90

percent passing through a No. 50 sieve.

F. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, free of toxic materials, and

according to ASTM C 33/C 33M.

2.3 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter produced by

composting feedstock and bearing USCC's "Seal of Testing Assurance."


PROJECT NAME


Page 7 of 9

B. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than

25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic

substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, debris, and material harmful to plant

growth.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Place planting soil and fertilizers according to requirements in other Specification

Sections and as indicated in the drawings.

B. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout,

concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel

fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited

in planting soil.

C. Proceed with placement only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PLACING AND MIXING PLANTING SOIL OVER EXPOSED SUBGRADE

A. General: Apply and mix unamended soil with amendments on-site to produce

required planting soil. Do not apply materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is

frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

B. Subgrade Preparation: Till subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove

stones larger than 1-1/2 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and

other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

1. Apply, add soil amendments, and mix approximately half the thickness of

unamended soil over prepared, loosened subgrade according to "Mixing"

Paragraph below. Mix thoroughly into top 2 inches of subgrade. Spread

remainder of planting soil.

G. Mixing: Spread unamended soil to total depth of 6 inches or as indicated on

Drawings, but not less than required to meet finish grades after mixing with

amendments and natural settlement. Do not spread if soil or subgrade is frozen,


1. Amendments: Apply soil amendments evenly on surface, and thoroughly blend

them with unamended soil to produce planting soil.

H. Compaction: Compact each blended lift of planting soil to 75 to 82 percent of

maximum Standard Proctor density according to ASTM D 698 and tested in-place.


PROJECT NAME


Page 8 of 9

I. Finish Grading: Grade planting soil to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose,


finish grades.

3.3 BLENDING PLANTING SOIL IN PLACE

A. General: Mix amendments with in-place, unamended soil to produce required

planting soil. Do not apply materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is frozen,


B. Preparation: Till unamended, existing soil only in planting areas free of existing

tree roots and outside of critical root zones, to a minimum depth of 6 inches.

Remove stones larger than 1-1/2 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish,

and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

C. Mixing: Apply soil amendments evenly on surface, and thoroughly blend them into

full depth of unamended, in-place soil to produce planting soil.

D. Finish Grading: Grade planting soil to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose,


finish grades.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protection Zone: Identify protection zones according to local standards.

B. Protect areas of in-place soil from additional compaction, disturbance, and

contamination. Prohibit the following practices within these areas except as

required to perform planting operations:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.

2. Parking vehicles or equipment.

3. Vehicle traffic.

4. Foot traffic.

5. Erection of sheds or structures.

6. Impoundment of water.

7. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.


PROJECT NAME


Page 9 of 9

C. If planting soil or subgrade is over compacted, disturbed, or contaminated by

foreign or deleterious materials or liquids, remove the planting soil and

contamination; restore the subgrade as directed by Owner and replace

contaminated planting soil with new planting soil.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Protect areas adjacent to planting-soil preparation and placement areas from

contamination. Keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an

orderly condition.

B. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable

materials, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property unless


1. Dispose of excess subsoil and unsuitable materials on-site where directed by

Owner.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 329213 – HYDROMULCHING


Page 1 of 5

PART 1 GENERAL




Section.



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section specifies the requirements for preparing ground and providing seed,

topsoil, water and fertilizer necessary for hydromulching.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Seed Certification - Certification shall be submitted from the supplier for each type of

seed specified. Certification shall accompany the delivery of the seed and shall indicate

that the seed is in accordance with the requirements of the Texas Seed Law.

B. Fertilizer Certification - Certification shall be submitted from the fertilizer

manufacturer as to the chemical analysis of the fertilizer, a listing of the elements

contained therein and their percentages. Certification shall also indicate that the

fertilizer is in accordance with the requirements of the Texas Fertilizer Law.


A. Seed Delivery - Each variety of seed shall be delivered in separate bags or containers,

labeled to indicate pure live seed, name and type of seed.

B. Fertilizer Delivery - Fertilizer shall be delivered in the manufacturer's unopened

containers, labeled to indicate the manufacturer's name and product identification.

Containers shall be stored protected from ground contact and from the elements.

1.5 GUARANTEE

A. A written guarantee shall be provided guaranteeing to maintain the treated areas in a

healthy, vigorous, undamaged condition for a period of 60 days beginning on the date

of written acceptance of the work.

B. Contractor shall guarantee a full stand of grass, 95% cover with no bare areas in excess

of six inches diameter.

C. Guarantee shall provide for timely filling, leveling and repairing eroded areas,

reseeding areas exhibiting lack of healthy growth, and mowing as necessary to

maintain a neat appearance.



Page 2 of 5

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Type - Turfgrass seed shall be appropriate to season. The seed shall be harvested

within 1 year prior to planting, free of Johnsongrass, field bind weed, dodder seed, and

free of other weed seed to the limits allowable under the Federal Seed Act and

applicable seed laws. The seed shall be extra fancy grade, treated with fungicide, and

shall have a germination and purity that will produce, after allowance for Federal Seed

Act tolerances, a pure live seed content of not less than 85 percent, using the formula:

% Purity x % Germanation = % Pure Live Seed. Seed shall be labeled in accordance

with U.S. Department of Agriculture rules and regulations.

B. Amounts

Item Rate Per 1000 Sq. Ft.

Seed As per season, see below

Fertilizer 7 lbs.

Water As needed

Real Virgin Wood Minimum 50 lbs. to achieve

Fiber Mulch Covering of seeded area

C. Spring/Summer Planting (April 15 to Sept. 15)

1. Hulled Bermuda - 2 lbs./1000 Sq. Ft.

D. Fall/Winter Planting (September 15 to April 15)

1. Winter Rye - 10 lbs./1000 Sq. Ft.

2. If Rye grass is installed, the Contractor shall reseed with Bermuda in the spring

(May 1) after removing remaining Rye grass.

E. Fertilize as per paragraph B.

2.2 TOPSOIL

A. Topsoil shall be friable clay loam surface soil reasonably free of clay lumps, stones,

weeds, roots and other objectionable material, a product of on site operations.

2.3 FIRE ANT INSECTICIDE



Page 3 of 5

A. Spot treat fire ant insecticide in the entire area of seeding as Per Section 32 90 00 -

Planting.

2.4 FERTILIZER FOR FERTILIZING

A. (Tank Mix) shall be Magestic Gro (18-5-9) as per section 32 90 00 – Planting, grade,

pelleted, uniform in composition, free flowing, and suitable for application with

approved equipment. The fertilizer shall be delivered to the site in bags or other

convenient containers, each fully labeled, conforming to the applicable State fertilizer

laws, and bearing the name or trademark and warranty of the producer.

2.5 WOOD CELLULOSE FIBER MULCH

A. Wood cellulose fiber mulch, for use with the hydraulic application of grass seed and

fertilizer, shall consist of specially prepared wood cellulose fiber. It shall be processed

in such a manner that it will not contain germination or growth inhibiting factors. It

shall be dyed an appropriate color to allow visual metering of its application. The wood

cellulose fibers shall have the property of becoming evenly dispersed and suspended

when agitated in water. When sprayed uniformly on the surface of the soil, the fibers

shall form a blotter-like groundcover that readily absorbs water and allows infiltration

to the underlying soil. Weight specifications from suppliers for all applications shall

refer only to air-dry weight of the fiber, a standard equivalent to 19 percent moisture.

The mulch material shall be supplied in packages having a gross weight not in excess

of 100 pounds and be marked by the manufacturer to show the dry weight content.

Suppliers shall be prepared to certify that laboratory and field-testing of their product

has been accomplished and that it meets all of the foregoing requirements.

2.6 SLURRY MIX COMPONENTS PER ACRE

A. Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch - 2,000 pounds

B. Grass Seed - As Specified

C. Fertilizer (18-5-9) - As Specified

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTIONS

A. Surfaces indicated to be seeded shall be inspected to verify that all preparatory work in

the area has been completed. Seeding shall not start until all preparatory work has been

completed. Requests for inspections shall be made at least two days prior to anticipated

date of inspection.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. All areas to receive seed shall be stripped and/or treated with a contact herbicide prior

to seeding as necessary to remove weeds, unless otherwise noted on drawings.



Page 4 of 5

B. Areas to receive seeding shall be loosened by manual or mechanical means to a depth

of 1 1/2 inches, leveled and fine graded by hand raking. All stones (1" in diameter and

larger in the top 2" of soil), tree stumps, brush, roots, vegetation, rubbish, and other

foreign matter shall be removed from the site. No foreign matter may be buried on the

site. All tree stumps must be removed to a depth of two (2) feet below finish subgrade.

C. Weather Limitations – Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted

weather conditions permit.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Special Mulching Equipment and Procedures: Hydraulic equipment used for the

application of fertilizer, seed, and slurry of prepared wood fiber mulch shall have a

built-in agitation system with an operating capacity sufficient to agitate, suspend, and

homogeneously mix a slurry containing up to forty (40) pounds of fiber plus a

combined total of seventy (70) pounds of fertilizer solids for each one hundred (100)

gallons of water. The slurry distribution lines shall be large enough to prevent

stoppage. The discharge line shall be equipped with a set of hydraulic spray nozzles

that provide even distribution of the slurry on the slopes to be seeded. The slurry tank

shall have a minimum capacity of eight hundred (800) gallons and shall be mounted

on a traveling unit which may be either self-propelled or drawn with a separate unit

which will place the slurry tank and spray nozzles within sufficient proximity to the

areas to be seeded so as to provide uniform distribution without waste. The Owner's

Representative may authorize equipment with smaller tank capacity provided that the

equipment has the necessary agitation system and sufficient pump capacity to spray the

slurry in a uniform coat.

B. Mixing: Care shall be taken that the slurry preparation takes place on the site of the

work. Spraying shall commence immediately when the tank is full.

C. Operators of hydro mulching equipment shall be thoroughly experienced in this type

of application. Apply specified slurry mix in a motion to form a uniform mat at

specified rate. The operator shall spray the area with a uniform, visible coat by using

the green color of the wood pulp as a guide. Keep hydro mulch within areas designated

and keep from contact with other plant material. Slurry mixture, which has not been

applied within four (4) hours of mixing, shall not be used and shall be removed from

the site.

D. After installation, the Contractor shall not operate any equipment over the covered area.

Immediately after application, thoroughly wash off any plant material, planting areas,

or paved areas not intended to receive slurry mix. Keep all paved and planting areas

clean during maintenance operations.

E. Seeded Areas: If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, unplanted skips and areas

are noted after hydro mulching, the Contractor shall be required to seed the planted

areas with the grasses that were to have been planted at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.4 MAINTENANCE OF HYDROSEEDED AREAS



Page 5 of 5

A. After installation, hydroseeded areas shall be watered in an amount and as often as

necessary to keep seed beds moistened to their full depth for a period of two weeks.

B. After initial two weeks of watering, seeded areas shall be watered and maintained to

insure a healthy, vigorous growth throughout the installation period and the landscape

maintenance period.

3.5 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by lawn work from paved areas.

3.6 MAINTENANCE

A. Seeded areas shall be maintained in good condition throughout the duration of the

project and the maintenance period in accordance with the maintenance described in

Section 32 91 20.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 329300- PLANTS Government of the Virgin Islands, Department of Public Works

Page 1 of 12

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS AND STANDARDS



Section.



1. Section 312000 - Earth Moving.

2. ANSI: American National Standards Institute

a. Z60.1: Nursery Stock

3. Association of Official Agriculture Chemists

4. FS: Federal Specifications and Standards

a. Q-P-166E: Peat, Moss; Peat, Humus; and Peat, Reed-Sedge

5. NBS: National Bureau of Standards

a. PS23: Perlite Product Standard

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies the requirements for providing planting materials and their

installation as indicated and scheduled. For grass installation refer to Section 32 92 23

– Sodding, and Section 32 92 13 – Hydromulching. For maintenance, refer to Section

32 91 20 – Exterior Landscape Maintenance.


A. Trees, shrubs, plants and groundcover.

B. Topsoil and soil amendments.

C. Initial maintenance of planting materials.

D. Pruning and relocation of existing plant materials.

1.4 SUBMITTALS




Page 2 of 12




4. Manufacturer's or vendor's certified analysis of soil amendments.

5. Fertilizer certification as to the chemical analysis of the fertilizer, a listing of

the elements contained therein and their percentages

C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data, including maintenance schedule. Submit

typewritten instructions, including manufacturer's recommendations and instructions

recommending procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of planting

work. Submit instructions prior to expiration of Contractor's required maintenance

period.

D. Notices: Submit 48-hour written notice prior to turnover to Owner for watering and

maintenance.

E. Warranty: Warrant trees and shrubs for a period of one year after date of Substantial

Completion, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth and except for

defects resulting from neglect by Owner, abuse by others, or natural phenomena.

Replace unsatisfactory plant material at end of warranty period at no additional expense

to the Owner. One replacement is required.

F. Work Schedule: Contractor shall submit a work schedule for all planting work prior

to purchase and installation of plant material.

G. Submittals: Submit samples of topsoil, mulch and prepared backfill mix.

H. Prepare an ET based irrigation schedule for all trees. This irrigation schedule shall

include the amount of water to be applied to the trees and when the application is to be

applied. This data can be provided in ET, precipitation rates, inches per hour, or inches

per month.

I. Prepare an ET based irrigation schedule for all shrubs. This irrigation schedule shall

include the amount of water to be applied to the shrubs and when the application is to

be applied. This data can be provided in ET, precipitation rates, inches per hour, or

inches per month.

J. Prepare an ET based irrigation schedule for all turf grass. This irrigation schedule shall

include the amount of water to be applied to the turf grass and when the application is

to be applied. This data can be provided in ET, precipitation rates, inches per hour, or

inches per month.



Page 3 of 12

A. Installer Qualifications: Installation of planting work shall be performed by a single

firm specializing in landscape and planting work. Contractor shall be licensed by the

Texas Association of Nurserymen, shall possess an agricultural certificate, shall be a

licensed pest applicator, and shall have not less than 5 years of experience in this type

of work.

1. Trees, Shrubs, and Groundcovers:

a. Provide plants of quantity, size, genus, species and variety shown and

scheduled for planting work and complying with recommendations and

requirements of ANSI Z60.1 "American Standard for Nursery Stock."

Provide healthy, vigorous stock, grown in recognized nursery in accordance

with good horticultural practice and free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae and

defects such as knots, sunscald, injuries, abrasions, or disfigurement.

b. Label each plant with securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible

designation of botanical and common name.

B. Compliance: Ship planting materials with Certificates of Inspection as required by

governing authorities. Comply with all applicable local and federal requirements

regarding materials, methods of work, and disposal of excess and waste materials.

C. Substitutions: Do not make substitutions unless approved in writing by Owner. If

specified planting material is not obtainable, submit proof of non-availability to Owner

together with proposal for use of equivalent material. Contractor shall submit proposal

in a timely manner as to not impact project completion or installation of other work.

D. Analysis and Standards: All packaged products shall be delivered in original

manufacturer's sealed containers. For unpackaged materials, submit analysis by

recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established by the Association

of Official Agriculture Chemists, wherever applicable. Testing: Laboratory testing for

suitable soil amendments and fertilizer.

E. Inspection: Notify Owner at least 2 weeks prior to installation, of location where

materials that have been selected for planting may be inspected, either at place of

growth or the site prior to planting. Plant material will be inspected for compliance

with requirements for genus, species, variety, size and quality. Owner retains right to

further inspect trees for size and conditions of balls and root systems, insects, injuries

and latent defects, and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during

progress of work. Contractor shall remove rejected trees immediately from site and

replace with specified materials. Plant material not installed in accordance with

Contract Documents will be rejected.





Page 4 of 12

A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in fully labeled original containers

showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from

deterioration during delivery, and while stored at site.

B. Plants

1. Do not drop stock during delivery.

2. Materials shall not be pruned prior to installation unless otherwise approved by

Owner in writing. Do not bend or bind-tie trees and shrubs in such a manner

as to damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective

covering during delivery.

3. Deliver plants after preparation for planting has been completed and plant

immediately. If planting is delayed more than 7 hours after delivery, set plants

in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage. Keep roots moist by

covering with mulch, burlap or other acceptable means of retaining moisture,

and water as needed.

4. Do not remove container grown stock from containers before time of planting

and water immediately after delivery and prior to planting.


A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within

limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products

under environmental conditions outside supplier's recommended limits.

B. Proceed with and complete planting work in a timely manner, working within seasonal

limitations for each kind of planting work required.

1.9 SEQUENCING

A. Work Scheduling: Proceed with and complete planting work in a timely manner,

working within seasonal limitations for each kind of planting work required.

B. Planting Time:

1. Correlate planting with specified maintenance periods to provide maintenance

from date of Substantial Completion. Ensure that products of this section are

supplied to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction

progress.

2. Plant trees, shrubs and groundcover after final grades are established and prior

to planting of lawns, unless otherwise directed by Owner in writing. If planting

occurs after lawn work, protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage to lawns

resulting from planting operations.


Page 5 of 12

C. Utilities: Refer to engineering drawings and coordinate with Utility Contractor for

location of utilities. Contractor shall be responsible for damage to existing utilities and

structures. Contractor shall contact the Texas One call system and shall provide a copy

of the transmittal number to the Owner.

D. Security: The Owner will not assume any responsibility for security of any materials,

equipment, etc. during construction of the project until project acceptance.

E. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as

rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions beyond the scope of this contract, or

obstructions, notify Owner of such conditions, immediately and before planting.

F. Pollution Control: Control dust caused by planting operations. Dampen surfaces as

necessary. Comply with pollution control regulations of governing authorities.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Fertilizer

1. For Planting areas shall be a commercial all organic, all-natural biological

fertilizer, which includes humates, rock minerals, bio-inoculants and bio-

stimulants. Fertilizer shall be granular, uniform in composition, free flowing,

and suitable for application with approved equipment. Fertilizer which has

been exposed to high humidity and moisture, has become caked or otherwise

damaged making it unsuitable for use, will not be acceptable. Fertilizer shall

be Microlife Ultimate (8-4-6) as manufactured by San Jacinto Environmental

Supply, 2221 A West 34th Street, Houston, TX 77018, or approved equal.

Broadcast fertilizer at the rate of 40 lbs. fertilizer per 1000 square feet and mix

to 4”-6” depth into prepared planting soil. Contractor shall top-dress with an

additional application of the same fertilizer at the end of the maintenance

period, approximately 60 days after planting at 1/2 the manufacturer’s

recommend rate (20 lbs. fertilizer per 1000 square feet).

2. Additional Microlife Ultimate fertilizer shall be evenly dispersed through soil

in planting pits at the following rate:

Material No. of OZ. Per Planting Pit

15 gallon 3

30 gallon 6


Page 6 of 12

65 gallon 12

100 gallon 18

200 gallon 36


Page 7 of 12

3. Fertilizer for turf areas shall be Majestic Gro (18-5-9) as manufactured by San

Jacinto Environmental Supply or approved equal commercial blend of high

quality, low salt synthetic fertilizer, 50% slow-release, with Houactinite (as

carrier), 3% Fe, 8% Sulfur, 1% Mg and Micronutrients including Zinc, Boron,

Copper, Molybdenum and Potassium Sulfate. Fertilizer shall be free flowing

and suitable for application with approved equipment. Fertilizer which has

been exposed to high humidity and moisture, has become caked or otherwise

damaged making it unsuitable for use will not be acceptable. Fertilizer shall be

applied at the rate of one 50 lb. bag per 7500 square feet to all turf areas and

raked into the topsoil prior to application of sod. For hydromulched areas,

Majestic Gro fertilizer shall be mixed in the tank at the rate specified in Section

02921 – Hydromulch. Contractor shall top-dress all sod and hydromulch areas

with an additional application of Majestic Gro fertilizer approximately 60 days

after planting, at half the manufacturer’s recommended rate (one 50 lb. bag per

15,000 square feet). Apply preventative fire-ant treatment over all sod and

hydromulch areas during the 60-day maintenance period.

B. Sharp Sand: Sand shall be thoroughly washed, coarse grade sharp, construction or

brick sand, free of clay balls, weeds, and grass. So-called cushion sand, blow sand, or

creek silt is not acceptable for substitution where sharp sand is specified.

C. Herbicide

1. Apply pre-emergent herbicide over all planting areas prior to spreading mulch

at the rate of 7 lbs. per 1000 square feet.

2. If necessary, contact herbicide shall be Roundup by Monsanto, 800 N.

Lindbergh, St. Louis, MO 63167, 314-694-1000, or approved equal. Apply

Roundup only if necessary and if approved by Owner or Owner’s

representative. Do not exceed manufacturer’s recommended rate of

application.

D. Mulch for top dressing: Organic mulch free from deleterious materials and suitable for

top dressing of trees, shrubs or plants. Mulch shall be composted, well-rotted, blended

double-shredded hardwood mulch (70%) and composted pine bark mulch (30%), black

or dark brown in color. Mulch pieces shall not exceed 2” in any dimension. No dyes,

mushroom compost or other additives shall be used to artificially enhance the

appearance of the level of composting.

E. Biological Inoculant: MicroGro Granular as manufactured by San Jacinto

Environmental Supply, or approved equal multi-purpose biological inoculant with

humates, select sugars and bio-stimulants. Apply to all seasonal, perennial and

groundcover areas at the rate of 10 lbs. per 1000 square feet.


Page 8 of 12

F. Compost for bed prep/soil backfill mix: Compost must be made from organic

materials. Compost must contain less than 1% by dry weight of inert contaminants

such as glass, plastic, rocks, etc. Industrial or hazardous waste cannot be used in the

production of the compost (i.e. boiler ash, rice hull ash, etc.). Compost shall be free of

fillers such as rice hulls or pine bark. Compost shall not exceed the heavy metal limits

as specified in the US EPA Part 503 Regulations.

1. Contractor shall furnish copies of manufacturer’s literature, certifications,

sources, samples, or laboratory analytical data for the following items:

Certificates of inspection required for transportation shall accompany each

shipment of materials. Provide certificates to Owner.

G. Testing:

1. If herbicide contamination is suspected, then a radish/rye-grass growth trial

must be performed. For delivered material, test one grab sample for each fifty

(50) cubic yards of bulk material delivered to the site. Testing will be at the

expense of Contractor. Deviations greater than plus or minus twenty (20%)

percent from control data may be grounds for rejection of mixes tested. Non-

conforming materials shall not be used and shall be removed from the site.

H. Biological, physical and chemical specifications:

I. Biological Specifications: Stability/Maturity (Carbon Dioxide Evolution Rate) Shall

be less than 8 mg CO2-C per g OM (organic matter) per day and greater than 6.0 on

the SolvitaTM Compost Maturity Test.

1. Biological components: Bacteria (active) - Minimum of 15-25 micrograms per

gram of compost; Bacteria (total) - minimum of 150 micrograms per gram of

compost; Fungus (active) - minimum of 15-25 micrograms per gram of

compost; Fungus (total) - minimum of 150 micrograms per gram of compost;

Fungus (hyphal diameter) – should be greater than 1 mm; Protozoa: flagellates

- 8,000 or higher per gram of compost; amoebae - 8,000 or higher per gram of

compost; ciliates - 50-100 or higher per gram of compost; Root Feeding

Nematodes should not be present (beneficial nematodes are a benefit).

J. PHYSICAL Specifications: Moisture Content - 30-60%, wet weight basis; Moisture

Holding Capacity - 75-200% of dry weight; Organic Matter Content - 30-70% (40-

50% preferred), dry weight basis; Particle Size: Standard Grade Compost - 100%

passing through a 1” rectangular mesh screen or smaller; Fine Grade Compost - 100%

passing through a 3/8” rectangular mesh screen or smaller; Bulk Density - 700-1,200

(800-1,000 preferred), pounds per cubic yard; Electrical Conductivity (Soluble Salt

Concentration) - 10 dS/m (mmhos/cm.) maximum, (2.0-3.6 or less preferred).


Page 9 of 12

K. CHEMICAL Specifications: pH 6.0-8.5; Total Salinity-2,000 ppm or lower; Chemical

components (H2O extraction): Nitrogen-10 ppm or higher, Phosphorus-100 ppm or

higher, Potassium- 400 ppm or higher, Calcium-2000 ppm or higher, Magnesium-200

ppm or higher, Zinc-6 ppm or higher, Iron-25 ppm or higher, Manganese - 8 ppm or

higher, Copper-1 ppm or higher, Sodium-1000 ppm or less, Sulfur-10 ppm or higher,

Boron-1 ppm or higher.

L. Root Stimulator: Root stimulator shall be Super Seaweed as manufactured by San

Jacinto Environmental Supply or approved equal.

M. Soil Acidifier: 90% Sulfur.

N. Fire Ant Prevention: Award as manufactured by Syngenta, 1800 Concord Pike,

Wilmington, DE 19850 or Amdro as manufactured by Ambrands, 2255 Cumberland

Parkway Building 600-B, Atlanta, GA, 30339, or approved equal. Preventative fire

ant control shall be broadcast over all landscaped area at manufacturer’s recommended

rate of 1 ½ lbs. per acre.

O. Insecticide: No insecticide shall be applied on this site without the permission of the

Owner.

P. Prepared Planting Backfill Mix: Shall be 33% topsoil, 33% sharp sand, and 33%

organic compost or approved commercially available soil mix.

Q. Topsoil

1. Provide topsoil which is a fertile, friable, natural loam or sandy loam, surface

soil, free of subsoil, clay lumps, brush, weeds and other litter, and free of roots,

stumps, stones larger than 2 inches in any dimension and other extraneous or

toxic matter harmful to plant growth.

2. Obtain topsoil only from naturally, well-drained sites where topsoil occurs in a

depth of not less than 4 inches. Topsoil shall not be collected from sites that

are infected with growth of, or the reproductive parts of noxious weeds,

especially nut grass. Topsoil shall not be stripped, collected or deposited while

wet. Topsoil shall not be excessively acid or alkaline or contain toxic

substances which may be harmful to plant growth. Topsoil shall be without

admixture of subsoil.

R. Steel Edging: Edging shall be Ryerson steel or approved equal, 4” x 3/16” thick green

in color.

S. Filter Fabric – Filter fabric shall be non-woven filter bond. Soil separator as

manufactured by DeWitt Co. with a minimum permeability rate of 219 gals./SF/minute

or approved equal.


Page 10 of 12

T. Plant Materials: Provide specimen quality plant material as described in Construction

Documents. Each individual species of plant material shall be obtained and provided

from a single source.

U. Wood Headers and Edging: All heart redwood or pressure treated southern yellow pine.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Owner’s

Representative of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PLANTING BEDS

A. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving

the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

1. Strip existing vegetation and 1” soil to remove root layer. Excavate entire

planting beds 4” below finished grade.

2. Dispose of soil removed from planting beds excavations. Do not mix with

planting soil or use as backfill.

B. Till bottom of planter 2”-4” leaving bottom of planter un-compacted. Backfill with

minimum 8” (after settling) of prepared soil backfill mix. Prepare topsoil by mixing

fertilizer with loam. Install soil mix to a depth of 18 inches in plant beds.

C. Apply fertilizer and evenly distribute through top 6” of soil. For seasonal, groundcover

and perennial areas, apply biological inoculants and evenly distribute through soil.

3.3 TREES AND SHRUBS

A. Install materials in accordance with approved submittals. Install landscape work in

proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate

with work of other sections.

B. Excavate as required for trees and shrubs.

C. Apply fertilizer at a rate of 2 pounds of actual nitrogen per 1000 sq. ft. for plant beds

and 2 pounds per inch of trunk for tree pits.

D. Set stock on layer of planting soil mixture, plumb and slightly above adjacent finished

planting grades. Place additional backfill mix around base and sides of ball and work

each layer to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air pockets. Layer and distribute

additional fertilizer in planting hole at specified rate. Water entire bed thoroughly,

adjusting plant if settling occurs.


Page 11 of 12

E. Treat entire areas of planting and tree root balls with:

1. Broadcast application of pre-emergent herbicide at manufacturer's

recommended rate in all planting areas (except seasonal beds) prior to applying

mulch.

2. Broadcast application of fire ant insecticide at manufacturer's recommended

rate in all planting areas, after mulching.

3. Mulching: Immediately after planting has been completed, mulch tree wells and

plant beds. Provide not less than 2” thickness of composted hardwood & pine

bark mulch in planting beds and 3” thickness at all trees.

F. Provide maintenance and watering until turnover to Owner for maintenance and

watering. Replace damaged materials and dead or unhealthy plants prior to turnover to

Owner.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. During planting work, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition.

Sweep site and remove trash at end of each workday as necessary.

B. Protect planting work and materials from damage due to planting operations,

operations by other contractors and trades and trespassers. Maintain protection during

installation periods. Treat, repair or replace damaged planting work as directed by

Owner.

C. Stockpile, haul from site, and legally dispose of waste materials and debris.

Accumulation will not be permitted. Maintain haul and disposal routes clear, clean,

and free of debris. On-site burning of combustible cleared materials will not be

permitted.

D. Upon completion of work, clean areas within Contract limits, remove tools, supplies

and equipment. Wash down curbs and pavement areas. Scrub curbs and walks as

necessary to insure a clean surface. Provide site clean and free of materials and suitable

for use as intended.

3.5 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE

A. When planting work is completed and at the completion of maintenance period, Owner

will inspect to determine acceptability.

B. When inspected planting work does not comply with the Contract Document

requirements, replace rejected work and continue specified maintenance until re-

inspected by Owner and found to be acceptable. Contractor shall remove rejected

plants and materials promptly from site.


Page 12 of 12

C. Contractor shall correctly maintain all planting during the installation process and

throughout the landscaping maintenance service period as specified in Section 32 91

20 - Exterior Landscape Maintenance.

D. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

PROJECT MANUAL - BidNet

Documents

Transcript of PROJECT MANUAL - BidNet